Tektronix_Catalog_1987 Tektronix Catalog 1987

User Manual: Tektronix_Catalog_1987

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 508

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

TEK PRODUCTS 1987

"R!ktronix~
COMMITTED TO EXCEllENCE

DONALD R. BRIDGE
Measu rerr ent Products Sales Engineer
Instrument Group
Tektronix, Inc.
7830 Freeway Circle
Middleburg Heights, OH 44130
Phone : 216-243-8500
National Marketing Center: 800-426-2200

~ronix~

Cover

The cover reflects Tektronix' continuing commitment to global customer understanding and to worldwide customer-service
excellence.
First 40 Years

Tektronix' customer base and product lines have expanded substantially since we delivered our first oscilloscope to the University
of Oregon Medical School in 1947. After 40 years, Tektronix remains committed to engineering excellence, investing a significant
portion of our profits into research and development. You will see
the results of innovation in our new product offerings, more than
90 in this catalog, all planned to make you more productive. The
new products are identified by a bold color thumb tab on the upper page corner.
Productivity

Productivity is a key word at Tektronix. We've prioritized productivity within our own plants and organizations. You benefit from increased value in Tek products (discussed further on the blue
pages , 49, 83, 136, and 181). Your design and/or manufacturing
organizations can now access our state-of-the-art components and
custom-design resources directly. See page 28.
You will also note an increased number of systems and systemcompatible products in this catalog. A convenient "GPIB" thumb
tab marks those pages listing products designed to work together
over the IEEE-488 bus. The synergism of these products allows
you to increase productivity, consistency, and accuracy.

WARRANTY-PLUS Service Options
Warranty-Plus Service Options are an excellent investment in extended service coverage . All options are priced lower than a standard support agreement, receive product quantity discounts, and
cover any product equipment options at no additional cost .
Warranty-Plus Service Plans are available only at time of product
purchase .

You can receive additional information on Tek products and service plans by calling your nearest Tektronix Sales Office (listed on
pages 502-504).
Each Tek sales engineer specializes in the products and applications for a major area of customer activity: computer graphics, digital design and test , communications , and general test and
measurement.

Tektronix Contact
Business Card

CONTENTS
INDEXES

GPIB PRODUCTS REFERENCE

SOFTWARE SUMMARY

COMPONENT DESIGN & PRODUCTION SERVICES

DISPLAY PRODUCTS

DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY REFERENCE

WORKSTATION FURNITURE

CUSTOMER SERVICE INFORMATION
POWER SOURCE CONSIDERATIONS
TRAINING
SALES AND SERVICE OFFICES

COLOR GRAPHICS TERMINALS/WORKSTATIONS

493
501
195, 4911
502

INTELLIGENT GRAPHICS WORKSTATION

GRAPHICS APPLICATIONS SYSTEMS/SOFTWARE

ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE SYSTEMS

COLOR GRAPHICS OUTPUT SYSTEMS

HARD COPY UNITS/GRAPHICS TABLETS

GRAPHIC INPUT WORKSTATION

SUPPLIES

711

COMPUTER·AIDED ENGINEERING

COMPUTER· AIDED SOFTWARE ENGINEERING

LOGIC ANALYZER PRODUCTS

105

SEMICONDUCTOR TEST SYSTEMS

128

COMPUTER·BASED INSTRUMENTATION

133

TELEVISION PRODUCTS

137

COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK ANALYZERS

151

SPECTRUM ANALYZER PRODUCTS

155

LABORATORY OSCILLOSCOPES

1112

PORTABLE OSCILLOSCOPES

275

AUTOMATED TEST SYSTEMS INSTRUMENTS

323

DIGITIZERS/SOFTWARE/DIGITIZING CAMERA SYSTEM

324

SIGNAL ROUTING INSTRUMENTS

3110

ACQUISITION/PROCESSING PACKAGES

373

CURVE TRACERS

378

TM 5000 GPIB PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS

390

TM 500 GENERAL PURPOSE PRODUCTS

404

CAMERAS, PHOTOMETER/RADIOMETER

440

CARTS, PROBES, ACCESSORIES

4110

TEK

FUNCTIONAL
INDEX

A
A to 0 Converter ................................ TM S Series ............ .............. 233-238
5000 Series ........ ... ...............
264
Portables ..............................
316
Television ................................................Portables .............................. 316,278,
326
TM 500 ....................................................................................................
428
Waveform Processing ........................... 11txX> Series, MP Packages 197,373
Word Recognizer ...................................Portables .. ..... ..... ... ........ .... ... 278,326
x-v Plotting ............................................7txX> Series .......................... 221 -238
5000 Series .......................... 261 ,264,
267
Portables .............................. 311,300
TM 500 Series ......................
428

P
PAL and PAL-M Generators ........................................................... .
Panel Plug-In Chassis, Blank ......................................................... .
Patch Cords, Leads ...........................................................................
Pattern Generator Probes/Modules ......................................... ..... ..
PCB WorkSystem ...............................Software .............................. .
Performance Analysis
(Software and Hardware) ...................... .. ........................ ....... ... ... .. ..
Period, Pulse, Width and Time
Measurements, Automatic .............. 11txX> Series, Portables ......

144
438

488
105
84
118

197,
278,326
Photometer/Radiometer, Digital .....................................................
455
Plsstlc Products .................................................................................
31
Plotter ..................................................................... ............................ ...
Plug-Ins

454

General Purpose Instruments ...............TM 5000 Series .................... 390-403
TM 500 Series ...................... 404-438
Oscilloscope .......................................... 11txX>, 7txX> Series ..............
212,
239-260
262,
5000 Series ..........................
265-266
269-274
Plug-In Carrying Cases ............................................................. .. ..... 180,492
Plug-In Chassis, Blank Panel .......... .................................. ........ ......
438
Plug-In Storage Cabinets .................. ............................ .. .... .............
491
Plug-In Units

Ac RMS Digital Voltmeter ..................... Portables ..............................
TM5000 ................................
TM 500 ..................................
Calibration Generators .......................... TM 500 Series ......................
Current Probe Amplifier ........................ TM 500 Series ......................
Curve Tracers ........................................................................................
Delayed Sweep Sampler ......................7txX> ......................................
Delaying Time Bases ............................7txX> Series ..........................
5000 Series ..........................
Differential Amplifiers ............................7txX> Series ..........................
5000 Series ..........................
TM 500 Series ...... .. ........ ......
Differential Comparator Amplifier ........ 11txX>, 7txX> Series ..............
5000 Series .......... ................
Digital Counters .....................................7txX> Series ..........................
TM 5000 Series .............. ......
TM 500 Series ......................
Digital Delay ...........................................TM 500 Series ......................
Digital Multimeters ................................. 7txX> Series ..........................
TM 5000 Series ....................
TM 500 Series ......................
Digital Prescaler .....................................TM 5000 Series ....................
TM 500 Series ......................
Digitizer Time Bases .............................7txX> Series ..........................
5000 Series .. ........................
Dual Differential Amplifier ..................... 5000 Series ..........................
Dual Time Base (Mixed Sweep) .......... 7txX> Series ..........................
5000 Series ..........................
Dual Trace Amplifiers ............................ 11txX>, 7txX> Series ..............
5000 Series
7txX> Series ..........................
Dual Trace Differential ..........................5000 Series .... .. ............ ........
Four Trace Amplifier .. ............................ 11txX>, 5000 Series ..............
Logic Triggered Vertical Amplifier ....... 7txX> Series .. ........................

294
396
410
431-438
426,483
378
255
245,248
266,255
243
272
427
212,243
272
251
390
405
418
250
396
410
395
408
348
352
273
245,250
274
212,241
266,271
255
273
212,271
242

Operational Amplifier ............................TM 500 Series ......................
427
Oscillators ...............................................TM 5000 Series ....................
400
TM 500 Series ...................... 425,428,
434
OscillOSCOpes .........................................7txX> Series .......................... 216-238
5000 Series .......................... 261-274
TM 500 Series ................ ...... 425,428
Power Supplies
to 20 V Variable ..............................TM 5000 Series ....................
398
TM 500 Series ................ ......
422
for Plug-In Units .................................TM 5000 Series ....................
402
TM 500 Series ............ ..........
435
Programmable ...................................TM 5000 Series ....................
398
Programmable ...................................... .7txX> Series ...................... .... 336,346,

348,
390-403
Programmable Distortion Analyzer ......TM 5000 Series ....................
400
Ramp Generator ....................................TM 500 Series ...................... 414-417
Rate/Ramp Generator ...........................TM 500 Series ......................
417
RF Sweep Generator ............................TM 500 Series ......................
434
Sampling ................................................7txX> Series .......................... 253-260
Sampling Heads ....................................7txX> Series .......................... 258-260
Single Time Bases ................................. 7txX> Series .......................... 245,248,
257
5000 Series .......................... 274,352
Single Trace Amplifier ........................... 11 txX>, 7txX> Series .............. 212,256
240-244,
5000 Series .......................... 271-273
Spectrum Analyzers ..............................7txX> Series .......................... 174-ln ,
252
TOR .. ....................................................... 7txX> Series .............. ... .. ...... .
256
Tracking Generators ............................................................................. .
178
Universal CounterlTimers ..................... 7txX> Series ........................ ..
251
Polarized Viewers ...................................... ... ................................... ..
Portable Products

492

Acquisition/Processing
Measurement Package .......................... .... ....................... ...................
376
Data Communication Analyzers ...........................................................
153
Rber Optic Cable Testers .....................................................................
151
Logic Analyzers .....................................................................................
105
Metallic Cable Testers ...........................................................................
154
Oscilloscopes ....... ..................................................................................
275
w/Counter/TimerlTrigger ...... ......................................... ....... .............
278
w/DMM, Temp .................................................................................... 278,316
Oscilloscope Power Supply .................................... ..............................
306
Spectrum Analyzer ................................2750,490 Series ................... 155-169
Power Divider, GR and SMA (3mm)................................................
489
Power Supplies

o to 20 V Variable ..................................TM 500 Series

...................... 398,422
Accessory ........... ...................................................................................
475
Battery .................................. ..................................................................
306
for Plug-In Units .....................................TM 5000 Series ....................
372
TM 500 Series .............. ........
437
Portable Oscilloscope .................................. .................................... ... ..
306
Programmable .......................................TM 5000 Series ....................
398
Prescaler, Digital ................................TM 5000, TM 500 Series ..... 395,408
Printed Circuit

Design System ....................................................................................... .
Design and Manufacturing ........................ ...........................................

29
29

Probes

Accessories ...........................................................................................
486
Active ...................................................................................................... 464,474
Adaptors ............................ ...... .. .................................................... .........
489
Amplifiers, Current .................................TM 500 Series ...................... 426,483
Chart, Recommended ................................................ .. ......................... 464-465
Counter ............ ....................................................................................... 408,469
Current ....... .. .......... .. .............................................. ............ ..................... 426,464,
481

g~::r:~t:isiti~~ .. :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: :::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::: 2~~

478
Digital Photometer/Radiometer ............................... ... .. .... .. ........ .. ........ 455-459
Environmental ............................................................................... ... .. .... 464,476
FET and 50 Ohm ................................................................................... 464,475

TEK

FUNCTIONAL
INDEX

Ground Leads ...... ... ... ... ..................................... ....................................
489
Grounding Adaptors .................... ..................... .............. ......................
489
High Current ..................................................................................... .. ... 426,483
High Voltage ................... .......... .. ...... ........ ..................... ................... ..... 413,464,
4n,478
Logic ....................................................................................................... 125-127
476
Modular ........................................... ........................................................ 464,468
Micro .......................................................................................................
485
Pattern Generator ......................................... ................................. .... .... 125-127
Recommendations ........................................ ....................................... . 464-466
RF ............................................ ... ..... ... ........ .. ... .... .... ... ......................... .... 413,476
Sampling .. ... .. ............................................... .. ........................................
470
Temperature ......... .............................. .................................................... 413,476
Tips .........................................................................................................
486
Voltage .... ............ ........... .................................. .. .. .. ...................... ..........
464
Word Recognizer ................................................................................... 125-127,
329
Programmable Instrumentation

(see GPIB Products)
492
260
TM 500 Series ...................... 419-421

Protective Covers ...... .................. ......................................................
Pulse Generators ...... ..... ....................7CXX> Series ..........................

Rack Adaptors ............... .....................................................................
491
Rackmount Model Instrument
Carts .................................................................................. ... ................. 460-462
Rackmount Oscilloscopes ...............7CXX> Series .......................... 222-226,

229-232,
236-238
5000 Series .......................... 264,267
Portables .............................. 278, 289
293. 298
TM 5000 Series ....................
402
TM 500 Series ...................... 428,435
Ramp Generstors ............................... TM 500 Series ......................
414
Raster Scan Display Units ................ ...............................................
40
Raster Scan/Video Hard Copy Units ........ .............. ..........................
75
Rasterlzer ............................................ .................................................
73
Rate/Ramp Generators ..................... TM 500 Series ......................
417
RC Oscillator .......................................TM 500 Series ......................
434
Readout OSCillOSCOpes, CRT ........ .. 11CXX>, 7CXX> Series ........ .... ..
197,
221 -238
7CXX> Series, Digitizers .........
338
5000 Series .......................... 264,269
Portables .............................. 278,334
Readout Oscilloscopes, Digital ...... 11CXX>, 7CXX> Series ..............
197,
221 -238
7CXX> Series, Digitizers .........
338
5000 Series .. ...... ................ .. 264·269
Portables .............. ............... . 278-299,
311 ,316
Portables, Digitizers ............
334
Receivers, Optical/Electrical .................. ..................... ................... 152,240
Reference Information

373
440

g~Tti::r~s:..~.o.~~.::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::

Technology Section .... ... ... .. ...... .. ... .......... .... ............ ..............................
42
General Purpose Interface Bus ............................................................ 14-25
Modular and Integrated Oscilloscopes ................................................
182
Oscilloscope Specifications .................................................................
182
Probe Recommendations .......................................................... .. ......... 464-466
Sales, Ordering, Customer Support .................................................... 493·501
Sampling Applications .............. ............................................................ 191 ,253
Storage Displays ...................................................................................
188
Waveform Digitizers ..............................................................................
192
Reflectometer Cable Testing,
Time Domain ....... .... .. ..........................................................................
151
Relational Data Base Management 4130 Series ..........................
59
RF Probe .... ... .. ............. ........ ...... .... ................. .. ..................... ........ .. ..... 413,476
Ruggedized Oscilloscopes ............. Portables .............................. 290,294,

299,326

S
8

255

Accessories ...........................................7CXX> Series .......................... 253-260
Decision Tree .................................................................... .. ...................
253
Plug-In Units
Delayed Sweep .............................. .. .7CXX> Series ..........................
255
Heads .............................................. .. .7CXX> Series .............. ............ 258-260
Probes .................. .......... ........................................................................
470
Scanner, Programmable/Low Level TM 5000 Series .. ............... ... 368,371
Selection Guides

4200 Series ... .. ................................................................... .... ............ ....
4100 Series ............................................................................................
4120 Series .. ..........................................................................................
4400 Series .. .. .............. .. ................................. ........ ...............................
11 CXX> Series ..........................................................................................
5000 Series .. .......................................................... .... ............................
7CXX> Series Oscilloscope
Systems/Probe ...................................................................................... .
7CXX> Series Nonstorage ................ ..................................................... ..
7CXX> Series Storage ................................... .. .. ............ .. ........................ .
camera and Mounting Adaptor ...........................................................
Color CopierlRasterizer ............................................ .. .. ......... ........... .... .
Digital Counters .....................................................................................
Digital Multimeter ........................... .. ............ ... .. ................................... ..
Logic Analyzer ... ........ .. .. .. ......... .. .... ............ ..... ............. ....... .. .............. ..
Power Supplies .. ........ ...................................... .............. ..................... .. .
Portable Real Time Oscilloscope .......... ... .......................................... ..
Portable Storage Oscilloscope .. ..........................................................
Spectrum Analyzers Product .............. .. ........ ....... .. ......................... ... ..

51
54
55
68
197
261
218
221

233
442
72

405
410
107
422
276
276

156

Semiconductor

Automatic Test Equipment ................... CBI ........................................
S-Systems ............................
MP Packages .......................
Curve Tracers .. .............. .. ....

133
128
373
378
Servicing Aids, Digital .......... .. ..........................................................
418
Single Time eases .................. ........... 7CXX> Series .......................... 245,248,
257
5000 Series .. ... ... ... ............... 274,352
Sideband Analyzers, Television ............ ................. ................... .....
Signal Generators

179

(See Generator Signal)
Signal Pickoff .... ............ ......... .......... ... ...... ........................... ...............
Signal Routing Instruments ............ .................................................
Signal, TV Correctors .......................................................................
Single Trace Amplifiers .................... 11CXX>, 7CXX> Series ..............

490

360

150
212,
239-244,
256-257
5000 Series .......................... 271 -273
SMA (3mm) Accessories ...................... ................... ........................
489
Socket Adaptors ........................... ........ ..... .................... ....................
Software

388

Development WorkSystem ............................. ,............................... .... ..
Engineering, Computer Aided ............................................................. .
Life Cycle ..... .. ...................................................................... .. .... .. ......... .
Summary ................................................................................................

84
90
92
26-27

Spectrum Analyzers

(see Selection Guides)
AcquisitionlProcessing ................................................................. .. .......
Camera Recommendations ........ ............ ..............................................

Safety (Isolators) ... .. .......... ... ... .... ............. ......................................... .

Sampler, Delayed Sweep .. .............. .7CXX>, 5000 Series .............. ..
Sampling Products

478

Accessories ...................... .....................................................................
180
Digital Storage .. ......................... ........... .7CXX> Series .......................... 174,176
Laboratory ........ .......... .. ..........................2750 Series ..........................
166
Plug·ln .....................................................7CXX> Series .......................... 174-1n,
252
Portable ..................................................490 Series .. ......... ................ .
157
Programmable .......................................2750, 490P Series .............. .. 155-173
Software ...................................... .......................................................... .
172
Waveguide Mixers ................................................................................ .
170
Standard Cell Work System ............. Software ............................. ..
84
Structured Custom Work System ... Software ............................ .. .
84
Sweep Generator, Audio .... ........ ......TM 5000 Series .................. ..
400
TM500 ................................. .
425
Swept Frequency Systems ........................................................... ..
178
Switch Controller, Programmable ..TM 5000 Series ................... .
372
Switch, Matrix .. .............. .................... .TM 5000 Series .......... ........ ..
372
Sync Generator, Television ...... ...... ..... ...... .................. .... ... .... ........ .
144
Synchronizers .....................................................................................
148
Systems

AcquisitionlProcessing ..........................MP Packages ...................... .
Artificial Intelligence ..............................4400 Series ................. ....... ..

373
68

TEK

FUNCTIONAL
INDEX

Automated Layout ................................................... ..............................
84
Automatic Test .......................................S-Systems ............................ 128,133
CAE .................................................. .. .................... .............................. ...
84
Custom Test ...........................................................................................
193
Data Acquisition ....................................MP Packages .......................
373
Desktop Controller-Based ....................MP Packages .......................
373
Digitizing Camera .................................................................................. 353-354
Graphic ...................................................................................................
61
Graphic Presentation ........................... .................................................
58
Printed Circuit Board Design ...... ..................... ................ ...... ......... ......
84
Programmable Audio Test .................... TM 5000 Series ....................
400
Software ................................................................................................. 25-27
Swept Frequency ................ ..................................................... ...... .. .....
178
Technical Data Analysis ........................................................................
59
Test and Measurement .........................TM 5000, TM 500 Series,
Digitizers, MP Packages ..... 323-3n
TV Waveform Measurement ................. Portables .............................. 278,326
UNIX Software Development ...............................................................
71
VLSI ........................................................S System, Delta Series ....... 128,133

T
Technology Reference ................................. ....................... ............. .
42
Television Products (see full
description in Television Catalog)
148
Audio Synchronizer .................................................... ...........................
Automatic Video Correctors ...................... .................................. .........
150
Automatic Video Measurement Set ....................................................
147
Color Picture Monitor ............................................................................
149
Demodulators .. ............... .. ......................................................................
147
Noise Measurement Set .......................................................................
150
Oscilloscopes .........................................7000 Series ..........................
249
Portables .............................. 278,326,
Sideband Analyzers ..............................................................................
179
Signal Correctors .. .. ...............................................................................
150
Sync Generators .......... .. ............. ...........................................................
144
Synchronizers ........................................................................................
148
Test Signal Generators ......................................................................... 142,144,
147,148
141
Vectorscopes ........................................................................................ .
VITS Inserters ......................................................................................... 144,150
Waveform Monitors ........................................... ............... ................ .....
141
WaveformNector Monitors ........................................................... .. ..... .
141
X-Y Monitor ................................................................................. .......... .
149
Temperature Measurements .......................................................... .
476
Temperature Probe ............. ..... .. ....................................................... .
476
Terminals, Color Graphics Display 4000 Series ........ ................. . 51 -57
Terminals, Graphic Computer ........................................................ . 51 -57
Terminations, BNC, GR,
SMA (3 mm) ........................................................................................ .
489
Test and Measurement Systems ...TM 5000, TM 500 Series,
Digitizers, MP Packages ..... 323-359,

373-3n,
390-438
Test and Measurement Software
WorkSystem ........................................ Software ...................... ....... ..
84
Test Equipment, Communications
(see Communications Test Equipment)
Test Equipment, IC ............................S-Systems ...................... .... ..
128
Test Signal Generators ............ .. ...................................................... . 142,144
147,148
Test Station, Incoming Inspection .MP Packages ... .. ................. .
373
Test Systems
Automatic ...............................................................................................
128
Programmable Audio ............................TM 5000 Series ....................
400
VLSI ........................................................................................................ 128,133
Testers
Digital ..................................................................................................... .
151
151
Rber Optic Cable ................................. ............. ... ... ..... .. .. ...... ...............
Metallic Cable .......... ... ........................... .............................................. ..
154
Thermal Readout ................................7000 Series ......................... .
250
TM 500 Series ..................... .
410
Portables ............................ ..
417
Three-Dimensional Displays ...........4120 Series ......................... .
55
Time Ba..s
Delaying ............... ...................................7000, 5000 Series ........... .. ... 245,248,
255,266
Digitizer ...................................................7000, 5000 Series ................ 348,352
Dual (Mixed Sweep) ................. ............. 7000, 5000 Series ................ 247,250,
274

Single ................................................... ... 7000, 5000 Series ................ 245,247,
257,274,
352

Time Domain Refl&ctometer,
Cable Testing ...................................................................................... 154,256
Time Interval Counters .....................7000 Series ..........................
251
TM 5000 Series .. ............. .....
390
TM 500 Series ...... ................
405
Time Mark Generator ........................ TM 500 Series ......................
433
Tips, Probe .............................................................................. ............
486
Touch Panel, CRT ..............................................................................
38
Trace Recording Cameras .... ............. ............. ........... ............... ....... 440-453
Tracking Generators .........................................................................
178
Training ................................................................................................. 195,498
Training Tapes ................... ..................... ........ ......... ...........................
309
Transformers, High Current ............................................................. 462,483,
Transistor Curve Tracers ................. ........ ...... ............ .............. ........
378
Transient Digitizer ................................ ................................... .. ......... 344-350
Transmitters, Electrical/Optical ..................................................... 152,240
Triangle Generators ..........................TM 500 Series ......................
416
Two-Dimensional Displays ..............4120 Series ..........................
55

U
Universe I Counter/Timers ................ 7000 Series ...................... ....
251
TM 5000 Series .................... 391-395
TM 500 Series .... ........ .......... 405-407

V
Vectorscopes ...................................... 1400, 500 Series ..................
Video Products
Corrector, Automatic .............................................................................
Hard Copy Units ....................................................................................
Interface Kit .............................. ........................ .. ... ........................ .........
Monitor, Raster Scan..............................................................................
Noise Generator ....................................................................................
Viewing Hoods and Accessories ..................... ............. ............ .....
VITS Inserters ..................................... 1900 Series ..........................
VLSI Test Systems .............................................................................
Voltage Probes ...................... .................... .............. ................ ...........
Voltmeter, Ac RMS Digital ............... TM 5000 Series ....................
TM 500 Series ......................
Portables ........... .......... .........

141
150
75,454
148
41 ,149
150
492
144,150
128,133

464
396
411
368

W
Warranty Programs ................................................................... .........
Waveform Digitizer Amplifier .......... 7000 Series ..........................
5000 Series ... .............. .........
Waveform Digitizer, Programmable ................................................
Waveform Digitizing Instruments ................ ........... .......................
Waveform Monitors ........................... 1700, 1400 Series ................
Waveform ProceSSing
Oscilloscopes .....................................7000 Series, Digitizers .........
MP Packages .......................
Waveform/Vector Monitors .............................................................
Waveguide Mixers ................. ............................................................
Window Managed Display ...............4120 Series ..........................
Windowing ...........................................4120 Series ..........................
Word Recognizer ...............................Portables ........ .............. ........
Word Recognizer Probe ...................................................................
Workstation Furniture ............................... ........................................
WorkSystems
DeSigner's .............................................. SOftware ...............................
Full Custom ............................................Software .......... ............. ........
Gate Array .............................................. Software ...............................
PCB .............................................. .. ......... Software .......... .....................
Software Development .........................SOftware ....................... ........
Standard Cell .........................................Software .................... ...........
Structured Custom ................................Software ......... ............... .......
Test & Measurement .............................Software ................... ..... ..... ..
Workstations
CAD/CAM ........................................................ .......................................
Color Graphics .......................................................................................
Graphic Input ... ........ ..................... ........................... ...................... ........
High Performance, 20 & 3D
Intelligent Graphics ...............................4120, 4130 Series ................
Writing Speed Enhancers, Camera .......... .......................... ............

496
336
269

344-350
324-354
141
338
373
141
170
55
55
278,326
125-127
79-82
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
59
51

55,59
441

X
X-V Monitors ............. ...........................................................................

149

TEK
Type
AA S01
AA S001

ALPHANUMERIC
INDEX

Instrument Description

Page

Distortion Analyzer .......... ...... 423
Programmable Distortion
Analyzer .. .......... ............... .... ... 400
AnthroCart PC, GT Carts .. ..... ........ ............ 80
AnthroArm Shelf Arms ... .. ..... ........ .......... ... 79
AM S01
Operational Amplifier ............ 427
AM S02
Differential Amplifier .............. 427
AM S03
Current-Probe Amplifier . 426,483
AN/USM-488 100 MHz Dual Trace
Portable Oscilloscope .... 296,299
AVC-20
Audio Vector Converter .. .... .. 145
Current Probe ................. 426,483
A6302
Current Probe ... ........... ... 426,483
A6303
RS-499 Interface .................. .. 153
A6741
2-Wire Direct Interface ... ....... 153
A6742
Tri-State Break-Out Box ........ 153
A6743
Interface Adaptor ..... .......... ... 153
A6744
A674S
X.21 Interface ......................... 153
A6746
EBU/SMPTE Bus Interface ... 153
X.21 Physical Interface ...... ... 153
A6747
A6770
Coax Interface ....................... 153
A6901
Ground Isolation Monitor ...... 478
A6902B
Isolator ................... ........ ......... 479
CAE
Computer Aided Engineering . 84
CG S001
Programmable Oscilloscope
Calibration Generator ...... ...... 431
CG SS1AP
Programmable Oscilloscope
Calibration Generator ...... ...... 431
CT-1
Current Transformer .............. 484
Current Transformer .. .. .. .... .. .. 484
CT-2
Signal Pickoff .............. ........... 490
CT-3
CT-S
Current Transformer .............. 484
C-30B
Camera ................................... 450
Camera ................................... 450
C-31B
C-4
Camera .. .. ............ .. ................. 446
C-SC
Camera ................................... 445
CoSO
Camera ............ .. ..................... 451
C-S1
Camera ................ .. .............. .. . 451
C-S3
Camera ................................... 451
C-S9A
Camera ................................... 453
C-7
Camera ................................... 448
Color Graphics Terminal .......... 54
CX4109A
CX4692S
IBM Color Output System ....... 74
CX4696S
IBM Color Output System ....... 74
DAS 9109
Digital Analysis Mainframe ... 117
DAS 9119
Digital Analysis Mainframe
(ATE Version) ...... ................... 117
DAS 9129
Color Digital Analysis
Mainframe .............................. 117
Digital Analysis Mainframe ... 114
DAS 9219
Color Digital Analysis
DAS 9229
Mainframe ..................... ......... 114
Expansion Mainframe .......... .. 114
DAS 92E9
DAS 9200T High Resolution Color Display 114
DCS01
Digital Camera
System ...................... 329,353,444
DC S009
Programmable 135 MHz
Universal Countermmer ....... 394
DC S010
Programmable 350 MHz
Universal Countermmer ....... 392
DC S03A
125 MHz Universal Counter .. 406
DC S04A
100 MHz Countermmer ........ 409
135 MHz Universal
DC S09
Countermmer ........................ 406
350 MHz Universal
DC S10
Countermmer ............... ......... 406
Digital Delay ........................... 418
DD S01

Type

Instrument Description Page

Type

Instrument Description Page

DM44
DM S01A
DM S010

Digital Multimeter ................... 318
Digital Multimeter ................... 410
Programmable Digital
Multimeter ...................... ........ 396
Autoranging Digital Multimeter 411
Digital Prescaler .............. 395,408
Synchronous Changeover .... 143

MP 2902

Audio Measurements
Package ....... ... .. .... .... .... .. .. ..... 377

DM S02A
DP S01
ECO-170A
E Systems
Microcontroller
FA-1
FA-2
FA-3
FA-4
FA-S
FA-6
FA-7
FA-8
FA-9
FA-10
FA-11
FG 501A
FG S010
FG
FG
FG
FG
FG

S02
S03

68HCll ...................................
Rber Adaptors .......................
Rber Adaptors .......................
Rber Adaptors .......................
Rber Adaptors .. .. ............. .. .. ..
Rber Adaptors .................. .....
Rber Adaptors .......................
Rber Adaptors .......... .. .......... .
Rber Adaptors .......................
Rber Adaptors .......................
Rber Adaptors .......................
Rber Adaptors .......................
2 MHz Function Generator ...
Programmable 20 MHz
Function Generator ...............
11 MHz Function Generator .
3 MHz Function Generator ...

100
151
151
151
151
151
151
151
151
151
151
151
416
397
416
416

504.
S04T
S07

40 MHz Function Generators 417
2 MHz Sweeping Function
Generator ...... .. .... ...... .. ........... 417
Computer Display Monitor ...... 39
GMA201
HC01
Video Copier .... ...................... 454
HC02
Video Copier .......................... 454
HC100
Plotter ..................................... 454
Digital Photometer/
J16
Radiometer ............................. 455
Illuminance Probe .... .. ............ 457
J6S01
Irradiance Probe ..... .... .... .. ..... 457
J6S02
8° Luminance Probe ...... .. ..... 457
J6S03
J6S04
Uncorrected Probe ................ 458
LED Probe .............................. 458
J6S0S
Illuminance Probe .................. 457
J6S11
J6S12
Irradiance Probe .................... 457
1° Luminance Probe ............. 458
J6S23
K212
Portable Instrument Cart ....... 461
K213
Lab Instrument Cart .............. 462
Rack Instrument Cart .... .. ...... 462
K217
LANDS
Language Development
Systems .................... ................ 96
LT-1000
VLSI Logic Test System ........ 129
MERLYN-G Automated Layout System ..... 88
MERLYN-PCB Printed Circuit Board Design
System ...... .. ...... .. .. .. .. .... ...... .. .... 89
Programmable Multifunction
MIS010
Interface ................................. 367
MP 1101
Programmable Digitizer
Measurement Package ......... 374
Programmable Digitizer
MP 1201
Measurement Package ......... 374
Acquisition/Processing
MP 2101
Measurement Package ......... 374
Acquisition/Processing
MP 2201
Measurement Package ......... 374
Acquisition/Processing
MP 2S01
Measurement Package ......... 375
MP 2601
Portable Measurement
Package .................... ............. 376
MP 2901
Inspection Test Station .... .. .... 376
Color identifies NEW products

Multi-V
Systems
MX S010
OF1S0
OF1S2
OF192
OF23S
ORS01
ORS02
OTS01
OTS02
OTS03
PG S01
PGS02
PGS06
PGS07
PGS08,
PGS08T
PS SOO4
PS S010
PS S01-1
PS S03A
P6006
P6007
P6008
P6009
P601S
P6021
P6022
P6028
P6041
P6046
P6048
P60S3B
P60SS
P60S6
P60S7
P6062B
P6063B
P6101A
P6102A
P6103
P610SA
P6106A
P6107A
P6108A
P6109
P6121
P6122
P612S
P6130
P6131
P6133
P6134
P613S
P6136
P6149A
P6201
P6202A
P6230
P6231
P6302

Microprocessor Support ......... 99
Interface Extender .... ........ .... . 367
Rber Optic TOR ..................... 151
Rber Optic TOR ..................... 151
Rber Optic TOR
Bandwidth Test Set ...... .. ....... 152
Rber Optic TOR ..................... 151
Receivers ................................ 152
Receivers ................................ 152
Transmitters .......... ............ ..... 152
Transmitters ........................... 152
Transmitters ...................... ..... 152
50 MHz Pulse Generator ...... 421
250 MHz Pulse Generator .... 421
Calibration Generator ............ 433
Dual Output 50 MHz Pulse
Generator ...................... ......... 420
50 MHz Pulse Generators .... 420
Power Supply .................... ..... 399
Programmable Triple Power
Supply .............................. ....... 399
Power Supply ...... .. .. ............... 423
Triple Power Supply .............. 423
lOX Probe .............................. 467
l00X Probe ............................ 477
lOX Probe .............................. 471
l00X Probe ............................ 477
l000X Probe .......................... 477
Current Probe .......... .............. 482
Current Probe ........................ 482
1X Probe .. .... .... .. ...... .. .. .... .. .... 467
Data Acquisition Probe ......... 125
FET Differential Probe .. .. ....... 480
lOX Probe .............................. 471
lOX Probe .............................. 470
lOX Probe ....................... 243,480
lOX Probe .............. .............. .. 471
l00X Probe ............................ 471
lOX or lX Probe .. .. ...... .. ........ 470
lOX or lX Probe .......... .. ...... .. 470
lX Probe ...... .. .......... .. ............ 468
lOX Probe ....................... 270,468
lOX Probe .............................. 469
lOX Probe .................... ...... .... 468
lOX Probe .................... .......... 468
lOX Probe .............................. 468
lOX Probe ...... ................ .. ...... 468
lOX Probe ........ ............... ....... 469
lOX Probe .. .. .... ............ .. ........ 469
lOX Probe .... .. .. .. ............ ........ 469
5X Counter Probe ........... 408,469
lOX Probe .............................. 473
lOX Probe .............................. 473
lOX Probe .............................. 473
lOX Probe ....................... 215,473
lOX Probe ....................... 215,473
lOX Probe .... .. ............... .. ....... 472
lOX Probe .............................. 468
FET Probe .............................. 475
FET Probe .............................. 475
lOX Probe .............................. 474
lOX Probe ....................... 215,473
Current Probe
(See A6302) .... .. .. ...... .. .. .. 426,483

ALPHANUMERIC
INDEX

TEK
Type

Instrument Description

P6303

Current Probe
(See A6303) ...................... 426.483
Logic Probe ........ ..................... 476
Word Recognizer Probe .. ....... 482
Word Recognizer Probe .. ....... 329
1X RF Probe ... .............. ............ 476
Data Acquisition Probe ........... 125
Data Acquisition Probe ........... 125
High-Speed Data Acquisition
Probe ........................................ 125
100 MHz Clock Probe ............. 125
TTUMOS Pattern Generator
Probe ........................................ 125
ECL Pattern Generator Probe .. 125
Pattern Generator Probe ........ 125
Data Acquisition Probe ........... 125
Data Acquisition Probe ........... 125
Data Acquisition Probe ........... 117
Data Acquisition Probe ........... 125
Data Acquisition Probe ........... 125
Microprobe ................... .... ........ 485
Microprobe .... .............. ..... ....... . 485
Temperature Probe .................. 413
Temperature Probe ............ ...... 476
5 MHz Oscilloscope ................ 428
15 MHz Dual Trace
Oscilloscope ............................ 428
10 MHz Storage Oscilloscope 428
80 MHz Oscilloscope .............. 428
RC Oscillator ............................ 434
Leveled Sinewave Generator . 434
Leveled Sinewave Generator . 434
Oscillator .................................. 425
Programmable Oscillator ........ 400
Programmable Scanner .......... 371

P6401
P6406
P6407
P6420
P6451
P6452
P6453
P6454
P6455
P6456
P6457
P6460
P6461
P6462
P6464
P6465
P6501
P6507
P6601
P6602
SC 501
SC 502
SC 503
SC 504
SG 502
SG 503
SG 504
SG 505
SG 5010
SI5010
SOFTWARE
ASYST
ColorKey
Common
LISP
EMI
Franz LISP
GRASP
GURU II
ICOM40A
Integral C
LANDS
PLOT 10
PROLOG
Protocol
Microlink
SD Tools
Smalltalk-80
SPD
Tek
EZ-TEST
TekMAP

Page

Software ................................... 342
Interface Software ................... 101
(4400P33) Software ................... 70
(S26EMOO) Software ............... 173
(4400P30) Software ................... 71
(S26RFOO) Software ................ 173
Software ................................... 358
Interface Software ................... 100
Software ..................................... 95
Language Development
Systems ...................................... 96
Graphics Software Library ... 61.66
(4400P31) Software ................... 70
(41P37) Software ....................... 61
Structured Design Tools ........... 94
Software ..................................... 70
(10Z210) Signal Processing &
Display ...................................... 343

Software ................................... 358
(062-7732-00) 7020/4041
TIme and Amplitude ................ 340
S42P101 7854I1BM PC ............................ 340
S42P201
7020IIBM PC ............................ 340
S42H201 7020/HP Series 200 ................. 340
S42H202 7854/HP Series 200 ................. 340
TekSPANS Software ................................... 173
UNIX EMAC
Editor
(440P32) Software ...................... 71

Type

Instrument Description

92DV
SPG12
SPG170A
SPG2A
SPG22
STRUCTA
S-1
S-2
S-3A
S-3220
S-3225
S-3270
S-3295
S-4
S-5
S-6
S-51
S-52
S-53
S-54
TDC
TDC-1
TDC-2
TekTouch
TG 501
TM 5003
TM5006
TM 501
TM 503
TM 504
TM 506,
RTM 506
TM 515
TR502
TR503
TSA8140
TSG11
TSG12
TSG13
TSG15
TSG16
TSG170A
TSG2
TSG21
TSG23
TSG25
TSG26
TSG3
TSG300
TSG5
TSG6
TSG7
TSI8150
TSP1
TSP11
TSP21
TSS40
TSS41
TSS42

Page

ASIC Prototype Verification Software .......................................... 104
TV Sync Generator .................. 144
NTSC Sync Generator ............ 143
TV Sync Generator .................. 144
TV Sync Generator .................. 144
Structured Analysis Tool ........... 94
Sampling Head ........................ 258
Sampling Head ........................ 258
Sampling Head ........................ 258
LSI Test System ....................... 132
Test System ............................. 131
LSI Test System ....................... 132
VLSI Test System .................... 132
Sampling Head ........................ 259
Sampling Head ........................ 259
Sampling Head .......... .............. 259
Trigger Countdown Head ....... 259
Pulse Generator Head ............ 260
Trigger Recognizer Head ....... 260
Pulse Generator Head ............ 260
TV Down Converter ... :............. 147
TV Down Converter ................. 147
TV Down Converter ................. 147
CRT Screen ................................ 38
TIme Mark Generator .............. 433
Three-Wide Mainframe ............ 402
Six-Wide Mainframe ................ 402
One-Wide Mainframe .............. 435
Three-Wide Mainframe ............ 435
Four-Wide Mainframe .............. 435

Six-Wide Mainframe ................ 435
Rve-Wide Mainframe ............... 435
Tracking Generator ................. 178
Tracking Generator ................. 178
Test System Adaptor .............. 362
TV Test Signal Generator .. ..... 144
TV Test Signal Generator ....... 144
TV Test Signal Generator .... .. . 144
TV Test Signal Generator ....... 144
TV Test Signal Generator ....... 144
TV Test Signal Generator ....... 143
TV Test Signal Generator ....... 144
TV Test Signal Generator ...... , 144
TV Test Signal Generator ....... 144
TV Test Signal Generator ....... 144
TV Test Signal Generator ....... 144
TV Test Signal Generator .. .. .. . 144
Component TV Generator ...... 142
TV Test Signal Generator ....... 144
TV Test Signal Generator ....... 144
TV Test Signal Generator ....... 144
Test System Interface ............. 360
TV Signal Processor ................ 144
TV Signal Processor ................ 144
TV Signal Processor ................ 144
Scanner Control Assembly ..... 363
Low Level Scanner Card ........ 364
General Purpose
Scanner Card ........................... 364
Power Switch Card ................. 365
TSS43
Coax Scanner Module ............ 366
TSS44
RF Scanner Module ................. 366
TSS45
Microwave Scanner Module ... 366
TSS46
Matrix Switch Card .................. 365
TSS48
V-Systems Emulation Support ..................... 98

Color identifies NEW products

Type

Instrument Description

Page

Component Television
Waveform Monitor ................... 142
Output Module ......................... 151
XY1
VLSI Test System .................... 133
10SF01
VLSI Test System .................... 133
10S24
VLSI Test System .................... 133
10S48
VLSI Test System .................... 133
10S72
VLSI Test System .................... 133
10S96
VLSI Test System .................... 133
10Z210
VLSI Test System .................... 133
10Z280
Two Channel Amplifier ............ 214
11A32
Differential Comparator .......... 214
11A33
11A34
Four Channel Amplifier ........... 214
Two Channel Amplifier ............ 213
11A52
Single Channel Amplifier ........ 212
11A71
110-RC
Remote Control Unit ............... 148
110-S
Synchronizer ............................ 148
1101A
Probe Power Supply ............... 475
1105
Battery Power Supply ..... 306. 390
Battery Pack ............................ 306
1106
1107
Dc Inverter ................................ 307
400 MHz Programmable
11301
Analog Oscilloscope ............... 201
500 MHz Programmable
11302
Analog Oscilloscope ............... 201
500 MHz Programmable
11401
Digitizing Oscilloscope .... 207.325
1 GHz Programmable
11402
Digitizing Oscilloscope .... 207. 325
118AS
Audio Synchronizer ................. 148
Audio Channel Kit ................... 148
118F01
Video Interface Kit .................. 148
118F02
118-RC
Remote Control Unit ............... 148
Performance Analysis Module 118
12R01
Logic Analyzer Mainframe ...... 118
1240
Color Logic Analyzer
1241
Mainframe ................................ 118
134
Current Probe Amplifier .......... 482
Programmable Switch
1360P
Controller .................. ................ 372
Switch Matrix ........................ ... 372
1360S
1405
TV Sideband Adaptor ............. 179
NTSC Mainframe ..................... 144
1410R
PAL Mainframe ........................ 144
1411R
PAL-M Mainframe .................... 144
1412R
TV Noise Measurement Set ... 150
1430
Video Noise Generator ........... 150
1434
1440
Automatic Video Corrector ..... 150
1450-1
TV Demodulator Mainframe ... 147
TV Demodulator Mainframe ... 147
1450-2
TV Demodulator Mainframe ... 147
1450-3
PAL TV Test Signal Generator 150
R148
PAL-M Test Signal Generator . 150
R148-M
1480C
TV Waveform Monitor ............. 141
TV Waveform Monitor ............. 141
1480R
TV Waveform Monitor ............. 141
1481C
TV Waveform Monitor ............. 141
1481R
TV Waveform Monitor ............. 141
1482C
TV Waveform Monitor ............. 141
1482R
TV Waveform Monitor ............. 141
1485C
TV Waveform Monitor ............. 141
1485R
1502, 1503 TOR Cable Testers .................. 154
Programmable Test Rxture ..... 383
172
17108
NTSC Waveform Monitor ........ 139
PAL Waveform Monitor ........... 139
17118
Vectorscope ............................. 138
1720
Vectorscope ............................. 138
1730
WFM-3oo

TEK
Type
1740

ALPHANUMERIC
INDEX

Instrument Description

Page

Option 01 NTSC Waveform/
Vector Monitor ......................... 140
1741
Option 01 PAL Waveform/
Vector Monitor .................... ..... 140
1742
Option 01 PAL-M Waveform/
Vector Monitor ......................... 140
NTSC Wvfm/Vector Monitor ... 140
1750
1751
PAL Wvfm/Vector Monitor ...... 140
176
Pulsed High Current Rxture ... 384
Standard Test Rxture .............. 385
177
Linear IC Test Rxture .............. 387
178
Digital Generator ..................... 144
1910
ANSWER (Automatic
1980
Video Measurement Set) ........ 147
206,2060 SCOPE-MOBILE- Carts .......... 461
212
500 kHz Dual Trace
Portable Oscilloscope ............. 315
213
1 MHz Portable
Oscilloscope/DMM .................. 313
214
500 kHz Dual Trace Portable
Storage Oscilloscope .............. 321
221
5 MHz Portable Oscilloscope . 312
2220
60 MHz Single Time Base
Portable Digital Storage
Oscilloscope .................... 316, 330
2225
50 MHz Oscilloscope .............. 303
100 MHz Dual Time Base
2230
Portable Digital Storage
Oscilloscope .................... 316, 330
2235
100 MHz Dual Trace
Portable Oscilloscope ............. 294
2235L
100 MHz Dual Trace
Portable Oscilloscope ..... 294, 299
2235 Opt 01100 MHz Dual Trace
Portable Oscilloscope ...... 294, 299
100 MHz Dual Trace
2236
Portable Oscilloscope ............. 294
100 MHz Oscilloscope ............ 300
2245
100 MHz wNoltmeter/~ TIme/
2246
SmartCursors· Oscilloscope .. 300
100 MHz Dual Trace
2335
Portable Oscilloscope ............. 290
2336
100 MHz Dual Trace
Portable Oscilloscope ............. 290
2336YA
100 MHz Dual Trace Portable
Oscilloscope .................... 290, 299
2337
100 MHz Dual Trace
Portable Oscilloscope ............. 290
150 MHz Dual Trace Portable
2430
Digital Storage
Oscilloscope .................... 316,326
2430M
Digital Storage Oscilloscope
with MATE/CIIL ................. 299, 326
2445A
150 MHz Four Channel
Portable Oscilloscope ............. 278
250 MHz Four Channel
2455A
Portable Oscilloscope ............ , 278
2465A
350 MHz Four Channel
Portable Oscilloscope ............. 278
2465A CT 350 MHz Four Channel
Portable Oscilloscope ............. 278
2465A OM 350 MHz Four Channel
Portable Oscilloscope ............. 278
2465A DV 350 MHz Four Channel
Portable Oscilloscope ............. 278
2467
350 MHz Four Channel
Portable Oscilloscope ............. 278
Portable Spectrum Analyzer .. 171
2710
Spectrum Analyzer .................. 168
2754
2754P
Programmable Spectrum
Analyzer .................... ................ 168
Spectrum Analyzer .... .. ............ 166
2755

Type
2755P

Instrument Description

284
305
314
318
336
338
370
390AD
4041
4041DDU
4100H01
4100H02
4100H03
4109A
4111
4125
4125P
4128
4129
413081
4130811
4130812
413082
4132
4132811
4132812
4132865
4132871
4132873
4190
4205
4207
4208
4404
4405
4406

4510A
4631
4632
4634
4644
466
466DM44
4692
46928
4696
46968
492A
492AP
494
494P
4944
495
495P
4957
4958
499181
5A14N
5A15N
5A18N

Page

Programmable Spectrum
Analyzer .................................... 166
Pulse Generator ....................... 418
5 MHz Dual Trace Portable
Oscilloscope/DMM .................. 311
10 MHz Dual Trace Portable
Storage Oscilloscope .............. 320
Logic Analyzer ......................... 122
50 MHz Dual Trace Portable
Digital Storage Oscilloscope .. 334
Logic Analyzer ......................... 122
Programmable Curve Tracer .. 379
Programmable Waveform
Digitizer ..................................... 349
System Controller .............. 17, 355
Disk Drive Unit ......................... 355
Table ........................................... 58
Display Stand ............................. 58
Chair ........................................... 58
Color Graphics Terminal ............ 54
Color Graphics Terminal ............ 54
20 Color Graphics Workstation 56
20 Color Graphics Workstation 56
3D Color Graphics Workstation 57
3D Color Graphics Workstation 57
Graphics System ....................... 63
Drafting System ......................... 64
Drafting System ......................... 64
Graphics System ....................... 63
Intelligent Graphics Workstation 59
Drafting System ......................... 64
Drafting System ......................... 64
Graphics System ....................... 63
Technical Data Analysis System 65
Technical Data Analysis and
Presentation System ................. 65
Graphics Projection Package ... 58
Color Graphics Terminal ............ 52
Color Graphics Terminal ............ 53
Color Graphics Terminal ............ 53
Artificial Intelligence System .... 69
Artificial Intelligence System .... 69
Artificial Intelligence System .... 69
Rasterizer ................................... 73
Hard Copy Unit .......................... 75
Video Hard Copy Unit ............... 75
Image Forming Module ............. 75
Dot Matrix Printer ...................... 61
100 MHz Portable Storage
Oscilloscope ............................ 317
100 MHz Portable Storage
Oscilloscope ............................ 318
Color Graphics Copier .............. 73
Color Output System ................ 74
Color Ink-Jet Printer ................... 73
Color Output System ................ 74
Spectrum Analyzer .................. 161
Programmable GPIB Spectrum
Analyzer .................................... 161
Spectrum Analyzer .................. 163
Programmable/Spectrum
Analyzer GPIB .......................... 163
Mass Storage Unit .................... 71
Spectrum Analyzer .................. 157
Programmable Spectrum
Analyzer .................................... 157
Graphic Tablet ........................... 76
Graphic Tablet ........................... 76
Graphic Input Workstation ........ 77
1 MHz Four Trace Amplifier .... 271
2 MHz Amplifier ....................... 271
2 MHz Dual Trace Amplifier ... 271

Color identifies NEW products

Type
5A19N
5A21N

Instrument Description

Page

Differential Amplifier ................ 272
Differential Amplifier/Current
Probe Input .............................. 272
Differential Amplifier ...... .... ...... 273
5A22N
5A26
Dual Differential Amplifier ....... 273
5A38
Dual Trace Amplifier ......... ....... 265
5A48
Dual Trace Amplifier .. ........ ...... 266
Time Base/Amplifier ................ 274
5810N
Dual Delayed Sweep
5812N
TIme Base ................................ 274
Digitizer TIme Base ................. 352
5825N
5840
TIme Base ................................ 266
Delaying TIme Base ................ 266
5842
5CT1N
Curve Tracer Plug-in ......... 274,389
5010
Waveform Digitizer .................. 269
50M10
Programmable AID Converter 368
50M20
Programmable D/A Converter 368
Programmable Digital
50M30
Input/Output Card ................... 368
50M40
Programmable Relay
Scanner Card ........................... 369
50M41
Programmable Low-Level
Scanner ........................ ............ 369
50M50
Programmable Memory Card . 370
Programmable Development
50M70
Card .......................................... 370
5110,
2 MHz Single-Beam
R5110
Oscilloscopes ...... .. ................... 267
5111A,
2 MHz Single-Beam Storage
R5111A Oscilloscopes .......................... , 267
5113,
2 MHz Dual-Beam Storage
R5113
Oscilloscopes ........................... 267
5116
Color Storage Oscilloscope .... 269
R520A
TV Vectorscope ....................... 141
TV Vectorscope ....................... 141
R521A
R522A
TV Vectorscope ....................... 141
5223,
10 MHz Digital Storage
R5223
Oscilloscopes ........................... 351
5440,
50 MHz Single-Beam
R5440
Oscilloscopes ........................... 264
50 MHz Variable Persistence
5441
R5441
Storage Oscilloscopes ............ 264
576
Curve Tracer ............................ 381
577/01
Storage Curve Tracer
Mainframe ................................ 385
577/02
Curve Tracer Mainframe ......... 385
General Purpose Waveform
6068
Monitor ........................................ 40
High Brightness Display
608
Monitor ........................................ 40
General Purpose Waveform
620
Monitor .......................... .............. 40
634, 634LC High Resolution Video Monitors 40
650HR,
TV Picture Monitor ................... 149
650HR·1 TV Picture Monitor ................... 149
651HR,
TV Picture Monitor ................... 149
651HR·1 TV Picture Monitor ................... 149
TV Picture Monitor ................... 149
652HR·1
655HR·1
TV Picture Monitor ........ ........... 149
TV Picture Monitor ................... 149
656HR·1
7A13
Differential Comparator
Amplifier ................................... 243
7A15A
Single Trace Amplifier ............. 240
7A16A
Single Trace Amplifier """""'" 240
7A16P
Programmable Amplifier .. 346,348
7A18A
Dual Trace Amplifier ................ 241
7A19
Single Trace Amplifier ............. 239
Differential Amplifier ................ 244
7A22
Dual Trace Amplifier ................ 241
7A24
Dual Trace Amplifier ................ 241
7A26
Dual Trace Amplifier ................ 239
7A29
Logic Triggered Vertical
7A42
Amplifier ................................... 242

TEK
Type

ALPHANUMERIC
INDEX

Instrument Description

Page

7B10
Time Base .... ... ....... .. ................ 248
7B15
LlDelaying Time Base .. .......... .. 248
7B50A
Time Base ... ....... ...... ... ....... ...... 249
7B53A
Dual Time Base ....... .... ........ .... 249
7B80
Time Base .. ... .. ... ..... .. ... ...... ... ... 245
7B85
LlDelaying Time Base ....... ....... 245
7B90P
Programmable TIme Base ...... 348
7B92A
Dual Time Base ....................... 247
7CT1N
Curve Tracer Plug·in ... .... ......... 389
7013A
Digital Multimeter ..................... 250
7015
Universal Countermmer ......... 251
7020, 7020TProgrammabie Digitizers .. 240,336
7F10
Optical·Electrical Converter .... 240
7L 12
Spectrum Analyzer .. .. ... ........... 175
7L14
Spectrum Analyzer ....... .. ......... 174
7L5
Spectrum Analyzer .................. 176
7M11
Dual 50 fI Delay Line .............. 258
7S11
Sampling Unit .......................... 257
7S12
TOR/Sampler .... ............... .... .. ... 256
7S14
Dual Trace Delayed
Sweep Sampler ..... .... ... .. ......... 255
7T11A
Sampling Sweep Unit ..... .... ... . 257
7104,
1 GHz Real TIme
Oscilloscopes ... .. ............ ... ....... 222
R7103
751
Aural Modulation
Monitor/Decoder ............... ....... 146
760
Stereo Audio Monitor .............. 145
7603, R7603 100 MHz Oscilloscopes ...... .... 229
76120
200 MHz Programmable
Waveform Digitizer ........ .......... 344
7613, R7613 Variable Persistence Storage
Oscilloscopes .... ........... ... ......... 236
7623A
Multimode Storage
R7623A Oscilloscopes ... ...... ... ............... 236
7633,
Multimode Storage
Oscilloscopes ... ... .. ........ ........... 236
R7633
250 MHz Oscilloscope ........... . 227
7704A
7844,
400 MHz Dual·Beam
R7844
Oscilloscopes ........................... 231
7854
400 MHz Waveform Processing
Oscilloscope ....... .. ... ....... ..... .... 338
7904, R7903 500 MHz Oscilloscope .. .......... 225
Programmable Transient
7912AO
Waveform Digitizer .................. 347
7934
500 MHz Storage Oscilloscope 234
Two Bank Library Pack .... ..... .. 153
830L01
Four Bank Library Pack .......... 153
830L02
Eight Bank Library Pack .. ....... 153
830L03
Memory Pack ..................... ...... 153
830M01
Memory Pack .... .... .. ..... ............ 153
830M02
Memory Pack ........................... 153
830M03
Memory Pack ........ .... ... ............ 153
830M04
Memory Pack ... .. .. .. ... ... ...... ... ... 153
830M05
Memory Pack .... ...... .. ............... 153
830M06
Memory Pack .................... .. .... . 153
830M07
Memory Pack ........................... 153
830M08
Memory Pack .. ......................... 153
830M09
ROM Pack Development Aid . 153
830ROA
General Purpose ROM Pack .. 153
830R01
Link Test ROM Pack .. ... ... ....... 153
830R03
PARSIIPARS ROM Pack .. .... .. .. 153
830R07
SDLC/SNA ROM Pack .. ... .... .. . 153
830R10
X.21 ROM Pack .. ......... ..... ... ... . 153
830R12
SDLC/SNA ROM Pack .. ... ....... 153
830R13
834
Programmable Data Comm
Tester ....................... ... .... ..... .. ... 153
834ROA
ROM Pack Development Aid . 153

Type

Instrument Description

834R01
834R02A
834R03A
834R04
834R05

General Purpose ROM Pack .. 153
Bisynchronous ROM Pack .. ... . 153
Link Test ROM Pack .............. . 153
HDLC/X·25 ROM Pack .... ..... ... 153
Extended Instruction Set
ROM Pack ... ...... ..... .. .. .. ... .... ... .. 153
Bisynchronous ROM Pack .. .. .. 153
PARSIIPARS ROM Pack .. .... .... 153
SDLC/SNA ROM Pack ............ 153
Extended Monitor ROM Pack 153
SDLC/SNA ROM Pack ........ .. .. 153
Programmable Data Comm
Testers ...................................... 153
Programmable Data Comm
Testers ..... .............. ... .... ............ 153
TV Production Library Pack ... 153
TV Production Protocol
Analyzer .. ... ....................... .. ...... 153
Microcomputer Integration Unit .. 98
Data Acquisition Module ........ 115
Data Acquisition Module ... ..... 115
Data Acquisition Module .. ... ... 115
Data Acquisition Module .. .. .... 115
Data Acquisition Module ... .. ... 115
Data Acquisition Module ........ 115
Data Acquisition Module ........ 115
Data Acquisition Module .... .... 115
Pattern Generator Module .. .... 115
Pattern Generator Module ... ... 115
Pattern Generator Module ...... 115
Pattern Generator Module ...... 115

834R06
834R07
834R10
834R11
834R13
835, R835
836, R836
836L18
836TV
8540A
91AE04A
91AE24
91A04A
91A08
91A24
91A32
91HSS
91HSE8
91P16
91P32
91S16
91S32
92A16,
92A16E
92A60
92A90
92HS8,
92HS8E
92S16
92S32

Data Acquisition Module
Data Acquisition Module
Data Acquisition Module

Page

109
109
109

Data Acquisition Module ........ 109
Pattern Generator Module .. .... 109
Pattern Generator Module .. .... 109

Color identifies NEW products

TEK

IEEE STANDARD 488 COMPATIBLE

SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS

GPIB
MADE EASY

Tektronix Means ... Measurement Capability, GPIB Compatibility

Tektronix' Systems Experience
Long before publication of the IEEE Standard 488-1975, Tektronix had entered the
test and measurement systems business.
The measurement speed and capabilities of
the Tektronix automated oscilloscope and
Tektronix semiconductor test systems
quickly highlighted the benefits to be
gained from measurement automation. And
just as quickly came the realization that a
system interfacing standard was needed.
But what standard?
The possibilities of the proposed IEEE Standard 488 were recognized . And, when the
IEEE Standard 488 became reality, GPIB
compatibility was already an integral part of
Tektronix product planning and engineering.
The result is that Tektronix is now a recognized major supplier of a full line of GPIB
system components-a supplier that puts
more than a decade of systems planning,
design, and implementation experience into
each product.

In 1978 the standard was further refined
(IEEE Standard 488-1978) to define an interfacing system that has become a widely
accepted instrument industry standard. The
major areas it specifies are:
1. Mechanical-the interface connector and
cable. See Table 1.
2. Electrical-the logic signal levels and how
the signals are sent and received.
3. Functional-the tasks an instrument's interface may perform-such as sending
data, receiving data, triggering the instrument, etc.-and the protocols to be used.
See Table 2.
Today, a wide variety of instruments include
interfaces conforming to this mechanical,
electrical, and functional standard. These
GPIB-compatible instruments and instrument
controllers make it possible to achieve the
benefits of automated test systems without
paying the previous price of custom system
design. With GPIB compatibility, measurement capability can be chosen off-the-shelf
and simply cabled with standard bus cables
in either a linear or a star configuration.

TABLE 1
GPIB HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS
SUMMARY
• Cable lengths up to but not exceeding
20 meters (approximately 66 feet) with a
device load required for every 2 meters of
cable.
• Up to 15 devices (1 controller and 14 instruments) may be connected in linear or
star configurations.
• Voltages are generally TIL-compatible.
• GPIB signal and data lines are asserted (or
true) when pulled low (.,;;;+0.8 V) and released (or false) when high (~+2 .0V) .
• Maximum data rate of up to
250 kilobytes/second over a distance of
20 meters, with 2 meters per device, or
faster with some special restrictions (refer
to IEEE Standard 488-1978 for details).

TEK

IEEE STANDARD 488 COMPATIBLE

GPIB
MADE EASY

SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS

TABLE 2
INTERFACE FUNCTIONS
DEFINED BY IEEE STANDARD 488·1978

An automated test and measurement system usually consists of the following components:

graphic display terminal, and run under specialized instrument control and signal processing software such as TEK SPS BASIC.

• Multiple instruments: these are either
stimulus instruments, such as function
generators, pulse generators, and power
supplies; or measurement instruments,
such as counters, waveform digitizers,
and multimeters.

All these components can be easily interconnected if the GPIB interface has been
built in and appropriate functions made programmable. Before GPIB, most measurement systems were operated by controllers
that required a separate connector (port) for
each instrument. With the GPIB this is no
longer a requirement. Users can directly link
up to 14 instruments with the controller via
the bus, and set up the systems in linear or
star configurations. Additionally, some controllers can drive more than one GPIB port.
The Tektronix 4041 has an option for a second port, allowing control of up to 28 instruments. Or, if you need more, TEK SPS BASIC operated with a properly optioned DEC
PDP-11 minicomputer can drive up to four
GPIB ports, providing a total system potential of 56 instruments.

Function

Description

Source
Handshake
(SH)

Synchronizes message
transmission

Acceptor
Handshake
(AH)

Synchronizes message
reception

Talker

(T)

Allows instrument
to send data

Listener
(L)

Allows instrument
to receive data

Service
Request
(SR)

Requests service
from controller

RemoteLocal
(RL)

Allows instrument to select
between GPIB interface and
front-panel programming

Parallel
Poll
(PP)

Allows up to eight instruments
to simultaneously return a
status bit to the controller

• Computer peripherals: these are devices
such as tape drives, printers, and plotters
that store or display the results of the
tests.

Device
Clear
(DC)

Puts instrument in
known state

• A keyboard: this enables the user to send
commands or information to the system.

Device
Trigger
(DT)

Starts some basic operation
of the instrument

• A display: the display allows the user to
review intermediate results and to monitor
system operation.

Controller
(C)

Sends device addresses
and other interface messages

• Controller with software: this tells the instruments what to do, collects the results,
and processes them. The system controller is generally a small computer. The software or firmware operating system must
have a powerful, flexible I/O structure to
handle GPIB bus traffic. It must also have
processing power for waveform manipulation and graphics power for display.

All these devices (the controller, measurement instruments, and peripherals) comprise the hardware. The system cannot operate, however, unless it is driven by
software.
There are two levels of software necessary:
the operating system software and user
written application programs. The operating
system software provides a set of commands and functions that the user combines into a program that delineates the
measurement and processing task to be
performed . The software, guided by the
user program, works through the controller
to tell the instruments what signals to generate, what measurements to make, and tells
the controller what to do with the results.

For smaller systems, one or more of these
last three components are often incorporated in the system controller. Larger, more
powerful systems, however, may be minicomputer-based , augmented by one or
more high-speed mass storage devices, a

GPIB System Components

Star Configuration

The software and the program in the controller make the system do what the user
wants. The GPIB interface allows users to
plug system components together, but without software, the system can do nothing.

Instrument

OO~:~I"
:'1I1 . - ..... ."'"
1 IIIIen
GPIB

a
rc;... ...... "

Linear Configuration

INTERFACE MANAGEMENT BUS

(5 s/gn.tllnes}

010 ,

Inl'Cr

enl

Talll only

~;;;.;;;~ :~
0104

====

~ 0101
OIO'
010 1

010.

we . '"lenK' CI••r

l~===:J~;;; ATN '

SAO • Attention
s.rtlu "~u

••1

FlEN • Aemote Enabla

lOf . End Of' kHtnllfy

TEK

IEEE STANDARD 488 COMPATIBLE

GPIB
MADE EASY

SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS

In programmable instrument systems, the
' language' of the software or program has
several meanings:
1. The controller has its own language, such
as BASIC or C, and users must express
their intentions in this language.
2. Within the context of the controller's language, the instrument's commands (or
"language") have to be sent over the GPIB.
3. The actual control of the GPIB interface is
transparent to the user with Tektronix
instrument controllers and software.
In order to make the system operate, the
user has to know:
1. What tasks the system is to perform-the
system can do nothing by itself.
2. The controller's language.
3. The kind of data or language the instruments are designed to exchange.
To make these tasks easier for you,
Tektronix has taken several steps beyond
simple IEEE Standard 488-1978 compatibility. Consistency has been designed into
each system component for the greatest
degree of compatibility. Intelligence has
been designed in to relieve you from interfacing details. And firmware and software
have been designed and written to provide
the maximum in programming ease and
measurement capability.

Consistency Makes a Big Difference
Tektronix GPIB products are designed and
thoroughly evaluated for compliance with
IEEE Standard 488-1978 and for compatibility with one another. Because these products are designed to be compatible (i.e.,
meet the same standards), users usually
won't need to make hardware and software
modifications for each new addition or deletion to the configuration. Many software
routines need to be written only once, after
which only minor modifications are needed
with the addition of new instruments.
A status check routine, for instance, will
work on all Tektronix GPIB instruments. A
message terminator common to all Tektronix GPIB instruments is a further benefit.
But, since the IEEE Standard 488-1978 allows several optional message terminators,
Tektronix instruments go an extra step by
providing a switch for selecting optional
terminators. These features provide users
with the capability of quickly configuring
and reconfiguring interactive and automated measurement systems.
The result is a line of products that are not
only GPIB compatible-but are capable
GPIB instruments. They have the features
that make them useful and the compatibility
that makes them work together.

Tektronix Standard Codes and Formats
Means Programming Ease

GPIB ADDRESS

IEEE Standard 488-1978 specifies the hardware interface and its basic functional protocol. It also specifies a set of codes called
interface messages that control interface
functions. However, the IEEE Standard 4881978 does not specify the syntax or coding
of device-dependent messages-the messages that control the programmable features of the instrument.
Since the device-dependent messages are
not specified, instruments that conform to
the IEEE Standard 488-1978 may use inconvenient or even incompatible message formats. It's much like a telephone systemthe hardware link is well defined, but unless
both parties speak the same language,
communication is impOSSible. That's why
Tektronix developed a codes and formats
standard that specifies the syntax and coding of device dependent messages, while
retaining full IEEE Standard 488-1978
compatibility. The Tektronix Standard Codes
and Formats specifies message coding to:
• Be simple and unambiguous.
• Use commands that are common among
similar devices.
• Use simple, easy-te-remember mnemonics.
The benefits of the Tektronix Standard
Codes and Formats, a major feature of the
Tektronix GPIB communications protocol,
are numerous. Because of their natural English-like structure, instrument control commands and messages are easy to use. The
result is a GPIB implementation that is specifically designed to overcome the programming rigidity and cumbersome procedures
of other GPIB systems.

ASCII Data Standard
Since most controllers accept ASCII data
directly, Tektronix GPIB instrument commands are coded in ASCII. This eliminates
the need for error-prone data conversions or
byte-by-byte encoding. For example, to set
the
center
frequency
of
the
492AP Spectrum Analyzer to 1.75 MHz, the
command is simply written FREQ
1.75 MHz-no more calculated percentages
of full-scale or BCD equivalents. Settings for
Tektronix GPIB instruments are sent as
ASCII data in human readable form
l/

TALKONLY:-=r
LISTEN ONLY

1 2 .'> ..

De vice
Functions
e .g ., 76 120
Programmable
Waveform
Digitizer

•

1IIIIIIi
- - OPEN--

EOI- - Each GPIB instrument or peripheral, called a device,
must be assigned a different system address; this can
be done simply by setting switches, usually located on
the back panel of the device.

Flexible Formats
Many minor format items that are aggravations in other systems are also taken care of
by Tektronix Standard Codes and Formats.
For example, Tektronix GPIB instruments accept negative zeros and leading and trailing
spaces; they also overlook inconsistent use of
upper and lower case letters. And, since
truncated numbers can drastically affect measurements, Tektronix GPlB instruments round
off rather than truncate: e.g., a value of 2.49
becomes 2.5 rather than 2.4. In short, the
built-in intelligence is used to make intelligent
decisions. That makes your programming job
much less rigid and substantially easier.

Common Messages
To make things even easier, Tektronix Sta~
dard Codes and Formats also specifies messages that are to be common to all Tektronix
programmable instruments. For example, you
can program your system to leam the current
settings of any Tektronix GPIB instrument by
sending the instrument the SET? message.
Any GPIB compatible instrument from Tektronix-whether it is a waveform digitizer, a
programmable power supply, or a function
generator-interprets SET? the same way.
The instrument firmware gathers the instrument's settings together and assembles them
into a human readable message to be sent
over the bus to the controlling software. If you
know how to operate a function generator,
then you already know how to read a settings
message from a Tektronix GPIB compatible
function generator.
Inle riK. functions

'-I

I
I
I~
I

I I

168 4 2 1

l I Ij III

LF OREOI~

ATN

·1.I="mm=I~I'El=+H

An.

@@®'''€h!.!+

I.
'

I
I
I
I
I

Device

Functions
• .g., 404 1
System
Controller
(with IEEE-488 Intertace)

TEK

IEEE STANDARD 488 COMPATIBLE

GPIB
MADE EASY

SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS

BASIC Languages
Because users are increasingly interacting
with GPIB systems at the controller keyboard
rather than at instrument panels, GPiB systems must be as friendly as possible. This
means, too, that the controller languages
should be simple, logical, and easy to interpret and implement. That's why BASIC, the
established language for Tektronix instrument
controllers, is the preferred language of
Tektronix Standard Codes and Fonnats.
BASIC is an established language with wide
use and familiarity. It is also an English-like
language that is easy to learn and understand. So, combined with the English-like
messages used with Tektronix GPIB instruments, it becomes a consistent and familiar
means of communicating with your system.
And your program listings are easy to read
and follow, with very little interpretation required. (For more details on Tektronix Sta~
dard Codes and Formats, ask your Tektronix
Sales Engineer or representative.)
Controllers and Software to Match Your
Needs
Tektronix offers controller-software packages to meet varying GPIB system needs.
Controllers/Software Packages
• The 4041 System Controller, optimized for
instrument control in a variety of situations, including test and measurement
and spectrum analysis.
• The 4132 Intelligent Graphics Workstation,
with 32-bit processor capabilities and excellent optional GPIB control.
• TEK SPS BASIC software with the DEC
PDP-11 Series and DEC Micro PDP-11
minicomputers, optimized for systems with
full waveform acquisition, processing, and
graphics.
Software Packages
• GURU II software, an interface package for
the IBM PC (or IBM-compatible PC), using
National's GPiB card. This package contains a TEST PROGRAM GENERATOR,
programming examples and an excellent
manual to help the novice user get started
or the familiar user be more productive.
• The TekMAP (Tektronix Measurement
Applications Programs) library of software products supports the Tektronix
7000 Series GPIB programmable digitizers and extends the digitizers by integrating them with Tektronix controllers,
IBM personal computers or HP Series
200 technical computers.
The 4041 System Controller
The 4041 System Controller is a compact,
modular controller designed for rackmount,
bench-top, or portable use. Its operating
system language is an extended BASIC designed for use by both the casual and the
sophisticated programmer.

Tektronix 4041 System Contro/ier.

The 4041 controller contains three microprocessors, with the CPU being the powerful 16-bit 68CXX>. Standard memory is 32 Kilobytes with optional expansion to a maximum
of 512 Kilobytes. A 2O-character alphanumeric LED display, a 2O-character thermal
printer, a DC-100 magnetic tape cartridge
drive, 18 function keys, a GPIB port, an RS232 port, and a real time clock and calendar
capability are all standard. An additional
GPIB/RS-232 port pair is optional, with the
second GPIB port having Direct Memory Access capability. With 14 GPIB instruments
per GPIB port, the 4041 System Controller
offers the capability of controlling up to 28
GPIB instruments. Other options include an
8-bit parallel TIL interface (Option 02); SCSI
(Small Computer System Interface, Option
03, for external disk mass storage and a
second RS-232 port) to support interfacing
to floppy and hard disks for greater file and
data storage; and a detachable program
development/debug keyboard.
The capabilities of standard 4041 BASIC
can be expanded by installing ROM (ReadOnly Memory) packs to extend operational
features of the 4041 into a broad range of
systems applications, with functions running faster than equivalent BASIC routines.
The program development ROMs (with keyboard, or an RS-232 terminal), give the engineer or production test programmer access to the system language. Its Englishlike commands, Simple syntax, and line-byline interpreter implementation combine for
a friendly and interactive system. A variety
of other features are also included to increase friendliness . For example, viable

names may be up to eight characters long,
allowing meaningful names such as RISETIME, VOLTAGE 1, or DELAY. And as another example, subprograms and program
lines can be named-e.g ., 1000 SRQPOLL:
or 200 RMS VOLTS-for quick and easy
access.
Beyond enhancements for simplicity, 4041
BASIC also has enhancements that make it
a powerful tool for sophisticated programmers. It includes capabilities for FORTRANlike subprograms, variable passing from
main program to subprograms, declaration
of local and global variables, and many other features.
Yet, for all its sophistication, the 4041 is still
particularly desirable for use by lower-skill
operators in a production environment. Instrument control programs can be designed and written to print user prompts on
the 4041 display and the programs can be
assigned to any of the ten user-definable
keys on the 4041 front panel. Then the
4041 program development ROM and keyboard can be removed from the controller.
This puts the 4041 into an execute-only
mode with its programs protected. The lower-skill user need only follow the front-panel
display prompts and press the designated
keys to execute programs .
To return to the engineering or program development mode, simply plug the program
development ROMs (with keyboard or an
RS-232 terminal) back into the 4041 . You
again have access to all of the ease and
power of 4041 BASIC programming.

TEK

IEEE STANDARD 488 COMPATIBLE

SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS

GPIB
MADE EASY

The 4041 R01 Graphics ROM pack gives the
4041 the capability to generate graphic
commands to interact with peripheral devices using Tektronix compatible graphic
codes. These high-level and primitive commands allow you to construct and incorporate graphic images, symbols, charts and
diagrams into your system applications,
greatly enhancing system usability.
The 4041 R02 Plotting ROM Pack gives the
4041 the capability to generate graphs and
to plot data. Designed as an easy-to-use
tool to automatically generate scientific
graphics, the plotting ROM pack requires
the presence of the 4041 R01 Graphics ROM
Pack in order to operate. Graphs can be
generated and displayed on any graphic
peripheral device supported by the
4041 R01. The automatic plotting commands
are the heart of the 4041 R02. These commands, given your data, draw axes with
appropriate tic marks and plot the desired
data. You need little experience to program
graphics or plotting routines. All you need to
do is supply the data to be graphed.
The 4041 R03 Signal Processing ROM Pack
gives the 4041 the ability to support instrumentation system applications requiring
waveform processing. Coupled with our
programmable digitizers and oscilloscopes,
it will produce broader system configurations and effective solutions for signal analysis. The functions contained in the
4041 R03 provide a high level approach to
deal with signal processing applications
normally solved by lengthy programs requiring extensive knowledge of waveform
processing and computer fundamentals.
Combined with the graphics and plotting
ROM packs, the 4041R03 allows you to
produce, analyze and display waveforms
semiautomatically.
The 4041 R04 Utility ROM Pack adds still
more general purpose capabilities to your
4041 . These range from such convenience
items as one line descriptions of error
codes to capabilities for building PROM
files for programming your own EPROMS.
4132 Intelligent Graphics Workstation
The 4132 workstation combines state-ofthe-art microprocessor technology, advanced architectures, and flexible system
software. They are designed to meet a
wide range of computing system
applications.
GPIB Interface
An important 4132 feature is an optional
GPIB interface that supports programmable instruments such as oscilloscopes, digitizers, audio test systems, multimeters,
function generators, spectrum analyzers,
and logic analyzers. As with other Tek GPIB
based products, the 4132 conforms to the

IEEE-488 standards and to Tektronix' own
Standard Codes and Formats that specifies the syntax and coding of device-dependent messages.
The GPIB interface is capable of supporting up to 14 GPIB-compatible instruments,
in addition to the 4132 interface itself. The
instruments are classified as either controllers, talkers or listeners. The controller supervises the GPIB, determining which instruments send and receive data over the
bus. A talker sends messages and data
over the bus, and a listener receives messages and data. The 4132 programmable
interface allows the user to specify devicedependent parameters, such as primary
and secondary addresses, end-of-message and end-of-header delimiters.
Each 4132 workstation can support up to
six high-speed GPIB ports. These highspeed ports use direct memory access
(DMA) to transfer block data into a cache
memory at rates in excess of 250 Kbytes
per second.

The primary language used for GPIB communication is Tek's own version of ANSI
BASIC. This version includes 39 GPIB-related routines and has the capability of detecting seven different GPIB conditions.
Because it is a compiled rather than an
interpreted version, program execution is
extremely quick. In addition to having all
the standard features of ANSI BASIC, Tek's
version adds GPIB functionality, extended
1/0, array slices (which facilitates matrix
manipulation), I/O enhancements, and an
easy-to-use programming environment and
compiler. A 4050 sifter program provides a
utility for converting 4050 programs into
Tek ANSI BASIC format.
Among the 1/0 enhancements of Tek's
ANSI BASIC is the ability to handle synchronous or asynchronous communications
automatically, eliminating complicated addressing and control commands. Tek's
ANSI BASIC can communicate with the bus
itself or with any instrument on the bus.

TEK

GPIB
MADE EASY

IEEE STANDARD 488 COMPATIBLE

SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS

• High speed data output modification for
the 390AD digitizer.
• A high bandwidth modification (750 MHz)
of the 7912AD digitizer.
• Auto-calibration MUX controller and stimulus generator.
• Others per your request.

11400 Series Digitizing Oscilloscopes
The 11401 and 11402 are the first in a new
line of programmable digitizing oscilloscopes. These versatile scopes, along with
the array of new plug-ins and probes that
support them, solve measurement problems
equally well on a designer's bench or in a
programmable test system. Digital
designers will benefit from flexible triggering
features and an eight channel display. Analog and power supply designers can apply
extensive waveform processing to signals
acquired through high performance differential and single-ended amplifiers. 11000
Series digitizing scopes can follow your
designs into production. Full programmability via either IEEE-488 or'RS-232C, and features like a DMA controller for fast waveform transfers make these scopes a perfect
fit for systems. 11000 Series Digitizing Oscilloscopes set new standards in performance
and excellence.
Versatility for a Wide Range of
Applications
Rve new plug-ins and three new probes
bring outstanding versatility to the
11401/402. The measurement system and
waveform processing functions lead to
quick solutions to a wide variety of voltage,
time, area and energy problems. The 11401
can process and measure signals from high
bandwidth 50 n amplifiers, high impedance
amplifiers and differential amplifiers. 1 mV
sensitivity and 500 V maximum input voltage
let users capture small signals from transducers or monitor ac power lines.

See page 207 for complete description and
specifications.

Custom System Services
Three tiers of Tek Custom Services are
available to ease your selection process.

Custom Systems offer single-shot or repetitive
measurement capability and control of up to
56 GPIB instruments per controller, fully
configurable to your specifications. Included
are full warranties, installation, and other product support services.
While we provide the core system package,
specialized drivers and software operating
system after consultation with your software
engineers and operating personnel, it is
generally more cost effective for you to
provide your own applications software.
This better prepares users to do routine
modifications and updating, and gives you
the local expertise you need to make the
best use of your system investments.
Customized Measurement Packages
Customized Tektronix Measurement Packages are modifications to existing preconfigured systems. Each offers powerful
capability in a cost effective benchtop size.
Signal acquisition units span bandwidths of
up to 750 MHz real time and up to 14 GHz
with sampling plug-ins.
Modified Products
Modified Products include the customization
of selected digitizers, as well as the 'system
glue' (specialized intemal interfaces, etc.) required to hold the system together.

These off-the-shelf custom items for your
system needs include:
• Additional serial I/O drivers for your
communications/printing needs. Up to 8
instrument channels and up to 4 peripheral ports may be supported.
• Special disk drivers for RL02 disk pack
drives. For TEK SPS BASIC V02.
• GPIB program decoder plug-in that enhances the 7854 oscilloscope by interfacing to programmable vertical and time
base settings with selected plug-ins.

TEK SPS BASIC Software with DEC
PDP-11 Minicomputers
When equipped with Tektronix supplied
GPIB interfaces, DEC PDP-11 Series minicomputers can be operated with TEK SPS
BASIC software to provide the most powerful big-system instrument control and signal
processing. A wide variety of peripherals
can be handled, including plotters, line printers, graphic terminals, magnetic tapes, and
single or multiple disk storage systems.
Additionally, with the proper options, up to
four GPIB interface ports can be supported.
This means control of and data collection
from up to 56 GPIB instruments.

Two versions of TEK SPS BASIC are available, the standard version and the extended
memory version. The extended memory version permits processing of very large arrays
in computers having up to 128 kilowords of
memory with memory management.
Other than memory differences, both versions of TEK SPS BASIC software have the
same major features. These include a mod-'
ular architecture conSisting of a resident
monitor and an expandable library of over
100 nonresident commands. This unique
design lets you configure a software system
to meet your specific needs yet leaves the
system open for adding new commands
and processing modules.
Measurement data can be stored and
accessed in a variety of ways. Information
can be read or written in either ASCII or
binary. Named files can be accessed on
hard or flexible disks, magnetic tape, or
cassettes. Information can be read from
files either sequentially or randomly. TEK
SPS BASIC commands give you complete
file management capability.
Comprehensive graphics permit waveform
plots and X-V plots between waveforms. Either can be done with single commands. The
output is complete with scaled and labeled
axes and can be hard-copied to paper.
There's also data logging capability for
automated waveform capture. And the
software's better than 7-digit precision
means much higher resolution than possible
in conventional oscilloscope measurements.
Plus, there are special data structures to
retain both numeric and literal information
(scale factors and units) associated with
a given waveform. This waveform data

TEK

IEEE STANDARD 488 COMPATIBLE

SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS

structure, as well as numeric arrays or portions of numeric arrays, can be operated
on arithmetically as easily as can simple numeric variables.
Beyond extending the standard mathematical operations and functions to include
waveform processing, TEK SPS BASIC also
provides special waveform processing functions. Waveforms can be integrated, differentiated, convolved, correlated, and fast
Fourier transformed-all with single commands. Polar conversions can also be performed with a single command to present
results such as magnitude and phase.
With its large array size capabilities (limited
only by memory in most cases), advanced
signal processing, and program and instrument tasking capabilities (including error
control for independent operation) , TEK
SPS BASIC offers all of the flexibility and
power necessary to control anything from
the simplest to the most sophisticated test
and measurement system.

SPD Software
Signal ProceSSing and Display (SPD) Software supports 196 processing , analysis,
and data-to-display functions using Tek
digitizers in conjunction with an IBM PC,
PC/XT, or PC/AT. Designed for scientific
and engineering applications, this package
includes complete mathematical functions
plus waveform data, I/O utilities, analysis,
processing, and ' graphic display functions.
Access is via disk or GPIB port using popular waveform digitizers.
GURU II Software
GURU II is a Simple but powerful package
that provides control of GPIB (IEEE Standard 488) electronic instruments from an
IBM PC (or compatible). It offers the menudriven Test Procedure Generator to speed
applications programming.
GURU II's Test Procedure Generator
(TPG.BAS), written in BASIC, is a self-explanatory menu-driven program. It is the
right tool for instrument system users who
want fast results or who don 't want to learn
to program their system in BASIC. It allows
users to generate a program that runs a
specific test sequence-without writing a
single line of code. Users need to know
only the details of the test to be performed
and the equipment used.
The TPG is most suited to nondigitizer applications where testing of devices is required
using programmable power supplies, digital
voltmeters, signal sources, and counters.
For users who want to write their own applicat ion programs , GURU" provides
SUBS.BAS, a set of canned subroutines.
These subroutines perform functions common to many test and measurement appli-

cations, complementing the IBM PC compatible Microsoft BASICA language (an advanced form of BASIC).

TekMAP Software
The Tektronix Measurement Application
Programs (TekMAP) library of software
products supports the Tektronix 7000
Series GPIB programmable digitizers in
automated engineering or research environments. It extends the versatility of Tektronix
digitizers by integrating them with Tektronix
controllers, IBM personal computers or HP
Series 200 technical computers.
Basic communication utilities, accessible
through friendly menu-driven user interfaces, are available through Communication and Control Utility Software.
Extended measurement capabilities (such
as automated pulse parameter analysis,
Fast Fourier transformation and propagation delay measurements) are provided by
the Time and Amplitude Measurement Software products.

Tektronix Support for Your GPIB System
With GPIB products and signal processing
systems from Tektronix, you're not left on
your own after the product is purchased.
Tektronix offers complete support and
training for the operation and maintenance
of its GPIB products and systems.
Every product is shipped with a complete
and comprehensive operating manual. Additionally, a variety of training services are
available. Training classes are available
both at our home office and at selected
sites around the world.
As part of the long-term support for GPIB
products and systems, Tektronix offers a
variety of application literature and support.

HANDSHAKE is an applications newsletter
from Tektronix published quarterly, and
contains application and technical articles
covering the broad spectrum of instrument
control and signal processing.
The Tektronix Instrumentation Software library provides software and application information for Tektronix programmable measurement instruments and systems. There
are three types of software currently available: Measurement Software, Instrument
Utility Software, and User-Exchange Software. The Tektronix Instrumentation Software Library catalog provides program abstracts and ordering information.
An extensive collection of application notes
and magazine article reprints is another
source of information offered by Tektronix.
Our Sales Offices and Sales Representatives maintain a list of current literature and
will be glad to supply you with items in your
areas of interest.

GPIB
MADE EASY

Warranties and service are another part of
the support you get from Tektronix .
Tektronix maintains a network of service
centers for your maintenance needs at
strategic locations throughout the world.

Guide for Selecting GPIB Instruments
When selecting GPIB instruments for a specific application, be sure to check several
key specifications for suitability in the
configuration.
Rrst, make sure that the instrument can
make the desired measurements. Next, determine that the interface functions are
compatible with the proposed usage and
with other instruments in the GPIB configuration. The following items should be used
as a checklist with your sales representative when considering instruments to be
used in GPIB configurations:
1. Is the instrument intended for interactive
measurement analysis or automated
measurement; i.e., are all necessary instrument functions remotely programmable, or will an operator be available to adjust settings?
2. Does the instrument's GPIB interface
have the necessary set of functions implemented at the desired level? (For example, AH1 is needed for any useful interaction, SH1 is required for instruments
supplying measurements to the
controller.)
3. Are diagnostics available to check out
the instrument from the front panel or
over the GPIB interface?
4. Does the instrument use standard codes
and format conventions for terminators,
numeric formats, etc.?
5. Can the instrument's front-panel setting
be read from the controller and saved for
later automated set up?
6. Can the front panel be ' locked out' via the
GPIB?

TEK

GPIB
MADE EASY

IEEE STANDARD 488 COMPATIBLE

SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS

ANALOG OSCILLOSCOPES

DIGITIZING OSCILLOSCOPES

PORTABLE OSCILLOSCOPE

NEW 11301 and 11302

NEW 11401 and 11402

NEW 2467 Option 10

These NEW oscilloscopes offer a new degree of
measurement versatility up to 500 MHz bandwidth. Full programmability via either the GPIB or
RS-232C plus a touchscreen operator interface
make these plug-in scopes ideal for both automatic test systems and benchtop applications. A
built -in 500 MHz counter/ timer and peak
detecting make measurements that normally require a digitizer. An automatic measurement sequence provides common pulse parameters at
the touch of a button. Template waveforms allow
comparison of complex signals with predefined
limits. Cursors allow dc measurements to within
0.6%. The results of all measurements are displayed numerically on the CRT and are available
over either bus. See page 201.

These NEW 500 MHz and 1 GHz bandwidth oscilloscopes are equally at home in a system or on a
designer's bench. Full programmability through
both the GPIB and RS-232C, direct memory access option for fast waveform transfer through
the GPIB, extensive waveform processing along
with pulse parameter analysis, and 50 ps singleshot resolution on time A-B measurements combine to make these scopes ideal for automated
environments. These scopes are easily adapted
to rackmounting and can be equipped with cable
feedthroughs that make it possible to connect
signals to the rear of the instruments. Accurate ,
automatic measurements of voltage, timing, and
area/energy can easily be set up and read out
over either standard bus. See page 207.

The NEW 2467 has the fastest visual writing rate
available in a portable oscilloscope due to the microchannel plate CRT, which amplifies the brightness of transient events. The 2467 Option 10 can
be easily programmed to assist the scope operator to perform a complete sequence of measurements. Front panel settings can be remotely set
or changed via the GPIB. Measurement results
can be both displayed on the CRT and read back
over the bus. Auto Set-Up scales the vertical, horizontal, and trigger systems to provide a stable,
automatically triggered display of the waveforms.
See page 279.

PORTABLE OSCILLOSCOPES

PORTABLE OSCILLOSCOPE

DIGITIZING CAMERA SYSTEM

NEW 2465A, 2455A, 2445A OPTION 10

2430 and NEW 2430M

NEW DCS01 Option 1C·l

The NEW 2465A, 2455A, and 2445A-350, 250,
and 150 MHz oscilloscopes-can be easily programmed to assist the scope operator to perform
a complete sequence of measurements. Front
panel settings can be remotely set or changed
with display prompting of messages, providing
guidance for the operator. The results of voltage,
time, frequency, phase, and ratio can be both displayed on the CRT and read back over the bus. In
addition, Auto Set-Up scales the vertical, horizontal, and trigger systems to provide a stable, automatically triggered display of the probed waveforms. A Save/Recall utility saves and recalls up
to 20 setups for automating repetitive measurement sequences. The CT versions are ideal for
automatic frequency, period, pulse width, and
time between events measurements; the DM for
automatic counter and digital multi meter tests
and measurements; and the DV for high resolution video applications. See page 278.

The 2430 brings the best features of our industry
standard 2400 Series into the digital world. It features 150 MHz bandwidth, dual channel simultaneous acquisition, 5 ns maximum sweep speed,
8-bit vertical resolution . The Tek-patented feature ,
"Save-on-Delta", makes pass/fail decisions. The
2430 is fully programmable over the GPIB. It
sends and receives waveforms, front panel settings, custom menus, and operator prompts. Outputs include an analog plotter output. It is compatible with the P6407 Word Recognizer probe.
The NEW243JM offers all features of the 243), plus
CIIL capability for operation in Modular Automatic
Test Equipment (MATE) used in testing military avionics and weapons systems. See page 326.

The NEW DCS01 Digitizing Camera System combines CCD technology with an IBM pc, XT, AT, or
compatible to acquire and digitize repetitive and
transient waveforms displayed on oscilloscopes,
spectrum analyzers, and other displays. Used
with scopes having the microchannel plate CRT,
such as the 7104, 11302, and 2467, the DCS01
can acquire repetitive and transient signals at the
full bandwidth of the scope. With other scopes,
the DCS01 will acquire repetitive events at the full
scope bandwidth and transient events according
to the photographic writing rate of the oscilloscope. See page 353.
"' Available first quarter 1987.

TEK

IEEE STANDARD 488 COMPATIBLE

GPIB
MADE EASY

SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS

WAVEFORM ACQUISITION PRODUCTS
2230/2220 Digital Storage Oscilloscopes

336 Option 01 Digital Storage Oscilloscope

7D20/7D20T Programmable Digitizers

These portable, high-value oscilloscopes feature
both digital storage and nonstorage capability to
100 MHz (2230) and 60 MHz (2220). 100 ns glitch
capture is accomplished with the Peak Detect
mode (envelope), which digitizes and stores, in
acquisition memory as a data pair, the minimum
and maximum levels of the input signal. The 2230
and 2220 also feature unlimited storage time; expandable, compressible, repositionable stored
traces; save reference memory; pre-/posttrigger
viewing; roll and scan modes; standard X-Y piotter output; and optional interfaces. See page 330.

This compact oscilloscope can simultaneously
display analog and digital waveforms, and can
store up to 16 digitized waveforms for recall and
display. Nonstorage bandwidth is 50 MHz; storage bandwidth is 140 kHz. Vertical and horizontal
scale factors, delay time position, and voltage
and time readouts of cursor positions are displayed on the CRT, as is a menu of many of the
features and modes. An Auto mode for both vertical volts/division and horizontal time/division allows "hands-off" operation in many applications.
See page 334.

The 7020 plug-in converts any 7000 Series mainframe into a fully programmable, digital oscilloscope with 70 MHz equivalent time bandwidth.
Operating modes include: Envelope, Average,
and Roll. Optimized for interactive and automated
applications, from biomedical research to radio
modulation. Remotely controllable over the GPIB.
Shown with R7603 mainframe.
The 7020T provides the same digitizer capabilities in a compact standalone package. Supported by TekMAP 7020 Time and Amplitude Measurement software. See page 336.

5223 Option 10 Digitizing Oscilloscope
This 10 MHz digital storage oscilloscope provides a digitized display that will never fade or
bloom. Selecting Roll mode yields a continually updated display of memory contents by
providing a strip-chart-like view of Signals at
slow sweep rates. Applications range from
measuring mechanical displacement trans- '&iii~~~i!
ducer signals to biomedical activities .
Option 10 GPIB Interface provides I/O of stored waveforms and control of
5223 digital storage functions (except vertical and horizontal expansion
and position controls). Waveform output format is selectable through this
interface for either BINARY or ASCII. Plug-in functions not remotely controllable. See page 351.

7854 Waveform Processing Oscilloscope
A two-channel, waveform processing, digital
storage oscilloscope having 400 MHz equivalent time bandwidth. Keystroke programming
of local keyboard and remote Waveform Calculator allows user-designed waveform measurement routines for tests or experiments.
Signal averaging capability can ' recover signals buried in noise and improve measurement
accuracy. All mainframe keystroke functions and operating modes can be
remotely controlled via the GPIB. (Plug-in functions controllable only with
custom interface. Contact your local Sales Engineer.) Supported by TekMAP
7854/1BM PC Communication software. See page 338.

390AD Programmable Digitizer

7912AD Programmable Digitizer

76120 Programmable Digitizer

This two-channel, 1D-bit digitizer achieves excellent dynamic accuracy with a two-stage flashconversion process. Single-channel operation can
provide 60 megasamples per second. Built-in selfcalibration and self-test features. Remotely controllable over the GPIB. Applications vary from ultrasonic testing to video. See page 349.

The 7912AD is designed for interactive and automated applications. It digitizes and stores singleshot or repetitive signals from millisecond to subnanosecond duration. Waveform data is stored in
a 4096 word memory. See page 347.

Two independent waveform digitizers in one compact instrument, the 76120 is ideal for use with
Automatic Test Equipment or anywhere highly accurate, time-domain measurements are required.
Memory partitioning helps capture fast, successive,
randomly occurring events. Multiple sample rate
switching is available during waveform acquisition.
Remotely controllable over GPiB. See page 344.

4041 System Controller
A powerful and expandable system controller
intended principally for execute-only environments such as production-line testing. Operating
parameters include Interrupt and Error Handling
modes. Options and peripherals equip it for inter-

active flexibility in research lab applications. Programming language is BASIC with English-like
commands, extensions, simple syntax, and lineby-line interpreter. A 1.8 lines/second thermal
printer is built-in. See page 355.

SYSTEM CONTROLLER

TEK

IEEE STANDARD 488 COMPATIBLE

GPIB
MADE EASY

SYSTEM INSTRUMENTS

DESKTOP CONTROLLER·BASED ACQUISITION/PROCESSING MEASUREMENT PACKAGES
MP 2501

MP 2101
Based on the Tektronix 7912AD Programmable
Digitizer, the MP 2101 is a high-speed, signal acquisition and transient digitizing system. The
7912AD is remotely controllable over the GPlB.
Utilizes the 4041 . See page 375.

MP 1101
Based on the Tektronix 7912AD Programmable
Digitizer. This compatible signal acquisition and
display package can be front-panel controlled or
completely programmed via the GPIB Interface
from any suitable controller. See page 374.

Based on the Tektronix 7854 Oscilloscope and
the 4207 Color Graphics Display Terminal/4041
System Controller equipped with ROM packs, this
system can acquire, process, store, and display
electrical signals. 4041 BASIC routines from the
Utility Software permit system operation with limited programming experience. The 7854 is remotely controllable over the GPIB. See page 375.

MP 2201
Based on the Tektronix 76120 Programmable
Digitizer, the MP 2201 is a complete signal acquisition, waveform processing, storage, and display
system. The 76120 is remotely controllable over
the GPIB. Utilizes the 4041 . See page 375.

MP 1201
Based on the Tektronix 76120 Programmable
Digitizer. This compatible signal acquisition and
display package can be front-panel controlled or
completely programmed via the GPIB Interface
from any suitable controller. See page 374.

MP 2902
The Audio Test Program Generation software allows rapid development of an automated audio
measurement system, even by nonprogrammers.
Tests supported include: total harmonic distortion
vs frequency, total harmonic distortion vs output

level, intermodulation distortion vs level (SMPTE
and CCIF), CCIF intermodulation distortion vs frequency, frequency response, signal-to-noise, level (voltage and power), linearity, external stimulus,
and others. See page 377.

MP2601
The MP 2601 couples the 4041 Controller with the
2430 Oscilloscope for simultaneous two channel
signal acquisition having 150 MHz bandwidth.

This portable measurement package provides extensive signal acquisition capabilities with signal
analysis to form a system directed at measurement solutions. See page 376.

The MP 2901 addresses two of the most difficult
aspects of automating an operation-software
development and interfacing to the device-undertest. The multifunction interface (MI 5010) allows
easy data acquisition and/or control of the
device-under-test by the 4041 System Controller.

The task of software development is made rapid
and easy. TEK EZ-TEST leads non programmers
(via a set of menus) to translate manual procedures into error-free, structured BASIC code. See
page 376.

AUDIO MEASUREMENTS PACKAGE

OSCILLOSCOPE MEASUREMENT PACKAGE

INCOMING INSPECTION TEST STATION
MP 2901

RECOMMENDED GPIB CABLES

CURVE TRACER

NEW 370 Programmable Curve Tracer

The NEW 370 Curve Tracer is remotely controllable via the GPIB for automated acquisition of
curve data. Characteristic curve data can be sent
in either direction over the bus. The front panel
controls, except for those intended for local use
only (such as Intensity), can be remotely set with
a controller (like the Tek 4041) or with an IBM PC
or compatible. See page 379.

Part Number

Oeocription

..:...::.:.01:.::2.=10=15-00===-+-----:o-.s-me-==te=r.::':sing=le::sh-ie-Id--012 10 GHz) in the field of communications
and data transmission along with analytical
requirements of the test instrumentation for
such equipment has accented the need for
accurately tuned transmission lines on circuit boards. The low dielectric constant, dimensional stability and close tolerances of

raw material make Teflon an attractive selection for circuit board material in these
applications.
Circuit elements of precise size and position
can be fabricated for this application on
glass reinforced Teflon substrates.
Certified by UL for recognized printed wiring board components. Rammability classification 94v-D. We offer complete facilities
including:
Graphic Tooling
CAD-CAE N.C. Tooling
Metallurgical Analysis
Chemical Analysis and Control
Electrolytic and Electroless Plating

TYPICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Frequencies - > 10 GHz.
Dielectric Constant - from 2.17 to 10.6.
Standard Dielectric Thickness - 0.005* to
0.062" ; other thicknesses available.

Customer Support
Tektronix, Inc.
P.O. Box 500, O.S. 38-385
Beaverton, OR 97077

(503) 627-5314

TEK

DESIGN AND
PRODUCTION SERVICES

PLASTIC
PRODUCTS

MOLD TYPES

Molds meet stanoard DME specifications for any
custom design you may require.
Some of the more frequent mold types are listed
below.
High Volume Molds (Hardened Tool Steels)

- Built to produce in excess of 1 million quality
parts. We meet or exceed all Society of Plastic
Industry mold classification guidelines.
Low Volume Molds (Aluminum) - Primarily
built for short runs. Sizes range from 1 in round to
structural foam molds 32 in x 40 in.
Prototype Molds, Prototype Model Lab -

Design Consultation
Prototyping and Mold-Making
Manufacturing
Customer Support

Tektronix Plastic Products (TPP) provides
engineering services and high quality components to enable high technology manufacturers to reduce the labor content, number of components, and cost of their
products, in order to be competitive in
worldwide markets.
Full service capabilities support product design, mold design, prototyping, mold-building, and a complete range of manufacturing capabilities to meet the needs of high
technology industries.
State-of-the-art injection molding technology uses thermoplastic resins, and employs multiple finishing and assembly technologies to produce a product of the
highest value in terms of price, performance, and reliability.

PROTOTYPING AND
ADHESIVES CONSULTATION
Prototyping from models to polyurethane
and epoxy components using silicone rubber molds.
Development assistance with jigs, fixtures,
masks and protectors using silicone rubber
and polyurethane . A typical application
might be component masking for application of nickel-loaded acrylic paint for
EMIIRR shielding.
Selection of adhesives and solvents for
bonding operations.

CAPABILITIES
Tool Design - TPP uses a full 3D mechanical design package (DON) plus a
graphics applications programming language (GRAPL) for design creation, analysis, and N.C . programming of injection
molds. All designs are stored in an integrated data base, which provides easy access
to all design data when changing or modifying existing mold designs, or when creating new mold designs. Mold flow analysis
programs enable us to help you optimize
part design for the required manufacturing
process.
Electronic Data Exchange - Tektronix
has IGES in/out capability for utilizing CADgenerated data from most systems. (Tooling process time is shortened if your data
base is supplied in an electronic format.)
We are connected to the Tek Engineering
Network, allowing us access to most engineering departments via local area networks (LAN) or Hyperchannel. We can
transfer data via phone modem or
1600/6250 BPI mag tape.
Numerically-Controlled Machining
Tektronix has the capability to machine virtually any part or mold cavity configuration
including complex shapes and contoured
surfaces. By utilizing our CAD database,
considerable savings are realized in N.C.
programming time. Data is transmitted from
the CAD system to the machining centers
via DNC (Direct Numerical Control) or
punched tape.
EQUIPMENT
TPP has three fully interactive CAD/CAM
terminals linked via dedicated line to a
company mainframe. We also have a Csize plotter, an N.C. tape punch, and DNC
hardware.
Molding equipment includes injection molding machines ranging in clamp tonnage
from 13 to 1,000 tons. These machines are
capable of processing engineering grades
of thermoplastics and structural foam resins. Primary processes are controlled by
Maco IV, Scoremaker, and Injectorvisor
Systems.

Prototype tooling and model-making capabilities
to aid in the development of our customers'
products.
Carrier Systems - 3 in x4 in, 3 in x 4 '12 in,
4 in x 5 in, 6 in x 8 in, and 2 in x 4 in round carriers
are available. Carrier systems are designed for
quick setups, short runs, and cost savings on
mold components and mold construction.
SPECIAL SERVICES

As a part of Tektronix, TPP offers specially-coordinated high technology services not normally
available from a plastic parts manufacturer. We
provide expert design and materials consultation
plus processing capability in the following areas:
Laboratory Testing

EMC attenuation of conductive or coated plastiC
systems
o Corrosivity of flame-retardant resin systems
o As-molded part stress analysis
o Surface analysis (scanning electron
microscopy)
o UL approved molder C2160
o

Plastic-Metal Combinations

Product enclosures
Functional devices
o OutsertJinsert molding operations
o
o

Electroless and ElectrolytiC Plating

EMC/RR attenuation
Electrostatic discharge management
o Corrosion-resistant finishing
o Aesthetic finishing
o
o

Conductive Paint
o
o

EMC/RR attenuation
ESD management

Automated Painting
o

Aesthetic finishing

Delivery Systems
o
o

Just-in-Time Kanban
Matched to Customer Needs

International TOOling
o
o

Consultation
Mold Design and Build Management

Customer Support

Plastic Products
Tektronix, Inc.
3000 Lewis and Clark Highway, D.S. 08-545
Vancouver, WA 98661
(206) 699-7391

TEK

Machining

Sheet Metal

Assembly

Finishing

Tool and Design
Manufacturing
Quality Control
Packaging/ Shipping

Tektronix offers complete metal products
capabilities from Tool and Design through
manufacturing. Quality control is assured
and products shipped to customer
satisfaction.

MANUFACTURING CAPABILITIES
Tool and Design - Full design and documentation capabilities, with a tool room equipped to
bUild and maintain most types of tooling.
Machining Screw machines, sawing, and
CNC milling with machine-aligned cellular
processes.
Sheet Metal - Sanding, blank, pierce, turret
punching, shearing, forming , grinding and buffing. Material types include aluminum, copper alloys, brass, and stainless steel.
Programming - Full programming capabilities
for sheet metal and machining.
Hardware Assembly - Riveting, hardware insertion, spotwelding, gluing and complete enclosure assemblies.
Finishing - Auto and hand paint; lab for color
matching. Etch, lacquer, chromate, silk screening,
and printing with full nomenclature capabilities.
Packaging and Shipping - All items packaged and shipped to customer satisfaction.
Quality Control - Fully equipped with latest
state of the art equipment and technology.

EQUIPMENT LIST
Quality Control - Programmable measuring
system by Brown & Sharpe (0.00025 obtainable
measurements)
Programming - MEG 131 Graphic Terminals
coupled to VAX 111780 system.
Production Machining
• CNC screw machines
• CNC milling machines-horizontaVvertical
• CNC bar and chucker
• Automatic screw machines
• Belt sanders
• Vibratory finishers
• NC drillers
• Grinders
• Saws
Sheet Metal
• Shears
• Punch presses, 0-300 ton
• Power brakes, 12-55 ton, automatic back
gauges
• Spotwelders, 30 KVA-250 KVA
• Heli-arc welders

Hardware Assembly
• Presses, 2-8 ton
• Auto-press nut machines
• Eyelet machines
• Riveters
• Insertion machines
• Cabinet latch machines
Finishing
• Chromate coat, to MIL-C-5541 (clear & yellow)
• Automated etch line
• Ultra-sonic clean
• Variety chemical baths
• Automated electrostatic paint line (Ransberg
Disc)
• Automatic silk screen machines
• Automatic printing press
Tool/Die
• Jig bore
·EDM
• Grinding
• Lathes, mills and drills
Customer Support
Metal Products
Tektronix, Inc.
P.O. Box 500, D.S. 38-385
Beaverton, OR g70n
(503) 627-5314

TEK

TEK HYBRID
COMPONENTS

Hybrid Circuit Services

For over seventeen years, Tektronix has designed and produced high performance,
high reliability hybrid circuits not readily
available elsewhere. We have the expertise
needed to work closely with you to supply
custom hybrids which will help assure your
product's success. We offer services ranging from foundry service to full custom design. We have thick-film, thin-film , multilayer
ceramic , laser trim , surface mount, and
chip-and-wire technologies, plus the latest
in CAD systems, all under one roof. Our
modern production equipment is augmented by Class "A" MAP-II and Just-In-Time
manufacturing. We offer indepth application assistance, complete in-house testing,
and strong microelectronics A & 0 programs.
Thin-Film Hybrids
For microwave, high power, or high precision applications, our thin-film hybrids offer
small geometry for increased circuit density
and reduced parasitic inductance capacitance. We offer 20 ILm line widths ± 1 ILm ,
laser trimmed resistors of up to ± 0.05%,
ratio temperature coefficient of resistance
of +5 ppm/oC, eutectic die attach, two
layers of conductors, and the ability to
braze Kovar heat sinks to devices.

tion material. The layers are laminated and
co-fired to form a hermetic structure with a
very high interconnection density as well
controlled transmission lines. Electrical isolation among signal layers is provided by interspersed ground or voltage planes. By
adding components in chip form to the surface layer, complete circuits can be
formed. Our MLC process has been used
to build rugged, highpin-count (264 pins
and more) VHSIC type chip carriers .
Tektronix MLC devices offer 96% Alumina
for 50% greater thermal conductivity than
the customary 92% Alumina, 4 mil lines and
3 mil spaces, and a unique ability to braze
heat sinks and lead frames to a device.
Electro-optic Devices
Tektronix' expertise in hybrid electro-optic
devices for communication applications is
demonstrated by our LDM 1300 Laser Diode Module. This competitively priced standard product combines Gigabit lightwave
transmission, high output power, fast pulse
response, and a true hermetic seal with
competitive pricing. The LDM 1300's combination of features is not readily available
in any other similar device.

Thick-Film Hybrids
For medium complexity, high resistor count,
or special time adjustment applications, our
thick-film circuits are a cost effective
choice . With care, they can be used up to
2 GHz. We offer multilayer thick-films , passive chip components, surface-mount assembly, and chip-and-wire assembly to
achieve typical densities of 25 components
per square inch.
Multilayer Ceramic Hybrids
Our multilayer ceramic (MLC) hybrids make
use of metalized interconnections screened
onto multiple layers of thin ceramic insula-

Custom Ceramic Parts
Tektronix has over 30 years of experience
in the design and production of ceramic
components for electronic applications. We
can provide you with multilayer ceramic
substrates as described above , SLAM
packages, custom lids and covers, a wide
variety of ceramic insulators, powdered
metal parts, powdered metal sputtering targets, and custom ceramic CAT envelopes.

Quality and Reliability
Our Quality and Reliability departments
have expertise in standard reliability tests
and in highly specialized reliability evaluation procedures . We have complete
in-house electrical, mechanical, and environmental test capabilities. All of our hybrids undergo reliability demonstration testing to assure conformance with customer
specifications. A variety of our test methods meet or exceed MIL -STD-883C
requirements.
Doing Business With Us
We would be happy to discuss your needs
for custom or standard hybrid components
and to quote on your requirements. We also
welcome visits to our plant to consult with
our design and production staff and to tour
our facilities.
Customer Support
Hybrid Components Operation
Tektronix, Inc.
P.O. Box 500, D.S. 13-810
Beaverton, OR 97077
(503) 627-4220

TEK

INTEGRATED
CIRCUITS OPERATION

understand, time-saving design tools. This
abbreviated design method is becoming
very popular with first-time IC designers
and seasoned IC design engineers.
QuickChips begin with a prefabricated chip
that has a basic "core" array of transistors,
capacitors and resistors configured for interconnection. Given this impetus, the engineer
simply determines the custom interconnections for those circuit elements requiredincluding the specification of laser-trimmable
resistors for precise analog applications.
Once final designs are determined and approved, finished wafers can be delivered
(typically) within three weeks or less.
Bipolar Foundry Services:
605 GHz Bipolar Analog Processes
QuickCustom- ICs
Full Custom ICs
Microlithography:
Mask Design and Fabrication

This "designer-friendly" approach was developed by Tektronix engineers who have
many years of analog expertise in IC design.
Their mastery of integrated analog circuit
design and demonstrated experience have

Charge-Coupled Devices:
Scientific Imagers
Custom Components

Tektronix Integrated Circuits Operation
(ICO) is now marketing its formidable IC design and fabrication capabilities to those
who have IC performance requirements but
limited resources of their own .
Tek ICO has been supplying ICs with high
performance, superior quality, and proven
reliability to Tektronix ' product divisions
since 1967. Our integrated circuits continue
to provide important technological and market advantages for many state-of-the-art
products. Our foundry services for analog
application-specific designs are now available. In addition, a limited number of specialty components for high-performance applications are being offered.

A semicustom design approach , QuickCustom , helps reduce your development
time and cost. It consists of a series of
QuickChipw design formats and easy-to-

We also include a grid-based layout system
that specifies where the custom interconnects can be routed , and QuickKic , a
graphic layout editor that makes it easy for
even the first-time designer to digitize the
layout.
Typical ICO-developed QuickChips are
shown in the adjacent photographs
(QuickChips 2, 3 and 4).

THE QUIC
. kC'
hip FAM ILV
NPNsO,

MnVcc
to VEE

OuIckChtp 2
Famoly

142·524

6.5 GHz

32V

OuIckChtp 3

168

24GHz

95V

OuickCh'p 4

294

6.5GHz
< 400 ps ipd

32V

Reslslora

Cepecltora

2.046 Implanted
684 Implanted
ThIn Foim. 50 Wsqo,

Bonding
Peds

1.98 x 2.49 mm
to 4.00 x 4.19 mm

24·70

<16pF

297 x 305mm

4.9 x 49 mm
(l96mits,)

:IlA
36D

1290 Implanted
Thin Film 50 Wsq'

Chip Size

< 20pF

ThIn Film. 10 0< 50 Wsq o,

Programmable

< 59pF
or PNP transistors are also Included In OUlckChlps 3 and 4. The (T o( PNPs IS approxmately 30 MHz and they are

optimized (or use
trimmable.

as current sources (i.e., low collector capacitance).

02 Laser

•..
••,
••
••

Since we've developed advanced imagers
for high-resolution scientific imaging and
high-speed signal processing, we can supply you with custom charge-coupled devices (CCOs) for these applications. The
development of Tektronix high performance
components required development of very
sophisticated microlithography, high resolution , fine quality, VLSI mask-making services which are also available.
BIPOLAR ANALOG
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Two design methods are used for manufacturing custom analog ICs : Quick Custom and full custom .

streamlined the design process. Today,
ICO engineers are ready to provide you
with as much assistance as you require.
The "tools" include a complete guide enabling the first-time user to complete a design with minimal one-on-one coaching. We
provide you with a library of macro cells
(QuickChip 4), and SPICE models for the
"core" IC that will predict the performance
of your design , and ensure that your
QuickCustom circuit works the first time.

••
OuickChip 4

Full Custom
If higher performance or lower cost per chip
are your requirements, ICO also offers a
total custom design approach. One of our
experienced applications engineers will be
assigned to work with you or your team
throughout the entire project . Tektronix-

developed CAO/CAE software will be used
to assist you through circuit analysis , simulation and layout, greatly improving your
confidence in meeting design specifications the first time. Typical delivery of finished wafers is less than eight weeks from
approval of design layout.

TEK

MICROLITHOGRAPHY PRODUCTS
DESIGN SERVICES

MICROLITHOGRAPHY PRODUCTS
AND DESIGN SERVICES

Mask design on a graphic workstation

From minimally supported system time to
full device design, our microlithography facilities are structured to meet your mask
design needs. Working from menu-based
design technology and grid-based layouts,
we provide QuickChip" and gate array designs plus full custom , application-specific
analog and digital ICs. We use mask design tools to support development of nonstandard products. Routine efforts include
designs for: thick- and thin-film hybrid circuits, multilayer ceramic parts , waveguides,
precision mesh components, liquid crystal
and electroluminescent panels, graticules,
and small chemically milled parts. Also, we
are used to accommodating unusual requirements; we can handle yours.
Mask Fabrication

EBeam pattern data being reviewed poor to generation
of a photomask. Class 10 MEBES III write room IS at left.

The same commitment to customers' needs
is evident in our support of mask tooling.
Our state-of-the-art facility can meet all of
your photomask needs. Class 10 clean room
conditions are constantly maintained in critical manufacturing areas. Our technicians
demonstrate the expertise and versatility to
support the wide variety of work our Mask
Design group creates-from 10X reticles to
1X VLSI wafer scale integration masks. This

TK2048M CGO Scientific Imager (actual size).

part of our facility includes both G.CA/O.W.
Mann optical systems and Perkin-Elmer
Electron-Beam equipment. Our staff will
work with you on an individual basis to determine which design approach will meet
your requirements, and still be economical.
Our present capability provides tooling
from 21/2 by 21/2 inch up to 7 by 7 inch
glass substrates with a variety of
thicknesses. We supply critical feature control from millimeter to submicron sizes, with
position accuracy as small as 0.125- microns. Our claim of high quality products is
backed by equipment such as Leitz MPVDC and Nikon MPA-2A measurement systems. A Nikon CM-6 overlay comparator,
Quantronix repair station , and KLA and
Cambridge mask inspection systems, ensure that we deliver a superior product on
time-every time.
CHARGE-COUPLED DEVICES
Charge-coupled devices (CCOs) are MaS
integrated circuits that are essentially sampled data, analog delay lines. Used in such
diverse applications as ultra-sensitive imaging detectors, transversal filters, tapped analog delay lines, and high-speed samplers/
memory buffers, these inherently simple
devices have proven to be powerful yet
compact signal processing components.

For more than three years the CCO group
at Tektronix has been developing a specialized set of devices to incorporate signal
processing efficiency into Tektronix instruments. In the process we have developed
one of the most advanced CCO technologies in the industry. This technology is
available through a line of CCO products
and design services.

Our CCO imagers are fabricated using a
buried channel , three-phase , three-level
polysilicon gate process. This approach results in extremely high charge transfer efficiency and low background charge due to
dark current. Our wafer-scale integration
technology has made large pixel , large
imagers a reality . An example is the
TK2048M imager, shown above. This
imager has approximately 4.2 million picture
elements (pixels), each of which is 10 to
100 times more sensitive than conventional
high speed photographic film.

Custom Devices
For custom designs our CALMA based ,
state-of-the-art CAD system , advanced
microlithography capability-including wafer-scale E-beam mask making and three- or
four-phase CCO processes-make it possible for you to design virtually any type of
signal processing device. You can specify
nearly any format of serial-parallel-serial
CCO structures, optimized either for high
speed or wide dynamic range, imaging or
nonimaging. We also provide design and
fabrication support for certain types of peripheral circuits including wide-band preamplifiers, high speed clock drivers, correlateddouble-samplers, and timing/control logic.
If you've already completed a CCO design,
Tektronix ICO provides a complete CCO
foundry service to fabricate your device(s).
For further information, call:
ICO Marketing
Tektronix, Inc.

P.O. Box 500, D.S. 59-420
Beaverton, OR 97077

(503) 627-2515

TEK

MAGNETIC AND
SWITCHING COMPONENTS

Mag Latch Relay
Maintains Good Impedance Matching for
Signals up to 1 GHz in 50 (} Circuit
High Reliability (Bifurcated Gold Plated BeCu
Contacts)
Space Saving Design
Single or Dual Coil Drive

Magnetic Components
Fast Prototyping
Custom Engineering
Excellent Mechanical Integrity
Proven High Reliability
Flow Solderable and Washable Types
Available
Single Packages That Supply Power for
Electrostatic CRT Displays in Both Analog
and Digital Circuits
High Voltage Multipliers

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
CRT Displays
Medical Monitors
Module Power Supplies
Photocopiers and Printers
Test/Measurement Equipment
Electrostatic Precapacitors
Portable Radar and X-Ray Systems

Ceramic or Standard Circuit Boards

Tektronix Magnetic and Switching Components are designed to meet the stringent
reliability specifications of Tektronix, Inc.
products. The same components which
power over 500,000 TEK instruments are
available for your products. Our Transfer
Molded High Voltage Transformers and
combination High Voltage/Low Voltage
Transformers are environmentally sealed ,
PC mountable and immersion washable .
Our High Voltage/Low Voltage Transformers provide big performance in a small
package. Up to 12 outputs in combinations
from 5 V to 3000 V at output power to
2000 W at 100 kHz with isolated filaments
to 10 kV dc in one unit. Their diversity allows many companies to replace several
transformers with one. We have the capability to provide custom deSigns for your
specific applications. These featurescombined with Just-In-Time delivery, and
UL, CSA, IEC compliance-gives you the
competitive edge.
Customer Support
Tektronix, Inc.
P.O. Box 500, D.S. 19-013
Beaverton, OR 97077
(503) 627-3233

The Tektronix Magnetic Latching Relay is
designed to offer highly reliable, low level
switching without adding significant inductance, capacitance, or resistance to a circuit. It can be mounted directly on a hybrid
circuit substrate or on a printed circuit
board and consists of two 38 n drive coils
and a unique open armature -contact
system.
The Mag Latch Relay is suitable for input
attenuator applications in portable and laboratory test equipment and provides an excellent method for remote low level switching in bo t h manual and automatic
instrumentation.

CHARACTERISTICS
Contact Life - (At typical loads) 107 cycles dry
circuit «10mA and <50mV dc); 1()6 cycles at
250 mA and 30 V dc or peak ac; 1()5 cycles at
250 mA and 250 V dc or ac RMS.
Contact Resistance - 0.1 0 maximum over life
(typically 10 to 30 mOl, depending on substrate
contact material.
Operating Time 1.0 ms typical, 6.0 ms
maximum.
Drive Voltage - Single Coil: 7 V ± 1 V (5 ms).
Dual Coil: 11 V ± 1 V (5 ms).
Coil Resistance (Each) - 38 g ± 10% at 25°C.
Coil Inductance (Typical) - Magnetic circuit
closed, 11 mH.
Co il Operating Temperature 95 ° C
maximum.
Capacitance (Typical) - Pad-to-pad (contact
open) 1.0 pF.
Contact Inductance (Typical) - Closed contact 2.5 pH.
Contact Bounce (Typical) - 200 J.Ls.

TEK

CUSTOM
CATHODE RAY TUBES

Built on 36 years of experience in the
design and manufacturing of advanced
technology magnetic and electrostatic
CRTs
For the first time , Tektronix' proven quality,
reliability and performance are available for
your CUSTOM CRT needs.
Ultra High Resolution
Photographic Imaging
Medical/Diagnostics
Workstations
High Brightness
Avionic Color
Color Shutters
Air Traffic Control
Ruggedized
Mobile Military
Cockpit Displays
IR Viewers

Avionics Color
Cathode Ray Tubes

Monochrome
Cathode Ray Tubes

High Resolution
Sunlight Readable

Breakthrough mechanical design has resulted in a family of high quality shadowmask color display tubes equally adaptable
to both raster-scan and stroke-written
modes of operation.
These daylight-bright high resolution rug gedized tubes are intended for electronic
flight instrumentation systems (ERS). The
tubes meet or exceed the emerging re quirements for EFIS display systems , including MIL-STD-810C for shock and
vibration.
The Tektronix Avionics Display organization
will quote, upon request, design iterations
involving phosphor composition , tube size
and shape, and complete assemblies.
For further information call:
Avionic Displays
Tektronix, Inc.
P.O. Box 500. D.S. 48-255
(503) 627-6882
Telex: 151754
TWX (910) 467-8708

High Brightness
Proprietary high beam current electron gun
design and optimized phosphors provide a
unique combination of brightness and resolution. A brightness of 3500 foot lamberts at 768
x 1024 resolution is achievable in a 9 inch
display.
A clam shell yoke design and low grid drive
capacitance gives low power consumption
and high deflection sensitivity.

cations. Spectral output can be optimized
for photographic and other requirements.
Our gun designs are capable of achieving
spot sizes of less than 0.001 inch in screen
sizes up to 9 inches. Internal correction elements maintain a uniform spot size over the
entire screen.
Customer Support
Monochrome CRTs
Tektronix, Inc.
P.O. Box 500. D.S. 46-539
(503) 627-6868
Telex: 151754
TWX (910) 467-8708

High Resolution Direct View
Our unique electron gun design, dynamic
focus and astigmatism correction elements
provide optimum resolution over the whole
screen.
Resulting spot sizes, 2048 x 2730 addressable pixels, approach the resolving power of
the human eye at a viewing distance of 24
inches. Our patented low-capacitance grid
structures allow the display designer to utilize this resolution capability.
Ultra High Resolution
Tektronix state of the art capabilities in
phosphor formulation and deposition provides the low blemish , high uniformity
screens necessary for critical display appli-

INTERACTIVE
TOUCH PANEL

CHARACTERISTICS

. -

~- ~,...

.....

~ - _S
.

.. '

TekTouchRugged Interactive Panel
High Touch Resolution
High Transmissivity
Rugged and Reliable
Simple Data Link
Low Cost

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Process Control
Automatic Teller Machines
Public Information Kiosks
Medical Monitoring
Test and Measurement Instrumentation

Description and Capabilities
What does it do? TekTouch provides simple interactive communication between a
human operator and an electronic system.
Versatility of the TekTouch communication
link allows easy access to even the most
complex data input requirements .
TekTouch may be easily installed over any
monitor or display device or used as a separate input pOSition sensing unit.

How does it work? TekTouch consists of a
thin , continuous, transparent layer deposited on a glass panel. The touched position
is determined by measuring changes to a
small ac signal applied to the touch panel.
These changes are due to the added impedance of the operator's body.

GENERAL
Size range - 5 to 14 inches on a side (flat or
curved).
Thickness - 0.125 inch.
Active Touch Area - Within 0.5 inch of bezel
edges.
Touch Resolution - 256 x 256 addressable
locations.
Weight - 4.5 oz (9 inch panel).
Screen Construction - Continuous transparent film on single glass panel.
OPTICAL PROPERTIES
Transparency - 85% transmissivity at 520 nm
(with antiglare-etched surface).

High Performance
TekTouch's thin screen construction eliminates many visual distortions commonly
found in touch panels that use other technologies. In addition, TekTouch has a touch
resolution of 256 x 256 addressable points,
and its transmissivity of 85% allows excellent optical clarity.
Low Cost
This technology allows low system cost, as
one electronic controller package can process touch position information for most
panel sizes.
Use
TekTouch simply mounts under the present
CRT/monitor bezel , requiring only about
0.13 inch clearance perpendicular to the
display surface. The driver electronics can
be mounted on a conventional PC board or
integrated into a specially designed hybrid
circuit.
Unlimited Uses:
• Menu selection
• Interactive graphics
• Identification of portions of displayed
graphics for further manipulation
• Can be used with some gloved operator
applications
• Function key replacement on keyboard
• Reprogrammable soft keys for display
front panel or as existing keyboard
extension

TekTouch does not rely on stationary or rotating light beams, has no moving parts,
and is not subject to dust intrusion. It does
not extend laterally past existing display
tube dimensions.

ENVIRONMENTAL
Moisture - Withstands high humidity environments; highly resistant to the corrosive effects of
perspiration, beverage spills, etc.
Temperature - Operating: _ 15° to +55°C.
Storage: _ 62° to +85°C.
Relative Humidity - Operating: 95% at 55 °C.
Altitude Operating: Sea level to 4500 m
(15,000 It). Nonoperating: Sea level to 15000 m
(50,000 It.)
Vibration - Operating: 0.635 mm (0.025 in) POp,
10-55 Hz. Nonoperating: 1.27 mm (0.05 in) pop,
10-55 Hz.
Shock - Operating: 50 g peak acceleration.
Nonoperating: 100 g peak acceleration.
Cleaning - Cleanable with commercially available glass cleaners and laboratory solvents.
Abrasion Resistance Conductive film is
harder than glass substrate.
COMMUNICATIONS
RS-232C Interface Information Rate: 110 to 19,200 baud.
Data Structure: X,V,Z; no parity output.
Transmission Code: ASCII asynchronous.
Parallel Interface Data Structure: a-bit data with strobe and ready/
busy lines.
Transmission Code: Binary.
Data Transmission Modes • Send data on make of touch.
• Send data on break of touch.
• Continuous transmission of data.
Controller • Standalone microprocessor-based.
• 20 ms typical response time.
Specifications subject to change without notice.

EVALUATION KITS
Standard - Panel with standalone controller
and power supply. RS-232C or a-bit parallel
interface.
Custom - For custom shapes, resolution , interface, and specific environmental concerns , consult Tektronix for quotation.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION
Contact:
Marketing & Sales
Display Devices Operation
Tektronix, Inc.
P.O. Box 500, D.S. 46-539
Beaverton, Oregon 97077
(503) 627-6868

TEK

HIGH RESOLUTION
DISPLAY MONITOR

DISPLAY
PRODUCTS

VIDEO INPUT
Interface - Linear, dc coupled .
Impedance - 50 fl .
Recommended Input Signal Rise and Fall
Time - ,.,; 1 ns.
Level - Black = 0 V, white = + 1.0 V.
Maximum Nondestructive Input
+ 5 V,
- 2V.
SYNC INPUTS
Interface - TTL Compatible , fall ing-edge
triggered.
Horizontal Sync - 93.6 kHz, ± 2% standard
(64 kHz or 78 kHz optional).
Vertical Sync - 60 Hz standard
optional).
Vertical Retrace Time - ,.,; 250 IlS.
Horizontal Retrace Time - ,.,;2 IlS.
AC POWER
Range - 87 V to 128 V, 174 V to 256 V, all at
48 Hz to 63 Hz.
Power Consumption - 150 W maximum.
CONDITION INDICATORS
Scan fail, low-voltage power supply, high voltage
power supply.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

GMA201

Monochrome Raster Display Monitor
High-Resolution Video for the System
Builder
Bright, Stable Noninterlaced 60 Hz Refresh
200 MHz Video Amplifier Bandwidth
ROM-Based Dynamic Focus
Modular Construction for Easy Field Service

Unparalleled Raster Scan Video
Performance
The GMA201 is an OEM product that is
well-suited to system builders in the fields
of gray-scale imaging , CAD/CAM , computer-aided publishing , document retrieval ,
and related technical applications that require extremely high performance.
Key features of the GMA201 monochrome
display include 1536 vertical by 2048 horizontal addressable pixels, digitally adjusted
focus and astigmatism correction provide a
crisp, well focused beam at all points on
the screen over the entire range of grayscale . A patented low capacitance gun
structure was developed to address the requirements for small uniform spot size, rugged construction and low power dissipation . The flicker-free 60 Hz (75 Hz optional)
noninterlaced refresh rate , high bandwidth
200 MHz amplifier and contrast enhancement panel affords maximum image fidelity.
The GMA201 complies with worldwide
safety and emissions standards .

We know that your systems can only be as
reliable as the components that go into
them. For that reason we place a premium
on dependability. We produce products
that will keep you and your customers satisfied and your service costs down.
Consider the advantages of working with
Tektronix-built-in reliability, measureable
value, extensive service and support. Your
local Tektronix OEM representative will
show you how to profit from a partnership
with Tektronix.

CHARACTERISTICS
DISPLAY
Add res sable A rea - 267 mm x 356 mm
(10.5 in x 14 in).
Addressable Resolution - Up to 1536 pixels x
2048 pixels at 60 Hz noninterlaced.
Aspect Ratio - 3:4 nominal.
CRT Orientation - Long axis horizontal.
Brightness - 100 cd/m2 (30 fL) with installed
contrast enhancement filter.
Geometric Distortion - Incremental nonlinearity: ± 3% at 25°C. Positional Accuracy: ± 1% of
image height. Peak-To-Peak Line Variation: ± 5%.
Spot Size - 7.5 mils (0.19 mm) center screen
(maximum). 9.0 mils (0.23 mm) corners (maximum).
Focus, Astigmatism - Dynamically controlled,
digitally adjusted using ROM look-up table.
Phosphor Type - WIN (P4).
Compliance - UL, FCC, VDE (with Option 23).

Dimension.

Width
Height
Depth

447

389
485

17.6
15.3
19.1

Weight =

Net

ZS.O

55.0

ORDERING INFORMATION
GMA201 Monochrome Raster Display
Monitor
Include.: Service manual (07Q-5079{X)).
Option
Option
Option
Option

23 *'
30 32 38 -

OPTION
Cabinetry and CRT Bezel.
64 kHz Horizontal Sync .
76 kHz Horizontal Sync.
75 Hz Vertical Sync .

INTERNATIONAL POWER PLUG OPTIONS
Option A1 - Universal Euro 220 V, 50 Hz.
Option A2 - UK 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A3 - Australian 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A4 - North American 240 V, 60 Hz.
Option AS - Switzerland 220 V, 50 Hz.
. , Option 23 includes a standard North American 115 V power
plug. Option 23 is required to order A 1-A5 power plugs.

VIDEO AMPLIFIER
Bandwidth - Dc to 200 MHz (- 3 dB)
Pulse Response - Tr"'; 1.75 ns. Tf,.,; 1.75 ns.

Special pricing, lenn. and conditions are available to qualified OEM •. Con,,"ct your local Taktronlx repre.antative for
complele Infonnatlon.

TEK

HIGH RESOLUTION
DISPLAY MONITORS

600 Series Monitors
General Purpose, Economical X-Y Displays
to Very High Resolution X-Y and Raster Displays for Critical Applications.

6068 Monitor
Very High Resolution X-Y Display for
Applications Requiring the Most Critically
Sharp Photographs and Displays

The critically sharp and detailed imaging
provided by the 6068 is particularly well suited for photographic recording applications
in medical gamma camera systems and
multi-imaging systems. It can also provide
superior imaging in such applications as
electron microscopy, and radiation and thermal scanning systems. When image stability, gray scale performance and brightness
uniformity are critical to the quality of measurement or the accuracy of a medical diagnosis, you need the consistent performance
and high reliability of the 6068.

W60ption06

608 Option 23

608 Monitor
High Resolution with Ambient-Light Viewing
Expansion-Mesh-Halo Suppression
Excellent Gray Scale
High Brightness

The 608 is a high quality directed beam
viewing monitor. It is extremely well suited
for high peformance display applications,
such as medical and military imaging and
electronic instrumentation. The 608's high
usable brightness of up to 240 cd /m2
(70 fL), 0.26 mm (10 mil) spot size , and a
large 9.8 x 12.2 cm screen all combine to
give you optimum viewing capability. The
608 produces detailed displays that are
easy to read in high ambient light. The
crisp high brightness image also yields high
quality photographs when an appropriate
camera is utilized.

620 Monitor
General Purpose, Economical,
X-Y Waveform Display

The 620 can be used in demanding applications requiring an economical, solidly performing X-Y waveform display. Electronic instrumentation applications include pulse
height, network, spectrum, logic and signal
analyzers and digitizers. The 620 can also
be used in mechanical measurement instruments for vibration tests and NOT. In the
medical field it can be used for A-mode imaging . The 620 offers a spot size of
0.38 mm (15 mils), a 10 x 12 cm screen, and
usable brightness up to 100 cd/m2 (30 fL).

KEY SPECIFICATIONS FOR X-Y DISPLAYS
6068

608

620

Spot Size"

0.08 mm (3. t mils)

0.26 mm (10 mits)

< I S mil < 25 mil at max drive

Display Size

8cmxl0cm

9.8 em x 12.2 em

10cmx12cm

Acceleration Potential

S.SkV

22.S kV

12.0kV

Bandwidth. X·Y·,

> 3 MHz

;"SMHz

;,.2 MHz

Bandwidth. Z·,

S MHz

;,. 10 MHz

;"SMHz

Rise Time

< 35ns

.. 35ns

Input R and C. X·Y· '

l Mfl ±1%orSOO l k47pF

1 Mfl ll .. oo pF

Input R and C. Z·,

1 Mfl or S Mfl

1 Mfl .. OOpF

1 Mfl < 47 pF

X·Y Phase Difference

l ' to ;,. 500 kHz

.. 1' to I .S MHz

.. I " dc to 500kHz

Recommended Source
Impedance. X· Y and Z

< 100,n 111 pos.

.. 10kO

Temperature Range

O' C to SO'C

O'C to +SO'C

O"C to +SO"C

Power Requirements·"

7S W

61 W

See footnote "

Lined external implosion

shield (graticule) for
adjustment purposes.

C·5C Opt. 0 1. C' 7 Opt. 01
C·59A

C·5C. C·5C Opt. 01
C·7 Opt. 01

Included Accessories

Recommended

Cameras

C·3OBP. C·5C Opt. 01
C·7 Op t. 01

1 Mfl < 47 pF

" Measured al 0.5, 0.5) 0.254 mm (0.010 in).
Programmable Features - User-definable
scan area; dot and void removal; edge smoothing , line fitting accuracy; digitizing threshold ; document rotation; mirror image.
Output Capabilities - Hardware: RS-232C,
19.2 kbaud. Protocol: KERMIT-type communications protocol. Modes: Freeman code data, polynode data, interconnect data, combined data.
User-selectable output data files : polylines, short
vectors, and filled areas.
Flexible leasing programs available
In the continental U.S.

Media - Nine-track magnetic tape (1600 bpi).
Format - Block 80 x 10, standard label EBCDIC
and unlabeled ASCII.
Data Transmission - RS-232C, 19.2 kbaud.
Memory - 2.0 Mb RAM with ECC; 20 Mb internal hard disk.
Display - 483 mm (19 in) diagonal color raster;
60 Hz, noninterlaced.
Graphics - 1024 x 1280 pixels.
Capacity - 98,000 nodes (larger drawings are
managed by structuring smaller sections of the
original file).
GRAPHIC STRUCTURING SOFTWARE
Functional Structuring Capabilities
Graphics Entities Supported - Lines, polylines, arcs, circles, text, symbols, ellipses, arrows,
dimensions, splines.
Attributes Supported - Layer number, pen
number, color, line width, line style, text font, character slant, arrow style, user-definable attributes.
Transformation Operations - N-point alignment, snap-to-grid.
Viewing Capabilities - Zoom, pan, previous
view, original view, nodes.
Local Calculations - Position, distance, userdefined units.
Host Control and Interfacing - KERMIT-type
communications protocol.
HOST INTERFACING SOFTWARE
Data Communications - KERMIT-type protocol.
Data Conversion - 4991S1 to IBM CADAM
Version 19.2.4 or later (MVSrrSO and CMNMS).
4991S1 to ComputerVision CADDS 4X. 4991S1 to
Tektronix PLOT 10 e Computer-Aided Drafting
(TekniCAD) Version 7.3 or later.
Data Checking - Unrecognized or illegal host
system commands or data reported on the
4991WS display for immediate correction.
Configuration - Host-system resident.
Language - FORTRAN IV (license required) .

ORDERING INFORMATION
4991S1 Graphic Input Workstation

$150,000

Includes: 4991WS (4125 Color Graphics Workstation);
4100P0l with Option 01 and Option 11 : CPIM-86 +OTI:
4100H0l Workstation table; 4957 Graphics Tablet; 4991
Auto Vectorizer; 4991POI Graphic structuring software.

OPTIONS
4991P02, CAOAM HIS.
+ $12,000
4991P03. ComputerVision HIS. + $12,000
Add Option 05 to 4991WS.
+$2,195

Option 01 Option 02 Option 05 -

INTERNATIONAL POWER PLUG OPTIONS
Universal Euro 220 V, 50 Hz.
Order 020-0859-00.
Option A2 - UK 240 V. 50 Hz.
Order 02O{)86(}()().
Option A3 - Australian 240 V. 50 Hz.
Order 020-086HXl.
Option A4 - North American 240 V. 60 Hz.
Order 020{)862-OO.
Option A5 - Switzerland 220 V, 50 Hz.
Order 02(){)863-OO.

Option A1 -

WARRANTY-PLUS SERVICE PLANS
SEE PAGE 496
Contact your local Sales Engineer for prices.
S0 - On-Site Product Installation and Set-Up.
Sl - 1 Year On·Site Service.
S2 - 2 Years On-Site Service.
S3 - 3 Years On-Site Service.
OEM terme •••II.ble on thle product

TekniCAD is

trademark of Tektronix. Inc.

TEK

COMPUTER GRAPHICS SUPPLIES
ORDERING INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION
Now you can rely on Tektronix as your single supply source for all media, pens and ink for your
Tektronix copiers , plotters, printers and storage
devices. By using Tektronix brand supplies, you
can be assured of getting the best output quality
from your Tek peripherals.
For further information U.S. customers may call
toll free to the NEW Direct Order Desk. Supplies
Specialists can answer any of your questions on
use and availability of supplies listed below. Direct Order Desk for supplies is open 6 am to 5 pm
PST. In the U.S., call 1-Iloo-TEK-61oo (Oregon and
Alaska, call collect 503-642-8(XX)). Overseas customers, call your Tektronix Sales Office.
INK JET SUPPLIES
4691 Ink Cartridgea
200 ml Each
01&O713-{)1
Cyan
01&O714-{)1
Black
Yellow
01&0715-01
Magenta
01&071&02
4691 Ink Jet Copy Paper
500 Sheets Per Package
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in) A Size 01&0712-00
279 x 432 mm (11 x 17 in) B Size 01&0711-00
210 x 297 mm (4691 Option 01 only)
A4 Size
01&0709-00
297 x 420 mm (4691 Option 01 only)
K3 Size
01&0710-00
4691 Tranaparency Film
100 Sheets Per Package
A Size
01&0765-00
01&0766-00
A4 Size

$90
$90
$90
$90

$32
$41
$32
$41

$95
$95

4691 Drum Adaptora
Package of 3 for use with
118-2593-00 $16_75
A or A4 size
4692 Ink Cartridgea
200 ml Each
01&O713-{)1
$90
Cyan
Black
01&O714-{)1
$90
Yellow
$90
01&0715-01
Magenta
$90
01&071&02
4692 Ink Jet Copy Paper
500 Sheets Per Package
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in) A Size 01&0793-00
$36
210 x 297 mm A4 Size
01&0794-00
$36
4692 Tranaparency Film
100 Sheets Per Package
A Size
01&0765-02
$95
A4 Size
01&076&02
$95
4692 Maintenance Cartridge
250ml
4695 Ink Cartridge Packagea
2.5 cc Each , 16 Per Package
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Black
4695 Ink Jet Copy Paper
50 m Each 6 Rolls Per Box
Roll Paper

01&onO-02

$33

01&O734-{)2
01&0735-02
01&073&02
01&O737-{)2

$9.00
$9.00
$9.00
$9.00

01&0743-00

$75

4695 Ink Jet Copy Paper
500 Sheets Per Package
A Size
A4 Size

01&0739-00
01&0740-00

$25
$25

4695 Tranaparency Film
100 Sheets Per Package
Roll Format (10" x HXl')

01 &048(}()()
01&083&00

$90
$90

4695 Llqulda
Maintenance Liquid (200 cc)
Print Head Protect liquid (10 cc)
lubricant (5 cc)
Syringe to Wash Printhead

01&0732-00 $10.50
01&0733-00 $3.00
01&0742-00 $2.00
118·340&00 $8.25

4696 Ink Cartridgea
5 cc Each, 2 Per Package
Black
01&0839-00
Cyan
01&0840-00
Magenta
01&0841-00
Yellow
01&0842-00
4696 Copy Paper- Roll Format
254 mm x 50 m Each Roll
Box of six rolls
01&0743-00
4696 Copy Paper- Sheet Format
500 Sheets Per Package
01&0739-00
A Size
A4 Size
01&0740-00
4696 Trenaparency Film
100 Sheets Per Package
Roll Format (10"xl00')

01 &048(}()()
01&083&00

$9.00
$9.00
$9.00
$9.00

$75

$25
$25
$90
$90

4696 Maintenance Cartridge
175 ec
01&0838-00
$15
Maintenance Cartridge
4696 Lubricant
Sec
lubricant
01&0742-00 $2.00
PLOTTER PENS AND SUPPLIES
For plotter pens and supplies, ask your local Tektronix
office for an 100 Computer Graphics Supplies Catalog.
MONOCHROME COPIER PAPER
4631, 4632
Tek1ronlx Standard Dry Sliver Paper
216 mm x 152 m (8.5 in x 500 ft)
Single Roll
00&1003-00
$95
00& 1003-{)1
$325
4 Roll Carton
Quantity Discounts:
4 to 9 Cartons (5% Savings per Carton)
10 to 19 Cartons (10% Savings per Carton)
20 or More Cartons (15% Savings per Carton)
4633A, 4634 and 4635
Tektronix High Performance Dry Sliver Paper
216 mm x 152 m (8.5 in x 500 tt)
Single Roll
00&2432-00
$235
00&2432-{)1
$810
4 Roll Carton
Quantity Discounts:
4 to 9 Cartons (5% Savings per Carton)
10 to 19 Cartons (10% Savings per Carton)
20 or More Cartons (15% Savings per Carton)
4611/4612 Dielectric Hard Copy Paper
216 mm x 152 m (8.5 in x 500 ft)
00&2838-00
$43
2 Roll Package
4611 /4612 Tektronix Dry Copy Toner
4.9 oz Bottle
00&2900{)()
$26
PRINTER PAPER AND RIBBONS
4641 Printer Ribbon
119{)82(}OO
Box of 12
$165
4642 Printer
Paper-Tab Stock, Fan Fold ,
270 mm x 279 mm (10.6 x 11 in)
2500 Sheets/Carton

002-{)262-{) 1

$85

Paper Roll Box of 12
Ribbons Package of 4

002-1084-{) 1
oo2-1451-{)1

$80
$70

4643 Printer Ribbon
Cassette
118-1314-00
4644 Printer Ribbon
Box of 6
118-3876-00
MAGNETIC MEDIA
4110 Seriea 8 Inch Flexible Megnetlc Dlak
512 Kb Formatted Capacity
Box of 10
119-137&01

$26
$140

$115

4170; 4925; and 4926 Option 25 Flexible 5 ' 1. Inch
Dlak
650 Kb Formatted Capacity
119-1583-{)1
$36
Box of 10
4404; 6130; 4132, Option 11 Flexible 5 ' 1. Inch Dlak
650 Kb Formatted Capacity
119-1583-{)1
$36
Box of 10

4905 Optiona 31 .. 32 Flexible 8 Inch Magnetic Diak
315 Kb Formatted Capacity
Package of 10
119-0848-{)1
$115
4907 Flexible 8 Inch Magnetic Diak
630 Kb Formatted Capacity
119-1011-{)1
Package of 10
4905 Optlona 33 and 34
Hard Disk Pack Formatted Capacity
11!Hl855-oo
5 Mb
4909 Dlak Cartridge
Formatted Capacity
13Mb
119-1462-00

$155

$250

$360

4050 Serlea, 4923 and 4924
Certified Data Cartridge (:n:l ft)
Each Cartridge
Package of 5

119-0600-00
11!Hl6OOO1

$125

Certified Data Cartridge (450 tt)
Each cartridge
Package of 5

119-1439-00
119-1439-01

$35
$280

Certified Data Cartridge (4050 Series Only)
600 tt Cartridge
119-1463-00

$47

$30

4944 Option 11 , Option 14, Option 15; 61TC01; 6130
Option 40, Option 41, Option 42; 4132 Option 40,
Option 41
450 feet:
Each cartridge
119-2408-00
$40
Package of 5
119-2408-{)1
$180
600 feet:
Each Cartridge
119-1463-00
$50
Package of 5
119-1463-{)1
$200

TEKTRONIX QUALITY LIVES ON
THROUGH RE-MANUFACTURE
Tektronix lOG instruments returned from Demo
and Lease are brought up to latest specifications
and sold at reduced prices carrying new product
warranty. Quantity discounts apply to current as
well as discontinued products. Shipment is typically four weeks after receipt of the order. Your
Tektronix lOG Customer Sales Representative or
Sales Engineer can provide you with information
on products, prices and availability.
In the U.S., call lOG Reconditioned Products Marketing, 1-5031585-2023. Overseas customers, call
your Tektronix Sales Office.

TEK/ANTHRO

TECHNOLOGY
FURNITURE

AnthroArm GT
Holds up to 200 Ibs
Rotates 360 ·
Cast Aluminum Construction
Five Year Warranty

The AnthroArm GT is the space saving armature designed to hold substantial
loads-up to 200 Ibs. You can float your
heavy 19 inch term inal above your
workspace , and have plenty of room to
spread out underneath.
Now you can easily move your terminal
around. Push the AnthroArm back to store
your monitor out of the way. Pull it towards
you for better viewing. Swivel it 360° to get
rid of screen glare, or to see your terminal
if you 're on the phone or sharing with
others.
Choose between three different models,
depending on the reach you want (how
much depth you have on your work surface) and how high you want your terminal
(the compound arm raises your terminal
higher than the single arms).
The AnthroArm GT. The only arm strong
enough to give you back your workspace.

CHARACTERISTICS
• Arm , base plate and mounting plate are thick·
wall aviation grade casted aluminum, hardened
to T6. The parts have a baked-on powder coated smoke tan finish.
• The main pivots are 1 inch 10 needle bearings.
Other pivots are oil light brass bushings.
• Mounting posts are hardened ground steel.
• The 45 lb. density, 21 1k inch x 21 '12 shelf is 1
inch thick with vinyl t·molding edges. Its surface
is high pressure laminate with non-skid pads for
additional safety.
• Two stacking lugs ('Ie inch each) are included
for height adjustment.

INSTALLATION
Your 19 inch
terminal IS very
~
heavy, so your
worktable must
be
st urd y
enough to support the AnthroArm . The Arm
is recommended for installation on engineering
tables and large drafting tables which are at least
2 inches thick. The Arm is installed by drilling
through the work surface and mounting using the
6 supplied bolts.

1Y1iI/i/~1In

/C\

ANTt-RO '"

Anthro Corporation
Technology Furniture
3221 NW Yeon St.
Portland, OR 97210
To order: 1-800-325-3841
503-241 ·7113
Anthro is a trademark of Anthro
Corporation, a wholly owned
subsidiary of Tektronix, Inc.

Soon to be available:
AnthroArm GT with lilt option,
and AnthroArm GT wall mount option.
Call for avallabtlity update.

With the AnthroArm, you can share
terminals between stations.

AnthroArm GT 18 Inch Single Arm. Order 55O-SA

T ~

"l~:~

gl '''"

,. ,~

1"-1"--

$449

: Tn,,"
~ !t

5T~;;~
' '"1 ~

lJ~an

--18" - - --"1
- -"-"'''-'- 28'''· -----~
12:JtClft

AnthroArm GT 12 Inch Single Arm. Order 551 -SA

$425

AnthroArm GT Compound Arm. Order 55O-CA

$475

T
T9'''"

I8'~:1"~

7lf22: 1"~

TEK/ANTHRO

TECHNOLOGY
FURNITURE

The AnthroCart Deluxe Model, /eft, and the Standard model, right, are available in a variety of configurations.

Rugged Steel Base

AnthroCart'· Deluxe

AnthroCart'" Standard

Include.: Two shelves; three legs; a base tube; four 2:v.
castors (two locking); document holder; four inch storage basket; wire base shelf; six-outlet surge protector;
three cord management clips; and tools for assembly.
Available in slate gray or golden oak color.

Include.: Two shelves; three legs; a base tube; four 2:v.
castors (two locking); three cord management clips; and
tools for assembly. Available in slate gray or golden oak
color.

AnthroCart SELECTION GUIDE

Stacks Vertically in 5 1/2 sq ft of Area

(When ordering Indlc.te II.te gr.y or golden o.k color)

Holds up to 68 kg (150 Ibs)
Five Year Warranty

Configure your AnthroCart to suit your application. Holes in 1 inch increments on the
legs mean you can move your shelves up
or down to fit both youc. equipment and
your body. Then, customize your cart with
any of the options listed on page 82.
Choose between two depths of carts. The
AnthroCart Compact is 30 inches deep for
space savings . The AnthroCart Full-Size is
36 inches deep for bigger equipment.
And choose between two heights of carts.
The PC model is 35 inches high for typical
' monitor on top/CPU on bottom' applications, The GT model is 28 inches high with
the bigger shelf on top for large graphic terminals, or systems like the Macintosh.

Compact
Model
PC02-DX
GT02-DX
PC07-DX
GT07-DX
PC04-DX
GT04-DX
PCIQ-DX
GTIQ-DX
PC03·ST
GT03-ST
PC09-ST
GTOO-ST
PalS-ST
GT05-ST
PC" -ST
GTII -ST

Full Size

PC Model. GT Model

30" Depth 38" Depth 35" High

.,..

.,..
.,..

.,..
.,..
.,..
.,..
.,..

.,..

.,..
.,..

.,..
.,..
.,..

.,..

.,..
.,..

Four inch castors, too. That's the AnthroCart

4 x 4.
Anthro is a trademark of Anthro
Corporation, a wholly owned
subsidiary of Tektronix, Inc

28" High

.,..
.,..
.,..
.,..

Deluxe

.,..
.,..

Standard 4" Ca.tors

.,..

.,..
.,..

.,..

.,..
.,..

.,..

.,..
.,..

.,..

.,..
.,..
.,..
.,..
.,..

.,..

$495
$495
$495
$495

$549
$549
$549
$549
$299
$299
$299

.,..

.,..
.,..

.,..

Price

.,..

$299

$349
$349
$349
$349

Anthro Corporation
Technology Furniture
3221 NW Yeon SI.
Portland, OR 97210
To order: 1-800-325-3841
ANT..-RO™ 503-241 -7113

TEK/ANTHRO

TECHNOLOGY
FURNITURE

AnthroCart™
Combinations

The AnthroCart. High-tech furniture for high-tech equipment. Use your imagination.
Move shelves around. Try different options. Configure the AnthroCart
so your equipment is easy and comfortable to use.

AnthroCart Compact PC with options, including Printer
Basket option and Siide-Out Shelf option.

AnthroCart Compact PC with options, including SideCar
option.

AnthroCart Compact GT with options, including Printer
Basket option.

AnthroCart FuIl·Size GT with Extension Shelf Kit option.

AnthroCart Compact GT with Extension Shelf Kit option.

AnthroCart Compact 4 x 4 GT with options.

AnthroCart Specifications

L-

il!ii

iq~

:I)'

7620an

r
Ie

AnthroCart Compact PC
,...,

I 1.

55.88 em

•g
iQ5!

4~~·~-----.:.(

f"<--- 1.·---'1

AnthroCart Compact GT

1
Ie

Anthro Corporation
Technology Furniture
3221 NIN Yeon St.
Portland, OR 97210

:I)'

7a.20cm

lb'''''-

927t an

r 1.

5588cm

•g

7'~~'·;"---"'(

iQ5!

r
Ie

AnthroCart FuIl'Size PC

55.88 em

•g

.. 26em

ANTt-RO'·

F
7620an

: Series is manufactured arid marketed in Japan by SonyfTektronix Corporation. Tokyo Japan. Out·
side of Japan. the :n> Series is available from Tektronix. Inc.• its
marketing subsidiaries arid distributors.

123

TEK

MICROPROCESSOR
SUPPORT

Microprocessor
and Bus Support

1240/1241
DAS 9100/9200

~
proceuOI'

11m

Single-Connection Probe Adaptors for Ease
of Use and Reliability
Ready-to-Use Mnemonics on Disk, Tape, or
ROM Pack
DAS 9200 Support Includes Register Deduction, Stack Simulation, Subroutine Trace
and Data Variable Displays

This table summarizes the microprocessor
and bus support products offered by the
DAS 9200, DAS 9100, and 1240/1241.
For custom microprocessors, or microprocessors not listed, Tektronix offers support
through EDM (Extended Define Mnemonics) on the DAS 9100. Also the Universal
Probe Interface Kit (UPIK4O) on page 127 is
a general-purpose, single-connection probe
adaptor.

Eml

1m!

tuI5
IDI6
(OP)

IlB!
(OP)

11)186
(lCCPGA)
11)188
(lCCPGA)

!Il286
I(lCCPGA)
6:1)113
GMECM

6IIXl
6!Ill
6!Il2

6IIl3
~
~

6IaiE3
6IDI

Em!
6fmE

6!tiCl1
68121
EBXXl
(OP)

The Option 01 probe interface worlcs with the

fTII'I(J(TI(»

EBXXl

ics files on tape or ROM pack to support disassembly

(!'GA)

on the DAS 9100 and the 124011241.

~
6!Ill0
" Price for Softwsre snd Probe Adaptor (if sVIIlIsbIB) probes Bnd boBrrIs not 1ncIud8d.
" Requires 0fI8 91A24 snd 0fI8 9IAE24.
"RtJqUires 0fI8 91A24.
'. 1240D2 boBrrIs.
'S WOt11

DAS9100
124Q'.1
DAS9100
124Q'41
DAS9100
DAS9200
DAS9100
124Q'41
DAS9200
DAS9100
124Q'41
DAS9200
DAS9100
124Q'41
DAS9200
DAS9100
124Q'41
DAS9200
DAS9100
124Q'41
DAS9200
t24Q'41
124Q'41
124Q'41
DAS9100
124Q'41
DAS9100
124Q'41
DAS9100
124Q'41
DAS9100
DAS9100
124Q'41
124Q'.1
DAS9100
124Q'41
DAS9200
DAS9100
124Q'41
DAS9200
DAS9100
124Q'41
124Q'41
DAS9100
DAS9200
DAS9100
124Q'41
DAS9200
DAS9100
124Q'41
DAS9100
124Q'41
DAS9200
DAS9100
124Q'41
DAS9200
DAS9too
124Q'41
DAS9200
124Q'41
DAS9200
DAS9100
124Q'41
DAS9100
124Q'41
DAS9100
124Q'4t
DAS9100
124Q'41
DAS9100
DAS9100
124Q'41

(AJCIACIOC)

Rl450

1750A
NSaOO

l.NBUS

oeus
GPIl; ASCI;
EBCOC
GPIl

124

LogIc AMlyzer
FamIly-

DAS9200
DAS9100
124Q'41
DAS9200
DAS9100
DAS9100
1240141
DAS9100
DAS9100
DAS9100
124Q'41

For IIofIw-.
ORDER
91lMJl
12RM>1
91TMl7
12RM!11 (Opt !Xl)
91Th110
92!lMJ2
91Th102
12RM>2
92DMll
91Th1!Xl
12RMl3
92DMl4
91lMJ4
12RM)4

For Probe
Adeptor ORDER

Aeq. ao.d8

~~1
01
Opt 01
lJ'I<40
Opt 01
92!lMJ2

2'2
2"
2"
2"

.~01
tOl

2'2
2"

92DMll
Opt 02'''

.
.
..

oPt 02'''

92DMl4
Opt 02'''
apt 02'''

2'2

91ThCi

Opt 02'''
ePt 02'''
92DM:l6

92DMli

2'2

91ThCi
12AM);

Opt 02'''

2'2

ePt 02'''

92Ot.QI

12At.Q1
12RM!11 (Opt (0)
12RM!11 (Opt 01)
911M21
12RM21
91TM28
12RM!11 (Opt ~)
91TM22
12RM22
91lM29
91Th«>

Opt 02'''
lJ'I<40
lJ'I<40
Opt 01
aPt 01
Opt 01
lJ'I<40
Opt 01
ePtOl
Opt 01
Opt 01
lJ'I<40
lJ'I<40
Opt 01
ePtOl
920M2.

~=l~~~
91TM23
12AM23
920M24
911M24
12RM24
920M24
911M2.
12RM24
12RM!11 (Opt 08)
91TM32
92OM25
91lM25
12RM25
91lMZ7
91lM25
12RM25
91TM26
12RM26

~:01
t 01
NlA'"
Opt 01
ePtOl
NlAe 11
NlAe"

92OM25
Opt 02'''
apt 02'''
Opt 2S'"
Opt 04'"

91Th164
91TM71
12RM71
91TM61
91lM52
91lM53
12RM!11 (Opt 04)

oPt 02'''
Opt2S'"
Opt 04'"
ePt04'"
920M31
Opt 02'''
92DM41
Opt 01
apt 01
NlA·1I

..
..

2'2
2'2

..
..

2'2

3"
2'2

3"
2'2
2"
2"

3"
2'2

Opt 01
apt 01
()Pt 01
Opt 01
lJ'I<40

2'2
2"
2'2
2'2
2"

'"
'W

NlA·lI

None
4"
4"
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None

......
.........
......
......
...
2"
2"

2'2
2"

~:01
tOl

NlA·l1

4"
3"

2'2
2"

NlAe u

NlA*1I

4"
None
4"
4"
None

Opt 02'''

......

..
..

Opt 02'2
OPt 02'''

91lMZ7
12RM27
91lMZ7
91lMZ7
12RM27
920M31
12RM31
92DM41
91Th141
12AM41
91Th142
12RM42
91TM43
12RM43
91TM63
12AM63
91TM61
91TM65
12RM!11
(Opt 02)

92DM64

2'2
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"

92OM27

92DM64

~04'"

92OM27

91Th162
12RM62A

2"
2"
2'2
2"
2'2
2"
2"

..
..

2'2

......
...

None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
4"
4"

...

PItce·,

Max
Max

S550

Max

S550

Max
Max
Max

8.0M-tz
8.0M-tz
Max

8.0M-tz
8.0 M-tz
Max

8.0 M-tz
8.0M-tz
Max

8.0M-tz
8.0M-tz
Max

10.0M-tz
Max
Max
Max
Max

Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max

Max
Max
Max

Max
Max
Max
Max
Max
Max

12.SM-tz
12.SM-tz
Max
12.5M-tz
12.S M-tz
8.0M-tz
8.0M-tz
Max
12.SM-tz
12.SM-tz
Max
12.SM-tz
12.SM-tz
Max

2O.0M-tz

SID)

$400

S550
S9Xl
S550
SID)

Sl.250
$2.450
$2.500
Sl.250
$2.450
$2.500
Sl.250
$2.450

S2.5OO
Sl.250
$2.450
$2.500
S!.EOO
$2.500
$400

S100
S550
SID)

S550
$400

S550
SID)

S550
S550
$400
$400

S550
SID)

S9Xl
S550
SID)

S9Xl
S550
S6X)

$400

S550

'
$2.450
$2.500
$2.100
$2.450
$2.450
$2.450
$2.500
Sl.250
$2.450

S2.5OO
$2.100
$2.450
$2.500
Sl .9OO
$2.500

Max
Max
Max

S9Xl
S550

Max

S350

SID)

4"
3"
3"
4"
4"
4"
4"
3"

Max

$400

Max

S550

Max
Max

S550

None
3"
3"
None
'
4"
4"

NlA· lI
NlA· lI

2'2
2"
2"
2'2
2'2

Opt 01

4"
2"

Opt 01
ePtOl

F_CIocII

AN Supported

...

SID)

Max

S6X)

Max
Max

S550
S550

Max

$400

Max

S9Xl
S350

Max
Max
2O.0M-tz
10.0M-tz
Max

$400

S9Xl
S350
S550
S6X)

Max
Max
Max

S350
S350

Max

s:m

Max

$400

TEK

LOGIC

ACCESSORIES

ANALYZERS

A. P6451 S-Channel Data Acquisition
Probe For use with 700t , 7001F,
7001F2. Order P6451 (Ol0-645Hl3)
P8451 - For use with 300 Series instruments (right-angle connector to analyzer).
Order P6451 (010-6451-07)
B. P8452 S-Chennel Data Acquisition
Probe - For use with DAS 9100 mainframes, DAS91A32191AOO. Order P6452

$545

$730

C. P8460 S/9-Channel Data Acquisition
Probe - For use with 124001 , 124002,
DAS 91A24191AE24. Order P6460

$700

D. P8482 S/9-Chennel TTL Only Data Acquisition Probe - For use with 124002,
DAS91A24191AE24191A32. Order P6462
All probes Include lead seta.

$340

F. P8484 50 MHz Pattern Generator
Probe - For use with DAS 91S16192532.
Order P6464

$1,350

O. P6485 50 MHz Pattern aenerator
Probe - 8 Data Channels 1 clock and
1 Rz Rl strobe for use with DAS
92S16192S32. Order P6465

$1,880

E. P8481/P8481E S Channel Data Acqullilion Probe - For use with DAS 92A 161
92A 16E (P6461E has no clock or Qualiflllt'
Olannels). Order P6461 or P6461E

$1,570

H. Controlled-Width Probelet - Use with
DAS 91S16191532 to create programmable pulses. Requires two P6464 channels
to create one programmable channel.
Order 020-1392-00

•

A. P8453 4-Channel Deta Acquisition
Probe High-speed probe for DAS
91A04A191AE04A. Order P6453

$1,580

B. P8455 TTL/MOS Pattern aenerator
Probe S-Channels For use with
DAS 91Pl6191P32. Order P6455

$575

C. P8458 ECL Pattern aenerator Probe SChannels
For
use
with
DAS91Pl6191P32 modules. Order P6456
D. P8457 TTL/MOS Pattern aenerator
Probe, 4-Channels, Individually TrIStateable - For use with DAS 91Pl61
91P32. OrderP6457

For use with
E. State Stamp Probe DAS 9100 system in Digital Design Lab
(00l) ConflQuration. Order 02Hl366-01
F. P8454 100 MHz Clock Probe - For use
with DAS 91AOO (max of one P6454 per
DAS system). Order P6454
All probes Include leed sets.

P8041 Passive Probe - Used as Sync
out cable, 5O!l Termination. Order P6041

PROBE APPLICATION MATRIX
PRODUCT

P8451 P8452 P8453 P8454 P8455 P8458 P8457 P8480 P8481/E P8482 P8484 P8485

....

92516, 92S32
91A24, 91AE24
91AOO

....

91P16, 91P32

....

....
....
....

124002
338, 318

....

91S16, 91532
124001

$285

....

....
....

....

91A04A, 91AE04A
$1,200

....

....
....

91A32
$575

$80

No/shown.

92A16, 92A16E
$575

$150

....

....
125

TEK

LOGIC
ANALYZERS

ACCESSORIES

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

A. Individual Hook Tip Lead Set 10 leads. 16 inch. color coded with E-Z
Micro Hook Tips. Order 012{)670-00

$80

H. Individual Lead Set -

I.
B. Flying Lead Set -

10 wide comb.
10 inch. color coded. connects to
0.025 inch square pins. grabber tips not
included. Order 012-0747-00

10 leads. 8 inch.
color coded. connects to 0.025 inch
square pins. grabber tips not included.
Order 012{)655-()2

$170

Individual Lead Set -

10 leads. 16 inch .
color coded. connects to 0.025 inch
square pins. grabber tips not included.
Order 012{)65S-()1

$170

Flying Lead Set -

10 wide comb.
to
color coded. connects
5 inch.
0.025 inch square pins. grabber tips not
included. Order 012-()987-OO

$45

$80

J. Harmonica Lead Set C. Harmonica Lead Set -

10 wide comb
to 10 position single row connector. for
0.025 inch square pins on 0.1 inch centers.
10 inch. color coded. Order 012{)8()(}O()

10 wide comb
to 10 position single row connector. for
0.025 inch square pins on 0.1 inch centers.
5 inch. color coded. Order 012-0968-00

$100

10 +
6 wide comb with VH and VL Pomona
Hook Tips. 9 inch. twisted pairs. color coded. connects to 0.025 inch square pins.
grabber tips not included. Used with
P6455. P6456. P6457 pattern generator
probes. Order 012-1053-00

$110

K. Pattern Ganerator Lead Set D. Pattern

Generator

Lead

Set

10 + 2 wide comb. 9 inch. twisted pairs.
color coded. connects to 0.025 inch
square pins. grabber tips not included.
Used with P6455. P6456. P6457 pattem
generator probes. Order 012-()92&OO

D
$150

L GPIB Adaptor -

E. High Speed Pattern Generator Lead
Sat - 10 + 2 wide comb to 20 position
double row connector. for 0.025 inch
square pins on 0.15 inch centers. 5 inch.
color coded. Used with P6455. P6456.
P6457 pattem generator probes.
Order 012-D551-OO

$125

., Diagnostic Lead Set, DAS 9100
10 wide comb to 10 wide comb. and two
wide ground jumper. 10 inch. for connecting pattern generator probes to data ac·
quisition probes. Order 012-100(}{)()

Package of
ten. 1.75 inch. for Dip packages with
0.1 inch lead spacing. use with P6453 or
P6454. Order 19&2234-06
., High Speed Lead Connectora - Package of ten. gold plated contact pins that
interface to podlet lead receptacles on
P6453 or P6454. Order 131-2729-02

$60

$110

$40

e--

With grabber tip. package of two. for use with
P6453 or P6454. Order 19&3659-02

$105

$30

$85

$175

$15.75

P. Lead Set -

G -...

., Not shown.

126

$18.50

O. High Speed Clock Lead -

., Sense Lead. -

Package of ten . 2 wide
comb to Pomona Hook Tip. 5 inch. green
for ground or VH. Order 012{)99(}{)1

$105

N. High Speed Gripper. -

G. Grabber Tip -

Package of 12. for gener·
al purpose probing with various lead sets.
(Single-sided grabber tips)
Order 02(}138&OO
(Double-sided grabber tips)
Order 02(}1456-00

Package of
ten. 1.75 inch. for flat packages with
0.05 inch lead spacing. use with P6453 or
P6454. Order 19&1~

to connect 91A04A to 91AE04A.
Order 175-6425-00

$75

F. Sense Lead. -

Package of ten. 2 wide
comb to Pomona Hook Tip. 5 inch. black
for ground or VL. Order 012-Q989-()1

$220

M. High Speed Grlppera -

., 91AE04A Coa.ial Jumper Cablea Replacement. - 3 inch. SMA connectors

., Diagnostic Le.d Set, 1240/1241 10 wide comb with 2 wide ground to
12 position double row connector. for
0.025 inch square pins on 0.1 inch centers.
10 inch. color coded. Order 012-D556-00

Two 10 wide combs to
IEEE Standard 488 Bus Connector.
10 inch. Order l03-()2()9{)O

For use with Podlets.
Acquisition probes P64611E and HSB.
Order 19&3047-00
Pattern generator probes P64641P6465.
Order 19&2963-00

$14
$9.50

TEK
•

LOGIC
ANALYZERS

ACCESSORIES

UPIK 40, Unlv.....1 Probe Int.rtac. Kit
- For 40 pin dip packages. Allows user to
conflQure interconnect from 6 probes or
less to a clothespin style 40 pin IC clip.
Order UPtK 40

•

RS-232 Cable
Male-to-female,
20 inch, wires: H , 2-2, 3-3, 4-4, 5-5, &6,
7-7,8-8, lHl , 12-12, 15-15, 17-17, 19-19,
20-20, 22-22. Used with l2OOC01 modem
interface DAS 9200 mainframe to terminal
or DAS 9100 line printer and communications interface.
Order 012.()91 HXl

•

RS-232 Cabl. - Male-to-female, 2 meter, 25 wires: H , 2-2, 3-3, thru 25-25. General purpose. Order 012.a115-00

•

Null Modem Cable - Fernale-to-female,
60 inch, wires: H , 2-3, 3-2, 4-5, 5-4, 7-7,
8-20, 11-11 , 12-12, 19-19, 20-8. General
purpose. Order 012.a12O-OO

•

Null Modem Cable - Female-to-female,
60 inch, wires: 1-1 , 2-3, 3-2, 4-8, 5-8, &20,
7-7, 8-4, 8-5, 20-6. Used with l2OOC01 Serial Printer interface. Order 012~

•

•
•

•

•
•
•

$100

75 0 Coaxial C.bIe - BNC to BNC,
42 inch, used with video hard copy interface. Order 012{Xl74{Xl

$19

75 0 Coaxl.1 Cabl. - BNC to BNC,
120 inch, used with video hard copy interface. Order 175-2753{Xl

$27

Low Profll. Dip Clip - 40 pin dip to
40 position double row connector, for
0.025 inch square pins on 0.1 inch centers,
4 inch (requires male adaptor below).
Order 015-0339-02

$49

Low Profll. Dip Clip - 40 pin, same as
above except 12 inch. Order 015-{)339{Xl

$49

Tape Cartridge., DC-l00 Type Package of five used on DAS 9100
Option 01 . Order 119-1350-()1

$180

•

Mn.monlc
ConY.ralon
T.pe,
DAS 9100 - Converts mnemonic and all
type files from DAS fm1W8J'e versions 1.05
and 1.07 to compatibility with DAS firmware versions 1.09 or 1.11 .
Order 062-67'()5{Xl

$75

•

8K RAM Pack - With lithium iodide battery back-up, used with 124011241 .
Order 12ASOI

$300

•

MK RAM Pack - Lithium iodide battery
back-up, used with 124011241 . Must have
firmware version 5-2 or higher.
Order 12AS02

$500

•

32K EPROM Pack - Used with 12401
1241 , EPAOMs not included. Order 12AS11

$85

•

32K EPROM Pack - Used with 12401
1241, four 68764 or 68766 EPROMs included. Order 12AS12

$300

$40

$14.50

IC Clip - 24 pin dip, clothespin style.
Order 003-()823{Xl

$33

IC Clip - 40 pin dip, clothespin style.
Order OO3{)ooI{Xl

$50

•

DAS 9100 Set-Up and Hold Time T.at
Fixture - Order 067-1037{Xl

$1,275

•

DAS 9100 High Speed Acqulaltlon
T.at Fixture For verification of
DAS 91A04, DAS 91AE04, DAS 91A04A,
and DAS 91 AE04A modules.
Order 067-1139-00

$250

•

Low Profile Dip Clip - 16 pin dip to
16 position double row header with
0.025 inch square pins on 0.1 inch centers,
12 inch. Order 01s-o:m-oo

$40

Fiat Cable Mounta - Adhesive Back for
securing and organizing probes with flat
ribbon cables. Order 343-1048-()()

$.95

Sync Out Cable - Miniature Phone P1ug
to BNC, 79 inch, for 91A24 sync output.
Order 175-8165-00

$35

91AE24 Jumper Cable R.placem.nts
_ Package of seven, twisted pair, 2 position connectors, 3 inch. Order 175-8167{Xl

$4.80

Probe Extender Cable - Male to Female 34 position double row connectors
compatible with P6452, P6455, P6456,
P6462, 6 feet. Order 012-1012-01

$125

•

$5.75

$35

$1,375

•

$35

•

DAS 9100 Service Malntenanc. Kit Includes board and cable extenders for
DAS modules, power supplies, CRT, and
keyboard. Order 067-0900-01

•

For

RECOMMENDED CARTS
For DAS 9200, DAS 9100 and 1240/1241.

•
B. Circuit Board Mounted Probe Connector Kit - 10 + 6 wide comb to 0.025 inch
square pins on 0.15 inch centers, with
mounting tabs, for PC mounting, mounting
hole dimensions 0.00 inch wide XO.95 inch
long. Interfaces to the following probes:
P6452, P6455, P6456, P6457, P6460, and
P6462. Seven piece kit. Order 020-1027{Xl

$111.50

IC Clip - 16 pin dip, clothespin style.
Order 003-0709-00

•

40 Pin Dip Sock.t Female Adaptor 40 position double row head with
0.025 inch square pins on 0.1 inch centers
to 40 pin dip socket, for interfacing 40 pin
low profile dip clips to PM 100 series
probes. Order 38(}{)64Hll

R.talner Clamp. - Kit of 4.
(P6461 /E) Order 020-1483{Xl
(P6460IP6464/P6465, DAS 9200) Order
020-1484{Xl

A. LCC (Laadle.. Chip Carrier) to POA
(Pin Orld Array) Adapt.r - 68 pin
package, for adapting 00286 (LCC) packages to 00286 (PGA) package.
To order 015-()494{Xl contact your local
Sales Offica.

$90

•

$311

•

$405

OPIB Cabl. - Two meter.
Order 012-QEOO{)1

Circuit Board Ejector Tool removing DAS 9100 module cards.
Order 214-3154{Xl

flexible Disk - 3601<, 5.25 inch 48 WI,
package of 10. Order 119-1583-01

$70

$85

•

•
$175

Parallel Int.rtac. Cable - Two meter,
used with l2OOC11 Parallel Printer COMM
Pack for Centronix type printer interface.
Order 012.()99HXl

40 Pin Mal. Adaptor - 40 position d0uble row header with 0.025 inch square pins
on 0.1 inch centers, interfaces the PM 101
or flying lead sets to low profile dip clip
above. Order 38(}()56(}()5

•

MEDIA
For DAS 9200, DAS 9100 and 1240/1241.

•

92 Cart - AnthroCart for DAS 9200.
Order 92 Cart
K217 Cart description.

$355

See page 462 for complete

Tilt Ball - For DAS 9100.
Order 348-0727-01

$495
$311

•

Rackmount KIt - For DAS 9100.
Order 01&0463-00

$200

•

Rackmount KIt - For DAS 9200.
Order 01&0045-00

$450

Rackmount Kit - For 124011241 .
Order 016-0789-00

$400

•

Acc•• aory Pouch - Convenient for carrying manuals, and other accessories for
124011241 and DAS 9100 logic analyzers.
Order 016-0707{Xl.

• Not shOwn.

127

TEK

SEMICONDUCTOR
TEST SYSTEMS
CONTENTS
LT-1000 VLSI Logic Test System .....
5-3225 Advanced Logic Tester . . . . ..... .
5-3220 LSI Test System . . . . ...... . .....
5-3270 LSI Test System ..... .. . . . .... . .
5-3295 VLSI Test System .. . ...... . .....

129
131
132
132
132

With the introduction of the LT-1000 VLSI
Logic Test System, Tektronix Semiconductor Test Systems Division initiates a new
era of cost-effective production testing of
high speed, high pin count VLSI circuits.
With all new hardware and software designed ' from the ground up,' this is the first
system from Tektronix developed specifically with production priorities uppermost in
the minds of the designers.
Tektronix test systems are known throughout the electronics industry for their innovative solutions to the latest testing challenges. Each successive generation of
semiconductor devices boasts higher
speed, more pins, more functions per chip,
and more complex testing requirements.
With the LT-1000, Tektronix STS again
meets the new challenges of the industry
with a new approach to the complexities of
production test. Backed by the same commitment to excellence as other Tektronix
products, this new system offers time saving features in such critical areas as program development, device handling and
test, system calibration, and maintenance
while lowering capital equipment costs
through creative economy of design.
While the LT-1(0) marks a dramatic departure from the architecture of the previous
Tektronix systems in the S-3200 product line,
it also represents a new chapter in a
continuing effort to anticipate and fill the
needs of the evolving device-testing market.
In the beginning, our first generation automated semiconductor tester was designed
to test the largest LSI devices in use at the
time (four- and eight-bit microprocessors,
1K memories, and peripheral chips). Later
systems offered improved device characterization and were designed for quality
control in production test environments.
Next we tackled the challenge of testing
high speed logic and solving the unique
problems associated with subnanosecond
technologies. Then , we offered a full range

128

of production-oriented enhancements to
truly put Tek quality into production. And
now, with the LT-1(0), Tektronix offers a
cost-performance breakthrough in the testing of high speed , high pin count ,
application-specific ICs.
Tektronix provides the hardware, software,
training, and applications engineering support to solve today's testing problems, and
tomorrow's as well. New and unusual device
parameters are viewed as a challenge to our
resources, not as insurmountable problems.
Every Tektronix system, whether it's one of
the field-proven S-3200 products or the innovative new LT-1(0), is designed with the
user in mind. The S-3200 Series testers use
TEKTEST~ software, an easily learned and
manipulated language with many powerful
capabilities for easy test program generation and debugging. The LT-1(0) software
is a powerful , menu-driven language set
that can interface directly with CAE design
sources and runs on hardware independent
of the tester and devoted exclusively to
program development.
All Tektronix systems feature highly sophisticated data reduction and graphics, which
make the test results manageable and
easy to understand.

We offer analog and digital capability to
meet the new test requirements presented
by new and increasingly complex devices.
In fact, many 'captive' device manufacturing facilities use Tektronix systems for just
this reason. Tektronix is also a device manufacturer and has been testing its own ICs
and hybrids for years. As a company, we
have developed expertise and in-depth understanding of complex testing.
At Tektronix , we 've built on our past
experience and knowledge about device
testing and tester design to create products that can help you meet your testing
challenges-today and in the future.

TEK

NEWLT-1000
VLSI Logic Test System
Optimized for High Speed, High Pin Count
ASIC Devices
Reduced Production Cost-Per-Test
Independent Auto-Calibration
Rapid Off-Line Program Development

VLSI LOGIC
TEST SYSTEM

The LT-1000 VLSI Logic Test System represents a price performance breakthrough for
high-speed, high pin count ASIC device
testing in the production environment. Each
component, hardware and software, was
designed for maximum efficiency and reduced cost per test. By balancing the
tester per pin and shared resource requirements in the system's integrated pin electronics, the cost and size of hardware in
the LT-1000 is kept at a minimum . Test
head fixturing and interfacing capabilities
are designed for maximum throughput.

Unique approaches to system calibration
and program development using
system-independent support units maximize the utility of those units and eliminate
costly redundancy. All of these features
translate into savings in all of the critical
production test cost areas: initial capital investment, device handling and testing time,
program development time , and set-up
time between runs, as well as routine and
unscheduled maintenance.

129

VLSI LOGIC
TEST SYSTEM

LT-PDS Program Development Station
The LT-PDS is an advanced programming
workstation that links directly to the design
workstation . An automatic test program
generator running on the PDS converts test
vectors and other data extracted from CAE
design databases. These are combined
with user inputs into a test program using
predefined test program skeletons and
rules specific to the process technology
being tested.

The innovative system architecture and
software of the Tektronix LT-1000 VLSI
Logic Test System, along with the system's
unique support units, were strategically designed for high volume testing of application specific VLSI circuits . The LT-1000
meets all the production testing and incoming inspection requirements for gate arrays,
standard cell IC's, custom and semicustom
devices, at a price substantially lower than
the general purpose testers commonly
used in these applications.
The LT-1000 VLSI Logic Test System is capable of testing the ac, dc, and functional
performance of VLSI circuits with up to 256
pins at speeds up to 50 MHz. The system
was optimized for the demands of CMOS
technology, but with sufficient flexibility to
be adapted to other processes as well.
The LT-1000 VLSI Logic Test System is
made up of the LT-1000 Test Station, supported by the LT-POS Program Development
Station and the LT-ACS Auto-Calibration Station. The POS is used to access data from
design databases and to write and debug
test programs. The ACS uses external instrumentation to quickly and accurately perfonn
system verification and calibration routines. A
key to the system's economy is the sharing
of system's support units' capabilities among
a number of Test Stations.
The LT-1000 Test Station design is based
on a 'mixed' architecture that combines
the strengths of both tester-per-pin and
shared resource architectures. The OUT interface circuitry required at each device pin
(including drivers, comparators, timing generators, and data formatters) is condensed
into two custom CMOS monolithic integrated circuits. This approach requires less
hardware which, in turn, results in a more

130

compact, more maneuverable test head
lower hardware costs, and higher reliability.'
Dc parametriC test times are reduced by
making simultaneous parametric measurements on multiple pins. Up to 32 Parallel
Parametric Measurement Units may be
configured in each test head, one for every
8 OUT pin channels.
The modular test head contains up to 256
I/O channels that may be split into four
64-pin segments for testing four devices in
parallel. For applications where multiple test
heads are required , a second test head is
available as a system option.
The compact design of the test head
allows positioning on any axis for mounting
to commercial manipulators or adaptation
for manual insertion. The test head interfaces to a variety of wafer probers and
automatic device handlers for high throughput, and fix turing can be changed quickly
and easily to save time between production
runs. Positioning keys and locking devices
make such changes virtually error-free and
ensure high integrity signal transmission.
The test head is linked to a double-width
short-frame system support rack that
houses the system controller and the
shared-resource components, which provide the signals, voltages, and instructions
to the OUT through the test head pin electronics. Each function provided by the rack
was designed for maximum economy and
maximum throughput . For example,
throughput is enhanced by 256K pattern
memory which is loaded through a fast direct memory access (DMA) channel to a
MicroVAX II (TM) computer. The MicroVAX
II is configured with 2 MBytes of memory, a
31 MByte hard disk, and GPIB and Ethernet
interfaces.

A highly interactive, multiwindow,
bit-mapped environment allows the test engineer to fine tune programs quickly and
efficiently using intelligent editors and
graphical debugging aids such as timing
diagrams. These programming tools reduce
test development time to a matter of hours
instead of days or weeks, which results in
dramatic time and cost savings. And, to ensure maximum utilization, a single PDS may
be used to write and debug programs for
several test stations.
LT-HOST
An optional system host called LT-HOST
may be added to the Ethernet network
which links the Program Development Stations and LT-1000 Test Stations . The
LT-HOST provides centralized data storage, and test data analysis, data reduction
and test floor management software, all
running on a VAXNMS CPU.
LT-ACS Auto-Calibration Station
The LT-1000 ACS provides microprocessorcontrolled external instrumentation for fast
and accurate system calibration. Physically
linked to the test head during calibration,
the ACS uses a single, retractable probe
and one signal path to measure system
timing, skew, and dc parametric performance . The ACS is controlled by the
LT-1000 central processor during calibration and communicates tabulated data
back to the system for interpolation and error correction.

A system verification procedure examines
the system for gross failures and deviations
from published specifications. A fully automatic calibration procedure brings the system up to specified performance levels
without manual service adjustments. The
ACS is capable of probing the actual OUT
fixture , ensuring a fully corrected signal
path to the OUT pin.
The accurate, efficient verification and calibration procedures of the LT-ACS save
valuable production test time and result in
higher yields. And, as with the PDS, a single ACS unit can service many LT-1000
testers for additional hardware cost
savings.

TEK

Advanced Logic Tester
Specifically Designed for Advanced
Schottky-TTL and HCMOS Technologies
High Speed Driver Features 1 V Ins
Slew Rate
Seven-Phase Programmable Clock With
125 ps Edge Placement
Extemal Fixturlng Site Offers a High-Fidelity
Interface Point for Handlers and Probers

The S-3225 Advanced Logic Tester is a
production test system designed to provide
the full range of capabilities required for
thorough Advanced Schottky TIL and High
Speed CMOS device testing. This versatile
system encourages a test strategy based
on accurate and exhaustive production
testing, in the belief that superior accuracy
produces higher yields . The S-3225 can
perform thorough device tests that eliminate the risk of passing marginal parts
while ensuring that all passing devices
meet very tight guardband tolerances. Although the S-3225 is aimed at high-throughput applications, such as production QC
and receiving inspection, its high performance meets the stringent demands of the
engineering characterization lab.
The standard system package consists of a
vertical test station mated to an integral
rack bay that houses the system controller
and stimulus equipment. The 'carousel"
within the test station accommodates up to
64 025 pin electronics cards, each supporting a single OUT I/O pin. The new 025 is the
'front end" of the S-3225, since it interfaces

ADVANCED
LOGIC TESTER

directly to the OUT and provides the exacting electrical performance required by the
emerging families of high-speed logic-ASTTL and HCMOS. The 025's high slew rate
(greater than 1 V/ns) and its wide dynamic
range ( - 2 V to +8 V programmable range)
are capabilities essential to meaningful testing of high-speed devices.
The system's seven-phase (14 phases optional) timing generator has 125 ps edge
placement programming increments, placing the S-3225 at the top of its class in timing accuracy. Other standard features yield
not only accuracy, but also outstanding
throughput performance. The Parallel Parametric Unit, for example, implements dc
measurements on all OUT pins simultaneously. And the Single-Shot Time Measurement System allows ac measurements
such as propagation delay, access time,
and set-up/hold time to be made in a single
pass, saving time-consuming 'iteratedstrobe' measurement steps while enhancing accuracy (the resolution of measurements made with the S-STMS is 50 ps).
Special provisions for efficient interfacing
to automatic device handlers and wafer
probers are fundamental to the S-3225's
production test capability. The system has
a production-optimized External Rxturing
Site that allows fast and easy fixturing
changeovers and preserves the integrity of
the critical driverlcomparator signal path.
This is accomplished by extending the controlled-impedance portion of that path outside the system housing, so that it directly
mates various automated device handlers.

Interface cabling to these external devices
is minimized or eliminated. Conventional
(horizontally-oriented) wafer probers that require a cable interface to the S-3225 also
benefit from the system's ability to provide
full-spec driver/comparator performance into
cable interfaces as long as 18 inches.
For those applications requiring full clock
rate device testing at speeds up to
200 MHz, the Fmax Test Option furnishes a
separate, high-quality 50 ohm path to route
signals to and from external GPIB-controlled instrumentation. This path is used to
connect chosen OUT pins to pulse generators, counters, and sampling equipment to
allow those pins to be monitored at their
full functional speed. The Fmax Test Option
is another unique attribute that makes the
S-3225 a superior production test system.
The S-3225 uses the familiar TEKTEST III
Operating System/Test Language that provides self explanatory high-level test constructs, enabling users to come quickly 'up
to speed' with their device test programming skills. Of course, programs written in
TEKTEST III can be transported easily between all Tektronix S-3200 Series systems,
with only minor hardware-related modifications required for most applications.
With speed and accuracy that meet the
challenge of the fastest Advanced
Schottky-TTL and High Speed CMOS devices, and high-throughput features for volume testing, the S-3225 has the right mix of
features for a tough testing job. From any
perspective, the S-3225 is a unique solution
to high-performance production testing.

131

TEK

LSI/VLSI
TEST SYSTEMS

S-3220

S-3270

S-3295

5-3295 VLSI Test System
5-3220 LSI Test System

5-3270 LSI Test System

Full Capability 20 MHz Test System

Uninterrupted Error Storage at 20 MHz

Cost-Effective for High-Throughput
Production Applications

Multiple Pattern Sources

Enhanced 1K Pattern RAM Supplements
4K per Pin Stored Memory
Single-Shot Timing Measurement
Uses TEKTEST~, Allowing Device
Characterization Programs to be Condensed and Used In Production Testing
Up to 128-Pln Test Capability

The S-3220 is offered as a production-oriented complement to the Tektronix S-3270
Test System. Since the S-322O uses the
TEKTEST control software used in ail S-32OO
systems, programs originally developed for
engineering use can easily be condensed
and employed in a high volume production
or incoming inspection environment. The essential test related features of the larger
systems are retained in the S-3220, allowing
(with no loss in speed or accuracy) functional or pattern testing as well as dc parametric and single-pass ac parametric testing.
The S-322O is configured with a vertical pinelectronics package that is integrated with
the control/stimulus equipment rack. This
feature eases prober/handler mechanical
interface and reduces floor space
requirements-an important consideration
in most production areas.

14 Programmable Channels of Timing
Information
Test Devices with Up to 128 Pins
Single-Shot Timing

The S-3270 System tests LSI, microprocessors, analog and digital hybrids, peripheral
interface circuits, RAMs, ROMs, and more.
Designed to deliver test results on the devices you see everyday, it is also built to
deliver results when new devices appear.
With the S-3270, you can perform functional tests at speeds up to 20 MHz. When you
must test a microprocessor at its optimum
speed, you need the S-3270.
When testing one of the new, fast devices
with the S-3270, you will not have to stop
the test to log an error. The S-3270 keeps
right on testing while it catches the error
and records its location . Input/Output
switching may also be performed at a
clock rate of 20 MHz.
The system has 64 pin electronic cards,
each with input and output capability, so
you can test a device with up to 128 pins.
The 14-phase clock gives you many programmable channels of timing information,
to properly and effectively test devices. For
total flexibility, the S-3270 features independent control of logic level definition at each
driver and receiver. You set the logic level
on every input and output channel, so you
are not bound by the limits of the system.
The unique Single-Shot Time Measurement
technique allows you to make a measurement with 50 ps resolution in one iteration.
Dynamic measurements can also be made
by moving strobes (iteration) or by using
the optional waveform digitizer.

132

High Precision for Characterization
High Throughput for Production
256 Channels, 128 1/0 Pins
Advanced Color Graphics and Data
Reduction

The S-3295 was designed to meet the
needs of the user who demands precision,
reliability, and efficiency in an automated
test system. The S-3295 offers a range of
features for applications in the engineering
lab as well as on the production test floor.
Building on the proven architecture of the
S-32OO series, the S-3295 incorporates significant advances in the areas of real time
pattern generation, timing flexibility and accuracy, resolution , and functional test
capability.
Subsystems within the S-3295 include the
pattem processor, a powerful dedicated pattem computer; the multiset timing generator,
which provides 16 sets of 16 timing phases,
accurate 125 picosecond timing resolution,
and split-cycle operation at all clock speeds;
and the 1809 V test station that houses up to
64 D95 pin electronics cards with 2 input and
2 output pins on each.
095 pin electronics cards contain the critical DUT testing capabilities of the S-3295.
The Signal drivers feature programmable
rise time, low inhibit leakage, low aberrations, and wide bandwidth and are complemented by comparators of equal performance. These I/O pairs are backed up by
128K of local memory. Driver, comparator,
and inhibit phases are automatically
deskewed. Drivers can be multiplexed for
an effective clock rate of 40 MHz for testing high speed devices. Programmable output loads eliminate the need for complex
external load boards.
In the production environment, the S-3295's
exceptional accuracy permits the use of narrow guard bands, thereby improving yields.

TEK

VLSITEST
SYSTEMS

DELTA
SERIES

COMPUTER BASED
INSTRUMENTATION

The Delta Series system occupies a minimum amount of floor space. Here, a user tests an application-specifIC IC (ASIC) using Tek-developed VlSUBllnteractive Acress (\IZA) Software.

Delta Series
VLSI Test Systems
24 to 96 I/O Pins Available to Test
up to 196 Pins
Link to CAE Systems Simulators
Modular, VME-8ased Architecture
20 MHz Data Rate
Provides Timing Margin Tests With
100 ps Resolution

The Tektronix Delta Series has incorporated
state-of-the-art instrumentation into modular,
plug-in cards, each with its own on-board
computer, and integrated them within a compact, Iow-cost system compatible with major
hosts and workstations.
The Delta Series allows the design engineer
to test and verify semicustom VLSI prototypes personally, interactively, using the
same resources and user interface as in the
design process itself.

By downloading test vectors from the data
base and by utilizing levels of accuracy never previously achievable at the workbench
level, designers can conduct functional tests
(to determine the existence and origin of
chip failure) and timing margin tests (to evaluate how well the device works and how well
it integrates within the larger system).
The Delta Series' Device-Under-Test (OUT)
interface is easily reconfigurable to accommodate common Ie packaging formats.

133

VLSITEST
SYSTEMS

DELTA
SERIES
IJolt..l,.S.t
\ioJt.,~

Do.-f,

1.0
"..,..rotl)r
IMll

"I.

t. ~

~L~r

IIO!h
~

• ._

.. lh

l..D

' . ~ tIOlh

HI.

• ..,.. . l l I

• ._

..,It.

'' ._
._

'10111
_ Ita

... 1 ......

C,.,..r.otor

lit P.-r

,.,,1,"

With the Timing Setup Screen, the user can define format and clock edges associated with paNem
generator/signal conditioner, force, compare and clock
signals.

The Test Loop Screen is used to build a simple loop
test through the VIA interface. It allows the user to i~
plement a common our test without having to write a
VME-based C test program.

System Description
The Delta Series VLSI Test System was designed for ASIC and commodity test
requirements.

Coupled with an ASIC Design Workstation,
(such as from CAE Systems Division of
Tektronix), the Delta Series can be used to
cost-effectively verify performance of ASICs
after fabrication by the foundry. Time-saving
and effective software, such as CAE Link, allow the user to utilize the simulator files developed on the Design Workstation to generate test vectors for the IC.
In the commodity IC application area, the
Delta Series can be configured with
industry-standard Test Head manipulators,
and interfaced with many different device
handlers.

134

HI.
1.0

""I

....-

will
.oth

""',

Ioo:-fln,tw",

1I.-.1L

12HLAJU
ILMLAIn
lZ:MlAIn
ID4LA1£t

w200 kHz (unlocked).
Where: D=Span/div or Resolution BW, whichever
is greater.
F=Center or Marker Frequency.
Delta Malt(er Frequency Accuracy - ± 1% of
Total Span.
Frequency Drift (After 1 Hour Wann-Up) Span/div ~2OO kHz (Phase Locked): Drift rate
~50 Hz/min. Correction will occur at the end of
sweep for sweep times ;..5 s/div. (Drift rate is typically <20 Hzlmin after 1 hour warm-up from 25·C
storage).
Span/div >200 kHz (unlocked) : Drift rate
<5 kHzImin (typically <25 kHzImin after ~ minute
warm-up).
Frequency Readout Resolution - ~10% of
span/div to 1 Hz minimum.
Residual FM - ~ 10 Hz peak-ta-peak in 20 msec,
span/div ~2OO kHz (Phase locked); ~7 kHz peak
to peak in 20 msec, span/div >200 kHz (unlocked).
Resolution Filters - ~ Hz then 100 Hz to 1 MHz
in decade steps (6 db bandwidth ± 20%); Shape
factor ~7 .5: 1 except ~ Hz at ~12: 1 (00 dBl6 dB).
Frequency Span/Division - 0 Hz (ZERO SPAN
pushbutton or keypad data entry); 20 Hz to
100 MHz (in a 1-2-5 sequence) via span/div knob;
20 Hz to 170 Hz (to two significant digits) via FREQUENCY or MARKER START/STOP, or keypad
data entry; 100 MHz via power-up, RESET, or MAX
SPAN pushbuttons; accuracy ± 5%.
Frequency Response ± 1.0 dB (measured
with 10 dB RF attenuation).
-24 dBm maximum
Zero Frequency Spur measured into 50 {} and open circuit with 0 dB RF
attenuation; -35 dBm typical.
AMPLITUDE RELATED
Vertical Display Modes - 10 dBldiv, 2 dBldiv
and linear via pushbutton; any integer from 1 to
15 dBldiv via Data Entry keypad.
Display Dynamic Range - 00 dB Log mode; 8
divisions Linear mode.
Reference Level Range - Log Mode : - 117 to
+40 dBm (+30 dBm maximum) ; -130 to
+27 dBV (+ 17 dBV maximum) ; -70 to
+87 dBmV (+ 77 dBmV maximum); -10 to
+ 147 dBItV (+ 137 dBItV maximum).
Linear Mode: 39.6 nV/div to 2.8 Vldiv (1 Wor 10 V
peak maximum).
Reference Level Steps - 10 dB coarse, 1 dB
fine in 10 dB log; 1 dB coarse, 0.25 dB fine in 2 dB
log; 1-2-5 sequence coarse, 1 dB equivalent fine
in linear; coarse step=Log/div (except 1 dB for
2 dB/div), fine is 1 dB for ;..5 dB or 0.25 dB for
~4 dB/div, set via Data Entry keypad.
Reference Level Accuracy - Accuracy is dependent on a combination of RF Attenuator Accuracy, IF Gain Accuracy, Resolution Bandwidth,
Display Mode, Calibrator Accuracy, Frequency
Response and Temperature Change. (±0.15 dB/
·C maximum.)
-, Referencs Oscillator Accuracy: ± 1.5 kHz over the tempersture extremes of - 15"C to + SS "C.

SERIES

Display Amplitude Accuracy ± 1.0 dB/
10 dB to a maximum error of ± 2.0 dB over 80 dB
range (10 dB/div Log); ±0.4 dB/2.0 dB to a maximum error of ± 1.0 dB over 16 dB range (2 dB/div
Log); ± 5% of full scale in Linear.
RF Attenuator Range and Accuracy - 0 to
60 dB in 10 dB steps; 0.5 dB/10 dB, 1.0 dB maximum cumulative error over the 00 dB range.
Resolution Filter Gain Variation - < ±0.4 dB
(after CAL with respect to 1 MHz filter).
IF Gain Range - 87 dB increase, 10 dB decrease in MIN NOISE, 10 dB and 1 dB steps;
57.75 dB in 0.25 dB steps (Delta A mode).
IF Gain Accuracy - ~0 . 2 dB/dB to a maximum
of 0.5 dB/9 dB except at the decade transitions
-29 to -30 dBm, -39 to - 40 dBm, - 49 to
- SO dBm and - 59 to - 00 dBm which add an
additional 0.5 dB for a maximum cumulative error
of 1 dB/1 0 dB; ± 2.0 dB maximum deviation over
the 97 dB range .
Malt(er/s Accuracy Equal to Reference
Level Accuracy plus cumulative error of Display
Amplitude Accuracy.
Noise Sidebands
dBc/Hz

Off..t From C.n1er

- 85

900Hz

- 90

3kHz

- 105

:JJ kHz

- 115

:nJkHz

- 125

3 MHz

Residual Responses - ~ -100 dBm with input terminated and 0 dB RF attenuation
(~-95 dBm for Rackmount Option 31).
Harmonic Distortion ~ - 60 dBc for a
- 30 dBm CW signal with 0 dB RF Attenuation in
MIN DISTORTION mode.
Third Order Intermodulation Distortion ~ - 70 dBc for any two on-screen CW signals within any frequency span in MIN DlSTORTlON mode.
Sensitivity (Equivalent Input Noise)
SenlltiYity dBm

RelOlution

-1:JJ

:JJHz

- 125

100Hz

- 115

1(0) Hz

- 105

10kHz

-95

100kHz

- 85

1 MHz

LO Emissions ~ - 70 dBm with 0 dB RF
attenuation.
INPUT SIGNAL
RF Input Type "N" female, 50 {} nominal
impedance.
1.3:1 maximum, 1.2:1 typical, with
VSWR 10 dB or more RF attenuation; 2.0:1 maximum,
1.9:1 typical, with 0 dB attenuation.
Maximum Safe Input (0 dB RF Attenuation) - +30 dBm (1 W) continuous, 75 W peak,
1 Itsec pulse width, 0.001 duty; 0 Vdc.
1 dB Gain Compression - 10 dBm with
dB RF attenuation in MIN NOISE; -20 dBm with
dB RF Attenuation in MIN DISTORTION; (No
gain compression can be observed on screen).

o
o

OUTPUT SIGNALS
Calibrator (Cal Out) - - 20 dBm ± 0.3 dB at
100 MHz ± 10 PPM.

TEK

490

100 Hz to 1.8 GHz
PORTABLE SPECTRUM ANALYZERS

SERIES

1st and 2nd LO - Provides access to the output of the respective local oscillators. 1st LO output range + 6 dBm to + 15 dBm; 2nd LO output
range - 10 dBm to + 15 dBm; these ports must
be terminated in 50 f! at all times.
Vertical Output - Provides 0.5 V ± 5% of signal/div of video above and below the CRT centerline; 1 kf! source impedance.
Horizontal Output - Provides 0.5 V either side
of the CRT centerline. Full range ± 2.5 V ± 10%.
Pen Lift - TTL compatible, +5 V nominal to lift
pen.
10 MHz IF Output - Output level is - 5 dBm
for a full screen signal at - 30 dBm reference level; 50 f! nominal impedance.
110 MHz IF Output (Option 42) - Center frequency from 100.5 MHz to 111 .5 MHz; 3 dB bandwidth >5 MHz; Bandpass ripple ';;;0.5 dB; power
out with -30 dBm reference level and a full screen
signal .;;;0 dBm; 1 dB compression at ~ O dBm output, MIN DISTORTlON; 50 f! nominal impedance.
Probe Power - Provides operating voltages for
active probes. Pin 1: +5 Vat 100 mA maximum.
Pin 2: Ground. Pin 3: - 15 Vat 100 mA maximum.
Pin 4: + 15 V at 100 mA maximum.
IEEE Standard 488·1 978 Interface Function
Subsets Implemented - 495P Version: In accordance with IEEE Std 488-1978 implemented as
SH1 , AH1 , T5, L3, SAl , RL1 , PP1 , OCl , DT1 , and
C0. 495 Non-P Version (Plotter Output): Implemented as SH1 , AH0, T3, L0, SR0, RL0, PP0,
DC0, DT0, and C0.
DISPLAY CHARACTERISTICS
CRT - 8 cm x 10 cm, GH (P31) phosphor.
CRT Readout - Displays: Reference level, center frequency, marker frequency and amplitude,
frequency range, vertical display mode, frequency span/div, resolution bandwidth, RF attenuation, video filter, and text.
Video Filter Range - 0.3 Hz to 30 kHz (coupled to resolution filter by front panel
pushbuttons ).
Sweep - Triggered , auto , manual , single
sweep, and external.
Sweep Time - 20 P.s to 5 s/div (10 s/div in
Auto) in a 1-2-5 sequence; accuracy ± 5%.
Triggering - Internal, External, Line, and Free
Run; Internal Trigger Level ~2 div of signal; external level ~ 1 V peak, 15 Hz to 1 MHz, 50 V maximum (dc + ac peak).
Digital Storage - 1000 points Horizontal, 250
points Vertical; A and B Views; Save A; Max Hold;
B to Save A; digital averaging (Peak/Average);
Pulse Stretcher.
Nonvolatile Display Memory - Store and recall up to 9 full waveforms complete with CRT
readouts.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
90 to 132 V ac or 180 to
Input Voltage 250 V ac, 48 to 440 Hz.
Power - 210 W maximum with all options, at
115 V and 60 Hz.
Configuration - (PortaJble) 19.1 kg (42Ib) including cover and included accessories. Option 05 adds
.4 kg (.9Ib). Option 07 adds .2 kg (.4Ib); 175mm x
327 mm x 499 mm (6.9 in x 12.9 in x 29.6 in).

E -

1'\

III

!" -

IJ~~ l00 Hl

-' _ eo

~ - 90

1-'00
<

Il o•

1 kHz

- 120

Input Frequency
- 140

i I III

II IIII

- 150
10Hz

r-.....: ~

r- Typical Sensitivity Versus
130

II
10kHz

1 k Hz

100Hz

,
,,
I II ,

r\UM Z

- 80

t::- I'--

l"-

1MH;

- 110

lJ kH~

100

,,
,,

"'-.. ,
['1..\

- 90

,l!!

100k Hz

,
,

,
\

1"-t - '
!"o..

,,
,,
1\

10MHl

,lUz

,,
,,

r--

-'00

J.t

1 MHz

- 110

- 120

t - - Typical Single Sideband Noise

at 1 GHz Center Frequenc
......

- 130

- 140

100 Hz

10Hz

= Specified _

s_""

1 kHz

10kHz
Frequency ONset from Carrier

100kHz

K
1 MHz

l OMHz

Um ..

ENVIRONMENTAL
Meets MIL-T-288OOC, Type III, Class 3, Style C
specifications as follows:
Temperature - Operating: - 15°C to +55°C.
Nonoperating: - 62°C to +85°C.
Altitude - Operating: 15,000 feet (tested to
25,000 feet). Nonoperating: 40,000 feet (50,000).
Vibration - Operating: 15 Hz to 55 Hz at 4 g
maximum per MIL-STD-810D, Method 514, Procedure I (modified).
Humidity - Operating: 95% (+5%, - 0%). Nonoperating: Five cycles (120 hours) in accordance
with MIL-STD-810D Procedure 3 (modified).
Shock - Operating and Nonoperating: 30 g, onehalf sine, 11 ms (tested to 50 g).
Transit Drop - Free fall, 12 inches, one per
each of six faces and eight corners.
Electromagnetic Compatibility - Meets requirements of MIL-STD-461B Part 4 tested as
follows:
Conducted Emissions: CE01 , 1 kHz to 15 kHz
only; CE03, 15 kHz to 50 kHz relaxed by 15 dB.
Conducted Susceptibility: CS01 ; CS02; CS06.
Radiated Emissions: RE01, Relaxed by 10 dB for
fundamental to the 10th harmonic of power line
(exceptioned, 30 kHz to 36 kHz); RE02.
Radiated Susceptibility: RS01 ; RS02, to 5A only;
RS03, up to 1 GHz.

CHARACTERISTICS (OPTION 05)
Provides precision internal reference , signal
counter, extemal reference input, and Macro (495P
only) down-loadaJble programming capabilities.
Center and Marker Frequency Accuracy ± [20%0 + (F x Ref. Freq. Error) + 15 Hz] with
span/div .;;;200 kHz (Phase locked); ± [20%0 +
(F x Ref. Freq. Error) + 15 kHz] with span/div
>200 kHz (unlocked).
Where: D=Span/div or Resolution BW,
whichever is greater.
F=Center or Marker Frequency.
Reference Frequency Error (Internal) .;;;1 x 10-9 per day; .;;;1 x 10-7 in the first six
months, .;;; 1 x 10-7 year thereafter; Accuracy 30
minutes after power on within 5 x lQ-8 of the frequency after 24 hours; Within 2 x 10-8 over the
temperature range of -15°C to +55°C.
Signal Counter Accuracy - ±[(F x Ref. Freq.
Error) + 12 Hz + 1 LSD]
Where: F=Center, Marker, or Delta Marker
Frequency
LSD = Least Significant Digit
Counter Sensitivity - Signal level must be
,,;;;20 dB above the average noise level and within
60 dB of the reference level.
Counter Readout Resolution Selectable
from 1 Hz to 100 MHz in decade steps.

159

TEK

100 Hz to 1,8 GHz
PORTABLE SPECTRUM ANALYZERS

External Reference Input - Frequency: 1,2,5,
or 10 MHz with ~5 ppm stability. Power Range:
-15 dBm to + 15 dBm. Waveshape: Sinewave,
ECL, TTL (Allowable Duty cycle symmetry is 40%
to 60%). Input Impedance: 50 0 ac, 500 0 dc;
Rear-panel BNC input.
CHARACTERISTICS (OPTION 07)
50 0 /75 0 INPUT RELATED
Provides 750 input and dBmV calibration in addition to the normal 50 0 input and dBm calibration.
The 100 kHz resolution filte r is replaced by
300 kHz to optimize the instrument for broadcast
and CATV uses.
Center Frequency Range 1 MHz to
1000 MHz.
Frequency Response - ± 2.0 dB from 5 MHz
to 1000 MHz; typical response for the 1 MHz to
5 MHz frequency range is <3 dB down from the
5 MHz response.
Reference Level Range - -68 dBmV to + 79
dBmV (+89 dBmV is achievable in MIN NOISE
mode).
Sensitivity (Equivalent Input Noise)
Senlltlvlty dBmV

Relolutlon

75 Il Input 5 MHz to 1000 MHz
- 81

3lHz

- 76

100Hz

- 66
- 56

lOOlHz

- 41

3lOkHz

- 36
5O1l RF Input
- 90 (d8m)

10kHz
1 MHz
3lOkHz

Input Impedance - 750; VSWR 1.35:1 (17 dB
RL) maximum, 5 MHz to 800 MHz; VSWR 1.6:1 (13
dB RL) maximum, 800 MHz to 1000 MHz; BNC
female.
Maximum Input Level - With 0 dB attenuation:
+ 78 dBmV . With attenuation ~20 dB :
+ 78 dBmV, 100 V maximum (dc + ac peak).
Calibrator (Cal Out) +20 dBmV ± 0.5 dB;
75 0 impedance nominal.
CHARACTERISTICS (OPTIONS 30 AND 31)
RACKMOUNT
These options provide rackmount configurations
with accessories drawer that mount in standard
EIA 19 inch racks. Option 31 additionally provides
rear-panel inpuUoutput connectors. These rackmounts affect the 495/495P electrical and envi·
ronmental characteristics as follows:
Environmental - Meets MIL-T-288OOC, Type III,
Class 5, Style F.
Residual FM - May increase according to the
rack frame environment; typically by a factor of two.
Electrical - (Option 31) Frequency Response:
± 1.5 dB measured at the rear panel RF input.
Residual Spurious Response: < - 95 dBm.
Size - 8 .75 x 16.89 x 25.00 inches (222 x 429 x
635mm).
Weight - Adds 20 Ibs. (9.1 kg) to the weight of
the instrument.

160

PORTABLE TO RACK ADAPTOR
Those needing the utility of a rackmounted instrument and desiring easy convertibility to a rugged
portable should order the rack adaptor PIN
01 6- 5 MHz bandwidth, IF
Output suitable for broadband receiver mea,
surements.
+ $1,500

Option 45 -

MATE/CIIL language interface

+ 54,975

(495P only).

Option 52*' -

North American 220 V config·
uration with standard power cord.
"I

To order, contsct

your Iocsl T9Ictronix Ssles Office.

INTERNATIONAL POWER PLUG OPTIONS
Option A1 - Universal Euro 220 V, 50 Hz.
Option A2 - UK 240 V, 50 Hz.
OptIon A3 - Australian 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A4 - North American 240 V, 60 Hz.
Option A5 - Switzerland 220 V, 50 Hz.

WARRANTY-PLUS SERVICE PLANS
SEE PAGE 497
M1 - (495) 2 Calibrations.
+ $1,735
M1 - (495P) 2 Calibrations.
+ $1,810
M2 - (495) 2 Years Service.
+ $2,875
M2 - (495P) 2 Years Service.
+ $3,015
M3 - (495) 2 Years Service and 4 Calibrations. + $3,470
M3 - (495P) 2 Years Service and 4 Calibra·
tions.
+$3,820

SUMMARY OF SIGNAL PROCESSING
AND MARKER FUNCTIONS
Auign Menu Function. - Marker functions that
are assignable to nonvolatile front-panel pushbuttons ASSIGN 1 and ASSIGN 2 listed as follows:
RIGHT NEXT: Moves marker to the right next signal defined by 'SIGNAL TYPE' in frequency.
LEFT NEXT: Moves marker to the left next signal
defined by 'SIGNAL TYPE' in frequency.
NEXT LOWER: Moves marker to the next lower
signal defined by 'SIGNAL TYPE' in amplitude.
NEXT HIGHER: Moves marker to the next higher
signal defined by 'SIGNAL TYPE' in amplitude.
MOVE RIGHT 'X' dB: Moves marker to the right
' X' dB (X can be + or -) in signal amplitude
from its current position.
MOVE LEFT 'X' dB: Moves marker to the left 'X'
dB (X can be + or -) in signal amplitude from its
current position.
RND PEAK AND CENTER: Marks the highest displayed signal and moves it to the center of the
CRT screen.
SIgnal Type Menu - Sets the signal processor
pattern recognition from a selection of three routines (chosen signal type remains in memory until
overwritten by new selection, RESET, which defaults to CW, or power-down):
CW: Recognizes signals with CW characteristics
and ignores all others (instrument selects this
mode at power-up).
PULSE: Recognizes pulsed RF lobe patterns for
line and dense spectrums and places marker at
peaks for easy location of carrier spectral line.
SPUR: Recognizes ALL signals including impulses above the assigned Threshold.
NoIse Normalization (dB/Hz) - Normalizes the
noise measured at the marked position to 1 Hz; simplifies Phase Noise and SignaVNoise Ratio tests.
SIgnal Track - Locates, marks, and centers on
the highest signal on screen above the Threshold.
If track is lost, or if the signal drops below Threshold
value, 'SIGNAL TRACK IDLE' will be displayed on
the CRT below the last 'tracked' frequency and the
instrument will 'idle' there until track is regained.
Peak Find - Locates and marks the highest displayed signal on the CRT.
Bandwidth - Places markers the assigned
number (from memory) of dB below, left and
right of desired signal peak automatically after
each sweep.
Marker to Reference Level - Changes reference level to the marker amplitude value.
Marker to Center - Changes center frequency
to equal marker frequency.
Marker StartlStop - Frequency start/stop sweep
is matched to the current de«a marker positions.
Step SIze - Assigns either the center, marker,
or delta marker frequency to the ± STEP frequency functions.
Macro Menu (495P OptIon 05 only) - Allows
the selection from up to seven stored userdefined programs to be executed.
Run/Stop (495P OptIon 05 only) - Starts and
stops execution of the selected Macro program.
Settings Store/Recall - Allows up to nine full
front panel set-ups, plus a power-down last instru·
ment state, to be stored and recalled from nonvolatile memory.
Zoom (495P only) - Moves the marked signal
to center screen and decrements the span.

TEK

50 kHz to 325 GHz
PORTABLE SPECTRUM ANALYZERS

490
SERIES

1ektronix

NEW 492A/492AP

coax, and to 325 GHz using Tek's WM 490
Series high performance waveguide mixers.

IGrlPsi

Center frequency accuracy is excellent;
typically 1 kHz at 100 MHz, 10 kHz at
10 GHz and 40 kHz at 40 GHz. Negligible
long term frequency drift ensures measurement repeatability.

Spectrum Analyzers
The 492AP complies with IEEE Standard 488-1978, and with Tektronix
lEE -4

Standard Codes and Formats.

Dot Markers Accurate in Frequency to 10-5
Frequency Range From 50 kHz to 325 GHz
CW, Pulse and Spurious Signal
Processing Modes
Occupied Bandwidth Function
-dBm, dBV, dBmV and dBIlV Altemate
Reference Units
-Signal Tracking
-Noise Normalization
Keypad Entry of Frequency, Span/Diy,
Reference Leyel and Vertical Scale Factors
EnYironmentalized per MIL-T-28800C
Type III, Class 3, Style C

Convenience, Accuracy, Intelligence
and Value
The 492A and the fully programmable 492AP
represent a new benchmark for spectrum analyzers with built-in signal processing intelligence. These spectrum analyzers are designed to offer power to the experienced
user, yet offer convenience to the novice, in
field environments and in the lab. These lightweight, portable form factor spectrum analyzers deliver maximum utility and benefits at a
reasonable cost.

Counter Center Frequency Accuracy,
Near Zero Long Term Drift, Superior
Range and Resolution All in One Package
The 492A offers calibrated amplitude and frequency coverage from 50 kHz to 21 GHz in

You get 100 Hz resolution bandwidth to
220 GHz and 1 kHz resolution to 325 GHz
with high sensitivity and low phase
noise-plus built-in preselection to 21 GHz
(Option 01).

With Its Built-In Marker Intelligence You
Can Rely on the 492A as a DecisionMaking Tool
Menu-Selectable Signal Processing
Enables the analyzer to mark the peak of a
main lobe and the peaks of side lobes at
the push of a button-using the pulsed RF
signal processing mode in conjunction with
other marker functions like Peak Find, Right
Next and Left Next. The CW mode will mark
only Signals exhibiting CW characteristics
with regard to span and resolution, ignoring
all other signals. The spur mode will locate
all signals that meet user-definable or automatic threshold criteria. Threshold criteria is
available for all signal processing.

CHARACTERISTICS
The following characteristics apply after a 30 minute warm-up period unless otherwise noted.
FREQUENCY RELATED
Frequency Range - 50 kHz to 21 GHz coaxial
input; 50 kHz to 325 GHz external mixer input
(amplitude specified from 18 GHz to 325 GHz
with Tektronix WM 490 Series Waveguide Mixers).

Center and Marker Frequency Accuracy·' Phase Locked: ±[2O%D + (Fx1Q-5)] Hz. Bands 1
and 5-12 with span/div ~200 kHz, and Bands
2-4 with span/div ~100 kHz. Unlocked: ±[2O%D
+ (Fx1Q-5) + (15 kHz)N] Hz.
Where: D=Span/div or Res BW,
whichever is greater.
F=Center or Marker Frequency
N=Harmonic Mixing Number
Center Frequency Drift (After 1 Hour WarmUp) - Bands 1 and 5-12 with span / div
~200 kHz, and band 2- 4 with span / div
~1oo kHz. Phase locked: ~ 50 Hz per minute of
sweep time corrected at least every 30 seconds.
Unlocked: ~(5 kHz) N per minute of sweep time.
~ 10%
Frequency Readout Resolution span/div to 1 kHz minimum (100 Hz in Delta
Marker Mode).
Residual FM - Phase Locked: ~(10 +2N) Hz
peak-to-peak in 20 ms, Bands 1 and 5- 12 with
span/div ~200 kHz, and Bands 2-4 with span/
div ~1oo kHz. Unlocked: ~(7 kHz) N peak-topeak in 20 ms.
Noise Sidebands
dBc/Hz

Off.., From C.rrier

<- 95
<- 105
<- 115

:JlkHz

3kHz

:mkHz

Resolution Filters - 100 Hz to 1 MHz (6 dB
bandwidth ±2O%) in decade steps. Shape factor
~7 .5 : 1 (60 dB/6 dB).
Frequency Span/DiY - 0 Hz (ZERO SPAN
pushbutton or keypad data entry); 200 Hz to
10 GHz (in a 1-2-5 sequence) via span/div knob;
200 Hz to 15 GHz (to two significant digits) via
keypad or start!stop data entry, or marker start!
stop; full band via MAX SPAN pushbutton (12
bands). Accuracy ±5% of selected span/div.
., Over the operstlng tempersture sxtTemes of - IS ' C to
+ SS'C, I .Sx 10-'

161

TEK

AMPLITUDE RELATED
Vertical Display Modes - Same as 495. See
page 158.
Reference Level Range Log Mode: -117 to +40dBm, +3OdBm maximum; -130 to +27dBV, +17dBV maximum;
-70 to +87dBmV, +77dBmV maximum; -10
to + 147 dBIlV, + 137 dBIlV maximum.
Linear Mode : 39 .6 nV/div to 2.8 V/div, 1 W
maximum.
Reference Level Accuracy - Accuracy is
dependent on a combination of RF Attenuator
Accuracy, IF Gain Accuracy, Resolution Bandwidth, Display Mode, Calibrator Accuracy, Frequency Band, Frequency Response and Temperature Change (±0.15dB/oC maximum).
Display Amplitude Accuracy - Same as 495.
See page 158.
RF Attenuator Range - 0 to 00 dB in 10 dB
steps.
Accuracy - Dc to 1.8 GHz: 0.5 dB/ l0 dB, 1 dB
maximum cumulative error over 60 dB. 1.8 to
18 GHz: 1.5 dB/ l0 dB, 3 dB maximum cumulative
error over 60 dB. 18 to 21 GHz: 3 dB/l0 dB, 6 dB
maximum cumulative error over 60 dB.
Marker! s Accuracy - Equal to Reference Level Accuracy plus Display Amplitude Accuracy.
SPURIOUS RESPONSES
Residual - ~ -100 dBm. Rackmount Options
30 and 31 : ~ - 90dBm .
Harmonic Distortion ~ -60 dBc for a
-40 dBm input 50 kHz to 21 GHz in MIN Distortion mode. Not discernible above the noise (typically -100 dBc) for preselected bands (Option
01 only).
LO Emissions ~-10 dBm. Option 01 :
~-70dBm .

SERIES

Table l ' SENSITIVITY AND FREQUENCY RESPONSE
Band and Frequency Range

Harmonic
Number

SenSItlVI\ at (dBm)
Minimum e.olutlon

Frequency

o dB Attenuation
(Typical)

50 kHz to 2.5 GHz

1.9:1

1.3:1 Max; 1.2:1 Typical

2.5 to 6.0 GHz

1.9:1

1.7:1 Max; 1.5:1 Typical

6.0 to 18GHz

2.3:1

2.3:1 Max; 1.9:1 Typical

18 to 21 GHz

3.0:1

3.5: 1 Max; 2.7:1 Typical

10 dB Attenuetion

Measured at ± 3 MHz of presalector peak for OptlOfl 01 .

Maximum Safe Input +30 dBm CW with
;;..20 dB attenuation; + 13 dBm ON with 0 dB attenuation; 0 V dc. Option 01 preselector: +30 dBm
(1 W) ON; 75 W peak, 1 !lS Pulse width, 0.(X)1 duty;
odB attenuation. Do not apply dc.
1 dB Gain Compression - ;;.. -18 dBm in MIN
Distortion Mode.
OUTPUT SIGNAL
Same as the 495 (see page 158) except for the
following :
Calibrator (Cal Out) - -20 dBm ±0.3 dB at
100 MHz ± 1.0 kHz
1st and 2nd LO - Provides access to the output of the respective local oscillators (1st La +
7.5 dBm minimum to a maximum of + 15 dBm;
2nd La - 22 dBm minimum to maximum of
+ 15 dBm). These ports must be terminated in
SO fl at all times.

Frequency Respon. e (dB)"

1 (50 kHz-4.2 GHz)"

- 125

± 1.5

2 (1.7-5.5GHz)· '

- 125

±1.5

3 (3.0-7.1 GHz)"

- 125

± 1.5

4 (5.4- 18 GHz)" ,

- 110

±2.5

5 (15-21 GHz)"

- 105

± 3.5

6 (1 8-27 GHz)

-1 08

± 2.0

7 (26-40 GHz)

- 103

±2.0

8 (33-00 GHz)

-1 03

± 2.2 33 to 50 GHz; ± 2.5 40 to 60 GHz

9 (50-90 GHz)"'

- 105 al 50 GHz; - 95 at 90 GHz

±3.0

10 (75- 140 GHz)"'

- 100 at 75 GHz; - 85 at 140 GHz

± 3.0

11 (110-220 GHz)"

- 90 at 110GHz; -75 at 220GHz

±3.0

12 (170-325 GHz)"

-70 at 170 GHz; - 55 at 325 GHz

±3.0

. , Band 1 is limited to 50 kHz to 1.8 GHz for presa/ected (Option 01) units. The presa/ector degrades minimum sansitivity by 5 dB
(6 dB in BAND 3) and degrsdes frequency responsa by ± 1.0 dB to 18 GHz; ± 1.5 dB to 21 GHz.
., Frequency responsa for any 5 GHz band. Responsa Is within ± 6 dB referenced to 100 MHz.
•, Measured with 10dB RF Attenuation and peaking optimized (when applicable). Frequency resporIsa within ± 3.5 dB from
50kHz to 18 GHz referenced to 100 MHz (± 4.5 dB for Option 01).

IEEE Standard 488-1978 Interface Function
Subsets Implemented - 492AP Version: In accordance with IEEE Standard 488-1978, implemented as SH1 , AH1 , T5, L3, SAl, RL1 , PPl , DCl, DT1 ,
and C0. 492A Non-P Version: Implemented as SH1 ,
AH0, T3, L0, SR0, RL0, PP0, DC0, DT0, and C0.
DISPLAY
Same as the 495 (see page 159).
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Same as the 495 (see page 159) except as noted.
Configuration - (Portable) 20 kg (44lb), all options; 17.5 x 32.7 x 49.9 cm (6.9 x 12.9 x 19.7 in)
without handle or cover.
Environmental - Per MIL-T-288QOC Type III,
Class 3, Style C. Same as 495 (see page 159).

ORDERING INFORMATION

Third Order Intermodulation Distortion ~ -70 dBc for CW signal (MIN Distortion Mode)
Any two on-screen signals within any frequency
span (SO kHz to 21 GHz); ~ - 100 dBc for signals
spaced ;;..100 MHz for preselected bands (Option 01 only).
INPUT SIGNAL
RF Input Type "N" female 50 fl nominal
impedance.
VSWR

162

490

50 kHz to 325 GHz
PORTABLE SPECTRUM ANALYZERS

492A Spectrum Analyzer

$29,040

Include.: 50 n coax cable, N to N connector, 6 ft
(012-0114-00); 50 n coax cable, BNG to BNC connector,
18 in (012-0076-00); service manual Vol. 1 (070-5565-00);
service manual Vol. 2 (070-556&00); operator's manual
(070-5562 -00) ; N male to BNC female adapter
(103-004&00): 2 Fast·Blo 4A fuses (159-0017-00); power
cord (161-0104-00); power cord clamp (343-0170-00); amber CRT light filter (378-o115{)1); gray CRT light filter
(378-o115{)2); CRT mesh filter (378.ooa7 -01).

492AP Programmable Spectrum
Analyzer

$35,340

Include.: Same as 492A plus programmer's manual
(070-5564-00).
OPTIONS"'
Option 01 Adds preselection for the
1.7GHz to 21 GHz band and limiter for 1st
mixer below 1.8 GHz.
+ $3,995
Option 07 - 75 n dBmV input and calibration
in addition to 50 n dBm input and calibration.
+ $750
Include.: BNG male to female adaptor connector (013-012&00); 75 n coax cable, BNC to
BNC connector, 42 in (012-0074-00).
Option 08 - Deletes external mixer capability. Frequency range limited to 50 kHz to
21 GHz (not combinable with options 07, 21 , 22). - $1,750
Option 21 - High Performance 18 to 40 GHz
Waveguide Mixer Set includes two mixers (18
to 26.5 GHz, and 26.5 GHz to 40 GHz).
+ $2,525
Includes: Diplexer assembly (015-0385-00);
BNC to SMA adaptor (015{)388-OO); semirigid
cable (015-1055-()()); SMA to SMA cable
(012-0649-()()).
Option 22 - High Performance 18 to 60 GHz
Waveguide Mixer Set includes three mixers (18
to 26.5 GHz, 26.5 to 40 GHz, 40 to 60 GHz). + $4,250
Includes: Same as Option 21 .
Option 30 - Rackmount 19" rack width.
+ $790
Include.: Rack slides (35Hl623-OO).
• , Options 07, 08, 21, and 22 are not ccmbinabie in any form.

Option 31 - Rackmount 19" rack width with
rear panel input/output capability.
+ $840
Include.: Same as Option ~.
Option 39 - Non-Uthium (Silver) batteries for
battery-powered memO/y.
+ $50
Option 41 - Digital Microwave Radio Enhancement.
+$450
Includes: Wider bandwidth preselector for
better signal symmetry in digital radio bands;
Narrow video filter (app. 1/3000th resolution
bandwidth); Improved frequency span/div accuracy at 5 MHzldiv span.
Option 42 - Replaces MARKERNIDEO input
port on the rear panel with a 110 MHz IF output
port which provides a signal with a 3 dB bandwidth ... 5 MHz and makes the 492A suitable
for broadband, swept-receiver measurements. + $1,500
Option 45 - (492AP) MATE CIIL language. + $4,975
Option 52 "' - North American 220 V configuration with standard power cord. Fuses are
replaced with 2A slo-blo.

M1 M1 M2 M2 M3 M3 -

WARRANTY-PLUS SERVICE PLANS
SEE PAGE 497
(492A) 2 Calibrations.
+
(492AP) 2 Calibrations.
+
(492A) 2 Years Service.
+
(492AP) 2 Years Service.
+
(492A) 2 Years Service & 4 Calibrations. +
(492AP) 2 Years Service & 4 Calibrations. +

$1,995
$2,025
$3,380
$3,510
$3,995
$4,045

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
GPIB Interconnect Cable"' Order 012-200 kHz and bands 2-4 with
span/div > 100 kHz.
±((2O% of span/div or res BW, whichever is
greater) + (CF x Ref Freq Error) + (N x 15 kHz)).
Bands 1 and 5-12 with span/div ...:200 kHz and
Bands 2-4 with span/div <;100 kHz.
±((2O% of span/div or res BW, whichever is
greater) + (CF x Ref Freq Error) + (2N +
25 Hz)).
Center Frequency Readout Resolution - At
least 10% of span/div.
Signal Counter Accuracy - ±[(Counter Fre·
quency x Ref Freq Error) + (10 + 2N) Hz +
1 LSD)).
Counter Sensitivity - Center Screen SIN
;;a. 20 dB.
Counter Frequency Readout Resolution 1 Hz through 1 GHz.
Reference Frequency Error (Aging Rate) 1 x 1Q-8/day, 1 x 1Q-1/year.
Frequency Span/Division Range - 50 Hzldiv
to 500 MHzldiv in coaxial bands (10 kHz through
21 GHz) and 50 Hzldiv to 10 GHzldiv in wave·
guide bands (18 GHz through 325 GHz), plus zero
span and maximum span. Any span to two signifi·
cant digits (within 50 Hz and up to 10 GHz) can
also be selected with the Data Entry Keyboard.
Frequency Span/Division Accuracy - Within
5% of the selected span/div over the center eight
divisions of the ten division CRT display.
Resolution Bandwidth (6 dB) - 30 Hz then
100 Hz to 1 MHz in decade steps plus auto. Ac·
curacy: Within 20%.
Resolution Shape Factor (60 dB/S dB) 7.5:1 or less, 100 Hz through 1 MHz and 15:1 or
less for 30 Hz.
Residual FM (After One Hour Warm-Up) Bands 1 and 5-12 with span/div >200 kHz, and
bands 2-4 with span/div > 100 kHz: <;(7 kHz) N
total excursion in 20 ms.
Bands 1 and 5-12 with span/div <;200 kHz, and
bands 2-4 with span/div <;100 kHz: <(10 + 2N)
Hz total excursion in 20 ms.
Long Term Drift (at Constant Temperature
and Fixed Center Frequency and After OneHour Warm-Up) - Bands 1 and 5-12 with span/
div >200 kHz, and bands 2-4 with span/div
> 100 kHz: <;(5 kHz) N per minute of sweep time.
Bands 1 and 5-12 with span/div <;200 kHz, and
Bands 2-4 with span/div <;100 kHz: <;50 Hz per
minute of sweep time.
Noise Sidebands At least - 75 dBc at
30 times the resolution bandwidth offset from the
center frequency (- 70 dBc for 100 Hz resolution
bandwidth or less).

164

SERIES

PORTABLE SPECTRUM ANALYZERS

- 3(1

- <0

- 50

.•
..J

- 10

CD - 10

'a
~

••

1\
1kHz \

100HI\

- 10

r""'"

l!!

~ - 1'O I - - 120

I--

- 130

f-Typlc81 Low Frequency Relponle
ge

f-i"i liliri t'ii liI~'1
II 1111

- 1<0
10Hz

r-.....

r-....

\
\

r\
1\

"'"

........ 1'-0010-

r- 1'-0010-

"'"

I I

1MHZ:\

100kHz \

& - 100

frequBncy

f'8S{JOfIS8

indicst8d owr sny 5 GHz range.

490

TEK

10kHz to 325 GHz
PORTABLE SPECTRUM ANALYZERS

SERIES

AMPLITUDE RELATED
Reference Level Range (Full Screen, Top of
Gratlcule ) - 117 dBm t o + 40 dBm
(+ 40 dBm includes maximum safe input of
+ 30 dBm and 10 dB gain of IF gain reduction) for
10 dB/div and 2 dB/div log modes. 1 W maximum
safe input in the linear mode.
Reference Level Accuracy - Accuracy is a
function of the characteristics listed below.
Calibrator: (Cal out) See output signal characteristics on page 158.
Input A ttenuator Accuracy: Dc to 1.8 GHz:
0.5 dB/ 10 dB, 1 dB max accumulative. 1.8 GHz to
18 GHz: 1.5 dB/10 dB, 3 dB max accumulative.
18 GHz to 21 GHz : 3 .0 dB/ 10 dB , 6 dB max
accumulative.
Frequency Response: See Frequency Response
Table on page 164.
Display Amplitude Accuracy, Resolution
Bandwidth Gain Variation and IF Gain Variation - Same as 495 (see page 158).
SPURIOUS RESPONSES
Residual (No Input Signal Referenced to Mixer
Input) - - 100 dBm or less. Fundamental mixing
Bands 1-3.
Harmonic Distortion (CW Signal Minimum Distortion Mode) - Typically -00 dBc for - 40 dBm
signal in the minimum distortion mode to 21 GHz. At
least - 100 dBc for preselected bands 1.7 GHz to
21 GHz.
Third-Order Intermodulation Distortion (Minimum Distortion Mode) - At least 70 dB down
from two full screen signals within any frequency
span. At least 100 dB down for two signals spaced
more than 100 MHz apart from 1.7 GHz to 21 GHz
for preselected bands.
LO Emiss i ons (No RF Attenuation)
-70 dBm maximum to 21 GHz.
INPUT SIGNAL
RF Input - Type N female connector.
Input Impedance - 5O!1
Maximum VSWR * ' With ;;;. 10 dB Attenuation
Frequency Range

Typical

Spec/fied Maximum

Dc to 2.5 GHz

12 :1

1.3:1

2.5 GHz 10 6.0 GHz

1.5:1

1.7:1

6.0 GHz to 18 GHz

1.9:1

2.3:1

18 GHz to 21 GHz

2.7:1

3.5:1

50 kHz to 2.5GHz

1.9:1

2.5 GHz to 6.0 GHz

1.9:1

6.0 GHz to 18.0 GHz

2.3:1

18.0 GHz to 21 .0 GHz

3.0:1

., At Type N female

ccnnector to intemsl ,,"xer.

Input Level (Optimum Mixer Level for Minimum
Distortion Linear Operation) - - :xl dBm (minimum distortion control setting); 1 dB gain compression -23 dBm.
Optimum Mixer Level for Minimum Noise Display Dynamic Range Enhanced Operation -20 dBm (minimum noise control setting); 1 dB
gain compression - 18 dBm.

External Reference Frequency 1 MHz,
2 MHz, 5MHz or 10MHz ± 5ppm (minimum).
Waveshape: Sinewave , ECl, TTL duty cycle
40%-00%. Input Impedance: 50 n ac, 500 n dc.
Power: - 15 dBm to + 15 dBm.
Maximum Safe Input Level (RF Attenuation at
Zero dB) +:xl dBm (1 W) continuous, 75 W
peak for 1/AS or less pulse width and 0.001 maximum duty factor (attenuation limit). Dc must never
be applied to RF input.
OUTPUT SIGNAL

For details see page 158.
IEEE Standard 488-1978 Interface Function
Subsets Implemented - (494P) Source Handshake: SH1 . Acceptor Handshake: AH1 . Talker: 15.
Listener: L3. Service Request: SR 1. Remotellocal:
Rl1 . Parallel Poll: PP1 . Device Clear: DC1 . Device
Trigger: DTt Controller: C0.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
For details see page 159.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Per Mll -T-28!JXlC Type III, Class 3, Style C. For
Details, see page 159.

ORDERING INFORMATION
494 Spectrum Analyzer

$42,175

Include.: Diplexer assembly (OI&

$105

Rear Panel Protective Cover Order 337-3274-00

$5.00

Lab Cart -

K213. (See page 462.)

$595

C-5C. (See page 445.)
$495
Note: 490 Series spectrum snslyzers sre compstlble with a/l
Tektronix C-50 Series cameras.

Camera +$200
+$500

4041 +$900

PERIPHERAL PRODUCTS FOR
494P SPECTRUM ANALYZER
System Controller (see page 355).

4207 page 53).

Color Graphics Terminal

$4,950

(see
$3,995

Option 21 - High Performance 18 GHz to
40 GHz Waveguide Mixer Set. (18 GHz to
26.5 GHz and 26.5 GHz to 40 GHz) and hardware.
+ $2,525

165

50 kHz to 325 GHz
SPECTRUM ANALYZERS

CENTER I MARKER
FR£QUENCV

NEW 2755/2755P
The 2755P complies with IEEE Stan-

,gfJ~ dard 488-1978, and with Tektronix
Standard Codes and Forma/s.

Lab Performance Packaged for Engineering
and Manufacturing Productivity
50 kHz to 21 GHz Coverage in Coax and to
325 GHz Using Tek Waveguide Mixera
Marker and Center Frequency Accuracy of
One Part in 10'
Built-In Marker Intelligence
-Exclusive Occupied Bandwidth Mode
- Menu-Selectable Signal Processing
- Signal Search Functions
- Noise Normalization to 1 Hz
- Alternate Reference Units
Large, Easy-to-Use Controls
Nonvolatile Memory for Up to Nine Waveforms and Nine Front Panel Displays
Direct Keypad Entry of Control Parameters
Direct Plot Capability (All Versions)
GPIB/ Fully Programmable (2755P)
Optional Preselector

Now There is a Tek Spectrum Analyzer
Especially for the Laboratory
The Tektronix 2755 is a benchtop instrument
that combines cost-effective lab performance
and ease of use, with a new dimension in
spectrum analyzer processing intelligence.
Packaged for enhanced engineering productivity, it reduces operator interface requirements and risk of human error. You'll make
measurements faster and more accurately
than ever before. All with the high standard of
Tektronix quality and reliability.
Decision-Making Power at the Touch of
a Button
Tek exclusives include signal processing intelligence that can discriminate and sort among
continuous wave (CW), pulse and spurious

166

signals. Hands-off convenience for measuring the bandwidth of filters, amplifiers and
channelized spectrum occupancy is provided by Tek's new BANDWIDTH mode. For a
summary of signal processing functions,
see page 160.
Tedious, time-consuming calculations are
eliminated with automatic noise normalization to 1 Hz and alternate reference units
such as dBm, dBmV, dB~V and dBV.
Feature for feature, the 2755 is optimized for
straightforward operation and outstanding
ease of use-from the ergonomically designed front panel and larger{controls to direct keypad entry of important control factors.

Millimeter Wave Capability
Using Tek's high performance waveguide
mixers, you get calibrated amplitude and frequency coverage from 18 GHz to 325 GHz.
Real signals are determined in two sweeps
with Tek's accurate millimeter wave identification mode. No costly L.O . amp is
needed-just some simple connections and
you're ready to measure.
Use as a Systems Component
The 2755P is the GPIB-programmable version of the 2755. Featuring Tek Codes and
Formats, programming easy to implement
with English-like commands. With TekSPANS~ software you can use the 2755P
with popular controllers including the IBM
PC and PC compatibles.
As an option, you can also rackmount the
2755 for use in the manufacturing or test environment not requiring instrument mobility.

Center and Mariter Frequency Accuracy·' Phase Locked: ± [2O%D + (Fx1Q-S)] Hz
Bands 1 and 5-12 with span/div .;;;200 kHz, and
Bands 2-4 with spanldiv .;;;100 kHz. Unlocked:
±[2O%D + (Fx1Q-5) + 15NkHz].
Where: D=Span/div or Res BW, whichever is
greater.
F=Center or Marker Frequency
N = Harmonic Mixing Number
Delta Mariter Frequency Accuracy - 1% of
total span.
Center Frequency Drift (After 1 Hour WarmUp) - Phase Locked: .;;;50 Hz per minute of
sweep time corrected at least every 30 seconds.
Bands 1 and 5-12 with span/div .;;;200 kHz, and
bands 2-4 with span!div .;;; 100 kHz. Unlocked:
.;;;(5 kHz) N per minute of sweep time.
Frequency Readout Resolution - ';;;10% span!
div to 1 kHz minimum. (100 Hz in Delta Marker
Mode).
Residual FM - Phase Locked: ';;;(10 +2N) Hz
pop in 20 ms, Bands 1 and 5-12 with span!div
.;;;200 kHz , and Bands 2-4 with span/div
.;;; 100 kHz. Unlocked: .;;;(7 kHz) N pop in 20 ms.
Noise Sidebands
d8e/Hz

Oft..t From C.rrter

<- 95

3kHz

<- 105
<- 115

DlkHz

Resolution Filters - 100 Hz to 1 MHz (6 dB
bandwidth ±20%) in decade steps. Shape factor
';;;7.5: 1 (60 dB/6 dB).
Video Filter Range - 0.3 Hz to 30 kHz (coupled
to resolution filter by front panel pushbuttons).
Frequency Span/Division - 0 Hz (zero span
pushbutton or data entry keypad); 200 Hz to
10 GHz (in a 1-2-5 sequence) via span/div knob;
200 Hz to 15 GHz (to two significant digits) via
keypad or start/stop data entry, or marker start/
stop; full band via MAX SPAN pushbutton (12
bands). Accuracy ± 5% of selected span/div.
AMPLITUDE RELATED
Vertical Display Modes - 10 dB, 2 dB and linear via pushbutton; any integer from 1 to
15 dB/div via Data Entry keypad.
"' Over the operating temperstUffJ 8X/r9mes of O· C 10 +50"C.
1.5x 1{}--'.

TEK

50 kHz to 325 GHz
SPECTRUM ANALYZERS

Display Dynamic Range - 80 dB log mode;
8 divisions linear.
Reference Level Range - Log Mode: - 117 to
+40 dBm, + 30 dBm maximum input level; - 130
to +27 dBV, + 17 dBV maximum input level;
dBmV maximum input
- 70 to +87 dBmV, +
level; - 10 to + 147 dBJ'V, + 137 dBJ'V maximum
input level. linear Mode: 39.6 nV/div to 2.8 V/div,
1 W maximum input level.
Reference Level Steps - 10 dB coarse, 1 dB
fine in 10 dB log; 1 dB coarse, 0.25 dB fine in
2 dB log. 1-2-5 sequence coarse , 1 dB equivalent
fine in linear; coarse step=log/div, fine is 1 dB for
5 dB/div or greater, 0.25 dB for 4 dB/div or less
set via Data Entry keypad.
Reference Level Accuracy - Accuracy is dependent on a combination of RF Attenuator Accuracy, IF Gain Accuracy, Resolution Bandwidth,
Display Mode, Calibrator Accuracy, Frequency
Band, Frequency Response and Temperature
Change (±0.15 dBI"C maximum).
Frequency Response and Sensitivity - Refer to Table 1, page 162.
Display Amplitude Accuracy ± 1.0 dB/
10dB to a maximum of ±2dB over 00 dB (10 dB
Log); ± 0.4 dB/2 dB to a maximum of ± 1.0 dB over
16 dB (2 dB Log); ± 5% of full scale in linear mode.
RF Attenuator Range - 0 to 00 dB in 10 dB
steps.
Attenuator Accuracy - Dc to 1.8 GHz :
0.5 dB/ 10 dB, 1 dB maximum cumulative error over
60 dB. 1.8 to 18 GHz: 1.5 dB/10 dB, 3 dB maximum
cumulative error over 00 dB. 18 to 21 GHz: 3 dB/
10 dB, 6 dB maximum cumulative error over 60 dB.
Resolution Bandwidth Gain Variation ± 0.4 dB (after CAL with respect to 1 MHz filter).
IF Gain Range - 87 dB increase; 10 dB decrease in MIN NOISE; 10 dB and 1 dB steps.
IF Gain Accuracy - E;;0.2 dB/dB to maximum
of 0.5 dB/9 dB except at the decade transitions:
- 19 to - 2OdBm, - 29 to - 30dBm; - 39 to
- 40 dBm, -49 to -SO dBm, - 59 to -60 dBm.
An additional E;;0.5 dB for a maximum cumulative
error of 1 dB over 10 dB; ± 2 dB maximum deviation over the 97 dB range.
Marker!s Accuracy - Equal to Reference Level Accuracy plus Display Amplitude Accuracy.
Third Order Intermodulation Distortion E;; -70 dBc for CW signal (MIN Distortion Mode)
Any two on-screen signals within any frequency
span (SO kHz to 21 GHz); E;; -100 dBc for signals
spaced ~ 100 MHz for preselector bands (Option
01 only).
Harmonic Distortion E;; - 60 dBc for a
- 40 dBm input SO kHz to 21 GHz in MIN Distortion mode. Not discernible above the noise (typically - 100 dBc) for preselected bands (Option
01 only).
LO Emissions E;; -10 dBm . Option 01 :
E;;-70dBm.
Spurious Responses (Residual)
E;;-1oodBm.
INPUT SIGNAL
RF Input - Type 'N' female 50 fl nominal impedance. Refer to page 160 for 75 fl input (Option 07) characteristics.
Maximum Safe Input +30 dBm CW with
~2O dB attenuation; + 13 dBm CW with 0 dB attenuation; 0 V dc. Option 01 : +30 dBm (1 W) CW;
75 W peak, 1 J's Pulse width, 0.001 duty; 0 dB attenuation. Do not apply dc.
1 dB Gain Compression - ~ -18 dBm in MIN
Distortion Mode.

VSWR
(Typal) 0 dB
Frequency

10 dB Attenu.tIon

Attenu.Uon

50 kHz 10 2.5 GHz

1.3:1 Max; 12 :1 Typical

1.9:1

2.5 10 6.0 GHz

1.7:1 Max; 15:1 Typical

1.9:1

6.010 18 GHz

2.3:1 Max; 1.9:1 Typical

2.3:1

181021 GHz

3.5:1 Max; 2.7:1 Typical
3.0:1
MfJlJsurrJd at :r 3 MHz o( preselectOf' peak for OptlOfl 01 .

OUTPUT SIGNAL
Calibrator (Cal Out) - - 20 dBm ±0.3 dB at
100 MHz ± 1.0 kHz
1st and 2nd LO - Provides access to the output of the respective local oscillators (1st LO +
7.5 dBm minimum to a maximum of + 15 dBm,
2nd LO -22 dBm minimum to maximum of
+ 15 dBm). These ports must be terminated in
50 fl at all times.
Vertical Out - Provides 0.5 V ± 5% of signaV
div of video above and below the centerline.
Horizontal Out - Provides 0.5 V either side of
center. Full range - 2.5 V to +2.5 V ± 10%.
Pen Lift - TTL, 5 V nominal to lift pen.
IF Out - Output of the 10 MHz IF. Level is approximately -5 dBm for a full screen signal at
- 30 dBm input reference level. Nominal impedance SO fl.
IEEE Standard 488-1978 Interface Function
Subsets Implemented - 2755P: SH1 , AH1 , T5,
L3, SA1 , RL 1, PP1 , DC1, DT1 and C0. 2755 (Direct
Plot only): SH1 , AH0, T3, L0, SR0, RL0, PP0, DT0
and C0.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Sweep Time - 20 JtS to 5 s/div (10 s/div in auto)
in 1-2-5 sequence.
CRT Readout - Displays: Reference level, center
frequency, frequency range, vertical display mode,
frequency spanldiv, resolution bandwidth, RF attenuation and video filter.
CRT - 8 x 10 em, P31 Phosphor.
Power - 210 W max with all options, at 115 V and
00 Hz.
Input Voltage 00 to 132 V ac or 100 to
250 V ac, 48 to 440 Hz.
Configuration (Bench/Rackmount) 27 kg
(00 Ib), 1n.8 mm x 431.8 mm x 009.6 mm (7 in x
17 in x 24 in).
ENVIRONMENTAL
Per MIL-T-28a:XlC Type III, Class 5, Style E.
Temperature - Operating: O°C to +50°C. Nonoperating: -40°C to + 75°C.
Altitude - Operating: 10,000 feet. Nonoperating:
40,000 feet.
95% below +30°C; 75% above
Humidity +:J)°C; 45% above +40°C.
Electromagnetic Compatibility Meets
MIL-STD-4618 requirements, operating from 48 Hz
to 440 Hz power sources with the exceptions
shown below.
Conducted Emissions: CE01, 15 dB relaxation for
first 10 harmonics of power line frequency; CE03
(Narrowband), full limits; CE03 (Broadband), 15 dB
relaxation from 15 kHz to 50 kHz.
Conducted Susceptibility: CS01 , full limits; CS02, full
limits; CS06, full limits.
Radiated Emissions: RE01 , 10 dB relaxation for first
10 harmonics of power line frequency, and exceptioned from 30 kHz to 36 kHz; RE02, full limits.
Radiated Susceptibility: RS01, full limits; RS02-1,
full limits; RS02-2, to 5 amps only; RS03, up to
1 GHz only.

ORDERING INFORMATION
2755 Spectrum Analyzer

$27,800

Includes: 50
coax cable, N to N connector, 6 It
(012.0114.00); 50 coax cable, BNC to BNC connector,
18 in (012.oo76.QO); service manual Vol. 1 (070-0032.00);
service manual Vol. 2 (070-r033.oo); operator's manual
(07(}6()31.oo); N male to BNC female adaptor; 2 Fast-BIe,
4A fuses; power cord (161.0104.00); power cord clamp
(343.0170.00); CRT amber light filter (378.0115.01 ); gray
CRT light filter (378-0 115-02) ; CRT mesh filter
(378-0017.00).

2755P Programmable Spectrum
Analyzer

$32,800

Includes: Same as 2755 plus programmer's manual
(070-0034.00).
OPTIONS
Adds preselection for the
Option 01 1.7 GHz to 21 GHz band and limiter lor 1st
mixer below 1.8 GHz.
+ $3,995
Option 07 - 75 dBmV input and calibration
in addition to 50 a dBm input and calibration.
Includes: BNC male to female adaptor connector (013.o126.QO); 42 inch BNC to BNC connector, 75 coax cable (012.0074.00).
+$750
Option 08 - Deletes extemaJ mixer capabiIi1y.
Frequency range limited to 50 kHz to 21 GHz.
(Not combinable with Options 07, 21 , 22)
-$1 ,750
Option 21 - High Performance 18 to 40 GHz
Waveguide Mixer Set includes two mixers (18
to 26.5 GHz, and 26.5 GHz to 40 GHz).
Includes: Diplexer assembly (015-008&00);
BNC to SMA adaptor (015.Q388.oo); semirigid
cable (015-1055.Q()); SMA to SMA cable
(012.Q649-00).
+$2,525
Option 22 - High Performance 18 to 60 GHz
Waveguide Mixer Set includes three mixers (18
to 26.5 GHz, 26.5 to 40 GHz, 40 to 60 GHz).
Includes: Same as Option 21 .
+$4,250
Option 30 - Rackmount 19 in rack width.
Includes: Rack slides (351.oo23.QO).
+ $250
Option 31 - Rackmounl 19 in rack widlh with
rear panel inpuVoutput capability (no front
panel inputs).
Includes: Same as Option :n
+$450
Option 39 - Non-Lithium (Silver) batteries for
+$50
battery-powered memory.
Option 41 - Digital Microwave Radio Enhancement. Inctuding: 1) Wder bandwidth preselector for better signal syrrvnetry in digital radio bands. 2) Narrow video filter (approximate
lr.nx>th resolution bandwidth). 3) Improved frequency span/div accuracy at 5 MHzIdiv span.
+ $450
Option 42 - Replaces MARKERNIDEO input
port on the rear panel with a 110 MHz IF output
port which provides a signal with a 3 dB bandwidth ;;.5 MHz and makes the 2755 suitable
for broadband, swept-receiver measurements. +$1,500
Option 45 - (2755P) MATElCllllanguage.
+$4,975
Option 52*1 - Norlh American 220 V configuration with standard power cord. Fuses are
replaced with 2 A slo-blo.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
External Waveguide Mixers (18 to 26.5 GHz) Order WM 4901<
(26.5 to 40 GHz) Order WM 490A
(33 to 50 GHz) Order WM 4900
(40 to 60 GHz) Order WM 490U
(50 to 75 GHz) Order WM 490V
(60 10 90 GHz) Order WM 490E
(75 to 110 GHz) Order WM 400N
(90 to 140 GHz) Order WM 490F
(110 to 170GHz) Order WM 490D
(140 to 220 GHz) Order WM 490G
Tapered Transition - Used with WM 490G,
220 to 325 GHz. Order 11~ 172&00
Microwave Comb Generator Th1500
Series compatible. Order 067.a38&OO
1405 TV Sidebend Anelyzer Adaptor 525160 m8/1(ern (Opt 02 reqli'ed for 275X & 49X).
TR 503 Tracking Generator - 100 kHz to
1.8 GHz.

$1,250
$1,250
$1,450
$1,720
$1,950
$2,120
$2,175
$2,330
$3,250
$3,325
$1,200
$1,800
$5,780
$6,620

. , To order, contsct your local Tektronix Sates Office.

167

50 kHz to 21 GHz
SPECTRUM ANALYZERS

NEW 2754/2754P
Rackmountable for Engineering and Manufacturing System Productivity
Marker and Center Frequency Accuracy of
One Part in lOs
Built-In Signal Processing Intelligence
- Search, Sort and Mark CW, Pulse or
Spurious Signals
- Exclusive Occupied Bandwidth Mode
- Signal Tracking
- Noise Normalization to 1 Hz
Nonvolatile Memory for Storage of Up to Nine
Waveforms and Nine Front Panel Displays
Direct Keypad Entry of Control Parameters
Large, Easy-to-Use Controls
Direct Plot Capability (All Versions)

1 kHz Resolution Bandwidth

2750
SERIES

SENSITIVITY AND FREQUENCY RESPONSE
Harmonie Number

s.n_1ty al (dBm) Minimum Ra.olullon

FnIqUenCy Rssponsa (dB)-'

1 (SO kHz-4.2 GHz)" ,

-115

±1.5

2 (1 .7-5.5 GHZ)" ,

-115

± 1.5

3 (3.0-7.1 GHz)" '

-115

± 1.5

4 (5.4-18 GHz)"'
(12-18GHz)

3
3

-100

±2.5
±2.5

5 (15-21 GHz)O'

Bend and FnIqUenCy Range

-95
±3.5
- 95
..
Of Band lis limited to SO kHz to 1.8 GHz for preSBlected (OptlOl'J 01) Units. The preSBlector degrades minimum senSitivity by S dB
(6 dB in BAND 3) and degrades fr9quency responsa by ± 1.0 dB to 18 GHz; ± I .S dB to 21 GHz.
"' Measured with 10 dB RF Attenuation and peaking optimized (when spp/icIlbl8). Frequency responsa within ± 3.S dB from
SO kHz to 18 GHz referenced to 100 MHz (±4.S dB for Option 01).

pulse and spurious signals. Hands-off convenience for measuring the bandwidth of filters, amplifiers and channelized spectrum
occupancy is provided by Tek's new BANDWIDTH mode. For a summary of signal processing functions, see page 160.
Tedious, time-consuming calculations are
eliminated with automatic noise normalization to 1 Hz and alternate reference units
such as dBm, dBmV, dBJ.lV and dBV.

Optional Preselector

Value Packed

Now There is a Tek Spectrum Analyzer
Especially for the Engineering Labs and
Manufacturing Systems

Feature for feature, the 2754 is optimized for
straightforward operation and outstanding
ease of use-from the ergonomically designed front panel and larger controls to direct keypad entry of important control factors.

The Tektronix 2754 Spectrum Analyzer combines cost-effective lab performance and
ease of use with a new dimension in Spectrum Analyzer signal processing intelligence. Packaged for enhanced productivity, it reduces operator interface requirements and risk of human error. You'll make
measurements faster and more accurately
than ever before. All with the high standard
of Tektronix quality and reliability.

Decision-Making Power at the Touch of
a Button
Tek exclusives include marker signal processing intelligence that can discriminate
and sort among continuous wave (CW),

168

Use as a Systems Component
The 2754P is the GPIB-programmable version of the 2754 and features Tek Standard
Codes and Formats, making programming
easy to implement with English-like commands. With TekSPANS«> software you can
use the 2754P with popular controllers including the IBM PC and PC compatibles.
As an option , you can quickly and easily
rackmount the 2754 for use in the manufacturing or test environment not requiring instrument mobility.

CHARACTERISTICS
The following characteristics apply after a 30 min·
ute warm·up period unless otherwise noted.

FREQUENCY RELATED
Frequency Range - 50 kHz to 21 GHz coaxial
input.

Center and Marker Frequency Accuracy·1 -

Phase Locked: ± [20%0 + (Fx1Q-S)] Hz; Bands 1
and 5 with span/div; ".;200 kHz, and Bands 2-4
with span/div ".;100 kHz. Unlocked: ±[20%0 +
(Fx1Q-S) + 15 NkHz).
Where : O=Span/div or Res BW, whichever is greater.
F= Center or Marker Frequency
N=Harmonic Mixing Number
Delta Marker Frequency Accuracy - 1% of
total span.

Center Frequency Drift (After 1 Hour WarmUp) - ".;50 Hz per minute of sweep time corrected at least every 30 seconds. Phase Locked:
Bands 1 and 5 with span/div ".;200 kHz, and
band 2-4 with span/div ".; 100 kHz. Locked: ".;(5
kHz) N per minute of sweep time .
Frequency Readout Resolution - ".;10%
span/div to 1 kHz minimum. (100 Hz in Delta
Marker Mode).
Residual FM - Phase Locked: "';(10 +2N) Hz
peak-ta-peak in 20 ms, Bands 1 and 5 with spanldiv
".;200 kHz, and Bands 2-4 with spanldiv ".; 100 kHz.
Unlocked: ".;[1 kHz) N peak-ta-peak in 20 ms.
"' 0>&- the operatng 1flmptnh.nJ _
of O·C to +SO"C.
I .Sx lfr'

TEK

2750

50 kHz to 21 GHz
SPECTRUM ANALYZERS

SERIES

Noise Sidebands
dBc/Hz

Off.et From Carrier

-0 - 105

:xJkHz

-0 - 115

300 kHz

Resolution Filters
1 kHz to 1 MHz (6 dB
bandwidth ±2O%) in decade steps. Shape factor
..,.7.5: 1 (60 dB/6 dB).
Video Filter Range - 3 Hz to 30 kHz (coupled
to resolution filter by front panel pushbuttons).
Frequency Span/Division - 0 Hz (zero span
pushbutton or data entry keypad); 200 Hz to
1 GHz (in a 1-2-5 sequence) via span/div knob;
200 Hz to 1.2 GHz (to two significant digits) via
keypad or start/stop data entry, or marker start/
stop; full band via MAX SPAN pushbutton (5
bands). Accuracy ± 5% of selected span/div.
AMPLITUDE RELATED
Vertical Display Modes - 10 dB, 2 dB and linear via pushbutton ; any integer from 1 to
15 dB/div via Data Entry keypad.
Display Dynamic Range - 80 dB log mode;
8 divisions linear.
Reference Level Range - Log Mode: - 117 to
+40 dBm, +30 dBm maximum input level; - 130
to +27 dBV, + 17 dBV maximum input level;
-70 to +87 dBmV, + 77 dBmV maximum input
level; -10 to + 147 dB~N , + 137 dBIlV maximum
input level. Linear Mode: 39.6 nV/div to 2.8 V/div,
1 W maximum input level.
Reference Level Steps - 10 dB coarse, 1 dB
fine in 10 dB log; 1 dB coarse, 0.25 dB fine in 2 dB
log. 1-2-5 sequence coarse, 1 dB equivalent fine
in linear; coarse step = log/div, fine is 1 dB for
5 dBl div or greater, 0.25 dB for 4 dB/div or less
set via Data Entry keypad.
Reference Level Accuracy - Accuracy is dependent on a combination of RF Attenuator Accuracy, IF Gain Accuracy, Resolution Bandwidth,
Display Mode, Calibrator Accuracy, Frequency
Band, Frequency Response and Temperature
Change ( ± 0.15 dB/ oC maximum).
Display
Amplitude
Accuracy
± 1.0 dBl l0 dB to a maximum of ± 2 dB over 00 dB
(10 dB Log); ± 0.4 dB/2 dB to a maximum of
± 1.0 dB over 16 dB (2 dB Log); ± 5% of full scale
in linear mode.
RF Attenuator Range - 0 to 60 dB in 10 dB
steps.
Attenuator Level Accuracy - Dc to 1.8 GHz:
0.5 dB/l0 dB, 1 dB maximum cumulative error
over 60 dB. 1.8 to 18 GHz: 1.5 dB/10 dB, 3 dB
maximum cumulative error over 60 dB. 18 to
21 GHz: 3 dB/l0 dB, 6 dB maximum cumulative
error over 60 dB.
Resolution Bandwidth Gain Variation ±0.4 dB (after CAL with respect to 1 MHz filter).
IF Gain Range - 87 dB increase; 10 dB decrease in MIN NOISE; 10 dB and 1 dB steps.
IF Gain Accuracy - ..,.0.2 dB/dB to maximum
of 0.5 dB19 dB except at the decade transitions:
-19 to -2OdBm, -29 to - 3OdBm; -39 to
- 40 dBm, - 49 to - SO dBm, - 59 to - 60 dBm.
An additional ",,0.5 dB for a maximum cumulative
error of 1 dB over 10 dB; ± 2 dB maximum deviation over the 97 dB range.
Markerls Accuracy - Equal to Reference Level Accuracy plus Display Amplitude Accuracy.
Third Order Intermodulation Distortion (Option 01 only) ..,. - 70 dBc for CW signal (MIN
Distortion Mode) Any two on-screen signals within
any frequency span (50 kHz to 21 GHz) ;
..,. -100 dBc for signals spaced ~ 100 MHz for preselector bands.

Harmonic Distortion - (Option 01 only)
..,. - 60 dBc for a - 40 dBm input SO kHz to 21 GHz
in MIN Distortion mode. Not discemible above the
noise (typically - 100 dBc) for preselected bands.
LO Emissions - .,,;; - 10 dBm . Option 01 :
.,,;;- 70dBm.
Spurious Responses (Residual)
..,.- l00dBm .
INPUT SIGNAL
RF Input Type ' N' female SO fl nominal
impedance.
Maximum Safe Input +30 dBm CW with
~ 20 dB attenuation; + 13 dBm CW with 0 dB attenuation; 0 V dc.
Option 01 : +3OdBm (1 W) CW; 75W peak, 11ls
pulse width, 0.001 duty; 0 dB attenuation. Do not
apply dc.
1 dB Gain Compression - - 10 dBm with 0 dB
RF Attenuation in MIN NOISE; -2OdBm with OdB
RF Attenuation in MIN DISTORTION (No gain compression can be observed on screen).
VSWR
Frequency

10dB
Attenuation

(Typical) 0 dB
AttenuatIon

50 kHz 10 2.5 GHz

13:1 Max; 1.2:1 TyPlC8l

1.9' 1

25106.0GHz

1 7:1 Max; 1.5' 1 TYPlC8I

1.9.1

6.010 18 GHz

2.3:1 Max; 1.9:1 Typical

2.3:1

181021 GHz

3.5:1 Max; 2.7:1 TYPlC8I

3.0 1

Measured at :t 3 MHz of preS9l9ctor peak for OptlOO 0/.

CHARACTERISTICS (OPTION 07)
50 D/75 D INPUT RELATED
Same as 495. See page 160.
OUTPUT SIGNAL
Calibrator (Cal Out) - -20 dBm ± 0.3 dB at
100 MHz ± 1.0 kHz
1st and 2nd LO - Provides access to the output
of the respective local oscillators (1st LO +
7.5dBm minimum to a maximum of +15dBm, 2nd
LO - 22 dBm minimum to maximum of + 15 dBm).
These ports must be terminated in SO fl at all times.
Vertical Out - Provides 0.5 V ± 5% of signal per
dMsion of video above and below the centerline.
Horizontal Out - Provides 0.5 V either side of
center. Full range - 2.5 V to +2.5 V ± 10%.
Pen Lift - TIL, S V nominal to lift pen.
IF Out - Output of the 10 MHz IF. Level is approximately - 5 dBm for a full screen signal at - 30 dBm
input reference level. Nominal impedance SO fl.
IEEE Standard 488·1978 Interface Function
Subsets Implemented - 2754P: SHl , AHl , T5,
L3, SR1 , RL 1, PPl, OCl , DTl and C0. 2754 (Direct
Plot only): SH1 , AH0, T3, L0, SR0, RL0, PP0, OT0

Humidity - 95% below +3O°C, 75% above
+ 3O°C, 45% above +4O°C .
Altitude - 10,000 feet operating; 40,000 feet
nonoperating.
Electromagnetic Compatibility - The 2754 and
2754P Spectrum Analyzers meet the requirements
of MIL-SlD-461B, operating from 48 Hz to 440 Hz
power sources with the exceptions shown below.
Conducted Emissions - CE01 : 15 dB relaxation for first 10 harmonics of power line frequency. CE03 (Narrowband): Full limits. CE03 (Broadband): 15 dB relaxation from 15 kHz to SO kHz.
Conducted Susceptibility - CS01 : Full limits.
CS02: Full limits. CS06: Full limits.
Radiated Emissions - RE01 : 10 dB relaxation
for first 10 harmonics of power line frequency,
and exceptioned from 30 kHz to 36 kHz, RE02:
Full limits.
Radiated Susceptibility - RS01 : Full limits.
RS02-1: Full limits. RS02-2: To 5 amps only. RS03:
Up to 1 GHz only.

ORDERING INFORMATION
2754 Spectrum Analyzer

2754P Programmable Spectrum
Analyzer

$27,995

Includes: Same as 2754 plus progranvner's manual
(07orol9{)()).
OPTIONS

Option 01 - Adds preselection for the 1.7 GHz
to 21 GHz band and limiter for 1st mixer below
1.8GHz.

+$3,995

Option 07 -

75 {l dBmV input and calibration
in addition to normal 50 {l dBm input and calibration.
Includes: BNC male to female adaptor c0nnector (0 13{)12600); 42 inch BNC to BNC connector 75 {l coax cable (012{)()74{)()).

+$750

Option 30 - Rackmount 19 inch rack width.
Includes: Rack slides (351-0023-00).
Option 31 - Rackmount 19 inch rack width
with rear panel input/output capability (no front
panel inputs).
Includes: Same as Option ~.
Option 52*' - North American 2al V configJration with standard power cord. Fuses are replaced with 2A skH>Io.

and C0.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Sweep Time - 20 IlS to 5 s/div (10 s/div in auto)
in 1-2-5 sequence.
CRT Readout - Displays: Reference level, center frequency, frequency range, vertical display
mode, frequency span/div, resolution bandwidth,
RF attenuation and video filter.
CRT - 8 x 10 cm, (GH) P31 Phosphor.
Power - 210 W max with all options, at 115 V
and 60 Hz.
Input Voltage 90 to 132 V ac or 180 to
2SO V ac, 48 to 440 Hz.
Configuration (Bench/Rackmount) 24.5 kg
(54lb), 177.8 mm x 431.8 mm x 609.6 mm (7 in x
17 in x 24 in).
ENVIRONMENTAL
Per MIL-T-288OOC Type III, Class 5, Style E.
Temperature Operating: O°C to +sooC;
Nonoperating: - 40°C to + 75°C.

$22,995

Includes: 50 {l coax cable, N to N connector, 6 ft;
(012{)114{)()); 50 {l coax cable, BNC to BNC connector,
18 in (012{)()7&OO); service manual Vol. 1 (07()..6()97 {)());
service manual Vol. 2 (07(}6()98{)()); operator's manual
(07(}6()96{)()); N male to BNC female adaptor; 2 Fast-BIo,
4A fuses; power cord (161{)104{)()); power cord clamp
(343{)17Q{)()); amber CRT light filter (378{)115{)1); gray
CRT light filter (378-0115 -02) ; CRT mesh filter
(378-OOS7{)()).

+$250

+$450

WARRANTY-PLUS SERVICE PlANS
M1 M1 M2 M2 M3 tions.
M3 tions.

SEE PAGE 497
(2754) 2 Calibrations.
(2754P) 2 Calibrations.
(2754) 2 Years Service.
(2754P) 2 Years Service.
(2754) 2 Years Service and 4 Calibra-

+$1,995
+$2,025
+$3,380
+$3,510
+$3,995

(2754P) 2 Years Service and 4 Calibra-

+ $4,045

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Microwave Comb Generator TM 500
Series compatible. Order 067-Q885{)()
1405 TV Sideband Anelyzer Adeptor 525/60 markers (Option 02 required for 275X
and 49X).
TR 503 Tracking Generator - 100 kHz to
1.8 GHz.

$1,800

$5,780
$6,620

., To order, contsct your IoeBI Tektronix 5819s 0fflc6.

169

TEK

18 GHz to 325 GHz
WAVEGUIDE MIXERS

490 / 2750
SERIES

INDIVIDUAL MIXER ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency
R.nge (OHz)

Tektronix
Model

BlInd
Dealgn.tIon

Sena/tlvlty
(dam)"

Frequency
R.apon.. ••

Conv...1on
Lo.. •• Typlc.1

18 to 26.5
26.5 to <10
33 to 50
<10 to 60
50 to 75

WM4!n<
WM490A
WM4900
WM490U
WM490V

- 100
-95
- 95
- 95
- 95 at 50GHl
- 90 at 75GHz

±2dB
±2dB
± 2dB
±2.5dB
±3dB

- ~dB

A
Q

- ~dB
- ~dB
- ~dB

- ~dB

typical.,

at 50GHz
- 35 dB at 75 GHz

±3dB

- ~dBat60GHz

typical

60 to 90

WM490E

- 95 at 60GHz
-85 at 90GHz

typical.,

- <10 dB at 90 GHz

typical

75 to 110

WM490W

-90 at 75GHl
- 80 at 110GHz

± 3dB

- 35 dB at 75 GHz
- 45 dB at 110GHz

±3dB

- <10 dB at 90 GHz
- 50 dB at 1<10 GHz

typical.,

typical

90 to 1<10

WM490F

-85 at 90GHz
- 75 at 1<10 GHl

Waveguide Mixers

typical"

typical

490/2750 Series

110 to 170

1<10 to 220

- 45 dB at 110 GHz
- 55 dB at 170GHz

±3dB
typical"

WM490G

- 75 at 1<10 GHl
- 65 at 220GHl

±3dB

- 50 dB at 1<10 GHl
- 60 dB at 220 GHz

typical"

typical

220 to 325

119-1728'()()"

- 65 at 220 GHz
- 50 at 325 GHz

- 60 dB at 220 GHz
- 70 dB at 325 GHl

± 3dB
typical"

typical"
" EqUivalent average notSB /evtJI at 1 kHz bandwidth.
Msximum amplitude variation across aach wavsguide mixer band (with peaking control optimized at each frequency in response
to a - 30 d8m CW input signal to the mixer).
'3490 LO drive + 10 dBm peaking control optimized.
'. Over any 5 GHz bandwidth for milHmeter wave mixers above 60 GHz.
'. Value estimated at 325 GHz.
'. Tapered waveguide transitkJn allowing WM 490G to cover this range.
'2

Eight millimeter-wave mixers cover the
33 GHz to 220 GHz range in the standard Milspec band ranges. J to G band flange transition (119-1728-00) converts the WM 490G mixer to cover the 220 GHz to 325 GHz range.

INDIVIDUAL MIXER MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency
R.nge (OHz)

T.ktronlx
Model"

W.vegulde
(EIA)

FI.nge
(JAN)

18 to 26.5

WM4!n<

WR-42

UG·595I\J

26.5 to <10

All mixers are gold plated brass, conforming
to MIL-8-45204 Class I, Type 1 specifications
and will withstand harsh environments. Mixer
sets come complete with a container for
spare diodes, a 28-inch cable, an instruction
manual and a wood storage box with foam
cutout storage locations for five mixers.

33 to 50

CHARACTERISTICS
For All Waveguide Mixers - Maximum CW RF
Input Level: +20 dBm (100 mW).
Maximum PULSED RF Input Level - 1 W
peak with 0.001 maximum duty factor and 1 IJS

WM4900

WR·28
WR·22

UG-599/U
UG-383IU

WM490U

WR·19

UG'383IU-M

50 to 75

WM490V

WR-15

UG·385IU

60 to 90

WM490E

WR-12

UG·387/u

90 to 1<10
110 to 170

LO Requirement - + 7 dBm minimum,
+ 15 dBm maximum, + 10 dBm typical.
Bias Requirement - -2.0 V to +0.5 V with re-

WM490A

L.ngth
8.97 em
(3.53 in)
6.93 em
(2.73 in)
5.37 em
(2.125 in)

<10 to 60

75 to 110

maximum pulse width.

spect to the mixer body through a current limiting
resistor, to provide 0 mV to 20 rnA of bias current.
1 dB Compression Point - + 13 dBm typical.
Amplitude Accuracy - ± 6 dB maximum reference level error with respect to the internal
calibrator.

- 80 at 110GHl
-70 at 170GHz

typical

Tektronix Waveguide Mixers cover from
18 GHz to 325 GHz with optimum sensitivity.
They are designed specifically for use with
the Tektronix 490 and 2750 Series Spectrum
Analyzers.
Two microwave mixers, with field replaceable diodes, cover ranges 18 GHz to
26.5 GHz and 26.5 GHz to 40 GHz. When
used with the 490 and 2750 Series, the
frequency response is ± 2 dB.

WM4900

1<10 to 220
220 to 325

WM490W
WM490F
WM4900
WM490G
119-1728.()()
G·J Band flange

WR-l0
WR{)8
WR{)6
WR{)5
WR{)5
WR Hz

- 133dBm

- 138.5 dBV

100 Hz

- 13> dBm

- 135.5 dBV

3JO Hz

- 125dBm

- 13>.5 dBV

1 kHz

- 120dBm

- 125.5 dBV

3 kHz

- 115dBm

- 120.5 dBV

10 kHz

- 110dBm

- 115.5 dBV

3> kHz

- 105dBm

- 110.5dBV

SPURIOUS RESPONSES
Residual - ..;;; -143 dBV (noncalibrator related ,
referenced to the input).
Intermodulation Products - Within any frequency span for two on screen signals of any
input level, third order down 75 dB or more and
second order down 72 dB or more; of any input
level up to -53 dBV or of any input level with
input buffer on, second and third order down
80 dB or more.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
Sweep - Triggered, manual, auto.
Sweep Time - 10 s/div to 0.1 ms/div in a 1-2-5
sequence.
Accuracy - Within 5% of selected time/division.
Triggering - Sources are free run , internal and
line. Modes are normal, manual sweep and single
sweep.
SensitiYity - ~ 1.5 div of internal signal for both
normal and single sweep modes over the approximate frequency range of 30 Hz to 500 kHz.
Shipping Weight - 7.6 kg (17lb).
INPUT SIGNALS
Maximum Input Power Leyel 1 Mfl/28 pF: 15 V (p-p) for ac or pulse signals with
rise times of 2 V/p.s or faster (pulses or ac beyond
this specification may open an input fuse) . 40 V
(dc plus peak ac) for signals with rise times slower than 2 V/p.S.
600 fl (Internally Terminated): 12 V dc or RMS
(+24 dBm).
SO fl (Internally Terminated): 3.5 V dc or RMS
(+24dBm).

Input Impedance - Switch selectable 1 Mfl in
parallel with 28 pF, 50 fl (75 fl for L3 Option 01)
termination, or 600 fl termination.
OUTPUT SIGNAL
Calibrator - (Cal Out) 500 kHz squarewave
within ± 0.15 dB of - 40 dBV into the plug-in
impedance.
Video Out - SO mV/div ± 5% (about the CRT
center) with source impedance of 1 kfl.
Horizontal Out - 0 V dc to about - 6 V dc sawtooth with a source impedance of 5 kfl.

Option 25 Tracking Generator
The 7L5 with Option 25 Tracking Generator,
provides selectable 50 n, 75 n, or 600 n impedance source that has a calibrated output level for swept frequency tests from
20 Hz to 5.0 MHz. The output frequency can
be adjusted so it tracks within 10 Hz of the
spectrum analyzer frequency. The frequency span and rates are controlled with the
spectrum analyzer. The output level is controlled from the tracking generator. Output
level is calibrated and controlled in 10 dB
and 1 dB steps over a 63 dB range. An Aux
Output may be used to drive a frequency
counter. The 7L5 with Option 25 is a threewide unit for the 7000 Series mainframes.

CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency Range - 20 Hz to 5.0 MHz.
Output Impedance - 50 fl. 75 fl, or 600 fl selected by a front panel switch.
Amplitude - The output level is calibrated in
dBm or dBV and selectable in 10 dB or 1 dB
steps. A vernier provides continuous variation between calibrated steps.
Range - 50 fl : 0 dBm to -63 dBm . 750 :
- 6 dBm to - 69 dBm . 6000 : - 17 dBm to
- 80dBm.
Accuracy (Maximum Output Calibrated at
SOO kHz) - 50 fl : 0 dBm ± 0.25 dB. 750 :
- 6 dBm +0.4, - 0.2 dB. 600 fl: - 17 dBm +0.5,
- 0.1 dB.
Attenuator - Range: 0 dB to 63 dB in 10 dB or
1 dB steps. Accuracy: Within 0.2 dB/dB to a maximum of 0.25 dB/10 dB absolute.
Flatness - 50 fl and 75 fl: Within 0.5 dB p-p.
600 fl: Within 1.0 dB POp. Total System Ratness
(7L5 with L3 Plug-In Module and Option 25) SO fl
and 75 fl: Within 1.0 dB pop. 600 fl: Within 1.25 dB
pop.
DynamiC Range (7LS With Option 2S) ~ 110dB .

Residual FM (p-p) - (7L5 with Option 25).
Spans to 2 kHZ/Div: 2 Hz. Spans 5 kHZ/Div or
Greater: 40 Hz.
Stability 25 Hz/5 minutes after ten minute
warm-up decreasing to 25 Hz/hour maximum after one hour.
Spurious Suppression, 20 Hz to S.O MHz
(Harmonic and Nonharmonlc) - 40 dB or
more with respect to the carrier.

Auxiliary Output -

~2OO

mV RMS into 50 fl.

BALANCED INPUT TRANSFORMER
Frequency Range - 50 kHz to 3 MHz, usable
from 10 kHz to 20 MHz.
Flatness - 0.25 dB pop maximum (50 kHz to
3 MHz) including nominal 0.1 dB insertion loss.
Common-Mode Rejection - 25 dB minimum
(SO kHz to 3 MHz).
Output Termination Switchable between
124 fl, 135 fl, and none for bridging or external
termination.
Connectors - WECO (0.37 in with 0.090 center)
on 0.625 inch spacing for balanced input. BNC for
single-ended output.

ORDERING INFORMATION
7LS Spectrum Analyzer
(Requires L3 Plug-In Module)
$11,070
Include.: Spectrum analyzer graticule (337-1159-00);
(7000 Series), and (337-143!Hll); (7603), light blue filter
(378{)684{X)); operator manual (07(}-1734-o1); service
manual (07(}-2184-o1).
OPTIONS
Option 11 - L3 Plug-In Module Option 01
shipped with 7L5.
+ $1,580
Option 12 - 7854 Waveform Oscilloscope
compatibility.
+ $150
Option 20 - L3 Plug-In Module shipped with
7L5.
+ $1,580
Option 25 - Tracking Generator.
+$1,560
L3 Plug-In Module, 1 Mfl, 50 fl, 600 fl $1 ,580
Include.: Instruction manual (07(}-2154-02).
Option 01 - (L3 only) 1 MO, 750, 600 O.
NC
CONVERSION KIT
Tracking Generator - To add to existing
7L5. Order 040-001020 MHz : Within
±0.2 dB from 100 kHz to 10 MHz of picture carrier, increasing to ±0.3 dB at 15 MHz; within
± 0.5 dB from 50 kHz to 20 MHz.
For Transmitter Frequency of 0 to 20 MHz: Within
± 0.5 dB from 100 kHz to 15 MHz.
System Span - ;;;..200 kHz/div.
Video Frequency Range - 15 MHz to 0 MHz
to 15 MHz.
APL (AVERAGE PICTURE LEVEL)
Variable - 0 IRE to 100 IRE in 10 IRE steps.
Accuracy - ± 2 IRE.
Three Preset Levels - Preset A: 0 IRE to
50 IRE. Preset B: 25 IRE to 75 IRE. Preset C:
50 IRE to 100 IRE.
Horizontal Sync, Blanking, and Pedestal Duration - Within NTSC (PAL - Option 01) limits
(no vertical interval is provided). Transition time is
0.24 p'S ± 10%, from 10% to 90% points.
Composite Sync Source Blanking - 0 V turns
CW on > -5 V turns CW off.
Line Strobe - TTL pulse from 0 V to 5 V turns
CWon.

140511L 12 TV Sideband Adaptor Analyzer System.

1405 TV Sideband Adaptor
Facilitates In-Service Testing of Transmitter
Measure Transmitter Frequency Response
to ± 0.2 dB
Video Circuits Can be Swept
For In-Service Testing, Use of External
Blanking Allows Either Full Field or
Single Line Operation
Check Aural Fm Deviation With Built-In
Bessel Null Technique
Flexible Marker System Will Accept
Standard Crystals

To analyze the sideband response of a
television transmitter, the 1405 Sideband
Adaptor is recommended for use in tandem with the Tektronix 7L 12, 7L 14, and all
490 Series spectrum analyzers. It generates
a composite video signal, which is applied
as modulation to a television transmitter.
The output is displayed on the spectrum
analyzer and appears as a response curve,
to within ± 0.2 dB, of the transmitter being
tested.
The 1405/Spectrum Analyzer combination
will display frequency response characteristics of RF and IF circuits for transmitters
with frequencies to 1 GHz. Video circuits
can also be analyzed.
Option 02 provides the correct frequencies
at the TV Channel marks on the dial readout so that it is ready for use with the 490
Series spectrum analyzers when shipped
from the factory.

CHARACTERISTICS
The following characteristics apply to the 1405,
1405I7L 12 or 7L 14 combination and 1405/490
Series combination. They are applicable over the
environmental specification limits for the 1405 and
7000 Series mainframes.
FREQUENCY (FREQUENCY OFFSET)
Range - Will tune and provide a swept video
output for a center frequency range of 0 to
1 GHz.
Frequency Dial Accuracy - Dial reading is
within 20 MHz of transmitter frequency when
property tuned.
Fine Tuning Range From ± 0.5 MHz to
± 1.25 MHz, depending upon transmitter frequency setting.
Tuned Frequency Drift - < 1 MHzlhour after a
30 minute warm·up.
OUTPUT SIGNAL LEVEL
Amplitude (Sync ott) - 100 IRE equals 0.714 V
p-p when terminated in 75 O.
Output Impedance - 750 ± 1% at 100 IRE
and ±2% from 0 IRE to 90 IRE.
Variable - 0 IRE to 100 IRE in 10 IRE steps.
Accuracy (at 200 kHz) - ± 1 IRE at 100 IRE;
± 2 IRE from 10 IRE to 90 IRE.
Output Level During Blanking - 0 V ±0.01 V
at 0 IRE; 0 V ±0.04 V at 100 IRE from 0 MHz to
1 MHz; 0 V ±0.02 Vat 100 IRE above 1 MHz.
CW Output Harmonics - Third harmonic content down 40 dB from 0.1 MHz to 5 MHz; down
35 dB from 5 MHz to 10 MHz.

AURAL OUTPUT
Output Frequency - 10.396 kHz: ±0.01%
(crystal controlled). Option 01: 9.058 kHz.
CW Output - Amplitude variable up to
;;;.. + 12 dBm into 600 O. Harmonics down 45 dB or
more.
Crystal Requirements - Series Resonant: R2
<2000 0; Q >5000; Case, HC/6U or HC/25U.
MARKER CRYSTAL INSTALLATION
Because of the various international standards,
the 1405 Option 01*1 is shipped with the marker
crystals installed. Frequencies installed are
0.75 MHz , 1.25 MHz , 2.25 MHz , 4.43 MHz,
5.00 MHz, and 5.75 MHz. Additional crystals are
shipped with the unit.
., Option 01 Instruments 8m COflfI8C//Id for a nominal power
1/f/8 voltage of 240 V. Th8y am fum/shIK1 with the standatd
North Am6ricBn plug unless Options A 1. A2. A3. A4. or AS Is
sp8Cifi/Id.

ORDERING INFORMATION
1405 TV Sideband Adaptor
525/60 Markers

$5,780

Include.: Instruction manual (07(}-207&OO).
OPTIONS

Option 01 -

TV Sideband Adaptor (625150

Markers).

+$200
Dial Readout for Use with 490

Option 02 Series.

INTERNATIONAL POWER PLUG OPTIONS
Option A1 - Universal Euro 220 V, 50 Hz.

Option
Option
Option
Option

A2
A3
A4
AS

UK 240 V. 50 Hz.
Australian 240 V. 50 Hz.
North American 240 V. 00 Hz.

Switzerland 220 V. 50 Hz.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORY
Rackmount Conv.,.1on KH - For Mounting
1405 or 1405 Option 01 in standard 19 inch
rack. Order 01&0489-00

$475

FLATNESS
1405 - Within ±0.1 dB from 100 kHz to 10 MHz,
within ±0.2 dB from 10 MHz to 15 MHz, within
± 0.4 dB from 50 kHz to 20 MHz.

179

TEK

SPECTRUM ANALYZER
ACCESSORIES

POWER SPLITTER

75 0 /50 0 BNC Output, SO 0 BNC Input Order 067-1232.. ,.......

- 3 dB: 4.2 div at 100 MHz

While a bandwidth specification is essential
for the vertical system(s) of a scope, bandwidth is also sometimes specified for the
horizontal system (which gives you a
chance to evaluate performance in X-Y
measurement applications) and for trigger
systems (which permits you to determine
the range of possible triggering signals).
Although bandwidth is the most important
spec when making amplitude measurements, rise time is the specification to use
if you are making timing measurements.
The frequency response of most scopes is
designed so that there is a constant that
allows you to relate the bandwidth and rise
time of the instrument with this
approximation:

Tr = 0.35
BW

Given either speCification (bandwidth or
rise time), you can derive the other and determine if the instrument is suitable for your
applications. The rule of thumb for timing
measurements is to use an instrument with
a rise time at least five times faster than
the measurement you expect to make. A
5:1 ratio gives you a rise time measurement
with ,,;;;2% error. Other ratios and measurement errors are shown in the chart.

ll-

\
~

f--\

f--

I-

2%
1.5%

Ratio of Rise Times

Note that very accurate absolute rise time
measurements are not always a requirement. When you are comparing rise times,
for instance, an instrument rise time equal
to those being measured is often
adequate.
Sensitivity
An oscilloscope sensitivity specification describes the input signal level needed to
produce a stated deflection of the electron
beam within the CRT. Specifications typically are given in mV/cm or mV/div; with
this spec you can determine if small signals
will be displayed with enough amplitude for
you to make measurements quickly and
accurately.
Note that at a given state-of-the-art, sensitivity and bandwidth are trade-offs. The
small amount of noise in even the best input circuit will mask very small signals.
Raising the bandwidth also increases the
noise picked up by the amplifiers, requiring
a larger signal to create a clear display. As
a consequence of this relationship, many
high sensitivity scopes provide bandwidthlimiting controls to allow you to make cleaner low level measurements at moderate
frequencies.
Although sensitivity specifications are most
often associated with oscilloscope vertical
channels, this specification can also be
provided for horizontal systems and for trigger circuits.

TEK
Multiple Inputs
It is often quite useful to be able to view
more than one input signal without disturbing the connections to your scope. Common
applications include : comparisons of a
device's input and output signals; checking
signals against standards; making timing
and/or phase measurements between
events. These measurement requirements
are usually satisified by multitrace oscilloscopes that use electronic switching to altemately connect two or more input signals
to a single deflection system. Multitrace
scopes offer the lowest cost and the best
comparison capabilities (because there is a
single horizontal amplifier and one set of deflection plates). On the other hand, since a
fast transient event might occur on one
channel while the beam is tracing the other,
dual beam scopes like the Tektronix 7844
(page 232) and 5113 (page 268) are recommended for viewing single shot phenomena.
The 5113 has two independent vertical systems and a common horizontal system and
can display up to eight waveforms in its
Chop vertical operating mode. The dualbeam 7844 can be equipped with dual time
base plug-ins and then used to see a single
event at different locations in the signal
path, at two sweep rates if necessary.
Vertical System Operating Modes
Multiple inputs, the Add vertical operating
mode, and the ability to invert one channel
lets you cancel or reject any signal components equal in amplitude and phase that
appear at both inputs. This ability provides
a simple and accurate way to measure the
difference between two signals, and of rejecting most unwanted signal components
common to both inputs (such as power
supply hum).

Other vertical operating modes are Alternate (in which a complete waveform from
one vertical channel is drawn before
switching to draw the other), Chopped (in
which the scope draws small parts of the
waveforms while switching back and forth
between the channels at a fixed rate), and
Trigger View.
The Trigger View mode is useful any time
you measure events dependent on an external triggering event.
Horizontal System Considerations
The horizontal system of a modern oscilloscope provides a built-in sawtooth sweep
generator. With this constant-speed horizontal deflection, measurements calibrated
directly in units of time are possible. (As a
consequence, the horizontal system of a
scope is often called the time base.) This
permits direct measurement of time between events, accurate time measurements on small portions of pulse trains, and
even time measurements on single, nonrecurrent events.

OSCILLOSCOPE
REFERENCE

Sweep Speeds
How fast a sweep speed do you need? One
rule states that for frequency measurements
at moderate frequencies, a sweep capable
of displaying one cycle across the full horizontal scale is usually considered adequate.
For example, one cycle of a 10 MHz signal
can be displayed across 10 div with a
10 ns/div sweep. Oon't apply this rule at ultra
high frequencies, however, as scopes seldom have sweeps that fast.

Another approach emphasizes rise time
measurements. For maximum accuracy
here, the scope should show the step signal (squarewave, pulse, etc.) across most
of the full vertical scale with the rising portion of the signal at nearly a 45° slope. For
very fast rise times, this objective is rarely
met because of compounding difficulties
and the cost of providing extremely fast
sweeps which are both linear and accurate.
Though neither rule can be applied at the
very limits, fast sweep speeds are readily
available: sweeps to 5 ns (500 ps/div magnified) in the 11000 Series and 2465A portables; to 200 ps/div with plug-in time bases
for laboratory scopes; or to 10 ps/div with
sampling plug-ins. (See Sampling Applications on page 194.)
Delayed Sweep Measurements
Delayed sweep scopes can offer you many
measurement advantages. If the scope has
two calibrated time bases and the Alternate horizontal operating mode (electronic
switching of the trace between time
bases), then convenient comparisons of
the same signal at two different sweep
speeds are possible.

If the second time base has an independent trigger, then jitter-free measurements
on the delayed sweep are possible.
In every case, timing measurements with
delayed sweep are easier to make, and in
most cases, there is increased timing measurement accuracy. Many plug-in time
bases for laboratory scopes and most portable scopes offer delayed sweep. The
2400 Series offers dual delayed sweeps for
even greater flexibility.
Accuracy
Accuracy in a scope's horizontal system is
as important to timing measurements as
vertical accuracy is to vertical measurements. The built-in time bases of the NEW
11000 Series of oscilloscopes provide timing accuracies to parts per million. Several
of the 7000 Series plug-in time bases provide timing accuracies to ± 1.5%, and the
2465N2445A portable oscilloscopes provide timing accuracies to ± 1%.
Probe Considerations
An oscilloscope can only display a waveform as accurately as it receives it. Thus, a
high accuracy Tektronix probe will com-

plete a measurement system by establishing this critical link between the scope and
circuit under test.
A wide range of Tek probes available to
solve your specific measurement problems
are shown beginning on page 463.
Trigger System Considerations
Besides sensitivity and bandwidth, the flexibility of a trigger system should be a consideration when choosing a scope. Some
trigger system features you might need for
your measurement applications include:

• High and low frequency reject couplingfor stable triggering with noisy signals.
• TV triggering-for automatic synchronization with video signals.
• Alternate triggering-for steady display
of either signal with dual-channel scopes.
• Peak-to-peak autotriggering-for quick,
convenient triggering with automatic level
limits.
• Variable trigger holdoff-permits trigger
holdoff period to be varied to trigger on
repetitive complex waveforms.
• Single sweep operation-for special applications such as capturing a transient
pulse and for CRT photography.
• Auto Level Trigger-for automatic setting
of the trigger level.
By combining logic analyzer triggering capabilities with an oscilloscope, digital signals
can be displayed in analog form for measurements of time and amplitude. The 7A42
Logic Triggered Vertical Amplifier extends
the 7000 Series triggering into the arena of
logic analysis. The 2400 Series offers options
and accessories to provide delay-by-events
triggering and Boolean logic triggering.
CRT System Considerations
CRT system specifications will tell you how
well the scope can display waveforms for direct viewing and for photography. A full complement of CRT system controls contributes
greatly to the instrument's ease of use.
CRT Controls
CRT system controls to consider include:

Beam Finder-A single pushbutton that allows you to quickly locate any off-screen
trace.
Autofocus-Autofocusing on both laboratory and portable scopes reduces the need
for manual readjustments with changes in
trace intensity; very useful when traces are
displayed at different sweep rates, as in
the Alternate horizontal operating mode.
Auto Intensity-Maintains optimum trace intenSity over a wide sweep-speed range.
External Z-Axis Input-Permits trace brightness modulation, makes some measurements easier by identifying events with an
intensified zone on the trace.

185

TEK

OSCILLOSCOPE
REFERENCE

PHOTOGRAPHIC WRITING RATE
Photographic writing rate is a measure of
the scope/camera/film 's capability to
record high speed signals.
Recording high speed signals on film is dependent on at least three factors: the oscilloscope used, film characteristics, and the
camera. For maximum writing rate capability, the objective is to get as much light energy to the film surface as possible. Since
each component affects photographic writing rate, the selection for top performance
is important.
A scope with a microchannel plate (MCP)
CRT allows users to see clearly single shot
events and infrequent noise or Signal anomalies. The 7104/R7103, the 11302, and the
2467 all contain microchannel plate cathode
ray tubes, which make them ideally suitable
for research applications and digital design
and troubleshooting . The microchannel
plate, mounted just behind the front face of
the CRT, multiplies the CRT beam current
by a factor of 1(Xx) to 10,000 to provide a
trace many, many times brighter than is
possible with a conventional cathode ray
tube. In all of Tektronix' oscilloscopes with
microchannel plate CRTs, the user can view
a single shot transient at the maximum
bandwidth and sweep rate of the oscilloscope in ambient light conditions, without
the need of photographic aids. And when
photographing of a single transient is desired for detailed study or documentation,
the photography can be done simply, without the need for high speed lenses/film or
film fogging techniques. (This is detailed in
a footnote to the accompanying photographic writing rate graph.)
Writing Rate Comparison Graph
On the graph, vertical signal amplitude on
the vertical scale is shown against maximum sinewave frequency (lower scale) and
fastest rise time (upper scale). These
speeds assume a small horizontal spot velocity compared to the maximum vertical
velocity. The ramp is assumed to be a linear ramp measured between the 10% and
90% points.
There is an application note available from
Tektronix which further describes photographic writing rate, including measurement
procedures and applications. It is available
on request by referencing 42-W-5335-1 .
Selecting a Phosphor
The catalog description of each oscilloscope indicates the phosphors normally
supplied or available as options. While a
special phosphor may be desirable for a
specific measurement application, remember that each phosphor has its own color,
persistence, burn resistance , etc. Improvements in one characteristic are usually at
the expense of others. The chart to the
right provides comparisons.

186

STEP RISE TIME (ns)
5.2

3.5

2.5

1.7

1.25

1.0 0.83

0.63

0.5

0.25

0.17

100

150

200

250 300

400

500

1,000

1,500

7
6

:::l
~

:::;

..J

C
Z

CJ
(i)

SINEWAVE FREQUENCY (MHz)
Amplitude vs speed and photographic writing speed comparison of 7cx:f) Series mainframes using BE (PI I) pho~
phors (Option 78). 2O,cx:f) ASA film and the C-51 (fl l .2, 1:0.5) Camera.
BE (PI I) phosphor has a different spectral output than GH (P3I) phosphor and more closely matches the sensitivity
spectrum of silver halide film types. While photographic writing speed is approximately two times the GH (P3I) rate,
the visual output luminance is approximately 15% of GH (P3I) phosphor.
• The specified photographic writing speed indicated for the 71041R7103, 11:xJ2, and 2467 are not directly compar&
bIe with that of the other mainframes shown. The microchannel plate CRT of the 71041R7103, 11:xJ2, and 2467 allow
for the following relaxed photographic requirements: P31 phosphor, C-53 camera with fl l .9, 1:0.85 lens, and Polaroid
Type 107 3,cx:f) ASA film without film fogging.
NOTE: A writing speed enhancer used to fog the film may increase the photographic writing speed. See page 441.

COMPARATIVE CRT PHOSPHOR DATA
Phosphor"
WT1)S

Lumlna.-'·

Relative
Photognophlc
Writing
Speed"

Dec8y

Relative
Bum
Realata.-

20%

Medium

FIuore-..c:e

and
JEDEC Phosphora-..c:e

Relative

0rdefIng
InfonnIotIon

CoInIMnta
Replaced by GH (1'31)
in most applications

OptIon"

Yellowish-green

50%

WoN

White

50%

40%

Med·Short

Med-High

TeIe\'ision displays

Blue-'

35%

75%

Long

Medium

Long decay, doublelayer screen

P11

Blue

15%

100%

Med·Short

Medium

For photographic

Special
order

applications
GH

P31

Green

100%

50%

Med·Short

High

P39

Yellowish-green

27%

NA-'

Long

P43

Yellowish-green

40%

NA-'

Medium

P44

Yellowish-green

Medium

High

Bistable storage

P45

White

68%
32%

NAo,

Medium

Very High

Monochrome TV
displays

General purposes,
brightest avaHabie
phosphor

!ll

Medium

Low refresh rate
disptays

Very High

High cUfTent
density phosphor

Special
order

or Tektronix Is adopting the WOt1c1Wf09 Phosphor Type Designation System rwrDS) ss s rep/aoBment for the older JEDEC - P °
number system referenced in this cstsJog. The eIlsrt Usts the comparsble WTDS dBs/gnB/ions for the most common 0po numbers.

0' Messured with Tektronix JI6 Photometer snd J6523 Luminance Probe which Incorporstes a CIE standsrd eye filter. Represents-

tlve of 10 kV sluminized SCf98f!S. GH (P31) ss reference.
OJ BE (PI I) ss reference with PoIsroid 612 or 106 film. Representstive of 10kV aluminized SCf98f!S.
•• Not avsilsble.
·s Ye//Owisfl-green Phosphorescence.
-, Some phosphor options may not be svsll8ble on some produc1s.

Camera Considerations
Tektronix manufactures a variety of cameras
designed for use with oscilloscopes. Two key
parameters are the f-number of the lens and
the magnification. These parameters affect
the light gathering capability of the camera.
The chart utilizes a f/1.2 Tektronix C-51 Camera (f/1.9 Tektronix C-53 camera with the 7104
and 11302). More information on cameras is
available on page 440.

Rim characteristics are also an important
parameter. Generally, the higher the ASA
rating of the film used, the higher the film
sensitivity and thus, photographic writing
rate. It should be recognized that film speed
can vary with storage conditions and environmental factors. More information is available from film vendors.

TEK

OSCILLOSCOPE
REFERENCE

Writing Speed Enhancer
A writing speed enhancer provides controlled fogging of the film to increase its
sensitivity. The degree of writing speed improvement is variable, and is dependent on
the film, camera, and scope combination
used. More information is available on page
441 . A writing speed Application Note is
also available by requesting 42-W-5335-1 .
Digitizing Camera System
The DCS01 Digitizing Camera System easily and cost-effectively adds digitizing and
signal processing capability to analog oscilloscopes. The DCS01 bridges the gap between acquisition tools such as 2467, 7104
and processing and analysis tools such as
the PC. Now, digitize analog waveforms to
1 GHz and beyond, single shot, and analyze them immediately on an IBM PC/XT/AT
or compatible.
DIGITAL FEATURES INCREASE
OSCILLOSCOPE PERFORMANCE
The NEW Tektronix 11301 and 11302 programmable analog scopes provide many of
the measurement capabilities normally associated only with digitizing oscilloscopes.
Both scopes make up to eight selected
pulse parameter measurements on the displayed signal automatically at a single request, without further operator intervention.
The results of all eight measurements are
displayed numerically on the screen, and
are immediately available over the GPIB
bus or RS-232C port.
The results of all measurements made with
the instrument's built-in 500 MHz universal
counter/timer-frequency, period, width, ratio, time A--B, and totalize-are also immediately available over the GPIB or RS-232C.
Display of template waveforms allow immediate visual comparison of live signals with previously defined waveform limits . The
touch-screen numeric keypad permits the immediate scaling of scale factors to match
transfer characteristics of devices such as
accelerometers, pressure transducers, etc.
The 2445A/2465A Family offers a
CounterlTimerlTrigger (Cn) which is included on the Special Editions, 2465A CT, OM,
and DV, and optional for the standard
scopes. This
option provides crystalcontrolled time base accuracy for several
time-related measurements and is fully integrated with the operation of the scope and
on-screen menus.

The OM 44 factory-installed option for 466
Storage Oscilloscopes allows you to read
the delay time, time interval, or frequency
right from a LED readout, with no calculation or interpolation required . The OM 44
also incorporates a digital volt/ohm meter
and temperature measurement capabilities.
The 7B10, 7B15, 7885 and 7880 plug-ins
for the 7000 Series oscilloscopes also provide ~time measurements. With these plug-

MODULAR NONSTORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES
DefIec1Ion FKIOr

ofr-

SWeepRllte

Delayed
SWeep

....

1 GHz

10 mVlrk.i at f!'N

Up t04

ax> pslrk.i

222

$25.125

7904A
A7103

!OO M-iz

10 mVlrk.i at f!'N
10,.Vlrk.i
1 mAJrk.i

Up t04

!OO pslrk.i

225

$10.115

NEW 11302°'

!OO M-iz

10 mVidiv at f!'N
1 mVlrk.i al 250 M-iz
10 mVldN at BW
1 mVlrk.i al 250 M-iz

Product
7104
A7103

Bandwidth

Minimum

Number

Maximum

Pltce°'

$24.500

S9.56J

3)1

Up 108

!OO pslrk.i

Up t08

!OO pslrk.i

3)1

$8.550

Upt04

1 ns/rk.i

231

$15.365
$15.810

$12,950

NEW 11301°'

400 M-iz

7144
A7I44

400 M-iz

n04A

250 M-iz

3) mVlrk.i at f!'N
10,.Vlrk.i
1 mAJrk.i

Up 104

2ns/rk.i

Zl7

$6.100

n04A

ax>M-iz

10 mVlrk.i al f!'N
101'Vlrk.i
t mAJrk.i

Up 104

2ns/rk.i

Zl7

$5.635

71103
R71103

100 M-iz

5 mVlrk.i at f!'N
101'Vlrk.i
1 mAJrk.i

Up 104

5ns/rk.i

229

$3.670
$4.100

5440
R5440

50 M-iz

5 mVlrk.i al f!'N
101'Vlrk.i
0.5 mAJrk.i

Upt08

5ns/rk.i

264

$3.33J
$3.3l5

5110
R5110
5118

2 '-f-tz

1 mVlrk.i al f!'N
10 I'Vlrk.i
0.5 mAJrk.i

Upl08

100 ns/rk.i

2ffT

$1,815
$1.1m
52,5B5

Optot

3) mVlrk.i at f!'N
10,.Vlrk.i
1 mAJrk.i

DuaI-Beam

., ProgrsmmabItJ llis GPIB or RS-232C; useful In Automstsd Tsst App//C8t1ons.
to 14 GHz 81'8 avsJlsbIB for most I118inframss.
., PrIes doss not IncIudII plug-Ins.
., Bandwidths 81'8 (9sl time. SsmpIIng plug-Ins that Bxtend bandwidths

PORTABLE NONSTORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES
PnIduct
NEW 2487° ,

BandwIcIIh
350 M-iz

NEW 2485Ao,
2485ACTo,
2485ADMo,
2485A DVo,

350M-iz

NEW 2455Ao,
NEW 2445Ao,

MinImurn
DefIec1Ion FKIOr
2 mVlrk.i al f!'N

SWeepRllte

DNyed
SWeep

!OO pslrk.i

MuIrnum
Dual TI'8Ce
4 ChameIs

....
Z79

PItce
$11 .!m
$5.350
$7.150

!OOpslrk.i

281

$8,400
S9,200

4 ChameIs

1 ns/rk.i

281

$5,150

4 ChameIs

1 ns/rk.i

281

$3,500

5 mVlrk.ial BW

5ns/rk.i

$4,275

100 M-iz

5 mVlrk.ial BW

5ns/rk.i

2338YA

l00'-f-tz

5 mVlrk.ial BW

5ns/rk.i

2335

100 M-iz

5 mVlrk.ial BW

5ns/rk.i

200
200
200
200

l00M-iz

5 mVidiv at BW
2 mVlrk.i

5ns/rk.i

296

$1 ,575

l00M-iz

5 mVidiv al BW
2mVlrk.i

5ns/rk.i

296

$1 ,996

l00'-f-tz

5 mVidNat BW
2mVlrk.i

5ns/rk.i

294

$2,660

NEW 2225

5OM-iz

!OO I'V/dN at 5 MHz
5 mVlrk.ial BW

5ns/rk.i

Alternate
MagVfication

NEW 2245

l00M-iz

2 mVlrk.i

4 ChameIs

2ns/rk.i

51,875

NEW 2248

l00M-iz

2ns/rk.i

:m
:m
:m

52,400

2 mVlrk.i al BW

4 ChameIs

250M-iz

2 mVlrk.i al BW

150M-iz

2 mVlrk.i al BW

2337

100 M-iz

2338

2235
2235 Opt 01
2238

$3,965
$4,175
$3,660

S996

2mVlrk.i

4 ChameIs

305

5 M-iz

5 mVlrk.i at BW

100 ns/rk.i

311

52,765

221

5'-f-tz

5 mVlrk.i at BW

100 ns/rk.i

312

$2,315

213

1'-f-tz

3) mVlrk.i at BW
5 mVlrk.i

400 ns/rk.i

313

$2,!m

212

!OO kHz

10 mVlrk.iat BW
1 mVlrk.i

1,.s/rk.i

315

$2,005

SC 504°'

00 M-iz

5mV/rk.iatBW

5ns/rk.i

15'-f-tz

5 mVIrk.i at f!'N
1 mV/rk.i

3) ns/rk.i

42B
42B

$3.895

SC 502°'

$2,795

., ProgrBmmsbIB VIa incIudBd or optlonsl GPIB; useful In AutomstBd Tsst Appl/cBtIons.
·z The SC 502 and SC 5(U are osciIIoscopss that plug Into a TM SOO/TM 5000 mainframe for optJrBtIon.

ins, the time interval measurement can be
shown on the screen using the 7000 Series
CRT readout capability.
For 7000 Series instruments, there are a variety of other digital plug-ins. These include a
universal counter/timer, and a digital multimeter with a temperature mode.

Combining digital capabilities within the oscilloscope system offers many advantages
over separate test units, such as: increased
accuracy, scope-controlled digital measurements, measuring convenience and confidence, easier and faster solutions to complex problems, a lower dollar investment,
more bench space, and signal conditioning.

187

TEK

OSCILLOSCOPE
REFERENCE

STORAGE
When a conventional oscilloscope cannot
capture an event and display it for your
measurements because the signal is too
slow, or too fast and infrequent, or when
you need to compare events that happen
at different times instead of simultaneously,
consider a storage scope. These are obvious applications, but there are many other
situations that also call for the unique advantages of storage. Storage can help you:
• Observe signal changes during circuit
adjustments
• Compare new signals with a standard
• Increase the brightness of a dim, low repetition rate signal for normal viewing
• Reduce flicker or noise in a signal
• Babysit (unattended monitoring) for a transient event
• Capture fast signals that occur infrequently
or only once
• Capture a complete display of a slowly occurring signal
• Enhance other recordkeeping techniques
like photography

With the right Tektronix storage instrument,
the capabilities you need are available, and
the storage time can be anywhere from a
few minutes to a practically unlimited
length of time depending on your choice of
instruments.

Only Tektronix Offers Four Distinct
Storage Technologies
Two broad categories of storage instruments are named for the storage medium.
CRT storage scopes store the captured
waveform when the electron beam writes
on a target within the cathode-ray tube.
Digital storage scopes quantize the waveform and then store it in a digital memory.
In addition, there are waveform digitizers, a
very special class of storage instruments
available in the Tektronix 7000 Series. Within each category there are different technologies and each has its own set of features and benefits.
Bistable CRT Storage
The phosphor in a bistable CRT storage
scope has two stable states: written and
unwritten. Once stored, this phosphor typically allows waveforms to be displayed for
several hours, or until erased by the operator. Bistable storage is the easiest CRT
storage type to use. It is also the least expensive CRT storage technology. It features bright, long lasting displays, but in
comparison with other storage technologies, bistable storage displays have less
contrast.

The advantages of bistable storage make it
particularly useful for mechanical measurements , signal comparisons , and data
recording.

Split-screen viewing is another advantage
of most bistable storage scopes. This feature allows a reference waveform to be
stored on one half of the screen while the
other half can be used to store the effects
of changes made on the circuit. You can
also use the split screen to have the reference waveform in the stored mode and the
other half of the display in the nonstored
mode to monitor an external input.
Variable Persistence CRT Storage
If you don't need to store waveforms for
hours at a time, variable persistence CRT
storage has advantages. The variable persistence storage CRT has a storage mesh
where the electron beam writes the input
signal; thereafter, flood guns in the CRT illuminate the phosphor where the storage
mesh permits.

CRT storage controls vary the charge on
the mesh, allowing you to control the contrast between the trace and the background and to fine tune how long the trace
is stored.
The first capability provides easy viewing
with high contrast between the dark background and bright waveforms. And this type
of storage provides the best displays when
viewing traces with varying intensities (such
as delaying and delayed sweeps, or traces
with extemal z-axis intensity modulation).

CRT STORAGE PERFORMANCE
STEP RISE TIME
250
B

250 ns

I"S

2.5 ns

25 ns

r---~--~~---+--~~~~----+---~~--~--~----L-----L-~~--~----~---1

~--;-~~;----+---'~r-~----+----r~---r--~----r-----r-~~---.-----.--~n

250 ps

1\
\
\

\\
\

\\ 1

1\
1\
1 \
1 ,

1 kHz 2 kHz

10 kHz 20 kHz

50 kHz 100 kHz 200 kHz

500 kHz 1 MHz 2 MHz

5 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz
1

SINEWAVE FREQUENCY

188

50 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 500 MHz 1 GHz

466 and 7633 Vertical
Bandwidth
Limit 100 MHz

7934 Vertical
Bandwidth
Limit 500 MHz

TEK

OSCILLOSCOPE
REFERENCE

Varying the persistence permits you to adjust the scope so that the entire waveform
can be viewed, yet the stored trace will
fade from view just as a new waveform is
be ing stored. Or you can view several
traces before the first one fades from view.
Then you can see signal response variations as you make changes in a circuit.

Fast Transfer CRT Storage
Fast transfer storage scopes use a CRT
with a special intermediate mesh target optimized for speed. This target captures the
waveform and then transfers it to another
mesh, one optimized for longer term storage. As the name implies, the fast transfer
storage mode provides increased writing
speed (see the next heading) for the 466
Portable Oscilloscope and the 7623A, 7633,
and 7934 lab scopes.

Variable persistence can also be used to
provide display integration so that only the
coincident portions of a repetitive signal
are displayed. Aberration or jitter not common to all traces will not be stored or displayed. Low repetition rate, fast rise time
signals that are not discernible on conventional CRTs can be easily viewed with this
storage technology by allowing each repetition to build up the trace brightness.

The second target can also be designed to
offer bistable, variable persistence or both
modes in combination with the transfer
mesh or by itself. In the 7623A, 7633, and
7934, this combination of capabilities provides unique multi mode storage instruments. Using front panel controls, you can
select the operating mode suited to your
specific measurement situation.

Applications for variable persistence storage include spectrum analysis, time domain reflectometry, sampling, and any other measurements that require displays of
low repetition rate signals.

Stored Writing Speed
For CRT storage scopes, the storage capability specification is the stored writing
speed. This figure of merit is expressed in
distance per unit of time. Often div/p.s is
more meaningful in terms of your measurements. But because some scopes have
nonstandard sized graticules (i .e., other
than 1 cm square major divisions) cm/p.s is
useful for comparisons.
The specification is dependent on the
speed and amplitude of the input Signal. If
you know the pulse rise time or sinewave
frequency of the input signal and the amplitude of the waveform you want to display,
you can use the table below to determine
which storage scope is recommended.

CRT STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES
In Order of Stored Writing Speed
Product

NEW 7934

Stcnd
Writing Speed

8900 div/l's
n6 div/1'5
12 div/l's
0.2 div/l'5

VIew TIme
30
3) min-·
30
3) min-·

s· '
minimum
s·'
minimum

BaMwldth*1

MInImum DeflectIon Factor

Number
ofT_

Delayed
SWeep

Plug-In

P-v-

PrIce

Fast variable persistence
Fast bistable
Variable persistence
Bistable

500 MHz

10 mV/div at BW

Up to 4

235

$13.365

317

$7.940

Type of Stor8ge

41111

3000 div/l'5
3 div/l'5

15 s·'
15 s·'

Fast variable persistence
Variable persistence

100 MHz

5mV/div at BW

Up to 2

7833

2200 div/l'5

30 s·'

Fast variable persistence

100 MHz

5 mV/div at BW; 10 I'V/div;

Up to 4

236

$9.215

Up t04

236

$7.135

lmNdiv
400 div/l'5

3 div/l's
0.2 div/l'5
71123,\

min

30 s·'
3)

min minimum

Fast bistable minimum
Variable persistence
Bistabie
Fast variable persistence

100 MHz

5 mV/div at BW; 10 I'Vidiv;

lSOdiv/1'5

3Os·'

SO 00/1'5
0.5 div/l'5

3J min minimum

0.03 div/l's

3) min minimum

Fast bistable
Variable persistence
Bistable

71113

5 div/l'5

1 hr

Variable persistence

100 MHz

5 mVidiv at BW; 10 I'V/div;
lmNdiv

Up t04

236

$6.145

5441

5 div/l's

1 hr

Variable persistence

SO MHz

5 mVidiv at BW; 10 I'V/div;
0.5 mAidiv

Up t08

264

$332

5111 ,\ Opt 03
51 11,\

0.8 div/l'5
0.05 div/l'5

10 hr

Bistable split screen

2 MHz

1 mV/div at BW; 10 I'V/div;
0.5 mNdiv

Up t08

2fJT

lmNdiv
30 s· '

$3.105

$2.900

214

0.5 div/l'5

1 hr

Bistable

500 kHz

10 mV/div at BW; 1 mV/div

Up to 2

321

314

0.4 div/l'5

4 hr

Bistable

10 MHz

2 mV/div at BW

Up t02

320

$4.550

SC 503*'

0.08 drv/l's

4 hr

BIstable

10 MHz

1 mVidiv at BW

Up to 2

428

$4.095

5113

0.02 drv/l'5

10 hr

2 MHz

1 mV/div at BW; 10 I'V/div;
0.5 mNdiv

Up to 8
dual-beam

2fJT

$4.205

Bistable split screen

$2.865

. , B8ndwidths are real time. Sampling plug-Ins th8t extend bandwidths to 14 GHz are available for most mainframes.
•, The SC 503 Is 8n oscilloscope that plugs Into 8 TM SOOfTM 5000 Mainframe for operation. Please tum to page 428 for more information.
• J View times are 8t full stored display intensity. They may be Incre8sed by using reduotKJ intensity in /he save display mode.
•• Save IntenSity 8t minimum.

189

TEK

OSCILLOSCOPE
REFERENCE

Digital Storage
The fundamental difference between digital
storage scopes and CRT storage scopes is
that digital scopes quantize the captured
waveform and CRT storage scopes do not.
Having quantized waveforms in a digital
memory gives you measurement capabilities not possible with any other kind of
oscilloscope.

With digital storage scopes, you have the
advantage of pretrigger viewing. In other
words, you can look at a waveform both
before and after the trigger event. Another
feature is 'babysitting'; available because
the digital storage scope's trigger can stop
as well as start signal acquisition.

With Dot Display

S MHz Signal

Other digital storage scope advantages include signal processing features such as
averaging a number of samples of the input signal to reduce the effects of noise;
performing calculations on the waveform
parameters; or outputting the signal data
over RS-232 or GPIB standard interfaces.
Digital storage scopes are typically easy to
use and give you crisp, clear displays. Because the data is stored in a digital memory, no fading or blooming of the trace on
the CRT phosphor will occur, and storage
time is essentially unlimited. This type of
storage is excellent for many applications
involving single shot or low repetition signals, or where the unique advantages of a
digitized waveform may be the answer to
your measurement needs.

10 MHz Signal

With Pulse Interpolator

S MHz Signal

10 MHz Signal

With Sine Interpolator

Quantization Techniques
Within digital storage scopes there are two
main techniques of quantizing signals-and
the technique has a direct effect on the applications of the instruments in that only
one kind of digital storage scope can capture single shot signals.

The digital scopes that can capture signals
in a single sweep use what is called 'realtime sampling.' Other digital storage
scopes use ' equivalent time sampling.'
There are two equivalent time sampling
methods and both require many repetitions
of the input signal. In exchange for that requirement, you have the ability to measure
signals more than ten times faster than can
be captured with real time sampling.

190

SMHzSignal

10 MHz Signal; Digitizing Rate-25 MHz

OSCILLOSCOPE
REFERENCE

TEK
Digital Storage Scope Specifications
For digital storage oscilloscopes that use
real time sampling, there is a useful storage
bandwidth specification. It expresses the
highest frequency sinewave that can be
captured in a single sweep and displayed
so that you can make measurements. Both
the digitizing rate (how often the scope
takes samples) and the display reconstruction technique (how the scope displays
what's in its memory) must be taken into
account in the useful storage bandwidth.
See the examples below.
For digital scopes using equivalent time
sampling, the specificaton is 'equivalenttime bandwidth: the highest frequency signal that can be stored and displayed with
less than 3 dB signal amplitude loss. Besides analog specifications (common to all
oscilloscopes), other specifications of interest to digital scope users are:
Maximum Digitizing Rate-How often the
instrument takes samples of the input
signal.
Vertical Resolution (usually expressed in
bits of resolution)-How finely the instrument can discriminate between signals
very much alike in voltage; for example,
8-bits of resolution is 0.391 % when expressed as a percentage, and 10-bits is
0.098%.
Record length or Horizontal ResolutionHow many words of digital memory are
used to store the captured waveform; if the
signal is stored in 512 data words, the horizontal resolution is 1 in 512 or 0.195%.

Digital Storage Oscilloscope Summary
NEW Programmable Digitizing Oscilloscope.
11401 500 MHz bandwidth. 512 to
10,240 point multiple record acquisition.
NEW Programmable Digitizing OscillOSCOpe.
11402 1 GHz bandwidth. 512 to
10,240 point multiple record acquisition.
2220 Portable Storage Oscilloscope. 60 MHz
bandwidth. 100 ns glitch capture
(peak detect mode), 4K record length,
and save reference memory.
2230 Portable Storage Oscilloscope. 100 MHz
bandwidth. 100 ns glitch capture
(selectable 1 Kl4 K mode), record length,
CRT readout, cursor measurements,
and save reference memory.
Portable
Storage Oscilloscope. 150 MHz
2430
bandwidth. 'Save on Delta' feature allows
2430 to make pass/fail decisions. 2 ns
Transient capture at any sweep speed.
Advanced cursors and readout.
336 Portable Digital Storage Oscilloscope.
Useful storage bandwidth of 140 kHz,
microprocessor controlled with features
and modes chosen from menu on CRT.
5010 Digital Storage Plug-In for the 5000 Series
offering real time sampling to 100 kHz,
CRT readout, a-bit vertical resolution.
and up to 1024 data words/waveform.
5223 Digitizing Oscilloscope with 1D-bits of
vertical resolution, roll mode, X-V plotter
output, and optional GPIB interface.
7020 Full GPIB Programmable Waveform
Digitizing Plug-In for the 7000 Series.
Offers 70 MHz equivalent time bandwidth and capture of transients with
frequency components up to 10 MHz.
7854 Waveform Processing Oscilloscope with
400 MHz equivalent time bandwidth,
keystroke programming, and calibrated
sweep speeds to 500 ps/div.

SAMPLING OSCILLOSCOPES
Sampling is a powerful technique for examining very fast repetitive signals. In principle,
sampling is similar to the use of stroboscopic light to study fast mechanical motion. Progressive samples of different portions of
successive waveforms are taken; then they
are 'stretched" in time, amplified by relatively low bandwidth amplifiers, and finally
shown (all seemingly at one time) on the
screen of a CRT. The display produced is a
replica of the sampled waveforms.
Sampling scopes are capable of resolving
events that occur in less than 30 ps on an
"equivalent" time base of less than 20 ps/div
with less than 5 mV of peak amplitude.
If your measurement needs require equivalent bandwidths to 14 GHz or sweeps to
10 ps/div, consider the sampling plug-ins
described on page 258.
To determine which instrument fits your requirements, refer to the sampling decision
tree on page 253.
This sampling technique is limited to depicting repetitive signals, since no more than a
portion of the signal is captured and displayed each time the signal occurs. The
sampling method, however, provides a
means of examining fast changing signals
of low amplitude that cannot be examined
in any other way.

Color Digital Storage Oscilloscope
Tektronix' method of producing color oscilloscope displays, Liquid Crystal Display, is
described in the technology section. This
technology is combined with digital storage
in our 5116 Oscilloscope. Full product specifications begin on page 269. Tek's C-59A,
C-5C, Co?, or C-4 Cameras can save those
color displays on color film. See pages
445-453 for a complete description. A color
photography Application Note is available
by requesting 52W-55?9.
Your local Tektronix Sales Engineer, representative, or distributor can help you determine the digital oscilloscope parameters
necessary to meet your measurement applications needs.

191

DIGITIZERS
REFERENCE

TEK

TEKTRONIX DIGITIZER COMPARISON*1
F......
Digitizilg

Technique
Maxinl.m

Sample Rale

5223 DigIt8I
~

11401/11402

DIgII8I

DIgItIzIng

338 DIgII8I
~

Successive
approx

Successive

1 MSls
(l/'S1'point)

1 MSls
(1 /'SI'point)

appro.

Vertical
Ampifoer Analog 10'-t-tz
Bandwidth

2230/2220

7854 Wr.tefonn
Proc:euIng
~

Dual stage flash Dual stage flash Successive
approx

""""""'"'
20MSls

500KSIs
(2/'S1'point)

7D20/7D2OT

390AD

78120
W.velonn

7912AD

DIgItIzIng

Dlglliz4lf

Dlgltlz4lf

c.mer.~

2430 DIgital
~
ceo Successive Successive
approx
approx
«1MS1s
(25 nslpoint)

DCS01

Dual stage flash ESS" flash

looMSIs

""""""'"'

Scan """"""'"' Scan """"""'"'
looGSIs
250GSls
(to pslpoint)
(4 pslpoint)

ISO MHz

15 MHz

OO'-t-tz

5OO'-t-tz (JA29)
2OO'-t-tz (JAI6P) 1 GHz (JA29)

&bits

1(}bits

&bits

9-bits

12-bits1rep
9-bits/singIe-shot

2048 dual
4006 si1gIe

256 to 2048
per channel

512

alMSIs
(16.6ns1point)

200 MSls
(5 nslpoint)

SO'-t-tz

100 '-t-tz (2231) 5OO'-t-tz (11«11) 4OO ~real
70'-t-tz
al'-t-tz (2m)
1 GHz (1t402) (t4 GHz/samp.)

B-bits

8-bits

lQ.bi1s; 14{)its
with averaging

l(}bits

B-bits

Record Length 254 to 1016
(Points)

1024 per
channel

2048 dual

512 to 10,2«1

128 to 1024

4006 si1gIe

820 or 1024 per 1024
channel

Up t04
Input ChameIs chopped

2 chopped

Up to 12 (Up to

Up t04
chopped

2
acquisition

2 smilaneous

8 displayed)

IndepeOOent

1 plus

1 plus detaying

1 plus detaying
(2231); 1 (2m)

1 mail and
1 window

1
delaying

1 plus

1 plus
detaying

1 plus
delaying

2OOnsiOO
(20ns., XIO)

100 nslOO
(IOns" Xl0)

SOnsiOO
(5ns., Xl0)

500 pslOO

500 pslOO
(20 pslOO)
SarnpIi1g

SO ns/OO

5 ns1OO

NlA

500 pslOO

200 pslOO

Sweep Speed

Yes*3

Yes

Delay line only

Yes

21016

26 (PC
dependent)

averaging
enveloping

averaging
envelope
save on della
rr1lit4JIy, add

averaging

waveform
ft.nCtions; pulse
paramelers;
save on della

ASCI or binary

Vertical
Resolution

&bits

T""" Bases
Maxinl.m

Pre1rigger

Yes, with 5B25N pre, 1T1d, post

Yes

PosHrigger

Yes, w/delaying Yes

Yes

Waveform
Slorage
Registers

2 t04

2 plus

3 plus 26 opt
64K points
2 to 16
(2231); 1 (2m) 102K points (Opt) (5 10 «1 Opt)

16 opt

Waveform
Processing

Waveform Data
Output Formal ASCI or binary

Yes, w/delaying Yes

averagong
averaging
smoothing
enveloping
0-11 ±CH 2
enveloping
0-11 x 0-1 2,
RMS, mean, P1l

waveform
fu'lctions
pulse
parameters

averagong

Binary

ASCI or binary

ASCI

ASCI or binary

PIug-., moduIarity; RS-232C,
EEE-188
Centronix .,ter·
faces; fuly

Measl.rement
packages

ReI mode
cursors; non--

ASCI, binary,

parameters
keystroke
progamning

Binary

ASCI or binary

Sample rate
switching;
measu-ement
packages

Measurement
packages

calculations

Sample rate
switching;
digotal plaHer
output; XY
sIvft mode

cursors

13M PC based;
RS-170 video
0UIpu1; save on
della; auto logging; menu
driven display

Systems

hex

Other

Rei mode; XV XV output
recorder oulpul cursors'
cursors
CRT readout

ReI mode; XV
recorder 0UIpu1
cursors; CRT
readout cursors
(2231)

programmable;
seIf-cailralion;
enhanced accu-

Analog plaHer
output curnors;
1MIiabIe; WfN&- IIOiaIie seltilgs Video Tngger;
form parameter
direct printout

racy; differential
ampifoer
Format
Optimization
Page
Prices begin
at

Operator

351
56,165

Operator

Syslems or
operator

Operator

Systems or
operator

Systems

334

207

338

336

326

349

344

347

353

$5,tal

$5,1501$4,ISO

$13,OCOI$15,5OO

$16.220

$7,4451$9,045

$8,!m

$11 ,400

$28,075

$27,025

$5,300

" For sppIicatiOns not ffKIUJfI'I9 programmability, S88 the 5010 Wavefoon Digitizer on page 270.
'2
'3

68ctron bombaJ'rJed Silicon.
The 7020170207 has pretrlgger CIlp8biNty in the eqtivaJent time digitizing range for repetitive wavefoons as well as for single shot.

WAVEFORM DIGITIZERS
Along with conventional oscilloscopes, plugin or integrated, and with storage oscilloscopes, both digital and analog , Tektronix
leads the way in waveform acquisition instruments. This commitment to the future of
test and measurement instrumentation can
be seen today in three programmable waveform digitizers.

tions). Vertical resolution is 10 bits and the
memory length is 2048 data words (4096,
single channel) with one breakpoint provided to allow changing the digitizing rate during waveform digitizing. More information is
available on page 349.

The 76120 Programmable Waveform Digitizer has full dual-channel operations, a maximum sampling rate of 200 MHz, selectable
The 390AD Programmable Waveform Digi- record lengths from 256 to 2048 data words,
tizer is a dual channel waveform acquisition and the ability to change sampling rates
digitizer with a maximum sampling rate of several times during waveform digitizing.
30 MS/s (or 60 MS/s in single channel opera- ' See page 344,

192

The 7912AD Programmable Transient Waveform Digitizer captures waveforms with a
scan converter CRT capable of recording
500 MHz single shot signals . See page 347
for more information if your applications demand equivalent digitizing rates to 100 GHz
and 9-bit resolution both vertically and
horizontally.
In addition to individual instruments, Tek offers a line of acquisition/processing packages. These preconfigured packages utilize
our ex isting programmable waveform
digitzers. See pages 371 -375.

TEK

CUSTOM
WAVEFORM ACQUISITION SYSTEMS

Custom Systems
Complete Custom Systems
Customized Measurement Packagel
Modified Products
Custom Support

When We Say We'll Custom Configure
a System That Puts You in Charge of
Your Automated Measurements, We
Mean Just That
From one-of-a-kind complete systems to
modifications of selected digitizing products, we can tailor a package based upon
your present and future needs, your budget, and the desired degree of continuity
with your current hardware and software
components and requirements.
You Bring to the Table Your Unique Understanding of Your Requirements; We
Bring Our Unique Expertise in Instrument Systems Integration
We're TEK's Custom Systems team-a
small quasi-independent cadre of hardware, software and systems engineers. We
work with entrepreneurial decisiveness and
speed : your project gets the attention it deserves. At the same time we call on the
vast resources of Tektronix-the world's
leading manufacturer of test and measurement systems instrumentation.
Our Specialties
High speed acquisition and diagnostic test
systems-multichannel or not-for research,
design and engineering; time domain parametric measurement systems; and flexible,
reconfigurable automated test systems for
low run manufacturing environments.

Because It's Your System, the Choice
of Logical Alternatives is Yours Whenever Possible
Together we evaluate hardware, custom
software, including refined application and
diagnostic programs and the drivers to run
them , custom cabinetry and racks, and
non-Tek components, if we agree they'll do
a better job. Together, we'll define performance standards, and resolve other contract terms and conditions.
Then we'll design your system to meet your
requirements . We'll assemble it and run a
complete check-out before installing it on
your site. We'll provide diagnostic programs, documentation, test proceduresall customized for your system.

By Blending the Best of Technologies,
We Aim to Build Systems That Do in
Minutes Tasks That May Now Take
Days
Our systems combine Tek's leadership in
waveform acquisition instruments with automated stimulus and acquisition measurement capability. All are computer-integrated
and directed by powerful signal processing
software.
As a result, your projects can get finished
more quickly, improving the productivity of
your engineering team and the cost effectiveness of your system investment, while
lowering project costs.

193

TEK

CUSTOM
WAVEFORM ACQUISITION SYSTEMS

To Ease Your Selection Process, You
Can Contract for Any of Three Tiers of
Tek Custom System Services
Custom Systems
Custom Systems offer single-shot or repetitive measurement capability and control of
up to 56 GPIB instruments per c~ntroller ,
fully configurable to your specifications. Included are full warranties, installation, and
other product support services.
While we provide the core system package, specialized drivers and softwa~e operating system after consultatio~ with your
software engineers and operating personnel, it is generally more cost effective for
you to provide your own applications software. This better prepares users to do routine modifications and updating, and gives
you the local expertise you need to make
the best use of your system investments.
Customized Measurement Packages
Customized Tektronix Measurement Packages are modifications to existing preconfigured systems. Each offers powe.rful
capability in a cost effective benchtop size.
Signal acquisition units span bandwidths of
up to 750 MHz real time and up to 14 GHz
with sampling plug-ins.
Modified Products
Modified Products include the customization of selected digitizers, as well as the
' system glue' (specialized internal interfaces, etc.) required to hold the system
together.
These off-the-shelf custom items for your
system needs include:
• Additional serial I/O drivers for your
communications/printing needs. Up to 8
instrument channels and up to 4 peripheral ports may be supported.
• Special disk drivers for RL02 disk pack
drives. For TEK SPS BASIC V02.
• GPIB program decoder plug-in that enhances the 7854 oscilloscope by interfacing to programmable vertical and time
base settings with selected plug-Ins.
• High speed data output modification for
the 390AD digitizer.
• A high bandwidth modification (750 MHz)
of the 7912AD digitizer.
• Auto-calibration MUX controller and stimulus generator.
• Others per your request.

194

Custom Support
Once We've Completed Installation,
Our Suppport Continues for as Long as
You Request
Product warranties, stipulated for each system instrument, cover all hardware and
software. Additionally, our System Warranty
covers installation and service at your site
for 90 days from the date of your acceptance, or 120 days from the shipment.
On top of that, maintenance contracts are
usually available for both systems and components. After the expiration of the wa~ran
ty period. you can contract for TektrOniX .to
serve as the single source for system maintenance. Such contracts can be arranged
for any length of time through your local
Tektronix service site.
Pre-installation consultation, operator and
product maintenance training may also be
arranged, at the Tek home office and sales
offices, or on-site. And when you need additional support down the road, our appli~a
tions engineering and product service
staffs can help keep your systems tuned
and your people informed.
Finally, documentation is thor~ugh, ~I.ear
and continuous, in the TektroniX tradition.
Regular updates and a user's exchange
program are only two of the many ways
Tek stays in touch with its system owners.
When It Comes to Your Custom System
Requirements, We Know the Right
Questions to Ask as Well as the Right
Answers; Let's Begin Discussing Your
Special Needs Now

The Custom Systems Domain
The following list samples the breadth of activity typically performed by Tek's digitizer-based custom system services group.
Custom Systems
These include large, multichannel test and
research systems incorporating a wide variety of Tek digitizers and acquisition instruments both for major military installations
and d~fense contractors, and for a variety
of commercial test applications such as fiber optic research and disk testing.
Modified Standard Systems
Include laboratory and mobile systems for
EMP susceptibility studies, plus several
modified standard systems for energy research, for major governmental and private
research labs.
Custom Instruments
Include plug-in interface for programmable
plug-in control in the Tek 7854, plus custom
drivers for large customer designed and assembled systems.
Modified Instruments
Include modified Tek 7912ADs for higher
bandwidth; modified Tek 390ADs for higher
data output rate; modified Tek digitizers
and acquisition instruments for MIL-ATE
applications.
Your local Tektronix representative can put
you in touch with the right people . . . the
people who help put you in charge of your
automated measurements. Let's start working together today.

TEK

CUSTOMER
TRAINING

TRAINING GETS USERS UP TO SPEED, FAST
An Investment - Tektronix workshops develop your skills and
are one of the best methods of deriving more effective utilization
from your equipment.
New Perspective on Applications - Professional instructors
are available to help you examine and evaluate your application
problems during laboratory sessions.
New Methods of Making Measurements - Our workshops
are designed to aid in developing new ideas through comprehensive discussion and laboratory exercises.
Tektronix offers formal classes and self-study aids. See the following pages for general information on our workshops, then ask
your Sales Engineer for details about Customer Training.

Test and Measurement - Tektronix instruments and programmable instrument systems represent the upper limits of productivity potential. Tektronix has designed workshops to help enhance your understanding of the capabilities of your equipment.

Measurement workshops are a natural complement to the
Tektronix commitment to help you achieve optimum utilization of
your equipment. Our commitment begins with engineering excellence and continues through high quality training that will help
you develop new and more productive applications.
These fast-paced workshops, conducted at key locations
throughout the U.S., combine classroom lectures with supervised,
hands-on laboratory sessions. You will spend at least 60% of your
time in labs, so you can learn by doing. In all Tektronix workshops, you receive users manuals and workbooks containing detailed course notes and lab exercises.
For your convenience, Tektronix also offers private workshops
conducted at your company.
The following workshops are currently offered by Tektronix:

XYZs OF USING A SCOPE a••ed on the 2200 Serle.

BASIC DIGITAL STORAGE MEASUREMENTS

L.ngth: 1 Day

U.lng the 2230
Length: 1 Day

CI ••• Size: 24 maximum

TUition: $250/person

Provides an introduction to the oscilloscope for the new user.
Basic operation is explained, measurement techniques are described and performed in lab exercises.
Topics covered:

CI••• Size: 24 maximum

TUition: $250/person

Digital storage oscilloscopes present new and exciting measurement capabilities. Digital storage techniques save time, increase
productivity, and signals can be acquired for direct viewing or
stored for later viewing or analysis.

• Vertical Amplifier Concepts
Dual trace measurements
Differential applications
• Trigger Concepts and Operation
Main and delayed trigger uses
'Runs after' and 'Trigger after' applications
• Horizontal Time Base Concepts
Single time base measurements
Delayed sweep applications

This workshop covers the operation of the 2230 and the basic
concepts of digital acquisition and storage.

PARAMETRIC MEASUREMENTS U.lng the 2485A

Many measurements which are too difficult or impossible with analog oscilloscopes are made faster, Simpler, and more accurately
with digital oscilloscopes. Waveform data can be transferred over
a GPIB to computers for computation to allow ana6ysis at the
speeds required by today's measurements.

Length: 1 Day

CI ••• Size: 24 maximum

TUition: $250/person

This fast-paced workshop covers parametric measurements typically made with an oscilloscope. This workshop gives the average oscilloscope user a high degree of expertise in making accurate parametriC measurements to fully utilize the capabilities of
their instrument.

ADVANCED PARAMETRIC MEASUREMENTS
U.lng the 2485A
Length: 1 Day
CI ••• Size: 24 maximum

TUition: $250/person

This fast-paced workshop teaches advanced applications using
the enhanced measurement options available on the 2465A.
Advanced parametric measurements are made in 'hands-on'
labs utilizing the special features of the Digital Multimeter,
TVNideo Trigger, Countermmer/Trigger, and Word Recognizer.

ADVANCED DIGITAL STORAGE MEASUREMENTS
U.lng the 2430
Length: 2 Days

CI••• Size: 24 maximum

TUition: $5OO/person

This workshop covers the types of measurements that can be
made with the 2430 Portable Digital Oscilloscope to be used in
your individual measurement applications.

WAVEFORM PROCESSING U.lng the 7854
Length: 2 Days

CI ••• Size: 16 maximum

Tuition: $5OO/person

This fast-paced, two day workshop is designed to increase your
proficiency with the Tektronix 7854 Waveform Processing Oscilloscope to satisfy your application/measurement needs. The workshop is oriented toward technically competent oscilloscope users
with wide variances in background and experience.
All 94 commands/operators, which are available on the front panel keyboard and the remote keyboard, are discussed. These
commands are also available over the IEEE-488 GPIB.

195

TEK

CUSTOMER
TRAINING

ADVANCED WAVEFORM PROCESSING Using SPS BASIC

USING THE IBM PC AS A CONTROLLER

Length: 4 Days

Length: 1 Day

Class Size: 10 maximum

Tuition: $1000/person

This comprehensive workshop teaches you how to effectively implement programming solutions to waveform digitizing and processing problems, using SPS BASIC. Also covered is controlling
and transferring data with the 7912AD and 7612D Digitizers.
The workshop is oriented towards those with a fundamental
knowledge of computers, computer programming and an understanding of oscilloscope operation/application.

USING A 4041 INSTRUMENT CONTROLLER
Length: 3 Days

Class Size: 16 maximum

TUition: $750/person

Many measurements that were done manually in the past can
now be made with automated systems. A very important element
of the system is the controller. This workshop shows you how to
quickly generate extensive 4041 Instrument Controller programs
and gives you "hands-on" experience with an automated programmable instrument system.

Class Size: 16 maximum

This workshop will take a new user of programmable instrumentation from the entry level (using menu-driven, general purpose interactive programs) through program development (using
well-known Microsoft BASIC) and on to advanced uses with a
test procedure generator tool.
You will learn to effectively use the IBM PC and the Tektronix
GPIB Users Resource Utility (GURU) to control GPIB (General
Purpose Interface Bus) programmable instruments.
Software examples and application reference information are
provided.

HIGH SPEED MEASUREMENTS USING SAMPLING
TECHNIQUES
Sampling and Time Domain Reflectometry Measurements
Class Size: 16 maximum
Tuition: $250/person
Length: 1 Day
This workshop introduces the concepts of Analog Sampling and
Time Domain Reflectometry. The workshop discusses measurement challenges and provides valuable hands-on experience.

INFORMATION/REGISTRATION
If you are interested in registering for one of these workshops or
would like more information, call Instrument Group Customer
Training at 1-800-225-7802 or contact:
Tektronix, Inc.
Customer Training
P.O. Box 500, D.S. 54-074
Beaverton, Oregon 97077
For international orders, contact your local Sales Office.

196

Tuition: $250/person

TEK

11000 SERIES
PROGRAMMABLE ANALOG AND
DIGITIZING OSCILLOSCOPES
CONTENTS
11301 Programmable Analog Oscilloscope
11302 Programmable Analog Oscilloscope
with Microchannel Plate CRT ..........
11401 Programmable Digitizing
Oscilloscope ........................
11402 Programmable Digitizing
Oscilloscope ... . .. . . .. .. ... ... . ... . .
11A71 Single Channel Vertical Amplifier ...
11 A52 Two Channel Vertical Amplifier
11 A32 Two Channel Vertical Amplifier
11 A34 Four Channel Vertical Amplifier
11 A33 Differential Comparator

201
201
207
207
212
213
214
214
214

THE NEW STANDARD IN DIGITIZING AND ANALOG OSCILLOSCOPES
We set out to create a new line of
scopes that meet some very demanding requirements.
• The bandwidth must be high to meet
present and future measurement needs.
• The architecture should be open and flexible and, thereby, avoid obsolescence. It
should provide hardware and software
modularity, be reliable, and easy to service.
• All functions must be programmable, both
for systems applications and to help with
front panel set-up.
• The user interface should be intuitive, giving easy access to a broad feature set.
• The scopes should offer more channels
and more traces to stay relevant to the
needs of today's design engineers.
• The instruments should be a good value,
containing the best feature set possible in
a moderately priced package.

We are proud to be able to offer this new
line and confident that we accomplished
what we set out to do. This new line of analog and digitizing oscilloscopes sets new
standards in many key areas.
For characterization of waveforms , the
11000 Series offers:
• Higher levels of accuracy than any other
oscilloscope system. This is accomplished
through the use of the unique "Enhanced
Accuracy" mode which provides an automatic self calibration of the oscilloscope's
vertical and horizontal systems against a
built-in stable dc source. Vertical measurement accuracies to ".;;1% may be attained
through the use of Enhanced Accuracy.
The built-in counter/timer in the 11301 and
11302 and the precise digitizing clock in
the 11401 and 11402 provide accuracies in
parts per million for timing measurements.

• Longer record lengths and more waveform memory . Multiple 10,240 point
records and up to 102,400 points of
waveform memory let users digitize and
store more data than ever before without
tying up a computer.
• Unmatched waveform processing and
automatic measurement features to
quickly perform measurements that used
to take hours.
For prototype troubleshooting and debugging, the 11000 Series offers:
• High resolution , exclusive high writing
rate microchannel plate displays for viewing statistical fluctuations , fault conditions or catching glitches.
• A full line of probes and vertical amplifiers that can adapt the scope system to a
broad range of digital and analog signals .

197

11000
SERIES

REFERENCE
For Measurement against a standard, the 11000 Series offers:
• Programmability through either GPIB or RS-232C.
• High measurement throughput to help meet tight production
schedules.
• High reliability to make sure that your system stays up and running.

• On-site Wananty-ptus service options with fast response, and extensive diagnostics help get things back on-line quickly when you
can't afford system down time.

Bandwidth
The 500 MHz microchannel plate 113)2 and 400 MHz bandwidth
11301 Analog Oscilloscopes include a powerful 500 MHz
counter/timer for making exacting timing measurements.

'i::'

-.r=-"--

____ _ .. -

Large screen II:xJl provides clear crisp display of multiple wavefoons. menus and

trace

descriptions.

VieW single shot transients at full
of the 11:xJ2.

5IXJ fv1Hz bandwidth with the micro channel plate CRT

.,.

::::

Z'r ':"

The 11401 Digitimg 0scII0sc0pe is a complete wavefotm digtimg. measmment and
stcxage instrument capable of capturing repetitive wavefoons to 5IXJ M-Iz.

The 11402 Digitizing Oscilloscope has

mum system bandwidth.

PLUG-INS

an of the features of the

11401 with 1 GHz maxi-

MAINFRAME
Digitizer

Executive

Display

Sampler

~~j::t=*m

Time Bases

Controller
CRT Driver
CRT

Acquisition
Memory

801861'P

GPIB/RS-232/Cent
Front Panel

The 114(X) Series digitimg scope architecture applies
wavefotm acquisition. measmment and display.

198

extensive processing power to

TEK

11000
SERIES

REFERENCE

The 1 GHz bandwidth 11402 and 500 MHz
bandwidth 11401 Digitizing Oscilloscopes
are the most complete digitizing scopes
available. They have a unique combination
of high bandwidth, high vertical resolution,
and high accuracy.

Architecture
Hardware modularity is provided through
three plug-in slots in each mainframe. The
analog scopes support two vertical amplifiers and reserve the right compartment for
triggering and other plug-ins. The digitizing
scopes support up to three vertical amplifiers or combinations of verticals and a trigger plug-in. New plug-ins will be added to
support stimulus, triggering, and signal conditioning needs.

Programmability
All functions on all 11000 Series oscilloscopes are programmable. They can be
controlled through either IEEE-488 (GPIB) or
RS-232C interfaces, both of which are standard. The IEEE-488 interface is Tek Sta~
dard Codes and Formats compatible for
ease and consistency of programming.
RS-232C allows the instruments to be easily
controlled by personal computers. Both can
also be used to transfer waveform and
measurement data between the instruments and a large mainframe or, via
modem, transfer data and control instrument settings over a long distance link. A
DMA option on the digitizing scopes
speeds up waveform transfers, thereby improving throughput via the IEEE-488 port.

The software architectures are general and
modular to make it easier to add features.
Software features will be added to extend
the measurement sets of all the mainframes through option ROMs and firmware
updates.

The 11401 and 11402 perform a wide range of amplf
tude, timing, and area/energy measurements. The measurements are automatic, accurate, easily accessible
and clearly annotated for repeatable results.

~~~~~IIIIIIIIIIIII';III:""'~!IIIIII

All 11000 Series oscilloscope functions are programmable via eilher GPiB or RS-232C interfaces. Both are standard, allowing the scopes to easily interface with Pes, workstations,
mainframe computers and instrument controllers.

11000 SERIES MAXIMUM BANDWIDTH MATRIX
Plug-In

11402

11401

11302

11301

11A71 Single Channel, 10 mV/div, SO 0

1 GHz

500 MHz

400 MHz

11A52 Dual Channel, 1 mV/div, 50 0

600 MHz

500 MHz

400 MHz

350 MHz

11A32 Dual Channel, 1 mV/div, 1 MO/SO 0

350 MHz

300 MHz

11A34 Four Channel, 1 mV/div, 1 MO/SOO

300 MHz

2SO MHz

11A33 Differential Comparator, 1 mV/div, 500/1 MO/1 GO

1SO MHz

150 MHz

1SO MHz

199

11000
SERIES

REFERENCE
• Stored waveforms
• Mathematical combinations of live or live
and stored waveforms.
These display features simplify measurements, make new measurements possible
and make the 11000 Series ideal for prototype debugging and troubleshooting on
printed circuit boards and custom ICs
where multiple channels of data need to be
viewed on the same screen.
A Good Value
These scopes deliver higher performance at
a better price than any scopes now
available.

Simply touch up to six measurements and see the results quickly.

User Interface
Clean, consistent, tested and intuitive, the
11000 Series user interfaces make measurements easy. Parallel menus and touch
screens keep the number of buttons and
knobs down to a manageable few. All frequently used controls are conveniently
grouped around the display where the users attention is already focused. There is
no fumbling around a complicated front
panel hunting for the right switch or button.

The touch screen is proven and reliable.
Fingerprints, grease, dust and grime are
not a problem.
The 11000 Series user interfaces provide
the closest link possible between an engineer and his scope.
More Channels
All of the mainframes can display up to
eight active traces, more than any other
scope system.

The analog scopes can display traces
from:
• Up to eight high bandwidth plug-in
channels.
• Two triggerable delayed sweeps or window waveforms.
• A counter view trace .
• Template waveforms stored in memory.
The digitizing mainframes can display eight
traces which may be any combination of:
• Live waveforms from up to 12 high bandwidth channels .
• Window waveforms (similar to delayed
sweeps).

200

High speed transient digitizers are still very
costly and power hungry. The high resolution, high bandwidth AID system in the
11401 and 11402 is a cost effective way to
apply digitizing techniques to a wide variety of measurement problems. The 11402
offers the lowest cost per channel of any
high bandwidth scope in its class.

Enhanced Accuracy may be invoked in any
of three ways: by pressing the front panel
ENHANCED ACCURACY button , by instruction over the GPIB or RS-232, or automatically by the oscilloscope itself after a
configuration or ambient temperature
change since the last time Enhanced Accuracy was invoked.
Enhanced Accuracy permits the specification of much tighter tolerances on dc gain
and timing of the 11000 Series oscilloscope
systems than are feasible on conventional
oscilloscopes. Once Enhanced Accuracy
has been invoked, the instrument will
remain within the Enhanced Accuracy
tolerances through any ambient temperature change of 5°C or less.

The 11301 and 11302 both contain a built-in
500 MHz universal counter/timer. Yet the
11301 mainframe costs only about what
you would pay for a standalone counter
with similar performance. And the microchannel plate 11302 is available for no
more than earlier conventional 500 MHz
scopes without the counter/timer. The combination of the scope and counter/timer
gives users much greater value than any
scope or counter by itself.
Diagnostics with greater reach and broader
coverage than in any other Tek products
make the 11000 Series easier to calibrate
and service. Cost of ownership is low due to
high levels of integration and few moving
parts. High measurement throughput on
both the analog and digitizing scopes help
customers lower their testing costs and
on-site service options keep down time to a
minimum.
Enhanced Accuracy
The 11000 Series oscilloscopes provide
measurement accuracies well beyond
those available in any other current oscilloscope or oscilloscope system. This is accomplished through the unique "Enhanced
Accuracy' mode, which may be invoked
whenever measurement accuracy is a primary consideration.

Each mainframe contains its own stable dc
source. When Enhanced Accuracy is invoked, the instrument goes through a
self-calibration routine which uses this reference to set the dc gain and offset of
each channel of the vertical system (including the plug-ins), the gain and timing of the
horizontal system, and the trigger path's
gain and offset.

Eye paNems can be created for checking bit error rates
on communications systems.

TEK

500 MHz and 400 MHz
ANALOG OSCILLOSCOPES

11000
SERIES

11300 Series
Up to 500 MHz Bandwidth at Probe Tip
Up to 8 Traces Displayed Simultaneously
Menu-Driven Touch-Screen Operation
Automatic Display of Selected Signals
Automatic Time and Amplitude
Measurements
Built-In 500 MHz Universal Counter/Timer
With Counter View
Dual Delayed Sweeps
10 cm/ns Visual Writing Rate (11302)
Large 6.5 Inch Display (11301)
Fully Programmable via IEEE-488 & RS-232C

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Timing Analysis of Complex Signals
Waveform Characterization
Component Evaluation

The 11301 and 11302 are easily the world's
most versatile analog oscilloscopes. Fully
programmable via either IEEE -488 or
RS-232C, with any RS-232 equipped personal computer . They are equally at
home in the most complex automated production test system or in smaller scale
computer-assisted testing and data logging
applications in the engineering environment.

For manual operation, the menu-driven touch
screen operator interface places the 11301
and 11302 a step beyond anything presently
available in convenience of use. Manual control of the instruments , including their
plug-ins and probes, is accomplished by
means of a few push buttons and two userdefinable knobs located in the vicinity of the
cathode ray tube, and the touch panel CRT
screen itself. Operator menus on the screen
guide the user through the selection of the
functions to be performed; selection is made
by touching the designated areas of the
screen.
CRT readout gives displays of oscilloscope
and plug-in settings, as well as numeric
readout of desired measurements; no more
need to count or interpolate betwen graticule divisions. Using IEEE-488 or RS-232C,
up to eight lines of user-generated text (50
characters per line) can be displayed on the
CRT for operator prompts, measurement
annotation , and computer generated
menus. The large CRT screen provides
clear, crisp display of both text and traces.
Wide Choice of Plug-Ins
A choice of five amplifier plug-ins provides
display of up to eight traces at 250 MHz
bandwidth, four traces at 400 MHz, or two
traces at 500 MHz bandwidth. The differential comparator amplifier unit provides exceptionally fast overdrive recovery from signals as high as 8 V at 1 mV/div sensitivity.
The 11301 and 11302 each accept up to
three of the 11000 Series plug-in units. Signals from the amplifier plug-ins may be

directed to either the vertical or horizontal
system of the oscilloscope where they may
be time shared with main or delayed
sweeps. This allows an almost unlimited
number of combinations of X-V and Y-T
traces to be displayed Simultaneously to
provide detailed views of signal relationships. Timed X-V traces may be displayed
through the application of delayed sweeps
to X-V displays.
Each of the inputs on each of the plug-ins is
supported by the new TEKPROBE" interface which , in addition to the high-quality
signal path , also provides probe power for
active probes and a communication link between the probe and the oscilloscope.
High Writing Rate CRT in 11302
The microchannel plate CRT of the 11302
provides 10 cm/ns visual writing rate, bright
enough to view the fastest single shot transient in normal ambient room light. This allows viewing of intermittent glitches in the
midst of bright repetitive signals at the full
bandwidth of the scope.
Built-In 500 MHz Universal Counter/
Timer
The built-in 500 MHz Universal Counter/
Timer, with its 2 ns single-shot resolution,
performs as an integral part of the 11301 /
11302. This combination of high performance counter and high performance oscilloscope greatly simplifies the most difficult
counter/timer measurements and provides
measurement capabilities not possible with
conventional counter/timers. A counter-view
trace indicates to the operator exactly what

201

500 MHz and 400 MHz
ANALOG OSCILLOSCOPES

11000

SERIES

portions of a signal are being measured by
the counter/timer . This completely eliminates the concern that usually accompanies the measurement of complex signals
with a conventional counter, whether what
is being measured is really what the operator thinks is being measured.
The combination of integral oscilloscope
and counter/timer allows you to make
counter/timer measurements on any of 12
plug-in input channels or on the signals at
the A and B External Trigger/Counter Inputs . Use of the A and B External
Trigger/Counter Inputs allows the use of
the counter/timer without tying up the oscilloscope functions of the instrument.
Automatic Display Setup
The Autoset feature provides scaled, triggered display of the selected signal immediately, automatically, with the simple press
of a button on the front panel or at the
probe tip where the user 's attention is
focused .
Automatic Measurements
The press of a front panel pushbutton and
a touch of the touch screen provides automatic time and amplitude measurements,
without further operator intervention. This
automatic measurement sequence can
also be invoked via the probe tip pushbutton, allowing the operator to display

202

the results of up to eight measurements
without removing his hands or attention
from the circuit under test.
Cursors
Both vertical and horizontal cursors can be
displayed to aid in making amplitude and
timing measurements. Cursor scaling permits percentage, dB, and degree comparisons without the need for calculations. The
results of the measurements are always
displayed numerically on the screen, with
appropriate units of measure.
Built-In Time Bases
Two built-i n time bases provide sweep
rates to 500 ps/div. The dual delayed
sweeps provide magnification of any portion of the displayed waveforms and allow
precise comparison of two signals occurring at different times in the same or different signal paths.
Display Versatility
The versatile and convenient trace definition capability of the 11301 and 11302
permits up to eight traces to be displayed
simultaneously in a wide variety of signal
combinations . Signals from separate
plug-ins can be added or subtracted; YT
and XY signals can be displayed
simultaneously.

A nonvolatile time and date clock can be
displayed for documentation of photo-

graphs. The clock setting is constantly
available over the bus for time documentation of accumulated data in automated
testing situations.
Holdoff
Holdoff provides the means of holding off
the occurrence of the main sweep until a
selected amount of time or number of
events has occurred. This capability is essential in inspecting groups of pulses or
events, particularly when they are not synchronized with any controllable framing
pulse.

The 11301 and 11302 offer several modes
of holdoff. Holdoff by time is settable either as a function of main sweep
time/division or in 2 ns increments up to 5
x 10 8 seconds . Holdoff by events is
settable up to 5 x 10S events.
The Countdown Holdoff function allows
the sweep to be triggered on every Nth
event within a pulse train . The companion
Trigger-On-NextlTrigger-On-Previous function allows the user to move forward and
backward through the pulse train in order
to select the desired triggering pOint within
the pulse train. Thus , any pulse within the
pulse train can be inspected in detail and
easily compared to other events occurring
within a circuit at the same time.

TEK

500 MHz and 400 MHz
ANALOG OSCILLOSCOPES

11000

SERIES

11301

INHAJKID

MlTO

PROGRAMMABLE OSCILLOSCOPE

ACC.vaAC;Y

IUYIOI

IfEE ....J "'.2~1

"...

---- ~

...

IUT

:=J ,..
oru.

o
T~IOOE~

~----~=-----------------------------~====~~J
11301 showing two Y-T traces and
bottom of the screen.

two X-Y traces, simultaneously displayed. Vertical control menu shown at the

The Holdoff By Events function permits the
main sweep to run immediately, or be
armed for triggering by another signal
source, after N events following a selected
start event. This function, in effect, permits
four-deep 'stacking' of delaying events: a
start event, followed by a selected number
of holdoff events, followed by a main sweep
triggering event, followed by the running or
triggering of one or both delayed sweeps.
Calibrated Fine Settings
A fine settings mode provides calibrated
sweep timing and vertical sensitivity to 10/0
increments between the conventional 1-2-5
settings. This permits the operator to set
the signal of interest to an integral number
of divisions for simplified comparison of
inputs and outputs of signal attenuators,
multipliers, dividers, etc. It also permits convenient scaling of transducer outputs to oscilloscope graticule lines.
Stored Front Panel Setups
Up to 10 complete front panel setups can
be stored and recalled for immediate set-

up of all instrument controls for repetitive
testing. Manual sequencing of the stored
setups can be accomplished by means of
the pushbutton at the probe tip. This allows the operator to probe from point to
point within a circuit to reset the entire
oscilloscope for each test point without
removing his attention from the device he
is testing.
Reference Waveforms
On-board storage and display of two reference waveforms can provide templates for
quick visual go/no go comparison of complex waveforms. These reference waveforms can be created by a computer or
captured by a waveform digitizer and
downloaded to the oscilloscope's internal
memory.

CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL SYSTEM
System Bandwidth - Determined by mainframe and plug-in (see Bandwidth/Rise Time
matrix on page 199).
Accuracy - Determined by mainframe and
plug-in. See plug-in descriptions.
~Delay Between Channels Adjustable
±500 ps.
Vertical System Delay - At least 20 ns of the
sweep is displayed ahead of the triggering
event.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Main Sweep Timing Range - 5 ns/div to 0.5
s/div in 1-2-5 steps, plus 1% increments between
steps and to 1.0 s/div. X10 Mag extends maximum sweep rate to 0.5 ns/div.
Delayed Sweep Timing Range - 5 ns/div to
0.5 s/div, plus 1% increments between steps
and to 1.0 s/div. X10 Mag extends maximum
sweep rate to 0.5 ns/div.
Main and Delayed Sweep Accuracy (Time/
Div In 1-2-5 Steps) - ±(0.7% of time interval
plus 0.06 div.)
~ Time Accuracy Using Cursors ± (0.5%
of time interval plus 0.03 div.)
~ Time Accuracy Using Delayed Sweep ± (0.3% of time interval plus 0.01 div.)
X-Y Operation - From Center Plug-In: Bandwidth is de to 3 MHz; Phase difference between
X and Y with normal bandwidth IS 10 or less from
dc to 1 MHz, 3 0 or less from 1 MHz to 2 MHz.
TRIGGERING
Minimum p op signal required for stable
triggering.
Dc Coupled - 0.35 div from de to 50 MHz;
increasing to 1.0 div at system bandwidth.
Ac Coupled - 0.35 div from 50 Hz to 50 MHz,
increasing to 1.0 div at system bandwidth.
HF Reject Coupled - 0.5 div from de to 30
kHz.
LF Reject Coupled - 0.5 div from 80 kHz to
50 MHz , increasing to 1.0 div at system
bandwidth.
Triggering sensitivity can be adjusted to reject
unwanted noise components on noiSy signals.
Minimum pop signal required for stable triggering
from A and B external inputs:
Dc Coupled - 20 mV from de to 50 MHz, increasing to 90 mV at system bandwidth.
Ac Coupled - 20 mV from 50 Hz to 50 MHz,
increasing to 90 mV at system bandwidth.
HF Reject Coupled - 28 mV from dc to 30
kHz.
LF Reject Coupled - 28 mV from 80 kHz to 50
MHz, increasing to 90 mV at system bandwidth.
Triggering sensitivity can be adjusted to reject
unwanted noise components on noisy Signals.

Direct Numeric Entry, With Arithmetic
Operators
A touch screen keypad permits immediate
numeric entry of scale factors , holdoff
events, offsets, counter/timer and cursor
null references, etc.

203

500 MHz and 400 MHz
ANALOG OSCILLOSCOPES

11000
SERIES

Count in signal (/ower trace) shows clearly that counter/ timer is miscounting because
of ripple on the top of the signal (upper trace).

HOLDOFF
Holdoff By Time - Varies the minimum amount
of time between the end of a main sweep and the
start of the next; settable over at least a 2O-to-l
range with a minimum of 2.5 !,sec or two times
the main sweep time/division.
Holdoff By 2-ns Step - Varies the minimum
amount of time between the beginning of one
main sweep and the beginning of the next main
sweep; settable in 2 ns increments up to 5 x 1()8
seconds, or in increments of 1% of the main
sweep time/div setting.
Countdown Holdoff - Selects number of main
trigger events between occurrences of main
sweep, settable from 2 to 5 x 1()8. Front panel
Trigger-On-NextfTrigger-On Previous functions allows stepping through events in increments of
one event (GPIB allows selectable increments).
Maximum event frequency: 500 MHz or mainframe/plug-in bandwidth, whichever is less.
Holdoff By Events Delays start of main
sweep for N holdoff events following the occurrence of a start event. One-Start feature allows
repetitive main sweep holdoff by events with only
a single start event. Main or delayed trigger, B
External Trigger/Counter Input, or 2 ns steps defines the holdoff events. Main trigger or A External Trigger/Counter Input defines start event, or
holdoff operation can be self-starting.
Maximum holdoff event frequency when using internal triggers is determined by the bandwidth of
the mainframe/plug-in combination used. Maximum holdoff event frequency through the B External Trigger/Counter Input is 300 MHz. One
Start limits holdoff event frequency to 125 MHz.

Count in signal (/ower) gives confidence that counter/timer is being properly triggered
for accurate measurements.

BUILT-IN COUNTER/TIMER
Modes - Frequency, Period, Width, Ratio NB,
Time A..B, Totalize.
Number ot Digits - Up to 10 (system computes and displays proper number of valid digits
for specific measurement).
Averaging - Selectable in two-decade steps
(1 , 1()2, 104, 1()8, etc.) up to 1010 for frequency,
period, width, ratio, and time A.. B measurements.
Auto Average provides maximum resolution
achievable with a 3 readings/s update rate .
Gating - Via External B input or internal delayed
sweep gate. Minimum extemal gate width: <~ ns.
Counter View - Shaped 1 div p-p display of
anyone or more of the following signals: Counter
In, Gate, Sync Gate, A External Input, B External
Input. Counter view traces are among the maximum eight displayed traces.
Sensitivity - Via External Counter Inputs :
< 100 mV p-p dc to 300 MHz, <500 mV p-p 300
MHz to 500 MHz. Via Internal Trigger Inputs: 2X
sweep triggering sensitivities.
Counter Ret Clock In/Out - Connector on rear
panel allows application of 0 dBm external clock,
of 1 MHz or 10 MHz.
Range LSD -

FREQUENCY
< 1 mHz to >500 MHz.
+2 ns x F2
Greater of N
rounded to the

next higher decimal digit, or 1 count.
_
1.4 x TJE x F2
Resolution - Greater of LSD +
N
or 1 count.
Accuracy -

Range -

LSD -

Resolution ± (F x TBE).

PERIOD
Without Averaging , 2 ns to > 1000 s.

~s rounded to next higher decimal digit.

Resolution _ LSD + 1.4 x ; : .
Nx G
Accuracy - Resolution Error ± TBE x P.

204

RATIO
Range - 10- 11 to 101 1.
Frequency Range - 0.1 Hz to > 500 MHz.
LSD -

Freq A rounded to the next higher
FreqBxN
decimal digit where N refers to A events.

Resolution _ LSD ± 1.4 x TJ~x Freq A
where N refers to A events.

TOTALIZE
Range - 0 to 10 12 counts (scientific notation
used above 10 digits).
Resolution - ± 1 count (up to 1010 digits).
WIDTH
Range - Without Averaging, 2 ns to > 1000 s.
Maximum Repetition Rate - > 200 MHz.
2ns

LSD_

..[N

Resolution ± LSD ± leading edge TJE
± trailing edge TJE.
Accuracy - Resolution ± [Width x TBE ± Hysteresis Error ± TLE x input slew rate at the start
and end points ±2 ns systematic error].
TIME INTERVAL
Range - Without Averaging, 2 ns to 1000 s.
Maximum Repetition Rate - 100 MHz.
LSD _ 2ns

..[N
Accuracy reading

time/div) x

± 1 (LSD

1.4 x

~ +

100 ps

TBE

(0.001% x main sweep

..[N.

STANDARD TIME BASE
Frequency at Calibration - 10 MHz ± 1 Hz.
Temperature Stability - ± ~ Hz, O°C to 5Q°C
(5 ppm).
Aging - < 10 Hz/year (1 ppm).
Adjustment Resolution - 0.5 Hz.

TEK

500 MHz and 400 MHz
ANALOG OSCILLOSCOPES

11000

SERIES

Ltee UL~:: UiIII:

( {'V'vr-;f\rV'{~/
--~\
.'

/.....-~ft\ ~;;,; ~-.", ;:,.,~,.X"v_-,
:'~ ."~ "' ~"'" ..
~.• '.

.' " :""1'
'".~;

~~:
5
,i';~~~F\.
v·s.ee

d Si:u/di
-.. '
~ft.r

0,1111'1· 4~21t1'
".,. 0.' .,' '. . I
Win4•• 1 Nin4..2 D.I.y

". i "

Diu IIi •• '

1130 1 showing dual delayed sweeps intensified on main sweep. Delay control menu
shown at the bottom of the screen.

Dual-trace display on 11301. Horizontal control menu shown at the bottom of the
screen.

11301 showing two signals singly, differentially, and displayed X-Yo L1 deflection
factor and main time base/division set to calibrated RNE sellings.

UTILITY major menu allows operator to set GPIB parameters (above) and RS-232
parameters (below) by means of the 11301/ 11302 touch screen.

HIGH STABILITY TIME BASE (OPTION 1T)
Frequency at Calibration - 10 MHz ±0.2 Hz.
Temperature Stability - ±2 Hz, OOG to 5O o G.
Warm-Up Time - 10 minutes at 25°G to within
0.2 ppm of final frequency.
<1x10- B/day at time of shipping.
Aging <4xlO- B/week after 30 days continuous operation. <1xlO-B/year after 60 days continuous
operation.
Short Term Stability - <1x10'"9 RMS based
on 60 consecutive 1 s measurements.
Adjustment Resolution - 0.2 Hz.
Adjustment Range - Sufficient for 8 years of
aging.

.. L2

__
.
.. 2.• Y

,.......,

5." Y

\..-I

5.• U

,.--

1..-'

,-.....

I...-.i

flfffff,J
V1lLru"..J1rt.f1ArLI1Juu·
.
.
'nnn~nnn~nnnnrnnnnnnnMnMM""

UUUUUUUUUUUUUJUUUUUUUJUUUU~

LI Silt/4iv·

511 aU

".in fiat/diva

see nl

Four-trace display on 11301. Note deflection factor (V/div) of each of the four cha~
nels and the timeidiv of the main sweep.

205

TEK

500 MHz and 400 MHz
ANALOG OSCILLOSCOPES

DEFINITION OF TERMS
ATJE=CT external A input trigger jitter error.
BTJE=CT external B input trigger jitter error.
DTJ=Time base delay time jitter.
EALE=CT external A input level error.
EBLE=CT external B input level error.
F=Frequency of the signal being measured
1

(F=p-).

Hysteresis Error (in s8Conds)=
sensitivity
Input slew rate at the trigger in V/sec
(For negative going transitions with + slope or
positive going transitions with - slope selected.)
G = The number of gate intervals in one
measurement.
LSD = The smallest amount that the display can
change.
N = Number of events in a measurement interval;
selectable in increments of "",1, 1()2, 10", 1oe,
1oe, and 1010. For Auto/Averaging, N is the
greater of one or the number of events in a
200 ms interval. For gated measurements,
N = number of events within the gate interval.
P = The period of the signal being measured

(P='F)'
RESOLUTION = The amount an input signal
must change to be assured of a change on the
display.
TBE=Time base error (see CT time base spec).
TJE=Trigger jitter error (in seconds RMS)=
.J(en12+en22+en32)
]
[ absolute value of input signal slew rate .
At trigger pOint,
en1 =Input Signal RMS noise voltage (see trigger
and external input specs).
en2=RMS noise voltage contributed by the
plug-in.
en3=RMS noise voltage contributed by the mainframe trigger.
TLE=Trigger level error; error resulting from the
actual trigger point being different from
the set trigger point.
EXTERNAL CONNECTORS
Camera Power - 3-pin connector next to CRT
is compatible with Tektronix C-50 Series cameras.
Calibrator Output - Front panel female BNG
connector. Squarewave Mode: 5.0 V or 500 mV
squarewave into open circuit; 10 Hz, 100 Hz,
1 kHz, 10 kHz, 100 kHz; 450 0 output impedance.
Fast Rise Mode: 0.5 V into open circuit, 2 ns transition time into 50 0 ; SO 0 output impedance; sarne
frequencies as Squarewave Mode plus 1 MHz.

11000
SERIES

A and B Extemal Trigger and Counter Inputs
- Front panel female BNC connectors. Input
Impedance: 1 MO.
Trigger Ready Output - Rear panel female
BNC connector. Low State: 0 V to 0.5 V. High
State: +2.4 V to 5.0 V.
Trigger Reset Clock - Rear panel female BNC
connector. Input TIL compatible.
Sweep Gate Output - Rear panel female BNC
connector. Low State: 0 to 0.5 V. High State: 2.4
to 5.0 V.
Counter Ref Clock In/Out - Rear panel BNC
connector. See CounterlTimer description.
Main Sweep Output - Rear panel female BNG
connector. Positive going ramp, 0 V to 5 V, coincident with main sweep: Output Impedance: 950 O.
Z-Axis Input - Rear panel female BNC connector. Positive voltage decreases intensity; +2 V
blanks a maximum intensity trace.
Left Vertical Out - Rear panel female BNC
connector. Output signal amplitude: 100 mVldiv
of displayed trace. Bandwidth: Dc to 100 MHz.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
Standard CRT - 11301 : 8 x 10 div (1.22 crn!
div); P31 phosphor. 11302: 8 x 10 div (1.0 crn!div);
P31 phosphor. 11302 Writing Speed: 10 div/ns
single-shot visual writing speed in 20 foot candle
ambient illumination.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage - 90 V to 132 V ac, and 180 V to
2SOVac.
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption - 240 W.
ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY
Temperature - Operating: O·C to +SO·C. Nonoperating: - 45·C to + 75°C.
Humidity - Operating and Nonoperating: Up to
95% relative humidity, up to SO·C.
Altitude, Vibration, Shock, and Bench Handling - Meets MIL-T-288OOC, Type III, Class 5.
Electromagnetic Compatibility - Meets
MIL-T-2BlmC; MIL-STD-461B; FCC Part 15, Subpart
J, Class B; VDE ~71 /6.78 Class B; CE-Q1 Part 4,
with exceptions; CE-03 Part 4, Curve 1; CE-03 Part
4, Curve 4, Navy, NB, BB (with exceptions); CS-Q1
Part 7; CS-Q2 Part 4 (with exceptions); CS-Q6 Part 5;
RE-Q1 Part 4 (with exceptions); RE-Q2 Part 4; RS-Q1
Part 4; RS-03 Part 7 (limited to 1 GHz).
Safety - Listed UL 1244; CSA Bulletin 5568,
September 1973; Tektronix self-certification to
comply with IEC 348 recommendations.

•

11301

Olmen.lon.

Width. with handle
Height. with feet
Depth

447
Zl9

581

Welght. _

Net

18.1
21.8

Shipping

206

RKkrnount

11302
In

17.6
9.4
22.9

447
Zl9

581

17.6
9.4
22.9

40.0
48.0

20.0
23.6

44.0
52.0

$8,550

Includea: Operator manual (070-6104-00); user reference guide (070-6106-00) ; user pocket reference
(070-6105-()()).

11302 500 MHz Programmable
Analog Oscilloscope With Microchannel Plate CRT

$12,950

Includea: Same as 11301 .
OPTIONS
Option 1C - Adds four additional rear-tofront feedthroughs to the existing standard
four; total of eight.

+$150

Option 1R - Rackmount
Includea: Hardware, tooling, and instructions
for converting bench model to rackmount
configuration.

+$250

Option 1T -

+$325

High stability Countermmer.

WARRANTY-PLUS SERVICE PLANS
SEE PAGE 498
Contact your local Sales Engineer for prices.
S0 - On-Site Product Installation and Set-Up.
S1 - 1 Year On-Site Service.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
SERVICE MANUALS
11301 (Volume I) Maintenance. Order 070-6107-00"
(Volume II) Diagnostics. Order 070-6106-00"
(Volume III) Diagrams and Par1s Usts.
Order 070-61()9-()()"
11302 (Volume I) Mainlenance. Order 070-611000"
(Volume II) Diagnostics. Order 070-6111-00"
(Volume III) Diagrams and Par1s Usts.
Order 070-6112-00-'
Cables(GPlB) 2 m. Order 012-{)991-OO
(RS-232) 10 ft . Order 012-0011-00
Blenk Penel - For filling empty plug-in compar1ments. Order 01&0029-00
DIGITIZINO CAMERA SYSTEM
DCS01 - Digitizes waveforms or single-shot
signals to the full bandwidth of the 11302 to
allow analysis with a personal computer.

$150
$100
$95

$5,300

See page 442.
Recommended Probes - See page 215.
Recommended Cert - K217. See page 462.
-, To order, contllCt your local T9Ictronix Sales Office.

Recommended Cemeres -

TRAINING
Tektronix Inatrument Group Cuatomer Treining ottere operation end epplicatlon treinlng to help you
get tull velue ou1 ot your Instrumentation investment. Intormetlon la on pagea 195-198_ For turther
Intormetlon, or to enroll, cell us et 503-642-8013
(collecl)_

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
In.lnlment

ORDERING INFORMATION
11301400 MHz Programmable
Analog Oscilloscope

482
222
548
kg

19.0
8.8
21 .6
Ib

TEK

1 GHz and 500 MHz
DIGITIZING OSCILLOSCOPES

11000
SERIES

The 11401 Digitizing Oscilloscope with 5aJ MHz System bandwidth.

11400 Series

1 GHz and 500 MHz Bandwidth
Eight Channels of Display and Acquisition
Plug-In Modularity
Waveform Processing and Automatic Pulse
Parameters
Multiple 10,240 Point Waveform Records
Accepts Differential, High Impedance and
50 {} Input Amplifiers
Greatly Simplified Access to Features
Fully Programmable via GPIB and RS-232C

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Waveform Characterization
Prototype Troubleshooting and Debugging
Measurement Against a Standard

The 11401 and 11402 are the first in a new line of high bandwidth, programmable digitizing oscilloscopes. The
1140 II I 1402 are ideal for digitizing and accurately measuring repetitive waveforms. 10-14 bit vertical resolution,
20 MSl s AID conversion system provides a cost-effective solution to a wide range of measurement problems.

The 11401 and 11402 are the first in a new
line of digitizing oscilloscopes. These versatile scopes, with their array of new supporting plug-ins and probes, solve measurement problems equally well on a
designer's bench or in a programmable

207

11000
SERIES

1 GHz and 500 MHz
DIGITIZING OSCILLOSCOPES

The 11402 Digitizing Oscilloscope with 1 GHz System bandwidth.

test system. Digital designers will benefit
from flexible triggering features and an eight
channel display. Analog and power supply
designers can apply extensive waveform
processing to signals acquired through high
performance differential and single ended
amplifiers. 11000 Series digitizing scopes
can follow your designs into production. Full
programmability via either IEEE-488 or
RS-232C and features like a DMA controller
for fast waveform transfers make these
scopes a perfect fit for systems. 11000
Series digitizing oscilloscopes set new standards in performance.
Live Display of Up to Eight Traces
The 11401/11402 each support three vertical
amplifier plug-ins. This means you can acquire up to eight channels of data at
300 MHz, up to six channels of data at
600 MHz or up to three channels of data at
1 GHz. You can, of course, mix and match
the plug-ins to design the system that works
best for you. Eight traces can be displayed
at anyone time so that you can get the
whole picture on one screen. The update
rate is so fast that the 11401 and 11402
have the look and feel of analog scopes.
High Vertical and Horizontal Resolution
The 11401 and 11402 uniquely combine
wide bandwidth with 10 ps horizontal resolution and 10 bit vertical resolution (vertical

208

resolution can be increased to 14 bits when
signals are averaged). Other vendors have
made a tradeoff; bandwidth for vertical resolution or vertical resolution for bandwidth.
The 11401/11402 give you both for making
demanding voltage and timing measurements in one box. In addition, the 11401/
11402's trigger-to-trigger measurement feature delivers 200 ps resolution on single shot
time A~B measurements and can even provide 10 ps resolution with averaging .
Trigger-to-trigger measurements of this
nature are only available on the 11401/11402
and a few expensive standalone counter
timers. Also, window records can be used
to increase horizontal resolution on specific
segments of main records providing a clear
picture of signal details.
Multiple Long Record Lengths
The 11401 / 11402 can acquire multiple
records of up to 10,240 points each. No other scope can capture as much data at once
on repetitive waveforms. The mainframes
can contain up to 102,400 points of waveform memory with Option 20. Long records
and large storage capacity combine to let
users gather data over relatively long periods of time with high resolution and improve
measurement accuracy. One doesn't need
a computer to log waveform data. Waveforms can be stored on-board the scope for
later analysis.

Versatility for a Wide Range of
Applications
Five new plug-ins and three new probes
bring outstanding versatility to the 11401/
11402. The measurement system and
waveform processing functions lead to
quick solutions to a wide variety of voltage,
time , area and energy problems . The
1 GHz 11402 can process and measure signals from high bandwidth 50 {} amplifiers,
high impedance amplifiers and differential
amplifiers. 1 mV sensitivity and 500 V maximum input voltage let us~rs capture small
signals from transducers or monitor ac
power lines. Fast overdrive recovery and up
to 2000 divisions of dynamic range give
these scopes the power to look at even the
smallest detail on difficult to capture
waveforms.
Unparalleled Ease of Use
The 11401 and 11402 use Simple parallel
menus and touch screen to give easy
access to their measurement and display
features. All but a few of the but10ns and
knobs have been eliminated in favor of a
system that only presents selections when
they are valid and/or useful. An autoset
function sets up the scope for you based
upon the signal characteristics of the
selected trace. This can be activated from

TEK

1 GHz and 500 MHz
DIGITIZING OSCILLOSCOPES

11000

SERIES

The 11401 and 11402 can display up to eight traces
from a variety of sources. Display eight channels of live
waveforms for timing analysis on digital systems. Or display combinations of live and stored waveforms.

Multiple waveform parameter measurements can be
performed and are updated continuously. A compare
and reference measurement mode allows measurement
results to be compared to a standard. and the difference of two results to be displayed.

Two built·in time bases provide the functionality of delaying and delayed sweeps in analog scopes. The main
time base defines the oversllacquisition interval and the
window time base sJlows high resolution acquisition of
smsJl portions of complex waveforms.

the probe tip, allowing for hands off operation of the scope. Autoset frees the operator to concentrate on the measurement
problem and the probe connection . The
most commonly used functions are no
deeper than a second menu level. Icons let
you assign the knobs to waveform size and
position no matter what operating mode you
are in. Pop-up menus present choices and
fold down when those selections are made.
One button hard copy generation is made
possible by the use of a standard Centronix
port and software drivers compatible with
Tektronix 4644 and low cost Epson dot matrix printers. Overall, the operation of the
11401/11402 is intuitive. The instrument can
be used easily even if it is not used every
day. Acquisition, measurement and documentation is as simple as six touches: Autoset, measure, measurements, rise, exit,
hardcopy. It doesn't get any simpler.

• Prototype Troubleshooting and
Debugging
Use two each, four channel amplifiers
and a two channel high bandwidth amplifier. This configuration gives you eight
channels of acquisition for timing analysis
and two high bandwidth channels for exacting pulse response measurements.
• Power Supply Evaluation
Use three differential amplifiers to determine efficiency and stability and to measure noise and ripple.
• Medical or Mechanical Measurements
Use two each, four channel plug-ins for
eight channels of data acquisition and a
differential amplifier for digitizing small signals from transducers.

On-Site Serviceability
These scopes are card modular, they have
extensive self-test and diagnostic routines
and they have reliability built-in. On-site
Warranty-Plus service options help you keep
the instruments up and running when down
time might otherwise halt your production
line. Tektronix service technicians can be at
your facility repairing these products within
eight working hours if you are within 75 miles
of designated U.S. service centers.

Plug-In Modularity
The 11401 and 11402 are compatible with
five different vertical amplifiers. Each will accept three of these amplifiers in its plug-in
compartments. You can configure a scope to
meet your particular needs, for example:
• Timing Measurements on High Speed
Logic
Use three 11 A71 s in the 11402 for three
1 GHz bandwidth channels.
• Characterization of Waveforms in a Lab
Select an 11 A52 for two high bandwidth
50 n channels, an 11A33 for high bandwidth differential measurements, and an
11 A34 for four high impedance channels.

The Most Accurate Instruments of
Their Kind
The 11401 and 11402 are the most accurate
high bandwidth scopes on the market. They
combine the timing accuracy inherent in digital time bases with 1% vertical accuracy. The
Enhanced Accuracy feature prompts the
user to start self-calibration routines whenever temperature or configuration changes
warrant it. You can even assign the
11401/11402 to start a self-calibration automatically. Time base accuracy is 100 ps
+ .002% of the time interval. The 11401 and
11402's accurate, automatic measurements
can replace dedicated counter/timers and ac
voltmeters. Devices and subassemblies can
be tested to tighter tolerances, improving
end product performance and quality.

All New Probe Interface
We've set a new standard for probe interfacing. Signal and probe power connections
are all made at the amplifier input eliminating extra probe power lines. We can support
as many active probes as you have channels. A smart serial interface between the
probe and the scope lets you stop worrying
about the proper termination impedance; it
is set automatically. You can autoset the
scope or sequence through a series of front
panel set-ups all from the probe 10 button.
This leaves your hands free to probe your
circuit. A full complement of active and passive probes with this new interface is ready
to assist in the solution to your measurement problems .
Choose Your Computer Interface
The 11401 and 11402 have both IEEE-488
and RS-232C interfaces as standard features for data transfer and instrument control. The RS-232C port lets you control the
instrument with a PC, upload or download
waveforms from a workstation or main

209

11000
SERIES

1 GHz and 500 MHz
DIGITIZING OSCILLOSCOPES

High bandwidth allows capture and measurement of
fast rise times. Measurements can be customized and
annotated to clearly show where and-how the measurement is lJeing made.

A high resolution display with Point Accumulate Mode
BIong with powerful triggering makes it much easier to

frame, or run diagnostics over a modem.
GPIB and RS-232C menus let you match interface parameters with a controller,
modem or host. If speed is a consideration
the parallel interface provided by the
IEEE-488 port should be used. A DMA option can be added to speed up GPIB data
transfers even further. Whichever bus is
chosen, the instruments respond to a logical set of Tektronix Standard Codes and
Formats commands that make it easy to
write your test procedures.

it the automatic measurement to a portion
of a displayed trace. Users can set proximal, distal and mesial levels to customize
timing measurements. Up to six measurement results can be displayed and continuously updated as the data changes. This
lets users make adjustments and see the results quicker than ever before. A direct hard
copy output is provided that includes time
and date of the measurement for archiving.

Accurate, Automatic Measurements
The only reason oscilloscopes exist is for
making measurements. The 11401 and 11402
perform waveform processing functions,
pulse parameter analysis, cursor functions
and trigger-to-trigger measurements that
combine to cover a full range of measurement needs. A special annotation mode
shows where measurements are being made
on the trace so users can feel confident that
they are on target. Dot cursors can be split
between two waveforms to make propagation delay measurements or compare voltages. Measurement zones can be set to lim-

capture and display common digital fault conditions like
metastable states, glitches and race conditions.

A Measureable Advance in Oscilloscope Technology
Higher bandwidths, better resolution, more
accuracy, more versatility, hardware and
software modular, easier to use and service, the 11000 Series sets new standards
in digitizing oscilloscopes.
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Accuracy With Enhanced Accuracy - Depends on plug-in unit.
Equivalent Time Bandwidth - Depends on
plug-in used. See matrix on page 199.
Vertical Resolution 10 bits (1024 levelS.)
Resolution can be increased to 14 bits (16384 levels) using signal averaging.

Direct hard copy output to dot matrix printers is provided through
and date stamped for archiving.

210

a standard Centronics port. Hard copies are time

Powerful wavefoon processing functions let users defm
traces such as the power wavefoon shown above. The top
wavefoon is a voltage wavefoon and the bottom wavefoon
is a power wavefoon created by squaring the voltage
wavefoon and dividing it by a load resistance.

HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
TIme Bases - Two identical built-in time bases.
Record Duration - 5.12 ns to 1024 s in 1-2-5
sequence.
Time Base Accuracy - 100 ps +0.002% of
measurement interval.
Record Length - 512 points to 10,240 points.
Sampling Rate - 20 MS/s maximum.
Main Record Positioning - Position of the
main record with respect to the trigger point of
the main record . Pretrigger: 1 record duration.
Posttrigger: 1 record duration. Resolution: 1 main
record point.
Windows - In addition to the main record,
either one or two window records may be acquired and displayed. The window records may
be of a different length (duration) and may have a
smaller time/div than the main record. If two window records are used, they have the same duration and time/div settings and can be positioned
independently.
Window Record POSitioning - The window records are positioned relative to a window trigger
point which may be positioned relative to the
main record's trigger point delayed by either time
or events.
Precision Time Measurement - The time between the beginning of the MAIN record trigger
and the WINDOW trigger can be measured precisely, even if each trigger only occurs once. Repetitive events allow this measurement to be averaged for better resolution and accuracy. Single
Trigger Resolution: 200 ps. Repetitive Resolution:
10 ps, after 100 averages. Accuracy: 100 ps
+0.002% of record duration.
TRIGGERING SYSTEM
Range - ± Full screen.
Level Accuracy - Within 1% of full screen (10
LSBs).
Coupling and Sensitivity Dc Coupled: 0.35 div from dc to 50 MHz, increasing to 1 div at 500 MHz.
Noise Reject Coupled: 1.2 div or less from dc to
50 MHz, increasing to 3 div at 500 MHz.

TEK

1 GHz and 500 MHz
DIGITIZING OSCILLOSCOPES

11000

SERIES

The 11401 and 11402 offer a unique combination of accurate. timing and accurate amplitude measurements in
one instrument.

Single or dual 10 x 10 dMsion axes may be brought up
for waveform display. Each axis represents a full 10 bit
digitizing window.

The 11401 and 11402 are easily integrated into automated test systems. OptionS for rack conversion. rear to
front signal routing and DMA transfer of waveform data
and measurement results makes the 11401111402 ideal
for systems applications.

Ac Coupled: 0.35 div from 60 Hz to 50 MHz increasing to 1 div at 500 MHz. Attenuates signals
below SO Hz.
HF Reject Coupled: 0.5 div from dc to 30 kHz.
LF Reject Coupled: 0.5 div from 80 kHz to
SO MHz, increasing to 1 div at 500 MHz.
Holdoft Range - 500 ns to 10 s.

Electromagnetic Compatibility - Meets
MIL-T-28rolC; MIL-STD-461B; FCC Part 15, Subpart
J, Class B; VDE 0871 /6.78 Class B; CE01 Part 4,
with exceptions; CE{)3 Part 4, Curve 1; CE{)3
Part 4, Curve 4, Navy, NB, BB (with exceptions);
CS-()1 Part 7; CS-()2 Part 4 (with exceptions); CS~
Part 5; RE-()1 Part 4 (with exceptions); RE-()2 Part 4;
RS-()1 Part 4; RS{)3 Part 7 (limited to 1 GHz).
Safety - Listed UL 1244; CSA Bulletin 5568,
September 1973; Tektronix self-certification to
comply with IEC 348 recommendations.

INTERNATIONAL POWER PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 - Universal Euro 220 V. 50 Hz.
Option A2 - UK 240 V. 50 Hz.
Option A3 - Australian 240 V. 50 Hz.
Option A4 - North American 240 V. 60 Hz.
Option A5 - Switzerland 220 V. 50 Hz.

MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
Waveform Processing Functions - Waveform Functions: Differentiate, integrate, interpolate, smooth, average, and envelope. Arithmetic
Operators: Plus, minus, multiply, divide, square
root , logn, absolute value, signum, exp o
Measurement Set - Amplitude Measurements: Min, max, mid mean, peak-peak, RMS.
Timing Measurements: Rise, fall , width, delay1 ,
main .. window , period , frequency . Area and
Energy: Area + , Area -, energy. Cursors: Single or dual dots, split or paired mode, horizontal
and vertical bars, measurement zone delimiters.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
Standard CRT - 9 inch diagonal, monochrome,
magnetic deflection . Vertical raster scan
orientation.
Standard Phosphor - GH (P31).
Video Resolution - 552 horizontal by 704 vertical displayed pixels.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges - 90 V RMS to 132 V
RMS. 180 V RMS to 250 V RMS.
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption - 320 W.
ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY
Temperature Operating: DoC to +sooC.
Nonoperating: -40°C to + 75°C.
Humidity - Operating and Nonoperating: Up to
95% relative humidity, up to +50°C.
Altitude, Vibration, Shock, Bench Handling
- Meets MIL-T-288OOC, Type III, Class 5.

WARRANTY-PLUS SERVICE PLANS

SEE PAGE 496
Contact your local Sales Engineer for prices.
50 - On-Site Product Installation and Set-Up.
S1 - 1 Year On-Site Service.

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Stand.rd In.trument

llenchtop

Dlmen.lon.

Width
Height
Depth

238
599

448

17.6
9.4
23.6

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

R.ckmount
mm

483
222

550

19.0
8.8
21 .6

Welghta""

Net
Shipping

20
23.6

41 .6
58.4

27.8
31.4

64.8

ORDERING INFORMATION

11402 1 GHz Programmable Digitizing
Oscilloscope
$15,500
Include.: Same as 11401 .
OPTIONS
Option 1C -

Option 1R - Rackmount.
Include.: Hardware, tooling, and instructions

+$200
+$250

Option 20 -

+$800

Option 40 -

DMA Controller. Increases
transfer speed over GPIB. Improves the overall
throughput of the scope system .

$150
$100
$70

Blenk Penel -

For filling empty plug-in compartments. Order 016-0829-00

$95

Extender Boerd - Order 067-1297-00:'
Herd Copy Unit - Tektronix 4644 Dot Matrix
$1,350

Printer

Recommended Cemere. - See page 442.
Recommended Probe. - See page 215.
Recommended Cert - K217. See page 462.
., To on:Jer. con/set your local Tektronix SsJes Office.

$495

SOFTWARE SUPPORT

For information on utility artd application software. see
page 359 or consult your local sales or applications
engineer.

for converting bench model to rackmount
configuration.
Memory Expansion. Expands
total waveform memory to 102.400 points for
storage of waveform records.

Ceble. -

OrderOl2~

$13,000

Include.: Operator guide (070-6103-00); operator reference (070-5791 -00) : operator pocket reference
(070-625&00): power cord (16HX)66-00).

Cable Feedthroughs. Adds
eight rear-to-front feedthroughs.

(Volume I) Maintenance. Order 070-610000· '
(Volume II) Diagnostics artd Troubleshooting.
Order 07D-610HlO·'
(Volume III) Diagrams and Parts Ust.
Order 070-6102{)()· '
(GPtB) 2 m. Order 01Nl991-OO
(RS-232C) 10 It. Order 012-0011-00
(Centronics) 10 It for hard copy output.

11401 500 MHz Programmable
Digitizing Oscilloscope

SERVICE MANUALS

11401/11402 -

TRAINING
Tektronix Inatrument Group Cu.tomer Training offer. operation end epplication training to help you
get full velue out of your In.trumentetion inve.tment See pege 195-196 for Informetion or call
(503) 642-8013 (collect).

+$300

211

TEK

WIDEBAND
AMPLIFIERS

11000 Series Plug-Ins
Single Trace (11A71)

11000
SERIES

11A71

Accuracy dc accuracy:
With 11301 /11302: ± (0.9% + 0.05 div).
With 11401 /11402: ±(0.7% + O.OOdiv).
Dc Balance: ±0.2 div.
Input Impedance - 50 {l ± 2% ; VSWR
<1 .45:1, dc to 1 GHz.
Input Coupling Modes - Ac, dc, off.
Ac Low Frequency -3dB Point - 1 kHz.
Offset Range - ± 10 divisions, 0.025 division
resolution , all deflection factors.
Max Input Voltage - 50 () input automatically
disconnects when the signal exceeds safe limits.
Manual reset.
Typical Noise (RMS) - 0.Q1 div.
~ Volts

11 ...71 ""PUFIfR

Dual Trace (11A32, 11A52)
Differential (11 A33)
Four Channel (11A34)
Up to 500 MHz Bandwidth (With 11302)
Up to 1 GHz Bandwidth (With 11402)
1 mV IDiv Deflection Factor
Calibrated Offset With Fast Overdrive
Recovery
Switch able Input Impedances

Wide bandwidth, unsurpassed accuracy,
clean response, low noise, and calibrated
dc offset with fast overdrive recovery characterize the amplifier plug-in units available
for use with the Tektronix 11000 Series oscilloscopes . The 11A71 provides 1 GHz
bandwidth in the 11402 digitizing mainframe and up to 500 MHz bandwidth in the
11302 analog mainframe. The matrix on
page 199 shows the bandwidth and rise
time of each of the amplifier plug-in units in
each of the four 11000 Series mainframes.
Control of the 11000 Series plug-ins is accomplished through the mainframe controls , either manually or over the IEEE-488
or RS-232C bus. The only control on the amplifier plug-ins is a single pushbutton for each
channel. This button is used only to tum the
display of the associated channel on and off;
it has no effect on the availability of the input
signal to the triggering system.
Each of the input channels on all amplifier
plug-ins uses the new TEKPROBE~ interface. This interface allows the mainframe to
supply power to active probes, to sense the
type (and , with some probes , the serial
number) of the probe, to supply offset voltage to probes so equipped, to detect activation of the probe's 10 pushbutton, and to
provide other communication between
probe and oscilloscope as appropriate to
the type of probe. A serial data line in the
TEKPROBE* interface provides the means
for a high level of communication with current and future special purpose probes.
A sixth plug-in under development will expand the triggering capability of 11000 Series scopes far beyond that available in any
current oscilloscope. This unit provides the
means of triggering on a wide range of intermittent signal anomalies present in any of
up to eight signals. This will permit the user
to examine circuit conditions which exist
only during aberrant circuit behavior unobscured by "normal" signals. This specialized
triggering plug-in will also permit timed combinational triggering on up to eight applied
signals, preconditioned by plug-in amplifiers
within the same mainframe.

212

ORDERING INFORMATION

11A71 Single Channel Vertical
Amplifier
Option 26 -Includes one P6231 probe:'

11A71
Dc to 1 GHz Bandwidth (in 11402)
Single-Trace
10 mV IDiv to 1 V IDiv Calibrated Deflection
Factor

WARRANTY-PLUS SERVICE PLANS
SEE PAGE 496
Contact your local Sales Engineer for prices.
50 - On-Site Product Installation and Set-Up.
S1 - 1 Year On-Site Service.
52 - 2 Years On-Site Service.
53 - 3 Years On-Site Service.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

± 10 Div Offset

Service Manual -

50 0 Input Impedance

The single channel 11A71 is the highest
bandwidth amplifier currently available for
the Tektronix 11000 Series mainframes. It
provides 1 GHz bandwidth in the 11402
digitizing mainframe and 500 MHz bandwidth in the 11302 analog mainframe.
Dc offset can be set to 40 steps per division
over a range of ± 10 div at all sensitivities.

CHARACTERISTICS

11402

Deflection Factor 1-2-5 sequence.

$2,700

Includes: Operator manual supplement.

10 mV/div to 1 V/div in

Order 07o-6289{)()" ,

Recommended Probe - P6231 lOX 1.5 GHz
active probe. See page 215.
., To on:Jer. oontact yar lOcal TBktrorrx SsJss Office.

$410

TEK

WIDE BAND
AMPLIFIERS

11000
SERIES

11A52
l1A52

T' 10mV

350 MHz

400 MHz

500 MHz

roJMHz

500 MHz

SmV to 9.95mV

350 MHz

400 MHz

450 MHz

2mV to 4.98mV

:DJMHz

350 MHz

400 MHz

1 mV to 1.99mV

200 MHz

250 MHz

213

TEK

TWO AND FOUR AMPLIFIERS
DIFFERENTIAL COMPARATOR

11A32/11A34

11000
SERIES

11A32

Dc to 350 MHz Bandwidth (11A32 in 11402
Mainframe)

llA32

11A33

11A34
TWO CHMINEL AMPlRR

llA34

Dual Trace (11A32) or Four Trace (11A34)

FOUR D-tANNEL MMllIf1ER

CHI

CH2

CH3

1 mV /Dlv to 10 V /Div Calibrated Deflection
Factors In 1 % Increments
Switchable 50 0 or 1 MO Input Impedance
High Resolution Calibrated Dc Offset
Fast Overdrive Recovery

The 11A32 and 11A34 amplifier plug-in
units are virtually identical to one another
except for the number of channels . The
11A32 is a dual-trace unit, and the 11A34 is
a four-trace unit. The bandwidth of the
11 A32 is slightly higher than that of the
11 A34 in each of the four 11000 Series
mainframes.
Two built-in four-pole bandwidth limit filters
(100 MHz and 20 MHz) may be activated to
reduce unwanted high frequency noise at
24 dB/octave for each channel.
Both coarse and fine deflection factors
steps are fully calibrated. At 1 mV/div, the
high resolution calibrated dc offset has a
setability of 25j.LV and a range of ± 1 V
(equivalent to 16 bits), giving an effective
screen height of 2OX) div and permitting absolute dc measurement accuracies to
±O.4%.

CHARACTERISTICS
Number of Channels Four.
Bandwidth - 11A32
VoIIa/dlY

11301

11A32: Two; 11A34:

11302

11401

11402

> 10mV

:m'-"l-lz

350'-"I-Iz

4OO'-"I-Iz

5 mV to 9.95 mV

:m'-"l-lz

3llMHz

35O'-"I-Iz

4OO'-"I-Iz

2mV to 4.98mV

250'-"I-Iz

3ll'-"l-lz

:m'-"l-lz

1 mV to 1.99mV

2OO'-"I-Iz

250'-"I-Iz

Bandwidth -

11A34

VoIIa/dIY

11301

11302

11401

11402

>10mV

250'-"I-Iz

3ll'-"l-lz

:m'-"l-lz

5 mV to 9.95 mV

250 MHz

250'-"I-Iz

:mMHz

2 mV to 4.98 mV

2OO'-"I-Iz

250'-"I-Iz

1 mV to 1.99 mV

2OO'-"I-Iz

200 MHz

2OO'-"I-Iz

Calibrated Deflection Factors - Coarse
steps: 1 mV/div to 10 V/div in 1-2-5 sequence.
Rne steps: Between coarse steps in 1% increments of next more-sensitive coarse step.
Accuracy AVolts dc accuracy: With 11301 /11302: ±(1 .0%
+ 0.04 div). With 11401 /11402: ± (0.9% + 0.012
div).
Dc Balance, 1 mV/div to 99.5 mV/div: With 11301
and 11302: ±(1 .0mV + 0.13div). With 11401
and 11402: ± (1 .0 mV + 0.10 div).

CH1

~ CH'

CH2

CH4

Offset Accuracy, 1 mV/div to 99.5 mV/div (± 1 V
range): ±(0.2% + 0.5 mV).
For absolute dc accuracy of single point measurements using offset, add the Offset Accuracy
and Dc Balance terms.
Offset Range 1 mV/drv to 99.5 mV/div: ± 1 V; Resolution: 2fJ p.V.
100 mV/div to 0.995 V/div: ± 10 V; Resolution:
250p.V.
1 V/div to 10 V/div: ± 100 V; Resolution: 2.5 mY.
Overdrive Recovery 1 mV/div to 99.5 mV/div: To within ± (0.3% +
0.1 div) within 50 ns from ± 2 V step.
100 mV/div to 995 mV/div: To within ± 1% within
50 ns from ± 20 V step.
1 V/div to 10 V/div: To within ± 1% within 50 ns from
±200V step.
Typical Noise (RMS) 1 mV/div to 1.99 mVldiv: 0.12 div.
2 mV/div to 4.98 mV/div: 0.06 div.
4 mV/div to 9.95 mV/div: 0.025 div.
10 mV/div to 10 V/div: 0.014 div.
Input Impedance - Switchable 1 MO in parallel
with 15 pF or 50 0 ± 0.5%.
Input Coupling Modes - Ac, dc and off.
Ac Coupling Low Frequency - 3 dB Point 10 Hz or less (1 MO input impedance).
Maximum Input Yoltage - 1 MO: 500 V (dc +
peak ac). 50 0 : Input automatically disconnects
when the input signal exceeds safe limits. Manual
reset.

ORDERING INFORMATION
11A32 Two Channel Vertical Amplifier $2,025
Includes: Operator manual supplement.

11A34 Four Channel Vertical Amplifier $3,525
Includes: Operator manual supplement.
OPTIONS
Option 22 -

Includes two P6134 probes: '

Option 23 -

Includes four P6134 probes: '

OPTIONAL ACCESSORY
Service Menuel (11A32) Order 070-6115-000 ,
(11A34) Order 070-611&00 0 ,
"' To order, COfItact your local Tektronix Sales Office.

214

11A33
Differential Comparator
Dc to 150 MHz Bandwidth
1 mY/ Div to 10 V/ Div Calibrated Deflection
Factors in 1 % Increments
Yery High Resolution Calibrated Dc Offset
16000 Division Effective Screen Height
High Common Mode Rejection
Fast Overdrive Recovery From Large Input
Signals
Selectable 50 0, 1 MO, or 1 GO Input
Impedance

The 11A33 Differential Comparator plug-in is
a single channel differential amplifier with
high common-mode rejection ratio and fast
overdrive recovery from very large signals.
As a differential amplifier, common mode input voltage range is ±8 Vat 1 mV/div. As a
comparator, the built-in comparison voltage
(Vc) is used to measure the fine structure of
very large Signals, such as the settling time
of a digital-to-analog converter, with unprecedented accuracy and resolution.
Maximum bandwidth in the 11301 , 11302,
11401, and 11402 mainframes is 150 MHz.
Two built-in four-pole bandwidth limit filters
(100 MHz and 20 MHz) may be activated to
reduce unwanted high frequency noise at
24 dB/octave for each channel.
Both coarse and fine deflection factors are
fully calibrated. At 1 mV/div, the high resolution comparison voltage has a setability of
25 j.LV throughout its ± 8 V range (equivalent
to 19 bits), giving an effective screen height
of 16,000 div and permitting absolute dc
measurement accuracies of ± 0.2%.

TEK

11000

SERIES

PROBES

CHARACTERISTICS
Number of Channels - One.
Bandwidth - Dc to 150 MHz in 11301 , 11302,
11401 , and 11402 mainframes.

Calibrated Deflection Factors -

Coarse
steps: 1 mV/div to 5 V/div in 1-2-5 sequence. Fine
steps: Between coarse steps in 1% increments of
next more-sensitive coarse step.
Accuracy - ~Volts dc accuracy: With 113011
11302: ±(1 .4% + O.04div). With 11401 /11402:
±(1.2% + 0.01 div).
Dc Balance, 1 mV/div to 99.5 mV/div: With 11301
and 11302: ± (0.5 mV + 0.13 div). With 11401
and 11402: ± (0.5 mV + 0.10 div).
Vc Accuracy, 1 mV/div to 99.5 mV/div (8 V range):
±0.15% + 0.6mV).

Vc Range1 mV/div to 99.5 mV/div: ±8 V; Resolution: 25 p.V.
100 mV/div to 0.995 V/div: ±80 V; Resolution:
250p.V. 1 V/div to 10V/div: ±5OOV; Resolution:
2.5mV.

Overdrive Recovery 1 mV/div to 99.5 mV/div: To within ±0.2% within
30 ns from ± 8 V step.

Typical Noise (RMS) -

1 MO Differential PasSive Probes

1 mV/div to 1.99 mV/div: 0.24 div.
2 mV/div to 4.98 mV/div: 0.12 div.
5 mV/div to 9.95 mV/div: 0.05 div:
10 mV/div to 19.9 V/div: 0.025 div.
20 mVdiv to 10 V/div: 0.015 div.

P623110X, 4500 Active Probe

Common Mode Rejection Ratio '1 mV/div to 99.5 mV/div: 10,000:1 dc to 1 MHz;
1000:1 at 40 MHz.
100 mV/div to 0.995 V/div: 1000:1 dc to 1 MHz;
100:1 at 40 MHz.
1 V/div to 10 V/div: 500:1 dc to 1 MHz; 100:1 at
40 MHz.
Input Impedance - 50 0, 1 MO in parallel with
15 pF, or 1 GO in parallel with 15 pF from
1 mV/div to 99.5 mV/div.
Input Coupling Modes - Ac, dc, and off (each
input).

Ac Coupling Low Frequency - 3 dB Point 10 Hz or less (1 MO input impedance).
Max Input Voltage - 1 MO mode: 1 mV/div to

99.5 mV/div: 40 V (dc + peak ac); 100 mV/div to
0.995 V/div: 400 V (dc + peak ac); 1 V/div to
10 V/div: 500 V (dc + peak ac). (At 1 mV/div to
99 .5 mV / div, derate max input voltage at
20 dB/decade above 10 MHz; at 100 mV/div to
10 V/div derate max input voltage at 20 dB/decade above 1 MHz.) 50 0 : Input automatically disconnects when the input signal exceeds safe limits. Manual reset.

ORDERING INFORMATION
11 A33 Differential Comparator

$3,000

Include.: Operator manual supplement.
Option 24 -

P6134 10X, 10 MO Passive Probe
P6135 10X, Matched Pair of

OPTION
Includes a P6135 probe pair."

WARRANTY-PLUS SERVICE PLANS
SEE PAGE 498
Contact your local Sales Engineer lor prices.
50 - On-Site Product Installation and Set-Up.
S1 - 1 Year On-Site Service.
S2 - 2 Years On-Site Service.
S3 - 3 Years On-Site Service.

Three NEW high performance probes round
out the capabilities of the 11000 Series oscilloscopes and plug-ins.
The P6134 is a 10X passive probe which is
intended primarily for use with the 11A32
and 11A34, with their 1 MO input impedances. The P6135 is actually a matched pair
of probes clipped together at the scope input end. The P6135 has attenuation adjustments to match the attenuation of the two
halves to provide high common mode rejection compatible with the 11A33 Differential
Comparator plug-in.
The P6231 is a 1.5 GHz, low-impedance,
subminiature, 10X active probe intended primarily for use with high-speed logic circuits.
The P6231 provides a "nulling voltage: adjustable via the mainframe controls over a
± 5 volt range. This nulling voltage reduces
the dc-loading effects of the probe when it
is used to measure signals whose midvoltage is other than zero volts, or in circuits
where the termination resistance is returned
to other than ground level.
The 50 0 termination required by the P6231
at the plug-in input is automatically accommodated by the 11000 Series mainframe.
When the mainframe senses that a P6231
has been connected to an input connector
of an 11A32, 11A33, or 11A34 Amplifier

plug-in unit, it automatically switches the
plug-in input impedance to 50 O. The 11.A52
and 11A71 Amplifier plug-ins have fixed
50 0 input impedances.
Each of the four probes hal> an "10" button
which, when pressed, will cause anyone or
more of several actions to be taken by the
mainframe-autoset, recall the next in a series of stored setups, invoke the automatic
measurement function, or issue an SAO.
These actions are selectable via the mainframe UTILITY major menu.
All of the new 11000 Series probes make
use of the new probe interface of the 11000
Series plug-ins. Each of the probes communicates its attenuation ratio to the mainframe. Power for the P6231 active probe
comes through that interface, eliminating
the need for a special power cable or power
source. The bias voltage for the P6231 is
applied through that interface. The P6231
also communicates its type and serial number through the serial data communi?ation
lines in the interface connector. Sensing of
the pressing of the 10 buttons on the probes
is done through the interface.
All of the probes are compatible with the s~b
miniature accessories shown on page 487, Including the KUPKIT.
All of the other voltage probes described in
this catalog which can be compensated to
1 MO and 15 pF or to 50 0 are also compatible with the 11000 Series plug-in units, including the operation of the 10 button on
probes so equipped. See ~ages 463-4~
for full descriptions of all available TektroniX
signal probes and other accessories.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORY
Service Menuel - Order 07(}611B-OO"
., To order, contset your /ocsJ Tektronix Sales Office.

215

TEK

7000 SERIES '
INSTRUMENTS
CONTENTS
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Nonstorage Mainframes .. . ......... . ..
CRT Storage Mainframes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Digitizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..

The 7000 Series ...
217
221
233
239
324

Superior Performance
The 7000 Series plug-in laboratory instruments embody more state-of-the-art performance features than any other oscilloscope-based measurement system . The
7104 and the R7103 Oscilloscopes feature
a 1 GHz bandwidth combined with the fastest rise time and highest photographic writing speed available today.

Expandability
This assures you that the instrument you
buy today will adapt to changing measurement needs, and that it won't become obsolete soon after you buy it. Tektronix'
most r~?ent developments in plug-in scope
cap~blhty are: the Waveform Processing
Osc~lIoscope , the 1 GHz High Writing Rate
OSCilloscope, the Programmable Digitizer
PI~g-ln Unit, and the four channel Logic
Triggered Vertical Amplifier.

Maximum Flexibility
A choice of over 40 plug-ins and 19 mainframes gives you the flexibility to configure
the scope package to meet your individual
needs . When your needs change , your
present package can be reconfigured with a
minimum of additional equipment and effort.

Digital Storage Capability
The 7854 provides digital storage, pre- and
post-trigger viewing, equivalent time sampling, and waveform processing. The IEEE
Standard 488 interface is standard.

--=- .. --.:.----..:. - - - - ----

="',,&'___
=======
- ~ -- ::::
All:::
-

... ;'.

' -

__ -

...

TEK

7000

OSCILLOSCOPE
REFERENCE

SERIES

The 70C1J Series is a unique family of instrumentation components, a continuation of the
Tektronix commitment to bringing the ultimate
in measurement technology to the laboratory.

Nonstorage 1 GHz 7104/R7103

Dual Beam 7844/R7844

This mps rise time is displayed on a 7104 Oscilloscope. Readout indicates 10 mVldiv vertical sensitivity
and 200 psldiv sweep speed. The 7104 and R7103 ~
vide ultra bright displays which permit the viewing of a
single-shot transient event up to the maximum band
width of the oscilloscope (1 GHz) in ambient light.

The 4(X) MHz 7844 Dual-Beam Oscilloscope displays one
input signal at two sweep speeds. The 7844 provides full
vertical and horizontal crossover switching and fuH overlap of both vertical amplifiers on its 8 x 10 em display.

Sampling/Time Domain Reflectometry

Digital Storage 7854

400 MHz Dual Beam
A dual-beam oscilloscope is essentially two
oscilloscopes in one. A dual-beam oscilloscope is required in applications where two
transient events must be compared simultaneously. These application areas commonly
include the observation of simultaneous
stimulation and reaction in such fields as
medicine, biology, chemistry, and mechanical engineering.
Digital Measurement Plug-Ins
The 70C1J Series digital plug-ins include: A
universal counter/timer and digital multimeter with temperature measurement capability. Together with a 7000 Series mainframe, these give you the advantage of
seeing what you're measuring, plus accuracy of digital measurements.
Sampling
The 7000 Series sampling plug-ins provide
some unique measurement capabilities not
available in other sampling oscilloscopes.
You get: a low-cost storage CRT for slow
scans, a random mode that lets you see
leading edges without pre trigger or bandwidth-limiting delay line, a wide choice of
sampling heads at minimal cost, and the
convenience of sampling and conventional
display at the same time on the CRT.
CRT Storage
Seven 7000 Series mainframes provide
some combination of bistable and/or variable persistence storage. The 7934 Storage
Oscilloscope can capture single-shot transient events of <700 ps rise time. Variable
perSistence is valuable for effective viewing
of slowly changing events or signals.
Digital Storage
The 7854 Waveform Processing Oscilloscope stores repetitive signals up to
400 MHz with conventional plug-ins, up to
14 GHz with the 7S12 TOR/Sampling plugin. The 7854 provides digital storage with
waveform processing , waveform measurements at the touch of a button, keystroke
programming , and a GPIB interface. The
7020 Programmable Digitizer plug-in provides dual-trace digital storage of signals up
to 70 MHz in any 70C1J Series mainframe,
except the 7104 and R7103.
Spectrum Analysis
Unexcelled plug-in performance from 20 Hz
to 2.5 GHz is provided by the 7L5, 7L 12 and
7L 14 Spectrum Analyzer plug-ins. Stable,
sensitive and spurious-free, these analyzers
work in any 7000 Series mainframe.
Refer to the Spectrum Analyzer section beginning on page 155 for more information.

opw:e..
..
~c

ZR
I
. _L....-.-.

~~:

II!
----'"---

!
I

--+ - - -

i
RD = 23.

aUll 8

W
I] "

[Ts
L~

r.I
fJ

19"

2,,"

2.4

r;t

+1== ~=

, ,1

rm
aHe 0 = 468 9pS
ST RED
PL

7854 WavefOO'l7 Processing 0scII0sc0pe with 7812 TDR/
SampJng pVg-in provides tme dcmtJK) raflectometry and

Here, the 7854 measures the 127.6 ps rise time of

38.83 mV pulse displayed at a sweep speed of

digflaI processing of S8fT¥J1ing. h this photo, the 785417812
calculates

2OOpsidiv.

Analog Storage 500 MHz 7934

Spectrum Analysis

Transient Captur&-A 7A29 plug-in and the 7934 's Fast
V8IiabIe Persistence storage mode in reduced scan ~
ture a single-shot electrostatic discharge.

Max Hold feature of the 7L 14 Spectrum Analyzer plug-in
in a 7CXXJ Series mainframe produces perfectly proportioned 8in x/x spectrum of low rep rate burst of
2.66 MHz, 6.67 pS in width.

rnetJSlIeS a ciscontntty h milirhcVdivision and
811 rnpecJance of 52.41 {} at the ciscontntty.

CRT St....ge, _ pqe 233_
Dlgltlz..., _ pqe 324.

TEK

OSCILLOSCOPE
REFERENCE

7000
SERIES

7000 SERIES VERTICAL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
70\24

7A21

7M2

7Fl0

offset, tigl-f'eq
a..1RR ampIifoer

COO\IentionaJ
input ampIifoer

Duak:hameI

ImVldN

5mVldN
(0.5 mVldN)"

5mVldN

10mVIdN

10"VldN

5mV/cIN

5mVIcIN

10mV/cIN

2DmV/dN

2 "W/dN

1.5%

FIW
T,

I~t.t-tz

Illt.t-tz
44ns

225 t.t-tz
1.6ns

lOOt.t-tz
4.7 ns

1Dlt.t-tz
0.6 ns

I t.t-tz ± to%
3!iO ns ± 9%

4OOt.t-tz
09ns

200 t.t-tz
1.8ns

t(XX)

t.t-tz
0.35 ns

3!iO t.t-tz
tOns

750t.t-tz

3.4 ns

BW
T,

ICliMHz
3.4 ns
100 MHz

III MHz
4.4 ns
70 MHz

225 MHz
1.6ns
140 MHz

100 MHz
4.7 ns
!IO MHz

500 MHz
0.8 ns
:mMHz

I MHz ± 10%
350 ns ± 9%
I MHz ± 9%

350 MHz
1.0 ns
140 MHz

200 MHz
1.8 ns
140 MHz

500 MHz
O.7ns·'
:mMHz

:mMHz
12 ns

400 MHz

:mMHz

III t.t-tz
4.4 ns
III MHz
4.4 ns

225t.t-tz
1.6ns
200 MHz
1.8 ns

100 t.t-tz
4.7 ns

I MHz ± to%
3!iOns ± 9%
I MHz ± IO%
350 ns ± 9%

3!iO MHz
1.0 ns

400 MHz
0.9 ns

:mMHz
12 ns
275 MHz
1.3 ns

4OOt.t-tz

:mMHz
1.2 ns

2OOt.t-tz
1.8ns
11llMHz
1.9ns

500 MHz
0.7 ns"

100 MHz
4.7 ns

5OOt.t-tz
0.8 ns
400 MHz"
0.9 ns

Features
Minmm
Dettection Factor
Accuracy"
Without Probe

7104
R71D3
o to 35' C

7AD

Low cost

7A1IA
Wde bandwith

7A11A

Differential de

7A13

Plug-In

7AlliA

7A1I

Dc-coupIed tigl-

Wde bandampIifoer

width 500
gai'I dfferential
input ampIifoer ampIifoer

Duak:hameI Duak:hameI
SOil amplifier ampIifoer

Widest band- Ru-chamef

OpticallElectrical

width silgIe
channel

converter with
txjt.., ampIifoer

logic

triggered

7904A
R7to3
7934
o to :JJ'C

SIG OUT

71120\0"
o to :JJ' C

FIW
T,

7844/R

FIW
T,

ICli MHz
3.4 ns
100 MHz
3.5 ns

7154"

FIW
T,

100 MHz
3.5 ns

Illt.t-tz
4.4 ns

200 MHz
1.8 ns

tOO t.t-tz
4.7 ns

400 MHz"
0.9 ns

I t.t-tz ± 10%
3!iO ns ± 9%

:mt.t-tz
12 ns

11ll MHz
1.9ns

400 MHz
0.9 ns

275t.t-tz
1.3 ns

:mt.t-tz

7704A

75 MHz
4.7 ns
55 MHz

170 MHz
2.1 ns
70 MHz

!IO MHz
4.7 ns
55 MHz

250 MHz"
1.5 ns
III MHz

I MHz ± 10%
350 ns ±9%
I MHz ± 10%

200 MHz
1.8 ns
70 MHz

170 MHz
2.1 ns
70 MHz

250 MHz
1.5 ns"
III MHz

250 MHz

SIG OUT

100 MHz
3.6 ns
00 MHz

11ll MHz
1.9 ns

(Optal)

III MHz

95t.t-tz
3.8 ns
00t.t-tz

75 MHz
47 ns
55t.t-tz

100 MHz
22ns
70 MHz

75 MHz
4.7 ns
55 t.t-tz

2OOt.t-tz
1.8 ns
III t.t-tz

I MHz ± 10%
3!iO ns ± 9%
1 t.t-tz ± 10%

200 MHz
1.8 ns
70 MHz

ISO MHz
2.4 ns
70 MHz

200 MHz
18 ns"
III MHz

175t.t-tz
2.0ns

2OOt.t-tz

III t.t-tz

75 MHz
4.8 ns
55 MHz

65 MHz
5.4 ns
SO MHz

100 MHz
3.5 ns
00 MHz

75 MHz
4.7 ns
SO MHz

100 MHz
3.5 ns
65 MHz

I MHz ± 10%
350 ns ±9%
I MHz ± 10%

100 MHz
3.5 ns
00 MHz

100 MHz
3.5 ns
65 MHz

100 MHz
3.5ns

100 MHz

65 MHz

75t.t-tz
48ns
55t.t-tz

SOt.t-tz
5.4ns
SO MHz

100 MHz
3.5ns
00 MHz

7Ot.t-tz
4.7ns
SOt.t-tz

l00t.t-tz
3.5ns
66t.t-tz

I MHz ±10%
3!iOns ± 9%
I MHz ±10%

l00t.t-tz
3.5ns
00t.t-tz

100 MHz
3.5ns
66 MHz

100 MHz
3.5ns

l00t.t-tz

66t.t-tz

65 MHz
6.0ns

00 MHz
6.7 ns

III MHz
5.0ns

65 MHz
6.0ns

III MHz
5.0 ns

I MHz ±10%
350 ns ± 9%

III MHz
5.0 ns

III MHz
5.0ns

III MHz
5.0 ns

III MHz

241
$1,:JJ5

242
$1 ,466

240
$2,895

245
$1 ,790

242
$2,655

242
$2,350

2«l
$3,325

243

240

$6,200

$6.495

o to 35'C
o to35' C
o to :JJ' C

FIW
T,

7704A
o to SO' C

SlGOUT
7803/R

BW
T,

o to SO' C

SIG OUT

7833/R
7WA/R
7t13/R
o to SO' C

FIW
T,

SlGOUT
BW
T,

78120"

o to 4O'C

(calculated)

Page

244

241

Price

$3,400

$7:JJ

., AClCIJI'BCY percentages apply to s/l defl9ctlon factors. Plug-in gain must be set st the deflection
factor deslgnstad on ssch plug-in. When s probe Is used, the gsJn must be set with the cslibrstion slgnsl spplied to the probe tip. The cslibrBtion slgnsl Is suppIisd by an 6xtemsl cslibnltor

whose 8ClCIJI'BCY Is within 0.25%.
•, Obtsined with tOX gsln st reduced bandwidth of to MHz.

:mMHz

to
to

'J Bsndwidth Is 325 MHz st
mV/div.
'. Bsndwidth Is 200 MHz st
mV/div.
'S Bsndwidth with equivslent time ssmpIing SlId time displsy only.
'. FuRy programmable mainframe. 1A t6P Programmable Amplifier recornrnendsd. Sse pages 346.
"R7903 with lA29 1, Is 0.8 ns.

7000 SERIES MAINFRAME/TIME BASE/CAMERA SELECTION GUIDE
Time a. ...
C8mera.
Ptug·fn

FNturM
7104/R7103

7B50A

Single
TmeBase

7B53A
Dual
TmeBase
with t.txed

s-p

7t44/R7t44
7854

Opt Cli"

...
...

7813/R7813

...

...
...
...

pege

251

7833/R7833
7123A/R7123A

S1 ,1:JJ
$1 ,800
Prlc•• !leiln at
. , Single sweep mode opersbIe for fesl time only.

218

7B92A

Single
TmeBase

Dual Tme
Base with
Display

.....

7934

7803/R7803

7885
Single Tme
Base with
Delaying
<1 Delay

SwiIcI1ing

.....

7104A/R7I03

7704A

7880

...
...
...
...

.....

...
...
..... ,
...

.....

...
...
.... ,
...

7Bl0

7B15

Single
TmeBase

Single Tme
Base with
Delaying
<1 Delay

.....
.....

....

...
...

...

C-51

....

...
.... ,
...

C-59

C·5C

C-7

C-4 Opt 02

General
PL.rpose

Low Cost

H!;I
Wrimg

Rate

.....

C·53

.....
.....

...
...
...

.....
.....

.....

...
.....
...
...

....

...
....

...
248

249

451

$1,600

$1 ,940

$3,745

$2,555

$2,900

$2,:Bl

$1 ,940

.....

...
...
...
...

....

.... Opt 01

...

449

447

445

$495

$595

$370

.,.

....
246

...
...
...
...

.....

....

246

.....

453
$1,335

.,.

... Opt 01

...
.,.

TEK

7000

OSCILLOSCOPE
REFERENCE

SERIES

7000 SERIES OSCILLOSCOPE SYSTEMS/PROBE SELECTION GUIDE·1
This selection guide lists the most poputar combinations to< opt"num perloonance but is not all,ncluslve Current probes and other compatible probes are tisted in the Probes Section on page 464

Featu..a

MiniallXe

Miniatile

MiniallXe
Fast
Rise Tme

A-..eIon
7100
Family

Pl101A
2m

Pl101A
1m

Probe

Pl130
1.5m
Pl101A
1m

7A19
7A24
7A21
7A29
7A42

PI055'.

Pl131
1.3m

3.5ft

Active ProbH 10 0/1 MQ
Input CompIrIIIIe

'aHlve VoII8ge
10 0 Input CompIrIIIIe

P8HI¥e VoIIeg8 1 MIl Input CcImpeIIIIe

PIOI2B"
6ft

PIOOI
9ft

P11115
10ft

PIOfiI
1.5m

PIOI7
6ft

PI201"

Fastest
lOX
Passive
Probe
LowC

Fastest
looX
Passive
Probe
LowC

Low
CapacINe
Loading

SIbminiah.e
Fast
Rise Tme

Adj
Attenuation
Differential

Selectable
Ahenuation
lX:1OX

1.5kV
Rise Tme

40kV
Peak

6ft

PI2OIA"
2m

PI23O"
l.5m

PIINI
6ft

10M!!

Ac Couping

~
~

Dc Offset

EO.

Differential

BiasI
Offset

CM'1A

I-i!1>

lOX

Selectable

looX

l000X

lOX

looX

Selectable

lOX

Selectable

NC
NC

400 MHz

350 MHz

100 MHz

175 MHz

NC
NC
75 MHz
NC

500 M-iz
350 M-iz

34 M-iz

NC
NC
NC
NC
300 MHz

950 M-iz

!IX)

IKl MHz

350 M-iz

MHz
350 MHz

ero

130 MHz

430 MHz
310 MHz
195 MHz
MHz
300 MHz

300 M-iz
300 M-iz
185 M-iz
450 M-iz
2IKl M-iz

400 MHz
350 M-iz
200 M-iz
!IX) M-iz
350 MHz

100 MHz
100 MHz
90 MHz
100 MHz
100 MHz

NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC

66 M-iz

66 M-iz
00 M-iz
IKl M-iz
00 M-iz

500 M-iz

105 M-iz
IKl M-iz
205 M-iz
75 M-iz
400 M-iz

105 M-iz
IKl M-iz
215 M-iz
75 M-iz
430 M-iz

105 M-iz
75 M-iz
205 M-iz
75 M-iz
300 M-iz

105 M-iz
IKl M-iz
205 M-iz
75M-iz
400 M-iz

70 M-iz
00M-iz
90 M-iz
00 M-iz
95 M-iz

34 MHz

100 MHz

250 MHz

75 M-iz
75 MHz
75 M-iz

105 M-iz
75 M-iz
200 M-iz
75 M-iz

NC
NC
NC

7100 7A13
Family 7A15A
7Al1A
7AliA
7Al.
7A22
7A24
7A28
7M2

34
34
34
34

M-iz
M-iz
M-iz
M-iz

NC
NC
NC

34 M-iz
34 M-iz

100 MHz
100 M-iz

175 MHz
250 M-iz

7800
7A13
Family 7A15A
7Al1A
7A18A
7A19
7A22
7A24
7A28
7A42

34
34
34
34

100 MHz
75 MHz
100 M-iz
85 MHz

100 MHz
75 MHz
100 MHz
85 MHz

n04A 7A13
Family 7A15A
7A18A
7AliA
7A1.·'
7A22
7A24
7A28
7A42

NC
1 M-iz

MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz

1 M-iz

85 MHz

NC
NC
NC

34 MHz
34 MHz

100 MHz
100 MHz

145 MHz
200 MHz

34
34
34
34

70 MHz
70 M-iz
100 M-iz
75 MHz

95 M-iz
70 M-iz
145 M-iz
75 M-iz

1 MHz

1 M-iz

NC
NC
NC
140 MHz

NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC

150 M-iz

llKl M-iz

34 M-iz

75 MHz

100 M-iz
100 MHz

75 M-iz

85 M-iz
70 M-iz
130 M-iz
70 M-iz

66 MHz

NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC

1 MHz

300 M-iz

NC
34 MHz

75 M-iz

1 MHz

M-iz
M-iz
M-iz
MHz

125 M-iz

350 M-iz

125 M-iz
130 M-iz

75 M-iz
IKl M-iz

300 M-iz

310 M-iz
185 MHz
300 M-iz

290 M-iz
185 M-iz
300 M-iz

350 M-iz
290 M-iz
300 MHz

90 MHz
85 MHz
90 MHz

85 MHz
70 MHz
110 MHz
IKlMHz

00 MHz
55 MHz
75 MHz
00 MHz

100 MHz
IKl M-iz
166 M-iz
90 M-iz
300 MHz

100 M-iz
IKl M-iz
170 M-iz
75 MHz

100 M-iz
IKl MHz
190 M-iz
90 M-iz

320 MHz

400 MHz

70 MHz
00 MHz
85 M-iz
66 MHz
95 MHz

270 M-iz
150 MHz
26:J M-iz

300 M-iz
llKl MHz
275 M-iz

90 M-iz
85 MHz
90 M-iz

400 MHz

1 MHz

300 MHz

105 MHz
110 MHz

75 MHz
75 MHz

275 MHz

2IKl M-iz
155 MHz
26:J M-iz

66
55
75
00

100 M-iz
75 M-iz
100 M-iz
75 M-iz
220 M-iz

100 M-iz
70 M-iz
150 M-iz
75 M-iz
215 M-iz

100 M-iz
75 M-iz
100 M-iz
75 M-iz
250 M-iz

70 MHz
55 MHz
IKl MHz
00 M-iz
85 M-iz

185 M-iz
100 MHz
170 M-iz

llKl MHz
140 MHz
100 M-iz

200 MHz
166 MHz
llKl MHz

IKl M-iz
IKl M-iz
IKl M-iz

75 M-iz
66 M-iz
100 M-iz
75 MHz

75 MHz
65 MHz
100 MHz
75 MHz

75 MHz
66 M-iz
100 M-iz
75 MHz

55 MHz
50 M-iz
70 M-iz
55 M-iz

100 MHz
100 MHz

70 MHz
70 M-iz

275 MHz
66 M-iz

75 M-iz

85 M-iz
66 M-iz
115 M-iz
70 M-iz

250 M-iz

1 M-iz

200 M-iz

105 MHz
115 M-iz

75 M-iz
75 MHz

llKl M-iz

70 M-iz

M-iz
M-iz
M-iz
M-iz

7800
7A13
34 MHz
70 MHz
75 MHz
55 MHz
70 MHz
00 MHz
NC
55 MHz
Family 7A15A
34 MHz
00 MHz
00 MHz
NC
00 MHz
55 MHz
50 M-iz
7A18A
34 MHz
95 MHz
95 MHz
95 MHz
85 MHz
66 MHz
NC
7A18A
34 MHz
70 MHz
70 MHz
70 MHz
55 MHz
NC
65 MHz
7A22
1 MHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
NC
NC
7A28
34 MHz
95 MHz
95 MHz
85 MHz
65 MHz
NC
95 MHz
7A42
95 MHz
100 MHz
66 MHz
34 MHz
95 MHz
95 MHz
85 MHz
, TIIB vBlues In the BboV8 tBbIe r8pressnt the BpproxtmBte
, Option 09 MBlnframe.
•• Requires 11011110lA Power Supply or other externBI
useful frequency response for the meBsurement systems Bt
the probe tip.
source of power when used with 7854. 7603. 7633. 7623.

or 7613.

•, MBtched pslr recommended.

• BBndwidths gwen for lOX sWItch position.
NC- Not compstible

If there Is no bandwidth specified. the probIJ/p1ug-in combinBtion is compstible but not recommended.

7000 SERIES MAINFRAMES AND PLUG-INS DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
78120

Olmenalona
Width
Height

Net
Shipping

7104

305
12.0

483

483
19.0

19.0

178
7.0

348

679
26.8

679

627

in
Welghta

7854"

mm
in
in

Depth

7912AD

483

13.7

R7103

7904A

R7903

221
8.7

483

345
13.6

290

133
5.3

577
22.7

610
24.0

627

24.8

483
19.0

19.0

178
7.0

630

19.0

345
13.6

178
7.0

345
13.6

135
5.3

345
13.6

328

592

577

579
22.8

622

22.7

24.5

605
23.8

704
27.7

305
12.0

19.0

23.3

221
8.7

R7144

305
12.0

24.7

R7S03

7844

483

26.8

7103

7934

305
12.0

12.9

R7833,
R7823A.
R7813

7833.
7823A,
781 3

n04A

483

11.4

PIug·lna
SIngle

Double

19.0

7.1
2.8

140
5.5

305
12.0

133
5.3

127
5.0

fil7
23.5

566
22.3

368

24.7

14.5

=
Ib

25.0
55.0

22.7
50.0

20.4
45.0

19.8
43.6

20.0
44.0

16.9
37.2

12.3
27.0

17.2
37.8

16.3
36.0

15.0
33.0

13.6
30.0

14.5
32.0

0.9
2.0

4.1
9.0

kg
Ib

42.1
93.0

32.6
72.0

28.1
62.0

25.4
56.0

309
68.0

21 .4
47.0

23.6
52.0

21.6
47.6

21 .6
47.0

28.5
63.0

19.5
43.0

20.8
46.0

28.2
62.0

19.0
42.0

28.2
62.0

2.3
5.0

5.4
12.0

., CBlculBtor dimensions Bnd W91ghts. width 277 mm (IO.9,n). height 69 mm (2.7,n). depth 165 mm (6.5 In).

219

TEK

OSCILLOSCOPE
REFERENCE

7000
SERIES

K213 Lab Instrument Cart
The K213 Lab Instrument Cart accepts all 7000
Series oscilloscopes. A lockable drawer for storage and a movable shelf for additional instrumentation are included. The shelf accepts TM 500
Test and Measurement instruments, 5000 Series
oscilloscopes, or 400 Series oscilloscopes. A
drawer for the 7854 keyboard and a plug-in storage cabinet are available as Options 10 and 12
respectively, or Option 22 for both. For full details,
see Cart Section, page 462.

TEK C-53 Camera
The full line of cameras designed for 7000 Series
oscilloscopes is summarized on the preceding
page. For full details, see Camera Section, page

451 .

APPLICATION NOTES FOR 7000 SERIES
TlUe

De8Crtptlon

Order

Title

De.crtptlon

Order

Pulse and digital timing meas·
urements-a better technique

7B9J17B85 general operation overview

42·AX·3379-t

42·W-368H

7/1,42 Logic triggered amplifier, checking
logic levels

Using storage to find troublesome logic glitches

7633 shows how to capture and
evaluate glitches

42·AX.;nl5

42W·5629

761315441 various applications for
variable persistence storage oscilloscopes

42·AX·3198

7/1,42 Bus Contention

7/1,42 Microprocessor Bus Contention
measurements

Variable persistence storage
applications

42W·563:)

7/1,42 Advanced Trigger
Application

Automated TOR Testing

Made easy with tha 7854 oscilloscope!
7S 12 sampler plug·in

42W-5334' 1

7A42 measures complex signals easily

42W.5588

X·Y Displays with Interval
Timing for Measuring SOA

701517Al817A22 X·y power dissipation
measurements

Bistable storage applications

Tektronix Storage Oscilloscopes
Describes various applications

42·AX·3199

42·AX·3957

Increased measurement
accuracy using a 7015 in
any 7000 Series scope

Introduction demonstrating variety of
counting and timing measurements

42W-5017-1

7020 Programmable Digitizer:
Digitizing Performance and
versatility in a power plug·in

In-depth discussion of the features,
functions and capabilities

42W·5079-1

Sampling for High
Speed Measurements

Describes how sampling works, TOR
measurements, probes and sampling systems

42W·5195

Measurement Techniques
with DiHerentiaJ Amplifiers

Oullines what they are, functions and benefits

42W-5325

Applying Photographic
Writing Rate to High
Speed Signal Measurements

Describes how scope!camera systems
photograph fast moving traces

42W·5335-1

Power SupplylDevice Testing

Describes advanced 7854 waveform
processing functions of typical series of fove
power supply and device test operationS

42W-5700

Basic SW Programs for
Communicating Between
7854 and IBM PC

Describes installation and configuration
of National Instrument's IEEE·488 card, and
programs to make transfers and specific
programs in IBM BASIC

42W-5002-1

7854 Measurement Primer

Teaches most basic functions, including acquiring waveform , stored waveform measurements, storing/displaying multiple waveforms

42'W-5968

Sampling Primer

Basic sampling principles in signal
acquisition for scope measurements

42W-5969

Pulse Echo Measurements
with digital accuracy

760317A22!7Dl517B53A liming measurements
between nonadjacent pulses
Ultrasonic transducers

7/1,42

DAC Measurements: The samp 7S14I7Dl21M217B92A17904 measuring
ling oscilloscope approach
DAC (digital analog converter) settling time
7011 example of radar pulse delay
time measurement

Accurate Radar Pulse
Measurements

42W-3632' 1
42·W·2659-3

Measuring time interval between 7015 demonstrates abity to measure
nonadjacent digilal word train
the tine between adjacent pUses
pulses or muItiecho radar pUses with digi1al cornter 8CClX8C)'

42W·268I}3

7020 application examples including ultra'
sonic testing, mon~oring nerve activity,
measuring pulse jitter, and SOA analysis
of power devices

42W·fal5

Measuring memory core
signals with digital accuracy

7000 Series digital plug-ins demonstrate how
to make accurate pulse parameter measurements both of amplitude and pulse fiming

42·AX·26B&1

Measuring disc drive time and
access voltages with Tektronix
7000 Series Digital Plug·ins

7000 Series digital plug·ins use a single
CRT display to perform both digital and
analog analysis of complex waveforms

42W·2687-2

Measurement Variety:
An Engineering challenge
featuring tha 7854

7854lWaveform Calculator basic operation,
application software for percent overshoot.
data monitoring and histogram

42·W-4281 ·1

GPiB communication
with the 7854

7854/4052 and 785414924 types of
transfers
transmissions formats, and operational software
in TEK BASIC compatible with any
4050 Series computer
42W-441&1

The 7020 Programmable Digiti·
zer: Performing a Wide Range
of Measurement Tasks Easier,
Faster, and more Accurately

220

TEK

7000 SERIES
NONSTORAGE MAINFRAMES
CONTENTS
71 04/R71 03 1 GHz General Purpose .....
7904NR7903 500 MHz General Purpose . .
7704A 200 MHz General Purpose ........
7603/R7603 100 MHz General Purpose ...
7844/R7844 400 MHz Dual Beam ........
CRT Storage Mainframes . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
High Performance Digitizing Mainframes .

222
225
227
229
231
233
239
324

7000 SERIES NONSTORAGE SELECTION GUIDE
Features
Bandwidth·'
Minimum
Deflection Factor
Maximum
Sweep Rate
Four Traces
Delayed Sweep
Page
Prlces· 2 begin at

7104/R7103

7904A/R7903

7844/R7844

7704A Opt 09

7704A

1 GHz

500 MHz

400 MHz

250 MHz

200 MHz

100 MHz

10 mV/div at BW

10 mVidiv at BW
10 p.V/div
1 mNdiv

20 mVidiv at BW
10 p.Vldiv
1 mAldiv

20 mV/div at BW
10 p.V/div
1 mAldiv

10 mV/div at BW
10p.V/div
1 mAldiv

5 mV/div at BW
10p.V/div
1 mAldiv

200 ps/div

500psldiv

1 ns/div

2 ns/div

5 ns/div

v
v

222

225
$10,115/$9,560

231
$15,3651$15,810

227

229

$6,1 60

$5,635

$3,670/$4 ,160

$24,590/$25,125

Dual Beam

7603/R7603

., Bandwidths are real time. Sampling plug-Ins thst extend bandwidths to 14 GHz are available for most mainframes.
·2 Price doss not include plug-Ins.

A high performance instrument system begins with the basic oscilloscope building
block-the 7000 Series mainframe. Each
mainframe consists of a cathode-ray tube, a
power supply, electron beam deflection systems, and the switching circuitry necessary
to integrate a versatile and complete measurement system.

The Tektronix 7104 and the R7103 are
1 GHz oscilloscopes featuring the fastest
rise time (350 ps) and highest photographic
writing speed (20 cm/ns) available today.

Choose from a variety of features, including
bandwidth , photographic writing speed,
dual beam, alphanumeric displays, rackmounting, and three or four plug-in flexibility.

221

TEK

1 GHz
GENERAL PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES

7000
SERIES

See What You Could Never See Before.

lhIfoffl - A pulse train on a TEK 7904A doesn·t reveal
the low level glitch occurring every ten-thousandth pulse.
(The TEK 7904A was previously the world's fastestwriting·rate scope.)

7104/R7103
1 GHz at 10 mV/Dlv
350 ps Rise Time
200 ps/Dlv Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate
Horizontal Bandwidth 350 MHz
Ultra High Photographic Writing Speedat Least 20 cm/ns
CRT Readout
7 Inch Rackmount (R7103 Only)
Phase Compensation Option-Phase
Matching to 250 MHz (7104 Only)

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
High Speed Semiconductor Design
Laser and High Energy Research
Digital Communications

See page 220 for available Application Notes.
The capabilities of the 7104 and the seven
inch rackmount R7103 are of substantial
value in numerous high technology environments. The 7104/R7103 have both the
highest writing speed and highest bandwidth available in a general purpose oscilloscope today.

The 7104/R7103 's outstanding writing
speed means unsurpassed single shot
capability, with trace brightness about onethousand times that of conventional oscilloscopes. Any single shot signal within the
1 GHz bandwidth can be seen directly on
the CRT in average room light. Also,
singleshot photography is now simple and
straightforward, using standard oscillographic cameras and film without high
speed enhancement techniques.
It is by no means unusual to see 250 MHz
data rates and 900 MHz analog frequencies
outside the lab and on the production line.
In digital design, too, anomalies such as
ringing and overshoot can only be dealt with
by evaluating the signal ' s analog
characteristics.

After - The same pulse trail viewed directly on the
71041R71aJ, with one-thousand times the brightness of
conventional scopes. The researcher can now analyze the
pulse with the naked eye and take pictr.xes with ease.

lhIfoffl - Low repetition rate pulse is invisible on a cooventional oscilloscope.

You can capture the fastest transients without expensive high speed film or other time
consuming and complex techniques like
fogging or reducing the scan. In fact, you
can see those signals on the CRT, and eliminate costly time consuming photographs.

After - The same pulse as seen on the 71041R71aJ
readily indicates that the problem is input signal bounce.

222

TEK

7000

1 GHz
GENERAL PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES

SERIES

CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
For CRT phosphor data see page 186.
CRT -lnternal8 x 10 division (0.85 cm/div) graticule with variable illumination. Accelerating potential is 12.5 kV. GH (P31) phosphor standard.
Readout and Gratlcule Modes - Each continuous or pulsed. Pulse Source Front Panel Selectable: +Gate, External, Manual. Pulsed graticule is
on for ",,0.5 s.

Autofocus - Reduces the need for additional
manual focusing with changes in intensity after
focus control has been set.
Beam Finder Aids in locating offscreen
signal.
External Z-Axis Input - 2 V p-p for full intensity range. A poSitive signal blanks the trace. Maximum input voltage is 15 V (dc + peak ac) and
p-p ac. Input is dc coupled.

Typical Photographic Writing Speed·'
Writlng Speed

CRT
Standard
8cm x tOem

With its sweep speed of 200 ps/div, the 71041R7103
clearly shows a single-shot, 350-ps step, five divisions in
amplitude.

Csmera

C-53

Len.

111.9
t :O.85

em/n.
20

., USIfIg /lie standard GH (P3I) phosphor and Polaroid Type
107, 3,000 ASA film without film fogging.

Horizontal bandwidth of 350 MHz, with the
X-V phase compensation Option 02 (7104),
gives accurate X-V displays to 250 MHz.
Designers can now directly obtain V-I
curves for high speed switching power
supply evaluation or monitor performance
of digital communication systems using
phase constellation displays.

CHARACTERISTICS
The following characteristics are common to the
7104 and the R7103, except those noted under
the R7103.

VERTICAL SYSTEM
Channels - Two left-hand plug-in compartments. Compatible with all 7000 Series plug-ins
(except 7D01 , 7D02, and 7020).
Bandwidth - Determined by mainframe and
plug-in unit. See page 218.
Rise Time - Determined by mainframe and
plug-in unit. See page 218.
Deflection Factor - Determined by plug-in
unit. See page 218.
Display Modes - Left, Alt, Add , Chop, Right.
Chopped mode repetition rate is "'" 1 MHz.
Trace Separation - (7104 only) In dual sweep
modes positions 8 trace at least four divisions
above and below A trace.
Delay Line - Permits viewing leading edge of
displayed waveform.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Channels - Two right-hand plug-in compartments. Compatible with the 7810 Series, 7880
Series, 7B50A, 7892A, 7000 Series vertical amplifiers and specialized plug-ins (7892, 7D01 , 7D02,
and 7020 not recommended) .
Bandwidth - Dc to 350 MHz.
Display Modes - (7104 only) A, Alt, Chop, 8 .
Chopped mode repetition rate is "", 200 kHz.
Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate - 200 ps/div
with the 7810 or 7815.
X-Y Mode - With Option 02, X-V Phase Compensation (7104 only, using 7A19s or 7A29s at
least one having Variable Delay Option, 8 horizontal compartment only): Phase shift is 2° from dc
to 50 MHz (after adjusting variable delay for balance at 35 MHz). Phase balance can be obtained
at any frequency up to 250 MHz. Without Option
02, X-V Phase Compensation: Phase shift is 2°
from dc to 50 kHz.

A digital circuit that shows no jitter on a conventional
oscilloscope is found to have a 2.0 ns jitter when
viewed with the distinct image viewing capability of the
7104IR7103.

Circuit fauits such as high frequency pulse overshoot
and ringing can easily be observed with the 71041
R7103's 1GHz bandwidth.

The transient load line of a fast Switching transistor in a
power supply prototype (switching time = 10 ns) is easily
measured for compliance with safe operating area (Ho~
zontal= Voltage; Verlical= Cuffent).

View of a single clocking pulse 0.8 ns rise and 2 ns
pulse width.

223

TEK

1 GHz
GENERAL PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES

7000
SERIES

ORDERING INFORMATION
(PLUG-INS NOT INCLUDED)
7104 Oscilloscope
$24,590
Include.: Power cord (16Hl066-00): instruction manual
(07D-2314{x) .
R7103 Rackmount Oscilloscope
$25,125
Include.: Power cord (161 -0066-00); mask frame
(42&0514{x) ; CRT filter (378- 7 cm/ns. For
comparison of 7000 Series photographic
writing speeds, see page 186.

CHARACTERISTICS
The fo/Iowing characteristics are common to the
7004A and R7003, except those noted under the
R7003.
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Channels Two left·hand plug·in compart·
ments. Compatible with all 7000 Series plug·ins.
Bandwidth - Determined by mainframe and
plug·in unit. See page 218.
Rise Time - Determined by mainframe and
plug·in unit. See page 218.
Deflection Factor Determined by plug·in
unit. See page 218.

Display Mode - Left, Alt, Add , Chop, Right.
Chopped mode repetition rate is "" 1 MHz.
Trace Separation Range - (7904A only) In
dual sweep modes, positions B trace at least four
divisions above and below A trace.
Delay Une - Permits viewing leading edge of
displayed waveform when using 71300 and 7800 Series time bases. 7850 Series not recommended.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Channels - 7004A: Two right·hand plug·in com·
partments. R7903: One right-hand plug·in com·
partment. 7904A and R7903: Compatible with
7880 and 7B90 Series time bases, 7000 Series
vertical amplifiers and specialized plug·ins.
Bandwidth - Dc to at least 1 MHz.
Display Modes - A, Alt, Chop, B. Chopped
mode repetition rate is ",, 200 kHz.
Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate - 500 ps/div
with the 7B92A.
X- Y Mode - Wrth Delay Compensation: Phase
shift is within 2° from dc to 1 MHz. Without Delay
Compensation: Phase shift is within 2° from dc to
35kHz.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
For CRT phosphor data see page 186.
CRT - Internal 8 x 10 division (0.85 cm/div) grati·
cule with variable illumination. Accelerating poten'
tial is 24 kV. GH (P31) phosphor is standard.
Option 04, CRT With Reduced Area - Inter·
nal 4 cm x 5 cm graticule with variable iIIumina'
tion. Accelerating potential is 24 kV. GH (P31)
phosphor is standard.
Option 13, Maximum Brightness CRT With
Reduced Area - Internal 4 cm x 5 cm graticule
with variable illumination. Accelerating potential is
24 kV with BE (P11) phosphor.
Option 78, BE (P11) Phosphor Replaces
standard GH (P31) phosphor.
Typical Photographic Writing Speed"'
CRT

C.mere

lens

C·51P

fl1 .2

Writing Speed
em/n.

OpI04
4 cm xScm

Opl13
4cm.5cm

2
1:0.5

Opl7S
Scm.10cm
2.5
'r Ustng Polaroid Type 612 2O.()(J() ASA Film without film fogging.

In typical applications, GH (P31) phosphor has approximately one-half the writing speed of BE (P11)
phosphor. The writing speed can be increased by
using controlled film fogging with a writing speed
enhancer (camera accessory). See page 441.
Autofocus - Reduces the need for additional
manual focusing with changes in Intensity after fo·
cus control has been set.
Beam Finder - Aids in locating offscreen signal.
External Z-A~ls Input - 2 V p.p for full intensity
range. A positive signal blanks the trace. Maximum
input voltage is 15 V (dc + peak ac) and
p.p ac. Input is dc coupled.
CALIBRATOR
Output Waveshape Rectangular positive·
going from ground.
Voltage Ranges - 40 mY, 0.4 V, 4 V into an
open circuit. 4 mY, 40 mY, 0.4 V into 50 n. Ampli·
tude accuracy is within 1%. Repetition rate is
1 kHz within 0.25%.
Current Output - 40 mA with optional current
loop accessory (012-Q34HXl) connected to cali·
brator output. Output R is 450 n.

225

TEK

500 MHz
GENERAL PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES

7000
SERIES

Probe Power -

Two front panel connectors fl)(
two active probes. Not available fl)( Option 10.
CRT Readout - Inhibit: Ground closure, reat
panel BNC input locks out CAT readout. Not available with Option 10. Single Shot: Ground closure,
rear panel 8NC input initiates one frame of CAT
readout. Not available with Option 10 separately,
but in combination with the pulsed graticule input.
OUTPUTS/INPUTS (OPTIONS)
Option 10, Pulsed Graticule - No CAT readout single-shot input, CAT readout inhibit input,
calibrator, and probe power. Single-shot graticule
and CAT readout (ground closure) reat panel
BNC input is added. Initiates one frame of CRT
readout and pulsed graticule.
The R7903 requires only 5.25 inches of rack height in
with slideout chassis tracks.

OUTPUTS/INPUTS
+Sawtooth - Sawtooth starts 1 V I)( less from
ground into 1 MO. Front pane! selectable from A I)(
8 horizontal. Output voltage is '3J mV/dN (± 15%)
into 50 0, 1 V/d'rv (± 10%) into 1 MO. Output A is
",,9500.
+GATE - Positive-going rectangular waveform
darNed from A, 8, I)( Delayed Gate, front pane!
selectable. Output voltage is 0.5 V (± 10%) into
50 0, 10 V (± 10%) into 1 MO. Aise time is 5 ns I)(
less into '3J O.
Vertical SIgnal Out - Selected by 8 Trigger
Source switch. Output voltage is 25 mVld'rv into
'3J 0, 0.5 V/dN into 1 MO. Output A is ",,950 O.
Bandwidth depends upon vertical plug-in. See
page 218.
Camera Power - Three-prong connectl)( to the
lett of the CRT provides power, ground, and remote
single-sweep reset access for C-SO Series cameras.
Probe Power - Two reat pane! connectors for
two act'rve probes.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Une Voltage Ranges - 90 V to 132 V ac and
100 V to 250 V ac.
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption - 210 W, 3.5 A
at 90 V line, 00 Hz.
ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY
Ambient Temperature Operating: O·C to
+'3J·C. Nonoperating: -55·C to + 75·C.
Altitude - Operating: 5CXX) m (15,000 tt). N0noperating: 15000 m ('3J,000 tt).
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each of
the three major axes. 0.04 cm (0.015 in) pop displacement 10 Hz to 55 Hz to 10 Hz in one minute
cycles. Held for three minutes at '3J Hz.
Humidity - Operating and Nonoperating: 95%,
five cycles (120 hours), referenced to MIL-E-

164OOF.
Shock - Nonoperating: 30 g 's, 112 sine, 11 ms duration in each direction along each major axis. Tatal of six shocks.
EMC Capability - (Option 03) Meets MIL-SID4618 requirements when tested in accordance
with certain test methods of MIL-STD-462. Contact
your Tektronix representat'rve for more information.
Safety - UL listed (UL 1244) and GSA certified
(GSA 5568).

226

standard 19-inch rack. It is f8ll-COOled and comes complete

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Cabinet

DImen8Iona
Width

mm
:n;

He9>t

345

Depth
Welgllta_

SI7
kg
16.9
21 .4

Net
Shipping

In
12.0
13.6
22.7
III

372
47.0

RKk_
In
19.0
483
135
5.3
579
22.8
kg
III
12.3
27.0
23.6
52.0

CHARACTERISTICS (R7903)
The following chatacteristics for the A7903 ate in
addition to or in lieu of those listed previously.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Channel - Single right-hand plug-in compatlment. Compatible with 7800 Series, 7890 Series,
7000 Series vertical amplifiers and specialized
plug-ins.
Fasteat Calibrated Sweep Rate - 500 psld'rv
with the 7892A
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
Option 10, Pulsed Graticule Provides a
means of pulsing the graticule lights at a preset
level coincident with a single-shot event in one exposure. The graticule lights may be pulsed by the
event, an extemal ground closure, or a front panel
pushbutton. If the mainframe is equipped with CRT
readout, Option 10 provides additional controls and
inputs fl)( CRT readout pulsed operation.
CAUBRATOR
(NOT AVAILABLE WITH OPTION 10)
Voltage Ranges - 4 mV, 40 mV, 0.4 V, 4 V into
an open circuit; 4 mV, 40 mV, 0.4 V into 50 O.
Current Output 40 rnA rectangular waveshape with optional current-loop accessory
(012-0341-(lO) connected to calibrator output.
Output A is 4'3J O.
OUTPUTS/INPUTS (STANDARD)
+Sawtooth - Sawtooth starts 1 V or less from
ground (into 1 MO). Output voltage is 50 mV/d'rv
(± 15%) into 50 0 , 1 V/d'rv (± 10%) into 1 MO. Output A is ",,950 O.
+Gate - Posit'rve-going rectangular waveform
darNed from Main or Auxiliary Gate. Output voltage
0.5V (±10%) ilto '3J0. 10V (±10%) ilto 1 MO.
Aise time is 7 ns I)( less into 50 O. Output A is
. ",,9500.
Vertical Signal Out - Selected by Trigger
Source switches. Output voltage is 25 mV/d'rv into
'3J 0, 0.5 V/d'rv into 1 MO. Output A is ",,950 O.
Bandwidth depends upon vertical plug-in. See
page 219.
Extemal Single Sweep Reset - Ground closure, rear panel input to reset sweep.
Single Sweep Ready Output - Aear panel
8NC provides 5 V out to indicate single sweep
ready condition.

POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges - 90 V to 132 V ac and
100 V to 264 V ac.
Maximum Power Consumption - 100 W, 2 A
at 115 V line, 00 Hz.

ORDERING INFORMATION
(PLUG-INS NOT INCLUDED)
Ordering information is common to the 7004A and R7903
unless otherwise noted.

7904A Oscilloscope
$10,115
Include.: Power cord (16HXl66-00); instruction manual
(07(}4593-00).

R7903 Oscilloscope
$9,560
Includ•• : Power cord (16Hl066-00); test adaptor
(012- 7 cm/ns
photographic writing rate with the Tektronix
C-51 Camera and WSEN (writing speed
enhancer described on page 441). For a
comparison of 7000 Series photographic
writing speeds, see page 186.

CHARACTERISTICS

C-5tP Gamera shown with WSEN.

VERTICAL SYSTEM
Channels - Two left-hand plug-in compartments. Compatible with all 7000 Series plug-ins.
Bandwidth - Determined by mainframe and
plug-in unit. See page 218.
Option 09, Bandwidth Chllnge (250 MHz) 7704A vertical circuit performance is adjusted to
extend frequency response to 250 MHz at
20 mV/div (upper -3 dB) when 7~ is used.
Provides additional performance for those working in this frequency domain.
Rise Time - Determined by mainframe and
plug-in unit. See page 218.
Deflection Factor - Determined by plug-in
unit. See page 218.
DlsplllY Modes - Left, Alt, Add, Chop, Right.
Chopped mode repetition rate is internally selectable =100 kHz or 1 MHz.
Trace Sepllration - In dual sweep modes,
positions B trace above and below A trace.
Delay Line - Permits viewing leading edge of
waveform.

HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Channels - Two right-hand plug-in compartments. Compatible with all 7000 Series plug-ins.
Fastest Calibrllted Sweep Rllte - 2 ns/div.
Chopped Mode (between horizontal plugIns) - Repetition rate is internally selectable,
"",20 kHz or 200 kHz.
X-Y Mode - Phase shift is within 2° from dc to
50 kHz between vertical and horizontal channels.
Frequency response: < 10% down at 3 MHz.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT - Intemal 8 cm x 10 cm graticule with variable illumination. Accelerating potential is 24 kV.
GH (P31) phosphor is standard.
Option 04, CRT With Reduced Area - Internal 4 cm x 5 cm graticule with variable illumination. Accelerating potential is 24 kV. GH (P31)
phosphor is standard.

227

TEK

200 MHz
GENERAL PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPE SYSTEM

Option 13, Maximum Brightness CRT With
Reduced Area - Internal 4 cm x 5 cm graticule
with 8E (P11) phosphor. Accelerating potential is
24kV.
Option 78, BE (P11) Phosphor - Replaces
standard GH (P31) phosphor.

Typca
I I Ph otographic Wrltl ng Sjpe4ad· t
Writing SpHcI

CRT
Opt 04
4 emx 5 cm
Opt 13
4 emx 5cm
Opt 7B
B cm x 10 em

Ce_

Len.

ern/n.
2

C·51P

fll .2
1:0.5

4
2

., Using PolaroId T)Jl8 612 20,000 "SA FIm wfthout lin qptg.

Autofocus -

Reduces the need for additional
manual focusing with changes in intensity after
focus control has been set.
Beam Finder - Aids in locating offscreen
signal.
External Z-Axis Input - 2 V pop for full intensity range . A positive signal blanks the trace. Minimum pulse width to blank trace is 30 ns at 2 V.
Maximum input voltage is 15 V (dc + peak ac)
and POp ac. Input is dc-coupled.

OUTPUTS/INPUTS
+ Sawtooth - Sawtooth starts 1 V or less from
ground (into 1 MO). Internally selectable from A or
B horizontal. Output voltage is 50 mVldiv (± 15%)
into 500, 1 V/div(±10%} into 1 MO. Output R is
950 0 nominal.
+ Gate - Positive-going rectangular waveform
derived from A. 8, or Delayed Gate, internally selectable. Output voltage is 0.5 V (± 10%) into
50 0 , 10 V ( ± 10%) into 1 MO. Rise time is 20 ns or
less into 50 O. Output R is 950 0 nominal.
Vertical Signal Out - Selected by B Trigger
Source switch. Output voltage is 25 mV/div into
50 0 , 0.5 V/div into 1 MO. The bandwidth depends
upon vertical plug-in. Output R is 950 0 nominal.
External Single-Sweep Reset - Ground closure, rear panel input to reset sweep.
Camera Power - Three-prong connector to the
left of the CRT provides power, ground, and remote single-sweep reset access for the C-50 Series cameras.
Probe Power - Two rear panel connectors provide correct operating voltages for two active
probes.

7000
SERIES

CALIBRATOR
Voltage Output - Rectangular waveshape,
positive-going from ground (40 V and 4 mV available when selected by intemal jumper). Ranges
are 40 mV, 0.4 V, 4 V into 1 MO; 20 mV, 0.2 V,
0.4 V into 50 O. Amplitude accuracy is within 1%
(+ 15°C to +35°C); within 2% (O°C to +50°C).
Repetition rate is 1 kHz within 0.25% (+ 15°C to
+35°C); within 0.5% (O°C to +50°C).
Current Output - 40 mA rectangular waveshape with optional current-loop accessory
(012-0259-00) connected between 4 V and
ground pin jacks.

POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges - 90 V to 132 V ac and
180 V to 264 V ac.
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption - 180 W,

ORDERING INFORMATION
(PLUG-INS NOT INCLUDED)
7704A Oscilloscope

$5,635

Includ••: 20 in two-pin-to-BNC cable (175-1178-00);
instruction manual (070{)981{l2).
OPTIONS
Option 03 -

EMC Capability.

Option 04 - Maximum Brightness 4 em x
5 em CRT Display. GH (P31) Phosphor is Standard.
Option 09 -

Bandwidth Change to 250 MHz.
Option 13 - Maximum Brightness 4 em x
5 em CRT Display with BE (Pll) Phosphor.
Option 78 - BE (Pll) Phosphor.

+$395

+$500
+$525

+$800
+$100

CONVERSION KITS
CRT Re.dout - With Probe Power.
Order 04(}{)613-00

$780

EMC C.p.bllity -

$485

Order 04(}{)612-OO

2.5 A at 115 V line, 60 Hz.

Slgnsl OU1/ln -

ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY
Ambient Temperature - Operating: O°C to

INTERNATIONAL POWER PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 - Universal Euro 220 V, 50 Hz.
Option A2 - UK 24OV. 50Hz.
Option A3 - Australian 240 V. 50 Hz.
Option A4 - North American 240 V. 60 Hz.
OptIon A5 - Switzerland 220 V. 50 Hz.

+50°C. Nonoperating: - 55°C to + 75°C.
Operating: 5000 m (15,000 ft). Nonoperating: 15000 m (50,000 ft).
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each
of the three major axes. 0.04 cm (0.015 in) pop displacement 10 Hz to 50 Hz to 10 Hz in one minute
cycles. Held for three minutes at 50 Hz.
Humidity - Operating and Nonoperating :
95%, five cycles (120 hours), referenced to
MIL-E-164OOF.
Shock - Nonoperating: 30 g's, 112 sine, 11 ms
duration in each direction along each major axis.
Total of six shocks.
EMC Capability - (Option 03) Meets MIL-SID4618 requirements when tested in accordance
with certain test methods of MIL-STD-462. Contact your Tektronix representative for more
information.
Safety - UL listed (UL 1244) and CSA certified
(CSA556B).

Altitude -

Order 04(}{)619-03

$200

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Recommended Plug-In. - See page 218.
Recommended Probe. - See pages 219 and 464.
Recommended Cemeres - See pages 218 and 442.
Recommended C.rt - K213 Option 12. see page 462.
TRAINING
Tektronix offe,. . .rvlc. tnllnlng cl..... on the
n04A Gen.,.1 Purpo. . OscillOSCOpe. For further
tnllnlng Inform.Uon. confect your local 881•• /88rvice OffIce or reque.t • copy of the Customer Service T,.lnlng C.felog on the retum cerd In the beck
of thl. cefelog.

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
mm
In

DI...... IIon.
Wld1h
Height
Depth

3J5
345

Weight ...

Net
Shipping

13.6
19.5

12.0
13.6
22.7

Ib
3:1.0
43.0

The K213 cart shown with optional plug-in storage.

228

TEK

100 MHz
GENERAL PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES

7000
SERIES

7603/R7603
Dc to 100 MHz Bandwidth
3.5 ns Rise Time
5 ns /Div Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate
Greater Than 260 cm/lts Writing Speed
With Optional CRT (Option 13)
6.5 Inch CRT
CRT Readout
5.25 Inch Rackmount

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Digital Design and Testing
Communications
Spectrum Analysis
See page 220 for available Application Notes.

The Tektronix 7603 and R7603 Oscilloscopes represent the best price/performance ratio available in the 100 MHz plug-in
oscilloscope market today.
The CRT is large-8 x 10 division (1 .22 cm/
div)-and features an internal graticule with
variable illumination and 15 kV accelerating
potential. An optional maximum brightness
CRT with a smaller 8 cm x 10 cm display
and 18 kV potential gives you greater visual
brightness and higher photographic writing
speed. See page 186 for writing speed
specifications.

......-._.

-.
••- ...• .,
---• .'"••. -•,...
•

n, -:
i'

• -. •.
• •

..-.. GJ
-on-. [jJ
•

• 0

CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Channels - Two left-hand plug-in compartments. Compatible with all 7000 Series plug-ins.
Bandwidth - Determined by mainframe and
plug-in unit. See page 218.
Rise Time - Determined by mainframe and
plug-in unit. See page 218.
Deflection Factor - Determined by plug-in
unit. See page 218.
Display Modes - Left, Alt, Add, Chop, Right.
Chopped mode repetition rate is "'" 1 MHz.
Delay Line - Permits viewing leading edge of
displayed waveform.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Channels - One right-hand plug-in compartment. Compatible with all 7000 Series plug·ins,
Bandwidth - Dc to 2 MHz,
Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate - 5 ns/div,
X-Y Mode - The phase shift is within 2° from
dc to 35 kHz,

CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT - Internal 8 X 10 division (1 ,22 cm/div) graticule with variable illumination, Accelerating potential is 15 kV, GH (P31) phosphor is standard,
Option 01 , Without CRT Readout - (CRT
readout may be added later with conversion kit
040-0654-04),
Option 04, Maximum Brightness CRT With
Reduced Area - Internal 8 cm x 10 cm graticule with variable illumination. Accelerating potential is 18 kV, GH (P31) phosphor is standard,
Option 06, Spectrum Analyzer Graticule Provides internal spectrum analyzer graticule.
Option 13, Maximum Brightness CRT With
Reduced Area - Internal 8 cm x 10 cm graticule with BE (P11) phosphor. Accelerating potential1 8 kV, .
Optional Phosphors (Specify) GM (P7),
BE (P11), or GM (P7)/SA (phosphor/spectrum analyzer graticule combination),

Typical Photographic Writing Speed*1
Writing Speed
CRT

Camera

Len.

C·53

1/19
1.0.85

Standard
B d,v x t o dlV
Opt 13
B em x l 0em
Opt 78
8 em x IDem

cm/~'

122

260
180

. , USing Polaroid Type 1073,000 ASA nlm WIthout film fogging,

Autofocus - Reduces the need for additional
manual focusing with changes in intensity after
focus control has been set.
Beam Finder - Aids in locating an offscreen
signal.
External Z-Axis Input - 2 V pop for full intensity range from dc to 2 MHz; intensity range diminishes to 20% of full range at 10 MHz, A positive
signal blanks the trace. Maximum input voltage is
10 V (dc + peak ac) and pop ac,

229

TEK

7000

100 MHz
GENERAL PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPE

SERIES

CALIBRATOR
Voltage Output Rectangular waveshape,
positive-going from ground (dc voltage available
when selected by internal jumper).
Voltage Ranges - 40 mY, 0.4 V, 4 V into 1 MO;
20 mY, 0.2 V, 0.4 V into 50 O. Amplitude accuracy
is within 1% (+ 15°C to +35°C); within 2% (O°C
to +SO°C). Repetition rate is ",,1 kHz.
Current Output 40 rnA rectangular waveshape (dc current available when selected by internal jumper) with optional current-loop accessory (012-0259-00) connected between 4 V and
ground pin jacks. Output R is 950 O.
OUTPUTS/INPUTS
+Sawtooth Out (Rear Panel) - Sawtooth
starts 1 V or less from ground (into 1 MO). Output
voltage is 1 V/div (± 10%) into 1 MO, 50 mV/div
(± 15%) into SO O. Output R is 950 O.
+Gate Out (Rear Panel) - Positive gate of the
same duration and coincident with sweep. Selectable from Main, Delay, or Auxiliary Gate. Output
voltage is 10 V (± 10%) into 1 MO, 0.5 V (± 10%)
into SO fl. Rise time is 20 ns or less into 50 fl. Output R is 9SO fl.
Vertical Signal Out (Rear Panel) - Selected
by Trigger Source switch. Output voltage is
0.5 V/div into 1 Mfl, 25 mV/div into SO O. Output R
is 9SO fl. 8andwidth determined by vertical plugin. See page 219.
Camera Power - Three-prong connector to the
left of the CRT provides power, ground, and remote single-sweep reset access for the C-SO Series cameras.
External Single-Sweep Reset - Ground closure, rear panel 8NC provides input to reset
sweep.
Single-Sweep Ready Output - Rear panel
8NC provides 5 V out to indicate single-sweep
ready condition.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges - 100, 110, 120, 200,
220, and 240 V ac ± 10%; intemally selectable
with quick-change jumpers.
Line Frequency - SO Hz to 60 Hz.
Option OS, Line Frequency Change (50 Hz to
400 Hz) - Converts the R7603 and 7603 from
SO Hz to 400 Hz operation.
Maximum Power Consumption 180 W,
2.0 A at 115 V line, 60 Hz. Cooling is provided by
a fan .
ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY
Ambient Temperature - Operating: O°C to
+sooC. Nonoperating: -ssoC to + 75°C.
Altitude - Operating: 5000 m (15,000 ft). Nonoperating: 15000 m (SO,OOO ft).

ORDERING INFORMATION
(PLUG-INS NOT INCLUDED)
Ordering information is common to the 7603 and R7603
unless otherwise noled.

7603 Oscilloscope

$3,670

Includes: Clear CRT filter (337-170004); blue CRT filter
(337-1700-01); 20 in two-pin-to-BNC cable (175-1178-00);
instruction manual (070-131000).

R7603 Rackmount Oscilloscope

$4,160

Includes: In addition to the above, a rackmounting hardware kit (016OO9!HXl).

The 7L 14 converts the 7W3 Oscilloscope to a 1.8 GHz
Spectrum Analyzer.

Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each
of the three major axes. 0.04 cm (0.015 in) pop displacement 0 Hz to SS Hz to 9 Hz in one minute
cycles. Held for three minutes at 55 Hz.
Humidity - Operating and Nonoperating :
95%, five cycles (120 hours), referenced to
MIL -E-16400F.
Shock - Nonoperating: 30 g's, 1/2 sine, 11 ms
duration in each direction along each major axis.
Total of six shocks.
EMC Capability - (Option 03) Meets MIL-STD1-A-61818. Contact your Tektronix representative
for more information.
Safety - CSA certified (CSA 5568).
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dlmenalona
Width
Height
Depth

Cablnel
mm
In
221
200
610

8 .7
11 .4
24.0

Weigh..""

Net

t3.6
20.8

30.0
46.0

Shipping

Rackmount
mm
In
483
133

6Z1
kg
13.6
19.0

19.0
5.0
24.7

Ib
30.0
42.0

OPTIONS
Option 01 - Without CRT Readout.
Option 03 - EMC Capability. Adds special
shielding for protection to the instrument when
operated in severe EMC environments.
Option 04 - Maximum Brightness 8 em x
10 cm CRT Display. GH (P31) Phosphor is Standard.
Option 05 - Line Frequency Change (50 Hz
to 400Hz).
Option 06 - With Internal Spectrum Analyzer
Graticule.
Option 08 - (7603) Protective Panel Cover.
Option 13 - Maximum Brightness 8 cm x
10 cm CRT Display with BE (P11) Phosphor.
Option 20 - (R7603) IEEE Standard 488 Interface for the 7020 only. (Deletes rear panel
+ sawtooth out, + gate 001, and vert sig 001.)
Option 76 - GM (P7) Phosphor.
Option n - GM (P7) Phosphor with Internal
Spectrum Analyzer Graticule.
Option 78 - BE (P11) Phosphor.

-$260

+$395

+$500
+$315

+ $50
+$115
+$800

+$105
+$100
+$100
+$100

CONVERSION KITS
CRT Readout - (7603) Order 0400054-04
(R7603) Order ()4(}{)674-04
EMC Capability - (7603) Order 04(}l(XX}OO
(R7603) Order ()4(}{)955{X)
Power Supply - To Light Plug-in Pushbuttons. Order 0400086{)1
X-Y Horizontal Comp - Order ()4(){)718-00

$n5
$650
$395

$300
$65
$390

INTERNATIONAL POWER PLUG OPTIONS
Option A1 - Universal Euro 22fJV, 50Hz.
Option A2 - UK 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A3 - Australian 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A4 - North American 240 V, 60 Hz.
Option AS - Switzerland 22fJ V, 50 Hz.
FIELD INSTAUED KITS
Field Inatallable Option 20 - (R7603 only)
Intended for use with a previously purchased
R7603. This kit provides parts to connect the
1020's IEEE Standard 488 Interface to the
R7603 mainframe. Order 04(}1~
RYe field installed kits are available for the international power plug options, A 1-AS. Contact
your local Tektronix Sales Office for information.
A1 - Universal Euro. Order 04(}1094{x)
A2 - UK. Order 04(}1005-out film
fogging.

The photographic writing speed enhancer, Option 22, provides a preset automatic method of
film fogging for the 7844. Option 22 is recommended for writing speed enhancement when a
camera with a writing speed enhancer is not
available.
Autofocus - Reduces the need for additional
manual focusing with changes in intensity after
focus control has been set.
Beam Finder (Beam 1 and Beam 2, Independent Controls) - Aids in locating off screen
signal.
External Z-Axis Input (Beam 1 and Beam 2)
- 2 V pop for full intensity range. A positive signal blanks the trace. Maximum input voltage is
15 V (dc + peak ac), pop ac and de coupled.
CALIBRATOR
Voltage Output - Rectangular waveform positive-going from ground, 1 kHz (±0.25%).
Voltage Ranges - 4 mV, 40 mV , 0.4 V,
4V(±1%) into an open circuit; 0.4mV, 4mV,
40 mV, 0.4 V (± 1%) into 50 fl.

SERIES

Current Output - 40 mA (± 1%) rectangular
waveshape. Front panel current loop on 7844; optional current loop adaptor (012-034HlO) required
for R7844. Output R is 450 fl.
OUTPUTS/ INPUTS
A and B + Sewtooth - Sawtooth starts 1 V or
less from ground (into 1 Mfl). Output voltage is
50 mVldiv (± 15%) into 50 fl, 1 V/div (± 10%) into
1 Mfl. Output R is ",,950 fl.
A and B + Gate - Positive-going rectangular
waveform derived from Main or Delayed Gate.
Output voltage 0 .5 V (± 10%) into 50 fl .
10V(±10%) into 1 Mfl. Rise time is 5ns or less
into 50 fl. Output R is ",,950 fl.
Camera Power - Three-prong connector to the
left of the CRT provides power, ground, and remote single-sweep reset access for C-50 Series
cameras.
Probe Power - Two connectors provide correct operating voltages for two active probes.
External Single-Sweep Reset - Ground closure, rear panel BNC, provides input to reset
sweeps.
Single-Sweep Ready Output - +5 V, rear
panel BNC output , for single-sweep ready
indication.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges - Selectable 115 V nominal (90 to 132 V), 230 V nominal (180 to 264 VI.
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption - 235 W,
2.9 A at 60 Hz 115 V line.
ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY
Ambient Temperature Operating: 0° to
+50°C. Nonoperating: -55° to + 75°C.
AHltude - Operating: 5000 m (15,000 ft). Nonoperating: 15000 m (50,000 ft).
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each
p disof the three major axes. 0.04 cm (0,015 in) PO
placement 10 Hz to 50 Hz to 10 Hz in one minute
cycles. Held for three minutes at 50 Hz.
Humidity - Operating and Nonoperating :
95%, five cycles (120 hours) , referenced to
MIL-E-16400F.
Shock - Nonoperating: 30 g's, '12 sine, 11 ms
duration in each direction along each major axis.
Total of six shocks.
EMC CapabilHy - (Option 03) Meets MIL-STD461B requirements when tested in accordance
with certain test methods of MIL-STD-462. Contact your Tektronix representative for more
information.
Safety - UL listed (UL 1244) and CSA certified
(CSA556B).
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
R.ckmount

Cabinet
Dlrnen.lon.
Width
Height
Depth

mm
:Jl5
328
005

In
12.0
12.9
Zl8

mm
483
178

630

In
19.0
7.0
24.8

Welghll ...

Net
Shipping

16.3
21 .3

36.0
47.0

15.0
28.5

33.0
63.0

ORDERING INFORMATION
(PLUG-INS NOT INCLUDED)
Ordering information is common to the 7844 and R7844
unless otherwise noted.

7844 Oscilloscope

R7844 Rackmount OSCillOSCOpe

$15,810

Include.: In addition to the above a hardware rackmount kit (01&0099-00); slide guide (35H1314.o1).
OPTIONS
Option 03 - EMC capability. Adds special
shielding for protection to the instrument when
operated in severe EMC environments.
Option 21 - Dedicated Mode. Left vertical is
dedicated to Beam 1; right vertical is dedicated to Beam 2.
Option 22 - Writing Speed Enhancer.
Option 78 -

BE (P11) Phosphor.

CONVERSION KIT
EMC Capebllity - (7844) Order 040-0034.01

+$395
NC
+$400
+$100
$535

INTERNATIONAL POWER PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 - Universal Euro 220 V, 50 Hz.
Option A2 - UK 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A3 - Australian 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A4 - North American 240 V, 00 Hz.
Option A5 - Switzerland 220 V, 50 Hz.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Recommended Plug-In. - See page 218.
Recommended Probe. - See pages 219 and 464.
Recommended Camera. - See pages 218 and 442.
Recommended Carts K213 Option 12 (7844), see page 462.
K217 (R7844), see page 462.

A6902B Isolator

A dual-channel, optical and transformercoupled voltage isolator, the A69028 allows
safely grounded test instruments to make
floating measurements at high sensitivity
levels in the presence of large commonmode signals.
Designed for use with any dual-channel oscilloscope , the A69028 permits simultaneous observation of two signals at two different points in the same circuit; or signals
in two different circuits without respect to
common lead voltages. See page 479.
A6902B Isolator

232

$15,365

Include.: Power cord (16HXl6&OO); instruction manual
(07Q-167&Q2).

$1,795

TEK

7000 SERIES
CRT STORAGE MAINFRAMES

7613

7623A

7633

A Selection of Storage Modes
7000 Series storage mainframes offer a
selection of storage modes and features:
• Bistable-For long view time
• Fast Bistable-Gaptures fast single or
multiple events
• Variable Persistence-High contrast
displays
• Fast Variable Persistence-Provides maximum stored writing rate

NEW 7934

CONTENTS
7934 Fast Storage "',., , ", ... , . , .,...
7633/R7633 Multimode Storage .,. , ' ,'"
7623A1R7623A Multimode Storage . , .,.,
7613/R7613 Variable Persistence Storage ,
Nonstorage Mainframes .. " ,. " " , ." ,
Plug-Ins , , .... , . , . , . , . , ........ , . , , , "
High Performance Digitizing Mainframes .

234
236
236
236
221
239
324

Selection of Writing Speeds
Storage mainframes in the 7000 Series offer
a full selection of stored writing speeds:
from "",0,03 cm//J.s for mechanical, spectrum analysis, or TOR applications, to
4 cm/ns for capturing fast Single events
such as high speed digital logic,

7854 Digital Storage (400 MHz Wavefonn Processing),

See page 338,

7000 SERIES STORAGE SELECTION GUIDE
Features
Bandwidth
Maximum Sweep Rate
Rise Time
Stored Writing Speed
Storage Mode
Bistable
Fast Bistable
Variable Persistence
Fast Variable Persistence
Page
Prices Begin At·'

NEW 7934

7633/R7633

7623A/R7623A

7613/R7613

500 MHz

100 MHz

500 ps/div

5 ns/dv

5 ns/div

700 ps

3,5 ns

4 cm/ns

1000 cm/",s

135 cm/p.S

4,5 cm/p.S

v
v
v
v
234

v
v
v
v
236

v
236

$13,365

$9,215/9,725

$7,13517,580

$6,145/6,610

., PrIce does not Include plug-In.

233

TEK

7000

FAST
STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE

SERIES

NEW 7934
Dc to 500 MHz Bandwidth
700 ps Single-Shot Rise Time
Storage Capability
4 em/ns Stored Writing Speed
500 ps/Dlv Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate
Multimode Storage Flexibility
Wide Selection of Plug-In Amplifiers and
Time Bases

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Laser Research
High Speed Logic
ESD Testing
Data Base Analysis
See page 220 for available Application Notes.
The 7934 Storage OscillOSCOpe is designed
for fast single-shot, low repetition rate, and
high speed pulse analysis. The 7934 captures the most difficult types of signals for
stored viewing and analysis. This includes
storing unexpected transient pulses common in power generation and nuclear test
studies, high frequency bursts occurring at
low repetition rates, and fast pulses in applications ranging from lasers to high speed
Eel design.
'
A 4 cm/ns storage writing rate, 700 ps rise
time , and 500 MHz bandwidth ensure undistorted capture and clear display of the
fastest waveform details.
The 7934 stores single-shot rise times to 700
ps, 3.6 cm high, at eight divisions amplitude,
in the reduced scan mode. The 7934's mainframe bandwidth is 500 MHz. The system
bandwidth may vary from 00 MHz to 500
MHz, depending on the plug-in selected.*1
The instrument has four storage modes :
Bistable, Variable Persistence, Fast Bistable
and Fast Variable Persistence.
Bistable provides stored displays with long
(30 minute) view time.
Variable Persistence gives high contrast
displays of both single-shot and repetitive
phenomena. When viewing changing waveshapes, variable persistence provides continuous bright displays of new information
as old information fades from the CRT.
Fast Bistable increases bistable writing
speed to 350 cm/lts (reduced scan).
Fast Variable Persistence provides the maximum stored writing speed of 4 crn/ns (reduced scan) . View time is at least 30
seconds.
The 7934 also offers Store Off for conventional oscilloscope use . . . Multitrace Delay
to adjust view time before the next stored
trace in Fast transfer . . . Storage level for
adjustable writing speed . . . Save to pre'r High gain differential amplifiers offer wwy high gain sl lower

bsndWIdths.

234

vent display erasure and provide up to
3O-times extension of viewing time in the
variable perSistence modes . . . Auto Erase
with time interval selection to more than 10
seconds between erasures.
The 7934 has four plug-in compartments with
pushbutton selection of active compartments
and trigger sources. There is also a choice of
over 30 Tektronix 7CXXJ Series plug-in amplifiers, time bases, and special purpose plugins. This provides the flexibility to design a
complete measurement system to fit a specific need, and quickly change it when measurement needs change.

CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Channels - Two left-hand plug-in compartments. Compatible with all 7000 Series plug-ins.
Bandwidth - 500 MHz with 7A29 Amplifier plugin. See page 218.
Rise Time - 700 ps or less with 7A29 Amplifier
plug-in (1 .1 ns at 10 mV). See page 218.
Deflection Factor - Determined by plug-in
unit. See page 218.
Display Modes - Left, Alt, Add, Chop, Right.
Chopped mode repetition rate is """ 1 MHz.
Trace Separation - In dual-sweep modes,
positions B trace at least four divisions above or
below the A trace.

Delay Une - Permits viewing leading edge of
displayed waveform (not recommended for use
with 7850 Series time bases).
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Channels - Two right-hand plug-in compartments. Compatible with most 7000 Series plugins. 7000 Series vertical amplifiers and special
plug-ins may also be used,
Bandwidth - Dc to at least 1 MHz.
Display Modes - A, Alt, Chop, B. Chopped
mode repetition rate is "",,200 kHz.
Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate - 500 ps/div.
X-Y Mode - Phase shift between vertical and
horizontal channels is within 2° from dc to 35 kHz
without phase correction (dc to 1 MHz with phase
correction, B horizontal only, Option 02). Bandwidth is dc to at least 1 MHz.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT - Internal variable illuminated graticule.
8 x 10 division (0.9 cm/div) graticule in full scan
and 8 x 10 division (0.45 cm/div) in reduced scan.
Accelerating potential is "",,10 kV full scan mode,
and 12 kV in reduced scan mode. GH (P31) phosphor standard.
Auto Focus - Maintains CRT focus following
changes in display intensity after focus control
has been set.
Beam Finder - Aids in locating an off-screen
signal.
CRT Display Modes - Store Off, Bistable, Variable Persistence, Fast Bistable and Fast Variable
Persistence (full and reduced scan).

7000

TEK

FAST
STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE

SERIES

Auto Erase - Continuously variable from < 1 s
to > 10s.
Multitraee Delay - Adjusts the transfer cycle
time in the fast transfer modes. Continuously variable from <1 s to >4 s.
Persistence - (Variable Persistence Mode
only) Controls rate of continuous erasure of the
variable persistence and fast variable persistence
stored displays.
Save - Prevents display from being accidentally erased, and provides up to 30 times longer
viewing times in variable persistence modes.
External Z-Axis Input - 2 V pop for full intensity range from dc to 1 MHz. Positive signal blanks
the trace. Maximum input voltage is 15 V (dc plus
peak ac).
Storage Writing Speed

CALIBRATOR
Voltage Output - Squarewave, positive-going
from ground.
Voltage Range - 40 mV, 0.4 V, and 4 V into
100 kfl; 4 mV, 40 mV, and 0.4 V into 50 fl. Amplitude accuracy is within 1%; repetition rate is
1 kHz within 0.25%.
Current Output - 40 mA squarewave with optional current-loop accessory (012-0341-(lO) connected to calibrator output. Output A is 450 fl.
OUTPUTS/ INPUTS
+Sawtooth - Starts 1 V or less from ground into
1 Mfl. Output voltage is 1 Vld'rv (± 10%) into 1 Mfl,
50 mV/d'rv (± 15%) into 50 fl. Output A is =950 fl.

Full Scan (Center 8 dlv • 8 dlv at 0 9 cm/dlv)
Dtaplay Faat Variable
Mode
Perslatence

Faat
lliamble

Variable
Perslatence

lliamble

Stored
Writing
Speed

ZTOcm/1'5
(:nJdlv/l'5)

45cm/1'5
(SO div/l'5)

1.8cm/1'5
(2 divll'5)

O.Wcm/1'5
(.03 divll'5)

l:) s"

:Jlmin

1.4 s

14 s

View

Time

:J)

s·'

l:) min

t=t::sErase
Time

0.9s

Reduced Scan (Cent.r 8 dlv • 10 dlv at 0 45 cm/dlv)
Dlaplay F..t Variable
Perslatenc.
Mode

Faat
lliamble

Variable
P....latenc.

lliatable

Stored
Writing
Speed

4cm/ns
(8.9 dlvlns)

350cm/1'5
(776 divll'5)

5.4cm/1'5
(1 2div/l'5)

0.09cm/1'5
(02div/l'5)

View
Time-'

3)5·'

l:) min

l:) s"

l:) min

14s

14 s

09s

0.9s

R::IErase
Time

In laser research - The 7934 captures 8 laser primary and
reflected pulse using Fast Variable Persistence storage (reduced scan) and M-tl 7A29 plug-ins in AfX) mode.

Fast Variable Persistence Writing Speed
Scan
Mode

Sweep
Speed

Reduced Scan
B,900div/l'5
(0.45 emldlv)

Peak-to-Peak
Slnewav.

St.p
R.apon.e

7.1 dill

325 MHz

7.7 div
1.07 ns

BdlY
290 MHz

BdlY
1.2ns

3.2d.v
30 MHz

3dIY
IOns

6AdIY
15 MHz

5div
16.6ns

.. 1 ns/dill

Full Scan
l:JOdili/ps
(0.9cmldlY)

ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY
Ambient Temperature Operating: O°C to
+50°C. Nonoperating: -55°C to + 75°C.
Altitude - Operating: 5000 m (15,000 It). Nonoperating: 15000 m (50,000 ft).
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each
of the three major axes. 0.04 cm (0.015 in) pop displacement 10 Hz to 55 Hz to 10 Hz in one minute
cycles. Held for three minutes at 55 Hz, referenced to MIL-T-288OOC.
Humidity - Operating/Nonoperating: 95%, 5 cycles (120 hours), referenced to MIL-E-l6400F.
Shock - Nonoperating: 30 g's, '12 sine, 11 ms
duration in each direction along each major axis.
Total of six shocks, referenced to MIL-T-288OOC.
EMC Capabilty - Meets MIL-STD-461B requirements when tested in accordance with certain
test methods of MIL-STD-462. Contact your Tektronix representative for more information.
Safety - UL listed (UL 1244) and CSA certified
(CSA 5568); meets VDE 0871 Class B.

.. IOnS/dill

125

12 5

1 25

\I\,

\~~

I~ \

-r'

~~<.

~~~

~\~

I~~'i

\\"

'\
1\

100

200

soc

SINEWAVE FREQUENCY (MHz)

Graph showing the stored writing speed needed to display
8 given sinewsve or step rise time 8t 8 given amplitude.
., RscJUCBd Scan divisions ars 0.45 em.

Width
Height
Depth

l:J5

345
622.5

Welght =

Net. without plug·ins
$hipping, Without plug-Ins

17.2
21 .6

In
12.0
13.6
24.5

Ib
37.B
47.6

(PLUG-INS NOT INCLUDED)

7934 Storage Oscilloscope
Includes: Installed gray

CRT

fi~er

$13,365

filter (378-0025-{)2); green
(37S{X325{)!): power cord (161-ro5&OO); opera-

tor's manual (07(}587900).

Glitch Gapture- TI1e 7934 captures 8 glitch (near the 8th)
using a 7A29 plug-in and variable persistence storage.

~1\\\
L .}~

1\ \
\

Dlmenalona

ORDERING INFORMATION

STEP RISE TIME (n.)

250

POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges - 90 V to 132 V ac and
180 V to 250 V ac.
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption - 230 W.

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

. , View tImes ars at full storscJ display intensity. They may be
incrsasscJ mors than 30 times by using rscJUCBd Intensity in
the Savs display mods.

Camera Power - Three-prong connector to the
left of the CAT provides power, ground, and remote
single-sweep reset access for the C-50 Series
cameras.
Probe Power - Two rear panel connectors for
two active probes.

+Gate - Positive pulse of the same duration
and coincident with sweep selectable from A
Gate, B Gate or A Delayed Gate. Output voltage
is 10 V (± 10%) into 1 Mfl, 0.5 V (± 10%) into
50 fl. Output A is ",,950 fl.
Vertical Signal Out - Selected by B Trigger
Source switch. Output voltage is 0.5 V (± 10%)
into 1 Mfl, 25 mV (± 10%) into 50 fl. Output A is
=950 fl.
Bandwidth Determined by vertical plug-in.
See page 218.
Remote Single Sweep Reset, Remote Save
and Remote Erase - Aear panel BNC connector inputs, ground closure activated.
Remote Fast Transfer Gate - TTL compatible. Low to high transition enables high speed
target to receive information to be stored; high to
low transition initiates transfer from high speed
target to storage target.

OPTIONS
Option 02 X-Y Mode Phase Correction.
Adds X· Y delay compensation networK to equalize the signal delay between either vertical c0mpartment and the B horizontal compartment.
Option 03 - EMC capability. Adds special
shielding for protection to the instrument when
operated in severe EMC environments.
CONVERSION KITS
X-V Mode Phase CorrectionOrder 04(}()942-Q 1
EMC Capability - Order ()4(}1195- 10 s. 7613/R7613:
Erase time is 0.5 s or less.
Save - Prevents accidental erasure of display
and extends view time up to 30 times longer in all
modes.
Persistence - (Variable) Controls rate of continuous erasure of stored displays.

0.45 em.

External Z-Axis Input - 2 V p-p for useful
intensity range from dc to 2 MHz. Intensity range
diminishes to 20% of full range at 10 MHz.
Positive signal blanks the trace. Maximum input
voltage is 10 V (dc + peak ac) and p-p ac.
Storage Writing Speed
Full Scan (7833/R7833 end 7823A/R7823A)

DI.pIa,
Mode

Feet
VeNoble
P...let.nc.

Fe.t
8Ilteble

VeNobl.
P.,.I.tenc:.

Bleteble

Stored

writing
Speed

View
TIf1le

_ Erase
Tome

135

eml~s

:J)

s· '

1.4 s

45 emI~s
:J) min

minimum
1.4 s

0.45 emI,.s ~.03 eml,.s
3) min

:J)

s·'

0.9s

minimum

0.9 s

Reduced Scan (7833/R7833 only)

DI.pI.,
Mode

F••t
VeNobie
P.....tenc.

F••t
BI.tebie

1(0) emI,.s

11K) eml~s

V.Nobie
P.,.let.nc.

81.teble

Store
Writing

Speed
View
Tome

1.35 eml,.s ~.09 eml,.s
:J) min

:J) min
3)

8·'

minimum

:J)

s·'

minimum

_ Erase
1.4 s
1.4 s
0.9 s
0.9 s
., T1IBss times are at full stonKJ display IntlHlSlty. T1I6y may be
Increassd more IhBn 30 limes by using reduced Intsnsity In
the Sa", dispiBy mode.
Time

237

TEK

MULTIMODE AND VARIABLE PERSISTENCE
STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES

Fast Variable Persistence Writing Speed
Scan Mode

sw. .p
Speed

Reduced Scan"

2200 d iv/pS

.. 5 nsldiv

(0.45 em/div)

Full Scan"
150 d iv/~ s
(0.9 em/div)

.. 50 nsldiv

Peak-ta-Peak
Sinewave

Step
Re.pon.e

7.1 div
100 MHz
8 div
89 MHz

7.7 div
3.5 ns
800
3.7 ns

3.2 div
15 MHz
6.4 div
7.5 MHz

7000
SERIES

POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges - 100 V, 110V, 120 V,
200 V, 220 V, and 240 V ac ± 10%; internally se-

Option 23 - (763317623A17613 only)
VDE RPM Mark.

lectable with quick change jumpers.

CRT Readout (763317623A) Order 040-074&01
(R7633JR7623A) Order 040-0759-03
(7613) Order 04()-()656.{)4.'
(R7613) Order 040-007&Q4.'
EMC Capability (763317623A17613) Order 04Q-0663{)1
(R7633JR7623A1R7613) Order 040{)678{)1
Una Frequency Change (76131R7613 only) Order 040{)687{)2
Power Supply - To light plug-in
pushbuttons. Order 040{)686{)1
. , To ordBr, ccntBCI your local Tektronix Sales Office.

Line Frequency - 50 Hz to 60 Hz.
Option OS, Line Frequency Change (50 Hz to
400 Hz) - Converts 50 Hz to 400 Hz operation.
Maximum Power Consumption - 180 W,
2.0 A at 115 V line, 60 Hz. Fan cooling is provided

3 div

20 ns
5 div
33 ns

for all models.

"Applies to 7633/R7633 QfI/y.
" Applies to 7633/R7633 and 7623A1R7623A.

Save Time Control - (7613/R7613 only) Allows

ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY
Ambient Temperature - Operating: O°C to

an extension of the view time (see Storage View
+50°C. Nonoperating: - 55°C to + 75°C.
Time Chart on page 237).
Altitude - Operating: 5000 m (15,000 It). NonStorage Viewing Time - (7613IR7613 only) operating: 15000 m (50,000 It).
Amount of time the stored signal can be viewed
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each
before it fades away.
of the three major axes. 0.04 cm (0.015 in) pop
At the maximum writing speed the view time is
displacement 10 Hz to 55 Hz to 10 Hz in one min15 s or 0.25 minutes with the stored intensity conute cycles. Held for three minutes at 55 Hz
trol fully cwo Adjusting the stored intensity ccw ' (MIL-T-28800B). .
will reduce the stored writing speed, but view
Humidity - Operating and Nonoperating: 95%,
time can be increased up to five minutes (see the
five cycles (120 hours), referenced to MIL-E-164OOF.
chart below).
Shock - Nonoperating: 30 g 's, 'k sine, 11 ms
60 .0 , . . - - - - - - - - , - - - - - - - - ,
duration in each direction along each major axis.
w
:E
Total of six shocks (MIL-T-288OOC).
i=
EMC Capability - Meets MIL-STD-461B re~:
quirements when tested in accordance with cer>'5
tain test methods of MIL-SID462. Contact your
wE
~ ~ 5 0 '-=--=...:...;.-::..:....--+-=:::--::,.__-___l
Tektronix representative for more information.
a:
Safety - UL listed (UL 1244) and CSA certified
~ 1.0 1---=..!llI..;c-..,>STT~~c:::::::,.__--___l
(CSA556B).
II>
0.25 L-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _.-:.:.:~:A._=~
0 .1

positive-going from ground (dc voltage available
when selected by internal jumper).
Voltage Ranges - 40 mY, 0.4 V, 4 V into 1 MD;
20 mV, 0.2 V, 0.4 V into 50 D. Amplitude accuracy
is within 1% (15°C to 35°C); within 2% (O· C to
50°C). Repetition rate is ",, 1 kHz.
Current Output - 40 rnA rectangular waveshape with optional current-loop accessory
(012 -0259-00) connected between 4 V and
ground pin jacks. Output R is ",,450 D.

OUTPUTS/INPUTS
+ Sawtooth - Sawtooth starts 1 V or less from
ground into 1 MD. Output voltage is 50 mV/div
( ± 15%) into 50 D, 1 V/div ( ± 10%) into 1 MD. Output R is 950 D within 2%.
+ Gate - Positive going waveform of the same
duration and coincident with sweep selectable
from main, delay, or auxiliary gate. Output voltage
is 0.5 V (±10%) into 50 D, 10 V ( ± 10%,) into
1 MD. Rise time is 20 ns or less into 50 D. Output R is 950 D within 2%.
Vertical Signal Out - Selected by Trigger
Source switch. Output voltage is 25 mV/div into
50 D, 0.5 V/div into 1 MD. Output R is 950!l within
2%. Bandwidth is determined by vertical plug-in.
See page 218.
Camera Power Output - Three-prong connector to the lelt of the CRT provides power, ground
and remote single-sweep reset access for the
C-50 Series cameras.
External Single-Sweep Reset - Ground closure; rear panel BNC input to reset sweep.
Remote Erase - Rear panel BNC connector
inputs, ground closure activated.

238

$465
$395
$230
$85

INTERNATIONAL POWER PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 - Universal Euro 220 V, SO Hz.
Option A2 - UK 240 V, SO Hz.
Option A3 - Australian 240 V, SO Hz.
Option A4 - Nor1h American 240 V, 60 Hz.
Option AS - Switzerland 220 V, SO Hz.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Recommended Plug-In. - See page 218.
Recommended Probe. - See pages 219 and 464.
RECOMMENDED CARTS
K213 Opt 12 - (763317623A17613) See page 462.
1<217 - (R76331R7623A1R7613) See page 462.

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

5.0

STORED WRITING SPEED
(div/lts at MAXIMUM PERSISTENCE)
CALIBRATOR
Voltage Output - Rectangular waveshape,

+ $50

CONVERSION KITS

Cabinet
Dlmen. lon.

Width
Height
Depth

221

:Jl5
fB7

Rackmount
In

8.7
12.0
23.5

Weigh.....

Net
Shipping

13.6
19.0

30.0
42.0

483

19.0
5.3
22.3

133

566
kg

14.5
28.2

32.0
62.0

ORDERING INFORMATION
(PLUG-INS NOT INCLUDED)
7633 Storage Oscilloscope
$9,215
Include.: 20 in two-pin-to-eNC cable (175-1178-00);
green CRT filter (37&0625-08); power cord (161-006&00);
instruction manual (070.1767-00).

R7633 Storage Oscilloscope

$9,725

Include.: Same as 7633 plus rackmounting hardware.

7623A Storage Oscilloscope

$7,135

Include.: Same as 7633, instruction manual replaced
with 07o.l685{)().

R7623A Storage Oscilloscope

$7,580

Include.: Same as 7633 plus rackmounting hardware,
instruction manual replaced with 07o.l685{)().

7613 Storage Oscilloscope

$6,145

Include.: 20 in two-pin-to-eNC cable (175-1178-00);
gray CRT filter (378~2); power cord (161-006&00);
instruction manual (07o.l46:W1).

R7613 Storage Oscilloscope

$6,610

Include.: Same as 7613 plus rackmounting hardware.
OPTIONS
Option 01 - Without CRT Readout.
Option 03 - EMC capability. Adds special
shielding for protection to the instrument when
operated in severe EMI environments.
(763317623A17613)
(R7633JR7623A1R7613)
Option 05 - Line Frequency Change (SO Hz
to 400 Hz).
Option 06 - (76131R7613 only) Special Internal Graticule (Spectrum Analyzer).
Option 08 - (763317623A17613 only) Protective Panel Cover.

- $280

K213 cart shown with optlonsl plug-in storsge and keyboard
drawer (Option 22).

+ $395
+ $375

RECOMMENDED CAMERAS
See pages 219 and 442.
C-53P - General purpose. See page 451.
C-5C Option 01 - Low cost. See page 445.

+ $315
+ $50
+$15

$1,940
$465

A6902B
Allows high CMRR differential, floating and
high voltage measurements safely. See
page 479.
A6902B Isolator

$1 ,795

TEK

7000 SERIES PLUG-INS
7A29

CONTENTS

7A19

~tnfO H

VO l TI/OIV

VOLT_/ oIV

-.,

~
7AZI

'..

•

~...,

AMPU FI~.

1-- - - - - - \'

AMruFlEIIII

7A19

Dc to 1 GHz Amplifier

Dc to 600 MHz Amplifier

7A29

Dc Stability - Drift with Ambient Temperature
(Line Voltage Constant): 0.04 div/ oC or less.
Input Protection - Intemal detection circuitry
provides protection by automatically disconnecting excessive signals of up to SO V, The 'disconnected' condition is indicated and has manual
reset.

Dc to 1 GHz Bandwidth
10 mV/Dly to 1 V/Diy
Calibrated Deflection Facto,.
500 Input
±500 ps Variable Delay Line (Option 04)
The 7A29 is a high performance, wide band,
single trace amplifier which provides a bandwidth of 1 GHz in the 7100 Series mainframes. Bandwidth is constant over the entire
range of calibrated deflection sensitivities of
10 mV/div to 1 V/div. Input impedance is
50 n. Manually resettable input protection circuitry protects the input against most common overloads . Polarity of the display is
selectable by a front panel switch. An optional variable delay line (front panel adjustable)
permits matching the transit time of two
7A29s and/or probes to better than 10 ps.

CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Dc Coupled: 1 GHz (10 mV/div to
1V/div).
Deflection Factor - Calibrated: 10 mV/div to
1 V/div in seven steps (1 -2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 2% with gain adjusted at 0.1 V/div.
Uncalibrated: Variable continuously between
steps and a maximum of at least 2.5 V/div (with
some bandwidth reduction).
Input Z - 50 {l.
Ac Coupling - -3 dB at 1 kHz or less from a
50 {l source.
Option 04, Variable Signal Delay - Permits
matching the transit time of two preamps and
probes to better than 10 ps, Range is ±5OO ps.
Maximum Input Voltage - Dc Coupled: SOV
or 10 V RMS (whichever is less), Ac Coupled:
100 V additional.

ORDERING INFORMATION
7 A29 Amplifier

$3,325

Include.: Instruction manual (07(}232(}{)() .

Option 04 -

Variable Signal Delay.

+$435

7A19
Dc to 600 MHz Bandwidth

Amplifiers
7A29.7A19 Wideband Single Channel
239
7A16A,7A15A Wideband Single Channel . 240
7F10 Optical-Electrical Converter . . . . . . . .. 240
7A24,7A26,7A18A Dual Trace ... , .. . ... 241
7 A42 Four Channel Logic Triggered . . .. . . 242
7 A13 Differential Comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
7 A22 Differential . ............ , ... . .... 244
Time 8ases
7880 Delayed .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
7885 ~Delaying ....................... 245
7892A Dual ... . ....... . ... . .......... 247
7810 Single . ..... . .... . ... .. .. .. . . . .. 248
7815 Delaying .... .. ................ . . 248
7853A Dual .......... . ... . . . ...... . . . 249
7850A Single .......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Digital
7D13A Multimeter .. . . . ......... . .. . ... 250 '
7015 Countermmer ................... 251
7020 Programmable Digitizer . . . . . . . . . . .. 336
Spectrum Analyzers
7L141.8GHz Plug-In . .... . ... .. .. . 252,174
7L12 1.8 GHz Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 252, 175
7L5 5 MHz Plug-In . .. . .......... . . 252, 176
5ampling Decision Tree and Tutorial . . . .. 253
7514 Dual Trace Delayed Sweep Sampler . 255
7512 TOR Sampler .................... 256
7S11 Sampling Unit .. ... ............... 257
7T11 A Sampling Sweep Unit . . .......... 257
7M11 Delay Line ......... . ...... . ... . . 258
5-1 350 ps Rise TIme Sampling Head . . . .. 258
5-2 75 ps Rise TIme Sampling Head . . . . . . 258
5-3A 350 ps Rise TIme Sampling Head ... 258
S-4 25 ps Rise TIme Sampling Head . . . . .. 259
S-5 1 ns Rise TIme Sampling Head ....... 259
5-6 30 ps Rise TIme Sampling Head . . . . . . 259
5-51 Trigger Countdown Head .. . .... . ... 259
5-52 Pulse Generator Head ............. 260
5-53 Trigger Recognizer Head . . . . . . . . . .. 260
5-54 Pulse Generator Head ... . .. . .... . . 260

10 mV/Diy to 1 V/Diy
Calibrated Deflection Factors
50 0 Input
±500 ps Variable Delay Line (Option 04)

The 7A 19 is a high performance, wide band,
Single trace amplifier which provides a bandwidth of ax> MHz in the 7100 Series mainframes. Bandwidth is constant over the entire
range of calibrated deflection sensitivities of
10 mV/div to 1 V/div. Input impedance is 50 n.
An optional variable delay line (front panel adjustable) permits matching the transit time of
two 7A 19s and/or probes to better than 50 ps.

CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Dc Coupled: 600 MHz (10 mV/div
to 1 V/div).
Deflection Factor - Calibrated: 10 mV/div to
1 V/div in seven steps (1 -2-5 sequence). Accuracy is within 3%.
Input Z - SO {l.
For _ommended probe., _ page. 211 end 4&4.
For 7000 Serle. vertlc8l .ye18m epecHIc8tIon., _ page 211.

Option 04, Variable Signal Delay - Permits
matching the transit time of two preamps and
probes to better than SO ps. Range is ± 500 ps.
Maximum Input Voltage - Dc Coupled: SO V
or 10 V RMS (whichever is less). Ac Coupled:
100 V additional.
Dc Stability - Drift with Ambient Temperature
(Line Voltage Constant): 100 ~Vl o C or less.

ORDERING INFORMATION
7A19 Amplifier

$2,895

Include.: Instruction manual (07(}212!HXl).

Option 04 -

P6201

Variable Signal Delay.

+$435

FET Probe

Dc to 900 MHz Bandwidth
50 0 or 1 MO Inputs

ORDERING INFORMATION
P62011X, FET Probe

$1,220

239

7000

AMPLIFIERS
OPTICAL-ELECTRICAL CONVERTER

7A15A

SERIES

NEW7F10

7F10

Optical-Electrical Converter
Single Mode/Multlmode Fiber Optical Input
700 to 1550 Nanometer Wavelength
10 kHz to 750 MHz Frequency Response

-i

Built-In Optical Attenuator

CRT Readout of Deflection Factor

The 7F10 single wide plug-in module is an
optical to electrical converter for use with either single mode or multimode fibers. It offers 10 kHz to 750 MHz frequency response
and covers the 700 to 1550 nanometer spectrum with a choice of three calibrated wavelengths: 825, 1:n::J, and 1500 nanometers. It
is designed for use in the vertical compartments of 7000 Series Oscilloscopes.

Dc to 225 MHz Amplifier

Dc to 80 MHz Amplifier

The optically coupled 7F10 input goes
through a built-in attenuator that provides sixteen calibrated settings for contrOlling the input signal level. On the front panel there is an
optical overload indicator and push buttons to
vary the attenuation level. Readout for deflection factor, uncalibrated indication, and p0larity invert appears on the CRT.

Optical-Electrical
Converter

7A16A

7A15A

Dc to 225 MHz Bandwidth

Dc to 80 MHz Bandwidth

5 mV /Div to 5 V /Dlv
Calibrated Deflection Factors

5 mV/Dlv to 10 V/Dlv
Calibrated Deflection Factors

1 MO Input

CHARACTERISTICS

500 /lV/Dlv at 10 MHz (10X Gain)

The 7A16A is a single-trace amplifier which
provides a bandwidth of 225 MHz in the
7900 and 7100 Series mainframes. Bandwidth is constant over the entire range of
deflection sensitivities of 5 mV/div to
5 V/div. Bandwidth may be limited to
20 MHz to reduce displayed noise in lowerfrequency applications.

CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Dc Coupled: 5 mV/div to 5 Vldiv;
225 MHz. Ac Coupled: 10 Hz or less to 225 MHz.
Deflection Factor - Calibrated: 5 mV/div to
5 V/div in 10 steps (1-2-5 sequence). Accuracy is
within 2% with gain adjusted at 10 mV/div. Uncalibrated: Variable continuously between steps to at
least 12.5 V/div.
Input Rand C - 1 Mfi within 2%; ",,20 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - Dc Coupled: 250 V
(dc + peak ac), ac component 500 V P'P maximum, 1 kHz or less. Ac Coupled: 500 V (dc +
peak ac), ac component 500 V pop maximum,
1 kHz or less.
Dc Stability - Drift with Ambient Temperature
(Line Voltage Constant): 0.02 div/ oC. Drift with
Time (Ambient Temperature and Line Voltage
Constant): 0.02 div in anyone minute after one
hour warm-up.
Displayed Noise - ";;0.1 div at 5 mV/div (with
a 7900 Series mainframe).

ORDERING INFORMATION
7A16A Amplifier

$1,305

The 7A15A is a single-trace amplifier which
provides a bandwidth of 80 MHz in the 70c0,
700), and 7100 Series mainframes. Bandwidth is constant over the entire range of deflection sensitivities of 5 m\lldiv to 10 V/div. A
10X gain amplifier provides 500 /LV sensitivity
with a bandwidth of 10 MHz. Polarity of the
display is selectable by a front-panel switch.

CHARACTERISTICS
Dc Coupled: eo MHz (5 mV/div to

Bandwidth -

10 V/div). Ac coupled: 10 Hz or less to eo MHz.
Calibrated: 5 mV/div to
10 Vldiv in 11 steps (1 -2-5 sequence). Accuracy is
within 2% with gain adjusted at 10 mV/div. X10 mag
(increases sensitMty to 500 /lV) accuracy is within
10% at 10 MHz bandwidth throughout deflection
factor settings. Uncalibrated: Varia.bIe continuously
between steps to a maximum of at least 25 Vldiv.
Input Rand C - 1 Mfi within 2%; ",, 20 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - Dc Coupled: 250 V
(dc + peak ac), ac component 500 V P'P maximum, 1 kHz or less. Ac Coupled: 500 V (dc +
peak ac), ac component 500 V P'P maximum,
1 kHz or less.
Dc Stability - Drift with Ambient Temperature
(Line Voltage Constant): 0.01 div/C o. Drift with
TIme (Ambient Temperature and Line Voltage
Constant): 0.02 div in anyone minute after one
hour warm-up.

Deflection Factor -

ORDERING INFORMATION
7A15A Amplifier

$730

Include.: Inslruction manual (07!) 1378'()1).

Include.: Instruction manual (07!) 121(}oo).

For recommended probe., _ p.ge. 21 ••nd 414.
For 7000 SerIH ver1lcel ayatMn apeciftcllllo".. _ pee- 218.

For tIoIIIIng _
........... order A8lI02II1aoInJr. See pee478 Jot compIeI8 ~

Converter-Amplifier
Optical Input Diamond 3.5 mm connector,
50/125 /lm multimode fiber.
Wavelength - Operates from 700 to 1550 nm
continuously with selectable calibrated settings at
825, 1300, and 1500 nm.
Photo Element - Ge-APD.
Maximum Unear Input - + 10 mW optical carrier, 70% modulation.
Deflection Factor - 16 selectable 2.5 dB steps.
Calibrated 1500 nm Wavelength: 2.5/lW/div ± 3)%
at 0 dB attenuation setting. Calibrated 1300 nm
Wavelength: 2 /IoW/dill ± 3)% at 0 dB attenuation
setting. Calibrated 850 nm Wavelength: 4/lW/div
± 3)% at 0 dB attenuation setting.
Variable Range - At least 4 dB.
Frequency Response
71041R7103
7!D) Series
7lIXl Series

10kHz 1075(HJHz. ± 3<11
10 kHz 10 400 '-"iz ± 3 tt). N0noperating: To 15 m (SO. tt).

ORDERING INFORMATION
7F10 Optical-Electrical Converter

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
1 m 0ptic:II1 FIber InterfIIce Cabin *1 (Diamond 3.510 Diamond 3.5) Order 174-004&01
$235
(Diamond 3.5 10 SMA) Order 174-a)24{)1
$150
(Diamond 3.510 FC) Order 174{E17'()1
$200
(Diamond 3.5 10 04) Order 174002&01
$235
(Diamond 3.5 to AT&T Biconic) Order 174aIDOl
$110
., 3 m csbI8s sre sJso svsJlsble. To order. contsct your IocsI
T9Ictronix Ssles Offlce.

240

$6,495

1nc:tudH: Instruction manual (0706277-00).

TEK

7000

DUAL-TRACE
AMPLIFIERS

SERIES

7A24

7A26

7A18A

7A18A
Dc to 75 MHz Bandwidth
5 mV I Div to 5 VIDlv
Calibrated Deflection Factors
1 Mil Input
Dc Offset (Option 06)

The 7A 18A is a dual-trace amplifier which
provides a bandwidth of 75 MHz in the
7800. 7900 and 7100 Series mainframes.
Bandwidth is constant over the entire range
of deflection sensitivities of 5 mV/div to
5 V/div. The 7A18A features five operating
modes, trigger source selectability. and a
trace-identify function.

CHARACTERISTICS

n~.

7A24

DUAL TJlACI AMPU"U

Bandwidth -

7A26

Dc to 400 MHz Amplifier

Dc to 200 MHz Amplifier

Dc to 75 MHz Amplifier

7A24

7A26

Dc to 400 MHz Bandwidth

Dc to 200 MHz Bandwidth

5 mV IDiv to 1 VI Div
Calibrated Deflection Factors

5 mVIDlv to 5 VIDlv
Calibrated Deflection Factors

5011 Input

1 Mil Input

The 7A24 is a high-performance, wide-band,
dual-trace amplifier which provides 400 MHz
bandwidth in the 7100 Series mainframes.
Bandwidth is constant over the entire range
of deflection sensitivities from 5 mV/div to
1 V/div. Input impedance is SOU. The 7A24
features five operating modes, trigger
source selectability and trace identify.

The 7A26 is a dual-trace amplifier which provides a bandwidth of 200 MHz in the 7900
and 7100 Series mainframes. Bandwidth is
constant over the entire range of deflection
sensitivities of 5 mV/div to 5 V/div. Bandwidth may be limited to 20 MHz to reduce
displayed noise in lower-frequency applications. The 7A26 features five operating
modes, trigger source selectability and
trace-identify .

CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth -

Dc Coupled: 400 MHz (5 mV/div

to 1 V/div).

Deflection Factor -

Calibrated: 5 mV/div to
1 V/div in eight steps (1 -2-5 sequence). Accuracy
is within 2% with gain adjusted to 5 mV/div. Uncalibrated: Variable continuously between steps
to a maximum of at least 2.5 V/div.
Input Z - 50 0 within 0.5%;

VSWR
Smv-2Omv

Dc to 350 MHz
350 MHz to 400 MHz

SOmV-1 V

Dc to 400 MHz

Maximum Input Voltage -

Dc Coupled: 5 V

RMS.

Dc Stability -

Drift with Ambient Temperature
(Line Voltage Constant): 0.02 diy/D C. Drift with
nme (Ambient Temperature and Line Voltage
Constant): 0.02 div in anyone minute after one
hour warm-up.
Displayed Noise - 0.7 div or less at 5 mV/div
(with a 7900 Series mainframe).
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - At least
10:1, dc to 50 MHz.

ORDERING INFORMATION
7A24 Amplifier
Includes: Instruction manual (07c}1485{x) .

$2,655

CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth -

Dc Coupled: 200 MHz (5 mV/div
to 5 V/div). Ac Coupled: 10 Hz or less to 200 MHz
(5 mV/div to 5 V/div).
Deflection Factor - Calibrated: 5 mV/div to
5 V/div in ten steps (1-2-5 sequence). Accuracy is
within 2% with gain adjusted at 10 mV/div. Uncalibrated: Variable continuously between steps to a
maximum of at least 12.5 V/div.
Input Rand C - 1 MO within 2%; "",20 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - Dc Coupled: 250 V
(dc + peak ac), ac component 500 V pop maximum, 1 kHz or less. Ac Coupled: 500 V (dc +
peak ac), ac component 500 V pop maximum,
1 kHz or less.
Dc Stability - Drift with Ambient Temperature
(Line Voltage Constant): 0.02 div/"C. Drift with
Time (Ambient Temperature and Line Voltage
Constant): 0.02 division in anyone minute after
one hour warm-up.
Displayed Noise - 0.1 div or less at 5 mVldiv
(with a 7900 Series mainframe).

Dc Coupled: 75 MHz (5 mV/div to
5 V/div). Ac Coupled: 10 Hz or less to 75 MHz
(5 mV/div to 5 V/div).
Deflection Factor - Calibrated: 5 mV/div to
5 V/div in ten steps (1 -2-5 sequence). Accuracy is
within 2% with gain adjusted to 10 mV/div. Uncalibrated: Variable continuously between steps to a
maximum of at least 12.5 V/div.
Input Rand C - 1 MO within 2%; "",20 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - Dc Coupled: 250 V
(de + peak ac), ac component 500 V pop maximum, 1 kHz or less. Ac Coupled: 500 V (dc +
peak ac), ac component 500 V p-p maximum,
1 kHz or less.
Dc Stability - Drift with Ambient Temperature
(Line Voltage Constant): 0.Q1 diy/D C. Drift with
nme (Ambient Temperature and Line Voltage
Constant): 0.02 div in anyone minute after one
hour warm-up.

Displayed Noise - 0.06 div or less.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio (Add, CH 2
Invert) - At least 10:1. dc to 50 MHz.
DC OFFSET OPTION
Option 06, Dc Offset - Allows small signals
riding on larger signals, such as power supply ripple, to be analyzed. Separate Channel 1 and
Channel 2 variable offset controls are concentric
with the position controls replacing the identity
push-buttons of the standard 7A18A. The ac-dcground switch of each channel is expanded to
accommodate a fourth position for dc offset.
Offset Range Display - ± 200 division maximum, equivalent to ± 1 V at 5 mV/div.
Accuracy - When in dc Offset the deflection
accuracy is derated by 1%.

ORDERING INFORMATION
7A18A Amplifier

$1,465

Includes: Instruction manual (07(}432!H)() .

Option 06 -

Dc Offset.

+$210

ISOLATOR
For floating and differential measurements. See page 479.
A8902B -

$1,795

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio (Add, CH 2
Invert) - At least 10:1, dc to 50 MHz.

ORDERING INFORMATION
7A26 Amplifier

$2,350

Includes: Instruction manual (07c) 1484-(1).
For recommended probe" ... p.ge. 21 ••nd 484.
For 7000 S.M. vertlc8l .,.18m .peciflcatlon. . ... page 218.

241

TEK

FOUR CHANNEL LOGIC TRIGGERED
VERTICAL AMPLIFIER

7A42

7000
SERIES

••

CH'

Up to 350 MHz Bandwidth (7100 Family)

UWl

Four Input Channels

Boolean Logic Triggering

Nested Trigger Functions

•

Variable Switching Thresholds
Precise Amplitude and Timing Measurement
External Clock Synchronization
1 MO/50 0 Switchable Inputs
Variable/Bias Offset Probe Compatibility

....

•...
•.. '""
•"" •
-•• 6'.

PI DID

D.T. tcII-.T

7000 Series Mainframe Compatible

The 7A42 Four Channel Logic Triggered
Vertical Amplifier is a combination of amplifier and triggering technologies.
High Resolution Analog Display of
Digital Signals
Accurate analog representations of digital
signals are displayed. A 1 ns rise time with
200 ps or less delay difference between the
four input channels provides precise, high
resolution timing measurements.

::.

Four Channel Analog Display With Trigger
View

Advanced Triggering
Triggers are generated by the 7A42 upon
recognition of user-programmed Soolean
combinations of logic levels and transitions
at any or all of its input channels. Triggers
may be generated on event "A: event "S:
or on "A then S.'

Trigger View trace shows where the trigger
event occurred and how long it lasted. A
trigger filter eliminates requirements that a
trigger function remain true longer than the
Trigger Riter setting.
External Clock Synchronization
A triggering event can coincide with either a
positive or negative transition of an external
clock signal.
Special Probe Features
The P6230 is a 1.5 GHz, 450 n probe with
the ability to place bias voltage at its tip.
The P6131 10X high impedance probe is the
recommended probe for TIL, high speed
TIL, and CMOS logic families.
Easy Set-Up
CRT readout of attenuator settings, the
display of error messages and use of multicolored LEDs communicate the status of
other 7A42 functions at a glance. A battery
backup system preserves the current
settings when power is removed.

242

Up to four logic signals can be displayed by the 7A42 in
true analog form. Additionally, the Trigger VI6W trace
provides the ability to view exactly when the programmed Trigger Function is satisfl6d.

CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Input - Four channels, BNC connectors.
Bandwidth - To 350 MHz maximum. See page
219.
Input Impedance - Selectable between 1 Mfl
and SO fl.
Maximum Input Voltage - 1 MfI: 25 V (dc +
peak ac). SO fI: 5 V RMS during any 1 ms time interval. Active internal protection opens all inputs if
overvoltage is applied to any channel.
DiHerential Delay - 200 ps maximum between
the four input channels.
Trigger View or External Clock View - Time
Coincidence with Channel Display: Trigger View
is within 3 ns. External Clock View is within 5 ns.
TRIGGER SYSTEM
External Clock Input Maximum Voltage
Range: +5 V to -5 V (dc + peak ac). Pulse
Width: TIL level is 20 ns minimum, either pulse
transition selected. ECl level is 5 ns minimum,
leading edge or 10 ns minimum, trailing edge.

For recomlMnded probea, ... pagea 219 and 484.
For 7000 Serlea vertiCIIl .,atem .peclflcallona, ... page 21 • •

Channel Edge Sensitivity Set-Up Time,
Channel to Channel: 5 ns minimum (time that level
sensitive portion of trigger function must be true
before Edge Sensitive Channel transition). Hold
Time, Channel to Channel: 5 ns minimum (time
that level sensitive portion of trigger function must
remain true after Edge Sensitive Channel transition). Set.lJp TIme, Edge Sensitive Channel: 10 ns
minimum (time that level of Edge sensitive channel must be stable before transition). Hold Time,
Edge Sensitive Channel: 5 ns minimum (time that
level of Edge Sensitive Channel must remain stable after transition).
Trigger Out Connector - Output Voltage: 1 V
into 50 fl. Output Impedance: .... SO fl. Toggle Frequency: 125 MHz maximum.
Reset Input - Maximum Input Voltage: +5 V to
- 5 V (dc + peak ac). Input Impedance: "",50 fl.
logic Zero level: ";;0.2 V. logic One level:
~0.8 V. Pulse Width: 100 ns minimum. TIming
(Post-Reset Inhibit Time to Next Trigger): 10 ns
minimum (time from falling edge of Reset to next
recognizable event).
Response Time: Reset pulse must lead or be coincident with event recognition to inhibit trigger
output. Event recognition must lead the Reset
pulse by 10 ns to guarantee trigger output.
BATTERY BACK-UP
Ni-Cad Battery (3.75 V) - Provides power to
preserve front panel control status a minimum of
200 hours while main power is off. Battery requires about 24 hours to fully charge from discharged condition.

ORDERING INFORMATION
7A42 Logic Triggered Vertical Amplifier $6,200
Includes: Instruction manual (070-4285{x)).

P6230 P6131 -

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
lOX Variable Bias/Offset
lOX Passive

KLIPKIT - Provides hands-free connection
to integrated circuits. See page 489 for complete description. Order 013-{)19Hx)

$395
$140

$40

TEK

DIFFERENTIAL
AMPLIFIER, PROBE

7000
SERIES

7A13

CHARACTERISTICS

liE~:~l

7A13

DIFFERENTIAL COMP"'''ATOR

Differential Comparator Amplifier

7A13

Bandwidth - Dc Coupled: 105 MHz (1 mV/div
to 5 V/div).
Input Rand C - 1 MO within 0.15%; = 20 pF.
Rin =00 is available in the 1 mV to 50 mV/div
range , selectable by an internal switch.
Deflection Factor - Calibrated: 1 mV/div to
5 V/div in 12 steps (1-2-5 sequence). Accuracy is
within 1.5% with gain adjusted at 1 mV/div. Uncalibrated: Variable continuously between steps
to a maximum of at least 12.5 V/div.
Maximum Input Gate Current - O°C to
+35°C: 0.2 nA or less. +35°C to +50°C: 2 nA
or less.
Dc Stability - Drift with Ambient Temperature
(Line Voltage Constant) : 2 mV/ 10°C to
0.2 div/10°C or less (whichever is greater). Drift
with Time (Ambient Temperature and Line Voltage Constant): Short term is 1 mV pop or 0.1 div
or less (whichever is greater) over anyone minute
interval after 20 minute warm-up. Long term is
1 mV pop or 0.1 division or less (whichever is
greater) during anyone hour interval after 20 minute warm-up.
Signal Range

1 mVlo
50 mV/d'rv

10mV to
50 mVld'rv
(XIO Vc out)
and 0.1 V to
0.5 V/d'rv

0.1 V to
0.5V/d'rv
(XIO Vc oul)
and 1 V
105 Vld'rv

Signal

±IO V

±IOO V

± 500 V

Maximum Dc
Coupled Inpul (de
+ peak ac at
1 kHz 0( less)

±40 V

± 400 V

± 500 V

Dc to 105 MHz Bandwidth
1 mV/Div to 5 V/Div
Calibrated Deflection Factors

Deflection
Facto(
Settings

1 MO Input Switchable to

Common·Mode

20,000:1 CMRR
10,000 cm Effective Screen Height
The 7A 13 is a differential comparator amplifier which provides dc to 105 MHz bandwidth in all the 7100 and 7900 Family instruments. It incorporates a number of features
which make it particularly versatile, especially in multitrace combination with other 7000
Series vertical plug-ins.
The 7 A 13 has constant bandwidth over the
1 mV/div to 5 V/div deflection factor range.
The bandwidth is selectable to Full or 5 MHz
for best displayed noise conditions for lowfrequency applications.
As a differential amplifier the 7A 13 provides
a balanced (+ and -) input for applications requiring rejection of a common-mode
signal. The CMRR is 20,000:1 from dc to
100 kHz, derating to 200:1 at 20 MHz. The
unit can reject up to 10 V of common-mode
signal at a deflection factor setting of
1 mV/div, increasing to 100 V at 10 mV/div
(X10 Vc pulled) and 500 Vat 0.1 V/div.
As a comparator amplifier the 7A 13 provides an accurate (0.1%) positive or negative internal offsetting voltage of up to
± 10 V. This precision offset voltage effectively provides a screen height of 10,000 div
at 1 mV/div. The offset voltage is also available as an output for external monitoring.

Maximum Ac
Coupled Input
(de voltage)

± 500 V

Displayed Noise (Tangentially Measured) With X10 Vc In: 400 /LV (200 /LV RMS) or less at
1 mV/drv; 0.2 drv or less at 2 mV/drv to 5 mV/div;
0.05 drv or less at 10 mV/drv to 5 V/div. With X10 Vc
Out: 0.4 drv or less at 10 mV/drv to 0.5 V/drv.
Overdrive Recovery - 1 /LS to recover to within
2 mV and 0.1 ms to recover to within 1 mV after a
pulse of ± 10 V or less at 1 mV/div only, regardless of pulse duration.
Internal Comparison Voltage - Range: 0 V to
± 10 V. Accuracy: ±(0.1% of setting +3 mY). Vc
Output R: = 15 kO.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio
~ MRFI Spec"'Cillon (1 mY / d tw , 'O ~ mY / d,.., OtIIWI

P P ""","'uGe S,nuloO.d Tell $'9n.'

~
.
~

""000 ,
I
1----t---+- -=io1r---+----I 10000'
20 - - - - - -

------

! 10f - - - + - -+---k--

" \t",.

::atoon

POtt'

-'T-I_ ---1 "" '"

""'" \, '\,

~
ocr--~"~
'"~
, -~,OO~,="'~-+'M="~
' -~"~M~"'~~'~=~

P6055

20,000:1 CMRR, 10X With Readout

Dc to 60 MHz
Low CapaCitance
High CMRR
Compact Size
The P6055 is a miniature, low-capacitance,
10X probe designed for use with Tektronix differential amplifiers with nominal input capacitances from 20 pF to 47 pF. The attenuation
ratio is adjustable to compensate for differences in input resistance of the amplifier (the
amplifier input resistance must be 1 MU
±2%). A special locking type readout connector allows the probe to be used with instruments with or without readout capability.
When two P6055 probes are used to drive
the two inputs of a differential amplifier, the
ability to change the attenuation ratio of one
probe versus the other is helpful in maintaining the CMRR of the system. The use of a
matched pair of P6055 differential probes
provides the best possible system CMRR.

CHARACTERISTICS
Maximum Useful Bandwidth - 60 MHz.
Rise Time - 5.8 ns.
Input Capacitance - =10 pF when used with
instrument that has 20 pF input capacitance;
12.5 pF when used with instrument that has 47 pF
input capacitance.
Attenuation - Adjustable to 10X.
Input Resistance - 1 MO ± 0.5%.
CMRR - 20,000:1 from dc to 1 kHz derating to
100:1 at 20 MHz.
Maximum Voltage - 500 V (dc + peak ac)
from dc to 12 MHz. pop voltage derates to 100 V
at 70 MHz.

ORDERING INFORMATION
P6055 Matched pair of 10X, 3.5 ft Differential
Probes
$535

$3,400

Includes: Retractable hook tip (88, 013{)10H15); 13 cm
(5 inch) ground lead (175{)124{)1 ); two electrical insulating sleeves (BP , 166-0404-01) ; two alligator clips
(AS, 344{)()46{X)); probe holder (352- Series oscilloscope into a semiconductor curve tracer capable of displaying characteristics of small
signal devices to power levels up to 0.5 W.
The 7CT1N operates in either the horizontal
or vertical compartments of any 7CXX> Series
mainframe. It may be used in conjunction
with standard amplifier and time base plug-in
units to display signal waveforms along with
characteristic curve families.
For more Informetlon on .... 7CT1N, _
Tracer aectIon_

:t IS V

:t 200 V

page 389 In Curve

:tSOO V

ORDERING INFORMATION

:t SOO V
de ,ejeCtion. at least 4 x 10'.1

,--

+1 V to 1 +10 V to 1+100 V tol + lOO V to
- tV
- 10V
- looV
- looV

Input Rand C - 1 MO within 1%; ",,47 pF.
Maximum Input Gate Current (Differentially
Measured) - 10/lV/div to 10 mV/div: 40 pA at
+25°C; 200 pA at +50°C. 20 mV/div to 10 V/div:
10 pA at +25°C; 20 pA at +50°C.
Single ended, one-half the differential measurement. Display shift (10/lVldiv, ac coupled) is
±4division at +25°C; ±20division at +50°C.

ORDERING INFORMATION
7A22 Amplifier

$1,790

Includes: Instruction manual (070003HXl).

High CMRR Differential Probes
P6055 - Matched pair of probes for maximum CMRR. (See page 400 for complete

POO55 description.)

244

$535

For .-.commended ptObea, _ pagea 21. and 484.
For 7000 Serlea ver1lc:al aya...... apecItIcatIon.. _
page 218.

7CT1N Curve Tracer
Includes: Instruction Manual (070-1247-00).

$1,785

TEK

7000

DELAYED TIME BASE
TIME BASE

~DELAYING

SERIES

7880/7885

7B80

7B85

.....

---

1 ns/Div to 5 s/Div Calibrated Time Bases

~'i·

Triggering to 400 MHz

nUGGIlUNO

~." Ii i

Variable Trigger Holdo"
Peak-to-Peak Auto Triggering
7B85 Features:
t:. Time Measurements With CRT Readout

Delayed Time Measurements
With CRT Readout
Vertical Trace Separation
Between Two Delayed Sweeps

The 7880 and 7885 are horizontal time
bases recommended for use with the 7700,
7800 or 7900 Series mainframes to provide
optimum bandwidth/sweep-speed compatibility. (Each may be used in any slower 7000
Series mainframe with some reduction in
sweep accuracy at the fastest sweep
speed.)
Each plug-in can be used separately as an
independent single time base , or combined
in any mainframe with two horizontal compartments for delaying and delayed
operation.
X-V displays are available using a 7880 with
Option 02. A front panel button (Display
Mode) selects normal sweep or X-V display.
Both signals are applied to vertical (Y) amplifiers, and the desired horizontal (X) signal
is then routed through plug-in and mainframe trigger paths to the 7880. An X-V
mode selection then applies the signal to
the horizontal deflection system. This option
is appropriate where the user is making Y-T
and X-V measurements, and changing the
amplifier frequently from the vertical to the
horizontal compartment is not acceptable.

:CD

..!!lao II----

_~
7B85 _

TIMI IA•••

Delayed Time Base

-'---'-~

t:.Delaying Time Base

7000 SERIES TIME BASE SELECTION GUIDE
Perfonnance Feature
Single time be..

7BSOA

7B53A

With mixed .weep

v
v

TV Sync Triggering

Opt 05

Dual time ba..

Used al.o a.
delayed time ba.e

7880

7885

7B15

v
v

60elay Sweep

v
v
v

Ol.play .wltchlng
Price. begin at

7B10

Delaying .weep

Page

7B92A

249

250

245

247

248

$1 ,1:JJ

$1 ,860

$1 .660

$1 ,940

$3,745

$2,555

$2,900

7000 SERIES TIME BASE/MAINFRAME RECOMMENDATION
Mainframe

7BSOA

7B53A

7880

7885

7104/ R7103
7904A/R7903
7844/R7844
7934
7854
n04A/R7704
7603/ R7603

7633/ R7633
7623A/ R7623A

7613/ R7613

7B92A

v
v
v

v
v

v- '

7B10

v
v
v
v

v
v

7815

v
v
v
v
v· ,
v

., Single sweep mode operable for re8/ time only.

245

TEK

7000

TIME
BASES

SERIES

CHARACTERISTICS
Characteristics are common to both units unless
otherwise noted.

TRIGGERING
Triggering Sensitivity From Repetitive Signals (Auto and Norm Modes)

MAIN SWEEP

Coupling

Sweep Rates - Calibrated: 5 s/div to 10 ns/div
in 27 steps (1 -2-5 sequence). Xl0 Magnifier extends fastest calibrated sweep rate to 1 ns div.
Uncalibrated: Variable is continuous to at least
2.5 times the calibrated sweep rate.
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over the center
eight divisions, + 15°C to +35°C, in the 7700,
7800, or 7900 Series mainframe. Derate accuracies by an additional 1% for O°C to +5O°C.
Time/Dly·'

Unmagnified

Magnified

4.0%

Unspecified

0.5 sldiv to SO ns/div

1.5%

2.5%

20 nsldiv to 10 nsldiv

2.5%

4.0%

5 sldiv to 1 sidiv

" Fastest calibrated sweep rate is limited by 7700 and 7600
Series Mainframes.

Trigger Holdo" Time

5s/div
to 1 ~ sldiv
0.5 ~sldrv
to 10 nsldiv
20 ms/div
Q( faster

Minimum

Maximum
With V.riable

2 times Time/Oiv
setting Q( less

2 times TimelDiv
setting

2.0 ~

less

2 times TimelDiv
setting

Int

Elt

30 Hz to SO MHz
SO MHz to 400MHz

0.3div
1.5div

SOmV
250mV

AcLF Rei·'

30 kHz to SO MHz
SO MHz to 400 MHz

0.3 div
1.5dlv

SOmV
250mV

Ac HF Rei

30 Hz to SO kHz

0.3div

SOmV

Dc to SO MHz

0.3 div
1.5div

SOmV
250mV

Dc·'

SO MHz to 400 MHz

., Triggering frequency rBnges Bre limited to the frequency of
the vertical system when operating in the Internal mode.
·z Will not trigger on sinewaves of less than eight division internal, or 3 V External, at or below 60 Hz.
.J Triggering Frequency Range for de coupling applies to frequencies above 30 Hz when operating in the Auto Triggering

mode.

Single Sweep - Requirements are same as for
repetitive signals.
Internal Trigger Jitter - 0.1 ns or less at
400 MHz.
Triggering Sensitivity in pop Auto Mode

t:. Time Range - (7885 only) 0 to at least
9.0 times Time/Div setting.
t:.Time Accuracy ( + 15 ° C to + 35 ° C) (7885 only) 0.5 s/div to 50 ms/div: Within (0.5% of
reading +0.1% full scale + 1 count)*'. 20 ms/div
to 100 ns/div: Within (0.5% of reading +0.03% full
scale + 1 count)"'.
" Full scale equals ten times the Time/Oiv switch setting.

Trace Separation Range - Functional only in
t:.Delay Time mode when alternating or chopping
between time base units. The second delayed
sweep display can be vertically positioned at
least three division below the first delayed sweep
display.
Delay Time Range - 0.2 or less to at least 9.0
times Time/Div setting.
Delay Time Jitter - 0.02% or less of Time/Div
setting plus 0.1 ns.

Delaying and delayed sweeps are shown with the mainframe selecting Alt sweep modes. The delay time to the
start of the delayed sweep is digitally presented on the
lower edge of /he CRT.

Min Signal Required

Coupling

Triggering
Frequency Range

Int

Elt

2.0 div

500 mV

Low Frequency
Response:
At least SO Hz

200 Hz 10 SO MHz

0.5 div

125mV

SO MHz to 400 MHz

1.5 div

375 mV

2 times TimelDiv
setting
20 times TimelDiv
setting

Triggering
Frequency Ranga ·'

Min Signal Required

External Trigger Input - Maximum Input Voltage: 250 V (dc + peak ac). Input Rand C: 1 M{2
within 5% and 20 pF within 10%. Level Range (Excluding pop Auto): At least ± 1.5 V in Ext +1, at
least ± 15 V in Ext + l0.
7880 Option 02, X-Y Display Capability - A
front panel switch selects either normal sweep
displays or X-V displays. In the X-V mode, the X
and Y signals are applied to the inputs of a dual
trace vertical amplifier or two single trace vertical
amplifiers. The X signal is routed via the amplifier/
mainframe trigger path to the 7880 Option 02,
and then to the mainframe horizontal amplifier for
display.

With the mainframe still selecting Alt sweeps, delaying
and both delayed sweeps are shown. The digital readout
on the /ower CRT edge shows the time between the two
sweep delays. The Trace Separation knob is used to
position the second delayed sweep below the first delayed sweep with up to three division of separation.

ORDERING INFORMATION
7880 Time Base
Includes: Instruction manual (07()'1959-00).
Option 02 - x·y Display Capability.

7885 Delaying Time Base
Includes: Instruction manual (07()'196Hll).

$1 ,660
+ $105

$1,940

TEK

7000

DELAYED TIME BASE
.dDELAYING TIME BASE

SERIES

7B92A

CHARACTERISTICS
DELAYING SWEEP (MAIN SWEEP)
Sweep Rate - Calibrated: 0.2 s/div to 0.5 ns/div
in 27 steps (1 -2-5 sequence). Uncalibrated: Variable continuously between steps to at least 2.5
times the calibrated sweep rate. The variable
control is internally switchable between delaying
and delayed sweeps.
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over the center
eight divisions in a 7900 Series mainframe'
Time/Diy

+ 1S·C to + 3S · C

O·C to + SO · C

0.2 sldiv 10 20 nsldiv

Within 2%

Within 3%

10 nslOO

Within 3%

Within 4%

2 nsldiv to 1 nslOO

Within 4%

Within 5%

0.5 nslOO

Within 5%

Within 6%

Delay Time Multiplier Range - 0 to 9.8 times
the Delay nme/Div setting from 0.2 s/div to
10 nsldiv (0 s to 1.96 s).
Delay Time Jitter· '
Dual Time Base

7B92A
0.5 ns/Div to 0.2 s/Div Calibrated Time Base
Triggering to 500 MHz
Alternate Display of Intensified Delaying
and Delayed Sweeps
Contrast Regulation Between Delaying
and Delayed Sweeps
The 7B92A Dual Time Base is recommended for use in the 7100,7800 and 7900 Series
mainframes . (The 7B92A may be used in all
other mainframes at slower sweep speeds.)
There are four display modes: normal
sweep, intensified delaying sweep, delayed
sweep , and alternate sweep. When operating in the A uto mode of main trigg ering, a
brig ht base line is displayed in the absence
of a trigger signal.

0.2 sldiv to
50 ,.sid",

0.2% 01 main sweep time/div
switch setting or less

20 " sid", to
10 nslOO

0.3% 01 the main sweep time/div
switch setting or less

"' Not applic8b16 for the first 2'Ib of msximum avallab16 delsy
time (Delsy nme Mutt dial setting > 0.2). Msxlmum svailab16
delay time Is ten times the rllT>9/Div or Delay nme switch
setting.

Differential Delay Time Measurement
Accuracy·'
Sweep Speed
0.2 sldiv to
O.I ,.s1div

50 nslOO to
10 nsldiv

Both Delay T""" Mult
dial settings at 0.5
or greater

± (0.75% 01 reading +0.25%
01 lull scale·')

One or both Delay Time
Mult dial settings at
less than 0.5

± (0.75% of read·
ing +0.5% 01
lull scale"' + 5 ns)

Both Delay TI1Tl8S
equal to or greater
than 25 ns

±(1% 01 reading
+0.5% of lull
scale",)

One or both Delay
Times less than 25 ns

"' + IS -C

±(1% 01 reading
+ 1%01 lull
scale·' + 5 ns)

to + 35 -C.
", Full scale is ten times the Time/Dlv or Delay nme setting.
Accuracy applies OV6f the cent6f eight divisions from + IS -C
to + 35 -C.

TRIGGERING
Triggering Sensitivity
Auto end Norm Mode.
Triggering
Frequency Ranga

Coupling

Min Signal Required
Int

Ext

30 Hz to 20 MHz
20 MHz to 500 MHz

0.500
1.0div

l00mV
500mV

Ac LF Rej

30 kHz to 20 MHz
20 MHz to 500 MHz

0.5 div
1.0 div

l00mV
500 mV

Ac HF Rej

30 Hz to 50 kHz

0.500

100 mV

0.5div
20 MHz to 500 MHz

l00mV
1.0div

500 mV

Oc to 20 MHz
Oc

HF Sync - Triggering sensitivity is 0.5 div Int or
100 mV Ext, from 100 MHz to 500 MHz for any
coupling except Ac HF Rej.
Single Sweep - Triggering requirements are
the same as normal sweep. When triggered, time
base produces one sweep only until reset.
Internal Trigger Jitter 50 ps or less at
500 MHz.
External Trigger Input - Selectable 50 n or
1 Mn inputs (1 Mn is paralleled by =20 pF). Maximum Input Voltage: 250 V (dc + peak ac) for
1 Mn input and 1 W average for 50 n input. Level
Range: At least ±3.5 V in Ext, at least ±35 V in
Ext -:- 10.
DELAYED SWEEP
Sweep Rate - Calibrated: 0.2 s/div to 0.5 ns/div
in 27 steps (1-2-5 sequence). Uncalibrated: Variable continuously between steps to at least 2.5
times the calibrated sweep rate. The variable
control is internally switchable between delaying
and delayed sweeps.
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over the center
eight divisions in a 7900 Series mainframe:
O· C to + SO · C

TIme/DIY

+ 1S · C to +3S· C

0.2 sldiv to 20 nsldiv

Within 2%

Within 3%

10 nsldiv to 5 nsldiv

Within 3%

Within 4%

2 nsldiv to 1 nsldiv

Within 4%

Within 5%

0.5 nsldiv

Within 5%

Within 6%

Delayed Triggering Sensitivity
Min Signal Required

Coupling

Triggering
Frequency Range

Int

Ext

30 Hz to 20 MHz
20 MHz to 500 MHz

0.5 div
1.0div

l00mV
500 mV

Oc to 20 MHz
20 MHz to 500 MHz

0.5 div
1.0 div

l00mV
500mV

Internal Trigger Jitter - 50 ps or less at
500 MHz.
External Trigger Input - Selectable 50 n or
1 Mn inputs (1 Mn is paralleled by =20 pF). Maximum Voltage Input: 250 V (dc + peak ac) for
1 Mn input, and 1 W average for 50 n input. Level
Range: At least ±3.5 V in Ext.

ORDERING INFORMATION
7B92A Dual Time Base

$3,745

Includes: Instruction manual (070-1751-02).

247

TEK

7000

DELAYED TIME BASE
~DELAYING TIME BASE

7810/7815

SERIES

7B15

7Bl0

...

, ,
Llvn
i1 ' .-

0.2 ns/Div to 0.2 s/Div Calibrated
Time Bases

..t:lIrt.

TRIGGIERING
.....

(DU'UM

l au,,"

AII ' I

Triggering to 1 GHz
Variable Trigger Holdoff
Peak-to-Peak Auto Triggering
7B15 Features:

t. Time Measurements With CRT Readout
Delayed Time Measurements With
CRT Readout
Vertical Trace Separation Between Two
Delayed Sweeps

The 7810 and 7815 are horizontal time
bases designed for use with the 7100 Series
mainframes to provide optimum band·
width/sweep-speed compatibility, but may
also be used with the 7700, 7800, and 7900
Series mainframes. (Each may be used in
any slower 7000 Series mainframe with
some reduction in sweep accuracy at the
fastest sweep speed.)
Either plug-in can be used separately as an
independent Single time base, or they can
be combined in any mainframe with two
horizontal compartments for delaying and
delayed operation.
The 7810 and 7815 provide ~time measurement in addition to the standard delay time
display.
Delta time measurement is accomplished
simply by manually positioning two intensified zones on the waveform . The time difference between the two zones is displayed in
the CRT readout. (See waveform photos on
page 246.) Expansion and overlapping of
the two intensified zones is possible to allow
very precise setting of the zones to the
desired points on the displayed waveform.

781S

t.Delaying Time Base

Delayed Time Base

CHARACTERISTICS
MAIN SWEEP
Sweep Rates - Calibrated: 2 ns/div to 0.2 s/div
in 25 steps (1 -2-5 sequence). X10 Magnifier extends fastest calibrated sweep rate to 0.2 ns/div.
Uncalibrated: Variable is continuous to at least
2.5 times the calibrated sweep.
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over the center
eight divisions, + 15°C to +35°C, in a 7100, 7800
or 7900 Series mainframe. Derate accuracies by
an additional 1% for O°C to +5O°C
Unmagnified

Magnified

0.2 sid" to 10 nsld"

2"'-

5 nsld" and 2 nsld"

TIme/DIY"

., Fastast calibratad sW99p rata Is IIfTl/tad by 7900, 7800, 7700,
and 7600 SeriBs mainframes.

20 msld"
to 2 pSld"
1 " sid"
to 0.5 pSld"
0.2 pSld"
to 2 nsld"

Minimum

Maximum
With Variable

40 ms or less

400 ms or greater

2 times the
Time/Div Setling

20 times the
TimelDiv Setling

2". or less

20 ". or greater

2".

6". or greater

t. Time Range - (7815 only) 0 to at least
9.0 times Time/Div setting.
t. Time Accuracy - 20 ms/div to 100 ns/div.
Within 0.5% of reading +3 counts.
Trace Separation Range - (7815 only) Functional only in t.Delay Time mode when alternating
or chopping between time base units. The second delayed sweep display can be vertically positioned at least three divisions below the first delayed sweep display.

Triggering
Frequency Range "

Min Signal Required
Inl

Ext

:JJ Hz to 250 104Hz
250 104Hz to 1 GHz

0.5d"
1.5d"

50mV
150mV

Ac LF Rej"

50 kHz to 250 104Hz
250 104Hz to 1 GHz

0.5d"
1.5 d"

50mV
150mV

Ac HF Rej

:JJ Hz to 40 kHz

0.5 d"

50 mV

Dc to 250 104Hz
250 104Hz to 1 GHz

0.5 d"
1.5 d"

50mV
150 mV

Coupling

Dc"

Trigger Holdoff Time

0.2 sid"
to 50 ms/d"

Delay Time Range - (7815 only) 0.2 or less to
at least 9.0 times Time/Div setting.
Delay Time Jitter - (7815 only) 0.02% of Time/
Div setting up through 50 I's/div. 0.03% of Time/
Div setting plus 0.1 ns for sweep speeds of
20 I'S/div through 100 ns/div.
TRIGGERING
Triggering Sensitivity for Repetitive Signals

., The triggBring fr9quBncy ranges given here 8f9 limitad to thB
- 3 dB frBquancy of thB oscIl/oscopB vartiCBl systam when
opBfatlng In the Intamal modB.
'2 Will not triggBr on slflBwavas at or below 60 Hz when amplitudBs are /ass than eight division Intarnal or 3 V ExtarnBl.
'3 The Triggering Frequancy Ranga for Dc Coupling applies to
frBqUBIICiBs above 30 Hz when oparsting in the Auto TriggBrIngModB.

Single Sweep - Requirements are the same as
for repetitive signals.
Internal Trigger Jitter - 30 ps or less at 1 GHz.
HF Sync Mode - 250 MHz to 1 GHz 0.3 div Internal and 0.75 mV External.
External Trigger Input - Maximum Input Voltage: 250 V (dc + peak ac) for 1 MO input, 1 W
average for 50 0 input. Input Rand C: 1 MO within
5% and 20 pF within 10%; for 50 0 input, 50 0
within 2%. Level Range: At least ±3.5 V in
Ext-;.-1 .

ORDERING INFORMATION
7Bl0 Time Base

$2,555

Include8: Instruction manual (07(}2316{)()).

7B15 Delaying Time Base
Includes: Instruction manual (07(}2318{x»).

248

$2,900

TEK

7000

DUAL TIME BASE
SINGLE TIME BASE

SERIES

7B53A

DELAYED SWEEP
Sweep Rate - Calibrated : 0.05 p.s/div to
0.5 s/div in 22 steps (1 -2-5 sequence). 5 nsldiv,
the fastest calibrated sweep rate, is obtained
with the X10 Magnifier. Uncalibrated: Variable
continuously between steps to at least 2.5 times
the calibrated sweep rate. The variable control is
internally switchable between main, delayed
sweep, and variable main sweep holdoff.
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over the center
eight divisions.

7B50A
uv(t..

......

i';;., • •

"UOGIfU"G

---

"i ft i i
__ i ~.1lJ i
....i,.., ~iiu Ii
~O.ITIOI\I \: ..,

III'IIL

• •

"OLD

Off

UnmegnlfMd

TIme/DIY

MegnlfMd

o'c

o' c

+ 15'C 10
10 + 15' C to
to
+35'C
+50'C
+35'C
+50'C

:: 0
~'

DUAl
TIM
. . ._
.. - l
7B53A _ _
_
_

TIME IIAS£

7B50A

Dual Time Base

Time Base

7B53A/7B50A

Sweep Accuracy eight divisions.

5 ns/Div to 5 s/Dlv Calibrated Time Base

Time/Diy

Unmagnified
+15'C 10 O'C to
+35'C +50'C

Triggering to 100 MHz (7B53A) and
150 MHz (7B50A)
Variable Trigger Holdoff (7B50A)

p.p Auto Triggering (7B50A)
Single Sweep Operation
Calibrated Mixed Sweep (7B53A)
TV Sync Separator Triggering
(7B53A Option 05)

The easy-to-use 7B53A and 7B50A Time
Bases are recommended for use with 76CXJ
Series mainframes to provide optimum
bandwidth/ sweep speed compatibility .
They may, however, be used in any 7000
Series mainframe to provide sweep rates of
5 ns/div.
The 7B53A provides normal, intensified delaying, delayed, and mixed sweep.

CHARACTERISTICS (7B53A)
DELAYING SWEEP
Sweep Rate - Calibrated: 50 ns/div to 5 s/div in
25 steps (1 -2-5 sequence). 5 ns/div, the fastest
calibrated sweep rate , is obtained with the
X10 Magnifier. Uncalibrated: Variable continuously between steps to at least 2.5 times the calibrated sweep rate. The variable control is intemally
switchable between main, delayed-sweep, and
variable main-sweep holdoff.

Measured over the center

O'C to
+50'C
Unspecified

Unspecified

50 msldiv to
0.5 jJS/div

2.5%

0.2 jJS/div to
0.05 ~sldiv

3.5%

Delay Time Multiplier Range - 0 to 10 times
the Delay Time/Div setting from 5 s/div to
1 p.s/div.
Differential Delay Time Measurement Accu·
racy - 5 sldiv to 1 s/div: ± 1.4% of measurement +0.3% of full scale. 0.5 s/div to 1 p.S/div:
±0.7% of measurement +0.3% of full scale. Full
scale is ten times the Delay TIme/Div setting. Accuracy applies over the center 8 DTM div from
+ 15°C to +35°C.
Delay Time Jitter - 0.05% or less of TimeIDiv
setting.
TRIGGERING
Triggering Sensitivity
Min Signel Required

Coupling

Triggering
Frequency Renge

Int

Ext

30 Hz to 10 MHz
10 MHz to 100 MHz

0.3 div
1.5div

100 mV
500mV

30 kHz 10 10 MHz
150 kHz 10 10 MHz
10 MHz 10 100 MHz

0.3 div

30 Hz 1050kHz

Dc to 10 MHz

Ac HF Rej

10 MHz 10 100 MHz

4.5%

50 msldiv 10
0.5 jJS/div

3.5%

Delayed Sweep Gate - Output Voltage :
"" +3.5 V into at least 10 kO shunted by 100 pF
or less, or 0.5 V into 50 O. Rise time: 50 ns or less.
Output R is 350 0 within 10%. Gate is available at
the Dly'd Trig In connector when the delayed
sweep source switch is set to In!.
Triggering Sensitivity

Magnified
+15'C to
+35'C

5 sldiv to 1 sldiv

Ac LF Rej"'

0.5 sldiv to 0.1 sldiv
and 0.2 jJS/div 10
O.05jJS/div

Triggering
Frequency Renge

Min Signal Required
Int

Ext

30 Hz to 10 MHz
10 MHz to 100 MHz

0.3div
1.5 div

l00mV
500 mV

Dc to 10 MHz
10 MHz to 100 MHz

0.3 div
1.5 div

100 mV
500 mV

Coupling

Internal Trigger Jitter - 1 ns or less at 75 MHz.
External Trigger Input - Maximum Input Voltage: 500 V (dc + peak ac), 500 V pop ac at 1 kHz
or less. Input Rand C: 1 MO within 2% and 20 pF
within 2 pF. Level Range: At least + 1.5 V to
-1.5 V in Ext.
MIXED SWEEP
Sweep Accuracy - Within 2% plus measured
main sweep error. Exclude the following portions
of mixed sweep: Rrst 0.5 div after start of main
sweep display and 0.2 div or 0.1 p.S (whichever is
greater) after transition of main to delayed
sweep.
EXT HORIZONTAL INPUT
Deflection Factor 10 mVldiv within 10%
when in Ext, Mag X10; 100 mVldiv within 10%
when in Ext; 1 V/div within 10% when in Ext-;-10.
Bandwidth
Coupling

Lower - 3 dB

Upper - 3 dB

40Hz

l00mV
500mV

Ac LF Rej

16kHz

2 MHz

Ac HF Rej

40Hz

100kHz

0.3div

l00mV

0.3 div
1.5 div

100 mV
500mV

1.5 div

, Will not trigger on slnewBves of three dIvisions or less Int or
1.5 V Ext below 120 Hz.

Single Sweep - Triggering requirements are
the same as normal sweep. When triggered,
sweep generator produces one sweep only until
rese!.
Internal Trigger Jitter - 1 ns or less at 75 MHz.
External Trigger Input - Maximum Input Voltage: 500 V (dc + peak ac), 500 V pop ac at 1 kHz
or less. Input Rand C: 1 MO within 2% and 20 pF
within 2 pF. Level Range: At least +1.5 V to
-1 .5V in Ext, at least +15V to -15V in
Ext-;-10.

2 MHz

TV SYNC
Option OS, TV Sync Separator Triggering Permits stable internal line or field rate triggering
from displayed composite video or composite
sync waveforms. Conventional waveform displays
and measurements can be made from standard
broadcast or closed circuit TV systems, domestic
or international, with up to 12OHine, 60 Hz field
rates. Individual lines may be displayed with
delayed sweep features . The wide range of delayed sweeps permits accurate alternate-frame,
color-burst observations in the PAL color system.
Option 05 deletes ac line trigger and Ext-;-10
from trigger source.

249

TEK

DIGITAL
MULTIMETER

7000
SERIES

CHARACTERISTICS (7B50A)

7D13A

Dc Current Range A to 2 A in four ranges.
3 1k-digit presentation of 1.999 rnA, 19.99 rnA,
199.9 rnA , and 1999 rnA full scale. Accuracy
is ±O.S% of reading ±2 counts from + lS·C
to +35"C, ± 0.7% of reading ±4 counts from
O· C to +SO·C. Maximum input is 3 A (fuse
protected).
Resistance Range - a 0 to 2 MO in five
ranges. 3'12-digit presentation 199.90, 1999 0,
19.99 kO, 199.9 kO, and 1999 kO full scale. Accuracy is ± O.S% of reading ± 1 count from + lS·C
to +35· C, ± 0.8% of reading ± 2 counts from
O·C to +SO· C. Input is fuse protected.
Temperature Measurement Range - -62·C
to +200· C in one range. 3 1k-digit presentation to
+200· C.
Temperature Measurement Accuracy·'

Sweep Rates - O.OS ~s / d i v to S s/div in
2S steps (1 -2-S sequence). S ns/div, the fastest
cal ibrated sweep rate , is obtained with the
X10 Magnifier. Uncalibrated: Variable continuously between steps to at least 2.S times the calibrated sweep rate.
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over center
eight division, + 1S·C to + 35· C, with any 7rIXJ
Series mainframe. Derate accuracies by an additional 1% each for O· C to + SO· C.
Unmagnified

Magnlflecl

5 sldiv to 1 sld iv

nrne/DIY

Unspecified

0.5 sld iv to 0.5 ,.sIdiv

2%
3%

0.2 ,.sIdiv to 0.05 ,.sId iv

TRIGGERING
Trigger Holdoff Time
Minimum
5 sld iv to 1 " sldiv
0.5 ,.s1div
to SO nsld iv

7D13A Operating
Condition.

2 times TImelOiv seHing or less

DIGITAL MULTlM£T,,.

70 1JA

2.0 ,.s or less
Extends hoIdoH time through at least
2 sweep lengths for sweep rates
of 20 msld iv or faster

Variable

Triggerin Sensitivity· 1
Coupling

Trlggarlng
Frequency Ranga'.

3J Hz to SO MHz

Min Signal Required
Int

Ext
SOmV
250 mV

SO MHz to t SO MHz

0.3 div
1.5div

Ac LF Rej"

3J kHz to SO MHz
SO MHz to t SO MHz

0.3 00
1.5 d iv

SOmV
250mV

Ac HF Rej

3J Hz to SO kHz

0.3 d iv

SOmV

Dc to SO MHz
SO MHz to tSO MHz

0.3 d iv
1.5 div

SOmV
250 mV

Dc-'

" Auto snd Nonn modes.
" Triggering frsqtwIcy ranges sra Hmlled to the frsqtwIcy of
the vertical systlNTl when operating In the Int mode.
-, WHI not trigger on SinewSV8S of less thBn eight division InternBI, or 3 V ExtlNTlsl, st or below 60 Hz.
" Triggering FreqlJ8nC}' Range for de coupling BpplleS to fr&quencies Bbove 30 Hz when operating In the Auto TrfggerIng
mode.

Triggering Sensitivity (p.p Auto Mode)
Coupling

Triggering
Frequency Range

Min Signal Required
Int

Ext

Ac or de

200 Hz to SO MHz

0.5 div

125 mV

Ac or de

SO MHz to 1SO MHz

1.5 div

375 mV

Single Sweep - Triggering requirements are the
same as normal sweep. When triggered, sweep
generator produces only one sweep until reset.
Option 02, X·Y Display capability - A front
panel switch selects either normal sweep displays
or X-V displays. In the X-V mode, the X and Y signals are applied to the inputs of a dual-trace vertical
amplifier or two single-trace vertical amplifters. The
X signal is routed via the amplifier/mainframe trigger
path to the 7B50A Option 02, and then to the mainframe horizontal amplifter for display.

ORDERING INFORMATION
7B53A Dual Time Base

$1,860

7B50A Time Base
Includes: Instruction manual (070-1986-QO).
Option 02 - X-V Display Capability.

250

- 62 ' C to + tSO' C

± 2' C
O' C. - S'C

- 62'C to + 2OO'C

above tolerance
in each direction

Add 1.S'C to
O' C to +lS'C
+28'C to + SO 'C

7D13A
3 1/ 2 Digit CRT Readout
500 V Maximum Common·Mode Voltage
Temperature Mode

The 7D13A Digital Multimeter is designed
for use in all 7000 Series oscilloscope mainframes with CRT readout. The 7D13A functions in any compartment.
The 7D13A measures dc volts, dc current,
and resistance. It also measures temperature
from a temperature sensor on the tip of the
P6601 temperature probe. The temperature
probe functions regardless of 7D13A mode
or range setting and provides a front-panel
analog signal output of 10 mV/·C (O·C=O V).
Temperature may be measured simultaneously along with any other function.
When the 7D13A is used, the character generator traces out a 3V2-digit display on the
CRT and a legend for units such as kU,
rnA, · C.

CHARACTERISTICS

Dc Voltage Range - a V to 500 V in four
ranges. 3 '12-digit presentation of 1.999 V, 19.99 V,
199.9 V, and 500 V full scale. Accuracy is ± 0.1%
of reading ± 1 count from + lS· C to + 35· C,
± 0.2% of reading ±2 counts from O·C to
+SO· C. Input impedance is 10 Mn on all ranges.
Maximum safe input is 500 V peak between either
contact and ground, 500 V peak between voltage
contacts.

+$170

$1,130
+$105

For recommended probe., ... page. 219 and 484.

"'a.uramen1
Accuracy

+1 SO' C to + 2OO' C

Digital Multimeter

Includes: Instruction manual (070-1342-01 ).
Option 05 - TV Triggering.
Includes: Instruction manual (070-1471-00).

+ 1S'C to + 28 'C
(room temperature)

Temperatura
Value "'a.ured

-, Probe cslibrSted to the InstnJment.

Settling Time - 1 s or less (voltage, current,
and resistance modes).
Polarity - Automatic indication.
Maximum Common·Mode Voltage - 500 V
peak between two terminals and ground.
Normal·Mode Rejection Ratio At least
30 dB at 60 Hz.
Common·Mode Rejection Ratio - With a 1 kO
imbalance, at least 100 dB at dc; 80 dB at 60 Hz.
Over Range Indication - When over range occurs, the readout blinks and the most significant
digit displays a three.
Temperature Out - 10 mV/· C into a load of at
least 2 kO.

ORDERING INFORMATION
7D13A Digital Multimeter

$1,380

Includes: Pair of test leads (OO3-o12O-Q()); P6601 Temperature Probe package (010-6601-01); instruction manual (070-3972-00).

TEK

7000

UNIVERSAL
COUNTER/TIMER

SERIES

7015

Accuracy

Modes
Frequency
Mode

Range
Dc to 225 MHz
Resolution 0.1 Hz max

Period and
Multi-Period
Mode

10 ns to 1()6 seconds with selected
averaging of 1 to 1000 events in
decade steps. Resolution to 10 ps.

EperiOd(S) = ± TB . PIn ±

Time Interval (TI)
and TI Average
Mode

6 ns to 10 seconds with selected
averaging of 1 to 1000 in
decade steps. Resolution is 0.1 ns.

ETI(s) = ± TB . P"

E
1
Freq(Hz) = ± TB · fn ±T

1~-9

2E~
p..
±-+~.N- N
dt

±~ ± 10- 9 ± 2E~
.fN
~
dt

Frequency Ratio,
CH B/Ext Clock
Manual Stop Watch
Totalize, CH B

10-7 to 10'

o to 1()6 seconds
o to 1()8 counts

Note: Formules giVtln where £ Is the fIfTOI'; TB (expressed ss s df1cJmsl) Is the time bBSfI sccurscy; Pin Is the period of time IntfIf'Vsl of unknown sjgnsl; N Is
the number of eVtlnts sveraged; Pck is the messurtNTl8flt clock period; T is the gate time; fin is the frsqUfll'lCy of the unknown sjgnal; Enpk equsJs peak
noISfI PU/SfI amplitude as preSlNlttJd to Schmln triggf1r circuit; dv/dt BqUals signal slope at input to Schmitt triggf1r (volts per SfICOfId).

225 MHz Counter/Timer

7015
Oscilloscope-Controlled Time and
Frequency Measurements

10 ns Single-Shot Time Interval
Measurement Resolution
Time Interval Averaging
CRT Display of Counting Interval

10 ps Period-Averaging Resolution
Frequency Measurements Directly
to 225 MHz
Signal Conditioning via Mainframe
Trigger Source
For Measurement Applications Guide order
42-W-5017-1.
The 7015 Universal Counter/Timer is designed for use in all 7000 Series oscilloscope mainframes with CRT readout.

Figure 1. Oscilloscope-controlled digital measurements
using the delayed 8 gate as the arming input logic allow
user to make precise time interval measurement from
third to seventh pulse on CRT display. Counter CH A is
'armed' with leading edge of 8 gate while CH 8
Counter is 'armed' with falling edge of 8 gate. Lower
trace is pseudo gate of 7015. CRT readout displays the
result of 2325.295 pS.

The 7015 can be completely controlled by
the oscilloscope's delayed gate. Arming inputs are provided for each channel. By using the d elayed B gate to control the start
and stop count pOints, measurements can
be made between any two points on the
CRT display (see Rgure 1).
The 7015 offers all the measurement capabilities of a Universal CounterlTimer, such
as time interval, period, period and time interval averaging, frequency, frequency ratio, totalize, and manual stop watch.
The 7015 may be used in vertical or horizontal compartments of 7000 Series mainframes.
It provides a full eight-digit CRT display with
leading zero suppression and positioned
decimal. Legend and averaging information
appear at the bottom of the CRT display.

Agure 2. The propagation delay time between the input
of a delay line (upper trace) and the output of the delay
line (middle trace) is measured digitally. Lower trace is
7015 pseudo gate display. CRT readout displays the result of 151.0 ns.

CHARACTERISTICS
INPUT SIGNAL CH A & B
Frequency Range (CH B Only) - Dc Coupled:
Dc to 225 MHz. Ac Coupled: 5 Hz to 225 MHz.
For recommended probel, ... pegel 219 end 4«.

Sensitivity (CH A and B Inputs) - 100 mV pop.
Trigger Source: 0.5 division to 100 MHz, 1.0 division to 225 MHz, or to the vertical system bandwidth, whichever is less.
Input Rand C - 1 Mll and 22 pF.
Triggering (Preset Posit ion) - Automatically
triggers at 0 V.
Level Control Range (CH A and B Inputs) 100 mV Range: ±SOO mV. 1 V Range: ± 5 V.
10VRange: ±50V.
Arming Inputs - Input Rand C: 10 kll and
20 pF. Sensitivity Arm A: Logical 1 ~ +0.5 V, logical 0 ... +0.2 V. Sensitivity Arm B: Logical 1
... +0.2 V, logical 0 ~ +0.5 V.
External Clock-In - 20 Hz to 5 MHz.
Reset Front Panel - Readies the instrument.
All counters are affected, including averaging
circuits.
INTERNAL TIME BASE
Crystal Oscillator - Accuracy: Within 0.5 ppm
(O· C to +50· C ambient). Long-Term Drift: 1 part
or less in 107 per month. Oscillator: Temperature
compensated; no warm up is required.
OUTPUT SIGNALS
Clock Out - Logical 1 ~ +0.5 V into 50 ll. Logical 0 ... 0 V into 50 ll. TTL compatible without
50 llioad (1 .6 mA current capacity).
A and B Trigger Level - Zout = 1 kll ,
Vout= ± 0.5 V into 1 Mll.
Displayed Waveform (Internally Connected)
- Front-panel switch screwdriver controlled selects true gate, pseudo gate, or CH B signal out.
External Display - Same as internal except
position control has no effect.
Display Mode Switch - 0.1 s to 5 s; also a preset position for infinite display time. Allows selection of readout 'follow or store.'
Readout - Eight-digit display; the four most significant have zero suppression. Overflow indicated by a greater than symbol.

ORDERING INFORMATION
7015 Universal Counter/Timer

$3,580

Includes: Two 44 inch Sealectro to BNC connector
bles (012-0403-00); instruction manual (070-1433-00).

ca-

251

TEK

7000

VERSATILE HIGH PERFORMANCE
PLUG-IN SPECTRUM ANALYZERS

SERIES

7L14

7L12

7L5

Excellent Stability, Resolution Bandwidth
Range

Proven, Economical VHF/UHF Coverage

Synthesizer Tuning

Automatic Phaselock, 300 Hz
Resolution Bandwidth

Digital Storage and Averaging

Digital Storage and Averaging
Swept Measurements With the Tek TR 502

Swept Measurements With the TR 502

1 kHz to 2.5 GHz Coverage (Option 39)

Input Limiter for Extra Input Protection

Semiautomatic Measurements With the
Tek 7854

The Tektronix 7L 14 is a VHF/UHF analyzer
with digital storage. It provides high performance in the 10kHz to 1.8 GHz range .
Measurements for RR/EMC, FM, TV, avionics, navigation, two-way and other communications sytems are made with accuracy
and convenience.
Resolution bandwidth can be varied from
30 Hz to 3 MHz over the entire frequency
range. Automatic phase lock ensures excellent stability- incidental FM is ~ 13 Hz
peak-to-peak. Phase noise sidebands are
no greater than - 70 dBc at 25 resolution
bandwidths away.
All this gives you the critical accuracy necessary for design and proof-of-performance
measurements. Check broadband RF networks, filter networks, amplifiers, and more
. . . easily and economically.
For a complete description of the 7L 14, see
page 174.

The 7L12 is a popular instrument in applications not requiring the resolution , low-end
coverage, and digital storage of the 7L 14.
Resolution bandwidth can be varied from
300 Hz to 3 MHz, with - 115 dBm sensitivity at 300 Hz. Automatic phase lock results
in good stability; residual FM is ~200 Hz
peak-to-peak.
The 7L 12 meets the measurement requirements of many AM, FM, two-way radio and
other communications systems.
The 7L 12 has a 70 dB spurious-free display
dynamic range; low level noise measurements are made accurately, easily.

Three-Knob Operation
Preset Reference Level and Dot Frequency
for Extra Input Protection
Swept Measurements (Option 25)
Selectable Input Impedance; Calibration
in dBm, dBV or Volts per Division
Semiautomatic Measurements With the
Tek 7854

The Tektronix 7L5 provides easy-to-use
low-frequency measurement capability. The
7L5 can cover 20 Hz to 5 MHz in one display. Resolution bandwidth can be varied
from 10Hz to 30 kHz, with residual FM of
no more than 1 Hz peak-to-peak. Comparing baseband channel performance is easy
because the 7L5 switches from a single
channel to a 6O-channel supergroup without retuning. You see all channel amplitudes at a glance, side-by-side.

For a complete description of the 7L 12, see
page 175.
Probe-compatible plug-in input modules
provide a variety of impedances for the
7L5. The L3 may be switch-selected to
50 n , 600 n or 1 Mn. The L3 Option 01 is
switch-selectable to 75 n , 600 n or 1 Mn.
For a complete description of the 7L5, see
page 176.

252

TEK
)

7000

SAMPLING DECISION TREE
FOR REPETITIVE SIGNALS

SERIES

TOR

SAMPLED
SIGNAL

FEATU RES
o 1 GHz, Dual Trace
o 2 mV Sensitivity
o 350 ps Rise Times
o Leading Edge Viewing
o Add Mode
o Signal Outputs

7514 DUAL TRACE
5AMPLER

GENERAL-'\
PURPOSE

7S12 TOR / SAMPLER

Choose
5 -52 or
5-54
Pulse
Gen

Choose
5 -1 , 5-2,
or 5-6
Head

APP LI CATIO NS
S-6 with S-52 Heads
o ~),. Stripllne Ev aluation
o Highest Resol utlon
S-6 or S-2 with S-52 Head
Computer Sac kplanes
o Ribbon Cables
o High Resolutlo n
o Medium Rang e
o

S-1 with S-54 Head
Cables. Wiring Harnesses
o High ResoluliO n
o Long Range
o

SINEWAVE RESPONSE
HIGH PERFORMANCE TO 12.4 GHz

7S11
SAMPLER

TO 14 GHz

FEATURES
o Random Sa mpling
o Real Time Sampling
o Dual Trace w/two 7S 11 s
o Sinewave Triggering
to 12.4 GHz

7T11A
SAMPLING
SWEEP

Choose
5-4 or
5-6
Head

~/
7S12 TOR / SAMPLER

FEATURES
Sinewave Trig gering
to 14 GHz
o Dual Trace wit h
added 7S 11

5 -51
Trigger
Count
Down

Choose
5-4 or
5-6
Head

PULSE RESPONSE
Up to 175 ps Tr

7M1 1
OELAYLINE

FEATURES
o Leading Edge
viewing to 175 ps
o Dual Trace with
added 7S 11

7S12 TOR / SAMPLER

7S 1 1

7M11

8 EJ
Head

Head

7T11 A

Head

FEATURES
• Leading Edge
Viewing to
175 ps
• Dual Trace
With two
7S11s
o Sequenlial.
Random &
Real-lime
Sampling

PULSE RESPONSE
For Rep Rates Above 1 GHz

Up to 25 ps Tr
Choose
From
10
Heads

WITH

PRETRIGGE~>
7S12 TOR / SAMPLER

MEASUREMENT FLEXIBILITY
Dc to 350 MHz (Tr 1 ns) 1 MO-S-5
Dc to 1 GHz (T r 350 psI 50 O-S-1
• Dc to 1 GHz (Tr 350 psI 100 kO-S-3A
o Dc to 4.6 GHz (Tr 75 psI 50 0-S-2
• Dc to 11 .5 GHz (Tr 30 psI 50 0-S-6
o Dc to 14 GHz (T r 25 psI 50 O-S-4
o 1 GHz to 18 GHz Sinewave Trigger
Countdown- S-51
25 ps Tr Pulse Generator- S-52
o Dc to 1 GHz Trigger Recognizer-S-53
1 ns Tr Pulse Generator- S-54

W / O PRETRIGGER

~'7

7S1 1
SAMPLER

o
o

Choose
5 -4 or
5-6
Head

EJ
Head

7T11A
SAMPLING
SWEEP

FEATURES
Leading Edge
Viewing to 25 ps
In Random Sa mpling
Mode .

Choose
5-4 or
5 -6
Head

253

TEK

SAMPLING
SYSTEMS

7000
SERIES

Sampling Plug-Ins
7000 Series sampling plug-ins can increase
the versatility of your mainframe by providing measurement capabilities up to 14 GHz
on repetitive signals. The Sampling family
consists of five plug-ins, ten speciallydesigned sampling heads, and various supporting accessories that provide maximum
configurability for numerous applications.

Measurement
Point
(95.16)

50 (}
Reference

Specific uses for samplers include general
UHF measurement and TOR (Time Domain
Reflectometry).

UHF Measurements
For flexibility in time domain measurement,
the 7S11 Sampling Unit!7T11A Sampling
Sweep combination provides triggering to
12.4 GHz, and the choice of modular heads
for optimum signal acquisition . Two 7S11s
and one 7T11A provide dual-trace capability.
For plug-in sampler operationally similar to
conventional vertical/time base plug-ins, the
1 GHz 7S14 is available. Two identical channels provide 2 mV/div sensitivity, dual trace
display, built-in time base, and calibrated
delayed sweep. All of these plug-ins provide
a cost-effective way to obtain Gigahertz
measurement capability for repetitive signals.

CRT Relldout

CRT photo shows an automated impedance measurement on a four foot length of 93 coax. An easy-to-use program
allows the operator to obtain a direct readout in ohms (bottom center) after positioning cursors on selected points on
the display.

Automated Measurements With the 7854 Oscilloscope and 7S12 Sampler Plug-In

TOR
TOR is widely used in microwave stripline
evaluation, computer backplane measurements, and printed circuit board testing. With
TOR, a pulse is sent down a conductive path
and measured as it reflects back from any
impedance changes in the device under test.
Any impedance variations in the path cause a
corresponding signal to be displayed on the
scope. The precise location and type of
impedance anomaly (open , short , step
change) in the conductive path is directly
readable on the display. The fast rise times of
samplers make them well suited for these
measurements. The high resolution 7S12 TOR
Sampler provides maximum versatility in addition to general purpose applications.
Use the Sampling Decision Tree diagram on
the preceding page to select the configuration for your measurement requirement.
SAMPLING HEAD CHARACTERISTICS
aendwldth

RI ••
Tim.

Nol ..

Connector

GA
GA

5-1

40350 ps

500

5-2

Oc to
4.6 GHz

407S ps

500

403 m'l"'
406m....

Oc to
1 GHz

40350 ps

100 kIl

tip..

Probe

S-4

Ocl0
14GHz

4025 ps

500

402.5m'l" ,
40S m....

(3mm)

5-5

Octo
350 MHz

401ns

1 MIl

40500 1''1"'
40S m....

BNC

500
teed

ttvu

4OSm....
4OSm....

RI.e Time {In n.'

aendwldth

6.0

500 0

lpF

< 0.1

Oc to 3.S GHz

01Q-005&{J3

looX

6.0

SkIl

lpF

< 0.25

Oc to 1.4 GHz

01 (}0057-03

Length"'

Peckege Number·'

FET"3
IX
lOX
looX

6.0
6.0
6.0

100 kIl
1 MI1
1 MI1

3pF
I .S pF
I .S pF

< 0.4
<0.4
< 0.4

Oc to 900 MHz
Oc to 900 MHz
Oc to 900 MHz

0t(}£20Hl1

P6201

lOX
looX

2m
2m

10 MI1
10 MO

2pF
2pF

<0.7
<0.7

Oc to 500 MHz
Oc to 500 MHz

ot(){)384-800 ns. Pulse period 16 P.s within 2 p.S. Pulse aberrations following
the step are + 7%, -7%, total of 10% pop within
1.8 ns of step with reference point at 1.B ns from
step, +2%, - 2%, total of 4% pop after first
2.5 ns with reference point at 300 ns from step.
Pretrigger Output - Rise time is 1 ns or less.
Amplitude into 50 {2 is at least 1 V, positive going.
Pretrigger pulse duration is 4 ns. Pre trigger occurs 85 ns (within 5 ns) before the pulse output.
Pretrigger to pulse output jitter is 10 ps or less.
Pretrigger output is also available at rear connector
for intemal triggering of the sampling sweep unit.
Output Connectors - Pulse output uses an
SMA (3 mm) connector. Pretrigger output uses a
BSM connector.
Weight - Net: 0.3 kg (0.8Ib). Shipping: 0.5 kg
(1 .0Ib).

ORDERING INFORMATION
S-52 Pulse Generator Head
$1,965
Includes: 1 ns , 50 n semirigid coax delay line
(015-1023-00); instruction manual (070-1101-01).

S-53
Dc-to-1 GHz Operation
10 mV Sensitivity
The S-53 Trigger Recognizer Head is intended for use with the 7S 12 to permit operation
as a general-purpose sampling system. The
S-53 supplies triggering for the 7S12.
Input Characteristics - Frequency range is dc
to 1 GHz. Sensitivity range is 10 mV to 2 V pop
into 50 {2 . Kickout at input, ±5 mV or less.

260

Output Characteristics - Rise time is 1 ns or
less. Amplitude is at least 1.5 V positive-going
into 50 {2. Pulse duration is 3 ns within 2 ns at the
50% amplitude level. Pulse period is 27 p'S minimum. Trigger-to-signal delay is 15 ns or less.
Connectors - Trigger input connector is BNC
type. Front-panel trigger output connector is BSM
type. Trigger output is also available at rear connector for intemal triggering.
Weight - Net: 0.3 kg (O.Blb). Shipping: 0.5 kg
(1 .0Ib).

ORDERING INFORMATION
S-53 Trigger Recognizer Head
$1,425
Includes: 42 inch, 50n cable (012-0057-01); lOX 500 attenuator (011-I$5.56l

$1 ,8151$1 .800

$2.835/$2.!rn

$4,2ai/$4,335

$2,585

. , The 5116 must be used with 5010 to obtsIn ooIacJisp/8y.
•, Bsndwidths SffI real time. SsmpIing piug.i:JS that extend bsndwidths to 14 GHz ate svs6Bb1B for most msilframBs.
'J Prio8 does not incIIJdB plug-Ins.

The seven 5100 Series mainframes provide
realtime bandwidth to 2 MHz, sensitivity to
10 microvolts per division, CRT and digital
storage, dual sweep operation, and more.
The 5116, with the 5010 digital storage,
provides multicolor display of multitrace signals, scale factor readout , and cursor
measurements.
The 5223 digitizing mainframe with the
5B25N time base provides digitization of signals to 10 MHz with optional GPIB interface.
The 5400 Series mainframes provide all of
the capabilities of the 5100 Series mainframes plus 50 MHz bandwidth, variable persistence storage, and CRT readout of vertical
and horizontal scale factors.

261

TEK

5000

REFERENCE
INFORMATION

SERIES

5100 SERIES OSCILLOSCOPES
Four 5100 Series oscilloscope mainframes
are available : the 5110 Single-beam
nonstorage mainframe, the 5111A singlebeam storage mainframe, the 5113 dualbeam storage mainframe, and the 5116
Single-beam nonstorage mainframe with
color shutter. All of these mainframes feature 2 MHz vertical systems with large 6'12
inch CRTs.

5223 DIGITIZING OSCILLOSCOPE
You can get the benefits of digital storage , along with the time-tested advantages of a conventional analog scope, in
the 10 MHz 5223 Digitizing Oscilloscope.
Combined in one powerful, convenient oscilloscope are pushbutton ease, high quality waveform display, pretrigger signal manipulation, and optional GPIB interface,
plus real-time analog display capability.

Each of the 5000 Series mainframes
houses up to three plug-in units. For conventional Y-T operation, the left and middle plug-ins are amplifier units and the
right plug-in is a time base unit. An amplifier unit may be used in the right-hand plugin compartment to provide X-V operation
to the full sensitivity of the amplifier unit
used. A dual-trace amplifier unit in the
right-hand compartment can provide fully
independent dual X-V displays.

Use the 5223 in the digital storage mode
to capture repetitive events up to 10 MHz
in frequency or Single-shot events up to
100 kHz in frequency. The maximum sample rate is 1 MHz; storage capacity is 1024
bits per vertical compartment.

When used with the 5010 Waveform Digitizer, the 5116 mainframe provides a
unique three color display, with scale factor and cursor readouts, in addition to the
digital storage capabilities of the 5010,
Detailed descriptions of the 5100 Series
mainframes and plug-ins start on page
267.

The digitized display will never fade or
bloom, so you get more accurate measurements, more conveniently. High 10-bit
vertical resolution gives you an accurate
representation of your Signals.
For further information on the 5223 Digitizing Oscilloscope and its associated 5B25N
time base unit, see page 351 in the Digitizer Section.
5400 SERIES OSCILLOSCOPES
Two 5400 Series display units are presently
available: A single-beam , nonstorage dis-

play and a variable perSistence storage display. Both feature CRT readout of plug-in
scale factors, three plug-in compartments
and benchmount-to-rackmount convertibility.
The 5400 Series offers 50 MHz bandwidth
and is capable of satisfying a wide range of
measurement needs. It features readout of
plug-in scale factors on the CRT (except
with plug-ins having a suffix N: 5A22N ,
5B10N, etc.). This feature, previously available only on more sophisticated oscilloscopes, allows you to make measurements
more quickly and conveniently. The CRT
readout can also be externally accessed
(Option 03). Detailed descriptions of the
5400 Series mainframes and associated
plug-ins start on page 264.
PLUG-IN VERSATILITY
A wide choice of plug-ins is available in the
5000 Series family. All these plug-ins are
compatible with the 5400 Series, and most
are compatible with 5100 Series mainframes.
Compatibility of 5(XXJ Series mainframes and
plug-ins are shown in the chart below.
The amplifier plug-ins include single, dual,
and four trace units, and various differential
amplifiers. The time base plug-ins include
single, dual, and delaying sweep units, and
a digital time base.

5000 SERIES MAINFRAME/PLUG-IN COMPATIBILITY
F - Fun compatibility

L - Limited compatibility
5113

5118

Hiltz

Duel Beem
CRT Storage

NonI1onlge
With Color"'

0- No compatibility
5223
10 MHz
Dlgllel
Storage

54.w

5441

SO MHz

SO MHz Verlable
Penlatenc:e

5110
2 MHz
Nonatonlge

5111A
2 MHz
CRT Storage

With Readout

Page

PrIce.

SA14N Four Trace, 1 MHz, 1 mV/div

L- '

L-'

271

$1 ,6a)

5A15N Single Trace, 2 MHz, 1 mV/div

L- '

L-'

271

$400

SA18N Dual Trace, 2 MHz, 1 mV/div

L-'

271

$83S

2 MHz, 1 mVidiv

L- '

L-'

272

$480

SA21N Single Trace Differential,
I MHz, 50 "V/div, 0.5 mAidiv

L- '

L"'

L-'

272

$615

SA22N Single Trace Differential,
1 MHz, 10 "Vldiv

L- '

L-'

L"'

273

$1 ,220
$1 ,335

P1ug-ln.

NonI1onlge
With Readout

SA 19N Single Trace Differential,

5A28 Dual Trace Differential,
1 MHz, 50 "Vldiv

L-'

273

5A38 Oual Trace, 35 MHz, 10 mVidiv

265

$820

5A48 Oual Trace, 50 MHz, 1 mV/div

265

$1 ,170

5Bl0N Single Sweep TIme Basel
Amplifier, 1 p.S to 5 s

L- '

L-'

274

$ID)

SB12N Oual Sweep TIme Base,
A-I "s to 5 s, 8-2 "s to 0.5 s

L-'

274

$1 ,200

5B2SN Digital TIme Base for 5223,
0.2 "s to 5 s

L-'

L"'

352

$1 ,005

5840 Single Sweep T""" Base, 0.1 p.S to 5 s

L-'

265

$610

S842 Delaying TIme Base,
A-o.l "s to 5 s, 8-0.1 "s to 0.5 s

L-'

265

$1 ,470

5CTlN Semiconductor Curve Tracer

L- '

L-'

389

$1 ,075

5010 Waveform Digitizer

F-'

F"'

F-'

270

$2,005

-r The 5116 must be used wrth 5010 to obtain color display.
-z Plug-Ins with an "N- suffix do not implement the readout feature of the 5440 and 5441.
-, Only 5825N implements the digital storage feature of the 5223.

262

L-'-3

TEK

5000

REFERENCE
INFORMATION

SERIES

Two special-purpose plug-ins are also available. The 5CT1N is a semiconductor curve
tracer plug-in . It allows characteristic curves
of transistors, FETs, diodes and other semiconductor devices to be displayed on the
CRT.
The 5010 is a dual channel digital storage
unit with cursors, CRT scale factor readout,
roll mode and plotter output.

Back-lighted knob skirts on the plug-ins
provide scale-factor readout. The correct
scale factor is automatically indicated when
using the X10 magnifier and/or the recommended 1X and 10X probes. In addition,
the 5400 Series automatically presents correct scale factors on the CRT when used
with non-N suffix plug-ins. This feature
helps reduce human errors and enables
photographic recording of measurement
conditions.

5000 SERIES
PLUG-IN/PROBE COMPATIBILITY
Plug-In

P,obe

Attenuation

SA14N
SA15N
SA IBN

P6101A
P6102A

IX
10X
lX· l0X

Full bandwidth
Full bandwidlh
Switchable attenuation,
ground·reference button

Pro62B

1X
lOX
1X· l0X

P6055

lOX

Full bandwidlh
Full bandwidlh
Switchable attenuation.
ground·reference button
Variable attenuation for high
CMRR in differential operatJOn

P6101A
P6105A

IX
10X
1X· l0X

Pro62B

5010
5A21N

5A22N
5A26

5A38
SA48

P6101A
P6102A

Pro62B

Featuraa

Reduced bandwidlh
Full bandwidth
Switchable attenuation.
ground-reference button,
reduced bandwidth al 1X

See Probe s.ctJon lor complete deacrlptlon., page 463.

5000 SERIES MAINFRAMES AND PLUG-INS DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
5100 and S400 Serle.

5223
Cablnat
Dlmen.lon.

Width
Height
Oeplh

213

In
8.4
12.9
22.5

328
572

Weight. ....

Net
Shipping

16.9
20.5

Rackmount
mm

483
178

569

37.3
45.0

19.1
23.6

In
19.0
7.0
22.4
Ib
42.0
52.0

mm
213

3J2
518
kg
10.4
14.5

Plug-In.

Rackmount

Cabinet
In
8.4
11.9
20.4
Ib
23.0
32.0

133

483

19.0
5.3
19.0

2.6
5.0
12.0

Ib
24.0
43.0

10.9
19.5

Double Width

483

Single Width

127

305
kg

1.3
4.5

2.8
10.0

132
127

5.2
5.0
12.0

305

kg
2.6
4.9

5.8
10.8

ORDERING INFORMATION
CONVERSION KITS
Ceblnet-to-Reckmount Order 040-0583-03
(5223) Order 040-0976{)4
Reckmount-to-Ceblnet
Order 040-0584-04
(R5223) Order 040-0975-01

••••• r>

.A. 5(XX) Series rackmount oscilloscopes and cabinet-to-rackmount kits include complete slideout tracks and mounting

hardware interface with standard 19 inch racks.

APPLICATION NOTES FOR 5000 SERIES
Title

Deacrlptlon

Orde,

Biophysical Dala Relrieval. The Digilizing Approach

5223/5825NISA IBN Roll mode. chart recorder oulput.

52-W-4462·1

Inlerpreling Mechanical Measuremenls
With the Plug·ln OscWloscope

511115A22N1SA IBN Transducer measurements and storage.

52·A·3533-1

Simultaneous Display 01 two Independent
X·V signal pairs

51111SA1515AI5N15A1BN. Dual X·V lechniques.
engine analysis.

52·AX-4114

Simultaneous X·V, V·T Displays

5111 /SAI51SA15N15812N. X·V, V·T techniques.

52·AX-41 t3

Biomedical appIicalion.
Custom Plug·ln Ideas for 5(XX) Series Scopes

Recommended slarter nole for customers considering custom
plug·in project.

52·AX·3758

A High Resolution 60 Hz Notch Filter

Construction project using a commercial module in our
plug·in kit. Preconditions signals by removing 60 Hz hum.

52·AX-4031

A True RMS Converter

Conslruction project using thermal lrue RMS converter module
in our blank pIug·in kit . Measures Irue RMS up to 200 V RMS.

52·AX-4112

$215
$450
$190
$330

~DDDv
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
CART
K213 Lab Instrument Cert - For cabinet models. Plug·
in storage available as Option 12. See page 462.
CAMERAS
C-5C or C-4 Option 02 - For all 5100 Series. Suitable
for repetitive or stored traces.
C-59A (G or PI - General Purpose. For 5100 Series
storage scopes and 5400 Series.
Fo, lull detail., . . . Came,a SectIon on pege 440.

Blenk Plug-In Kit - Order 040-0818-03
Blenk Panel - Order 016-0452-{x)
Viewing Hoods Order 016-0154-{x)
Order 016-0260-00 (Folding)
Protective Cover - Order 016-
ASA

3!XXJ
ASA

100

245

125

C-59P

112.8
0.67 mag

Ordering information is common to the 544OIR544O and
5441/R5441 units unless otherwise noted.

100

450

23J

C-5()P>'

111.9
0.7 mag

Includes: Instruction manual (070-2139-01) .

(PLUG-INS NOT INCLUDED)

Optional Phosphors (Specify) (P11).

GM (P7) or BE

5441 /R5441 FEATURES
Persistence - Continuously variable, may be
turned off when not needed, thus producing highcontrast stored displays without the characteristic
fading of variable persistence.
Maximum Stored Writing Speed - Writing
speed >5 div/Ils for a view time of 15 s.
Storage View Time - The view time is the
amount of time the stored signal can be viewed
before it fades away.
At the maximum writing speed the view time is
15 seconds with the writing speed control fully cwo
Adjusting the stored instensity ccw will reduce the
stored writing speed, but view time can be increased up to fIVe minutes (refer to chart below).
Save Mode - Extends view time of stored displays up to one hour; prevents erasure of stored
display and storage of unwanted displays.
Erase Time - 0.5 s ± 10%.
III

00.0

!:;;;:
III

SAVE TIME
CONTROL

~ 2 5 .0 """'=::---~----+-------I

II:

1.0 1----~~:iEi~~~=:----__I
0.25 !:-:-_ _ _ _ _ _----:,-::--=..:::----.:l!!!:--=="'!-:'
0 .1
1.0
5 .0

STORED WRITING SPEED
(DiY/lls at Maximum Persistence)
CALIBRATOR
Voltage - 400 mV within 1%.
Current Output - 4 mA within 1%. Frequency is
two times the line frequency.

5440 General Purpose Oscilloscope
R5440 Rackmount Oscilloscope

Deflection Factors

$3,320
$3,385
$5,505

Includes: Instruction manual (070-214O{)1).

R5441 Rackmount Oscilloscope

5A38
10 mV/ DiY to 10 V/DiY Calibrated

Includes: Same as 5440.

5441 Storage Oscilloscope

Dual Trace

Dc to 35 MHz Bandwidth

20,00:>
ASA

• , Slight cropping of the grsticvle comers. Requires optional battery psck (016-0270-02) for operation with the 5440.

5A38

The 5A38 is a dual trace, 35 MHz plug-in
amplifier for use only in the 5223 and the
5400 Series mainframes , It features
10 mV/div sensitivity and CRT readout of
deflection factor" l

$5,560

CHARACTERISTICS

Includes: Same as 5441 .
OPTIONS
Option 01 Option 03 -

Without CRT Readout.
User Addressable CRT Readout.
Up to 20 user-selected characters may be displayed in the CRT readout for additional test information such as time, date, device tested, test
number, etc. Especially useful for documenting
photographs. Programming of characters is
done by external resistors and switches.
Option 04 - (5440/5441 only) Protective Panel Cover.
Option 78 - (5440/R544O only) GM (P7)
Phosphor.

Option 78 -

- $280

+ $1 SO
+$40
+$50

(544O/R544O only) BE (P11)

Phosphor.

+$50

CONVERSION KITS
CRT Reldout - Order 04(}{)69l{l2
Clblnet-to-Rlckmount -

$580

Order 040-0583-03

$215

Rlckmount-to-Clblnet Order 04Q-0584.04

$190

INTERNATIONAL POWER PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 - Universal Euro 220 V, 50 Hz.
Option A2 - UK 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A3 - Australian 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A4 - North American 240 V, 60 Hz.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Plug-Ins - See page 262.
Probes - See pages 263 and 464.

Recommended
Recommended
Recommended
Recommended

462.

Clmerls - See page 441.
Clrt - K213 Option 12. See page

Bandwidth - Dc Coupled: To ;;;.35 MHz. Lower
End Response, Ac Coupled: ~10 Hz.
Deflection Factors - Calibrated: 10 mV/div to
10 V/div in a 1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy: is ~3%
from 15°C to 35°C, 4% from O°C to +50°C. Uncalibrated: Variable is continuous between steps
to at least 25 V/div.
Input Rand C - 1 Mfl paralleled by ",,20 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - Dc Coupled: 250 V
(dc + peak ac). Ac Coupled: 500 V (dc + peak
ac). Ac Component: 500 V p-p maximum at 1 kHz
or less.
Stability - ~0 .3 mV vertical shift in anyone
minute after one hour warm-up, ambient temperature and line voltage held constant. ~0.2 mV/oC
vertical shift with line voltage held constant.
Display Modes - Channell only, Channel2
only (normal or inverted), Dual Trace, and Added.
Alternated or chopped operation determined by
time base plug-in. Internal trigger selectable from
Channel 1 or Channel 2.
Rise Time - ~10 ns.
Channel Isolation - ;;;'50: 1 to 35 MHz with
both traces displayed.

ORDERING INFORMATION
SA38 Dual Trace Amplifier

$820

Includes: Instruction manual (07o-1694{)()).
For floating measurements, order A6902B Isolator. See
page 479 for complete description.
.J

CRT readout not functions/in 5223.

265

TEK

5000

DUAL TRACE AMPLIFIER,
TIME BASES

SERIES

5840

5A48

5842

Sweep Accuracy - Measured in 5400 Series oscilloscope over center eight graticule divisions. Valid
for 100 div of magnified sweep after the first ~ ns .

......

Unmagnified

Magnified

+1S·C 110 o·c 110 +1S·C 110 o·c 110
+35·C +so·c +35·C +SO·C

Tlme/Div

1 sldiv to 0.5 jlS/div

5.5%

5 sldiv and 2 sldiv.
0.2 jlS/div and
0.1 jlS/div

6.5%

TRIGGERING
Triggering Sensitivity
Frequency

Renge

Coupling

Dc 5400 amp! Dc to 10 MHz
5400 amp!
5100 amp!
5441 DUAL

T ~ C:IE

1..0

A M Pl

Dual Trace

TIME ......

Delaying Time Base

Time Base

10 MHz to 00 MHz

Dc to 2 MHz

Minknum Sign8I
Required

IntemIII

Extem8I

0.4 div"
0.4 div"
1.0 div"
1.0 div"
0.4 div"

OOmV"
100 mV"
150 mY"
400 mV"
l00mV"

Trigger requirements increase below 50 Hz

LF Rej

Trigger requirements increase below 7.5 kHz

HFRej

Trigger requirements inctease above 50 kHz"

" 5840 only.

5A48

Rise Time - 7 ns or less (5 mV/div to 10 V/div),
14 ns or less (1 mV/div and 2 mV/div).

Dc to 50 MHz Bandwidth
1 mV/Diy to 10 V/Diy Calibrated
Deflection Factors

The 5A48 is a dual trace 50 MHz plug-in
amplifier for use in the 5223 and the 5400
Series mainframes. The 5A48 features five
operating modes, selectable trigger source,
and CRT readout of deflection factor: 1

CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth Dc Coupled: Dc to at least
50 MHz at 5 mV/div to 10 Vldiv, dc to at least
25 MHz at 1 mV/div and 2 mV/div (3 dB down). Ac
coupled: 10 Hz or less (1 Hz with lOX probe) at all
deflection factors (3 dB down).
Deflection Factors - Calibrated: 1 mV/div to
10 V/div in a 1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy: ~ 5% at
1 mV/div and 2 mV/div; ~ 3% from 5 mV/div to
10 V/div from + 15°C to + 35°C; ~ 4% from
5 mV/div to 10 V/div from O°C to +50°C. Uncalibrated: Variable is continuous between steps to
at least 25 V/div.
Input Rand C - 1 Mfl within 1% paralleled by
",,24 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - Dc Coupled: 250 V
(dc + peak ac. Ac Coupled: 500 V (dc + peak
ac). Ac Component: 500 V p-p maximum, 1 kHz
or less.
Stability - ~0 . 3 mV vertical shift in anyone
minute after one hour warm-up, ambient temperature and line voltage held constant. ~ 0 . 2 mV/o C
vertical shift with line voltage held constant.
Display Modes - Channell only, Channel 2
only (normal or inverted), Dual trace, Added, Alternated, Chopped (determined by time base
plug-in horizontal compartment). Internal Trigger
Source: Selectable from Channell or Channel 2.
" CRT r6scJout not functlons/ /n 5223.

266

ORDERING INFORMATION
5A48 Dual Trace Amplifier

$1,170

Includes: Instruction manual (070-145(}{)()).
For floating measurements, order A69028 Isolator. See
page 479 for complete description.
RECOMMENDED PROBES
See pages 263 and 464.
P610SA -

lOX Passive. See page 468.

$93

5840/5842
Single Sweep
10 ns/Diy to 5 s/Diy Calibrated Time Base
Triggering to 50 MHz

The 5840/5842 Time Bases are designed
for use in 5400 Series mainframes. They feature sweep rates from 10 ns/div to 5 s/div
and CRT readout of the sweep rate selected. The 5842 also features delayed sweep
rates up to 10 ns/div.

CHARACTERISTICS
The following characteristics are the same for the
5840 and 5842 unless otherwise noted.
Sweep Rate - 0.1 I's/div to 5 s/div in 24 calibrated steps (1 -2-5 sequence). 10 ns/div is fastest sweep rate obtained with Xl0 magnifier. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps
and up to 12.5 s/div.

" 5842 only.

Single Sweep - Triggering requirements are
the same as normal sweep. When triggered,
sweep generator produces only one sweep.
Ext Trigger Input - Maximum Input Voltage:
350 V dc + peak ac, 350 V p-p ac at ~ 1 kHz.
Input Rand C: 1 Mfl paralleled by ",,24 pF. Trigger Level Range: ~ ± 1.5 V (5840) and ± 2.5 V
(5842).
Ext Horizontal Input - Deflection Factor:
50 mV/div ±3%. Input Rand C: 1 Mfl paralleled
by ",, 24 pF. Dc Coupled Bandwidth : Dc to
~2 MHz. Ac Coupled Lower Response: ~ 50 Hz.
Maximum Input Voltage: 350 V (dc + peak ac) or
350 V p-p ac at ~ 1 kHz.
DELAYING SWEEP (5842 ONLY)
Delay Time Multiplier Range - 0.2 to 10 times
the Time/Div setting.
Differential Time Measurement Accuracy Within 1% plus 0.2% of full scale from 1!'5 to
0.5 s delay time. Within 2% plus 0.2% of full scale
of 1 s to 5 s delay time.
Jitter - < 0.05% of the time represented by one
division of delaying sweep selected.
DELAYED SWEEP (5842 ONLY)
Sweep Rate - 0.1 I's/div to 0.5 s/div in 21 calibrated steps (1 -2-5 sequence). 10 ns/div is the
fastest calibrated sweep rate obtained with the
Xl0 magnifier.
Sweep Accuracy - Measured over the center
eight division. Same as undelayed sweep.
Triggering - The same as the internal triggering specifications in the table above.

ORDERING INFORMATION
5840 Time Base

$810

Include.: Instruction manual (070-1742-00).

5842 Delaying Time Base
Include.: Instruction manual (070-1447-00).

$1,470

TEK

5000

2 MHz SINGLE BEAM, DUAL BEAM
AND STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES

SERIES

5100 Series Oscilloscopes

5111A/R5111A

5113/R5113

Low Cost

Single Beam Bistable Storage Oscilloscope

Dual Beam Bistable Storage Oscilloscope

Dc to 2 MHz

Split-Screen Display

Split-Screen Dispaly

Wide Choice of Plug-Ins

Stored Writing Speed to 800 DiY/ms in
Enhanced Mode (Option 03)

Rear Panel Signal Outputs Optional
See page 263 for available Application Notes.

5110/R5110

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Electromechanical Design and Test
Vibration Analysis

Lowest Cost Single Beam Nonstorage
Oscilloscope With Plug-In Conflgurabllity
8 Channels at 1 mV/Dly, 4 Channels at
50 /lV/DiY, 2 Channels at 10 /lV/DiY,
With Appropriate Amplifiers

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Biomedical Research
Electromechanical Design and Test

The 5110 is a single beam nonstorage oscilloscope featuring a large diagonal 6 1/2
inch (1 .27 cm/div) CRT.
Tailor your measurement needs with the
appropriate plug-in units to obtain high-gain
differential (10,.N/div), four channel differential at 50 /lV/div, eight-channel displays
at 1 mV/div. Or choose from single-trace or
dual-trace basic amplifiers and time-base
plug-ins to suit the special needs of education and industry.

The 5111A is a single beam, split-screen,
bistable storage oscilloscope with a large
61/2 inch diagonal display. The 5111A extends measurement capability into areas
requiring retention of single and multitrace
displays for long-term examination and/or
photography. It is particularly useful for recording low and medium frequency signals.
The standard 5111 A provides writing
speeds to 50 div/ms; Option 03 extends the
writing speed to 800 divisions per millisecond , suitable for capturing a single-shot
display of a 60 kHz sinewave four divisions
in amplitude.
Up to eight traces can be displayed and
stored simultaneously, with two 5A 14N amplifier plug-in units. When using two amplifiers and the 5812N dual time base in the
dual-sweep mode, the two sweeps are
slaved individually to the two amplifiers.

Two Independent Vertical Systems
Two Single-Shot Display Signals
Display Without Time-Sharing
Stored Writing Speed

~ 20

DiY/ms

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Biomedical Research
Low Repetition Rate Observation

The 5113 is a dual beam bistable storage
oscilloscope featuring easy-to-use splitscreen storage. Stored writing speed is at
least 20 div/ms. View time is at least one
hour at normal intensity and can be increased to ten hours at reduced intensity.
The 5113 can display two simultaneous
events , either single-shot or repetitive ,
against a common time base within the
bandwidth and writing rate limits of the system. 80th beams are driven by one set of
horizontal deflection plates.
The 5113 is particularly useful in biomedical
research where low-repetition-rate stimulus/
response potentials need to be simultaneously observed and recorded .

When using two amplifiers and the 5812N
dual time base in the dual-sweep mode,
the two sweeps are slaved individually to
the two amplifiers.

267

TEK

5100 Series Oscilloscopes
CHARACTERISTICS
Characteristics are the same for the 5110/R5110,
5111A1R5111A, 51131R5113 and 5116 unless otherwise indicated.
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Channels - Left and center plug-in compartments. Compatible with all 5100 Series plug-ins.
See page 263.
Bandwidth - 2 MHz, determined by plug-in.
See page 263.
Deflection Factor - Determined by plug-in.
See page 263.
Chopped Mode - (5110/R5110, 5111A1R5111A,
5116) The mainframe vertical amplifier will chop
between left and center plug-in compartments,
and/or between two or more amplifier channels.
The total time segment per channel is "",5/-LS,
consisting of "",4 Jl-S displayed, "'" 1 Jl-S blanked.
Chop or alternate mode is selected at the time
base unit.
Chopped Mode - (5113/R5113) The left and
right mainframe vertical amplifiers are dedicated
to the left and center plug-in compartments. Each
mainframe vertical amplifier will chop between
two or more channels in their associated plug-in
compartments. No channel switching is necessary between left and center plug-in compartments. The total time segment per channel is
"", 5 Jl-S , consisting of 4 Jl-S displayed , "'" 1 Jl-s
blanked. Chop or alternate mode is selected at
the time base unit.
Altemate Mode - (5110/R5110, 5111A1R5111A,
5116) Each amplifier plug-in is swept twice before
switching to the next. Single-trace amplifiers are
swept twice. Each channel of a dual-trace amplifier is swept once before switching to the second
amplifier.
Altemate Mode - (5113/R5113) Single-trace
amplifiers are swept full time. Each channel of a
multitrace amplifier is swept once before switching to the next channel. No channel switching is
necessary between left and center plug-in
compartments.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Channel Right-hand plug-in compartment.
Compatible with all 5100 Series plug-ins. See
page 263.
Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate - 0.1 Jl-s/div
(XlO mag) with 5Bl0N or 5B12N; 10 Jl-s/div (Xl0
mag) with 5010.
X-Y Mode - Phase shift is within 1° from dc to
100 kHz.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT - Internal 8 x 10 div (1 .27 cm/div) parallaxfree, nonilluminated graticule. Illuminated graticule available at extra cost. (Illuminated graticule
standard on 5116.)
Accelerating Potential - 5110/R5110, 5111N
R5111A, 5113/R5113: 3.5 kV. 5116: 4.5 kV.
Standard Phosphor - 51101R5110: GH (P31).
5111A1R5111A, 51131R5113: Equivalent to GJ (Pl).
Optional Phosphors (Specify) - (5110/R5110
only) GM (P7) or BE (Pll).
Beam Finder - Aids in locating an off-screen
signal.

268

5000

2 MHz SINGLE BEAMlDUAL BEAM
AND STORAGE OSCI LOSCOPES

SERIES

Maximum Stored Writing Speed - (5111A
and 5113 only) 5111NR5111A: At least 20 divl ms
in the Normal Mode and 50 divl ms in the Enhanced Mode. 5113/R5113: At least 20 divl ms.
With Option 03, Fast Writing Speed CRT (5111A and 5113 only) At least 200 div/ms (center
6 x 8 div) in the Normal Mode and 800 div/ms
(center 6 x 8 div) in the Enhanced Mode.
Storage View Time - (5111A and 5113 only) At
least one hour at normal intensity; up to ten hours
at reduced intensity, after which time it may be
increased to original level.
Erase Time - (5111A and 5113 only) "",250 ms.

X-Y Mode - CRT-related X-V signals are available at the appropriate rear panel connectors
when amplifier plug-ins are used in either the left
or center compartment and the right compartment to display X-V information. Sensitivity (X-Y):
0.5 V/CRT division.

CALIBRATOR
Voltage Output - Squarewave, positive-going
from ground.
Voltage Range - 400 mV within 1%.
Current Output - 4 mA with current loop. Frequency is two times the line frequency.

Includes: Same as 5110.

OUTPUTS/ INPUTS
Extemal Intensity Input - +5 V turns beam
on from off condition. -5 V turns beam off from
on condition. Frequency range is dc to 1 MHz.
Input Rand C is "'" 10 kD paralleled by "",40 pF.
Maximum input is ±50V (dc + peak ac).
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges - 100, 110, 120, 200,
220, and 240 V ac ± 10% (except that maximum
input should not exceed 250 V ac). Internally selected with quick change jumpers.
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption - 110 W.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Ambient Temperature - 5110/5111A15113:
Operating, O°C to +50°C; nonoperating, -40°C
to + 70°C. 5116: Operating, O°C to +45°C; nonoperating, -55°C to + 75°C.

Dlmenaiona
Width
Height
Depth

mm
213

302
518

Reckmount
In

8 .4
11 .9
20.4

483
133
483

(PLUG-INS NOT INCLUDED)
Ordering information is common to all units unless otherwise noted.

5110 Oscilloscope

$1,815

Includes: Instruction manual (070-2134-01).

R5110 Oscilloscope
5111A Storage Oscilloscope

In
19.0
5.3
19.0

Weigh.. ""

Net
Shipping

10.4
14.5

23.0
32.0

10.9
19.5

24.0
43.0

Option 07
CHARACTERISTICS
Left and Center Compartments - Two BNC
connectors provide access to the CRT related
signals from the left and center plug-in amplifiers.
Sensitivity: 0.5 V/CRT division . Output impedance: 1 kD.
Right Compartment - Sweep: One BNC connector provides access to the CRT-related sweep
waveform. Sensitivity is 0.5 V/CRT division; positive-going sawtooth, ~5 V. Output Impedance is
1 kD. Gate: One BNC connector provides access
to TIL compatible gate. Positive-going, coincident with displayed sweep.

$2,835

(070-3934-00).

R5111A Storage Oscilloscope

$2,900

Includes: Same as 5111A.

5113 Storage Oscilloscope

$4,205

Includes: Instruction manual (070-2137-01).

R5113 Storage Oscilloscope

$4,335

Includes: Same as 5113.

5116 Oscilloscope

$2,585

Includes: Power cord (16HX)66-00); instruction manual
(070-4544-00).

OPTIONS
Option 02 -

(5110, 5111A, 5113, 5116 only)
Protective Panel Cover. The cover protects the
front panel and knobs during transportation
and storage.

+$40

Option 03 - Fast Write CAT increases stored
writing speed to 2XJ div/ms (center 6 x 8 (0).
(5111A1R5111A)
(51131R5113A)

Option 07 Option 78 -

Add Rear Panel Signals Out.

+$50

Option 78 -

(5110, R5110 only) BE (P11)

+$50

CONVERSION KITS
Cebinet-to-Reckmount Conversion Kit Order 040-0583-03
Reckmount-to-Ceblnet Conversion Kit Order

+$205
+$150
+$130

(5110, R5110 only) GM (P7)

Phosphor.

040-0584-04

$215
$190

Protective Penel Cover Kit - (5110, 5111A,
5113, 5116 only) Order 040-0620-0O
Reer Penel Signel Outputs Order 040-0915-02

Rear Panel Signal Outputs

$1,890

Includes: Power cord (16HXl66-00): instruction manual

Phosphor.

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
C.blnet

ORDERING INFORMATION

$40
$325

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Recommended Plug-Ins - See page 262.
Recommended Probes - See pages 263 and 464.
Recommended Cert - K213 Option 12. See page
462.
RECOMMENDED CAMERAS
C-5C - Low cost. See page 445.
C-59AP - General purpose for 5100 Series.

See page 453.
C-7 -

AutoRlm Eject. See page 448.

$495
$1,335
$595

TEK

5000

HIGH RESOLUTION, COLOR
STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE

SERIES

simultaneous color display of three
signals , with color-coded cursor
measurements available on each of
the three .

5116
Three Color, High Resolution Digital Storage
Display With 5010
Convergence Not Required,
Single Beam Design
Accepts Full Range of 5100 Series Amplifiers
for Preconditioning or Noncolor Applications

The 5116 Oscilloscope, when used with the
5010 digital storage plug-in unit, provides a
unique three-color display of the digital storage capabilities and features of the 5010.
Color enhances individual trace and readout
identification, thereby providing a much improved user interface. The coding capabilities afforded by color allow for interpretation
and differentiation of data more quickly, reduced measurement time, fewer errors, and
improved resolution by using the full screen
for overlapping signals. See page 48 for a
color photo of the 5116 with the 5010.
Permanent color records may be obtained
with either a Tektronix camera (see pages
440-453) or with the 5010 plotter output.
The 5010 occupies the center and right plugin compartments of the mainframe with
which it is used. The left-hand plug-in compartment may be used to house an additional 5100 Series amplifier plug-in whose signal
may be displayed through the unique Channel 2 left plug-in display capability of the
5010. In this mode of operation , the signal
from the additional amplifier plug-in unit is
digitized and displayed on screen in place
of Channel 1 of the 5010. In this way, the
10lN/div 5A22N may be used to provide a
digitally stored display of a very low level
differential signal. Or, a dual trace amplifier
such as the 5A26 , may be used in the lefthand plug-in compartment to permit the

In addition to its color operation with the
5010 digital storage unit, the 5116 mainframe may also be used with any of the
other 5100 Series plug-in units, with exactly
the same functionality as the 5110 mainframe (see mainframe/compatibility chart on
page 262).

5010 Digital Storage Unit
Compatible With All 5000 Series Mainframes
Digital Storage
CRT Readout
Powerful Triggering Capability

CHARACTERISTICS

1% Accuracy

The following characteristics are in addition to
those listed previously.

Dual Channel

CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
Standard CRT Internal 8 x 10 div

Save Reference Waveforms

(1 .27 cm/div) parallax-free, illuminated graticule.
Accelerating Potential - 4.5 kV.
Color Shutter - With 5010: Three-color display
of blue-green, orange, and neutral. Without 5010:
Blue-green display.
Beam Finder - Positions beam on screen regardless of vertical and horizontal position control
settings.

ORDERING INFORMATION
(PLUG-INS NOT INCLUDED)
5116 Digital Storage Oscilloscope
$2,585
Includea: Power cord (16HXl66-00): instruction manual
(07()'4544{)() .

OPTIONS
Option 02 - Protective Panel Cover. The
cover protects the front panel and knobs duro
ing transportation and storage.
+$40
Option 07 - Add Rear Panel Signals Out.
+$130
CONVERSION KITS
Cabinet-to-Rackmount Conversion Kit Order 040{)583{)3
Rackmount-to-Cablnet Converalon Kit Order 04().{)584.()4
Protective Panel Cover KIt Order~

Rear Panel Signal Outputa Conversion Kit
(Option 07) - Order Q4(}()915-Q2

$215

1 MHz Sample Frequency

X-Y Recorder Output
Signal Conditioning via Left Vertical Plug-In
Color Signal Source for 5116 Oscilloscope

The 5010 enhances all Tektronix 5000 Series mainframes by providing digital storage
for transient events with frequency components up to 100 kHz for a single channel acquisition and up to 50 kHz for dual channel
acquisition, all in a compact two-wide plug-in.

Color/Waveform Digitizing System
Together, the 5010 and the Tektronix 5116
Oscilloscope create a system of high resolution color*1 and digital storage for superior
trace and readout clarity. Digital storage
provides clear, crisp, bright displays which
can be viewed indefinitely. And also the following additional features:

Cursors permit convenient Single-point and

$40

point-to-point measurement of time, amplitude, and frequency for fast, accurate, and
reliable answers.

$325

"ThffHNXJlor display requires a 5010 wllh serial number
8020000 or higher. A field /nsla//ab18 kit Is avaHab18 to up.

$190

grade earlier 50 lOs. Contact your IOc8I Te/ctronix Sales Rep.
resentative for detal/s.

For recommended cameraa, aee page 442.
For a description and photos of color display technology. lee page 47.

269

TEK

5000

WAVEFORM
DIGITIZER

CRT Readout displays all pertinent instrument settings, cursors, and waveform levels.
Lets you read out complete operational status at a glance.
Pretrigger allows viewing information prior
to the trigger event so you can see all your
data. Center and posttrigger selection is
also provided.
Free Run optimizes the data presentation
for low speed phenomena, much like a
stripchart recorder.
1 % Accuracy improves measurement
quality in both vertical and horizontal modes.

Dual Samplers ensure time coincidence
between the two input channels.
Bislope Triggering assures triggering
when the slope of a transient event is not
known.
1 MHz Sample Frequency stores singleshot events to approximately 100 kHz in
bandwidth with a-bit vertical resolution.
Storage View-Time control from 1 second
to infinity.
Save Reference permits comparisons of
signals stored at different times.
X-V Displays provide less than 10 phase
shift up to 100 kHz of parametric related
signals.
X-V Recorder Output provides inexpensive, archivable hard copies complete with
readout, graticule, and displayed waveforms
in full color.
Preconditioning of up to two signals for
Channel 2 by using the left vertical plug-in
(when used in 5100 Series mainframes only).
For example, plug-ins such as the 5A21N,
5A22N and 5A26 can provide differential
performance with sensitivities ranging to
10/N/div (5A22N). The 5010 can acquire a
total of three signal channels when using
the Channel 2 left plug-in acquisition feature.

SERIES

CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL
Vertical Modes - CH 1, CH 2, Add , Dual, X-Yo
Channel 2 Modes - V/div, Left plug-in.
Deflection Factor - 1 mV/div to 20 V/div in
14 calibrated steps (1 -2-5 sequence).
Accuracy - Input to Readout Numbers :
5 mVldiv to 1 V/div ± 1%; 1 mV/div to 2 mVldiv
±2%; 2 V/div to 20 V/div ±2%; Input to CRT
graticule ± 2%. From Left Vertical Plug-in: Add
± 1% to above specifications. Add Mode: Add
± 1% to above specifications.
Input Rand C - 1 Mfl ± 0.5% paralleled by
=47 pF.
Maximum Input - 250 V (dc + peak ac); 250 V
pop ac at 1 kHz or less.
Bandwidth - Single Channel: Suitable from dc
to 100 kHz. Dual Channel: Suitable from dc to
50 kHz. Ac Coupling: 3 dB point-l0 Hz or less
(1 Hz with lOX probe).
Common-Mode Rejection - At least 50:1, dc
to 100kHz.
Resolution - Vertical: X-Y or YeT; 0.04 div (8-bit
digitizer). Horizontal: YeT; 0.01 div (1024 memory
locations shared among all traces displayed).
Phase Shift - __ 1.0· phase shift between CH 1
and CH 2, dc to 100 kHz.
Display Output (to X-V Recorder) - Amplitude: 0.2 V/div ±2%. Speed: Compatible with
X-Y recorders with 20 inls slew rate, or faster. Pen
Lift: Isolated switch contacts, SPST (floating); normally open or normally closed selected by intemal
jumper.
TIME BASE
Sweep Rates - 0.1 ms to 50 s/div in 18 calibrated steps 1-2-5 sequence (to 1OI's/div with lOX
magnifier).
Accuracy - Within ± 1% of readout numbers.
External Input - Allows extemal pulse generator to determine acquisition rate . Accepts TIL
levels up to 1 MHz rate.
Possible Under-Sampling Indicator - Indicator lights when fewer than eight sample pulses
occur during interval between successive threshold crossing of triggering signals.
TRIGGERING
Sources - CH 1, CH 2, left plug-in (via mainframe), line, extemal.
Coupling - Dc, ac.
Sensitivity - Extemal: 100 mV; dc to 50 kHz or
pulsewidth >5I's; 250 mV 50 kHz to 250 kHz or
pulsewidth > 1 I's . CH 1, CH 2, Left Plug-in :
0.4 div, dc to 50 kHz or pulsewidth >5!'S; 1.0 div,
50 kHz to 250 kHz or pulsewidth > 1 !'S.
Bisiope Trigger - Amplitude , frequency, and
pulsewidth specifications apply to absolute value
of signal (rectified).
External Trigger Input - Input Rand C: 1 Mfl
± 2% paralleled by = 47 pF. Maximum input
250 V (dc + peak ac). 250 V pop ac at 1 kHz or
less.

ORDERING INFORMATION
5010 Waveform Digitizer
$2,095
Include.: Diagnostics manual (07(}43Zl00); operator
manual (070-369&Ot); service manual (070-369HXl).

270

P6102A 10X Probe

Dc to 60 MHz
Scale Factor Readout Coding
Fully Compatible With All 5100 Series

The P6102A is a miniature 10X passive probe
specially designed for use with all 5100 Series amplifier plug-ins, TM 500 Series SC 501 ,
SC 502, and SC 503 plug-in oscilloscopes,
and other scopes having nominal 47 pF inputs. Compensation range is 38 pF to 55 pF.
The P6102A automatically codes CRT readout-equipped scopes to show the correct
scale factor and the knob-skirt readout on
plug-ins with this feature. A ground reference
button is included to provide easy location of
ground position on the CRT and an easy
means of identifying channels on multichannel displays.
The P6102A employs modular construction
featuring just three snap-together modules.
This means easy user repair and low maintenance costs.

CHARACTERISTICS
Length - 2m.
Attenuation - lOX ± 3%.
Input Rand C - 10 Mfl, 13.2 pF.
Bandwidth - Dc to > 00 MHz.
Rise Time - < 5.9 ns.
Aberrations - ±3%, 5% p-p.
Compensation Range - 38 pF to 55 pF.
Maximum Nondestructive Input Voltage
500 V (dc + peak ac).
ENVIRONMENTAL
Ambient Temperature - Operating: - 15· C to
+ 75· C. Nonoperating: - 62·C to +85·C.
Humidity - Five cycles (120 hours total) at 95%
to 97%.
Altitude - Operating: To 4000 m (15,000 ft). Nonoperating: To 15000 m (50,000 ft).

ORDERING INFORMATION
P6102A Miniature 10X Probe
$75
Include.: Retractable hook tip (013{)10H15); ground
cover sleeve (166-0404-01); 130 mm ground lead
(175-0124-01); 300 mm ground lead (175-0125-01);
miniature alligator clip (344-0046-00); Ie testing tip
(015{)2()1{l6); black marker band (334-2794-00); white
marker band (334-2794-01); silver-gray marker band
(334-2794-02); adjusting tool (003-1364-00); accessory
pouch (016-0700-00); instruction manual (070-5824{XJ).

5000

TEK

SINGLE-CHANNEL, DUAL-CHANNEI:z
FOUR-CHANNEL AMPLIFIER:.

SERIES

5A15N

5A18N

5A14N

Single Trace Amplifier

Dual Trace Amplifier

Four Trace Amplifier

5A15N

5A18N

5A14N

Dc to 2 MHz Bandwidth

Dc to 1 MHz Bandwidth

1 mVIDly to 5 V IDly

1 mV IDly to 5 V IDly

1 mV I Diy to 5 V I Dly

The 5A 15N is the simplest of the 5A Series
plug-in amplifiers to use. It provides a bandwidth of dc to 2 MHz in any 5000 Series
mainframe at sensitivities to 1 mV/div. Two
5A 15Ns may be used in a mainframe to
provide dual-trace operation , or to provide
1 mV/div X-V operation if one of the amplifiers is inserted in the right-hand mainframe
compartment.

The 5A18 is essentially a dual-trace 5A15N.
Bandwidth is dc to 2 MHz in any 5000 Series
mainframe at sensitivities to 1 mV/div. The
Channel 2 signal may be inverted by means
of a front panel switch to provide difference
measurements of two signals in the ADD
mode. The internal trigger signal is
selectable from Channel 1 or Channel 2 by
means of front-panel pushbuttons.

CHARACTERISTICS

Dual trace X-V operation may be obtained
with a 5A 18N in the right-hand compartment
of any 5000 Series mainframe.

The 5A 14N is a four-trace amplifier unit
which provides 1 MHz bandwidth and sensitivity to 1 mV/div in any 5000 Series mainframe. Each channel may be displayed separately, or the channels may be alternated
or chopped in any combination. The internal
triggering signal is available from Channel 1
only. Two 5A14Ns may be combined to provide eight-trace operation in any 5000 Series
mainframe.

......

(

Bandwidth - Dc Coupled: Dc to at least 2 MHz
at all deflection factors. Ac Coupled: 2 Hz or less
to at least 2 MHz at all deflection factors .
Deflection Factor - Calibrated: 1 mV/div to
5 V/div in 12 steps (1-2-5 sequence). Accuracy is
within 2%. Uncalibrated: Variable is continuous
between steps to at least 12.5 V/div.
Input Rand C - 1 Mn within 1% paralleled by
~47 pF.
Maximum Input - Dc Coupled : 350 V (dc
peak ac). Ac Coupled: 350 V dc.

ORDERING INFORMATION
5A15N Single Trace Amplifier
Includes: Instruction manual (070-113&00).

$400

CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Dc Coupled: Dc to at least 2 MHz
at all deflection factors. Ac Coupled: 2 Hz or less
to at least 2 MHz at all deflection factors.
Deflection Factor - Calibrated: 1 mV/div to
5 Vldiv in 12 steps (1 -2-5 sequence). Accuracy is
within 2%. Uncalibrated: Variable is continuous
between steps to at least 12.5 V/div.
Input Rand C - 1 MO within 1% paralleled by
=47pF.
Maximum Input - Dc Coupled: 350 V (dc +
peak ac). Ac Coupled: 350 V dc.
Chopping Rate - 25 kHz to 100 kHz depending
upon plug-in combinations and number of traces
displayed.

ORDERING INFORMATION
5A14N Four Trace Amplifier

$1.660

Includes: Instruction manual (070-1229{)()).

ORDERING INFORMATION
5A18N Dual Trace Amplifier

CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Dc Coupled: Dc to at least 1 MHz
at all deflection factors. Ac Coupled: 2 Hz or less
to at least 1 MHz at all deflection factors .
Deflection Factor - Calibrated: 1 mV/div to
5 V/div in 12 steps (1-2-5 sequence). Accuracy is
within 2%. Uncalibrated: Variable is continuous
between steps to at least 12.5 V/div.
Input Rand C - 1 Mn within 1% paralleled by
= 47 pF.
Maximum Input - Dc Coupled: 350 V (dc +
peak ac). Ac Coupled: 350 V dc.
Chopping Rate - 25 kHz to 100 kHz depending
upon plug-in combinations and number of traces
displayed.

$835

Includes: Instruction manual (070-1137{lO).

RECOMMENDED PROBES
P6101A P6102A P6062B -

1X Passive. See page 468.
10X Passive. See page 468.
lx/lOX Passive. See page 470.

$53
$75
$175

For recommended probe., ... P_II_. 283 _nd 4tI4.

271

TEK

DIFFERENTIAL
AMPLIFIERS

5A19N

5000
SERIES

5A21N

P6055 Diffetential Probes

Dc to 1 MHz Bandwidth
10 kHz Bandwidth Umlter
50 ",V/DIY to 5 V/DIY

100,000:1 CMRR
Voltage and Current Probe Inputs

The SA21N is a differential amplifier
with a current probe input. In the
voltage mode, it provides sensitivities of 50 ",V/div to S V/div; with the
optional POO21 Current Probe, it provides current sensitivities from O.S
mAldiv to O.S Ndiv.

Compact Size

CHARACTERISTICS
Dc Coupied: Dc to at
least 1 MHz. Ac Coupied: 2 Hz less at
least 1 MHz. Bandwidth may be limited
Differential Amplifier
to 10kHz.
Deflection Factor - Calibrated :
50 ",V/div to 5 Vldiv in 16 steps (1 -2-5 sequence).
Accuracy is within 2%. UncaJibrated: Variable is
continuous between steps to at least 12.5 V/div.
Input R and C - Voitage Mode: 1 Mfl within
0.15% paralleled by "",47 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage

Bandwidth -

Differential Amplifier

5A19N
Dc to 2 MHz Bandwidth
1 mV I Div to 20 V I Div
Dc Offset

The SA 19N is a low-cost differential amplifier featuring variable dc offset and simplicity of controls. It is ideal for monitor and
systems applications. It operates in the left
or middle plug-in compartment of the 5000
Series mainframe for Y-T displays, or in the
right compartment for X-V displays.

CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Dc Coupled: Dc to at least 2 MHz
at all deflection factors . Ac Coupled: 2 Hz or less
to at least 2 MHz at all deflection factors.
Deflection Factor - Calibrated: 1 mV/div to
20 V/div in a 1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy is within
2%. Uncalibrated: Variable is continuous between
steps to at least fIJ V/div.
Input Rand C - 1 Mil within 0.3% paralleled by
"",47pF.
Signal and Offset Range
Deflection Factor Settngs

1 mV/riN to
200 mViriN
±16V

1500 mViriN
to a:> VlriN
I ±lflOV

Maxm..mDc~~

(Dc

+ Peak At;; .t 1 kHz or Less)

±lflO V

Maxm..mAt;;~
~

(At;; voltage)

Dc Oflset Range

±lflO V
+15 v to
- 15V

+lflO v to
- lflOV

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - Dc Coupied:
1 mVldiv to 200 mV/div, at least 100J:1 from de to
10 kHz; decreasing to 100:1 at fIJO mV/div to
20 V/div.

Dc Coupled

50 I'ViriN to
50 mVlriN
10 mViriN
to 5 VlriN

10 V (de +
peak ac)

Ac Coupled
lflO V de (c:oo.4JIing cap
prechatged). 10 V peak ac

lflO V (de + peak ac)

Input Gate Current - 100 pA or less (equivalent
to 100 ",V or less, depending on external loading, at
+25·C.
Displayed NoIse - ~ ",V or less, tangentially
measured.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - Ac Coupied:
50 ",V/div to 0.5 mV/div, at least 20,000:1 at 5 kHz
and above decreasing to 400:1 at 10 Hz. Dc Coupied: at least 100,000:1 de to ~ kHz at 50 ",V/div
and 100 ",Vldiv with up to 20 V P'P sinewave, decreasing by <20 dB/decade on sensitivity ranges
up to 50 mV/div. From 100 mV/div to 5 V/div, CMRR
is at least 400:1 with up to 100 V P'P sinewave.
CURRENT PROBE INPUT
(WITH P6021 CURRENT PROBE)
Bandwidth - 15 Hz or less, to at least 1 MHz.
Bandwidth may be limited to 10 kHz.
Deflection Factor - Calibrated: 0.5 mNdiv to
0.5 Aldiv in 10 steps (1-2-5 sequence). Accuracy is
within 3%. UncaJibrated: Variable is continuous between steps to at least 1.25 Aldiv.
Maximum Input Current - 4 A P'P (at probe
loop) with 125-tum POO21 Current Probe.
Displayed NoIse - ~ p.A or less, tangentially
measured. Performance characteristics are valid for
the 5A21N from O·C to +50·C.

ORDERING INFORMATION
5A21N Differential Ampiifier

ORDERING INFORMATION
SA 19N Differential Ampiifier
Includes: Instruction manual (070-132&00).

$480

Includes: Instruction manual (070-113!Hll).
OptIon 01 - Pro21 5" current probe.

20,000:1 CMRR

$615
+$315

The 5A21N Ind 5A22N DIft_n1ie1 AmplH*- Ire lvenlble
wl1h CAT reedout It addltlonel co.. (CAT reldout lunc1lonel
In 5400 Serlel meln!rente. only). Contact your local Tektronix s.... Englnee, lor detan •.

Low Capacitance
Dc to 80 MHz

The P6055 is a miniature, low-capacitance,
10X probe designed for use with Tektronix
differential amplifiers with nominal input capacitances from 20 pF to 47 pF. The attenuation ratio is adjustable to compensate for
differences in input resistance of the amplifier (amplifier input resistance must be 1 MG
±2%). A special locking type readout connector allows use with instruments with or
without readout capability.
When a matched probe pair is used to drive
the two inputs of a differential amplifier, the
ability to change the attenuation ratio of one
probe versus the other is helpful in maintaining the CMRR of the system. The use of a
matched pair of P6055 differential probes
provide the best possible system CMRR.

CHARACTERISTICS
CMRR - 2O,(XX):1 from de to 1 kHz derating to
100:1 at 20 MHz.
Attenuation - Adjustable to 10X.
Input Resistance - 1 M{l ± 0.5%.
Input Capacitance - ",,10 pF when used with
instrument that has 20 pF input capacitance;
12.5 pF when used with instrument that has 47 pF
input capacitance.
Maximum Useful Bandwidth - 60 MHz.
Typical Probe Rise Time - 5.8 ns.
Maximum Voltage - 500 V (dc + peak ac)
from dc to 12 MHz, p-p V derated to 100 V at
70 MHz.

ORDERING INFORMATION
P6055 Matched Pair of 10X, 3.5 ft
Differentiai Probes

See page 487 lor probe ecceaaorte • .

272

$535

Include.: Retractable hook tip (BB. 013-0107-(5);
13 an (5 inch) !1OlXld lead (175-0124-01 ); probe holder
(352-0090-00); two electrical insula ling sleeves
(BP. 161W404-o1); two alligator clips (AS, 344-(04600); adjustable tool (CP. 003-re75-01); hook ~ (BU. 200{)114{x) ;
13 an (6 inch) electrical !1OlXld lead (OF. 175-125600);
:l) an (12 inch) grOl.fld lead (175-0125-01); instruction manual (070-1115-00).
Option 01 - Single probe with accessories. - $280

TEK

5000

DIFFERENTIAL
AMPLIFIERS

SERIES

5A22N

5A26

Differential Amplifier

5A22N
Dc to 1 MHz Bandwidth

Displayed Noise - 20 p,V at
maximum bandwidth, source resistance 25!l or less, measured
tangentially.
Overdrive Recovery - 10 p,s or
less to recover within 99.5% of reference level after removal of a test
signal applied for 1 s. Signal amplitude not to exceed common-mode
signal range.
Drift With Temperature 100 p,V/oC or less.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio
- Ac Coupled : 10 p,V/div to
0.5 mY/diy, at least 20,000:1 at
5 kHz and above, decreasing to
400:1 at 10 Hz. Dc Coupled: At
least 100,000:1, dc to 30kHz from
10 p,V/div to 100 p,V/div with up to
20 V pop sinewave, decreasing by
<20 dB/decade on sensitivity
ranges up to 50 mV/div . From
Dual Differential Amplifier
100 mV/div to 5 V/div, CMRR is at
least 400:1 with up to 100 V pop
sinewave.
S Ignal and Off set Range
0.1 V to
Deflection Factor
10 "v to

10 p,V/Div to 5 VIDiv

Settings

50 mVIDiv

5VlDiv

Common·Mode

100,000:1 CMRR

Signal Range

± 10V

-350

Selectable Upper and Lower - 3 dB Points

Maximum Dc Coupled
Input (de + peak
ee at 1 kHz or less)

±12V

±35O

Dc Offset

Maximum Ac Coupled
Input (de voltage)

The 5A22N is the most versatile of the 5000
Series differential amplifiers. It features front
panel selectable filtering which enables reduction of undesirable displayed noise; both
upper and lower 3 dB points are selectable.
Dc offset at full bandwidth is available for
viewing signals riding on a dc component,
such as low-level ripple and noise on a
power supply.
These features, together with its high common-mode rejection, make the 5A22N well
suited for measurements in difficult lowamplitude, low-frequency areas.

CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth -

HF -3 dB Point: Selectable in

9 steps (1-3 sequence) from 100 Hz to 1 MHz.
100 Hz to 0.3 MHz, accuracy is within 20% of
selected frequency; at 1 MHz, bandwidth is down
3 dB or less. LF - 3 dB Point: Selectable in
6 steps (1-10 sequence) from 0.1 Hz to 10kHz
accuracy is within 20% of selected frequency . Ac
Coupled: 2 Hz or less.
Deflection Factor - Calibrated: 10 p,V/div to
5 V/div in a 1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy is within
3%. Uncalibrated: Variable is continuous between
steps to at least 12.5 V/div.
Input Rand C - 1 M!l within 0.15% paralleled
by "",47 pF.
Maximum Input Gate Current - 200 pA or
less.

Dc Offset Range

±35O V

Dc rejection , at least 4 x 10': 1
+ 0.5 V to - 0.5 V +50 V to - 50 V

ORDERING INFORMATION
5A22N Differential Amplifier

$1,220

Includ. .: Instruction manual (07(}-123000).
The 5-'21 N and 5A22N Dftf...ntlaf Amp/III... a.. aveU.ble
with CRT ..adout at addl1lonal COli (CRT ..adout lunctlonal
In 5400 Serle. malnl....... only). Contact your local Tektronix Sale. Engineer lor detaU..

5A26
Dc to 1 MHz Bandwidth
50 p,V/Div Sensitivity at 1 MHz

The 5A26 provides 50 IlV/div sensitivity at
1 MHz, high common-mode rejection ratio,
CRT readout in any standard 54(X) Series
mainframe, trigger-source selection and
bandwidth limit on each channel. With two
5A26s, it is possible to observe up to four
differential channels at one time.
The 5A26 has many applications in areas
that require dual differential performance,
especially in biomedical and electromechanical fields, education, and component manufacturing.

CHARACTERISTICS
Number of Differential Channels - Two.
Bandwidth - Dc Coupled: Dc to at least 1 MHz.
Ac Coupled: 2 Hz or less to at least 1 MHz. Bandwidth may be limited to 10 kHz.
Deflection Factor - Calibrated: 50 p,Vldiv to
5 V/div in 16 steps (1-2-5 sequence). Accuracy is
within 2%. Uncalibrated: Variable is continuous
between steps to at least 12.5 V/div.
CRT Readout - CRT readout of deflection factors. Functional in CRT readout-equipped 5400
Series oscilloscopes, nonfunctional in 5100 Series
oscilloscopes.
Input Rand C - 1 M!l within 0.15% paralleled
by "",47 pF.
M
axImum Input Vita
0 Ige
Dc Coupled

I.e Coupled

50
to
50 mV/d"

"Vloo

10V
(de + peak ee)

10 V ac, 350 V
(coupling cap precharged)

l00mV/d"
to 5 Vld"

350 V
(de + peak ee)

(de

350 V
peak ee)

Maximum Input Gate Current - 100 pA or
less (equivalent to 100 p,V or less, depending on
extemalloading) at +25°C.
Displayed Noise - 30 p,V or less, tangentially
measured.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio
Dc Coupled
50 "V/d" to
50 mVld"

At least 100,000:1 from de to 3) kHz
with up to 20 P'P sinewave

100 mV/dN to
5 Vloo

At least :JXl:l from de to 3) kHz
with up to 100 V P'P sinewave

Ac Coupled

"Vloo

50
to
50 mViOO

At least 20,000: 1 at 5 kHz to :Jl kHz, deClessing to not less than 2000: 1 at Ii) Hz

100,000:1 CMRR
2 Differential Amplifiers in One Plug-In
CRT Readout

The 5A26 Dual Differential Amplifier combines two independent differential amplifiers in one plug-in. It adds no-compromise
differential measurement capability to the
line of low-cost, high-performance 5000 Series laboratory oscilloscopes.

For recomm.nded probe., ... pag•• 283 and 484.

ORDERING INFORMATION
5A26 Dual Differential Amplifier

$1,335

Include.: Instruction manual (07(}-194HlO).

High CMRR Differential Probes
P6055 Matched pair for maximum
CMRR performance. See page 272.

$535

273

TEK

5000

TIME BASES
CURVE TRACER

SB10N

SERIES

SB12N

SCT1N

Sweep Accuracy - Unmagnified: Within 3%
from 1l's/div to 1 s/div and within 4% at 2 s/div
and S s/div. Add 1% for magnified sweep operation . B Sweep : Within 3% from 1 I's/div to
0.1 s/div. Within 4% at 0.2I's/div, O.S I's/div,
0.2 s/div, and O.S s/div.
TRIGGERING
Triggering Sensltiyity
Dc

"'ION

TIME 1lA11 / AMPL

'------

Time Base/Amplifier

Dual Sweep Time Base

5B10N/5B12N
100 ns/Dly to S s/Diy Calibrated Time Base
Single Sweep Operation
X10 Magnifier
Alternate and Chopped Displays
SO mV /Diy and SOO mV /Diy External Input
Dual and Delayed Sweep (SB12)

The 5810N and the 5812N time base units
are designed for use with the Tektronix 5100
Series oscilloscope mainframes. They can
also be used with the Tektronix 5400 Series
mainframes, although they do not activate
the scale factor readout in the 5400 Series.
The 5810N and the 5812N both provide
1 ~s/div to 5 s/div calibrated sweep rates; a
X10 magnifier extends the fastest sweep
rate to 100 ns/div.
The 5812N is a dual time base unit which
provides both delayed and dual sweeps.
When the 5812N is used in the delayed
sweep mode, both the delaying and delayed sweeps may be displayed on screen,
with all displayed signals being shown at
both sweep rates. The delayed sweep may
be made to run immediately after the expiration of a selected delay time, or may be
made to wait for the next suitable triggering
signal after the expiration of the selected
delay time . Precise delay time is selected by
means of a ten-turn potentiometer. Delayed
sweep is used primarily for obtaining extremely high magnification of some portion
of the displayed signal. It also provides a
means of making more precise timing measurements on a displayed signal.

274

Curve Tracer

When the 5812N is used in the dual-sweep
mode, the two time bases are used independently of each other. The signal or signals from the vertical amplifier in the left
hand compartment are displayed at the A
time base rate, and the signal or signals
from the vertical amplifier in the center
compartment are displayed at the 8 time
base rate. (When used with the dual-beam
5113 mainframe, the signals from both amplifiers are displayed at both sweep rates.)
80th the 5810N and the 5812N may be
triggered from internal signals from either
vertical amplifier, from an external triggering
signal, or internally at the power line frequency. Autotriggering provides a bright
base line in case of loss of triggering signal.
80th units have a single sweep mode which
allows the user to set the time base to
sweep once upon receipt of a triggering
signal and then to remain locked out from
producing further sweeps until manually reset. This mode is particularly useful in capturing Single transients on one of the 5100 or
5400 storage mainframes.
An external signal input connector on both
the 5810N and the 5812N allows their use
as a conventional amplifier to provide X-V
operation of the oscilloscope without the
need for switching plug-in units.

CHARACTERISTICS
The following specifications are the same for the
SB10N and the A sweep of the SB12N. B sweep
specifications are identical except where
indicated.
MAIN SWEEP
Sweep Rates - Calibrated: 1 I's/div to S s/div in
21 steps (1-2-S sequence). Xl0 Magnifier extends
displayed sweep time/div to 100 ns. Uncalibrated:
Continuously variable between steps and to
12.S s/div. B Sweep: 0.2I's/div to O.S s/div in
20 calibrated steps.

Coupling

To 1 MHz

At2 MHz

Intemal

0.4 div

0.6div

External
(A sweep only)

200mV

Requirements increase below 50 Hz

Auto Trig - Same as above except signal rate
requirements are lS Hz and above.
Single Sweep - Same as for ac and dc coupled (A sweep only).
External Trigger Input - Maximum Input:
350 V (dc + peak ac). Input Rand C: 1 M!l within
2% paralleled by "",70 pF. Trigger Level Voltage
Range: +S V to -S V.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL MODE
Deflection Factor - Calibrated: 50 mV/div and
500 mV/div. Accuracy is within 3%. Xl0 variable
extends range to at least S V/div.
Bandwidth - Dc Coupled: Dc to at least 1 MHz.
Ac Coupled: 50 Hz or less to at least 1 MHz.
Input Rand C - 1 M!l within 2% paralleled by
",,70pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - 350 V (dc + peak
ac).
DELAYING SWEEP (SB12N)
Delay Time - Accuracy: 11's/div to O.S s/div,
within 1%. 1 s/div to S s/div, within 2%. Multiplier
Range: 0.2 to 10.2 times the time/division setting.
Multiplier Incremental linearity: Within 0.2%.
Differential Time Measurement Accuracy Within 1% plus 2 minor dial div for 1 !-IS to O.S s
delay times. Within 2% plus 2 minor dial div for 1 s
to S s delay times.
Jitter - <0.05% of the time represented by one
division of the delaying sweep selected.

ORDERING INFORMATION
SB10N Time Base/Amplifier

$600

Include.: Instruction manual (07(}1140-00).

SB12N Dual Sweep Time Base
Include.: Instruction manual (07(}114HXl).

5eT 1N Curve Tracer
Test Semiconductor DeYices to O.S W
10 nA/DiY to 20 mA/Diy Vertical
Deflection Factors
O.S V /Diy to 20 V /Diy Horizontal
Deflection Factors
See page 389 for complete description.

$1,260

TEK

PORTABLE
OSCILLOSCOPES

Tektronix offers the widest selection of
portable scopes so you'll be able to
choose the specific instrument that
best suits your needs.
28 portable scopes w ith many optional features are available with bandwidths from

500 kHz to 350 MHz.
All Porta ble Osc illoscopes list ed in this
section are
available
through the
'" , • " "
National
Marketing
Center by
calling toll free 1-800-426-2200. In addition to
being able to give you direct order entry, the
NMC Sales Engineers are available to offer
you immediate technical assistance about
product specifications, capabilities, and applications. They can send you literature, discuss available accessories, tell you about
payment terms and options, or help you contact your local sales and service office.

CONTENTS
Portable Scopes Selection Guide . . . . . . . .. 276
Portable Scopes Application Notes . .. . ... 277
Portable Scopes Accessories Chart . . . . . .. 277
Portable Nonstorage Oscilloscopes
2467 350 MHz Four Channel
High Visual Writing Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2465A 350 MHz Four Channel ...........
2465A DV Special Edition 350 MHz . . . . : .
2465A OM Special Edition 350 MHz ......
2465A CT Special Edition 350 MHz . . . . . ..
2455A 250 MHz Four Channel .... . ......
2445A 150 MHz Four Channel . .. . .
2335100 MHz Dual Trace ...............
2336100 MHz Dual Trace with aTime .. . . .
2336YA 100 MHz Dual Trace with
a Time, Elapsed Time Meter ...........
2337100 MHz Dual Trace w/aTime & DMM
2236100 MHz Dual Trace, Dual Time
Base, with Counter, Timer, Multimeter ...
2235100 MHz Dual Trace, Dual Time Base
2235 Option 01 100 MHz Dual Trace,
Dual Time Base .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ....
2245100 MHz Four Channel,
CRT Readout .......................
2246 100 MHz Voltmeter, Cursor,
CRT Readout, a Time, Four Channel . . . ..

278
278
278
278
278
278
278
290
290
290
290
294
296
296
300

2225 50 MHz Dual Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 303
Education Materials ......... . . . ....... 308
CRS101 Basic Training Lab . ... . . . ... . .. 310
305 Battery Powered 5 MHzlDMM . . . . . ..
221 5 MHz ...........................
2131 MHzlDMM ......................
212500 kHz Dual Trace .. . .............

311
312
313
315

Portable CRT Storage Oscilloscopes
466100 MHz Dual Trace,
Dual Time Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 317
31410 MHz Dual Trace .......... . . . . ... 320
214500 kHz Dual Trace . . . . . . . .... .. . .. 321
Portable Digital Storage Oscilloscopes
2430150 MHz Digital Storage ...........
2220 60 MHz Digital Storage . . ....... . ..
2230 100 MHz Digital Storage . .. . . . .....
336 50 MHz Digital Storage ..... . .......

326
330
330
334

Portable Power Accessories
1105 Power Supply ....................
1106 Battery Pack .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ...
1107 OC Inverter ............... . ......
A6901 Ground Isolation Monitor ...... . . . .
A6902B Voltage Isolator ................

306
306
307
478
479

300

275

TEK

PORTABLE
OSCILLOSCOPES

REFERENCE
PORTABLE REAL TIME OSCILLOSCOPE SELECTION GUIDE
Number
of
Delayed
Channel. Sweep

Fa.te.t
SWHP
(n./diY)

Bend·
Width
(MHz)

Sen.l·
tlvlty
(mY/diY)

2487

350

500 ps

2485A"
2485A CT"
2485A DM"
2485A DY"

350

500ps

2455A "

250

Product

Size
mm (ln)
HxW. D

Weight
kg (Ib)

Page

Price.
Begin
at

4 div/ns visual writing speed, CRT
readout, 6Volts, 6Time cursors

tOO • 330 • 467
(7,5. 13. 18.4)

10.9
(24)

Line (90-1321 100-250 V ae,
48-440 Hz)

278

$11,900

CRT Readout, 6VoIts,
6 Time Cursors

190 x 338 • 434
(7.5 . 13.3 . 17.1)

102
(22.4)

Line (90-t321100-25O Vae,
48-440 Hz)

278

Feature.

Power
Requirement.

$5,350
$7,ISO
$8,400
$9,200

2445A"

ISO

2335

100

"
"
"
"

190 • 338 • 434
(7.5. 13.3. 17. I)

10.2
(22.4)

Line (90- 1321100-250 V ae,
48-440 Hz)

278

$5,1SO

A Time Cursors

CRT Readout, 6 Volts,
6 Time Cursors

190 x 338 • 434
(7.5 " 3.3 x 17.1)

10 2
(22.4)

Line (90-1321 100-250 Vae,
48-440 Hz)

278

$3,590

Rugged, compact, lightweight

140 • 270 • 430

7.7

Line (100-13212ar25O V ae,

290

$3,650

B Trigger, 6lime

(5 x II x 17)
140 x 270 • 430
(5 . II • 17)

(17)
7.7
(17)

48-440 Hz)
Line (100-13212ar25O V ae,
48-440 Hz)

290

$3,965

Line (100-13212ar25O V ae,
48-440 Hz)

290

$4,175

Line (100-1321100-250 V ae,

290

$4,275

CRT Readout, 6Volts,

2338

100

2336YA

100

B Trigger, 6 Time, elapsed time
indicator, Extra probes and manual

140 • 270 • 430
(5." • 17)

7.7
(16.5)

2337

100

B Tngger, 6Time, DMM

140 • 270 x 430
(5 x ii . 17)

7.7
(17)

48-440 Hz)

2245

100

HF/LF, Rej, TV Line, TV Reid,
triggers on aI channels for A or B
Sweep plus ine trigger, CRT readout
of scaJe factors, delay tme

176.360 .445
(J • 14.2 • 17.5)

7.5
(16.5)

Line (90-250 V ae, 48-440 Hz)

$1,875

2246

100

HFIlF, ReJ, TV Line, TV ReId, triggers
on all channels for A or B Sweep
plus line trigger, CRT readout of scaJe
factors, delay !me, plus cursor for
voltage, time frequency phase, SmartCursors·, voltmeter fl. 50ms

AUTO LVL Mode

AUTO Mode

.. 20ms

.. OOms

.. 4 tiTles A Secldiv .. 16 times A Secldiv

.. 200 ms

... 000 ms

X-Y OPERATION
X-Axis Deflection Factor Range, Variable
Range, and Accuracy - Same as Channell .
X-Axis Bandwidth - Dc to 3 MHz.
Input Z - Same as Channell .
Phase Difference Between X and Y (With
Bandwidth limiting Off) - ..;;; 1° from dc to
1 MHz . ..;;;3° from 1 MHz to 2 MHz.
X-Axis Low Frequency Linearity - 0.1 div or
less compression or expansion of a 2 diy, centerscreen signal when positioned within the graticule
area.

CURSOR AND FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
Cursor Position Range - ~Vo:ts: At least the
center 7.6 vertical divisions. ~Time: At least the
center 9.6 horizontal divisions.
Z-AXIS INPUT
Sensitivity - From Dc to 2 MHz: Positive voltage decreases intensity. +2 V blanks a maximum
intensity trace. 2 MHz to 20 MHz: +2 V p-p modulates a normal intensity trace.
Input Resistance - 9 kO ± 10%.
Maximum Input Voltage - ± 25 V peak; 25 V
p-p ac at 10 kHz or less.
SIGNAL OUTPUTS
Calibrator - Measured with the Sec/div setting
at 1 ms/div. Voltage Into 1 MO Load: 400 mV
± 1%. Voltage Into 500 Load: 200 mV ± 1.5%.
Short Circuit Load Current: 8 mA ± 1.5%. Repetition Period and Accuracy: Two times the
A Sec/div switch setting for settings from
100 ns/div to 100 ms/div ±0.1%, during the
sweep time.
CH 2 Signal Out - Voltage: 20 mV/div ± 10%
into 1 MO. 10 mV/div ± 10% into 50 O. Offset:
± 10 mV into 50 0 after dc balancing within
±5°C of the operating temperature.
A Gate Out and B Gate Out - Voltage: 2.4 V
to 5 V positive going pulse, starting at 0 V to
400 mY. Drive: Supplies 400 IlA during HI state;
sinks 2 mA during LO state.
CRT READOUT AND
WAVEFORM INFORMATION

Your eyes never have to leave the screen to obtain front
panel settings and measurement results. In the CRT example above, the top area of the display provides trigger
source. trigger voltage level. and tJ. time results. The /oW'
er area displays the selected voltsldiv and secondsldiv
scale factors and that bandwidth limit and holdoff are
activated.

CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
Standard CRT - 2467: 68 mm x 85 mm.
2465N2455N2445A: 80 mm x 100 mm (8 cm x
10 cm). Markings: Eight major div vertically and 10
major div horizontally, with auxiliary markings.
Trace Rotation Range - Adequate to align
trace with center horizontal graticule line.
Standard Phosphor - GH (P31).

Visual Writing Speed - (2467) With 20 ft-cd.
Illumination Normal to CRT Faceplate (typical
room light): ~4 div/ns at maximum INTENSITY
control setting. No more than five bright spots will
be visible at maximum INTENSITY control setting.
Additional bright spots may be visible after displaying a high intensity trace. These spots will
extinguish when INTENSITY control is set to
minimum.
Photographic Writing Speed - (2467)
~ 10 div/ns with C-3O Series camera and ISO
3000 film, without prefogging. A single-shot trace
of instrument rise time at 500 ps/div is recorded
with high contrast at f/1.9.
Display Intensity Limitation - (2467) Display
intensity is automatically reduced and eventually
extinguished after periods of no front panel control activity. The time elapsed before intensity reduction is shortened by high intensity settings
and high duty factor/sweep speed/trigger rate
combinations. Operating any switch or the INTENSITY control restores the selected intensity
setting.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges - 115 V: 90 V to
132 V ac. 230 V: 180 V to 250 V ac.
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption - 120 W
(180 V ac) for fully optioned instrument.
Fuse Rating - Either 2 A, 250 V, AGC/3AG,
fast-blow or 1.6 A, 250 V, 5 x 20 mm, quick-acting.
Each fuse type requires a different cap.
Primary Circuit Dielectric Voltage Withstand
Test - 1500 V rms, 60 Hz, for 10 s without
breakdown.
Primary Grounding - Type test to 0.1 0 maximum. Routine test to check grounding continuity
between chassis ground and protective earth
ground.
ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY
Environmental requirements qualify the electrical
and mechanical specifications. When not rackmounted, the instrument meets the environmental
requirements of MIL-T-288OQC for Type III, Class
3, Style C equipment, with humidity and temperature requirements defined in paragraphs 3.9.2.2,
3.9.2.3, and 3.9.2.4.
Ambient Temperature - Operating: -15°C to
+55°C. Nonoperating: -62°C to +85°C.
Altitude - Operating: To 4600 m (15,000 ft).
Maximum operating temperature decreases 1°C
for each 1,000 ft above 1500 m (5,000 tt). Nonoperating: To 15000 m (50,000 ft).
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each
of three axes at a total displacement of 0.025 inch
p-p (4 g's at 55 Hz), with frequency varied from
10 Hz to 55 Hz in one-minute sweeps. Held
10 minutes at each major resonance, or if none
existed, held 10 minutes at 55 Hz (75 minutes
total test time).
Packaged Transportation Vibration - Meets
the limits of the National Safe Transit Association
Test Procedure lA-B-l; excursion of 1 inch p-p at
4.63 Hz (1 .1 g) for 30 minutes per Tektronix Standard 062-2858{)().

285

TEK

Humidity - Operating and Nonoperating :
Stored at 95% relative humidity for 5 cycles
(120 hours) from +30°C to +60°C, with operational performance checks at +30°C and
+55°C.
Shock - Operating and Nonoperating: 50 g's,
half-sine, 11 ms duration, three shocks on each
face, for a total of 18 shocks.
Electromagnetic Compatibility - Meets
requirements of the following standards :
MIL-T-288OOC; MIL-STO-461B Part 4 (CE-{)3 and
CS{)2) , Part 5 (CS{)6 and RS{)2), and Part 7
(CS{)1, RE{)2, and RS-{)3), limited to 1 GHz; VDE
0871 Category B; FCC Rules and Regulations Part
15, Subpart J, Class A; and Tektronix Standard
062-2866-00.
Electrostatic Discharge Susceptibility Instrument does not change control states with
discharges of less than 10 kV. Meets requirements of Tektronix Standard 062-2862{)Q.
Radiation - Meets requirements of Tektronix
Standard 062-1860{)().
Safety - UL listed (UL 1244) and CSA certified
(CSA556B).
Drip Proof - With Cover On: Meets MIL-T28800C para 4.5.5.5.3.
Transit Drop Not in Shipping Package:
12-inch drop on each comer and each face (MILT-288OOC, para 4.5.5.4.2).
Packaged Transportation Drop - Meets the
limits of the National Safe Transit Association
Test Procedure 1A-B-2; 10 drops of 36 inches per
Tektronix Standard 062-2858{)Q.
Bench Handling - With and Without Cabinet
Installed: MIL-STD-81OC, Method 516.2, Procedure V (MIL-T-288OOC, para 4.5.5.4.3).
Topple - Operating and Cabinet Installed: Set
on rear feet and allowed to topple over onto each
of four adjacent faces per Tektronix Standard
062-2858{)Q.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
2485A/2487 2455A/2445A R.ckmount
Dlmen.lon.

Width
With hande
Height
With leet. pouch
Without pouch
Depth
With Iront cover

13.0

338

13,3

483

19.0

190
165

7.5
6.5

190
100

7.5
6.3

178

7.0

467

18.4
21 .0

434

17.1
19.9

419

16.5

hande extended 533
Welghta _
kg
Net
With accessories
and pouch
Wrthout

2400

150 MHz to 350 MHz
FOUR CHANNEL OSCILLOSCOPES

sa;
kg

8.8"'

10.9

24.0

102

222

4.0-'

9.7
14.6

21 .3
32.1

9.3
12.8

20.5
28.2

6.3"' 13.8" '

SERIES

CHARACTERISTICS (OPTION 09)
The set of characteristics is the same as specified for standard 2467/2445A/2465A oscilloscopes and includes the following additions:
Sensitivity - Signal input requirements for Frequency, Period, Totalize, Delay-by-Events and
L.ogiC
. ling!
' er.
Input

DI.pI8yed
Signal

Oil.CH2

1.500

0-13, CH 4

0.7500

o-Il , CH2

4.0div

0-13, CH 4

2.0div

Frequency Range
Dc (0.5 Hz 10< Frequency and
Period) to 50 MHz

50 MHz to

> 150 MHz

Source - A trigger or word recognizer for Frequency, Period, and Totalize.

., Weight of conversion kit only. ReST support kit weight IS an
Bdditiona/6.3 kg {73.B/b}.

Cooling - Forced air circulation.
Construction - Sheet aluminum-alloy chassis;
plastic-laminate front panel; glass-laminate circuit
boards.
Ordering Information -

286

See page 289.

DELTA rl U( ACCUfU,CY

FREQUENCY
Range - Autoranging over input frequency from
0.5 Hz to 150 MHz.
Resolution -

± [ LSD + 1,4 x T~E X(F)2]

±(LSD +1 .4x

T~E)

Display - Seven digits, updates twice per second or every two periods, whichever is slower.
Accuracy - Resolution ±0.001% of reading
over entire temperature range of -15°C to
+55°C.
ACCURACY AND RESOLUTION
DEFINITIONS
F=lnput Frequency in Hz
LSD = Least Significant Digit (0,1 ppm of full
scale)
T JE = Trigger Jitter Error
N=Number of cycles of measured frequency
during measurement interval (0.5 s or 1 period
of the input signal, whichever is greater)
TJE (Trigger Jitter Error)=

. I (en1)2 +

(en2)2

'V Input Slew Rate
Where: en 1= RMS noise of vertical system in div
on screen
en2=RMS noise voltage of input signal
in divs

accessories
and pouch
Shipping

ATIME, 1/ ATIME
TRIG AFT DLY Accuracy - ±(LSD +0.01 x
B TIme/div) + (0.001% x A Sec/div +0.001% of
reading +50 ps). Measured with visually superimposed signal tranSitions, >0.1 div/ns triggersignal slew rates, and with channel-to-channel delay mismatch corrected by the CH 2 DLY match
adjustment from the front panel. Independent
SLOPE and LEVEL settings for AREF and AB triggers allow visual superposition of any pair of
points within the center 80% of transitions having
at least 5 div amplitude.
RUN AFT DLY Accuracy - ±(LSD +0.0008 x
A Sec/div) + (0.01 x B Time/div + 83 ps).
B TIme/div includes 10X mag.

.n1

VolU/dlv
Trigger Coupling
Dc and Nol. . Rei

Trigger Coupling
HF Rejec1

2mV

0.1500

0.05 00

5mV to 5V

0.1 div

0,05 div

Notes: Input Signal is five vertical div with
time.

a 2 ns rise

Measured times are four horizontal div.

TJE is negligible for Slew Rates >0.1 div/ns.
6 Time TRIG AFT DL Y assumes visual superposition.

Display Update Rate - Auto resolution, twice
per second or every four sweeps, whichever is
slower. Depends on trigger and sweep rates with
selectable resolution .

TEK

150 MHz to 350 MHz
FOUR CHANNEL OSCILLOSCOPES

2400
SERIES

DELAY TIME
TRIG AFT DLY Accuracy - ±(LSD +0.001%
of reading +0.5 ns +A trigger slew error
+ 8 trigger slew error). Add 0.5 ns for dual channel measurements.
Where: Trigger slew error equals trigger level control readout accuracy + trigger signal slew rate at
the trigger point.
RUN AFT DLY Accuracy - ±(LSD +0.0012 x
A Sec/div +0.03 x 8 Time/div +50 ns). (8 Timel
div includes lOX mag.)
TRIG AFT DLY and RUN AFT DLY Accuracies Using Word Recognizer on the B Trigger
- Add 100 ns, if using external clock. Add
200 ns, if not using external clock.
Of.L.AV TIIo4E ACCUf'lACY

J~~ ".
I:-

"'"0

III£"-",,n

'J!I "H.I .":'!..':!IIOttI'

RUH"'"Dl f

fJlIG ""Dl Y

;...-.

=
0

.....- V

· '"

.. ...

a 2 ns rise

Notes: Input Signal is fIVe vertical div with
time.
Measured times are four horizontal div.
TJE is negligible for Slew Rates >0. 1 div/ns.

/1 Time TRIG AFT DL Y assumes visual superposition.

Display Update Rate - Auto, twice per second
or once for each sweep, whichever is slower.
Depends on trigger and sweep rate for selectable
resolution .
Selectable Resolution
A Secl Dly

Selected
Re.olutlon

LSD

10 ns to 1 s

AUTO

See Auto Resolution

10ns to 51'S

lOps
lOOps
1 ns

10jlS to SOjlS

10 ps or 100 ps
1 ns

lOOps
1 ns

below

100 jlS to 500 jlS

10 ps to 1 ns

1 ns

lmst05ms

10 ps to 1 ns

10ns

10ms to SO ms

lOps to 1 ns

lOO ns

100 ms to 500 ms

lOps to 1 ns

11's

10 ps to 1 ns

10l's

Auto Resolution
Trlgge, Repetition
Rate

LSD

10ns to 21'S

> 20 kHz

lOOps

A Secl Dly
10ns to 2jlS

200 Hz to 20 kHz

lns

51's to 200 I'S

> 200 Hz

1 ns
10ns

10 ns to 200 I'S

< 200Hz

500 jlS to 5 ms

Any

10ns

10ms toSOms

Any

lOOns

100 ms to 500 ms

Any

ljlS

Any

10jlS

TOTALIZE
Maximum Count - To 9,999,999 events.
DELAY BY EVENTS
A or B Sweep - The A trigger or 17-bit word
recognizer defines start events. The 8 trigger or
17-bit word recognizer defines delay events. With
A sweep in the delayed by events mode, the 8
sweep is delayable by time,
Maximum Delay Count - Up to 4,194,303,
Minimum Time From Start Event to Any Delay Event - ;;a.4 ns.
Minimum Pulse Width - ;;'3.3 ns.
LOGIC TRIGGER
Combination Trigger - A sweep can be triggered from logical combinations of A and 8 triggers (A and 8) or (A or 8), or the word recognizer.
8 sweep can be triggered from the word
recognizer.
Minimum Time to Satisfy Logic Combinations - ;;a.4 ns.
WORD RECOGNIZER
Input - P6407 Word Recognizer Probe, 17 bits
plus clock (No CRT display from P6407.)
All Input.

Th,..hold

High

< 2.0 V

Low

> 0.6 V

Load
< 20

!lA

> - 0.6mA

Sate Umlt
5.5 V
- 0.5 V

Display Radix - Hexadecimal, octal, binary.
Data Rate - 0 MHz to ;;a.20 MHz with clock,
MHz to ;;a. 10 MHz without clock.
Data Set-Up Time - 25 ns,
Data Hold Time - 0 ns.
GPIB Compatibility for Semiautomatic Measurement Systems - When combined with
Option 10 the CTTIWR (Option 09) Oscilloscope
combination is fully programmable. Complies with
Tektronix Standard Codes and Formats.

Ordering Information -

See page 289.

CHARACTERISTICS (OPTION 05)
The set of characteristics is the same as specified for standard 2467/2445A/2465A oscilloscopes and includes the following additions:
VERTICAL SYSTEM
(CHANNEL 1 AND CHANNEL 2)
Frequency Response - Applicable for voW
div settings between 5 mV and 0.2 V with Var voW
div control in calibrated detent and using a 5 div,
50 kHz re ference~. naI froma 50 0 or 75 0 systern.
Range

With Full BW

With BW Umltlng

± 1%

+1%, - 4%

SO kHz to 5 MHz
> 5

MHz to 10 MHz

> 10MHz to 30 MHz

+1%, - 2%
+2%, - 3%

> 30 MHz

.,
.,

., Seme 85 basic Instnment.

Squarewave Flatness - 1% p-p for both 60 Hz
and 15 kHz squarewaves, from a 50 0 or 750 systern using a 1.0 V input with a 50 mVldiv setting and
using a 0.1 V input at 20 mV/div setting. 1.5% p-p
using a 0.1 V input with 5 mVldiv and 10 mV/div settings. Exclude first 50 ns following step transition.
For signals with rise times E;;1O ns, add 2% p-p between 155 ns and 165 ns after step transition.
Television Blanking-Level Clamp (BackPorch) 60 Hz Rejection (Channel 2 Only) ;;a.18 d8 at 60 Hz; with calibrated VoWdiv settings
between 5 mV and 0.2 V, and a 6 div reference
signal.
Television Blanking-Level Clamp (BackPorch) Reference - Within 1.0 div of ground
reference.
TRIGGERING
Sync Separation Stable sync separation
from sync-positive or sync-negative composite
video on systems with 525 to 1280 lines/frame,
50 Hz or 60 Hz field rate, interlaced or noninterlaced scan.
Trigger Modes - LINES, R...D 1, R...D 2, and
ALT (R...D l-R...D 2).
Input Signal Amplitude for Stable Triggering
- Channell and Channel 2: 1.0 div for compoSite video and 0.3 div for composite sync signals (dc + peak video-signal amplitude must be
within 18 div of input ground reference).
Channel 3 and Channel 4 : 0.5 div for composite
video and 0.25 div for composite sync signals (dc
peak video-signal amplitude must be within 9 div
of input ground reference).
GPIB Compatibility for Semiautomatic Measurement Systems - When combined with
Option 10, the lV Waveform Measurement Systems (Option 05)/oscilloscope combination is fully
programmable. Complies with Tektronix Standard
Codes and Formats.
Ordering Information -

See page 289.

Note: 2445A Secldlv settings range from 20 ns to 1 s.
2465A Secldlv settings range from IOns to 500 ms.

287

TEK

CHARACTERISTICS (OPTION 01)
This option is unavailable for the 2467. The set of
characteristics is the same as specified for all
other standard 2445A12405A oscilloscopes and
includes the following additions:
All accuracy specifICations are stated with an
operating temperature range of + 1SoC to
+28°C and a relative humidity of 95% or less.
DC VOLTAGE
Ranges - 200 mV, 2 V, 20 V, 200 V, 500 V.
Resolution - 10 p.V (4'/2 digits).
Accuracy - ± (0.03% of reading +0.01 % of full
scale). For 500 V range ± (0.03% of full scale).
Input Resistance - > 100 GO on the 200 mV
and 2 V ranges, 10 MO on the higher ranges.
Resistance can be changed to 10 MO on all
ranges.
Normal-Mode Rejection Ratio - >60 dB at
50 Hz and 60 Hz.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - 100 dB at
dc; >SO dB at 50 Hz and 60 Hz with 1 kO
imbalance.
Maximum Input Voltage - 500 V RMS; 700 V
peak between inputs and ground.
Response Time <2 s in Auto, < 1 s in
Manual.
AC RMS VOLTAGE
Ranges - 200 mV, 2 V, 20 V, 200 V, 500 V.
Resolution - 10 p.V (4'/2 digits).
Accuracy - ±(% of reading +% of full scale).
Input Frequency

2400

150 MHz to 350 MHz
FOUR CHANNEL OSCILLOSCOPES

200 mV to 200 V

500 V

20 Hz to 40 Hz

±(0.7% +0.1%)

±(0.7% +0.2%)

40 Hz to 10 kHz

±(0.3% +0.1%)

±(0.3% +0.2%)

10 kHz to 20 kHz

±(0.7% +0.1%)

±(0.7% +0.2%)

20 kHz to 100 kHz

±(5% +0.1%)

±(5% +0.2%)

Crest Factor - ,.;;4 at full scale.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - >60 dB at
50 Hz and 60 Hz with 1 kO imbalance.
Response Time <3 s in Auto, <2 s in
Manual.
Input Impedance - 1 MO in parallel with
<100 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - 500 V RMS; 700 V
peak between inputs and ground, not to exceed
107 V-Hz product.
dBV, dBm - Calculated reading of ac voltage
measurements. dBV equals 20 Log (V\H(/1 V).
dBm is referenced 1 mW into 600 O.
HI 0 RESISTANCE
Ranges - 2 kO, 20 kO, 200 kO, 2 MO 20 MO.
Accuracy - ±(0.1% of reading +0.01% of full
scale) for 2 kO to 2 MO. ± (0.4% of reading) for
20 MO. Add 2% of reading for each 10% Relative
Humidity above 70% when in 2 MO and 20 MO
ranges.
Maximum Input Voltage - 500 V RMS; 700 V
peak.
Full Scale Voltage - 2 V.
Open Circuit Voltage - <6 V.
Resolution - 0.1 0 (4 '/2 digits).
Respon,e Time - <2 s in Auto, <1 s in Manual. <5 s in 20 MO range .

SERIES

LO 0 RESISTANCE
Ranges - 200 0, 2 kO, 20 kO, 200 kO, 2 MO.
Accuracy - ±(0.1% of reading +0.1% of full
scale) for 200 0 range. Subtract (0.09% of full
scale) for 2 kO to 200 kO ranges. Add (0.15% of
reading) and subtract (0.09% of full scale) for
2 MO range. Add 2% of reading for each 10%
Relative Humidity above 70% when in 200 kO and
2 MO ranges.
Maximum Input Voltage - 500 V RMS; 700 V
peak.
Full Seale Voltage - 0.2 V.
Open Circuit Voltage - <6 V.
Resolution - 0.01 0
Response Time <2 s in Auto; < 1 s in
Manual.
Continuity - An audible tone indicates <10 O.
Reponse time is "",0.1 s.
DC CURRENT
Ranges - 100 p.A, 1 mA, 10 mA, 100 mA. 1 A.
Accuracy - ±(0.1% of reading +0.02% of full
scale).
< 150 mV up to 100 mA
Burden Voltage increasing to <500 mV at 1 A.
Resolution - 10 nA.
Response Time <2 s in Auto; <1 s in
Manual.
AC(RMS)CURRENT
Range, - 100 p.A, 1 mA, 10 mA, 100 mA, 1 A.
Accuracy - ±(0.6% of reading +0.1% of full
scale) from 20 Hz to 10 kHz.
Burden Voltage - < 150 mV up to 100 mA
increasing to <500 mV at 1 A.
Resolution - 10 nA.
Response Time <3 s in Auto; <2 s in
Manual.

CHARACTERISTICS (OPTION 10)
The set of characteristics is the same as specified for standard 2467/244SA/2465A oscilloscopes and includes the following additions:
Standard Interface Functions Implemented SH1 , AHl , T6, L3, SRI, Rl1 , DC1, E1 DT0C0, PP0.
Vertical Position Accuracy Channel 1 and Channel 2 (Noninverted) :
± [0.3 div +3% of distance (in divisions) from center screen +0.5 mV divided by the VoItIdiv setting]. For -15°C to +ssoC (excluding + 15°C to
+35°C) add 1.5 mV divided by the VoItldiv setting. For Channel 2 Inverted add 0.2 div.
Channel 3 and Channel 4 : ± [0.7 div +3% of
distance (in div) from center screen].
Ordering Information -

See page 289.

CHARACTERISTICS (OPTION 1R)
ENVIRONMENTAL
Rackmounting changes the temperature, vibration, and shock capabilities. The rackmounted oscilloscope meets or exceeds the requirements of
MIL-T-288OQC with respect to Type III, Class 5,
Style C equipment, when installed as directed. It
also meets or exceeds Tektronix Standard
062-2853~, Class 5 requirements.
Ambient Temperature - Operating: -15°C to
+ssoC. Measured at the instrument's air inlet, fan
exhaust temperature should not exceed +65°C.
Vibration - Operating: Same as standard instrument, except total displacement is 0.015 inch ~
(2.3 g's at SS Hz).
Shock - Operating and Nonoperating: Same as
standard instrument, except shocks are :l) 9'S.

TEMPERATURE
Range - -62°C to +230°C.
Accuracy - ±(2% of reading +1.S°C).
Resolution - 0.1°.
Readout - Selectable in either °C or OF.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Reading Rate Three readings/s nominal
except 1.5 readings/s on 20 MO range.
Temperature Coefficient - <;0.1 x the accuracy specificationl°C from -15°C to + 1SoC and
from +28°C to +ssoC.
GPIB Compatibility for Semiautomatic
Measurement System, - When combined
with Option 10, the DMM (Option 01) oscilloscope
combination is fully programmable. Complies with
Tektronix Standard Codes and Formats.
Ordering Information -

K212 PrxtabIe hsfllTnent Gatt. See page 461.

See page 289.

KLPKJr makes high speed /C testhg easy. Fer use cirectly
with P61:D fBmi/y probes or others via the rdxJed signal
pins. See page 472.

288

TEK

2400

150 MHz to 350 MHz
FOUR CHANNEL OSCILLOSCOPES

SERIES

ORDERING INFORMATION
2467*.350 MHz Oscilloscope

$11 ,900

Includes: MCP CRT; four P6136 lOX 1.3 m probes with
accessories; 2 A, 250 V fuse (159-002HlO); zip lock accessory pouch (01&0537-00); blue plastic CRT filter
(378-0199-03); clear plastic CRT filter; snap accessory
pouch (016-0692-00); front cover ; power cord
(16 1-01 04-00); operator manual (070-5854-00).

2465A 350 MHz Oscilloscope

$5,350

Includes: Two P6136 lOX 1.3 m probes with accessories (P6136); 2 A, 250 V fuse (159-0021-00); zip lock
accessory pouch (01&0537-00); blue plastic CRT filter
(378-0199-03); clear plastic CRT filter; snap accessory pouch (01 6-0692-00); front cover; power cord
(161-0104-00); operator manual (070-001 4-00).

2455A 250 MHz Oscilloscope

$5,150

Includes: Same as 2465A.

2445A 150 MHz Oscilloscope

$3,590

Includes: Same as 2465A, except two P6133 lOX 2 m
probes (P6133).

2465A OV 350 MHz Oscilloscope

$9,200

Includes: Same as 2465A, plus DMM (Option 01), TV
(Option 05), CTIIWR (Option 09), GPiB (Option 10), and
two additional P6136 probes (Option 22). Provides most
cost-effective combination of these options.

2465A OM 350 MHz Oscilloscope
Includes: Same as
CTIIWR (Option 09),
tional P6136 probes
effective combination

$8,400

2465A, plus DMM (Option 01),
GPIB (Option 10), and two addi(Option 22). Provides most costof these options.

2465A CT 350 MHz Oscilloscope

P6133 2445A.

$7,150

Includes: Same as 2465A, plus CTIIWR (Option (0), GPIB
(Option 10), and two additional P6136 probes (Option 22).
Provides most cost-effective combination of these options.
INSTRUMENT OPTIONS
+ $1 ,500
Option 01*'*. - Digital Multimeter.
Includes: Same as standard instruments, plus probe set
(012-0941-00); temperature probe (P6602); probe set
accessories (02lXa!7 -00).
Option 05 - TV Waveform Measurement
+ $1 ,050
System.
Includes: Same as standard instruments, plus CCIR
graticule CRT filter (378-0199-01); NTSC graticule CRT
filter (378-0199-02); polarized collapsible viewing hood
(0 16-0 t 80-00).
Option 06 - CountermmerfTrigger.
+ $1 ,000
Includes: Same as standard instruments, plus 20 grabber tips (206-0222-00) ; two 10 inch 10 wide comb
(012-0747-00).
Option 09*'*2 - CountermmerfTrigger and
Word Recognizer.
+ $1 ,400
Includes: Same as standard instruments, plus a word
reco gn izer probe (010-6407-01) ; 20 grabber tips
(206-0222-00); two 10 inch 10 wide comb (012-0747-00).
Option 10 - IEEE-488 GPIB Interface.
+ $900
Includes: Same as standard instruments, plus Instrument Interface Guide.
MULTIPLE OPTION ALLOWANCE (MOA)
When a 2467 or 2465A instrument is ordered with more
than two of the above options, a special price allowance
is applied. This allowance is not applicable to the
2465A DV, 2465A DM, or the 2465A CT.
Option 2A - MOA for combining two of the
- $250
above options.
Option 3A - MOA for combining three of the
above options.
- $500
Option 4A - MOA for combining four of the
above options.
- $750
OTHER INSTRUMENT OPTIONS
Option B1 - Service manual.
(For 2445A/2455N2465A12467) Standard manual.
+ $50
(For Options/Special Editions) Includes standard manual plus options manual.
+ $50
Option 1R*' - Configure Oscilloscope for
Rackmount.
+ $320
Includes: Same as bench model instrument (except
pouch) plus rackmount hardware and s/ide-out assemblies.

RECOMMENDED PROBES
Passive Probe for use with

tax

$115

P6136 - lOX Passive Probe for use with
2467, 2465A, 2455A.

Option 1T - Transit Case.
+ $340
Option 11 *' - Rear Panel Probe Power.
+ $165
Option 22 - Two additional probes.
(2467/2465N2455A) P6136 probes.
+ $265
(244SA) P6133 probes.
+ $205
" Option 11 may not be orcIer9d with Option 09 or the 2445A.
Option 09 Includ8s Option 06.
Option 1R rosy not be orcIer9d with Option 01, 2465A DM,
or 2465A DV, For rsckmounling instrvrnents 9QUippfId with
Option 0 1, contsct your Iocsl Sales Engineer.
'. Option 0 1 is not available with the 2467.
NOTE: Options are not re/rofiNabi6 with fiekj upgrsde kits.
'Z

Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option

INTERNATIONAL POWER OPTIONS
AO - 115V, 60Hz, US plug.
A 1 - 220 V, 50 Hz, Universal Euro plug.
A2 - 240 V, 50 Hz, UK plug.
A3 - 240 V, 50 Hz, Australian plug.
A4 - 240 V, 60 Hz, North American plug.
A5 - 220 V, 50 Hz, Switzerland plug.

WARRANTY-PLUS SERVICE PLANS
SEE PAGE 497
M1 - (246712465A12455A and Special Editions)
2 Calibrations.
+ $265
+ $255
M1 - (2445A) 2 Calibrations.
M2 - (2467) 2 Years Service.
+ $370
M2 - (2455N2465A and Special Editions) 2
Years Service.
+ $270
M2 - (2445A) 2 Years Service.
+ $215
M3 - (2467) 2 Years Service and 4 Calibrations. + $845
M3 - (2465A12455A and Special Editions) 2
Years Service and 4 Calibrations.
+ $695
M3 - (2445A) 2 Years Service and 4 Calibrations.
+ $645
M4 - (246712465A12455A and Special Editions)
5 Calibrations.
+ $670
M4 - (2445A) 5 Calibrations.
+ $660
M5 - (2467) 9 Calibrations + 2 Years Service. + $1 ,495
(2465A12455A and Special Editions)
M5 9 Calibrations + 2 Years Service.
+ $1 ,350
M5 (2445A) 9 Calibrations + 2 Years
Service.
+ $1,295

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Reckmount Converalon Kit - Not compatible with Option 01 . Order 016-0825-01
Probe Power Extender Cable for Rackmount Instrumant With Option 11 - Order
020-0104-00
Word Recognizer Extender Cable for Rackmount Instrument With OptIon 09 and
2465A CT - Order 020-0103-00.
GPIB Cables - Double shield, low EMC.
(1 m) Order 012-0991-01
(2 m) Order 012-0991-00
(4 m) Order 012-0991-02
Viewing Hoods (Polarized Collapsible) Order 016-0100-00
(Folding Light Shield) Order 016-0592-00
(Folding Binocular) Order 016-{)566-QO
Protective Waterproof Vinyl Cover Order 016-072O-QO
Carrying Case Carrying Strap Dc Power -

Order 016-0792-01
Order 346-0199-00

$365

$475

$335
$135
$150
$175
$50
$14
$18.75
$24
$355

$17

For more information, see page

306.
(1105)
(1106)
Dc Inverter see page 307.

$1 ,690
$1 ,265

P6202A - lOX FET Probe.
P6230 - lOX Bias/Offset Probe.
P6057 input.

$150
$680
$395

l00X, 5000 Il passive probe for 50 Il
$190

P6602 - Temperature Probe.
Current Probes - A63l2, A6303, P6021 ,
P6022. See pages 483 and 482 respectively.
A6901 Gound Isolation Monitor page 478 for complete description.

$225

See

A6902B Voltage IlOlator - For floating measurements; see page 479 for complete description.
DIGITIZING CAMERA SYSTEM
DCS01 Option 2A Digitize waveforms
from scope screen.
See page 353 for complete description.

$650

$1 ,795

$5,395

DCSOI Digitizing Camera System captures repetitive
waveforms from analog scopes and transients according
to a scope 's CRT writing speed (350 MHz for 2467).

RECOMMENDED CAMERAS
C-30BP Option 01 - General Purpose. See
page 450.
C-5C Option 02 - Low Cost. See page 445.
K212 -

RECOMMENDED CART
For on-site mobility. See page 461 .

SERVICE MANUALS
(2467/2465A) Order 070-0019-00
(2455N2445A) Order 070-0017-00
(Options) Order 070-5857-00

$1 ,524
$465
$330
$50
$50
$25

SOFTWARE
EZ-TEK 2400 Test Program Generator For instruments with GPIB; used with 4041
controller. Order S49Fl0l

$250

EZ-TEK 2400 PC Test Program Generator
- For instruments with GPIB; used with IBM
PC/Xl/AT and compatibles. Requires GURU
hardware. Order S49Fl03

$250

GPIB User's Resource UtIlity (GURU) Includes GPlB-PC interface board, GPIB cable,
software, and documentation.
Order 02Hl396-OO

$595

Additional accessories begin on page 439_
TRAINING
For each 2467/ 2445A/ 2465A oscilloscope purchased, one operation and application training
seat, applicable to the product, will be made available to the purchaser at 50% of the normal fae_
Other restrictions apply_ Workshop content Is on
pages 195-196_ For further Information, or to enroll,
cali 1-800-225-7602, For International orders, contact your locel Sales Office_

1107. For more information,
$525

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99, In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

289

TEK

100 MHz FIELD SERVICE
DUAL TRACE OSCILLOSCOPES

2300
SERIES

3Y.6 "

2335/2336/
2336YA/2337
Dc to 100 MHz Bandwidth
5 mV I Diy to 5 VIDiy
5 na/Diy Sweep Rate
Three Year Warranty-Fiye Year Option

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Rugged Field Service
Computer Peripheral Service
Communication Equipment Service

See page 277 for available Application Notes.
Compact and lightweight for ultra portability,
these oscilloscopes are designed and built
for on-site troubleshooting. The 2335, 2336,
2336YA and 2337 are useful for high speed
logic and digital applications. They feature
an innovative and protective fliptop cover

290

that doubles as a front panel with ~Time on
the 2336, 2336YA and ~Time/DMM on the
2337 versions. The entire outside case of all
four instruments is made of durable, onepiece aluminum and the front panels are
coated with scratch resistant plastic. When
the fliptops are latched shut, the entire
scope can withstand the abuse and heavy
usage of field service environments.
Vertical channels have calibrated deflection
factors from 5 mV/div to 5 V/div with a variable gain control to increase the sensitivity to
at least 2 mV/div. An internal delay line permits observation of the leading edge of a
waveform. Variable sweep speeds range
from 0.5 sldiv to 50.0 nsldiv and a 10X magnifier can increase the sweep rate to 5 nsldiv.
An autotrigger mode allows triggering on
waveforms with repetitive rates down to approximately 10 Hz. The sweep rate will run
freely and provide a baseline trace in the
absence of an adequate trigger signal.

Many exterior features have been incorporated into these new ultra portable scopes
to make them fast and convenient to use.
The CRT produces bright, high resolution
traces that are readily visible in most light
conditions. The ~Time/DMM readouts are
distinct, backlighted LCD (Liquid Crystal
Displays) for clear viewing in any lighting
condition. All knobs and switches have
been located in logical groupings to avoid
errors and delays during operation. And for
the 2336, 2336YA and 2337 models, ~Time
and DMM display and controls are in the
hinged, fliptop cover.
All four oscilloscopes come with detachable
power cord, integral EMI shielding, and an
accessories pouch. They are manufactured
to withstand impact shocks of 50 g's, almost
twice that of other portable scopes from
Tektronix. This ruggedness meets MIL-T28800C, Class 3 environmental requirements
for aerospace and military qualification.

TEK

2300

100 MHz FIELD SERVICE
DUAL TRACE OSCILLOSCOPES

SERIES

CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
Delay Time Range - Continuous from 50 ns to
at least 5 s after start of delaying sweep.
Differential Time Measurement Accuracy·'
Z335
~AJ

2337
., 2336YA only:

+15'C to +35'C

- 15'C to +55'C

0.75%
+0.01 5 major dial div

1.5%
+0.015 major dial 00

± 1% 01 reading
± I COLflt

± 2.5% 01 reading
± I count

+ to'C to +55' C Is 2% O( f9Bding ± t coon/.

Jitter - One part or less in 20,000 (0.005%) of 10
times the A Sweep Time/Div setting.
TRIGGERING
A Trigger Mode - Normal (sweep runs when
triggered). Automatic (sweep free runs in absence of a triggering signal and for signals below
30 Hz). Single Sweep (sweep runs once on first
triggering event after reset selector is pressed).
LED indicates when sweep is triggered and when
single sweep is ready.
A and B Trigger Sensitivity
2335,2331,
2337

20 MHz
100 MHz

Extemel
tnt.....t

Extema. e1

+ 10- 1

0.300
1.1 div

SOmV
l SOmV

500mV
1.5 V

0.3 00
1.000
1.1 div

SOmV
lSOmV
:JXl mV

500mV
1.5V
3V

2338YA
25 MHz
100 MHz
ISO MHz

., Ex/emslB Tngger senSItivity IS nol sppIIcabie 10 th8 2335.

2335
In strong testimony of the incomparable
reliability of the 2000 Family oscilloscopes,
Tek offers a three year warranty: All labor
and parts , inc luding CRT , excluding
probes. And then, beyond the ' basic three
years ' of warranty coverage , Tek will
extend your service coverage up to five
years, offering you a choice of three practical service plans to meet your specific service needs.
The 2336YA version of the standard 2336
100 MHz Portable Oscilloscope has a
5000 hour elapsed time indicator installed,
and also includes additional accessories
and an extra set of manuals. The 2336YA
has been accepted and specified by the
U.S. Navy. 2300 Series products have
National Stock Numbers. Check the Logistics Data Book for information.

CHARACTERISTICS
The following characteristics are common to the
2335, 2336, 2236YA, and 2337 oscilloscopes
except where indicated.

VERTICAL SYSTEM
(TWO IDENTICAL CHANNELS)
Bandwidth and Rise Time
- 15'C to + 40'C

+40'C to + 55'C

Dc to at least 100 MHz. 3.5 ns

Dc to at least 65 MHz. 4.15 ns

Bandwidth Limit - 20 MHz by bandwidth limit
switch.
Lower -3 dB Point Ac Coupling - lX Probe:
10 Hz or less. lOX Probe: 1 Hz or less.

Deflection Factor - 5 mV/div to 5 V/div. 1-2-5
sequence. Accuracy: ±3%. Uncaiibrated: Continuously variable between steps and to at least
2 mV/div.
Display Modes - CH 1, CH 2, Add CH 2 (normal
and inverted), Alternate, Chopped (= 275 kHz
rate) .
Common·Mode Rejection Ratio - For
common-mode signals of 6 div or less. 2335,
2336, 2337: At least 10:1 at 50 MHz. 2336YA: At
least 25:1 at 10 MHz; 10:1 at 100 MHz.
Channel Isolation - > 100:1 at 25 MHz.
Input Rand C - 1 MO ± 2% paralleled by 20 pF
± 10%.
Maximum Input Voltage - Ac or dc coupled,
400 V (dc + peak ac) or 500 V pop ae at 1 kHz or
less.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Time Base A - O.05l's/div to 0.5 s/div (1 -2-5
sequence). Xl0 magnified extends maximum
sweep rate to 5 ns/div.
Time Base B - 0.05 jlS/div to 50 ms/div (1-2-5
sequence). Xl0 magnified extends maximum
sweep rate to 5 ns/div.
Variable Time Control - Time base A provides
continuously variable uncalibrated sweep rates
between steps and to at least 1.25 s/div.
Time Base A and B Accuracy·1
+20'C to +30'C

- 15'C to +55'C

Unmagnified

± 2%

±3%

Magnified

±3%

±4%

. , Full len divisions.

Display Modes delayed.

A, A intensified by B, B

Trigger Coupling - Ac (- 3dB 20 Hz), dc, LF
REJ attenuates signals above 50 kHz. B Trigger
coupling is ac only.
A Trigger Holdoff - Adjustable control permits
a stable presentation of repetitive waveforms.
t:. Time B Trigger Modes - (2336, 2336YA and
2337 only) Provides two intensified zones on the
CRT trace for differential time measurements.
Time difference between the two intensified
zones is determined by B Delay Time Position and
t:.TIme Position controls, and is displayed on the
LCD readout .
Runs AHer Delay - B Sweep starts immediately
after the delay time selected by the Delay TIme
Position control and is independent of B trigger
signal.
Triggerable AHer Adjustable Delay Time The B Sweep Trigger is sourced from a composite of CH 1 and CH 2; CH 1 only, 2 only or from
the Ext Trigger input connector.
Jitter - 2335, 2336, 2337: 1.0 ns or less at
100 MHz. 2336YA: 0.5 ns at 100 MHz.
A Trigger View - A spring loaded pushbutton
overrides other vertical controls to display the signal used to trigger the A Sweep. This control provides quick verification of the (trigger) signal and
permits a time comparison between the vertical
input signal and the trigger signal. Deflection Factor is 100 mV/div ±40% (1 V/div with Ex1 --;.- 10).
Level and Slope - Internal, permits selection of
triggering at any point on positive or negative
slope of vertical input signal. Level adjustment
through at least ± 1 V in Ext, through at least
± 10 V in Ext --;.- 10.
A Sources - Vertical Mode, CH 1, CH 2, Line,
Ext, Ext--;.-10.
B Sources - (2336, 2336YA and 2337 only)
ATime runs after delay, Vertical Mode, CH 1,
CH 2, Ext (all modes ac coupled).
Extemallnputs - Rand C 1 MO ± 10%, 20 pF
±30%. 400 V (dc + peak ac) or 500 V ac pop at
1 kHz or less.

291

TEK

100 MHz FIELD SERVICE
DUAL TRACE OSCILLOSCOPES

X-Y OPERATION
Full Sensitivity X-Y (CH 1 Horizontal, CH 2
Vertical) - 5 mV/div to 5 V/div (1 -2-5 sequence),
accurate ± 5% from O°C to +40°C, accurate
±8% from -15°C to + 55°C. X-axis bandwidth is
dc to at least 2 MHz. Y-axis bandwidth is dc to at
least 100 MHz. Phase difference between amplifiers
is 3° or less from dc to 200 kHz.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT - 8 x 10 div (8 mm/div) display. Horizontal
and vertical centerlines further marked in 0.2 div
increments . Accelerating potential is 18 kV.
GH (P31) phosphor.
Graticule - Internal, nonparaliax, noniliuminated; markings for measurement of rise time.
Beam Finder - Compresses trace to within
graticule area to locate an offscreen signal.
Z-Axis Input - Positive-going, dc coupled signal decreases intensity; 5 V p-p signal causes noticeable modulation at normal intensity; dc to
20 MHz.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Amplitude Calibrator - 0.2 V accurate ± 1%
from O°C to +40°C, ± 1.5% from -15°C to
+55°C.

292

POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges - 100 V ac to 132 V ac
and 200 V ac to 250 V ac. Option 03 provides
90Vac to 115Vac or 180Vac to 23OVac.
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption - 35 W at
115 V, 60 Hz.
ENVIRONMENTAL
The 2335 Oscilloscope meets ali environmental
requirements of MIL-T-288OOC, Class 3. The 2336,
2336YA and 2337 Oscilloscopes meet the environmental requirements of MIL-T-28800, Class 3
except as indicated herein to avoid potential
damage to the LCD readout.
Temperature - Forced air ventilation during
normal operation.
2335: Operating is -15°C to +55°C. Nonoperating is - 62°C to +85°C.
2335 Option 1R (Rackadapted): Operating temperature inside equipment rack must be between
- 15°C to + 55°C and exhaust fan temperature
must not exceed +65 ° C. Nonoperating is
- 62°C to + 85°C.
2236/2237: Operating is -15°C to +55°C. Nonoperating is - 40°C to +80°C.
Operating: Sea level to 4600 m
Altitude (15,000 ft). Nonoperating: Sea level to 15000 m
(50,000 ft).

2300
SERIES

Vibration - Test samples were subjected to sinusoidal vibration in the X, Y, and Z-axes with the
frequency varied from 10 Hz to 55 Hz to 10 Hz in
one minute cycles for a duration of 15 minutes.
Total displacement was 0.025 in p-p at (4 g's at
55Hz).
Humidity - 2335: Operating and nonoperating
is 95%, five cycles (120 hours), referenced to MILT-28800B Paragraph 3.9.2.2.
2336 , 2336YA and 2337: Operating is 90%
(72 hours) at +55°C.
2336, 2336YA and 2337 and DMM: Operating is
90% (24 hours) at +35°C and 70% (24 hours) at
+ 5O°C.
2336, 2336YA and 2337 and DMM: Nonoperating
is 90% (72 hours) at + 60°C.
Shock - Operating 50 g's, 1/2 sine, 11 ms duration, 3 shocks per axis along each major axis. Total of 18 shocks.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Test
samples were found in compliance with the
Class 3 requirements of MIL-STD-481B using procedural steps outlined in MIL-STD-462. Increase
RS03 requirements from 1 VIm to 10 VIm. For
RE01, use 500 Hz to 30 kHz in place of 30 Hz to
30 kHz.

TEK

100 MHz FIELD SERVICE
DUAL TRACE OSCILLOSCOPES

2300
SERIES

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
2335,2338
2338YA, Cabinet

2337
Dlmenalona

214
315

Width
with handle
Height
wilh feeVpouch
withoul pouch
Depth
with front cover
handle extended

210
135

430
528
kg

Welghtl = (2335)
Net, without accesso·
ries or pouch
Net, with accessor·
ries and pouch
Shipping
Welghtl =
(2338, 2338YA, 2337)
Net, without accessories and pouch
Net, with accessories
and pouch
Shipping

In
10.8
12.4

2335 Option 1R
Rackmount
mm

483

190

133

5.2

378

14.9

8.3
5.3

7.7

17.0

11 .7

25.8

8.6
10.6

19,0
23.5

12.6"
16.9

21.8"
37.3

8.0

17.6

8.9
10.9

19.6
24.1

DC VOLTAGE
2 V (autoranging to
Full Scale Ranges 200 mV); 200 V (autoranging to 20 V); and 500 V.
Resolution - 100 Jl.V at 200 mV full scale.
Accuracy

Add 0.(1;% lor every 'C below + IS'C

Response Time - <4 s.
Maximum Input Voltage - 500 V (dc + peak
ac) at 60 Hz (between positive and negative inputs or between either input and ground).

ORDERING INFORMATION
$3,650

Include.: Two P6100A lOX probes; accessory pouch
(01&80% Relative
Humidity

Add ± 0.25% 01 reading ± 3 counls

Input Resistance - 10 Mfl ±0.25%.
Rejection Ratio - Normal·Mode: 60 dB minutes
at 50 Hz and 60 Hz, Common·Mode: 100 dB minutes at dc, 60 dB minutes at 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
Response Time - Within 3 s (no autorange);
within 9 s (up range); within 7 s (down range) ,
Maximum Input Voltage - 500 V (dc + peak
ac) at 60 Hz (between positive and negative inputs or between either input and ground).
AC VOLTAGE
2 V (autoranging to
Full Scale Ranges 200 mV); 200 V (autoranging to 20 V); and 350 V.
Crest Factor - (When peak voltage input is
<3 times full scale) Six,
Accuracy·'
+IS' C 10 +35' C

Within ±3%, ±6 counts" , 20 Hz to 20 kHz

-IS' C to + IS' C

Add ± 0.(1;% for every 'C below + IS'C

+35'C to +SS'C

Add ±0.(1;% for every 'C above +35'C

Nonsinewsves: Derste below 50 Hz. For crest fsctors > 3,
sdd + 0, - 1" of resding,

Input Impedance - Resistance 10 Mfl ±0.25%
in series with input blocking cap, Capacitance
(20 V, 200 V, and 350 V range) < 150 pF; (200 mV,
2 V range) <220 pF,
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - 60 dB minimum at 50 Hz and 60 Hz, 2 V range; 53 dB minimum at 50 Hz and 60 Hz, 200 V and 300 V range.
Response Time - Within 3 s (no autorange);
within 9 s (up range); within 7 s (down range).
Maximum Input Voltage - 500 V (dc + peak
ac) at 60 Hz (between positive and negative in·
puts or between either input and ground).

SEE PAGE 497
Ml
Ml
Ml
M2

(2335) 2 Calibrations.

(2336I2336YA) 2 Calibrations.
(2337) 2 Calibrations.
(2335) +2 Years Service.
M2 - (2336I2336YA) +2 Years Service.
M2 - (2337) +2 Years Service.
M3 - (2335) +2 Years Service & 4 Calibrations.
M3 - (2336I2336YA) 2 Years Service & 4 Cali·
brations.
M3 - (2337) 2 Years Service & 4 Calibrations.
M4 - (2335) 5 Calibrations.
M4 - (2336I2336YA) 5 Calibrations.
M4 - (2337) 5 Calibrations.
M5 - (2335) 9 Calibrations +2 Years Service.
M5 - (2336I2336YA) 9 Calibrations +2 Years

+ $145
+ $160
+ $160
+ $140
+$160
+ $160
+ $410
+ $470
+ $510
+ $390

+ $445
+ $480
+ $825

Service.
M5 -

+ $940
(2337) 9 Calibrations +2 Years Service. + $1 ,025

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
$1 ,265
$525

RECOMMENDED PROBES

See Probe Section for complete descriptions, page 463.
P6108A -

+ tS' C Add 0.01% for every 'C below + IS'C
Add ±0.01% lor every 'C above +35'C

$310

INTERNATIONAL POWER PLUG OPTIONS
Option AI - Universal Euro 220 V, 50 Hz.
Option A2 - UK 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A3 - Australian 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A4 - North American 240 V, 60 Hz.
Option A5 - Switzerland 220 V, 50 Hz.

Bettery Peck - Order 1106
Dc Power - Order 1107

Within ±O.IS% of reading ± 1 count

+35'C 10 +SS'C

Within ± 0.5% ± 2 count + 0.4 0

2335 Oscilloscope

2337 With Digital Multimeter

-IS'C to

+ IS'C to +35'C
- IS'C to + IS'C

CONVERSION KIT
Reckmount Conyeralon - 2335 only.
Order 01&0468-00

Add 0.(1;% lor every 'C above +35'C
+35'C to +SS'C
>00% Relative Ht.midity Add ± 1% of reading ± 8 counts

17.0
20.8

" No pouch for 2335 Option 1R.

+ IS'C to +35'C

RESISTANCE
Full Scale Ranges - 2 kfl (autoranging to
200 fl); 200 kfl (autoranging to 20 kfl); 20 Mfl
(autoranging to 2 Mfl).
Resolution - 0.1 fl.
Accuracy

lOX probe.

P8202A - lOX FET probe.
P6022 - Current probe.
A6902B Voltage Isoletor For floating
measurements see page 479 for complete de'
scription.
RECOMMENDED CAMERA
C-5C Option 04 Includes 01&0359-01
adaptor and flash (camera mount not provid·
ed). See page 445.

zn;YA
The zn;YA has been accepted and specified by the
Navy. Also see page 2fE.

2336YA Oscilloscope With ~Time,
Elapsed Time Meter, Extra
Accessories and Manuals

u.s.

RECOMMENDED CART
K21 2 Portable Instrument Cert - For on·
site mobility. See page 461 .

$75
$680
$475

$1 ,795

$495

$330

$4,175

I nc l udes: Same as 2336 plus P6101A probe ;
three probe tip adaptors (I03-5 fl, the message 'OPEN'is displayed. < 5 fl,
a tone is generated and the message 'SHORT" is displayed.

295

TEK

100 MHz
DUAL TRACE OSCILLOSCOPES

2200
SERIES

2235
Dc to 100 MHz Bandwidth
Lightweight, Easy to Use
2 mV Sensitivity
5 ns/Div Sweep Rate
Advanced Trigger System
Trigger View
Delayed Sweep Measurements
Large, Bright CRT
10X Probes Included
Three Year Warranty- Five Year Option

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Field Service
DeSign
Component Testing

See page 277 for available Application Notes.

Features like rugged design, lightweight and an easy-ta-leam front panel make the 2235 an ideal service scope. In
both service and design, it offers the sensitivity for low level measurements and sweep rates for fast logic families,
plus 10: 1 variable holdoff range for complex word triggering. And at the bottom line, it offers the price and reliability
to significantly lower the cost of owning a quality scope.

The 100 MHz 2235 offers high value and
high performance. The low price is made
possible by the 2200 Series innovative architecture. Yet it has the needed features,
operational Simplicity and-not least-solid
reliability. All backed by a three year warranty on all parts and labor, including the
CRT, excluding probes.
The 2235 ensures measurement quality and
reliability while reducing instrument cost.
Tek started with the innovative architecture
of the 2200 Series: fewer boards, fewer
mechanical parts, less cabling and electrical connectors . This approach , plus advanced circuit design and a focus on essential features, has led to a scope that's
more accurate, more reliable, lighter and
more serviceable-and simpler to usethan any other 100 MHz scope.
The 2235 delivers 2% vertical and horizontal accuracy in normal operation. Accuracy
of 3% or better is maintained across a wide
range of environmental extremes . Trace
noise, chop noise, vertical aberrations and
sweep interference have been reduced to
a minimum. Delay jitter of 1:20, lOdiv.
Differential Delay Time Accuracy - (2235
and 2235 Option 01) ±1% (+15·C to +35·C);
± 2% (O·C to +5O.C).
t::. Time Measurement Accuracy - (2236) Max
accuracy equal to time base accuracy ± 50 ps.
Time Base Accuracy With Standard Oscillator:
10 ppm (0.001%); with Option 14 TCXO (Temperature -Compensated Crystal Oscillator) :
0.5 ppm (0.00005%).
Delay Jitter - 2236: 10,000:1 (0.01%). 2235 and
2235 Option 01 : 20,000:1 (0.005%).

TRIGGERING
A Trigger Sensitivity
2235 • 2235 Opt 01

Intemel

Extemel (p.p volta)

10
60
100
100

0.3 drv"'
1.0 div
1.5 div
1.5div

35mV
120mV
200 mV
150mV

O.35div
1.2 div
1.5 div

40mV
150mV
250 mV

0.5div
1.5 div
2.0div

50mV
160mV
300 mV

MHz
MHz
MHz (2235)
MHz (2235 Opt 01)

2238
10 MHz
60 MHz
100 MHz
2238 CTM
10 MHz
60 MHz
100 MHz

B Trigger (Internal Only) Sensitivity
10 MHz

80 MHz

100 MHz

2235 & 2235 Opt 01

0.35 div

1.0div

1.5 div

2Zl6

0.4 div

1.2div

1.5div

2Zl6CTM

0.5 div

1.5 div

2.0 div

"' 0.35 for 2235 Option 01 .

TV Trigger Sensitivity - TV Reid: 1.0 div of
composite sync. TV Line: 0.3 div (2235); 0.35 div
(2236 and 2235 Option 01).
Bandwidth Limiting 20 MHz when bandwidth limit switch depressed.
(2235 Option 01
High Frequency Reject only) Attenuates signals above 40 kHz.
Low Frequency Reject - (2235 Option 01 only)
Attenuates signals below 40 kHz.
Trigger System Operating Modes - Normal,
p-p automatic, TV line, TV field , and Single
sweep.
Trigger View System - Same deflection factors as vertical channels with internal sources;
100 mV/div with ac and dc external, and 1 Vldiv
with dc -;.-10 external. Accuracy is ± 20%. Delay
difference between trigger view (EXT input) and
either vertical channel is <2.0 ns.
External Trigger Input - Coupling: Ac, dc, or
dc -;.- 10.
Variable Holdoff Control - Increases A sweep
holdoff time at least 10:1.
X-Y OPERATION
Deflection Factors - Same as scope's vertical
system with the V/div switch in calibrated detent.
Accuracy
X-Axle
+ 15'C to +35'C
O·C to +50'C

±3%
± 4%

Bandwidth - Y-Axis: same as scope 's vertical
system. X-Axis: 2.5 MHz.
Phase Difference Between X-Axis and
Y-Axis Amplifiers - ± 3· from dc to 150kHz
with dc coupled inputs.

CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT - 8 cm x 10 cm display; intemal unilluminated graticule (2235 Option 01 is illuminated). Accelerating potential is 14 kV. GH (P31) phosphor
standard.
Controls - Beam Rnder, Focus, Separate A
and B Sweep Intensity, Trace Rotation. 2235 Option 01 also has Variable Scale Illumination.
Z-Axis Input - Dc coupled, positive-going signal
decreases intensity; 5 V p-p signal causes noticeable modulation; de to 20 MHz.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Probe Adjust Signal (2235 /2236)
Squarewave, 0.5 V ±5%, 1 kHz ±2O%.
Amplitude Calibrator - (2235 Option 01 only)
Squarewave, 0.5 V ±2%, 1 kHz ±2O%.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Range - 90 V ac to 250 V ac. (No
line switches or fuse changes needed.)
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption - 2235: 40 W,
70 VA. 2236: fIJ W, 110 VA.
Dc Operation - 12 V to 30 V available with
1105,1106, and 1107.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Ambient Temperature - Operating: O· C to
+50·C (except 2236 CTM ac RMSV, DCV, and
Modes: O·C to +4O.C). Nonoperating: -55·C to
+75·C.
Altitude - Operating: To 4600 m (15,000 tt) .
Maximum operating temperature decreased
1·C/l ,000 tt (5,000 It to 15,000 tt). Nonoperating:
To 15000 m (50,000 It).
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each
of the major axes. 0.015 in p-p displacement
10 Hz to 55 Hz to 10 Hz in one minute cycles.
Held for 10 minutes at 55 Hz (2.4 g 's at 55 Hz).
Humidity - Operating and Nonoperating: 95%,
five cycles (120 hours) referenced to MIL-T28800C, Paragraph 4.5.5.1.2.2.
Shock - Operating: 30 g's, '/2 sine, 11 ms duration, 3 shocks per axis along each major axis. Total of 18 shocks.
EMC - Meets Class B requirements per
VDE 0871B for radiated and conducted emission.
2235 Option 01 AN/USM 488 Only: Meets requirements of MIL-STD-461B Part 4, CE03, CS01,
CS02 , CS06 , RE02 (to 1 GHz), and RS03
(1 Vlmeter to 1 GHz).

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
2235 end 2235 Opt 01

Dlmenelone

Width"
Height·,
Depth"

328

Welghte ..
Net

137
440

kg
6.1

In
12.9
5.4
17.3

Ib
13.5

2238

328
137
440

In
12.9
5.4
17.3

kg
7.3

Ib
t6.2

"' Without h8ndle.
·z Without front cover.
2235 Option 01 height with pouch is t50 mm (5.9 In).

297

TEK

100 MHz
DUAL TRACE OSCILLOSCOPES

2200
SERIES

INTERNATIONAL POWER PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 - Universal Euro 220 V, 50 Hz.
Order 02(}{)859-(XJ.
Option A2 - UK 240 V, 50 Hz.
Order 02(}{)8OO.(XJ.
Option A3 - Australian 240 V, 50 Hz.
Order 02CHl861-OO.
Option A4 - North American 240 V, 60 Hz.
Order 020-0862-00.
Option A5 - Switzerland 220 V, 50 Hz.
Order ()2(}{)663-OO.

2236 Counter/Timer/Multimeter
CHARACTERISTICS
The following characteristics are unique to the

2236.
Time Base Accuracy Standard: 10 ppm
(0 .001%) . With Option 14 TCXO : 0.5 ppm
(0.00005%).
Frequency - Range: ";;;0.2 Hz to ~ 100 MHz.
Maximum Resolution: O.l:XX:X>1 Hz. Maximum Accuracy : Equal to time base accuracy . Can be
gated: "2
Period - Range: ~5 s to ..;;;10 ns. Maximum
Resolution: 10 ps. Maximum Accuracy: Equal to
time base accuracy. Can be gated:'·2
Width - Range: ~5 s to ..;;;5 ns. Maximum Resolution: 10 ps. Maximum Accuracy: Equal to time
base accuracy ± 10 ns. Can be gated:"2
Deley Time - Range: ~2 . 5 s to ..;;;500 ns. Maximum Resolution : 10 ps . Maximum Accuracy:
Equal to time base accuracy ± 20 ns:2
~ Time Range: ~2 . 5 s to ..;;;1 ns. Maximum
Resolution: 10 ps. Maximum Accuracy: Equal to
time base accuracy ± 50 pS.·2
Totalize - Over 8,00J,00J events. Can be gated.
Dc Volts - Range: 0 V to 500 V. Maximum Resolution: 100 /lV. Accuracy: ± 0.1%. Input: Through
side DMM leads: 2
RMS Ac Volts - Ac Coupled: True RMS with
20 Hz to 20 kHz frequency range . Range: 0 V to
350 V. Maximum Resolution: 100 /lV. Accuracy:
± 1.0%. Input: Through side DMM leads:'
CH 1 Volts - Measures average dc voltage
(with CH 1 dc coupling) or true RMS voltage (with
CH 1 ac coupling); 1XJ10X ranged by coded
probes: Single Sweep button zeros display and
permits relative dc and ac RMS measurements.
Range, Dc and Ac Volts: 0 V to 50 V (500 V
dc/35O V ac with P6121 10X Probe). Maximum
Resolution, Dc and Ac Volts: 100 /lV (1 mV with
P6121). Maximum Accuracy , Dc Volts (18°C to
28°C): ±0.3% with 1X probe, ±0.5% with 10X
probe. Maximum Accuracy, Ac Volts with 1X
probe (18°C to 28°C): ±2%, 50 Hz to 100 Hz,
± 1%, 100 Hz to 20 kHz. Maximum Accuracy, Ac
Volts with 10X Probe: ±2%, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with
proper probe compensation: 2
Resistance - Range: 0 0 to 1.99 GO. Maximum
Resolution: 0.Q1 O. Accuracy: To 0.15%. Automatic

298

WARRANTY-PLUS SERVICE PLANS
SEE PAGE 497
M1 - (223512235 Option 01) 2 Calibrations.
M1 - (2236) 2 Calibrations.
M2 - (223512235 Option 01) +2 Years Service.
M2 - (2236) +2 Years Service.
M3 - (223512235 Option 01) 2 Years Service
& 4 Calibrations.
M3 - (2236) 2 Years Service & 4 Calibrations.
M4 - (223512235 Option 01) 5 Calibrations.
M4 - (2236) 5 Calibrations.
M5 - (223512235 Option 01) 9 Calibrations
+2 Years Service.
M5 - (2236) 9 Calibrations +2 Years Service.

diode detection displays forward voltage drop to
± 1%; continuity mode activates tone if resistance is <50:'
Temperature - Uses Optional Tektronix P6OO2
Temperature Probe. Temperatures in C or F selected with Freq/~Time button. Range: -62°C to
+~oC (_OO°F to + 446° F). Resolution: To 0.1°
(either range). Accuracy: To ± 2% of reading
± 1.5°C; ±2% of reading ±2.70°F.
Multimeter Inputs - Isolated from oscilloscope
ground. Input Z: 10 MO. Maximum Input Voltage:
500 V (dc + peak ac), for all functions .
., Ranges, resolutions, and scwraci8s can be degraded due to

Front Panel Cover" - Order 200-2520-00
Accessory Pouch"' - Order 01&0677.Q2
Viewing Hoods (CollapSible) Order 01&0592-00
(Binocular) Order 016-056&00·'
(Polarized) Order 01& symbol
appears on-screen when deflection factor is
between calibrated VOLTS/DIV step settings.
Channel Isolation - 50 d8 or more attenuation
of deselected channel at 10 MHz. 34 d8 or more
at 100 MHz. Measured with an eight div input signal and equal VOLTS/DIV settings on both channels from 2 mV/div to 0.5 V/div.
Channel 2 Signal Delay With Respect to
Channell - <100 ps difference.
Input Characteristics - 1 Mn ± 0.15% shunted by 20 pF ± 0.5 pF. Maximum Input Voltage:
400 V (dc + peak ac); 800 V ac p-p at 10 kHz or
less.
Common Mode Rejection Ratio (ADD Mode
With Channel 2 Inverted) - At least 10:1 at
50 MHz. For common-mode signals of eight div or
less and with VAR VOLTS/DIV control adjusted
for best CMRR at 50 kHz at any VOLTS/DIV
setting.
Trace Drift - 8etween VOLTS/DIV Step Settings: 0.2 div or less. With VAR VOLTS/DIV Rotated 8etween Extremes: 1 div or less. Inverting
Channel 2: 1 div or less. 8etween GND and Dc
Input Coupling: < 0.5 mV for temperatures from
O°C to +35°C. < 2 mV for temperatures from
+ 35°C to +50°C.
Position Range - At least ± 11 div from graticule center.
CHANNEL 3 AND CHANNEL 4
Frequency Response - Same as Channel
and Channel 2.
Step Response - Same as Channel 1 and
Channel 2.
Deflection Factor - Settings: 0.1 V/div and
0.5 V/div.
Maximum Error - Same as Channel 1 and
Channel 2.
Channel Isolation - 34 d8 or more attenuation
of deselected channel at 100 MHz. Measured
with an eight div input signal.
Channel 4 Signal Delay With Respect to
Channel 3 - < 100 ps difference.
Input Characteristics - 1 Mfl ± 1% shunted
by 2 pF ±0.5 pF. Maximum Input Voltage: 400 V
(dc + peak ac); 800 V p-p ac at 10 kHz or less.
Trace Shift - 8etween VOLTS/DIV Settings: 1
div or less.
Position Range - Same as Channel 1 and
Channel 2.

ALL CHANNELS
Low Frequency Linearity - 0.06 div or less
compression or expansion of a 2 diy, centerscreen signal when positioned anywhere within
the graticule area.
Bandwidth Limiter - Reduces upper -3d8
bandpass to a limit of 17 MHz to 23 MHz.
Trace Separation Range - ±4 div.
Chop Mode Switching Rate - 625 kHz ± 10%.
Channel 3 or Channel 4 Signal Delay With
Respect to Either Channel 1 or Channel 2 < 200 ps difference.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Display Modes - A (main sweep), A ALTernate
with 8 (delayed sweep), and 8. In X-v mode,
Channell provides X-axis (horizontal) deflection.
A Sweep Time Base Range - 0.5 sldiv to
20 ns/div in a 1-2-5 sequence of 24 steps. X10
magnification extends fastest sweep rate to
2 ns/div.
B Sweep Time Base Range - 5 ms/div to
20 ns/div in a 1-2-5 sequence of 21 steps. X10
magnification extends fastest sweep rate to
2 ns/div.
Variable Timing Range - Continuously variable between SEC/DIV calibrated step settings.
Extends slowest A sweep and 8 sweep speeds
by a factor of a least 2.5 times. Affects the A
SEC/DIV setting with the A display mode; affects
the 8 SEC/DIV setting with the ALT and 8 modes.
A Sweep Timing Accuracy - Applies over the
center eight div. Excludes the first 0.25 div of the
magnified sweep and sweep beyond the l00th
magnified div.
Range

+ 1S"C to + 35"C

Unmagnified

Magnified

±2%

±3%

± 4%

o·c to

+ 1S"C
+35"C to +SO'C

Linearity - ± 5% over any two of the center
eight diY, or both unmagnified and magnified
displays.
Delay Time - Range: < 0.1 div to >9.9 div of
the A sweep. Maximum value does not exceed
end of the A sweep. Jitter: 1:20,000 p-p (0.005%)
viewed over two seconds.
L\ Time - (2246) Range: 0 to > 10 div to right of
the delay time setting, but does not exceed end
of the A sweep. Accuracy: ± (0.5% of reading
+ 1% of one A sweep div +20 ns).
TRIGGERING
Trigger Sensitivity from CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, CH 2
Source.
Dc Coupled - 0.35 div or greater triggers from
dc to 50 MHz, increasing to 1 divat 150 MHz.
Noise Reject Coupled - 0.8 div or more triggers; 0.5 div or less does not trigger.
HF Reject Coupled - 0.35 div or greater triggers from dc to 50 kHz; 0.25 div or less does not
trigger above 500 kHz.
LF Reject Coupled - 0.35 div or greater triggers from 100 kHz to 50 MHz; 0.35 div or greater
does not trigger from dc to 10 kHz.
Ac Coupled - 0.35 div or greater triggers from
50 Hz and 50 MHz; 0.35 div or less does not trigger from dc to 5 Hz.
For dc, LF Reject, and ac coupling above 50 MHz,
triggering signal requirement increases to 1.0 div
at 150 MHz.

301

100 MHz
FOUR CHANNEL OSCILLOSCOPES

TEK

Trigger Sensitivity From TV Line or TV Field
Source - 0.5 div or less of composite sync
achieves stable display.
Lowest Usable Frequency With Auto Level
Function - 10 Hz.
Level Control Range - ± 20 div referenced to
the selected source.
Level Readout Accuracy - ± (0.3% of reading +0.1 div).
Variable Holdoff Range - Increases the
A sweep holdoff time by at least a factor of 10.
X-Y OPERATION
Deflection Factors - Same as Vertical System,
with VAR VOLTS/DIV in calibrated detent.
Maximum Error
Ringe

Y-A,d.

X-AlII.

+ IS"C to +35"C

±2%

±3%

O"C to +IS"C
+35"C to +SO"C

±3%

±4%

X-Axis -3dB Bandwidth - 3 MHz or more.
Phase Difference Between X and Y - E;3°
for dc coupled signals from dc to SO kHz with
bandwidth limiter off.
CURSOR AND FRONT PANEL DISPLAY
Controls - Separate A Intensity, B Intensity,
Readout Intensity, Focus, Beam Finder, Trace Rotation. and Scale Illumination.
CRT - 8 x 10 cm internal graticule. Markings:
8 major div vertically and 10 major div horizontally,
with auxiliary markings.
Standard Phosphor - GH (P31).
Y-Axis Orthogonality - E;0.1 div over eight
vertical div; no adjustment.
Cursor Functions - (2246)
Function

Accuracy

SEC; I!SEC; PHASE;
± (0.5% of reading
AThiE; AliTh1E; APHASE 0.02 honzontal (0)
VOlTS; Gf\O VOlTS

Function

Track Measurement.

± (0.5% of reading + 0.02 'J9rticaI
00 + I-F display err"",)
po.1IIon Accuracy ".
± O.OS vertocal dtv

Tng Level, Ground
., Curser poSition

waveform vs readout displayed value.

EXTERNAL Z-AXIS INPUT
Active Region Lower Threshold - ,.;;;1.8 V.
Signal Required to Blank Sweep-Related
Trace - ~3 .8 V.
Input Resistance to Ground - 10 kll ± 10%.
Maximum Input Voltage - 30 V (dc + peak
ac) or ,.;;;30 V ac pop at 1 kHz,
CALIBRATOR OUTPUT
Voltage Into 1 MO Load - 0.5 V ±2%.
Repetition Range - 1 kHz ± 10%.
Overshoot - ";;;0.1%.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Range - 90 V to 2SO V.
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 445 Hz.
Fuse Rating - 2 A, 250 V, slow-blow.
Maximum Power Consumption - 80 W (110
Vac).

2200
SERIES

Ambient Temperature - Operating: O°C to
+50°C, Nonoperating: -sooC to -75°C.
Altitude - Operating: To 4500 m (15,000 tt).
Maximum operating temperature decreases 1°C
for each 300 (1,000 tt) above 1500 m (5000 ft).
Nonoperating: to 15 2SO m (SO,OOO It).
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each
of three axes, 0.Q15 inch pop displacement. 10 Hz
to 55 Hz in one minute sweeps. Held for 10 minutes at 55 Hz (2.4 g's at 55 Hz).
Humidity - Operating and Nonoperating: 95%,
five cycles (120 hours) referenced to
MIL-T-288OOC, Paragraph 4.5.5.1.2.2 for Type III,
Class 5.
Shock - Operating and Nonoperating: 30 g,
half sine, 11 ms duration; three shocks on each
face, for a total of 18 shocks.
Bench Handling Test - 4 inch drop per Tektronix Standard 062-2858-00.
Transportation Drop and Vibration - Meets
the limits of Tektronix Standard 062-2858-00.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
DI .... n.lon.

Width, With handle
Heoght
With leet and pouch
Without pouch
Depth
With front cover
With handle extended
Weight ...

361

In
14.2

177
164

7.0
6.4

Net
With accessones and pouch
Without accessones and pouch

445

17.5

519
kg

20.4

B.9
7.9

19.6
17.4

M1
M1
M2
M2
M3

WARRANTY-PLUS SERVICE PLANS
SEE PAGE 497
(2245) 2 calibrations.
(2246) 2 calibrations.
(2245) 2 Years Service.
(2246) 2 Years Service.
(2245) 2 Years Setvice and 4 Caibra-

tions.
M3 -

+$290
(2246) 2 Years Setvice and 4 Caba-

tions.
M4
M4
M5
M5

+$145
+ $180
+$175
+$185

+$320
(2245)
(2246)
(2245)
(2246)

5 Calibrations.
+$385
5 Calibrations.
+$410
9 Calibrations + 2 Years Setvice. + $1,005
9 Calibrations + 2 Years Setvice. +$1,095

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Service Manual
(224512246) Order 070-6001-00
$25
Front Panel Cover - Order 200-3232-00
$5.00
$15
Acce ••ory Pouch - Order 01&re57-OO
Acce •• ory Pouch and Cover- 2
Protective Waterproof Vinyl Cover $15
Order 016-0848-00
Viewing Hood. (Collapsible) Order 01&0592-00
$14
(Binocular) Order 01&056&00
$18.75
(Polarized) Order 01&0180-00
$50
Clear Implosion Shield - Order 337-2775-{)1 . + $1 .95
Carrying Strap - Order 34&0199-00
$17
Carrying Ca.e - Order 0I&0792{)1"'
$355
Clear Gratlcule Filter - Order 337-2775-{)1
$1.95
1107 Mounting Kit - Order 01&0785-00
$50
1107 DC Inverter - See page :>1)7.
$525
1108 Battery Pack - See page:>lJ6.
$1,285
1105 Power Supply - See page:>lJ6.
$1 ,690
., R8COfTlITI8fld use with front panel 00_ (~2520-00).
•, To order. contset your local Tektronix Sales Offlce.
RECOMMENDED PROBES

2246 With Voltmeter

See Probe Saction fex additional probes, page 464.

Dc Volts - Accuracy: ± (0.3% of reading +0.02
div). Normal Mode Rejection Ratio: >50 dB at
SO Hz and 60 Hz.
+Peak and -Peak Volts - Accuracy: ±(2%
of reading +0.1 div) for signals from 20 Hz to
30 MHz. -3dB at 100 MHz. Gated Region Minimum Width: ";;;(0.2 div + SO ns).
poP Volts - Accuracy : ± (2% of reading
+0.1 div) for signals from 20 Hz to 30 MHz.
-3 dB from 30 MHz to 100 MHz. Gated Region
Minimum Width: ,.;;;(0.2 div + 50 ns).

ORDERING INFORMATION
2245100 MHz Oscilloscope

$1 ,875

Include.: Two lOX, 1.5 m probes with accessories
(P6109 Opt 01); clear accessories pouch with ziploc fastener (OI&053HXl); blue plastic CRT filter (337-2775-00);
2A, 250 V fuse (159 -0023 -00); operator manual
(07D-6083-OO); user reference guide (070-6082-00).

2246 100 MHz Oscilloscope with Voltmeter, LlTime, and SmartCursors·
$2,400
Include.: Same as 2245.
OPTIONS
Option 02 - Protective front panel cover and
accessory pouch.
Option 1C Option 1K -

+$47

C-SC Option 02 Camera.
K212 Portable Instrument cart.

+ $485
+ $330

Option 1T -

Transit case.

+$185

Option 22 Option 23 -

Two additional P6109 probes.
Two lx/lOX PIDl2B. 6 It probes.

+$130
+$350

The P6062B allows Switching between IX and lOX attenuation. Readout display changes with attenuation
switching. See page 470.
P8109 - lOX Probe.
$58
P8082B - lX-lOX Probe.
$175
P8008 - Environmental Probe.
$240
$195
P8009 - High Voltage Probe.
$680
P8202A - Active Probe.
$425
1101A - Active Probe Power Supply.
$585
A8302 - Current Probe.
$1,070
A8303 - Current Probe.
AM 503 - Current Probe Amplifier.
$1 ,125
A8901 Ground Isolation Monitor $650
See page 478. Order A6001
A8902B Isoletor - See page 479.
$1 ,795
RECOMMENDED CAMERAS

INTERNATIONAL POWER PLUG OPTIONS
C-5C Option 02 - See page 445.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Option A 1 - Universal Euro 220 V, 50 Hz.
C-7 Option 03 - See page 448.
Environmental requirements qualify the electrical
C-4 - See page 446.
and mechanical specifications. When not rack- Option A2 - UK 240 V. 50 Hz.
Option A3 - Australian 240 V, 50 Hz.
mounted, the instrument meets the environmental
RECOMMENDED CART
Option A4 - North American 240 V, 00 Hz.
requirements of MIL-T-288OOC for Type III, Class
K212 - For on-site mobility. See page 461 .
Option A5 - Switzerland 220 V, 50 Hz.
5, Style D equipment.
~ To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
~
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99
302

$485
$585

$370
$330

TEK

2200

50 MHz DUAL TRACE
OSCILLOSCOPE

SERIES

NEW 2225
Dc to 50 MHz Bandwidth
Alternate Magnification
500 /lV/Div Sensitivity
HF/LF Reject Trigger Filters
Lightweight-Easy to Use
pop Auto Triggering
5 ns/Div Maximum Sweep Rate
Front Panel Z-Axis Input
Three Year Warranty-Five Year Option

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Field Service
Education
Production Test
Television Service
Communications

See page 277 for available Application Notes.
Tektronix' innovation redefines the meaning
of value with the NEW 50 MHz 2225. The
2225 continues in the 2200 Series tradition
of high performance, reliability and quality.
The technology that made the 2200 Series
the most successful oscilloscopes in the
world has been utilized in the NEW 2225.
The use of fewer mechanical parts, cables,
connectors, and components contributes to
improved reliability, serviceability, and cost.
The result is a high performance easy· to·

use scope that costs less to build, buy and
own. You will significantly improve your utili·
ty while lowering your cost·of-ownership.
In this day and age when everything is
becoming more complex, the 2225 has made
strides to increase operational simplicity. This
is a big plus in education, field service, and
manufacturing production test environments.
All this and new features too. Features like
Alternate Magnification, 500 p.V/div vertical
sensitivity with X10 magnification, indepen·
dent trigger coupling , high and low fre·
quency reject, front panel Z·Axis input, and
a new improved bright, crisp CRT.
Alternate Magnification is an exciting new
concept in performing waveform expansion
and detailed signal analysis . Dual time
base types of measurements can be per·
formed with a simple flip of a switch. The
CRT alternately displays both the unmagni·
fied and magnified sweeps. Magnification
can be selected in three levels: X5, X10,
and X50. Measurements like digital signal
timing can be performed with little effort,
quickly and accurately.
The new low noise vertical system can op·
erate at 500 p.V/div which is 4 times the
maximum sensitivity of the previous 2200
Series. X10 vertical magnification provides
similar benefits that have been associated
with the horizontal, but in the vertical axis.
Vertical waveform expansion is made easy
with a pull of a knob. Independent channel

bandwidth limiting (5 MHz) is performed
with this function. Now you can selectively
limit either channel 's bandwidth without affecting the other.
All the features and performance you come
to expect in more expensive instruments is
found on the 2225. The flexibility and high
sensitivity of the trigger system will be well
received. The convenience of hands free triggering with Peak-to-Peak Auto. Independent
selection of TV Line or Field triggering at any
sweep speed. Variable Holdoff that makes
triggering on complex waveform periods
easy. And a 5 ns/div (maximum) horizontal
system that is accurate as well as linear.
The 2225 also includes two new P6103 10X
modular probes that complement the performance of the 2225. They incorporate a new
ruggedized probe tip and eliminate the bulky
compensation box at the front of the scope.
Also consider the world-renowned Tektronix
service and support organization. You can
find support in any area you need from expert sales support, training materials, application assistance, service and calibration, as
well as long term support for a minimum of 6
years after the product is discontinued.
Tektronix backs the reliability of the 2225
with a three year warranty that includes all
parts and labor including the CRT. And
then beyond the "basic three years," offers
you a choice of five practical service plans
to further reduce your cost-of-ownership.

303

TEK

CHARACTERISTICS
All specifications are rated over all environmental
extremes except where noted.

VERTICAL SYSTEM
(Two Identical Channels)
Bandwidth (- 3 dB) and Rise Time
5 V to 5 mVld"

5'C to 35'C

o·c to 4O'C

50 MHz (7.0 ns)

40 MHz (8.8 ns)

Bandwidth in XlO MAG is reduced to 5 MHz
± 2O%.
Bandwidth Limit (- 3dB) - 5 MHz ± 20% (via
X10 MAG).
Deflection Factor Accuracy - (O°C to 4O°C)
5 mV to 5 V/div: ±3%. X10 Magnification: ±5%.
Uncalibrated Variable: Continuously variable between steps by at least 2.5: 1.
Step Response Aberrations - +5%, -5%,
5% pop (5 mV to 0.5 V/div).
Display Modes - CH 1, CH 2, CH 2 INVERT,
ADD, ALT, CHOP (500 kHz).
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - For signals
of 6 divisions or less, at least 10:1 at 20 MHz.
Input Rand C - 1 MO, 25 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - 400 V (dc + peak
ac) or 800 V pop to 10 kHz (ac and dc coupled).
Channel Isolation - > 100: 1 at 20 MHz.

HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Time Base - 0.05 ,.s to 0.5 s/div in 1-2-5 sequence. Maximum Sweep Rate: 5 ns/div (X10
magnification). Uncalibrated Variable: Continuously variable between steps by at least 2.5:1.

Sweep Accuracy
15'C to 35'C

o·c to 4O'C

Unmagnified X1

± 3%

± 4%

Magnified XS. X10

± 4%

±5%

Magnified X50

± 5%

± 8%

Sweep Linearity -

Specified over any 2 of the
center eight divisions. Unmagnified X1 : ±5%.
Magnified X5, X10: ±7%. Magnified X5O: ±9%.
Display Modes - X1 , Alternate Magnification,
and Magnified.
Alternate Magnification - Display alternates
between the unmagnified sweep (X1) and the
magnified sweep. Magnification Levels: X5, X10,
and X5O. Magnifier Registration: Expansion occurs at the center vertical graticule line.
Magnification Range - Magnification can be
performed over any portion of the Xl (unmagnified) sweep.

TRIGGERING
Trigger Sensitivity
Internal

Extemel

5 MHz

0.3 d"

40mV

50 MHz

1.0 d"

150mV

TV Trigger Sensitivity - TV Field: 1.0 div of
composite sync. TV Line: 0.3 div or 40 mV pop
external.

Trigger Operating Modes -

Peak-to-Peak
Automatic, Normal, TV Field, TV Line, Single
Sweep.
Trigger Sources - Internal CH 1, CH 2, Vert
Mode, Line, External, and External -.;.. 10.
Trigger Coupling - Ac, dc, HF REJ (attenuates
signals above 40 kHz), LF REJ (attenuates signals
below 40 kHz).

304

2200

50 MHz
DUAL TRACE OSCILLOSCOPE

SERIES

Variable Holdoff - Increases X1 Sweep holdoff time by at least 10:1.

ORDERING INFORMATION
2225 50 MHz Oscilloscope

$995

X-Y OPERATION
Deflection Factors - Same as the vertical

Include.: Two P6103 Xl0 voltage probes; operator
manual.

deflection system.
Accuracy - (O°C to +40°C) Y·Axis: ±3%.
X-Axis: ±5%.
Bandwidth - Y-Axis: Same as the vertical deflection system. X-Axis: Dc to 1.0 MHz.
Phase Difference - Between the X and Y axis.
Amplifiers: ±3° from dc to 50 kHz.

OPTIONS
Option 02 - Front panel cover and
accessory pouch.

CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT -

8 cm x 10 cm; internal graticule; GH
(P31) phosphor. Accelerating potential is 12.6 kV.
Z-Axis - 5 V causes noticeable modulation,
positive voltage decreases intensity. Usable
Range: Dc to 5 MHz.
Controls - IntenSity, Focus, Beam Find, Trace
Rotation.

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Amplitude Calibrator - Squarewave, 0.5 V
±5%, 1 kHz ±2O%.

POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Range - One line switch 95 to

C·SC Can1era Option 04.

Option 1K -

1<212 Portable Instrument cart.

+$330

Option 1R -

Rackmount Version.

+$150

Option 24 - POO62B X11X10 probe
(replaces P6103).
CONVERSION KIT
Reckmount Adaptor - Order 01&{)819-00

M1 M2 M3 -

M4 -

WARRANTY-PLUS SERVICE PLANS
SEE PAGE 497
2 Calibrations.
2 Years Service.
2 Years Service and 4 Calibrations.
5 Calibrations.
9 Calibrations + 2 Years Service.

M5 -

Maximum Power Consumption - 40 W
(60 VA).
Dc Power Operation - 12 V to 30 V with op-

Front Penel Cover end Acceuory Pouch Order 020-1514-00

ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY
Ambient Temperature - Operating: O°C to
4O°C (+32°F to + 104°F). Nonoperating: -55'C
to + 75°C (-67°F to + 167°F).
Altitude - Operating: 4500 m (15,000 feet).
1'C per 1,000 feet above 5,000 feet. Nonoperating: 15000 m (50,000 feet).
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each
of 3 major axes. 0.015 inch p.p displacement.
10 Hz to 55 Hz to 10 Hz in one minute sweeps.
Held for 10 minutes at 55 Hz in each of the 3
major axes (2.4 g 's at 55 Hz).
Humidity - Operating and Nonoperating: 95%
relative humidity. 5 cycles (120 hours) spec may
be referenced to MIL-T-288OOC paragraph modified 4.5.5.1.2.2.
Shock - Operating and Nonoperating: 30 g 's,
half-Sine, 11 ms duration, 3 shocks per axis each
direction, for a total of 18 shocks.
EMC - Meets Class B requirements per VDE
0871 for radiated and conducted emissions.
Safety - UL Listed, CSA Certified.

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dlmenelon.
In
mm

Weight'"
Net
Shipping

327
138

443
511

kll
6.5
8.5

+$350
$150

+$85
+$150
+$290
+$270
+$595

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

tional 1107, 1106, and 1105.

385

+$495

128 V/ 100 to 250 V operation.
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.

Width
With handle
Without handle
Height
Depth
With handle

+$55

Option 1C -

15.2
12.9
5.4
17.4
20.3

Ib
14.3
18.7

$55

Front Penel Cover -

Order 200-3397-00

$7.00

Acce. .ory Pouch -

Order 01&{)677-02

$48

Viewing Hood. (Collapsible) Order 01&0592-00
(Polarized) Order 01&010000
(Binocular) Order 01&056&00
Cerry C. .e -

Order 0I&0792-{)1

CAT UgItt F11ter1- (Clear) Order 337·2775{)1
1107 Dc Inverter - See page ':!IJ7.
1107 Mounting Kit - See page ':!IJ7.

See page ':!IJ6.
1105 Power Supply - See page ':!IJ6.
1106 Battery Peck -

P8103 -

$355
$1.95
$525

$50

Order 01&0765-00

P8082B -

$14
$50
$18.75

$1,285
$1,890

RECOMMENDED PROBES
lOX Probe.

$35

Switchable Attenuation Probe.

$175

lOX Subminiature Probe.
lOX Environmental Probe.
P8009 - l00X High Voltage Probe.
P8015 - l000X High Voltage Probe.
P8202A - lOX FET Probe.

$895
$880

P8021 -

Current Probe.

$430

PfI022 -

Current Probe.

$475

1101A -

Accessory Power Supply.

$425

A8302 -

Current Probe.

$585

A8303 -

Current Probe.

$1,070

P8130 -

$130

P8OO8 -

$240

AM 503 -

Current Probe Amplifier.

A8901 Ground IlOletion Monitor See page 478.
A8902B Voltage IlOletor C-5C C-7 K212 -

See page 479.

RECOMMENDED CAMERAS
Option 04. See page 445.
Option 02. See page 448.
RECOMMENDED CARTS
For on·site mobility. See page 461 .

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

$195

$1,125
$850
$1,795
$495
$595
$330

TEK

IMPACT RESISTANT PACKAGING
RACKMOUNT ADAPTOR KITS

2200
SERIES

Added Value for Your 2200 Series Oscilloscope

Rackmount Adaptor
Standard 19 Inch Mount
Rack Depth Extenders
Easy Assembly
Rack Height Only 5.14 Inches

The low cost rack adaptor provides the
means to rackmount the high performance
high value 2200 Series oscilloscope family.
The rackmount is very space efficient,
requiring only 5.14 inches of rack height.
Rack extenders are provided to allow
mounting to virtually any depth rack main
frame. A mounting hole is provided for a
BNC connector to route the Z-axis input to
the front face of the rack. All hardware is
supplied for complete mounting into your
mainframe.

Travel Line Package
Impact Resistant Packaging
Impact Protection
Cord Wrap

A front panel protective cover and an accessory pouch for carrying probes and documentation is also included, plus a convenient
carrying strap for hands free operation and
transport.
The Travel Line Package is available for the
2235/2236 and 2220/~. It can be ordered
at the time of purchase or as a field retrofit
kit.

Pouch and Cover
Carrying Strap

Now give your 2200 Series instrument the
added protection often necessary when
used in rough environments. This package
provides protection from impacts along the
front and rear of the instrument. The rear
bumper is designed to provide a wider
base to set the instrument on and reduces
the potential of tip over when standing vertically. The rear also has integrated in it a
power cord wrap.
The high quality rubber moldings offer long
life and are resistant to cracking and becoming brittle with age. This composition
provides excellent desk/bench and inclined
plane grab, so there is no worry about instrument slippage.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Travel Line Pecke"e - Order Option 33 for
specific instrument.
(223512236) Includes rubber mOlding, accessory pouch, front panel cover, carrying strap.
(2220/2230) Includes rubber molding, carrying
strap.

Kits are available for all 2200 Series products. It can be ordered at any time and is
customer installable. For the 2220 and 2230
Digital Storage Oscilloscopes the kit also
provides access for the optional GPIB or
RS-232C interface connections for automated systems.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimension.

Width
Mount Width
Height
Depth"

483
464

Weight ...

'r Does

$200
$150

Travel Line Pecke"e Converalon Kits Includea: Replacement cabinet and rear cover with the
rubber moldings installed.
(2213/A, 22151A, 2235) Order 040-118&00
$280
(2236) Order 040-118HlO
$280
(2220/2230) Order 040-1202-00
$110

18.3
5.1
18.1

131

458
kg

Net. Kit
Net. Additional to
instrument mounl

In
19.0

1.5

3.2

1.6

not Include IJxtenders.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Reckmount Adaptor Kit Includea: Rackmount depth extenders, all mounting
hardware, labels, instruction manual.
(2213/A, 22151A, 2235) Order 01&016&00
$115
(2235 Opt 01) Order 01&0033-00
$170
(2220/2230) Order 01&1003-00
$130
(2236) Includes DMM connector.
Order 01&ool5{)()
$255

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
BNC Femele to BNC Femele Connector Order 103-0070-00

50 0 RF Coaxlel Ceble - Order012{)117-OO

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

$6.00

$17

305

TEK

POWER ACCESSORIES FOR
PORTABLE OSCILLOSCOPES

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
DI ....n.lon.

Width
Height
Depth

165

6.5
9.8
8.5

250

216

Welght._

Net

8.8

19.4

ORDERING INFORMATION
1105 Power Supply

$1,690

Include.: Dc power cord, 915 mm (36 in), for exlernal
de input (t6HX)94«l); instruction manual (07(}147g.o1).
OPTION
Option 01 - 2ro v Operation.
NC
Include.: 2.1 m (7 It) lee power cable (16HX198«l).

Shown (from left) are the 1105 Power Supply, the 1106 Battery Pack, and the 1107 Dc Inverter.

Portable Power

1106 Sattery Pack

11 05 Power Supply

CHARACTERISTICS
Tektronix power accessories offer true
field-use-portability and operating freedom
at service and maintenance sites where
conventional ac power sources are not
available. They let your scopes go where
you need them-and have enough power
for your testing and troubleshooting tasks.
The following table outlines the preferred
power accessory (or accessory combination) for Tektronix portable oscilloscopes.
Note that for many instruments, the 1105
Power Supply is a compatible alternate dc
power source.
Recom....nded

In.trumen!
221 3·', 2213A· ', 2215", 2215A· ' ,

2220"', 2225· ', 223l" ',
2235 Option on 2235· ', 2236" ',

Power Ace••aory
110711 100 fflert... Battery
Pack Conalation 01
1107 Dc nvert... with
Audery Dc S 1.2

;>0.85

a varlabla de supply

WIthout B

IoBd on the

output.

ENVIRONMENTAL
The 1107 Dc Inverter meets environmental requirements of MIL-T-288OOC for Type III, Class, 3,
Style C equipment with humidity and temperature
requirements defined in paragraphs 3.9.2.2,
3.9.2.3, and 3.9.2.4, except Electromagnetic
Compatibility.
Ambient Temperature - Operating: - 15°C to
+55 ° C (+5°F to +131°F) . Nonoperating :
-62°C to +85°C (-80°F to + 185°F).
Altitude - Operating: To 4600 m (15,000 It).
Maximum operating temperature decreases 1°C
for each 300 m (1,000 It) above 1500 m (5,000 It).
Nonoperating: To 15250 m (50,000 It).
Humidity - Operating and Nonoperating: 5 cycles (120 hours) referenced to MIL-T-288OOC par
4.5.5.1.2.2. for Type III, Class 3 Instruments.
Electromagnetic Compatibility - Meets radiated emission requirements per VDE 0871
Class B, Meets MIL-STD-461B for the following
tests: Part 4 (CE01 , CE03, and CS02); Part 5
(CS06 and RS02); and Part 7 (CS01, RE02, and
RSOO). Conducted emissions measurements are
performed on the dc input power cord.
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each
of three major axes at a total displacement of
0.025 inch p-p (4 g at 55 Hz), with frequency varied from 10 Hz to 55 Hz to 10 Hz in one minute
sweeps. Held 10 minutes at 55 Hz in each of the
three major axes.

Shock - Operating and Nonoperating: 50 g, 1/2
sine, 11 ms duration, three shocks per axis each
direction, for a total of 18 shocks.
Note: The following 1107 Dc Inverter and oscilloscope combinations meet or exceed MIL-T28800C Class 3 requirements for vibration and
shock when attached together with deSignated
mounting hardware:
1107/2445A
1107l110612445A
1107/2465A
110712335
1107/2455A
1107/2336
1107/110612467
1107/2337
1107/110612465A
Transportation Package Vibration - Meets
the limits of National Safe Transit Association Test
Procedure 1A-B-1.
Transportation Package Drop - Meets the
limits of National Safe Transit Association Test
Procedure 1A-B-2 with a 914 mm (36 inch) drop.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dlmenalona

Width
Height
Depth

276
119
84

10.9
4.7
3.3

Weight",

Net

1.6

3.5

Shipping

1.8

4.0

ORDERING INFORMATION
1107 Dc Inverter

$525

Include.: 559 mm (22 in). de power cord (16HX)95-00);
instruction manual (070-5056-00).

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
OSCIUOSCOPE MOUNTING KITS
1108 - (2445A. 2465A, and 2467)
Order 016{)79Hx)
1107 - (2445A and 2465A)
Order 016{)783-00
1107 - (2335. 2336. 2336YA and 2337)
Order 016{)78&OO
1107 - (2200 Series) Cannot be used with
Travel Line Package. Order 016{)78&OO
1107 - (223512236. 2220/223))
Order 016{)78&OO

$50
$50

$SO
$50
$50

307

TEK

EDUCATIONAL PRODUCTS
AND MATERIALS

TEKTRONIX IN THE CLASSROOM
To take the guess work out of classroom
equipment selection, pages 308 and 310
describe test instruments and other classroom materials that many schools and training facilities, worldwide, are using. Listed
below are instruments from the Portable
Oscilloscope group and TM 500 Series.
These units have been designed to be "student proof" and reliable. You can count on
them to withstand the intensive use test
equipment receives in the lab, day after day.

EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
Lab Stations
Tektronix is often asked by educators to
recommend equipment for teaching electrical and electronic theories and concepts.
We have worked with many schools over
the years to develop effective lab stations.
We suggest the following configurations of
test and measurement equipment from the
Portable Oscilloscope group and TM 500
Series. For a complete description of the
oscilloscopes listed see pages 294, 300,
303, and 330. TM 500 equipment is fully
described on pages 404 through 438.
InterProducta

2225

2Zl5 ex 2245
2236 ex 2246
2220 ex 2ZlO
TM503
TM504

PS503A
FG503
OM501A
OM502A
PG501
DC504A"'

Baglnnlng
Laba

....
....
....
....
....

SG502-'

madla'a Advanced
Lab,
Lab,

....
....

....
....
....
....
....
....

....
....

....

....
....
....
....

....

Advanced
Olgltal
Lab,-'

Intermediate Lab Station with optional plug-ins.

.-_7'"'""'_......P....;.;:RIMERS

....
....
....
....
....
....
....

.._,.
.........
...-

-, A prfm8r. an -'ntroduction to DigItal Storage- (46-W-6051)
can b6 uSBd to intr0cJuc6 or l8vi6w digital concepts. It is
available from the Tektronix Sales Offic6.
-, Optional.

Warranty IService
The recommended oscilloscopes come with
a three year warranty. After the warranty period you can still get replacement parts,
when they're needed, because service documentation is complete and accurate. There
are also a variety of service options available
which can give you years of minimum-cost
maintenance: 1 Service is available through
your local Tektronix Sales Office. The overall
cost of ownership over the life of these instruments is excellent. See pages 494-497
for further information, contact your Tektronix
Sales Representative or call the National
Marketing Center at 1-800-426-2200.

Safety
Having safe equipment in the classroom is especially important when there are inexperienced equipment operators. The oscilloscopes recommended for classroom use are
listed by UL, CSA (Canada), VDE (Germany)
and have been approved for use under the
building codes of major municipalities.

308

XYZs Primer set for quantity purchases.

For basic analog oscilloscope orientation,
we recommend the following equipment.
This equipment can also be used as part of
the lab stations for beginning and intermediate electrical, electronics, and phYSics lab
courses.
• Oscilloscope (2225, 2235, or 2245)
• Basic Training Lab, CRS101 (includes
CRS10 Power Unit, plus the CRS30 General Purpose Board)
• Primer, XYZs of Oscilloscopes (quantity
package 062-6731-{lO)
• Video Tape, 2200 Series Operation
(068-0146-00)
• Poster (46-TIA-528)
See the video tapes listed on the next page
for supplementary oscilloscope programs
for beginning students.

Shown above: ABCs of Probes, XYZs of Scopes, An Introduction to Digtal Storage.

Single complimentary copies are available
from your local Tektronix Sales Office.
An Introduction to Digital Storage - Request
46-W-6051
The ABCs of Probes - Request 6O-W-6Q53
XVZs of Using an Oscilloscope - Request
46-AX-4758·2
(Instructor's Aid) - Request 46-W·5169-2
(Workbook) - Request 46-W·517D-2
XVZs of Using an Oscilloscope Quantity
Package - Includes: 50 primers; one instructor's aid, and one student workbook. (The student workbook may be reproduced for educational use without permission from Tektronix.)
Order 062-673HlO
$120

TEK

EDUCATIONAL
MATERIALS

GRADUATE CLASSES AND RESEARCH
Your Tektronix Sales Representative can
consult with you about recommendations
for advanced classes in special technical
areas, or to discuss special equipment requirements for research projects.
SPECIFIC TEKTRONIX PRODUCT
TRAINING
Specific product training seminars can be
held at your site or at nearby Tektronix facilities. For specific arrangements contact
Customer Training at 1-800-225-7802.
POSTER

VIDEO TAPES
The following list of video tapes is rated for
beginning , intermediate or advanced
students.
Beginning - Assumes little knowledge of electronics , electronic terms or related subjects. A beginning audience would be beginning physics,
electronics , general science or vocational
classes.
Intermediate - Assumes a basic knowledge of
electronics, electronic terms, and related subjects, or introduces specialized concepts, such
as frequency domain measurement. Suitable for
second year, physics or electronics classes or advanced science classes.
Advanced - Assumes a specialized knowledge
of electronics, electronic terms, and related sub·
jects. Suitable for advanced classes, specifically
those addressing the subject.
2200 Series Operation, Part I (Beginning) Addresses operation of the 2213 and 2215 Portable Oscilloscopes. Follows the format of the XYZs
of Oscilloscopes primer. (26 min).

2200 Series Operation, Part II (Intermediate)

The full color poster (2 ft x 3 ft) shows a 2215A oscilloscope front panel with call-outs of functions.

The poster follows the XYZs of Oscillcr
scopes primer (46-TIA-528) format. Complimentary copies are available from your local Tektronix Sales Office.
APPLICATION NOTES

- Covers operation of the 2235 and 2236 Oscilloscopes. Covers the differences and additional
features of the 2235 over the 2213. Additional features of the 2235 are demonstrated in detail using
typical analog and digital waveforms (18 min).

2245/2246 GPS Operation (1986, Intermediate) - Front panel controls and typical applica·
tions using those controls are demonstrated. Advanced features section makes use of signals
from the CRS101 Basic Training Lab. 22 min).

Boolean Logic, A Lighthearted Look At
(1983, Intermediate) - The logical relationships between sets (AND, OR, NOT) is developed
in a nontechnical fashion using mimes (8 min).

Color Video Concepts (1979, Advanced) Explains basic principles of color television. Describes and illustrates relevant characteristics of
human vision, light colorimetry. Explains primary
and complementary colors. Describes and illustrates camera operation, receiver operation, color
cathode-ray tubes. Demonstrates vectorscope
operation (38 min).

Monochrome Video Concepts (1981, Intermediate) - Explains and graphically demon·
strates concepts of monochrome video transmission and reception (30 min).

Ink Jet Copier Concepts (1983, Beginning)

Application Notes are available for many
basic measurement concepts. Please refer
to the list on page 277. New Application
Notes are available throughout the year.
Check with your local Tektronix Sales Engineer or call the National Marketing Center
for new or existing complimentary copies.

- Provides an overview of operation of ink jet
color graphics copiers. Discusses subtractive color and presents the functional parts of the copier
system and how they interrelate (10 min).

Fundamentals of Oscilloscopes: A Functional Overview (1986, Intermediate) - DeSigned
for students with prior electronics knowledge
and/or some familiarity with oscilloscopes. Functional blocks and their relation to front panel controls are graphically illustrated in four parts: Overview, Vertical Section, Horizontal Section, and
Cathode Ray Tube (15 min).

Oscillo-What? What Is An Oscilloscope
(1986, Beginning) - Explains what an analog
oscilloscope does, how and where it is used. Introduces digitizing oscilloscopes (18 min).

Spectrum Analyzer Concepts (Intermediate)
- Contrasts time domain and frequency domain
frames of reference. Describes effects of spectrum analyzer construction on performance. Defines terms associated with spectrum analysis.
Demonstrates typical applications (12 min).
AM Measurement (1978, Advanced) - Explains basic amplitude modulation parameters.
Contrasts time domain and frequency domain
measurement techniques. Discusses essential
formulas and calculations. Demonstrates measurements (9 min).
FM Measurement (1979, Advanced) - Examines basic frequency modulation parameters,
their appearance in the frequency domain, and
their measurement with a spectrum analyzer
(10 min).

Pulsed RF Measurement (1979, Advanced)
Investigates basic pulsed radio frequency
characteristics and their measurement in both
time and frequency domains (10 min).

Operating the 2230 Digital Storage Oscilloscope (1986, Intermediate) - 2230 operation
is demonstrated by showing front panel controls
and each measurement mode using typical analog and digital signals (35 min).

ORDERING INFORMATION
Video tapes are available in "I. inch U'MATlC, Beta, or
VHS. Order any tape as follows:

068-xxxx-OO - "I. inch U·MATIC.
068-xxxx-Ol - Beta.
068-xxxx-02 - Beta II.
068-xxxx-03 - Beta III.
068-xxxx-04 - VHS.
2200 Series Opel'lltlon (Part I) Order 068-?lean
Trigger of the Tektronix CounterlTlmer/
Trigger optioned 2445A and 2465A. See
page 278.

TRAINING LABS

The circuitry on this board generates a repeating series of 16-bit wide digital pattern,
words . These patterns can be single
stepped or driven by the 1 MHz clock. A
series length can be set in multiples of 256
bits to a maximum of 4096. Both the starting 'and ending addresses c~n be set. in
256 bit increments, from their respective
ends of the series.
The patterns generated on this ~d are
contained in EPROMs, they are entirely arbitrary and can be changed by installing a different set of EPROMs. An additional circuit
provides a variable glitch at a 1 kHz rate. It
is useful in demonstrating glitch capture features of advanced digital oscilloscopes.
CRS72 Digital Fault Board
The Digital Fault Board was designed a.s a
demonstration aid for the 2467 OSCilloscope , which has a microchannel-plate
CRT. Most oscilloscopes will not be able to
display the signal faults found on this
board. It will be helpful primarily for teaching the use of the 2467 in training labs.

CRSI0IandCRS50. CRS70. CRS72. CRS90signalboards.

CRS10 Power Unit
The CRS10 provides an integrated source
of signals to teach concepts such as rise
time, pulse width, frequency, digital troubl~
shooting, and video measurements. It IS
suitable for beginning through advanced
courses in electrical engineering, electronics, engineering technology, or physics.
It can be invaluable for both laboratory
demonstrations and student lab stations. It
can be useful for in-house product training,
especially in oscilloscopes . It has easily
accessed test-points pins to reliably capture and measure the signals.
The Power Unit consists of a power/clock
board, powered from an external transformer. The transformer· 1 provides 24 V ac
centertapped , below the voltage levels
considered hazardous by U.L. The transformer, power/clock board and one o!her
board (several are available, see follOWing)
are stored and operated in a tray in the
carrying case. There is additional storage
room below the tray.
The power/clock board converts the transformer voltage to three regulated dc voltages (+ 12, -12, +5). Any combination of
these voltages is used to power a Signal
board. The power section also provides a
number of line related power supply signals
for observation.

The clock section provides three fixed crystal
controlled digital signals (10 MHz, 5 MHz,
1 MHz) and a variable rate triangular waveform. All clock and power signals are connected to the signal board through a 1(}-pin
harmonica connector and jumper cable.
CRS30 General Purpose Board
This board is designed to exercise most oscilloscope functions by providing a variety of
digital and analog signals.
Digital signals are available at. ECl, TTL,.and
CMOS levels. Digital signals Include logIC, a
variable pulse train, a low frequency squarewave, a variable stairstep generator (0 to A
converter) and fast trigger pulses.
Analog signals include a sinewave with
glitch, a voltage to frequency converter, a
waveform whose frequency, amplitude and
slope are set by one control, and a low frequency triangle. All signals are brought out to
probe test points around the board edge.
CRSSO Video Signal Board
This board is designed primarily for understanding video measurement signals and
techniques. The board generates an NTSC
interlaced video signal which demonstrates
TV triggering capabilities of ~scillosco~s. It
will also make pictures on a video monitor. It
should be extremely valuable for facilities
that do not have NTSC generators available.

The board induces timing errors in its circuits. These errors replicate timing errors
that can be found in real-life situations, but
in a more repeatable form. The types of errors include noise and timing-margin violations , clock corruption , and faulty state
transitions.
The six separate circuits on this board are
both ECl and TTL.
CRS90 Builder's Board
The Builder's Board has a grid pattem of
holes, and access to the power supply and
signals provided by the power/clock board. It
gives the student a simple method of building circuits. This board is useful in labs ~re
soldering skills are taught as part of baSIC circuit building and measurement course.

ORDERING INFORMATION
CRS101 Basic Training Lab
Includes: CRSl0 Power Unit; CRS3l General
PIJpose Board; manual.
CRS10 Power Unit"1
Includea: Instruction manual.
Each of the folowing boards reqlire a CRSl0
Power Unit for operation.
CRS30 General Purpose Board
CRS50 Video Signal Board
CRS70 Digital Pattern Board
CRS72 Digital Fault Board
CRS90 Buikler's Board
In8trvctlon Manuel - Order 07~HXl

$385
$255

$200
$115
$180
$225
$135
$25

., For i'IformBlion IIbout ntrJmationlJl trBnsfomltlf sVlllablfty lor
/hs CRSI0. oonl.lJct you- TIII 100 dB at dc,
80 dB at 60 Hz with 1 kG imbalance.
Normal-Mode Rejection - >30 dB at 60 Hz
increasing 20 dB per decade to 2 kHz.
Response < 1 s plus range step time
«1 S/step).
Input R - 10 MG ±2%.
Maximum Input Voltage ± 1000 V (dc +
peak ac) between HI and La inputs or between
HI and chassis. ±5OO (dc + peak ac) between
La and chassis (La Roating Voltage).
ACVOLTAGE
Ranges 2 V, 20 V, 200 V, 700 V,
(autoranging).
Accuracy Within 0.5% of reading,
± 10 counts, 40 Hz to 500 Hz.
Response Time - <5 s plus range step time
«1 s/step).
Input Impedance - 10 MG paralled by = 70 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - 700 V RMS if sinusoidal. ± 1000 V (dc + peak ac) between HI and
La inputs or between HI and chassis. ±5OO V (dc
component) between HI and La inputs.
±5OO V (dc + peak ac) between La and chassis
(La Roating Voltage).
RESISTANCE
Ranges - 2 kG, 20 kG, 200 kG, 2000 kG.
Accuracy - Within 0.6% of reading ± 3 counts.
Response Time - <5 s plus range step time
«1 s/step).
Maximum Input Voltage ± 100 V (dc +
peak ac) between HI and La inputs. 500 V (dc +
peak ac) between La and chassis (La Roating
Voltage).

311

TEK

5 MHz
OSCILLOSCOPE

200 SERIES
MINISCOPES

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Amplitude Calibrator - 0.3 V accurate ± 1%
from 20°C to 30°C ± 2% from - 15°C to + 55°C.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Range - 90 V ac to 132 V ac or
180 Vac to 250 Vac.
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption - 17 W.
External Dc Source - +9 V to +32 V.
Charge Time - At least 16 hours for full charge.
Operating Time - Internal NiCad batteries provide = 1.6 hours of scope and DMM operation,
10 hours of DMM alone operation, or two hours of
scope alone operation at maximum trace intensity
and 20°C to 25°C operating temperature.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Ambient Temperature - Operating: - 15°C to
+ 55°C (Oscilloscope), O°C to + 55°C (DMM).
Nonoperating: - 25°C to + 75°C.
Altitude - Operating: To 9000 m (30,000 tt)
maximum, decrease maximum temperature by
1°C/ looo tt from 5,000 ft to 30,000 ft . Nonoperating: To 15000 m (50,000 ft) maximum.
Vibration - 15 minutes along each of the 3 major axes, 0.025 in (0.06 cm) pop displacement
(4 g's at 55 Hz) 10 Hz to 55 Hz to 10 Hz in 1 minute cycles.
Humidity - Nonoperating: 5 cycles (120 hours)
of MIL-E-164OOG. Omit freezing and vibration and
allow a post-test drying period at + 25°C, ± 5°C
and 20% to 80% relative humidity.
Shock - Operating and Nonoperating: 30 g's,
'12 sine, 11 ms duration. Total of 12 shocks.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dlm.nalona
Width . WIth handle
Height
Dep th, handle not extended
Dep th, handled extended

W.lghl _

mm
236
112
37 1

458

48
7.8

44
14.6
18.0
Ib

10 6
17.1

ORDERING INFORMATION
305DMM/Oscilloscope

$2,765

Includes: Two P6149A lOX probes; carrying case
(Ol&040HXl); carrying case cover (200-226().00); carrying strap assembly (34&2 up to
twioe th8lnd1c4ted limit for crest factor of fIvtI.

'f ACCIKIIC)'

Settling Time - 1.5 s to 0.1% of reading .
Maximum Input Current - 2 A RMS or 3 A
peak on any scale (fuse and diode protection).
RESISTANCE
Ranges - 1 kO to 10 MO full scale in five
ranges .
Resolution - 1 0 on 1 kO scale.
Accuracy - For 25°C +5°C,

DI .......ton.

Width
Height

133
76

Ikll

0.5% :t 3 counts

Depth

226

5.2
3.0
8.9

10 kllto I MIl

0.5% :t I count

10 MIl

Welght_
Net (without accessories)

1.7
3.9

Shipping

3.7
8.6

DMM
Provides true RMS readings of voltage and
current.
DC AND AC VOLTAGE
Range - 0.1 V to 1000 V full scale in five
ranges.
Resolution - 100 p.V at 0,1 V full scale.
Accuracy In Dc Mode - For +25°C ±5°C,
Range-'
:t 0.1% 01 reading :t 3 counts. Temp coef is
(:to.015% of reading +0.04% of ful scatey'c

0.1 V

:t 0.1% 01 reading :t I count. Temp coel is
(:to.OI% of reading +0.01% of ful scatey' c

10 V and :to.15% of reading :t I count. Temp coef is
100 V
(:to.015% of reading +0.01% of ful scatey' c
1000 V

:t 0.2% of reading :t 1 count. Temp coef is
(:to.02% of reading +0.01% of ful scatey' c

" FIJI scsJe.

Accuracy In RMS Mode - For 25°C ±5°.
Temperature coefficient (± 0.05% of reading
+0.1% of full scale)/oC.
WIthIn % of IMCIng ~ ±5 COI.IIta"
"-nge
Dc

40 Hz to 4 kHz

4 kHz to 40 kHz

2.5%

1.5%

3.5%

1 V, 10V, & 100 V

2'l(,

1000 V

2'l(,

0.1 V

limit IncnHISBS lintJarly for crest fBC/or >2 up to
twioe IndIc4ttKIllmlt for crest factor of fIvtI.

' f ACCIKIIC)'

Input Resistance - 10 MO.
Input Capacitance - 150 pF on 0,1 V to 10 V
ranges, 100 pF on 100 V and 1000 V ranges.
Settling Time - Dc: 1.5 s to 0.1% of reading .
RMS: 2 s to 1% of reading,
Maximum Input Voltage
Dc Coupled
Ac Coupled
"-nge
0.1 V to 10V

500 V"

100 V to 1000 V

!OJ V"

., Dc

!OJ V"

% of Raadlng

1% :tl count

Settling Time -

Two seconds ±2 counts.
READOUT
Number of Digits - 3 '/2 digits plus decimal
point and sign.
Display Size - 1 cm high by 4 cm wide (five
characters).
Over-Range Capability - At least 200% of full
scale.
Over-Range Indication - Displays scrambled
characters.

ORDERING INFORMATION
213 Miniscope/DMM

$2,900

Include.: Integral probe, batteries, viewing hood
(016{)199-01): carrying case (01&0512-00): two alligator
clip to banana jack test leads (red 012-0015-00, black
012-0014-00): neck strap (34&{)104-OO): two power ~ne
fuses (159-ooeo-oo): identification tag (334-2614-00):
identification tag (000-7983-00) : service manual
(070-1481-00): operator manual (070-1400-00).
Option 01 - 180 V ac to 250 V ac (48 Hz to
~~or~

Includ •• : In addition to above , power line plug
(161-0077-01).

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Alligator Clip Kit - A pair of alligator clips
that allow connecting the probe and ground
lead to large (up to
in) conductor. Includes:
red clip (01~): yeIr:ffl clip (015-023J-OO):
6-32 to probe adaptor (103-0051-01).
Order 015-0231-00

$28

Probe Tip. (To BNC Panel Connector
Adaptor) Order 013--7983-OO); identification tag (334-2614-00); carrying strap (346{)104-OO);
service manual (070-5053-00) ; operator manual
(070-5052-00).

OPTIONS

Option 01 - For 220 to 250 V (48 Hz to
52Hz).
Include.: Batteries.
Option 02 - For SOV to 110V (48Hz to
52Hz).
Include.: Batteries.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
lOX Attenuator Package -

A slip-on tip to
provide lower circuit loading (4.4 MIl....20 pF)
and higher maximum input voltage 1000 V
(de + peak ac) includes: 10X attenuator
(01(){)37S-01); pincher tip (013-0071-00); flex
tip (20&006000); banana tip (134-0013-00); IC
adaptor (20&0203-00). Order 01(){)37S-01
Alligator Clip Kit - A pair of alligator clips
that allow connecting the probe (or optional
10X attenuator) and ground lead to large "III in)
conductors. Includes: &32 10 probe adaptor
(103-0051-01); red clip (015-0229-00); yellow
clip (015-omOO). Order 015-0231-00
Probe Tip. (To BNC Panel Connector
Adaptor) Order 013- 15s

Variable Persistence

.225cmJ".

> 15.

Fast Tran.fer

135cmJ,.s

> 15.

Variable Persistence

1.35 cmJ,.s

> 15.

Reduced Seen"

6 x 8 divIsJon; 0.9 an/d/vfsIon.
., TrIes8 timtlS are st full.storsd disp/By Intsnsity; they csn b8
6JCtsndtKJ st lesst 25 times using reduced Intsnsity In Save
'r Center

Disp/By Mode.
'J

Center 8 x 10 dfvis/on; 0.45 an/dfvis/on.

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Amplitude Calibrator
Output Voltage

0.3 V

1% +O'C to +40'C

Output Current

:l) rnA

2% +20'C to +:l)'C

Frequency

",1 kHz

Vertical Signal Output - CH 1 vertical signal is
dc to at least SO MHz and "",25 mV/div terminated into 50 0, and =SO mV/div terminated into
1 MO.
Gate Outputs - Positive gates from both time
bases (=5 V).
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Range - Quick change, line voltage selector provides 110 V, 115 V, 120 V, 220 V,
230 V, and 240 V ac, each ± 10%. Option 07 is
12 V dc to 24 V dc.
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption 100 W at
115 V and 60 Hz.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Ambient Temperature - Operating: -15°C to
+55°C . Nonoperating : -55°C to + 75°C .
Forced air ventilation is provided.
Altitude Operating: To 4600 m (15,000 It);
maximum allowable ambient temperature decreased by 1°C/1ooo It from 5,000 It to 15,000 It.
Nonoperating: To 15000 m (SO,OOO It).
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each
of the three axes, 0.06 cm (0.025 in) Pop displacement (4 g's at 55 Hz) 10 Hz to 55 Hz to 10 Hz in
1 minute cycles.
Humidity - Operating and Nonoperating: 95%,
5 cycles (120 hours) . Referenced to MIL-T28800C, par. 4.5.5.1.2.2.
Shock - Operating and Nonoperating: 30 g's,
'12 sine, 11 ms duration, 2 shocks per axis in each
direction for a total of 12 shocks.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dlmenalona
Width, with handle

mm
3:l)

In
13.1

Height. without pouch

159

6.2

Depth. with panel cover
Depth, handle extended

550

21 .7
23.8

597

Weight",

Net, without panel cover

11 .8

26.0

Net. with panel cover
and accessories

13.5

29.8

Shipping

18.8

41.5

or accessories

See ordering Information on next page,

TEK

400

STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE!
DMM SYSTEM

SERIES

DM44
Differential TlmelDMM Option for 466
3 '/2 Digit LED Display
Time Intervals Accurate to 1 %
Frequency Accurate to 2%
Dc Voltage Measurements Accurate to 0.1 %
Resistance Accurate to 0.3 %
Temperature From -55°C to +150°C

One percent timing measurements were
never this easy! With the OM 44 Option time
intervals can be read directly from the 31/2
digit LED screen. Simply use the Delay Time
control and the ~Time Dial to superimpose
the end of the interval on the beginning.
Then read its differential time or frequency
from the 31f2 digit LED panel. It's that sim·
pie. Time intervals are accurate to 1% and
the frequency of periodic waveforms can be
read out with 2% accuracy by simply pushing the 1ITime button.
Compare the OM 44 sequence with the
measurement technique you may now be
using. Calculating the interval from the CRT
may take 10 times as long.
Voltage , resistance, and temperature measurements are also much easier with a
OM 44. It measures dc voltage with 0.1%
accuracy, resistance with 0.3% accuracy,
and temperature from -55°C to + 150°C.
Previously, you would have needed a separate DMM and digital thermometer in addition to your oscilloscope. Now, these features are combined in one small,
inexpensive, integral package.

CHARACTERISTICS
TIMING MEASUREMENTS
Differential Time Delay Accuracy
+1S'C to +3S'C

- 1S'C 10 +SS'C

Within 1% of reading
± 1 count

Within 2.5% of reading
± 1 count

, /TIme Accu ..cy

DC VOLTAGE
Ranges - 0 to 200 mY, 0 to 2 V, 0 to 20 V, 0 to
200 V, 0 to 1.2 kV.
Resolution - 100 p.V.
Accuracy - Within 0.1% of reading ± 1 count.
Input Resistance - 10 ~ for all ranges. Removal of an internal strap increases resistance to
"" 1000 ~ on 200 mV and 2 V ranges.
Normal-Mode Rejection Ratio At least
60 dB at 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
Common-Mode RejecUon Ratio - At least
100 dB at dc, 80 dB at 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
Recycle Rate - ",,3.3 measurements/so
Response Time - Within 0.5 S.
Maximum Safe Input Voltage - ± 1200 V de
+ peak ac between + and common inputs or
between + and chassis. ±SOO V (dc + peak ac)
common floating voltage between common and
chassis.
RESISTANCE
Ranges - 0 to 200 0, 0 to 2 kO, 0 to 20 kO, 0 to
200 kfl, 0 to 2 Mfl and 0 to 20 Mfl.
Resolution - 0.1 fl.
Accuracy

ORDERING INFORMATION
466 Storage OscillOSCOpe

'I.

ual (07(}2037{XJ).

466 OM 44 Storage Oscilloscope/DMM $8,675
Includel: Same as 466 plus, one pair test leads
(003 -0120 -00) ; one P6430 Temperature Probe
(01~); service manual (07(}2036-01); operator
manual (07(}479&OO).

OPTIONS
Option 01 - Delete OM 44 Temperature
Probe (466 OM 44 only).
Option 04 - EMC Capability.
Option 05 - TV sync Separator (Provides
Triggering on TV Reid).
Option 07 - Extemal Dc Operation (Not for
OM 44).

Within 0.25% ± 1 count
+ probe resistance

2 1dI. 20 1dI. 200 1dI, 2 MIl

Within 0.25% ± 1 count

20 MIl

Within 0.3% ± 1 count

high ambient light. Order 37S-0726{)1

Protective Cover -

200 II through 200 IdI ranges

Within 1 s

VIewing Hoodl -

2 MIl ttvough 20 MIl ranges

Within 5 s

(Folding) Order 01&0092{XJ
(Folding Binocular) Order 016-0566-00
(Polarized Collapsible) Order 016{)100-Q0

120 V RMS

Within 3.5% of reading
± 1 count

$1,285
$1,890

$80
$28
$14
$18.75
$50

Not for OM 44.

Order 016-0676{XJ

$445

A8902B Voltage Iiolator - For floating
measurements see page 479 for complete de$1,795

scription.

OM 44
Temperetu..

P8430
Tip Temperetu..

Accurecy (Probe
Cellbreled 10 OM 44)

+15"Cto
+35"C

- S ' C to + 150"C

±2"C

See pages 277 and 464.
P8105A - lOX Probe.

- 15"C to
+S"C

_ S oC to + 125"C
+ 125"C to + 150"C

±3'C
± 4'C

RECOMMENDED CAMERA
C-30BP Option 01 General Purpose

RECOMMENDED PROBES
$93

Camera. Includes 016-0301-01 mounting adaptorl corrector lens. See page 450.

$1,480

RECOMMENDED CART
For on-site portability. See page 461 .

$330

- 1S'C 10 +5S'C

+1S'C 10 +3S'C
Within 2% of reading
± 1 count

+$330

Waterproof vinyl.

Order 016-036&00

Rack Adaptor -

TEMPERATURE USING P6430 PROBE
Range - -ssoC to + 1SOoC.
Accuracy

+$385

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
1106 - Battery Pack (used with Option 07).
(See page :1)6.)
1105 - Battery Power Supply (see page :1)6).
Mellh Filter - Improves display contrast in

Recycle Rate - ",,3.3 measurements/so
Response Time

Maximum Safe Input Voltage between + and common inputs.

- $90
+$220

INTERNATIONAL POWER PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 - Universal Euro 220 V, 50 Hz.
Option A2 - UK 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A3 - Australian 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A4 - North American 240 V, 60 Hz.

Accurecy

Renge
20011

$7,940

Includel: Two P6105A probes; blue accessory pouch
(01&0535-02); clear pouch (OI6{)53].(Xl); CRT light filter
(337-1674-01) ; two 1 'I. A fuses (159-0016-00); one
A fuse (159-0042-00) ; ground wire adaptor
(134{XJ16{)1); viewing hood (01&0092-00); operator man-

K212 -

Modification kits for field conversion of existing 466s to
Option 07 or OM 44 equipped scopes are available.
These are typically more expensive than when the option
is ordered with the instrument. Contact your Tektronix
Sales Engineer, distributor, or representative for
information.

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Markatlng Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

319

Amplitude Calibrator - 0.5 V accurate ± 1%
from 20·C to 30 · C, ± 2% from - 15·C to

+55·C.

314

Industrial Control Systems
Biophysical Instrumentation
Communication Equipment Service

Combined function controls, color coding,
and functional front panel layout make the
314 easy to use. Probes mount on the side,
permitting an uncrowded front panel and
large CRT.
The 1 mV/div sensitivity is particularly useful
for measurement of transducer signals such
as those from magnetic recording heads.
An autoerase mode, with variable erase
period from 1 second to 5 seconds, enhances the ability of the 314 to make measurements on slowly changing analog signals such as those from a pressure transducer. Other applications for the 314 occur
in industrial control systems, biophysical instrumentation , communication terminals,
pas terminals, computer peripherals, and
communication systems.

See page 277 for available Application Notes.

CHARACTERISTICS

10 MHz at 1 mV/Dlv
100 ns/Dlv Sweep Rate With X10 Sweep
Magnifier
Stored Viewing Time to 4 Hours
Integrate Mode for Intensifying Fast Rise
Time, Low Repetition Rate Signals
Operates From Ac Line, 12 V Dc, or 24 V Dc
Small Size, Weighs = 4.7 kg (10.5Ib)

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS

The 10.5 pound, bistable storage 314 provides 1 mV/d'rv sensitivity at 10 MHz, with
a four hour viewing time. With long term
storage, you can use the 314 to monitor signal
lines where undesired transients are
suspected.
For fast rise time, low repetition rate signals,
an integrate mode increases the intensity of
the stored trace.
Compact size and operation from ac or
external dc source mean that the 314 will
easily go wherever you need a storage
oscilloscope.

320

VERTICAL SYSTEM
Bandwidth and Rise Time - Dc to at least
10 MHz. Rise time: 35 ns or less for a 4 div step
input. For ac coupling, the lower 3 dB point is
10 Hz or less.
Deflection Factor - 1 mV/div to 10 V/div (1-2-5
sequence), accurate ±3%. Uncalibrated: Continuously variable between steps to at least
25 V/div.
Display Modes - CH 1, CH 2 (normal or inverted), chopped, alternate, added, and X-Yo
Input Rand C - 1 Mfl paralleled by ",,47 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - Ac or dc coupled,
300 V (dc + peak ac).
Delay Line - Permits viewing leading edge of
displayed waveform.

HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Time Base - 1 p.s/div to 5 s/div. X10 magnifier
extends sweep rate to 100 ns/div.
Variable Time Control - Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps and to at least
12.5 s/div.
Time Base Accuracy. 1
Unmagnified

±3%
± 4%

1 I'sldN to 0 2 sid"

o5 sid" to 5 sid"
Magnified

±5%
± 4%
±5%

50 msldrv to 0 5 sldrv
0.5 I'sld", to 20 msld"

o1 !'sid'" and 0.2 !'sid"
. , Center 8 dWisions.

TRIGGERING
Modes - Normal (sweep generator requires a
trigger to generate a sweep). Automatic (minimizes trigger adjustment). Sweep generator freeruns in the absence of a trigger. Single sweep
(one sweep is initiated by the first trigger after a
reset).
Trigger Sources - Internal: CH 1, CH 2 or composite, external.
Sensitivity and Coupling
Coupling
Dc Internal

1 MHz

10 MHz

0.3 dN deflection

1 dN deflection

Dc External

150mV

500 mV

Requirements ncrease below 30 Hz

Ac LF RejeCt

R~ements

ncrease below 50 kHz

X-Y OPERATION
Input - X-axis input is via the external horizontal
input connection. Both CH 1 and CH 2 provide
vertical inputs. Using chopped mode, two simultaneous X-Y displays can be obtained.
X-Axis Deflection Factors Continuously
variable from 20 mVldiv to 2 V/div. Bandwidth. dc
to at least 200 kHz.
Input Impedance - 1 MfI ± 2% paralleled by
",,62pF.

SONYiTEKTRONIX·
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT - 8 x 10 div (0.6 cm/div) display. Accelerating potential is 2 kV. GX (P44) phosphor.
Graticule Internal, nonilluminated. Vertical
and horizontal centerfines marked in 5 minor div
per major 0.6 cm/div.
Z-Axis Input - Range +5 V to +20 V (dc coupled) with a 100 kHz or greater usable frequency
range. Maximum input voltage, 50 V (dc + peak
ac).
STORAGE FEATURES
Display Modes - Direct view, bistable storage,
and nonstore modes. Enhance mode to increase
stored writing rate in the single sweep mode.
Autoerase mode to automatically erase stored
display after each sweep. Viewing time before
autoerase can be varied from 1 s or less to at
least 5 s. Integrate mode increases stored brightness of very fast repetitive signals.
Stored Writing Speed Normal, at least
80 div/ms . Enhanced , increases to at least
400 div/ms (250 cm/ms) in enhanced mode.
Erase Time - 300 ms.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges - 90 V ac to 130 V ac or
180 V ac to 264 V ac.
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Power Consumption 29 W maximum at
115Vac.

TEK

10 MHz DUAL TRACE
STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE

External Dc Source - + 11 V dc to + 14 V dc
or + 22 V dc to +28 V dc.
Dc Current Drain - 1.6 A at + 12 V or 0.8 A at
+24V.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Ambient Temperature - Operating: - 15°C to
+55°C. Nonoperating: -40°C to + 75°C.
Altitude - Operating: 6000 m (20,000 ft) maximum , decrease maximum temperature by
l°C/ l000 ft from 5000 ft to 20,000 ft. Nonoperating: 15000 m (50,000 It) maximum.
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each
of the three major axes, 0.06 cm (0.025 in) pop displacement (4 g 's at 55 Hz) 10 Hz to 55 Hz to
10 Hz in 1 minute cycles.
Humidity - Nonoperating: 5 cycles (120 hours)
of MIL-Std-202D, Method 106C. Omit freezing and
vibration and allow a post-test drying period at
25°C ±5°C and 20% to 80% relative humidity.
Shock - Operating and Nonoperating: 30 g 's,
'12 sine, 11 ms duration each direction along each
major axis. Total of 12 shocks.

ORDERING INFORMATION
314 Storage Oscilloscope

$4,550

Includes: Two P6149A lOX probes: carrying case and
pouch (01&0012-00): strap (34&{)131-02): external dc
cable assembly (012-0406-00) : two 1.6-A fuses
(159-C098-OO): two 0.8-A fuses (159-0132-00); two 0.15-A
fuses (159-013(}{)1): three O.l6-A fuses (159-0131-00);
service manual (070 -1824-00) ; operator manual
(070-1823-00).
The SONY-fTEKTAONIX- 314 is manufactured and marketed in Japan by SonylTektronix Corporation, Tokyo,
Japan. Outside of Japan, the 314 is available from Tektronix, Inc., its marketing subsidiaries and distributors.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
RECOMMENDED PROBES

See pages 277 and 464.
P6149A -

lOX Probe

$110

RECOMMENDED CAMERA
C-30BP Option 01 - General Purpose Camera. See page 450.

$1,524

Cemere Adeptor - Required to mount the
C-30BP to the 314. Order 01&0327-01

$170

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dlmenllonl

Width, with handle
Height. without pouch
Depth. handle not extended
Depth. handle extended

236

9.3
4 .4
13.6
17.6

Weight..,
Net, withoul accessories
Shipping

11 2
347

448
kg
4.7
7.6

Ib
10.5
17.0

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

500 kHz DUAL TRACE
STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE

200 SERIES
MINISCOPES

214
500 kHz, 1 mV IDiv to 50 V IDiv
Internal Battery
Integral 1 MO Probe
Weighs ",,=, 1.6 kg (3_5 Ib)

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Industrial Control Systems
Electromechanical Measurements
See page 277 for available Application Notes.

The 214 features these signal acquisition capabilities: bandwidth to 500 kHz with deflection factors from 1 mV/div to fJJ V/div. It is
lightweight (only 3.5 pounds) and compact (3
x 5.3 x 9.5 inches). The 214 offers bistable
storage capabilities. This is useful for viewing
nonrepetitive or slow moving signals.

Built of impact-resistant plastic and fully self
contained, this miniature portable is ideal for
applications in severe environments. And it
permits "floating" measurements since it is
double insulated and can be elevated to
700 V (dc + ac) above ground when operated from batteries. Although insulated, normal
caution should be observed when connecting the oscilloscope probe to the test pOint.

The 214 features integral probes that are
color matched with the vertical deflection
controls to minimize measurement error.
The probes have their own storage space
and are part of the instrument-you can't
forget and leave them behind . Clip-on
lOX attenuators are available for higher voltage applications.

321

TEK

500 kHz DUAL TRACE
STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE

Trigger level and slope functions are simplified to one rotary control on the side of the
unit. A convenient neckstrap is an included
accessory, freeing both hands to perform
other tasks.
In the single sweep mode the 214 can be
set to wait for, then record, a single event.
With this feature, the scope's sweep circuit
is armed and will wait for the signal to arrive before it runs. When the signal 'occurs,
the sweep runs once. When combined with
storage , this provides the unique capabilities of automatically waiting for an event
and then storing it for subsequent viewing.

CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL SYSTEMS
Bandwidth - Dc to at least 500 kHz from
10 mV/div to 50 V/div, reducing to at least
100 kHz at 1 mV/div. Lower - 3 dB point ac coupled is ",,2 Hz.
Deflection Factors - 1 mV/div to 50 V/div (1-25 sequence), accurate ± 5%. Uncalibrated: Continuously variable between steps to at least
125 V/div.
Display Modes - CH 1 only. CH 2 only, or CH 1
and CH 2 chopped (""chop rate-40 kHz) from
500 ms/div to 2 ms/div of time base, alternate
from 1 ms/div to 5 /LS/div of time base.
Input Rand C - "" 1 Mil paralleled by "" 160 pF
from 1 mV/div to 50 mV/div; and 140 pF from
100 mV/div to 50 V/div.
Maximum Input Voltage"'
1 mVidiv 10 50 mVidiv

600 V (de + peak ac)
ac nol over 2 kHz

0.1 V/div to 50 V/div

600 V (de + peak ac)
600 V pop ae; 5 MHz or less

. , IX Probe only.

HORIZONTAL SYSTEMS
Time Base - 5 IJ.sldiv to 500 msldiv, accurate
± 5%.
Variable Magnifier - Increases each sweep
rate X5 with a maximum sweep speed of llJ.s/div.
External Horizontal Input - (CH 1) 1 mV/div to
50 V/div ± 10%; dc to 100 kHz: X-V phasing to
5 kHz < 3°. Input characteristics same as CH 1.
Maximum External Horizontal Input Voltage
and Impedance - Same as for vertical inputs.
Input Impedance - Rand C, 1 Mil paralleled
by ",,30 pF.
TRIGGERING
Trigger Modes (Automatic or Normal) - Level and slope selected with a Single control. Automatic operation minimizes trigger adjustment and
provides a bright baseline with no input.
Trigger Sensitivity and Coupling
OeCoupling

To 500 Hz

Internal (w/composite trigger source)

0.2 div

Internal (w/CH 2 trigger source)

0.2 div

External

CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT - Bistable storage, 6 x 10 div (0.52 cm/div)
display. GX (P44) phosphor.
Graticule - Internal, black line, nonilluminated.
STORAGE FEATURES
Stored Writing Speed Normal, at least
80 div/ms. Enhanced , increases single-sweep
storage writing speed to at least 500 div/ms. Enhance is automatic from 0.1 ms to 5 IJ.s/div in single sweep.
Stored Luminance - At least 8 fL at 25°C.
Storage Viewing Time - "" 1 hour.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Insulation Voltage - 500 V RMS or 700 V (dc
+ peak ac) when operated from internal batteries, with the line cord and plug stored. When operated from ac, line voltage plus floating voltage
not to exceed 250 V RMS; or 1.4 times line voltage + dc + peak ac not to exceed 350 V.
Power Sources - Internal NiCad batteries provide ",,3.5 to 5 hours operation (",,2.5 to 3.5 hours
in 214 stored mode) for a charging and operating
temperature between + 2O°C and +30°C. Internal charger charges the batteries when connected to an ac line with instruments turned off. Battery operation is automatically interrupted when
battery voltage drops to "" 10 V to protect batteries against deep discharge. Full recharge requires = 16 hours. Extended charge times will not
damage the batteries.
A pilot light battery-charge indicator light will extinguish when oscilloscope has about 5 minutes
of operating time remaining in the batteries.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Range - 110 V ac to 126 V ac.
Can be operated at 104 V to 110 V with resulting
slow discharge of batteries. Option 01 is 220 V to
250 V. Option 02 is 90 V to 110 V.
Line Frequency - 58 Hz to 62 Hz. Options 01
and 02 are 48 Hz to 52 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption - 3 W.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Ambient Temperature - Operating (Battery
Only): - 15°C to +55°C. Charging or Operating
From Ac Line: O°C to +40°C. Nonoperating:
- 40°C to +60°C.
Altitude - Operating: 7600 m (25,000 It), decrease maximum temperature by 1°C/looo ft
above 15 ,000 ft . Nonoperating : 15000 m
(50,000 ft).
Vibration - Operating and Nonoperating :
15 minutes along each of the 3 major axes,
0.06 cm (0.025 in) pop displacement (4 g's at
55 Hz) 10 Hz to 55 Hz to 10 Hz in 1 minute cycles.
Held for 3 minutes at 55 Hz.
Humidity - 95%, 5 cycles (120 hours). Referenced to MIL-T-2BBOOC, par. 4.5.5.1.2.2.
Shock - Operating and Nonoperating: 150 g's,
'12 sine, 2 ms duration in each direction along
each major axis. Total of 12 shocks.

200 SERIES
MINISCOPES

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
mm

Olmen.lon.
Width
Height
Depth

Welgh1 _

5.3
3.0
9.5
Ib

Net. without accessories
Shipping

1.6
3.2

3.5
7.0

ORDERING INFORMATION
214 Dual Trace Storage Oscilloscope

$2,865

Include.: Integral probe , batteries , viewing hood
(Ol&ol~l); carrying case (01&0512-00); two 4-A fuses
(l59- 85%

4ns
8ns

>00%

100%

2ns

100%

Average Mode -

Averages continuously for a
number of acquisition from 2 to 256 in binary sequence (user selectable from front panel). Averaging of 256 acquisition effectively increases vertical resolution to 11 bits and vertical sensitivity to
200 /I.vtdiv (for signals containing sufficient noise
component). Average mode will do Stable Averaging for the user selected number of acquisitions, then switch to Exponential averaging for a
weighted averaging of the display until there is a
control change or other reset of the instrument.
Save on DeHa Mode - Incoming waveforms
will be compared against a user definable waveform envelope and SAVED if the waveform is outside reference limits. When event is SAVED it is
horizontally positioned at center screen for
examination.

HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Display Modes - A, A Intensified, B.
A and B Delayed Sweep Range - 5 ns/div to
5 s/div in 1-2-5 sequence.

Clock Accuracy - .001%.
Extemal Clock Repetition Rate -

Min: 1 MHz.
Max: 100 MHz. Events Max Rep Rate: 100 MHz.

When you have to measure time intervals within oomplex
sequences, as in disk drive applications, the 243)·s DELAY BY EVENTS, DELAY BY nME and DELTA DELAY
enable you to simplify and measure intervals buried in
long sequences.

A new Tek patented feature, SAVE ON DELTA instructs
the 243) to compare incoming acquisitions against a
user defined reference and save it in the event of a difference. You can catoh intermittent failures automatically
and implement automatio tests with improved
repeatability.

TEK

150 MHz DUAL TRACE
DIGITAL STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE

MEMORY
Save Memory - 8K of waveform memory. Four
display waveforms (1K each), and four Reference
waveforms (1K each). Reference memory number
4 is user-selectable for waveform data storage or
to store four user-definable front panel sel1ing s.
Capacitor backed waveform data retention time
from last power off more than 120 hours at 26°C,
24 hours at 50°C.
Nonvolatile Memory Approximately 2K of
memory containing calibration data, readout information, an initial front panel setting, power down
front panel setting, and 1 user definable front
panel setting. Nonvolatile memory retention time
of more than 3 years using a Lithium battery
backup.
DISPLAY
Display Modes - CH 1, CH 2, Invert, Add, Multiply, XIY (CH 1 vs CH 2, Ref 1 vs Ref 2) Reference displays 1 through 4.
Ground Reference Display - A plus symbol
( +) is displayed at left of screen, tracking ground
location. If ground is located off screen, plus (+)
remains at screen perimeter indicating off screen
location.
Trigger Reference Display - A 'T" symbol appears on waveform displays, tracking location of
trigger. If trigger pOint is located off screen in any
direction, 'r symbol remains on screen at perimeter. 'r symbol is user selectable.
Waveform Ex pansion 10X vertical expansion of SAVED waveforms, in 1-2-5 sequence.
WOX horizontal expansion of SAVED waveforms,
in 1-2-5 sequence. Expanded waveforms can be
positioned vertically and horizontally to examine
any area of interest.
Readout - Readout characters are displayed
on screen to indicate instrument's current vertical
channel selection, input coupling and termination,
volts/div, time base and sec/div, trigger level and
trigger source configuration , as well as menu selections and cursor functions .
ON SCREEN CURSORS
Funct ions - Volts, Time, Volts at Time, 1ITime,
Slope. These settings can be selected for delta or
absolute time/volts with reference to trigger point
or ground respectively. Delta delay will make differential time measurements by utilizing dual delayed sweep.
Units - Volts, Percent, dB in absolute or delta
time , percent, degrees in absolute or delta slope,
percent.
TRIGGERING
Following is a summary of triggering functions.
A Mode - Auto Level, Auto/Roll, Normal, Single
Sequence.
B Mode Delay.

Triggerable After Delay, Runs After

A and B Source - Vertical, CH 1, CH 2, Line (A
only), Ext 1, Ext 2, A B (A sweep only), Word (17bit word recognizer probe optional accessory).
A and B Coupling - Dc, Noise Reject, HF Reject, LF Reject, Ac, TV (option: A coupling only).
A and B Trigger Position - Pre>post.
A and B Slope ( ± ), A and B Level, Extemal
Clock, Manual Trigger, Variable Holdoff,
Trigger Status.

328

Minimum poP Signal Amplitude f or Stable A
Trigger from CH 1, CH 2, or A DD Source Dc Coupled: 35 div from dc to 50 MHz increasing
to 1 divat 150 MHz; 1.5 div at 150 MHz with ADD.
Noise Reject Coupled: ~ 1.2 div from dc to
50 MHz increasing to 3 div at 150 MHz; 4.5 div at
150 MHz with ADD source.
Ac Coupled: 35 div from 60 Hz to 50 MHz increasing to 1.0 div at 150 MHz; 1.5 div at 150 MHz
with ADD source.
LF Reject: 0.5 div from 80 kHz to 50 MHz increasing to 1.0 div at 150 MHz; 1.5 div at 150 MHz with
ADD source.
HF Reject: 0.50 div from dc to 30 kHz. Attenuates signals above 30 kHz.
Minimum p op Signal for Stable Trigger from
Ext 1 or Ext 2 Source - Ext Gain: 1.
Dc Coupled: 17.5 mV from dc to 50 MHz, increasing to 50 mV at 150 MHz.
Noise Reject Coupling : ~60 mV from dc to
50 MHz, increasing to 150 mV at 150 MHz.
Ac Coupled: 17.5 mV from 60 Hz to 50 MHz, increasing to 50 mV at 150 MHz.
LF Reject Coupled: 25 mV from 80 kHz to
50 MHz, increasing to 50 mV at 150 MHz.
HF Reject Coupled: 25 mV from dc to 30 kHz.
Ext-;-5: Amplitudes are five times those given for
Ext Gain=1.
Minimum p op Signal f or Stable B Trigger Two times those required for stable A trigger.
Ext 1 and Ext 2 Inputs Resistance: 1 MO ± 1%.
Capacitance: 15 pF ±3 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage: 400 V (dc + peak ac),
800 V p-p ac at 10 kHz or less.
Trigger Level Control Range CH 1 and CH 2 Source: ± 18 div x V/div.
Ext 1 and Ext 2 Source Gain = -;- 1: ± 0.9 V.
Ext 1 and Ext 2 Source Gain= -;- 5: ±4.5 V.
A and B Trigger Position: (pre>post) Va to 7/a of
acquisition record , user selectable in '1a-'1.- '12-'l/.71e sequence. User selectable in 32 sample intervals using GPIB.
REAR PANEL OUTPUTS/INPUTS
Channel 2 Output Voltage - 20 mV/div ± 10%
into 1 MO. 10 mV/div ± 10% into 50 O. - 3 dB
bandwidth is dc to > 50 MHz.
A Trigger, Record Trigger, and Word Recognizer Output Logic Polarity: Negative true trigger occurrence
indicated by a HI to LO transition.
Output Voltage HI: ~400 p.A load is 2.5 V to
3.5 V. 50 0 Load to Ground is ~0 . 45 V.
Output Voltage LO: <4 mA Load is ~0 .5 V.
50 0 Load to Ground is ~0 . 15 V.
Direct Hard Copy Output - Sends waveform
data, cursor measurements, and instrument configuration over GPIB to a Hewlett Packard
HP 2225A printer. In Save On Delta mode, when
discrepancy is detected, send hard copy output
and then reinitialize Save On Delta Mode.

2400
SERIES

POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges - 115 V: 90 V to 132 V.
230 V: 180 V to 250 V.
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Power Consumption - Typical (standard instruments): 160 W (250 VA). Maximum (fully optioned instrument): 200 W (300 VA) .
GPIB PROGRAMMABILITY
Standard on all instruments. Full talk-listen modes
available, control all front panel settings. Transmit
and receive waveform data. Sixteen lines of
prompting messages or computed results can be
displayed on screen via GPIB (40 characters per
line) using Tek Codes and Formats.
Data Transfer Rate - 65 Kbytes per sec maximum typical in Fast Transmit Mode.
IEEE Standard 488-1978 Interface Function
Sub sets Implemented - SH1 , AH1, T5, L3,
SR1 , RL 1, DC1 , DT0, PP0, C0.
ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY
The 2430 meets the environmental requirements
of MIL-T-288OOC for Type III, Class 3. Style 0
equipment, with humidity and temperature requirements defined in paragraphs 3.9.2.2, 3.8.2.3,
and 3.9.2.4.
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) - Meets
MIL-T-288OOC; MIL-STD-461B, Part 4 (CE-03 and
CS-Q2), Part 5 (CS-{)6 and RS-Q2) , and Part 7
(CS-Q1 , RE-Q2, and RS-03-limited to 1 GHz);
VDE 0871 , Category B; Part 15 of FCC Rules and
Regulations, Subpart J, Class A; and Tektronix
Standard 062-2866-00.
Amb ient Temperature - Operating: - 15°C to
+55°C. Nonoperating: -62°C to +85°C.
A lt it ude Operating: To 4600 m (15,000 ft) .
Maximum operating temperature decreases 1°C
for each 1,000 ft above 5,000 ft. Nonoperating: To
15000 m (50,000 ft) .
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each
of three axes at a total displacement of 0.025 inch
p-p (4 g at 55 Hz), with frequency varied from
10 Hz to 55 Hz in one-minute sweeps. Held ten
minutes at each major resonance, or if none existed, held ten minutes at 55 Hz (75 minutes total
test time) .
Humid ity - Operating and Nonoperating: Stored
at 95% relative humidity for five cycles (120 hours)
from + :l)°C to +OO°C, with operational performance checks at +:l)°C and +55°C.
Shock - Operating and Nonoperating: 50 g's,
half-sine, 11 ms duration, three shocks on each
face, for a total of 18 shocks.
Drip Pro of - Front cover meets MIL-T-288OOC
paragraph 4.5.5.5.3.
Safety - Certified by CSA, Electronic Bulletin
No. 556B and UL 1244 and complies with IEC 348.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Cabinet
Dimension.

Plotter Output X Output and Y Output: Output resistance is
1 kO ±10%.
Output Range/Scale Factors: Y is 390 mV/div.
X(Y-T) is 195 mV/div. X(X-Y) is 390 mV/div.
Effective slew rate is <8 VIs.

Width (with handle)
Height
(with feet & pouch)
(without feet & pouch)
Depth
(with front cover)
(with handle extended)

Pen Lift,
Polarity is
Maximum
Maximum
Maximum

Net
(w/accessories & pouch)
(w/o accessories & pouch)

12.8
10.9

28.1
23.9

Shipping

16.4

36.0

SPST Relay - Contact to Ground:
Menu selectable.
applied open-circuit voltage is ±25 V.
closed-circuit resistance is ~0 . 25 O.
closed-circuit current is ~ 0 . 25 A.

Weight.""

330

13.0

190
100

7.5
6.3

479
550

18.9
21.7

Raekmount
mm

483
178

19.0
7.0

419

16.5

4.0

8.8

TEK

2400

150 MHz DUAL TRACE
DIGITAL STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE

SERIES

Option 05
TV Waveform Measurement System
The Option 05 complies with IEEE
Standard 488-1978 and with Tektronix
Standard Codes and Formats
All of the High·Performance Characteristics
of the Standard 2430 Oscilloscope Plus
Television Waveform Assessment
Capabilities
Selectable System·M and Nonsystem·M
Protocols
Selectable Triggering on Any Line Within
a Field, With Line·Number Readout
GPIB·Controliable Functions for Use in
Automatic Measurement Systems
Compatible With Composite Video
Television Blanking·Level Clamp
(Back·Porch)
Optimized Vertical Response Comparable to
High·Performance Television Waveform
Monitors

CHARACTERISTICS
The set of characteristics is the same as specified
for the standard 2430 Oscilloscope and includes
the following additions:
VERTICAL SYSTEM
(Channel 1 and Channel 2)
Frequency Response - For VoItslDiv switch settings between 5 mV and 0.2 V, with Var Voltsl
Div calibrated and using a flVe-dMsion, 50 kHz reference signal from a 50 {2 system, with extemal
50 {2 termination on 1 M!l input.

Input Signal Amplitude for Stable Triggering
Channel 1 and Channel 2 - 2,0 dMsion for compoSite video and 0.6 dMsion for composite sync
signals (de + peak video-signal amplitude must be
within 18 dMsions of input ground reference).
External 1 and External 2 - 00 mV dMsion for
composite video and ~ mV dMsion for composite
sync signals (de + peak video-signal amplitude
must be within 9 divisions of input ground
reference).

ORDERING INFORMATION
2430 150 MHz Digital Oscilloscope

Includes: Two P6133 lOX, 1.3 m probes with accessories; snap accessory pouch (01&0692-00); ziploc accessory pouch (01&0537-00); 5 A, ACGI3AG, 250 V fuse
(159 -0014 -00) ; blue plast ic CRT filter . installed
(378-{)199-00); clear plastic CRT filter (378-{)208-OO); front
cover (200-2742-00); user reference guide (070-5497-00);
operator manual (07(}4918-OO); users GPIB interface
guide (070-5705-00).

2430M 150 MHz Digital Oscilloscope
with MATE/CIIL
$20,000

Frequency Range

With Full BW

With BW Umlting

±1%
+ 1%, -2%
+2%, -3%

+ 1%, - 4%

Squarewave Flatness -

± 1%, 1% p-p for both

Note: Although flatness and fr8qU8f1CY response are v8rifi8d
using a 50 system, similar perfcxmance can be expected
when using 75 systems.

INTERNATIONAL POWER PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 - Universal Euro 220 V. 50 Hz.
Option A2 - UK 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A3 - Australian 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A4 - North American 240 V, 60 Hz.
Option A5 - Switzerland 220 V. 50 Hz.

M1
M2
M3
M4
M5

WARRANTY·PLUS SERVICE PLANS
SEE PAGE 497
+ $240
2 Calibrations
+ $240
2 Years Setvice
2 Years Setvice and 4 Calibrations
+ $785
5 Calibrations
+ $610
+ $1 ,430
9 Calibrations +2 Years Setvice

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Service Manual - Order 07(}4917-OO
Rackmount Conversion Kit OrderOl~S-OO

$365

$430
$475
$565
$1 ,070
$195

DCS01 / 350 MHz DIGITIZING CAMERA SYSTEM

rrTTT~
TTTff '-'

RECOMMENDED CAMERAS
HC100 Plotter· ' - Four pen color plotter.
See page 445
C·53P - See page 451 .
RECOMMENDED CARTS
K212 - Portable Instrument cart. See page
461.
K213 - lab System cart. See page 462.

$1 ,940

$330
$595

.,For orrierIng. contact your local TlJIctronix Sales Office.

Input - P6407 Word Recognizer Probe, 17 bits plus
clock. (No CRT display from P6407.)

TRAINING
Operation end application training workshops ap·
plicable to this product are aveilable to the pur·
chaser et 50% off the normal fee, for one seat only
for each product purchased. Certain other restric·
tions epply. Workshop content Information is on
peges 195· 196. For further Information, or to enroll,
call UI at 1·8O().225·7602. For International orders,
contact your nee rest Sale. Office.

Sale Umlt

Threlhold

Load

< 2.0 V

< aJ".A

5.5 V

> 0.6V

>-0.6mA

- O.SV

Allinputl

DCS01 350 MHz Digitizing Camera System - Coupling a OCSOl Digitizing Garnera System with a 2467 Oscilloscope provides a fully programmable system for digitizing repetitive or single shot events to a full 350 MHz bandwidth . The 2467IDCS combination also provides
Save 5 MHz to to MHz
> 10 MHz to 3) MHz

$8,900

Displey Radix - Hexadecimal. octal, binary.
Deta Rete - 0 MHz to ;;.20 MHz with clock. 0 MHz to
;;. 10 MHz without clock.
Data Setup Time - 25 ns.
Data Hold Time - 0 ns.
GPIB Compatibility for Semiautomatic end Automated Meelurement Systems when used In combl·
nation with 2430 Digital Oscilloscope.
P6407 - Word Recognizer Probe
$435
Includes: 20 grabber tips (20&0222-00); two 10 inch 10
wide comb (012-{)747-OO); operator's manual.

329

TEK

100 MHz, 60 MHz
DIGITAL STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES

2230/2220
The 22I) Option 1012220 Option 10 comply with IEEE Standard 488-1978 and use
Tektronix Standard Codes aOO Formats.
The 22I) Option 1212220 Option 12 feature Standard RS-232C and use Tektronix
Standard Codes and Formats.
100 MHz Digital Storage/Nonstorage (2230)
. 60 MHz Digital Storage/Nonstorage (2220)
100 ns Glitch Capture at Any Speed
Cursors for Time and Voltage
Measurements (2230)

GPIB or RS-232C Optional
26K Battery-Backed Save Reference
Memory (2230 Option 10 or 12)
Three Year Warranty-Five Years Optional

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Medical Equipment Servicing
Digital Design and Troubleshooting
Power Supply Design and Troubleshooting
Electromechanical
Stress/Vibration Analysis

Pre/Posttriggering (2220)

See page 277 for available Application Notes.

Point Selectable Triggering (2230)

The 2230 and 2220 are the answer for general and special purpose storage needs.
These high performance portable scopes
have storage and nonstorage bandwidths
of 100 MHz (2230) and 60 MHz (2220).

4K Record Length
Post Acquisition Expansion, Compression,
and Positioning

330

2200
SERIES

Both scopes have been designed with
many features which enhance their usefulness in your applications. The 2230 offers
cursors and CRT readout enabling you to
measure time or voltage differences easily
and accurately. The multiple Save Reference memories allow you to view both
stored and current waveform acquisitions
onscreen simultaneously. Weighted signal
averaging can be used to remove random
noise from a signal and improve measurement accuracy.
Peak detection makes 100 ns glitch capture
possible at any sweep speed. This mode
digitizes and stores, in acquisition memory
as a data pair, the minimum and maximum
levels of the input signal. The resulting display can be used to catch glitches, as narrow as 100 ns, view frequency drift and amplitude modulation, or detect aliasing.

TEK

2200
SERIES

Unlimited storage time; expandable , compressible , reposition able stored traces ;
save reference memory; pre/post trigger
viewing; roll mode; standard X-V plotter
output; and optional interfaces make the
2230 and 2220 the most sensible digital
storage oscilloscopes to own.

CHARACTERISTICS
The following characteristics are common to the
2230 and 2220 except where indicated.

DIGITIZER AND MEMORY
Digitizing rates from 20 MS/s at
Speed 5/ls/div and faster to 20 samples/s at 5 s/div.
CHOP/ALT modes effectively halves the digitizing
rate/waveform. The effective sampling rate in Repetitive Storage mode is 2 GS/s.
Useful Storage Bandwidth - Single Shot:
Useful storage bandwidth is defined as the maximum sampling rate (20 MS/s) divided by the desired points/signal period . Repetitive Storage
Mode: Dc to 100 MHz (2230); Dc to 60 MHz
(2220).
Resolution - Vertical: 8 bits, 25 levels/division.
Horizontal: 10 bits.
Acquisition /Process Modes - Sample, Peak
Detect, Accumulated Peak Detect, Average ,
Smoothing.
Peak Detect (Enhanced Envelope) Mode 100 ns minimum pulse width for 100% probability

100 MHz, 60 MHz
DIGITAL STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES

of 50% signal amplitude capture. 10 MS/s sampling rate .
Average Mode - (2230) Normalized Average
weight is selectable from 'h, '12, 'I. , 'Ie, 'hs, '132,
'18<, 'h28, '12b6. Number of sweeps averaged is adjustable from 1 to 2047 or to an unlimited number.
(2220) Average is active from 2 /ls/div and faster.
Normalized weight of average is 'I•.
Pre/Posttrigger - (2230) 71e (PRETRIG) or 'Ie
(POSTIRIG) of waveform acquisition is prior to
the trigger event. Trigger position is menu selectable over the entire record . (2220) PRETRIG: 7/B
of waveform acquisition window prior to the trigger event. POSTIRIG: 'Ie of waveform acquisition
window prior to the trigger event. MIDTRIG: '12 of
the waveform acquisition window prior to the trigger event.

Record Length - (2230) 4K or 1K record length
selectable. (2220) 4K record length.
Save Reference Memory - (2230) One 4K or
three 1K acquisitions may be saved in reference
memory. Options 10 and 12 offer 26K of batterybacked reference memory, allowing 26 waveform
sets to be saved. (2220) One 4K acquisition may
be saved in reference memory.
Total Cursor Accuracy - Voltage: ± 3% of
delta voltage reading . Time difference is within
± [1 display interval ( + 1 display interval if in ACC
PEAK)] from 5 s to 5/ls/div and within ± [(2 display intervals + (2 display intervals if in ACC
PEAK) +500 ps)] from 2/ls/div to 0.05 /ls/div.

X-Y Plotter Output - Standard on both the
2230 and 2220. The oscilloscopes plot all displayed waveform(s) and readout information. The
plotting of the graticule is selectable on the 2230.
Plotter pen lift is adjustable with a relative speed
range of 1 div/s to 10 div/s.
External Clock - Provides an input for EXT
CLOCK signals, dc to 1 kHz , to the storage acquisition system.
VERTICAL SYSTEM
(2 Identical Channels)
Bandwidth ( - 3 dB) and Rise Time (Nonstore) - (2230) 100 MHz and 3.5 ns, derated to
80 MHz and 4.4 ns at 2 mV/div and outside 0 °C to
+35°C. (2220) 60 MHz and 5.8 ns, derated to
50 MHz and 7.0 ns at 2 mV/div and outside O°C to
+ 35°C.
Bandwidth Limit (2230) 20 MHz ± 10%.
(2220) 10 MHz ± 15%.
Nonstore Deflection Factor and Accuracy 2 mV to 5 V/div 1-2-5 sequence, accuracy is ±2%
(O°C to +35°C). Uncalibrated : Continuously variable between steps to at least 2.5: 1.
Store Deflection Factor and Accuracy 2 mV to 5 V/div. Displayed signal amplitude is
within ± 3% of the input voltage over the dynamic
range of the AID converter.
Vertical System Operating Modes - CH 1,
CH 2, CH 2 Invert, ADD, ALT, CHOP (500 kHz
nonstore).

331

TEK

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - For signals
of 6 div or less, at least 10:1 (at 50 MHz).
Input Rand C - 1 Mg, 20 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage (Ac and Dc Coupled) - 400 V (dc + peak ac) or 800 V (p-p to
10 kHz).
Channel 1/Channel 2 Isolation - 100:1 at
50 MHz.
Ac-Coupled Lower Cutoff Frequency 10 Hz or less at -3 dB.
Automatic Scale Factor - (2230) Probe tip deflection factors for coded probes are automatically indicated in the CRT readout.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
A Time Base - O.05"s to 0.5 s/div in 1-2-5 sequence. 10X magnifier extends the maximum
sweep speed to 5 ns/div. In STORE mode, lower
sweep speed is extended to 5 s/div.
B Time Base - (2230) 0.05!'S to 50 ms/div in 12-5 sequence. 10X magnifier extends the maximum sweep speed to 5 ns/div.
In Nonstorage
Variable Sec/Diy Control mode, uncalibrated variable extends sweeps by
at least 2.5:1. In storage mode, a 4K acquisition is
compressed to 1K for on-screen viewing.
Sweep Linearity - ± 5% over any two of the
center eight divisions.
Time Base Accuracy - Storage mode: 0.1%
over full 10 cm (or div)
+1 S'C to +3S'C

o to +SO'C

Unmagnified

±2%

± 3%

Magnified

±3%

± 4%

Non.tore"e Mode

Horizontal Operating Modes - (2230) Nonstorage: A, Alternate with A intensified by B, and
B; Storage: A, A intensified by B, and B.
DELAYED SWEEP
Delayed Sweep Delay Times - (2230) Continuously variable with 10-turn control from less
0.5 div plus 300 ns to greater than 10 div.
Different ial Delay Time Accuracy - (2230)
± 1% (O°C to +35°C, ±2% (O°C to +50°C).
Delay Jitter - (2230) 5,000:1 (0.02%), nonstore
mode only.
TRIGGERING
A Trigger Sensitivity
2230

Intemel

Extemel

10 MHz

O.3S div

40mV

100 MHz

I .Sdiv

200mV

2220

Intemel

Extemel

S MHz

0.3div

40mV

60 MHz

1.0 div

120mV

B Trigger (Internal Only) Sensitivity - (2230)
0.35 div at 10 MHz, 1.5 div at 100 MHz.
Trigger System Operating Modes - Normal,
P-P Automatic, TV Line, TV Reid, and Single
Sweep. HF REJ triggering attenuates signals
above 40 kHz. Lowest usable frequency for P-P
Automatic is 20 Hz.
Trigger Coupling - Automatic coupling with internal signal sources: Ac with P-P Automatic and
TV Reid; Dc with Normal and Single Sweep.
Trigger Sources - A trigger: Internal, external,
and line. B trigger (2230): Internal only.
External Trigger Input - Input Coupling: Ac,
dc, or dc divide by 10. Bandwidth: 100 MHz
(2230), 60 MHz (2220); Ac-coupled lower cutoff

332

2200

100 MHz, 60 MHz
DIGITAL STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES

SERIES

frequency is 10 Hz or less at - 3 dB. Maximum
safe input voltage same as scope 's vertical
channels.
X-Y MEASUREMENTS
Deflection Factors - Same as scope 's vertical
system with the Volts/div switch in calibrated
detent.
Accuracy - Storage Mode is same as digital
storage vertical deflection system
2230 Non.tore"e

V-Axl.

X-Axl.

+ IS' C to +3S' C

±2%

±3%

O'C to + SO'C

±3%

± 4%

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
mm

Dlmen.lon.

Width
With handle
Without handle
Height. with feet and handle
Depth
With front cover
With front cover
With front cover

360
328
137

14.2
12.9
5.4

445
440
511

17.5
17.3
20.1

Wel"ht""
Net. without cover. accessories.
and pouch

8.3

Ib
18.0

Storage Mode Bandwidth (2230) dc to
100 MHz . (2220) dc to 60 MHz . Bandwidth
changes proportionate to sweep speed.
Nonstorage Bandwidth Y-axis same as
scope's vertical system, X-axis: 3.0 MHz.
Nonstorage Phase Difference - Between X
and Yamplifiers: ±3° from dc to 150 kHz.
Storage Mode Phase Difference - Time difference between Y-axis and X-axis is no more
than 100 ns. The X-axis is sampled before the
Y-axis. Between X and Y amplifiers: Less than
± 2° referenced to a 10 division signal period.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT - 8 x 10 cm display; internal graticule, nonilluminated, accelerating potential is 14 kV, GH
(P31) phosphor standard.
Controls - Beam finder, focus, separate A and
B sweep intensity (2230), Storage/Readout intensity (2230), trace rotation .
Z-Axis Sensitivity: 5 V causes noticeable
modulation, positive voltage decreases intensity.
Usable frequency range is dc to 20 MHz (2230),
to 10 MHz (2220). Maximum safe input voltage is
30 V (dc + peak ac) or 10 V ac p-p at 1 kHz or
less. Input resistance is approximately 10 kg.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Probe Adj ustment Si gnal - 0.5 V ± 5%
squarewave at 1 kHz ± 20%.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Range - 90 V ac to 250 V ac.
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption - 85 W, 2.0 A,
at 250 V (slow blow).
ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature Operating: O°C to +50°C;
Nonoperating: - 55°C to +75°C.
Altitude - Operating: to 4500 meters (15,000
It), maximum operating temperature decreased
1°C per 1,000 It above 5,000 ft. Nonoperating: to
15000 m (50,000 It).
Humidity - Operating and Nonoperating: 5 cycles (120 hours) referenced to MIL-T-288OOC, for
Type III, Class 5 instruments.
Radiated and Conducted Emis sion - Requirements per VDE-D871 . Meets Class B.
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each
of three axes at a total displacement of 0.015 inch
p-p (2.4 g's at 55 Hz) with frequency varied from
10 to 55 to 10 Hz in one minute sweeps; hold for
10 minutes at 55 Hz in each axis; all major resonances must be above 55 Hz.
Shock - Operating and Nonoperating: 30 g 's,
half-sine, 11 ms duration, 3 shocks per axis for a
total of 18 shocks.

Option 10 GPIB Interface
Option 12 RS·232C Interface
GPIB (Option 10) and RS-232C (Option 12) interfaces are available for the 2230 and 2220. Either
interface can transmit and receive waveform data.
Most front panel settings can be queried and
many functions can be controlled via the interface;
e.g., Single sweep reset.
2230 Option 10 or 12 interfaces also allow messages or computed results to be displayed on
screen, and include a battery-backed reference
memory (minimum lifetime 3 years) for storage of
up to 26 additional waveform sets.
Option 10 GPIB Interface

CD
IEEE STO 488 PORT
Hl

oAtil

Ul\ Cfl1

PP'd

The Option 10 GPIB interface conforms to IEEE
Standard 488-1978. It is fully compatible with Tektronix Standard Codes and Formats. Primary address (0-30), message terminator (EOI or LF/EOI),
and talkllisten mode are selected by a switch on
the oscilloscope side panel. Maskable interrupts
for RQS and OPe can be programmed.

TEK

100 MHz, 60 MHz
DIGITAL STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES

2200
SERIES

IEEE Standard 488-1978 Interface Function
Subsets Implemented - SHI, AHI, T6, L3, SAl,
AL2, PP0, DCI, DT0, C0.
Option 12 RS-232C Interface
AUXILIARY CONNECTOR

ORDERING INFORMATION
2230 100 MHz Dual Time Base Digital
Storage Oscilloscope
$5,1 50
Includel: Two P6121 lOX voltage probes, front panel
cover (200-2S2000), accessory pouch (01&OO7Hl2), operator manual (070-4998-01) , user's reference card
(07(}537(}oo).
2220 60 MHz Single Time Base Digital
Storage Oscilloscope
$4,150
Include.: Two P6122 lOX voltage probes, front panel
cover (200-2S2000), accessory pouch (OI&oon- , ~ , ~, ~, not, and,
or, xor.
Input/Output - Loading from standard text or
arbitrary user-defined files, saving and loading
workspace images to disk, direct array I/O to
packed-binary disk files, ASCII, BASIC, and DIF
format files.
String Handling - String-to-number conversion,
number-to-string conversion, string arrays.
GAMMA, BESSEL and ERROR Functions
RS-232 Support

ANALYSIS
Polynomial Mathematics and Evaluation Polynomial multiplication, synthetic division, integration, differentiation, shifting, root extraction.
Advanced Graphics - Axonometric and contour plots. Plotting with hidden lines removed .
Vectors and Matrices - Matrix inversion, determinants, QR factorization and Gram-Schmidt
orthogonalization.
Solutions to Simultaneous Equations
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors - Eigen systems of Hermitian matrices, spectral slicing ,
reduction of a general matrix to Hessenberg and
triangular form.
Curve Fitting Least squares polynomials,
multilinear regressions, parametric and nonlinear
curve fitting, weighted least squares, exponential
and logarithmic fits , orthogonal polynomials, R2
(cross-correlation).
Nonlinear Regression
One- and two-way
Advanced Statistics analysis of variance (ANOVA), F-tests.
Data Manipulation - Data smoothing, differentiation and integration, peak detection, convolutions and filtering .
Fast Fourier Transform, 20 FFT, and Inverse
FFT

MODULE 4
GPIB/ IEEE-488
Interface Boards Supported - Nationallnstruments GPIB-PC, GPIB-PC2, GPIB-PC2A; IBM Capital Equipment PC-488 model 01, provides basic information.
always returns you to the main menu.

IBM PC Color Graphics
To assure users criSp easy-to-read displays,
Signal Processing and Display software is
fully compatible with the popular standard
IBM color display monitor as well as displays
used with IBM's Enhanced Graphics Adaptor and IBM Professional Graphics Adaptor.

Graphics Without "Jaggies"
A Tek patented anti-aliaSing algorithm overcomes the annoying "pixel staircase' look of
waveforms and is compatible with IBM Professional Graphics Adaptors.

Store and Describe Multidimensional
Data Arrays-With Each Dimension Independent of the Others
You can readily look at data from more directions and in greater detail-down to the
tuple level (a tuple is a single datum-a single quantity at a single point in a single
dimension).

For Fast Program Development, SPD
Provides Full Compatibility of C and
BASIC
Programming in C: Efficient, easy, and Lattice compiler compatible.
Programming in BASIC: Ideal for extracting
details from automatically collected data;
compatible with IBM compiled BASIC 1.0.
Users can invoke virtually all necessary operations by means of function calls to maximize BASIC programming capability.

With SPD, C and BASIC programs share
many procedures and data. Most C macros
that provide read/write access to waveform
data structure elements are available to BASIC programmers through function calls. The
few exceptions are confined to the most detailed data structure manipulations.
What is more, only two routines are needed
in the BASIC interface to coordinate memory management between C and BASIC,
BASIC and SPD C interface libraries, and
special versions of C libraries that are compatible with BASIC memory management.

Required Hardware
IBM PC , Portable PC, PC/ XT, PC/ AT;
256 Kbytes memory (640 Kbytes recommended); 1 double-sided, double-density
disk drive; 10 Mbyte hard disk drive (highly
recommended).

Optional Hardware
8087 or 80287 math coprocessors; IBM
Plotter.

Graphics Requirements
IBM PC color graphics display and either
an IBM Color Graphics Adaptor, or IBM Enhanced Graphics Adaptor, or IBM Professional Graphics Adaptor.

Required Software
IBM PC DOS 2.1 or higher.

Optional Software
Lattice C, IBM Compiled BASIC, Version
1.0; Tektronix Driver Utilities.

ORDERING INFORMATION
10Z210 Signal Processing and Display
(SPD) Programs Software Package

$950

Includes: Detailed operator manual; IBM function key
overlay; and seven disks formatted to be compatible
with IBM PC, PCIXT or PC/AT.

343

TEK

7000

PROGRAMMABLE
WAVEFORM DIGITIZER

SERIES

.ASE

AND

TfllOOEA

CONTROL

£' 0 E - 9

7112D

76120

rr.iiiRl

The 76120 complies with IEEE Stan~ dard 488-1975, and with Tektronix
Standard Codes and Formats.

200 MHz Maximum Sampling Rate
Two Channels, Two Time Bases
8-Bit Resolution
2048 Words of Memory per Channel
5 ns to 1 s Selectable Sampling Intervals
With Interval Switching Allowed During
Waveform Acquisition
Pretrigger and Posttrigger Operation
Fully Programmable Over GPIB for System
Oriented Operation

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Automated Testing
LIDAR
EMP
Nondestructive Testing

The 76120 Programmable Digitizer is a dualchannel, dual time base waveform digitizer
for use under computer control. Extracting
information from medium speed signals is a
typical application. The 76120 has a maximum sampling rate of 200 MHz. Each channel has its own analog-to-digital converter,
for accurate, high speed waveform digitizing, plus its own time base operating from a
single 200 MHz crystal controlled clock. The
result . . . two fully independent channels
capable of capturing one waveform each,
simultaneously, with the same or different
vertical sensitivities and time base settings.
And there's still more flexibility available.
The number of samples per waveform
(record length) can be selected, from 256 to
2048. The sample rate can be changed during waveform digitizing, for example, using
dense sampling on fast transitions and
switching to sparser sampling for slow decays. Also, each channel's local memory
can be partitioned into one to eight equallength records. Waveforms can be viewed
before the triggering event (pretrigger), immediately after the trigger, or delayed from
the trigger (posttrigger). Channels can be
operated dependently by triggering one after the other.
All 76120 functions can be selected manually or operated under program control
over the GPIB. Add two 7A16P Programmable Amplifier plug-ins, one for each channel,
and you have program control over every
waveform acquisition function.

344

,ro......

~I.

DltitllO'

The complete period of a signal (top trace) is recorded at
200 ns; by changing the sample rate to 10 ns during rise
times and fa/l times and fXX) ns during the plateau (bottom
trace), you can measure rise time, fa/l time, pulse width
and interval accurately on a single-shot signal.

A decaying signal recorded at a 10 pS sampling rate (top
trace); the same signal can be recorded at a 100 ns sam
piing rate during the initial portion and switched back to a
10 pS sampling rate (bottom trace), to capture a/l information on a single-shot signal.

TEK

PROGRAMMABLE
WAVEFORM DIGITIZER

7000
SERIES

76120 rear panel: the GPiB connector and outputs for an X-Y-Z monitor (right); clock input/output. trigger inputs. and
BNC connectors to feed signals to the front panel (/eft); remote power ON/OFF is also provided through the two central BNC connectors.

TRIGGERING A AND B
Source - Left or right plug-in, external. manual
by pushbutton.
Mode - Single sweep.
Coupling - Ac. dc. ac HF Rej, dc HF Rej.
Slope - Positive or negative.
Level Range - Internal: At least ± 128 LSB in
256 steps. External: At least ± 1.28 V in 256
steps.
Trigger Jitter (Intemal) - 0.1 ns or less. dc to
100 MHz.
Triggering Error ± 1 sample ambiguity in
recognizing the trigger, 1 sample maximum recognition error between channels (using same trigger channel for both time bases).
Trigger Sensitivity
Coupling

Trlggellng
Frequency R.nge

40 Hz to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 100 MHz

Ac
Ac HF Rej

Oc
Oc HFRej

40 Hz to 50 kHz
Oc to 50 MHz

Min Slgn.1 Required

Intemel

Extemel

20 LSB
44LSB

100mV
100mV

20 LSB

100mV

50 MHz to 100 MHz

20LSB
44LSB

100mV
100mV

Oc to 50 kHz

20LSB

100mV

ARMING A AND B
Pushbutton or computer control.

A signal with two echoes recorded at a uniform sampling
rate (top trace). the same signal recorded at an i""
creased sampling rate during each echo (bottom trace).
to capture each echo with increased resolution.

DIGITIZING AND STORAGE
Method - Continuous, sequential digitizing of
the input signals with storage of samples selected by instrument settings.
Resolution - Eight bits.
DynamiC Accuracy·'
The initial por1ion of an exponential decay is recorded on
Channel A (top trace); Channel B. set at a higher sensf
tivity and triggered to record after Channel A has fi~
ished. captures the remaining pulse tail with increased
ver1ical resolution (bottom trace).

CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Channels Two left-hand plug-in compartments compatible with all 7000 Series amplifier
plug-ins. Fully programmable when 7A16P plugins are used.
Bandwidth - 80 MHz with 7A16P plug-in.
Modes of Operation - Left channel with Time
Base A and right channel with Time Base B.

A transient response of a system at power-up recorded
with no pre trigger (top trace); by using the pre trigger the
complete response can be digitized (bottom trace).

TIME BASES A AND B
Type - Two built-in digital time bases with a
common crystal-controlled clock.
Clock - Internal: 200 MHz ±0.0035%. Stability:
Within 10 ppm/year. External: From signal source
,.;;200 MHz.
Sample Interval - With Internal Clock: Selectable from 5 ns to 1 s in a 1. 2, 3 . . . 9 sequence
(excluding 6, 7. a and 9 ns). With External Clock:
Selectable from 1 to 200 x 1()6 times the external
clock period in a 1. 2. 4. 6 ... 20 sequence.
Interval Switching - Sample interval can be
changed up to 13 times/waveform record with
preservation of time relationships.
Time Measurement Accuracy 0.0035%
(stability 10 ppm/year).
Modes of Operation - Time Base A with left
channel and Time Base B with right channel. Independent or B triggerable after A completes its
acquisition.

Signel Frequency

S IN R.tIo

Etlectlve Bita

300 kHz

42.0 dB

7.B

20 MHz

32.0 dB

6.0

80 MHz

20.0 dB

4.0

., Signal to noise ratio perfonnafICB at 25'C for a hslf--sca18
sinewava Input signal (an ideal B-blt digitizer would give a
SIN ratio of 43.8 dB). For further Information. rarer to HANDSHAKE VOL 5 NO 1. 33-A-4463.

Intemal Memory Type: ECL. Size: 2048
a-bit/channel. total of 4096 a-bit words.
Record Length, A or B - 256. 512. 1024. or
2048 samples. Number of Stored Records: Up to
eight 256-word. four 512-word, two 1024-word. or
one 2048-word records/channel (each requires a
trigger). Trigger is automatically rearmed after
each record acquisition.
Pretrlgger Delay Range - Selectable in multiples of eight samples. Without Sample Interval
Switching: From 0 up to 16 samples less than the
record length. With Sample Interval Switching:
From 0 up to 16 samples less than the position of
the first sample interval change.
Posttrlgger Delay Range - Selectable in multiples of eight samples from eight to the record
length (requires selection of only one record).

345

TEK

OUTPUTS/INPUTS
X, Y, Z Analog Output - Provides for analog
display of data in memory. X and Y level is
1 V pop into 100 kfl or greater; adjustable from
0.75 V to 1.3 V. Z level is 0 to 1 V (full white) into
100 kfl or greater.
Clock Out - Provides internal clock signal at
ECl level.
External Clock In - ECl levels. ~ 1 ns rise
time and fall time. 2.5 ns minimum pulse width
and ..;;200 MHz.
Land R Trig In - Provide external trigger input
to the left and right trigger channels (SO fl
terminated).
1, 2, 3, 4 - Four feed-through connections to
the front panel.
Digital Interface - Conforms to IEEE Standard
488-1975.
GPIB INTERFACE
Standard - Conforms to IEEE Standard 4881975.
Interface Function Subsets Implemented:
SH 1

AH1
TE6
LE4
SRI
RL 1

PPIl
OC 1
C0
DT0

Complele source handshake
Complete acceptor handshake
Extended talker function
Extended listener function
Complete service request capability
Complete remotel\ocal function
No parallel poll
Complete device clear capability
No controller function
No device trigger

Response to Interface Control Messages The 76120 responds to the following interface
control messages:
GTL

LLO
SOC·DeL
SPE·SPQ

IFC

Go to local
Local lockout
Selected device clear and device clear
Serial poll enable and disable
Interface clear

GPIB Addresses - Mainframe and programmable plug-ins share a common primary address
and are differentiated through the use of secondary addresses.
Programmable Functions - All instrument settings and operating modes are programmable.
Format - Commands in ASCII, waveform data
in binary (range 0 to 377.).
Transfer Rate - 710 Kbytes/s maximum.
Waveform Transfer Time - To an Infinitely
Fast Controller: 8.35 ms for one 2048 points record. Actual transfer time depends on controller
and software speed.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Range - 90 V ac to 132 V ac,
180 V ac to 250 V ac.
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Power Consumption (Including Plug-Ins) Maximum 400 W, 5 A at 115 V 60 Hz.
Remote Control - Power On/Off capability is
provided.

346

7000

PROGRAMMABLE
DIGITIZERS

SERIES

ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature Range - Operating : O°C to
+40°C. Nonoperating: -62°C to +85°C.
Altitude - Operating : - 76 m to +4600 m
(-250 ft to + 15,000 ft). Nonoperating: - 76 m to
+ 15 000 m ( - 2SO ft to +SO,OOO tt).
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dlmenllonl

Width
Height
Depth

483
178
703

19.0
7.0
27.7

Weight",

Net

25.0

55.0

7A16P

Inputs - Selectable A or B signal input
connectors.
Maximum Input Voltage - 1 Mfl, Dc Coupled:
250 V (dc + peak ac), ac component 500 V PO
p
maximum, 1 kHz or less. 1 Mfl, Ac Coupled: 500 V
(dc + peak ac), ac component 500 V pop maximum, 1 kHz or less. 50 fl: 0.5 W maximum.
Programmable Functions - All functions
except Variable , Gain , and Identify are
programmable.

ORDERING INFORMATION
76120 Programmable Digitizer

$28,075

Includel: GPIB cable (0 12.(l63(H)3); set of rack slides
(35H137S'()I); power cord (16Hl066-00); operator man'
ual (070-238&00).

10 mV/Div to 5 V/Div Calibrated
Deflection Factors

200 MHz Bandwidth (7900 Family)

7A16P Programmable Amplifier

Fully Programmable Plug-In for 7912AD or
76120 Digitizers Only

$2,395

50 0 or 1 MO Input Selectable

The 7A16P is designed for use in Tektronix
7000 Series programmable digitizers. All of
the normal operational features of a highquality, wide-band 7000 Series plug-in amplifier are provided in the 7A16P. These are
available at the front panel for manual selection , or they can be set under program control via a programmable mainframe and the
GPIB. Whether operated manually or under
program control, the front panel pushbuttons light to indicate plug-in status. Plugin status can also be read over the GPIB by
an external controller for input to instrument
set-up and control routines.
Two switch selected input connectors are
also provided for selecting input signal
source.

CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth - Plug-in only: 225 MHz. With the
7912AD: 200 MHz. Bandwidth may be limited to
20 MHz ± 3 MHz by bandwidth limit switch.
Ac Coupled Lower Bandwidth - 10 Hz or
less.
Step Response - SO fl input plug-in only,
1.8 ns rise time.
Deflection Factor - 10 mV/div to 5 V/div, 9
steps in a 1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy is ±2% of
indicated deflection factor with Gain adjusted at
10 mV/div. Uncalibrated Variable is continuous
between steps and extends selected deflection
factor to at least 2.5 times the calibrated value.
Input Rand C - Selectable: 1 Mfl within 2%
and paralleled by ",,20 pF or SO fl ± 1 fl with
VSWR ~ 1.5 : 1 at 200 MHz or less.

K217 -

RECOMMENDED CART
Rack Instrument cart. See page 462.

$495

SYSTEMS
The 76120 II alia available In MP 1201/MP 2201
Mealurement Packagel.
TRAINING
Tektronix oHerl lervlce training cla..el on the
76120 Programmable Waveform Digitizer. For further t,alnlng Information, contact your local Sales'
Service Offica or requelt a copy of the Customer
Service Training Catalog.
Tektronix Inltrument Group CUltomer Training offers operation and application training to help you
get full value out of your Instrumentation InvestmenL Information lion pagel 195-196. For further
Information, or to enroll, call UI at 1-800-225-7802.
For International orderl, contact your nearest
Salel OHlce.

TEK

PROGRAMMABLE
TRANSIENT WAVEFORM DIGITIZER

7000
SERIES

~"''''''''''''''''.'

......

7912AD Pro.ro ........ Di,itize,
~~

... - .-.-

---.".-

-----~

7912AD shown with the 7A 16P and 7890P programmable plug-ins.

7912AD
Digitize and Store Single-Shot or
Repetitive Signals From Millisecond to
Subnanosecond Duration
500 MHz Bandwidth at 10 mV/Div
500 ps/Div Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate
Waveform Digitizing to 9-Bit Vertical and
9-Blt Horizontal Resolution
Built-In Signal Averaging Capability
Fully Programmable Over GPIB for System
Oriented Operation

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Destructive Testing
Laser Research
LlDAR
Automated Testing

Capturing high-speed waveforms is the
7912AD's forte. Each waveform can be
sampled up to 512 times within a selectable
time window, ranging from ten milliseconds
to five nanoseconds (50 kHz to 100 GHz
equivalent sampling rate).
This performance is accomplished by a
Tektronix scan converter which writes the
signal onto a silicon-diode target array. In TV
mode, the signal information is read from
the target and converted to composite video for a bright display on a television monitor. However, in the Digital mode the waveform data is read into an internal memory.

From this memory, the digitized waveform
can be transferred via the GPIB to an external controller for processing.
The 7912AD mainframe is also programmable over the GPIB. When the programmable
plug-ins (one 7A 16P Programmable Amplifier
and one 7B90P Programmable Time Base)
are used, the 7912AD becomes a fully programmable digitizer with a bandwidth of
200 MHz. This is a significant step toward
fully automated test and measurement in disciplines such as laser and energy-related research, component or subassembly testing,
and other areas requiring information extraction from high-speed waveforms.

CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL SYSTEM
Channels - Single plug-in compartment accepts any 7000 Series amplifier plug-in. Fully programmable when 7A16P is used.
Bandwidth (Determined by Amplifier PlugIn) - 7A16P: 200 MHz. 7A2.9: 500 MHz.
Delay Line - Permits viewing of leading edge
of acquired waveform.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
Channels - Single plug-in compartment accepts any 7000 Series time base. Fully programmable with 7B90P.
Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate - 500 ps/div
with the 7B90P or 7B92A Time Bases.
Slowest Recommended Sweep Rate 1 ms/div in Digital mode.
DIGITIZING AND STORAGE
Method - Scan conversion.
Resolution - 9-bits. In the Digital mode, the target is scanned in a 512 x 512 point matrix offering
at least 400 discrete horizontal elements, each
with a range of at least 320 discrete vertical values. In the lV mode, the target is scanned in a
standard lV format with a resolution of at least
400 lines at 50% response.
Writing Rate (+10·C to +40·C) -lV Mode:
Writes an 8 div sinewave of at least 500 MHz in a
single sweep. Digital Mode: Stores a single 8 div
pulse with a rise time of 1 ns or less.

Target Defects - No more than six points digitized other than those written by input wavefomn.
Built-in firmware allows for defect removal by an
external controller.
Memory - Type: Semiconductor. Size: 4096
1G-bit words for data from target and two 512
1&bit word areas for internally processed and reduced data. Record Length : 512 samples/
wavefomn maximum.
ELECTRONIC GRATICULE
8 x 10 div dot matrix written onto the scan converter target immediately after wavefomn acquisition. Can be displayed simultaneously with the input signal on the lV monitor or digitized and
stored.
OUTPUTS/INPUTS
X, Y, Z Analog Output - Provides for analog
display of data in memory. X and Y level is 1 V
pop into 100 kO or greater; adjustable from 0.75 V
to 1.3 V. Z level is 0 V to 1 V (full white) into
100 kO or greater.
Composite Video Output - Only available in
lV mode. Used to drive a lV monitor for displaying signal written on scan-converter target as an
aid to setting intensity for complete digitizing. linear Output: Replica of the signal read from the
target with sync added. Binary Output: Two-level
output derived from the linear composite video
output. Used to indicate on the lV monitor how
well a waveform will be digitized. Scale factor
readout included in both linear and binary.
Sync Output - At least 4 V into 75 0 . Conforms
to EIA RS-170.
Sync Loop - Allows lV mode to be synchronized with external EIA RS-170 sync wavefomn.
+ Gate Output - Provides a positive pulse with
a duration equal to and coincident with the time
base sweep.
Z-Axis Input - ± 1 V input modulates the writing gun intensity over its full range .
Vert In, Cal In, Trig In - Three internal 50 0
coaxial cables connect signals from the rear panel to the front panel to ease system configuration
in rackmounts.
Probe Power - Provides power for Tektronix
active probes.

347

TEK

7000

PROGRAMMABLE
DIGITIZERS

SERIES

NORM MODE
Triggering
Frequency Ringe

Min Slgnel Required
Int

Ext· '

Hz to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 400 MHz

0.3 div
1.5 div

l00mV
250mV

Ac LF Rej·'

~ kHz to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 400 MHz

0.3 div
1.5 div

l00mV
250 mV

Coupling

Ac HF Rej·'
Dc

Hz to 50 kHz

Dc to 50 MHz
50 MHz to 400 MHz

0.3 div

l00mV

0.3 div
1.5 div

l00mV
250 mV

., Ext+ 70 operation attenuates ext tngger Slgnsl70 times .
•, Will not trigger on sinewsves or < 8 div Intemsl, or 3 V Extemal, at or below 60 Hz.
• J Will not trigger on 50 MHz slnewaves 7.5 div or less Internal,
or O. 75 V or less Extemal.

GPIB INTERFACE
Standard - Conforms to IEEE Standard 4881975.
Interface Function Subsets Implemented:
SHl
AHt
TE6
LE4
SR 1
RL 1

Complete source handshake
Complete acceptor handshake
Extended talker function
Extended listener function
Complete service request capability
Complete remote/local function
No parallel poll
Complete device clear capability
No controller function
Device trigger complete

PP0
OCI
C0
DTl

Fully Programmable Plug-In 7912AD
Digitizer Only
400 MHz Trigger Bandwidth
Single-Sweep Operation

ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature Range - Operating : O°C to
+40°C. Nonoperating: - 55°C to + 75°C.
Altitude - Operating: Up to 4600 m (15,000 tt).
Nonoperating: Up to 15 000 m (50,000 tt).
EMC (Plug-Ins Inserted) - Meets MIL-STO461A and 462 radiated and conducted interference from 30 Hz to 1 GHz.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Range - 90 V ac to 132 V ac and
180 V ac to 250 V ac.
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Power Consumption (Including Plug-Ins) 360 W maximum.
Remote Control - Remote power On/Off capabilities provided.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dlm.nllonl
Width
Height
Length

483
178
679

7B90P
500 ps/Dlv to 500 ms/ Dlv Calibrated
Time Base

In
19.0
7.0
26.8

Weight ..

Net

24.7

54.6

7A16P
Fully Programmable Plug-In for
7912AD or 76120 Digitizers Only

The programmable 7B90P is designed for
use with a Tektronix 7912AD Programmable
Digitizer. Its operating functions can be
manually selected at the front panel or selected under program control via the GPIB.
The only nonprogrammable functions are
the Sweep Calibration adjustment and the
External Trigger Input Terminator Switch.

CHARACTERISTICS
Sweep Rates - 500 ms/div to 10 ns/div in 24
steps. Magnifier extends fastest calibrated
sweep rate to 500 ps/div.
Sweep Accuracy Measured over center
8 diy, + 15°C to +35°C, with any 7000 Series
programmable mainframe. Derate accuracies by
an additional 1% for O°C to +50°C
Unmlgnlfled

Mlgnlfled

500 msJdiv to 100 nsJdiv

Tlme/Dlv

50 nsJdiv to 10 ns/div

500 psJdiv

Time/Diy

Min (ccw)
..3.5,.s

Mu(cw)
~OO

,.s

~900,.s

5 I'sJdiv to 20 ,.sIdiv

.. 35,.s

50 ,.sIdiv to 200 ,.sIdiv

..35O,.s

~9ms

500 I'sldiv to 2 msJdiv

.. 3.5 ms

~ OO

5 msJdiv to 500 msJdiv

..35ms

~900

ms
ms

Triggering Sensitivity
p-p AUTO MODE

10 mV/ Div to 5 V/ Div Calibrated
Deflection Factors

Triggering
Frequency Ringe

Min Signal Required
Int

Ext

200 MHz Bandwidth (7900 Family)

At least 50 Hz to 200 Hz

2.0 div

500mV

50 0 or 1 MO Input Selectable

200 Hz to 50 MHz

0.5 div

125mV

50 MHz to 400 MHz

1.5div

375 mV

For complete specifications on 7A16P see
page 346.

348

ORDERING INFORMATION
(PLUG-INS NOT INCLUDED)
7912AD*' Programmable Digitizer
$27,025
Includes: Power cord (16Hl066-00); set of rack slides
(351 -0375-01); GPIB cables (012-0630-03) ; operator
manual.

OPTIONS
Option 13 - Change TV Scan to 625 lines at
50 Hz.
Option 30 - Delete GPiB Cable.

NC
- $90

7A16P Programmable Amplifier
7B90P Programmable Time Base

Trigger Holdo" - Programmable in 62 steps
between minimum and maximum
500 psJdiv to 2 ,.sIdiv

Single-Sweep Mode - Same as Norm mode.
Trigger Level - Programmable in 0.05 div
steps.
Horizontal Position - Programmable in
0.0125 div steps unmagnified, 0.125 div steps
magnified.
Internal Trigger Jitter - 0.1 ns or less at
400 MHz.
External Trigger Input Selectable: 1 MO
±5%, 20pF ±10% or 50 0 ±5% with 1.22:1
maximum vswr at 400 MHz. Maximum input is
250 V (dc + peak ac) for 1 MO or 1 W for 50 O.
The level range (excluding p-p Auto) for a 1 kHz
sinewave input is at least ± 3 V in Ext and at least
±30 V in Ext-;.. 10.

$2,395
$2,885

., It Is recommended that 7972ADs not be purr:hssad or operated without an acccmpsny/ng 634 Rast8f Scan Display
Monitor. Contact your local Sales Engineer for details.

SYSTEMS
The 7912AD Is also available In MP 1101 /MP 2101
Meeaurement Package_ See page 374_
TRAINING
Tektronix offe... service training cleans on the
7912AD Programmable Transient Waveform Digitizer. For further training information, contect your
local Sales/Service Office or request e copy of the
Customer Service Training Catelog.
Tektronix Instrument Group CUltomer T...lning offe ... operetlon and epplicatlon trelning to help you
get full velue out of your instrumentetlon investment Informetlon Is on pages 19S-196_For further
informetlon, or to enroll, call us at 1-800-22S-7802_
For international orders, contect your nearest
Sales Office_

SONYiTEKTRONIX~

_u,

•

CH 2

•

;t: IN"UT ""NGE / O"":1

....".....

~M I'U

Of'111

•

390AD
The 390AD complies with IEEE Standard 488-1978 and with Tektronix Stan-

dard Codes and Formats.

'fUQ I GILA'"

AD'"

r'-':l3::l
D. C
~

r·lO ~I......,

.... IllIG.

...n_
,_
......

TtIllOOIllI La-V[L

.!INI'UT •• " 01 / 0"-"

CH'

PROGRAMMABLE
WAVEFORM DIGITIZER

TI'IIG MOOI Jlle frIIIOOl

' ~:.~'

0 0 0

gg. D~0

Cl [J 0
rfJ 0 •

."TUI

.ou .. et

."...
~ -,

e """

fl M ' IAS(

DLl' CUI:

M e M LATCH

c!J D
0"

1; .. ,

OI'Pl""

[!]
Tl fIIIl

• • ,

::.

YOLI ''''I IIU

,..- I"1.0f - ,

rt~CQ;J

•

~.~ft 0.

•

0
•

Dfe "EM INT / INCIU M I NT

The X versus Y display mode coupled with
the shift mode function provides a powerful
tool for visual comparison of related
phenomena.

To ensure reliable operation and high accuracy, the 390AD includes Auto Cal (self-calibration) and self-test features during
operation.

Photo showing sample of Rate Switching. In this example
switching occurs at the 1024th sample. to extend the display window. The sample rate can be either increased or
decreased at the trigger point. A minor time discontinuity
may occur at the trigger point under some conditions.

Two cursors can be positioned by the user or controller.
at points of interest on either waveform. The voltage difference. time difference. or ll time difference, as well as
the absolute values can be directly read from the LED
display, or sent to a controller. Positioning can be precisely accomplished with the aid of the 'zoom' feature.

True Dual Channel 30 MHz Sampling Rate
(60 MHz in Single Channel Mode)
10-Bit Resolution
2048 Word Memory per Channel (4096
Single Channel Mode)
Cursor-Based Measurements
Sample-Rate Switching
Direct Plotter Output Capability

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Extracting Information From Signals Containing Components From dc to 15 MHz
Ultrasonics/Stress/Strain
Mechanical/Vibration
Audio
ATE
Laser Spectroscopy
Biomedical Research
LlDAR
Geo-Seismic

Used for low-to-medium-speed signals, the
390AD Programmable Waveform Digitizer
provides crystal-controlled , 30 MHz sampling on two channels. Or, a single channel of data can be digitized at up to
60 megasamples per second .
Features include 10-bit vertical resolution,
dual -channel synchronized digitizing,
pretriggering and posttriggering, samplerate switching during acquisition, internal
cursors for two-point time or voltage measurements and 2048 words of memory per
channel. Excellent dynamic accuracy is
achieved using a two-stage flash-conversion process.

The 390AD display is set to X vs Y mode.
Complex manual set-ups can be avoided by recording
the desired instrument settings for a particular measurement on a system peripheral device, then sending the
English-like command string to the 390Ao.

SONYiTEKTRONIX~

PROGRAMMABLE
DIGITIZERS

GPIB INTERFACE
Standard - Conforms to IEEE Standard 4881978.
Interface Function Subsets Implemented:
SHI
AH 1
T6
L4
SR 1
RL 1

Complete source handshake
Complete acceptor handshake
Basic talker
Basic listener
Complete service request capability
Complete rernoteJlocal capability
No parallel poll
Complete device clear capability
No controller function
Complete device tngget' capability

DC 1
C0
OTI

Interface Control Message - GTL, LLO, SOCOCL, GET, SPE-SPD, IFe.
Programmable Functions - All instrument settings and operating modes are programmable,
except power switch, vertical/horizontal position,
horizontal mag, and external clock switch.
Format - Commands in ASCII, Waveform data
in 2 byte/point high byte first.

The 390AD can be easily integrated into wide range of GPIB systems. Shown above is a 4695 Color Hard Copy Unit
and a 4205 Color Graphics Terminal which is connected to a Tektronix 4041 System Controller.

Dynamic Accuracy·'

CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL
Input Channels - Two, single ended.
Sensitivity ± 100 mV to ±SO V full scale
(200 mV pop to 100 V p-p); 9 steps, 1-2-5 sequence.

Signel Frequency

Effective Bit,

< 1 MHz
< 10 MHz

...8.75
... 8.25

< 14 MHz

... 7.75

1 Mfl ± 2%; paralleled by

., Ssmpling frequency st 30 MHz. For further informstion ref'"
to HANDSHAKE Vol 5 No 1, 33-A-4463.

Maximum Input Voltage - Dc Coupled: 2SO V
(dc + peak ac). Ac Coupled: 500 V (dc + peak
ac).
Bandwidth - Dc to 15 MHz (- 3 dB). Lower
- 3 dB point, Ac Coupled: 10 Hz.

Record Length - Dual Channel Mode: 2048
words/channel. CH 1 Only Mode: 4096 words .
Modes - Auto, Norm, Single.
Pretrigger Range - CH 1 Only Mode: 0 to
4092. Dual Channel Mode: 0 to 2046.
Posttrigger Range

Input Rand C ",, 24pF.

Input Dc Offset Voltage - 0 to ± 99% full
scale, 1% step. Accuracy: < 0.5%.
Automati c Calibration Gain Accuracy :
± 0.4%. Dc Drift Accuracy: < ± 0.1%.
TIME BASE A AND B
Sample Rate - Internal: CH 1 only: 5 Hz to
60 MHz, 23 steps, 1-2-5 sequence except 30 MHz
and 60 MHz. Dual: 5 Hz to ",,30 MHz, 22 steps.
External: Dc to 60 MHz.
Clock -

60 MHz ± 10 ppm, crystal-controlled.

TRIGGERING
Sources - Internal CH 1 and CH 2 or external.
Coupling - Ac, dc, HF Rej .
Slope - Positive, negative, both.
Level Range - Internal: 0 to ± 99% full scale,
1% step. External: ± 4.95 V, 0.05 V step.
Trigger Sensitivity

Coupling

Trigger
Frequency
Renge

Minimum Slgnll Required
Intemel

Extem.1

25 Hz to 15 MHz

~LS8

:DJ mV p-p

HF Rej

25 Hz to 50 kHz

~LSB

:n:J mV pop

Dc to 15 MHz

~LS8

:n:J mV p-p

Arming -

Auto, Manual, External.

DIGITIZING
Vertical Resolution - lO-bits ( '1102').
Sample Rates - Dual Channel Mode: 30 MHz.
CH 1 Only Mode: 60 MHz.
Aperture Jitter (Including Internal Clock) 1SO ps, nominal.

350

Time B.,e

VertiCil Mode

Ringe

Dual
CH 1 only

A+ B

Dual
CH 1 only

o to 9996
o to 9996
a to 2046
o to 4092

A Time Base - Recording is taken at one rate
(sample frequency A) continuously.
A + B Time Base - Pretrigger Mode: Sample frequency A is switched to B at trigger. Recording
stops at delayed trigger. The transition point (Switch
point) is well defined. Posttrigger: Sample frequency A is switched to B at delayed trig and recording
stops after total of 2048 (or 4006) samples.
Stored digital data are addressable by key entry
while monitoring cursors on the waveform .
Readout Display - Five digit LED (Reads voltage difference on the same waveform or
between CH 1 and CH 2, absolute voltage , time
interval, and 1fT.
OUTPUTS
CRT Display - X: 1 V p-p Ramp (changeable to
5 V p-p by internal strap). 8 ms: Dual. 16 ms: CH 1
only. Mag gain X1 to X10 variable. Y: 1 V p-p
(changeable to 5 V p-p by internal strap). l : 0 to 1 V
(changeable to 0 to 5 V by internal strap), selectable polarity. X-Y Plot: Output Voltage is 0 to 5 V. Plot
Speed is 20, SO, 100 ms/word: Auto Slow, or Auto
Fast modes. (Modes are selected by internal strap.)
Voltage Calibrator - Rectangular 1 kHz
(± 10-5), 4 V (± 1%).
Rear Panel Connectors CRT-X, CRT-Y,
CRT-l , INT CLK-OUT, EXT CLK-IN, EXT ARM-IN,
EXT DLY CLK-IN, PLOT-X, PLOT-Y, PLOT-PEN,
WRITE END, GPIB.

POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Range - 90 V ac to 132 V ac
(115 V) ; 180 V to 2SO V ac (230 V).
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption - 240 W.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature Range Operating : O° C to
+40°C. Nonoperating: - 25°C to + 70°C .
Altitude Operating: Sea level to 4600 m
(15,000 ft) . Nonoperating: Sea level to 15000 m
(SO,OOO ft) .
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dlmen,lon,

Width
Height
Depth

446
152
540

In
17.6
6.0

21.3

Weight",

Net. without accessories

15.5

34.0

ORDERING INFORMATION
390AD Programmable Digit izer
$11 ,400
Includes: Power cord (16HXJ66-00); two 4 A fasl-blow
fuses (159-0017-00); GPIB cable (012-Q630-{)3); 390AD
Programming Aid (070-4467-00); operator manual
(070-4450-00).
The 620 monitor is recommended for use with the 390AD.
Option 10 -

OPTION
Rackmount 390AD.

+ $250

UTILITY SOFTWARE
(390AD/4041) Order 062-6959-01
$150
(390AD/4052A) Order 062-6960{)1
$150
See page 359 for description and ordering information.
INTERNATIONAL POWER PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 - Universal Euro 220 V, 50 Hz.
Option A2 - UK 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A3 - Australian 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A4 - North American 240 V, 60 Hz.
Option A5 - Switzerland 220 V, 50 Hz.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
GPIB Cables - Low EMI.
(1 m) Order 012-099HJl
$135
(2 m) Order 012-0991-00
$150
(4 m) Order 012-0991-Q2
$175
For floating measurements, order A69028 Isolalor. See
page 479 for complete description. Contact your local
Sales Engineer for details.
Recommended Probes - See page 464.
Service Manual - To order, contact your local Sales
Office.

The SONYe/T£KTRONIX· 390AD is manufactured and
marketed in Japan by SonyfTektronix Corporation, Tokyo,
Japan. Outside of Japan, the 390AD is available from Tektronix, Inc., ~s marketing subsidiaries and distributors.

TEK

5000
SERIES

10 MHz
DIGITAL STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE

5223

The 5223 Option 10 complies with IEEE
Standard 488-1978, and with Tektronix
Standard Codes and Formats_

Digital Storage (With 5B25N)
10 MHz Bandwidth Repetitive Store
100 kHz Bandwidth Single Shot Store
Pretrigger
10-Bit Vertical Resolution
Stored X Versus Y Display
Roll Mode
X-Y Plotter Output With Pen Lift

The Tektronix 5223 Digitizing Oscilloscope
has a real time bandwidth of 10 MHz. It is
capable of displaying real time and stored
waveforms simultaneously (four real time
waveforms and four stored waveforms, if
dual channel amplifier units are used); the
real time waveforms need not be related to
the stored waveforms. Stored waveforms
can be expanded vertically and horizontally
up to a factor of ten, using front panel controls . The left and right stored vertical signals can be displayed against each other in
the X-V mode, using the L vs R front panel
display function . The roll mode is useful for
viewing low frequency signals. Rear panel
connectors provide access to the internal
analog and control signals to record stored
waveforms using associated equipment
(e.g., X-V plotter). The 5223 accepts most
5000 Series plug-in units; the flexibility of the
plug-in feature, and variety of plug-in units
available, allows the system to be used for
many measurement applications. The digital
storage functions can only be accessed or
enabled by using the 5B25N Time Base.

Display and Save Functions
The Display buttons allow digitization of signals originating from the corresponding vertical compartments (left and right) . The digitized display is continuously updated as
long as a triggered sweep occurs, or until a
Save button is pushed. The Save buttons
freeze the memory contents. Up to four
channels may be displayed and saved
simultaneously.
L vs R Display
This function displays the memory contents of
the left compartment versus the right compartment. The left defines the vertical axis
and the right defines the horizontal axis.
Since the X-V display is from memory, the real
time sweep is still in the standard V-time format and may be displayed simultaneously.

Roll Mode Display
For continuous data stream monitoring of
biomedical or low frequency events , the Roll
mode digitizes the signal and displays the
latest acquired point at the right of the CRT
while the previous data moves from right to
left. The display appears much like a strip
chart recorder. Roll mode is available on the
sweep range of 5 s/div to 0.1 s/div.
Vector Display
When Vector Display is selected, a continuous trace connects the discrete data points
into a clear and comprehensive display. This
eliminates perception problems of scattered
data and reduces interpretation errors .
Output Saved Displays
When pressed , an analog output of the
displayed/saved waveforms is activated for
driving conventional X-V analog plotters.
Pen lift is also provided and is activated before and after each waveform is output. Up
to four waveforms may be output.
Display Out Speed Control (Rear Panel)
The Display Out Speed control adjusts the
X-V plotter output speed to compensate for
differences in plotter speeds and response.

Single-shot data can be captured and stored automatf
cally without the operator's presence. Pre trigger signal
por/ion has an intensified trace for easy reference.

CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL REAL TIME SYSTEM
Channels - Two plug-in compartments; compatible with 5000 Series plug-ins.
Mainframe Bandwidth - 10 MHz with 5A38,
5A45 or 5A48.
Mainframe Step Response - 35 ns.
Chop Mode - 100 chopped segmentsldiv unexpanded with 5B25N Time Base.
Delay Line - Permits viewing leading edge of
displayed waveform.
HORIZONTAL REAL TIME SYSTEM
Channel - Single compartment compatible with
5000 Series time bases and amplifiers. 5B25N
must be used in storage modes.
Fastest Calibrated Sweep Rate - 20 ns/div.
X-Y Mode - <2° phase shift, dc to 20 kHz between either vertical compartment and horizontal
compartment.
DIGITAL STORAGE (WITH 5B25N)
Vertical Resolution 10-bits (100 pts/div
unexpanded).

351

TEK

Display Memory Size 1K points/vertical
compartment, shared by multiple trace plug-ins.
Sample Rate - Maximum of 1 MS/s (1 jlS!pt). Actual sample rate depends on time base setting.
Fastest Single Shot Sweep Speed 100 jlS!div.
External Clock In - Maximum of 1 MS/s
(1 /Ls/pt). TIL compatible.
Equivalent Time Bandwidth - 10 MHz.
Acquisition Window ± 4 div vertically and
± 5 div horizontally from center screen.
Accuracy - Determined by plug-ins. Refer to
plug-in specifications.
X-Y - (Left vs right single channel mode only
excluding 100 /Ls/div sweep range). Maximum of
5° phase shift between vertical compartments up
to 10 MHz using two identical 5400 Series vertical
plug-ins.
MEMORY CONTROLS
Display and Save - Controls for each vertical
compartment. x-v (left vs right), Data Out, Roll,
Vector mode, Horizontal and Vertical positioning,
and expansion (~10 : 1) .
Data Out - Analog voltage of stored signal.
200 mV/div ±5%. Output rate variable with rear
panel control. Pen lift available on rear panel (normallyopen).
OUTPUTS/INPUTS
Plug-In Signal Outputs - Left, Right Vertical,
Horizontal Compartments: 50 mV/div ±5% from
50 n . Left, Right Vertical Compartments: Dc
~ 10 MHz. Horizontal Compartment: Dc ~ 7 MHz.
Time Base Gate - TIL compatible, positive
going.
Remote Single Sweep Reset - Rear panel
BNC closure to ground resets sweep.
External Z-Axis Input - Usable, dc ~5 MHz
voltage swing of 5 V will fully modulate beam dc
~ 1 MHz. Negative voltage will blank trace. Maximum input voltage is 40 V (dc + peak ac).
Calibrator - Voltage Output: Squarewave, positive going from ground. Amplitude is 300 mV
± 1%. Current Output: 3 rnA ± 1% available
through calibrator output with optional BNC to
current loop adaptor.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CRT - 8 x 10 div with 1.22 cm/div. Internal illuminated graticule.
Phosphor - GH (P31) standard.
Acceleration Potential - 15 kV.
Camera Power - Compatible with Tektronix
C-59 Camera.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Range - 90 V to 117 Vac , 102 V
to 132 V ac, 191 V to 249 V ac, 204 V to 250 V ac
maximum.
Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 62 Hz (48 Hz to
440 Hz, Option 05).
Maximum Power Consumption - 145 W at
12OV, 60 Hz.
OPTIONS
Option 05 Line Frequency Change (48 Hz to
440 Hz) Converts the R5223 to 48 Hz to
440 Hz operation.
Option 10 GPIB Interface - Rlr
of stored
waveforms and control of 5223 digital storage functions (except vertical and horizontal expansion and
position controls). Waveform output format is selectable through the interface for Binary or ASCII.
I/O Records - Waveforms.

352

5000

DIGITIZING
OSCILLOSCOPES

SERIES

Device Address - Selectable via rear panel
switch.
Talk/Usten - Full bi-direction transfer of waveforms plus remote manipulation of storage controls.
Talk Only - Continuous output of digitized
waveform to maximum sweep of 20 ms/div (dependent on other instruments on bus).
GPIB INTERFACE
Interface Function Subsets Implemented:
SH 1
AH 1
T5
L4
SA 1
AL2
OCI
PN
OT0
C0

~ sldiv 10

Dlg ltI ~ed "

0.2 ~sldiv

D lg itl~ed to
Reel Time"

1 sldiv 10 0.1 msldiv

2 sldiv and 5 sldiv

sions, in 5223 or 5400 Series oscilloscopes. Derate accuracy

by 1% for O· C to + 50' C, or when using X10 magnifier.
Digitized signal accuracy is specified over center eight graticule divisions in 5223 Oscilloscope, excluding first 200 ns or
0.2 div of each waveform.
'J The digitized signal will match the real time signal within the
specified tolerance.

5825N Digital Time Base
Bislope Triggering
20 ns/Div to 5 s/Div Calibrated Time Base
Triggering to 15 MHz

The 5825N is designed specifically for use in
the 5223 Digital Storage Oscilloscope. Pretrigger is only available with the 5223. However, the standard analog sweep features including Bislope Triggering and X10 Mag are
compatible with 5400 Series mainframes.

CHARACTERISTICS
Modes - Auto, Normal, Single Sweep.
Single Sweep - Triggering requirements are
the same as normal sweep. When triggered,
sweep generator produces only one sweep.
Extemal Trigger Input - Maximum input voltage is 350 V-peak. Input Rand C is 1 Mn paralleled by ",,24 pF.
Extemal Horizontal Input - Deflection factor is
50 mV/div ± 3%. Dc coupled bandwidth is dc to
2 MHz.
Sweep Rate - 0.2 /Ls/div to 5 s/div in 24 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence). 20 ns/div is fastest sweep rate obtained with X10 magnifier. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps
and up to 12.5 s/div.
TRIGGERING

± (Bislope)

Sweep. 1

PLUG-IN COMPATIBILITY
All 5000 Series plug-ins are compatible in the
standard oscilloscope display mode. The 5L4N,
5A18N, 5A26, 5A48 plug-ins may require modification for optimum use with digital storage operation. The 5A 14N is not recommended for use in
storage mode.
Dimensions and Weights - See page 263.

+ or -

Tlme/Dlv

'r Accuracy IS specified over the center eight graticule divI-

Complete source handshake
Complete acceptor handshake
Talker function
Ustener function
Complete service request capability
AemoteJlocal capability
Complete device clear capability
No parallel poll
No device trigger capability
N controller function

Slope

CHARACTERISTICS
(WHEN USED WITH THE 5223 MAINFRAME)
Accuracy

Pretrigger - For viewing events that occur prior
to the trigger and is continuously variable from
0% to 100% of full screen. An intensified zone is
generated which corresponds to the amount of
pretrigger selected. This intensified zone remains
with the saved waveform. Pretrigger is available
from 5 s/div to 0.1 ms/div.
Possible Undersampling Indicator - To aid in
eliminating aliasing, an LED indicator illuminates
when the ratio of sampling frequency to trigger
frequency is less than eight.
Sampling Rate - For single shot acquisition, the
5B25N has a maximum sample rate of 1 MHz at
0.1 ms/div.
Repetitive Store - For repetitive signals, the
5B25N controls the equivalent time sampling feature of the 5223 to allow digitizing from 50 /Ls/div
to 0.2/Ls/div.
Extemal Clock Input - Clock-In pin jack allows
the user to introduce an external sampling clock.
Maximum input frequency of 1 MHz, with TIL
threshold, and 5 V peak input voltage.

ORDERING INFORMATION
5223 Digitizing Oscilloscope

R5223 Rackmount

Frequency
Renge

Intemel

Extem el

Dc to 1 MHz
1 MHz 10 15 MHz

0.4 div
0.6 div

50mV
200 mV

Dc"lo 1 MHz

±0.5 div

±5OmV

"30 Hz when ae coup/Bd.

Bislope Triggering - Will trigger on either a positive or negative slope and the threshold or sensitivity is controlled by the trigger level knob. This eliminates the uncertainty of which slope is selected.

$6,340

Includes: Instruction manual (070-2933-00).
OPTIONS
Line Freq Change (R5223 only).
GPIB Interface.

+ $21 0
+ $790

CONVERSION KITS
Rackmount-to-Cablnet - Order 040ffi75{)1

$330

Option 05 Option 10 -

Cabinet-to-Rackmount - Order 040ffi76<>4
Adds GPIB Interface to Standard 5223 Order 040-0996{)1

$450
$1,360

5B25N Digital Time Base
Minimum Signel
Required

$6,165

Includes: Power cord (161- ms.
The circuit board also contains hardware
for system calibration via internal signal
generator, camera power, remote triggering, single-sweep reset and video monitor
and hard copy interfaces. The board also
supports real time direct-to-disk writing of
event-triggered waveforms (calibrated or
uncalibrated), processed waveform data,
"raw video,' and real time comparison and
summing of video data. The board displays
both direct-camera video and previously
stored video frames.
DCS software provides a comprehensive, windowed, menu-driven toolset
that is single-keystroke easy, yet handles a variety of measurement and
analysis tasks
Complete on one floppy disk, the software is
completely compatible with MS-DOS 2.1 or
higher. Menu-driven functions get you up and
running fast-starting you off with basics like
acquisition settings, scope settings and sys~i~~'~~~
"li~ 5tl, :

tem focus. You can also invoke commands
for graphing and drawing waveforms, as well
as windowing parametric functions such as
rise time, fall time, and frequency area under
the curve.
Included are tools for implementing the
Save-Gn-Delta feature used to set comparative tolerances for capturing and analyzing
transient waveforms, plus single sweep
and/or auto-log, and self-diagnostics. Signals
can be stored on hard or floppy disk and
hard copies can be made quickly (about 21
seconds with a video copier).
Graphics routines for manipulating displayed
waveforms include a zoom function for more
precise viewing , and a text function for
affixing on-screen titles to copied waveforms.
Future advanced applications libraries will
support enhanced waveform acquisition and
digitization routines and signal proceSSing
and display functions, including Fast Fourier
Transforms. Device drivers for waveform
analySis will include SPD~ and ASYSi.

Image Storage
The raw video image stored on the frame
store board can be saved just as the digitized waveform is saved. The 512 x 512 x 8
raw video image can be transferred to a floppy or hard disk" or it can be saved on video
tape.
The C1001 can be used by itself as a
video camera
This system does not require an IBM PC or
the frame store board, but it does require
the use of a power supply. This is available
with Option 04 which provides camera
power and a video output from the camera.
The video output can then be fed to a TV
screen, video tape machine or one of the
video copiers.
., The 1.2 Mb floppy Is recommended for this application
since a 360K disk mey not have enough space.

CHARACTERISTICS
For characteristics see page 444.

ORDERING INFORMATION
For Ordering Information aee page 444.

ItnuhllJtu IUd....
m

Ti./ dlll : liIS

Uoltl4u : 2ii1l1

~:~~r,~:::~!.~ :\'ifmf

::;:";:,:111Ir'~~~lh!·llllil

,,,,,.II.ll , UI1ll2

1","", " ' i.!Illlii
11 , i.ilSZii
"',p""II , i.!Illlli
I.. , ""' l! , til!141

1","",

I.. , ""I Ii :' 8.834344
UI4131

bUPOLI1 21
Dihpaillt l2
""lOll' 13
"",.11.1!
""1011' 25
.... POII.l1
.... "'''.11
...... II' zt

"""'"

Zoom-By enlarging a designated area between two
cursors. you can analyze a waveform segment in greater
detail. This is a zoom of part of the waveform shown on
the bottom of page 353.

:
,
,
'
'
'
'

a.i34r13
tlllJl44
lil31ll
i.illm
i.!Illl12
a.il3l12
i.illll!
2l'i.IIll1"

ASCII fi/es-Se/ect waveform data flies and coover! them
to ASCII data flies for printing. reviewing or transferring to
other software programs.

Raw video-Store video frames on video tape or disk
for later evaluation. You can also document test set-ups
or written materials onto disks. One video image uses
about 12K to 250K of a disk.

Contact your Tektronix Sales Engineer for complete specifications and applications information.

TEK

SYSTEM SUPPORT
CONTENTS
Controllers ...... .. __ .... __ .... __ .. .. . 355
Software
TEK EZ-TEST .... _..... ___ ... ____ ... 358
GURU II .......... _.... __ ..... _..... 358
System Support .... _..... _.. . .. _. . . .. 359
development station for debugging, editing ,
or adding program statements, and then
converting back to an execute only system
for operation after the desired program
changes have been made.

4041

Igr!!

System Controller
The 4041 complies with IEEE Standard
and with Tektronix Standard

I 488-1978
Codes and Formats_

Easy to Use Extended BASIC
512 Kbytes Memory Standard

Add-on ROM Enhances the 4041 In the
Areas of Graphics and Signal Processing,
Other Utilities are Also Available
Easy to Configure With any IEEE Standard
488 Instrument
Execute Only Mode for Program Security on
the Production Floor
Detachable Keyboard (Option)
Modular Deslgn-Rackmount or Portable
Flexible and Hard Disk Support With the
4041 Disk Drive Unit

4041 System Controller standard configuration has an Execute Only mode that enhances program security in a production environment. Interface, port, and ROM options
increase the flexibility of the 4041 . The standard 4041 is equipped with a GPIB interface
port and an RS-232C serial interface port that
is compatible with most terminals, including
the full line of Tektronix graphics and alphanumeric terminals. The Extended BASIC Language, also included with the 4041 , is easy
to use while maintaining the required depth
needed for complex programs.
4041 Hardware
The 4041 's main processor is the powerful
16-bit 68000 with 512 Kbytes of standard
memory. The versatile front panel of the
4041 is ideal for standalone applications. It
includes a 2O-character alphanumeric display, 18 key keyboard, DC-100 tape drive,
and 2O-character thermal printer. On the
rear panel is the standard GPIB interface
port and an RS-232C serial port.

The one common element that binds both
large and small instrumentation systems together is the system controller. The system,
or instrument controller, is in reality just a
computer that has been designed to optimize the interaction and communication between the controller and a wide variety of
programmable instruments and peripherals.
This interaction is enhanced by instrument
control commands in a high level programming language such as BASIC, eliminating
the need for the user to understand the
IEEE Standard 488 Interface protocol in detail. The user only needs to supply the instrument address and the function to be
performed . The controller automatically
takes care of the rest-interface handshaking, bus states and transitions, etc.

Optional ROM expands the existing Basic
language by providing commands for creating graphics and processing digitized
waveforms-capabilities ideal for Signal proceSSing systems.

The Tektronix 4041 System Controller
powerful and flexible IEEE Standard
(GPIB) Controller, designed to work
Tektronix and other GPIB instruments.

Option 30 is required for program development. Its inclusion as a ROM pack makes it
easy for a test engineer or system developer to convert an execute only 4041 into a

is a
488
with
The

Several options are available to increase the
4041 's capabilities. Option 01 adds another
RS-232C serial interface and a second GPIB
interface port that can be configured for
DMA transfers, allowing fast data transfers
across the GPIB bus. Option 03 provides an
interface to the 4041 Disk Drive Unit and a
second RS-232C interface. The 4041 DDU
provides additional mass storage, operating
efficiency and flexibility.

For extensive program development, the
4041 can be configured so that its RS-232C
port is the console. This allows a separate
terminal to be used for program development and execution. The 4041 has a complete line editor to allow insertion, deletion
and movement in the line.
The mechanical package of the 4041 is
ideal for integration into a system environment . Its small size and ability to be
rackmounted allows for easy installation into
a system . Combining a 4041 with a
TM 5003, 702OT, or 4041 Disk Drive Unit into
a standard 19 inch wide rackmount package results in a compact system with powerful capabilities.
4041 BASIC
4041 BASIC is a powerful language, optimized for instrument control. It has easy-touse high level GPIB commands in addition
to low-level commands required for the
most complex applications. English-like syntax and interpreted environment are combined to provide a friendly programming language. To improve self-documentation, the
4041 has the following features:
Variable names up to eight characters
FORTRAN-like subprogram calls
Variable passing from main programs
to subprograms
Local and global variables
Other powerful features include optional
data types (integer, short floating pOint and
long floating point); a proceed mode which
allows I/O and processing operations to run
independently for maximum speed; logical
unit number and stream specifications to
define and characterize I/O-oriented tasks;
and 512 Kbytes of directly addressed memory (without use of expensive overlays or
paging techniques).
4041 ROM Packs
Option 10 incorporates the function of the
ROM packs (4041R01 , 4041 R02, 4041R03,
and 4041R04) internally, allowing the ROM
tray to be used as a ROM program loader.

355

TEK

SYSTEM
CONTROLLERS

The 4041R01 Graphics ROM provides highlevel commands to easily construct graphic
images, symbols, charts and diagrams into
system applications.
The 4041 R02 Plotting ROM plots data,
draws the axes and tic marks, and draws
and scales graphs. Very little programming
knowledge is required.
The 4041 R03 Signal Processing ROM provides high-level commands for signal processing applications, including the following functions:
Fast Fourier Transforms (FFT)
Inverse Fourier Transforms (1FT)
Integration
Differentiation
Correlation
Convolution
Combine these capabilities with those of
the graphics and plotting ROM and processing and displaying complex waveforms
becomes easier and faster. Because the
commands are in machine language, they
run much faster than the equivalent Basic
programs.
The 4041 R04 adds even more capabilities
to the 4041 . It is a general purpose ROM
with the following capabilities:
One line error messages
Timers
Loading Soft ROMs
Using a ROM as a read only storage
device for fast program loading
Listing ROM commands

CHARACTERISTICS
FRONT PANEL KEYBOARD
SYSTEM KEYS
AUTO-LOAD - Causes the internal magnetic
tape to rewind and find the 'AUTOLD' program.
This program is then loaded into memory and execution begins.
ABORT - Halts program execution if no userspecified handler routine is called by the program. If a handler routine is specified for the
ABORT key, program control is passed to that
routine .
PROCEED Performs one of the following
functions depending on equipment or program
state:
1. Causes program execution to start at the next
program line if a Pause is encountered.
2. Resumes execution after an ABORT. If a program is loaded from the tape, execution starts
from the first program line.
3. Delimits user input when requested from an
Input statement.
CLEAR Clears the alphanumeric display.
Does not clear user·defined prompts or the input
cursor from an INPUT statement.
EEX - Causes the number requested by an INPUT statement to be entered in scientific notation. Numbers entered after pressing the EEX
(Enter Exponent) key are considered part of the
exponent.
PAUSE - Halts the program after executing the
current line. If the current program line is an IN·
PUT statement, the program stops before the execution of INPUT.

356

USER-DEFINABLE FUNCTION KEYS
Numeric user-definable function keys, 0-9, can be
assigned subroutines by the applications program. The keys can be redefined by the program
during execution to allow for unlimited user routines. The function keys can be enabled or disabled under the control of a program.
Numeric values are assigned to these keys for
entering information requested by an INPUT
statement. When input has been completed, user
functions assigned to these keys are re-enabled .
The other two keys on the front-panel keyboard are
the decimal key ('.') and the minus (' - ') key. The
decimal key is provided for decimal point entry associated with numeric and the minus key is used to
enter negative numbers associated with numeric.
Keyboard overlays can be used for labeling the
function keys with a number or an abbreviation of
the user routines.
FRONT-PANEL DISPLAY
The front-panel display communicates test procedures and operator prompts, and displays intermediate or final program results . The display is
fully programmable.
ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY
Alphanumeric Line - Twenty characters.
LED - Sixteen segments.
Size - Height: 3.8 mm (0.15 in). Width: 2.8 mm
(0.11 in).
Character Density 1.6 characters/ cm
(4 characterslin).
Character Symbols - 64
Message Viewing Time - Programmable.
Scrolling Rate - Programmable.
SYSTEM INDICATORS
LEOs - Located on the display front panel indicate the status of the system.
BUSY - Indicates that a program is running . A
blinking BUSY light indicates that the system has
PAUSED (temporarily halted).
POWER - Indicates the machine is on.
I/O - Indicates that an Input/Output operation is
being performed.
FUNCTION - Indicates that the user-definable
function keys are enabled.
MAGNETIC TAPE DRIVE
Magnetic tape drive is used to store user's programs and data. The tape is the primary means of
loading programs, particularly for execute-only
applications; in addition, the tape drive provides
for long-term unattended data logging.
File Structure - 48 named files (maximum).
Capacity (Physical Records) - 650 typical
(600 minimum).
Physical Record - 256 bytes (typical tape capacity is 166,400 bytes).
Average Transfer Rate - 13,324 bits/so
Search Speed - 1520 mm/s (60 in/s).
Tape Rewind - 1520 mm/s (60 in/s).
Tape Cartridge 100A Certified Data Cartridge from Tektronix (equivalent to Scotch
DC-100A).
PRINTER
The printer produces hard copies of the intermediate or final program results , operator prompts,
and changes in variables or system status. Mes·
sages longer than 20 characters are printed on
succeeding lines where the user can specify the
appropriate indentation for better delineation and
readability.
Printing Method - Thermal, fixed head.
Capacity - 2O-character alphanumeric line.

Font - 5 x 7 dot matrix printhead.
Character Size - 2.5 mm high x 1.8 mm wide
(0.10 in high x 0.07 in wide).
Line Spacing - 4.23 mm (6 lines/in).
Printing Speed - 2.0 lines/s.
Feed Speed - 8.46 mm/s (0.34 inls).
Character Set 26 Uppercase letters
26 Lowercase letters
10 Numeric digits
34 Special characters
32 Control characters
128 Total
Paper Size - 60 mm x 25 m (2.36 in x 82 ft).
CONTROLLING THE BUS
When using BASIC high level print and input com·
mands, the 4041 automatically controls all bus
management signals in the proper sequence for
the desired interface task and instrument interaction. A bus management function program uses
direct IEEE Standard 488 mnemonic commands
to accommodate differences in implementation of
GPIB on other equipment. Virtually all legal bus
states can be programmed this way, which affords a high degree of flexibility for addressing
various system applications.

BUS INTERRUPTS

The 4041 has the ability to detect and respond to
various types of interrupt conditions that can be
generated on the GPIB. User-specified software
handlers can be written to perform various tasks
when these conditions occur. Interrupts can be
programmably enabled or disabled.
Interrupt Conditions
M....g.

Mn.monlc

SAO
EO!
IFe

oct
TCT

MTA
MLA

Service Request
End 0< Identify
Interlace Clear
Device Clear
Take Control
My Talk Address
My listen Address

BUS COMMUNICATION
Interface and bus device addressing are programmable. This allows the user to direct message and data flow to and/or from the appropriate interface and GPIB peripheral. Information
such as primary and secondary addressing, along
with pertinent device-dependent information, can
be attached to a specific Logical Unit number.
Subsequent communication with that GPIB device can be directed to the Logical Unit, eliminating the need for redundant or repetitious statement programming.
TRANSFER RATES (IEEE STANDARD 488)
Transfer Rates for the Standard Interface
Input
No'
rated load> '

4ms
lOS
101
1()8
1()6

@
@
@
@

signal level
rated load
signal level> '
rated load> '

20 3PST
(High, low, guard)

30 SPST

10 SPOT

30 SPST

< 211
(each wire)

<150 ml1

< l50ml1
< 250 mO>'

Power
Requirements

24 V dc supplied from TSI 8150 mainframe or external source

Environmental

Operating: O°C to +50°C; Nonoperating: _ 40°C to + 75°C

., Option 01 .

NEW TSS42
General Purpose Scanner Card
30 Cost-Effective Channels for
Configuration Flexibility
Bounceless Mercury-Wetted Contacts for
Long Switch Life
Consistent Channel Resistance ( ± 20 mll
Typical) Over Switch Life for Greater Test
Reliability
Dry-Reed Version (Option 01)

A Selection of Switch Trees
The TS842 General Purpose Scanner Card
is a highly configurable, long-life switch assembly. It performs the many routine but essential multiplexing chores that complex
test systems require . This versatile card arranges the channels in one group of 1 x 8,
four groups of 1 x 4, and three groups of
1 x 2. Each channel is a single wire .
The TS842 uses long life mercury-wetted
switches, minimizing system down time for
switch replacement.

Printed circuit pads near the switches allow
users to attach snubber networks for
switching inductive loads.
The TS842's many special features make it
suited to a variety of applications. The long
life, bounceless operation, consistent channel resistance over switch life and configuration flexibility qualify the TS842 for many
demanding manufacturing ATE test set-ups.
Multiple channels permit such uses as functional board testing . Other special uses include: audio switching; low current power
supply switching into the OUT; bias voltage
control; and operations such as component
testing that require high repetition, long life
operations.
For users concerned about operating in
mercury-prohibited environments or about
mechanical positioning, Option 01 offers
dry-reed switches in the same switch
configuration.
For ordering information, see page 367.

TEK

POWER SWITCH, MATRIX SWITCH..!
DRIVER CARD~

TSI8150
SERIES

NEW TSS43
Power Switch Card
10 Independent Power Channels for Primary
and Secondary Power Switching
Transient Suppressors for Switch Protection
With Inductive Loads
Switches dc Through 400 Hz for Applying
Power to a OUT
High Power Switch Applications
(250 V, 10 A, 2000 VA)
Useful for System Power-Up Sequencing

A Versatile Power Switch Card
The TSS43 Power Switch Card provides 10
independent switch lines designed to allow
the user to switch primary or secondary
suppies to the OUT.
Each channel consists of one normally
open (NO) and one normally closed (NC)
contact. Transient suppressors are wired
between each NO and common and each
NC and common. These suppressors protect the contacts when the card switches
inductive loads.
The TSS43 can switch up to 10 A or 250 V
(RMS), and is useful for switching power to
the OUT. The most common use is dc or
60 Hz , but similar applications exist in
400 Hz avionic set-ups.
A special use is switching miscellaneous
units such as device handlers, solenoids,
and other line-operated fixturing actuators.
The TSS43 has a 60 A inrush surge rating,
enabling it to switch loads such as a
one-quarter horsepower 120 V ac motor.
For ordering information, see page 367.

NEW TSS48

Matrix Switch Card

30 Switches, in Five Rows by Six Columns,
for Matrix Configuration Flexibility
Bounceless Mercury-Wetted Switches for
Long Switch Life
Consistent Channel Resistance
( ± 20 m{2 Typical) Over Switch Life for
High Repeatability
Dry-Reed Version (Option 01)

A Versatile Matrix Switch Card
The TSS48 Matrix Switch Card is designed
to route a variety of signals . The switch matrix contains five rows by six columns. Each
crosspoint is a single wire.
The switches are long-life mercury-wetted
relays . These relays minimize system down
time for switch replacement.

Each switch trace on the printed circuit
board includes blank pads. The user may
install snubber networks to allow switching
inductive loads.
The TSS48's many special features make it
suited to a variety of applications. The long
life, bounce less operation , consistent channel resistance over the life of the switch,
and configuration flexibility qualify the
TSS48 for many demanding manufacturing
ATE test set-ups.
The large number of channels available
supports applications such as functional
board testing. Other special uses include:
Audio switching; low current power supply
switching to the OUT; bias voltage control;
operations that require high repetition and
long life operations, such as component
testing.
Each row and column is connected to two
connectors, allowing easy expansion of the
matrix in a row dimension, the column dimension , or both dimensions by adding
TSS48 cards.
Option 01 incorporates the same matrix
configuration but substitutes dry-reed
switches in place of the mercury-wetted
contacts. This substitution allows operation
in environments which prohibit the use of
mercury or in mechanical position-sensitive
applications.
The TS842 General Purpose Scanner Card
offers the same switches , but in a configuration suited to single purpose test set-ups.
The TSS48 is better suited to testing a varied series of OUTs. An example application
is universal device test systems, which mix
stimulus and measurement instruments on
the same pins.
For ordering information, see page 367.

NEW

High Current Driver Card/60 mA Driver Card
Controls Up to 24 User-Supplied Relays for
Custom Applications

Each driver card provides printed circuit
board prototyping features for users who
want to interface their own relays into the TSI
8150 Test System Interface family. Uses for
these cards include special relays such as
optical switches, microwave transfer switches, and picoamp low current switches.
Other uses include driving dc devices such
as air valves, solenoids , handlers, and actuators. These cards provide easy interface
of the devices to the General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB) IEEE Standard 488.
The card 's output drivers contain internal
diodes that clamp the back EMF generated
by a relay coil opening to the coil supply
voltage. Coil voltage for the relays passes
through a limiting fuse . The return path
connects to chassis ground.

Command Functions Available
All of the TSS40 command functions are
available for the driver cards. The configuration command always returns 1 of 24. On
the 021 -041 HlO, multiple switch channels
can be closed simultaneously , providing
the total current does not exceed 4 A. Other features available on these prototype
cards include: sequence storage, breakbefore-make and make-before-break capability , timing control , and user-programmable bounce timing.
A TSI Family Member
The 021-0417-00 and 021-0418-00 driver
cards conveniently interface user-supplied
relays and other devices to the TSI 8150
Test System Interface mainframe . The
021 -0417-00 switches up to .1 Amp per
channel; the 021 -0418-00 switches up to
60 mA per channel.
The driver cards are controlled by a TSS40
Scanner Control Assembly mounted in a
TSI 8150 mainframe. The cards can be
mounted in the TSI 8150 mainframe or
mounted outside and connected to the TSI
8150 mainframe with a mass-terminated ribbon cable, up to 12 meters (40 tt) long.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
021-0417-00
High Current Driver Can!

Open Collector, NPN Darlington Drivers
Allows 24 Channels of Control for SolenOids,
Actuators, Handlers, and Other Devices
Low Voltage Detection Circuit Generates
Error Message If Power Supply Fails
Blank Prototype Area for User Wiring
Back EMF Diodes for Switching Inductive
Loads

Two Current Driver Cards
The High Current Oriver Card (021 -041HlO)
and the 60 mA Oriver Card (021 -0418{lO)
are functionally identical.

Dimen.iona

Width
Height
Depth

356
178
Xl7

Weights""
Net
Shipping

0.4
0.6

1.4
70
121
Ib

0.8
1.0

021-0418-00
60 mA Driver Card

356
178
Xl7

14
70
12 1

0.3
.5

0.7
1.1

ENVIRONMENTAL
Ambient Temperature - Operating: QOC to
+50°C. Nonoperating: - 40°C to + 75°C.
For ordering information, see page 367.

365

TEK

SCANNER
MODULES

TSI8150
SERIES

TSI 8150 FAMILY SCANNER MODULES SELECTION GUIDE

TSI Family Scanner Modules
The TSI Family of scanner modules are
controlled by a TS840 Scanner Control Assembly mounted in a TSI 8150 Test System
Interface mainframe. Each module contains
an expansion connector that allows the
user to connect additional units without requiring an additional TS840.
The modules can be mounted in a TS18150
mainframe or mounted outside and connected to the TSI 8150 mainframe with a
mass terminated ribbon cable, up to 12
meters (40 ft) long.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
T5S45

Width
Height
Depth

74
184

2.9
7.3
3.5

74
184

2.9
7.3
3.5

Welghtl =
Net
Shipping

0.5
0.6

1.0
1.4

< 0.75 at OOJ MHz
< 1.0 at 1.2 GHz
<3.0 at 2.0 GHz

< 0.1 at 3.0 GHz
< 0.3 at 12 GHz
< 0.5 at 18 GHz

Isolation (any
port to common)

>80 dB at 100 kHz
>45 dB at 50 MHz
40 dB at 200 MHz

> 60 dB at OOJ mHz
> 50 dB at 1.2 GHz
> 40 dB at 2.0 GHz

> 00 dB at 3.0 GHz
>70 dB at t2GHz
> 60 dB at 18 GHz

Crosstalk (between any
two ports with common and
alt unused ports terminated)

> 80 dB at 100 kHz
>45 dB at 50 MHz
>40 dB at 200 MHz

> 50 dB at OOJ MHz
> 40 dB at 1.2 GHz
> ~ dB at 2.0 GHz

> 00 dB at 3.0 GHz
>70 dB at 12 GHz
> 60 dB at 18 GHz

VSWR (any port to common)

<1 .05:1 at 100 kHz
<1.2:1 at 50 MHz
<2.1:1 at 200 MHz

< 1.3:1 at OOJ MHz
< 1.5:1 at 1.2 GHz
< 3.5: 1 at 2.0 GHz

< 1.1:1 at3.0GHz
< 1.3:1 at 12 GHz
< 1.5:1 at 18 GHz

Maxm.m Switched Current

500 rnA de or peak ac

10 rnA de or peak ac

50 rnA de or peak ac

Maximum Switched Voltage

150 V de or peak ac

24 V de or peak BC

15 V de or peak ac

1.0A

loomA

3.0 A

Maximum
Switchable Power

to W (resistive)
200mW
(RF into 50 11)

200mW
(RF into 50 11)

125mW
(RF into 50 11)

Maximum

500mW
(RF into 50 11)

450 W to 100 MHz
200 W to 700 MHz
100 W to 3.5 GHz
50 W to 1.8 GHz
(all into 5011)

250 V de or peak ac

50 V de or peak ac

5x 10'

10'

4ms

31ms

41ms

T5548

Dlmenllonl

0.5
0.6

1.0
1.4

0.4
0.6

1.0
1.4

Carry Power

Dielectric Standoff

Switch Life
Settling Trne

NEW TSS44

Coax Scanner Module

Two Independent 1 X 6 Trees

T5548

T5545"

<0.1 at 100 kHz
< 0.25 at 50 MHz
<1 .0 at 200 MHz

Insertion loss
(any port to common)

Maximum Carry Current

CHARACTERISTICS
T5S44

T5S44

Fe.turel

n TSt 8150 manframe or from external source

Power Requirements

24 V de coil supply

ErlIIirormentai

Operatng: O'C to +50'C; Nonoperatilg: - 4O'C to + 75'C

" Two 1 x 6 binary trees (only one port can be connected to common 8t once).

NEW TSS45

NEW TSS46

Shield Common Isolated From Chassis
Ground, Preventing Low Frequency
Ground-Loop Problems

RF Scanner Module

Microwave Scanner Module

Two Independent 1 X 6 50 (} Trees

High Level of Isolation and Low Crosstalk
for Low Level Measurements

Wide Bandwidth for TOR and Communication
Frequency Tests

18 GHz Bandwidth (-0.5 dB) for Microwave
Test Set-Ups

BNC Connectors for Easy and Economical
Interconnections

A Versatile Coax Scanner Module
The TSS44 Coax Scanner Module multiplexes moderate bandwidth Signals through
shielded conductors.
The TSS44 uses coaxially shielded relays arranged in two 1 x 6 trees. Each channel consists of one switched signal wire and an
un switched shield that is common to the
other shields in the same tree.
To eliminate low frequency ground loops,
the shield common is isolated from chassis
ground.
The TSS44 fits into TS18150 mainframe and
016-0862-00 Auxiliary High Frequency
Mounting Unit slots. This module also contains corner holes that permit the user to
directly mount the TSS44.
For ordering information, see page 367.

A Versatile RF Scanner Module
The TSS45 RF Scanner Module multiplexes
VHF/UHF signals in 50 n systems. Binary
tree switching eliminates unterminated
stubs and equalizes path length through all
channels. Two independent 1 x 6 trees contain the switches.
The TSS45 provides an additional portTERM-for terminating the common line
when no channel is selected . TERM does
not have the same path as the six ports.
Connecting A TERM to B COM forms a 1 x 12
tree with reduced specifications. Each channel consists of one switched signal wire and
an unswitched shield that is common to the
other shields and chassis ground.
The TSS45 can be used in areas such as:
time domain and frequency domain testing
through the UHF range; HF and VHF testing
of frequency domain devices without switch
characterization in the high frequency and
very high frequency range; routing singleended logic signals (for example, for GaAs
testing; testing of general communications
equipment.
The TSS45 fits into TSI 8150 mainframe and
016-0862-00 Auxiliary High Frequency
Mounting Unit slots.
For ordering information, see page 367.

366

Two Independent 1 X 6 Switch Trees
SMA Connectors for Attaching Flexible and
Semirigid Coaxial Signal Paths

A Versatile Microwave Scanner Module
The TSS46 Microwave Scanner Module is designed to multiplex extremely high bandwidth
signals. The module's 18 GHz bandwidth and
flat frequency response allow use in reduced
bandwidth systems without concem for insertion loss or rise time degradation.
The TSS46 contains two independent 1 x 6
switch trees. Each channel consists of one
switched signal wire and an un switched
shield that is common to the other shields
and chassis ground.
This versatile high frequency scanner module is useful in applications such as: UHF
and low-end microwave testing without
switch characterization; mulitplexing of TOR
tests for hybrid, stripline, microstrip, and
controlled-impedance board testing; broadband parametric testing that requires closing two switches simultaneously.
The TSS46 fits into TS18150 mainframe and
016-0862-00 Auxiliary High Frequency
Mounting Unit slots.
For ordering information, see page 367.

TEK
ORDERING INFORMATION
TSI 8150 Test System Interface

$2,995

Includes: Rackmounting hardware ; user's manual
(070-5765{)()); configuration manual (070-5766-00); programming reference guide (070-6038-00); power cord.
OPTIONS
Option 01 - Replace standard configuration
with front switch access.
Option 02 - Configuration for front and rear
switch access.

NC
+$595

TSA 8140 Test System Adaptor

$495

CONVERSION KIT
Rackmount*' -Includes hardware for slide
rails. Order TSA814OFOI

016-0861-00 Auxiliary Card Rack
016-0862-00 Auxiliary High Frequency
Mounting Unit
TSS40 Scanner Control Assembly
TSS41 Low Level Scanner Card
TSS42 General Purpose Scanner Card
TSS43 Power Switch Card
TSS48 Matrix Switch Card
021-0417-00 High Current Driver Card
021-0418-00 60 mA Driver Card
TSS44 Coax Scanner Module

$245
$145
$220
$545
$595
$395
$645
$345
$245
$595

Includes: .91 m (36 in) connection cable.

TSS45 RF Scanner Module

$895

Includes: .91 m (36 in) connection cable.

TSS46 Microwave Scanner Module

$1,995

Includes: .91 m (36 in) connection cable.
OPTIONS
Option 01 - (TSS41) For 1 p.V thermal differential relays (2 p.V with tree switch).
Option 01 - (TSS421TSS48) Dry-reed relays.

Multifunction Interface System

MI 5010/MX 5010
Wide Range of System Interfacing Functions
Up to Six Functions at One Address
D-to-A, A-to-D Conversion
Low-Level Signal Scanning
Digital 1/0

+$400
NC

Digital Word Acquisition and Generation
Built-In Time-of-Day and Pacing Clock

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
TSI8150
System Service Manual Order 070-5767-00
Additional Main Interconnect Board Order 670-9137-00
Function Card Service Extender
Package - (TSI8150) Order 067{)162-OO

Command Buffer for Controller-Free
Operation
$150

$150

TSA 8140
Test Head Receiver·' - Compatible with
test fixtures from Virginia Panel Corporation.
Order 021-Q435{)()
Interchangeable Test Adaptors·' (Full Size) Order 021-0434-00
(Half Size) Order 62H)436-00
SCANNER/SWITCH DRIVER CARDS/
SCANNER MODULES
Auxiliary Card Mounting Rack (TSS41fTSS42!TSS43fTSS48) Order 01&0361-00
Extension Cable Kit - 30.5 m (100 ft) cable
and 24 connectors. Order 198-5579-00
Cable Assembly - Six preassembled 2 m
(6.5 It) extension cables. Order 198-5581-00
Auxiliary High Frequency Mounting
Unit - (TSS44fTSS45fTSS46)
Order 016-0862-00
To order, contact your local Tektronix Sales
Office.
·f

Thermocouple Scanning

$595

$245
$395
$24

The Mi 5010/MX 5010 Multifunction Interface
System consists of the MI 5010 Multifunction Interface, the MX 5010 Multifunction Interface Extender, and seven different types of function cards. These cards
are capable of a variety of functions typically required in automated test system interfacing, data acquisition and generation, and
process control.
The MI5010 and MX 5010 each house up to
three function cards, in any combination.
The MI5010 provides the communication
between the system controller and the function cards. The MX 5010 is always used with
an M15010, extending its control to six function cards at one GPIB address.

$145

The function cards presently available for the
M15010/MX 5010 Multifunction Interface System are: 5OM10 Analog-to-Digital Converter,

50M20 Digital-to-Analog Converter, 5OM30
Digital I/O, 5OM40 Relay Scanner, 5OM41
Low-Level Scanner (with M41 A 1 through
M41A8 Signal Conditioners), 5OMSO Memory,
and 5OM70 Development card. Each function
card contains its own ROM with the specific
firmware and its own unique set of commands required for its particular function.
Each card can be operated in any slot of the
MI5010 and/or MX 5010 regardless of the
other cards in the system.
In addition to providing the interface between
the function cards and the system controller,
the MI 5010 also has its own intelligence and
a built-in command buffer. This buffer is capable of storing up to 300 system commands
and executing them in sequence, paced by
the on-board time-of-day and pacing clock or
by signals from the system under test. It requires no interference from the system controller, thus freeing the controller to direct activity elsewhere in the system.
IEEE Standard 488-1978 Interface Function
Subsets Implemented - SH1 , AH1 , T6, L4,
SR1 , RL0, PP0, DC1, DT1 , C0.

ORDERING INFORMATION
MI 5010 Multifunction Interface

$1,760

Includes: Instruction manual (070-3712-00); ilstn.ment Ilterface guide (070-5187-00); reference guide (070-3882-00).

MX 5010 Interface Extender

$740

Includes: Same as above .
U1111ty Software
For TM 5000/4041 Order 062-6958{)1
$150
See page 359 for description and ordering information.
This utility software supports all of the 50Mxx Series
function cards also.

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

367

TEK

TM 5000
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

PROGRAMMABLE
FUNCTION CARDS

50M10

50M20

50M30

12·Blt Resolution

12·BIt Resolution

16 Digital Input and 16 Digital Output Lines

Voltage or Current Mode

Data Entry/Output Formats In Decimal,
Binary, or Hex

Programmable A/D Converter
32

Programmable D/A Converter

Conversion Time

Four Voltage Ranges ±100 mV to ±100 V

Data Transfer via GPIB or Front Panel
Connector

250 V RMS Isolation

The 5Otv110 uses a 12-bit successive approxi-

Self· Test and Error Indicators

mation conversion technique with a trackand-hold amplifier to achieve a total conversion time of 32 ~s or less (approximately
3J,CXXl conversions per second). Using the
front panel connector, conversion values can
be sent over the GPiB (via the MI 5010) or to
extemal memory devices (such as the 5OM5O
Memory card). In either case, data is transferred in two 8-bit bytes. The lower six bits
contain the converted value, high byte followed by low byte. The seventh bit is a highlow byte indicator. The eighth bit is unused.
Four voltage ranges are provided, manually
selectable by on-board jumpers: + 100 mV,
+ 1 V, + 10 V and + 100 V. The total span
for each range is divided into 4006 parts (12bits). The front panel analog input connections (high and low) can be elevated to a p0tential of +340 volts, de plus peak ac.
Two handshaking modes are provided, one
for communication with devices faster than
the 5Otv110 (the device can accept data as
fast as the 5Otv110 can provide it), and the
other for communication with devices slower
than the 5Otv110 (the 5Otv110 must be clocked
by the extemal receiving device). Front panel
control lines permit the 5Otv110 conversions to
be triggered, gated, or triggered within a
gate. Through the use of a gateable function
generator, such as the Tektronix FG 501 A,
and a digital delay generator, such as the
Tektronix DO 501 , a counted burst of conversions at a selected rate can be gated.

CHARACTERISTICS
Maximum Conversion Rate - 32/JS.
Maximum Aperture Time - <400 ns.
Accuracy
Range

100mV
1Vand10V
100 V

+1S·C to +2S·C
± O.15'l(,"'
±O.O75'l(,"'
±O.l25'l(," '

O·C to +SO·C
±O.25'l(,"'
±O.125'l(,"'
±O.2%" '

"' Full scsl8.

Amplifier Settling Time - 100 mV Range:
,.;;; 150 /ls . 1 V Range : ,.;;;25/ls. 10 V Range:
,.;;; 10 /ls . 100 V Range: ,.;;;30 /ls .
Input Impedance - 100 mV, 1 V and 10 V
Ranges: ;;'10'0 fl. 100 V Range: ;;.1 Mfl.
Digital Data Transfer Format - 12-bit word
transferred in two bytes, high byte first. Lower six
bits of each byte contain data, seventh bit is high
bytellow byte indicator, eighth bit is unused.

ORDERING INFORMATION
50M10 Analog·ta-Digital Converter Card $895
Include.: Interfacing cable (Ot~); instruction
manual (070449&00); reference guide (07(}449HX» .

368

/lS

(Maximum) Conversion Time

Mnemonic Instructions
UL 1244 Listed
The 5OM20 converts digital data to either an"
alog voltage or current. The voltage or current mode is selectable manually via an onboard switch.
Data format is 12 bits, sent in two sequential
l-bit words. Data can be sent via the IEEE
Standard 488 (GPIB) using the MlS010 as
the interface, or from an extemal (front connector) bus for high speed data transfer
(with appropriate handshake lines). On-board
firmware will convert commands and data to
the proper format to perform the required
digital-to-analog conversion. Two lines at the
front panel connector are provided to handshake data into the 5Otv120 from the user's
extemal system.
Programming of the 5OM20 is via the IEEE
Standard 488 (GPIB) Bus. System commands sent to the MlS010 microprocessor,
along with specialized programming commands unique to the 5OM20, control the
source and the format of the digital data.
The SOM20 can be programmed to respond
to either external or internal system triggers.

CHARACTERISTICS
VOLTAGE MODE
Range - -10.240 V to + 10.235 V.
Accuracy ± 10.0 mV (+20°C to +30°C)
± 15 mV (O°C to +50 0 C).
Resolution (1 LSB) - 5 mV.
Total Conversion Time (Maximum) - 20 /lS .
Output Ripple and Noise - <5 mV PO
p at
5 MHz BW.
Output Current Range - 0 mA to ± 5 rnA.
CURRENT MODE
Range - -20.48 mA to +20.47 mAo
Accuracy - ±20/lA (+20°C to +30°C)
± 40 JJ.A (O°C to +50 0 C).
Resolution (1 LSB) - 10 JJ.A.
Total Conversion Time (Maximum) - 20 /ls .
Output Ripple and Noise - <1 5/lA, p-p, at
5 MHz BW.
Compliance Voltage - ± 11 V.
Isolation - 250 V RMS maximum to ground.
Digital Data Transfer Format - 12-bit word
transferred in two bytes, high byte first. Lower six
bits of each byte contain data, seventh bit is high
byte/low byte indicator, eighth bit is unused.

ORDERING INFORMATION
50M20 Digital.ta-Analog Converter Card $910

Programmable Digital Input/Output Card

Triggered Externally or On Command
Mnemonic Instructions
Self·Test and Error Indicators

UL 1244 Listed
The 5OM30 provides 16 digital input and
16 digital output lines. The digital inputs accept data from pushbuttons, switches, contact closures, and most digital devices capable of supplying TIL output levels. The
digital outputs provide TIL levels to control
various types of test and measurement instruments, relays, indicators , etc. The digital
outputs can be configured for open-collector outputs by positioning internal jumpers
and using power supplied by the user.
Programming of the 5OM30 is via the IEEE
Standard 488 (GPIB) Bus. System commands sent to the MI SOlO Microprocessor,
along with specialized programming commands unique to the SOM30, control the selection of the data input/output channels
and the arming/trigger functions of the card.
Four lines at the front panel connector operate as input/output pairs to handshake data
with the user's extemal system. One handshake pair allows the user's data source to
be synchronized with the SOM30 data input
register and the other handshake pair allows
the user's data storage device to be synchronized with the 50M30 data output
register.

CHARACTERISTICS
Data Outputs Using Internal Supply 16 open-collector TTL with 2 kfl pullup resistors.
Logical "1" : +5 V ±2% (open circuit). Source
current is - 2.5 mA ± 7% maximum. Logical "0" :
0.2 V. Sink current is - 40 rnA maximum.
Data Outputs Using External (User) Supply
- Maximum Voltage: + 15 V. Pull up Resistors:
2 kfl. Logical "1" equal to external supply voltage
(open circuit). Source current is 7.5 mA ±5% plus
external supply tolerance. Logical "0" : 0.2 V. Sink
current is 40 mA maximum.
Data Inputs - Input Buffers: 16 Schmitt triggers. Logical "1" (+ V Threshold): + 1.6 V ± 25%.
Source current is - 0.14 mA nominal, - 0.16 mA
maximum. Logical "0" (- V Threshold): +0.8 V
±40%. Source current is - 0.18 mA nominal,
-0.21 mA maximum.

ORDERING INFORMATION
50M30 Digital Input/Output Card

$495

Include.: Interfacing cable (Ol~) ; instruction
manual (07D-3722-{)Q); reference guide (07D-3884-{)Q).

Include.: InterfaCing cable (01~); instruction
manual (07D-3724-{)1); reference guide (07D-3883-{)Q).

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1·800-426·2200, Ext 99" In Oregon call collect: (503) 627·9000, Ext 99

TEK

TM 5000
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

PROGRAMMABLE
FUNCTION CARDS

M41A1

50M40

50M41

Progremmeble Low Level Scanner

Low Level Amplifier for 50M41

18 Mercury Wetted Relay Contacts

10 Differential Contact Pairs Plus Guard

10 Differential Inputs plus Guard

Programmable Relay Scanner Card

User Conflgurable 1, 2, 4 Groups

< 1 ".V Thermal Offset

Selectable Gains of 1, 10, 100, and 1000

Triggered Extemally or On Command

User Conflgurable

Software Selectable Filter

Mnemonic Instructions

Handshake Unes to Permit Extemal Control

Extemal Handshake Lines

Self-Test and Error Indicators

Isothermal Amplifiers Available for
Thermocouple Applications

50M41 Low Level Scanner Required

UL 1244 Listed

The 5OM40 provides 16 independent, normally open relay contacts. The relay contacts can be used as switch closures to
supply power to several external points
from one source, or scan several sources
and supply various inputs to a single measurement device.
The desired relay switch pattern is configured by the user with internal jumpers.
When the configuration has been established, the relay scanning sequence, open
and close operations, and triggering events
are programmed over the IEEE Standard
488 (GPIB) Bus.
Two logic signal lines on the front panel
connector are provided for externally controlling the 50M40-one as an output
(Ready) to indicate to the user when the relays have settled, and the other as an input
(Ext Trig) to tell the MI 5010 Microprocessor
that the user is ready for the relay switch
configuration to close. Three possible configurations are:
4 groups of 4 individual relays
2 groups of S individual relays
1 group of 16 individual relays

CHARACTERISTICS
Type of Relays - Mercury wetted reed.
Possible Configurations (Jumper Selectable)
- 1 of 4, 4 each. 1 of 8, 2 each. 1 of 16, 1 of 12
and 1 of 4. 1 each.
Maximum Applied Voltage - 40 V de plus peak
ac.
Maximum Carry Current - 1 A.
Breakdown Voltage - 100 V dc plus peak ac.
Contact Resistance - 0.15 {l nominal (end of
life).

A family of high gain, low noise signal conditioning modules-M41 A 1 through M41 ASis available to condition low level signals for
specialized applications with the 5OM41 .

CHARACTERISTICS
Type of Relays - 10 sealed low thermal EMF
relays configurable as one 10-to-1 switch or two
5-to-1 switches.
Thermal Offset - <1 ".V differential; <2 ".V
differential with tree switch.
Maximum Scan Rate - ~2OO cycles/s.
Maximum Applied Voltage (High, Low or
Guard of Any Channel to Chassis) - 350 V
dc + peak ac.
Maximum Switched Voltage - 150 V dc +
peak ac (not to exceed VA rating).
Maximum Carry Current - 250 rnA.
Maximum Switched Current - 10 rnA.
Maximum Switched VA - 0.15 VA.

$895

The M41 A 1 is a general purpose amplifier
with switch able gain in decade steps from
1 to 1000. Provision is made for a guarded
input that can be driven by the amplifier's
guard driver or by an external signal source.
A software selectable low-pass filter with a
corner frequency of approximately 4 Hz provides more than 60 dB of normal mode rejection at 60 Hz. The frequency response
with the filter turned off is approximately
-3 dB at 10 kHz.

CHARACTERISTICS
Gain Ranges
Output

av...11
a.ln(A)

Input
o.ln(A)

Buffer
AMPLo.ln

Dynemlc

1000
100
100
10
10
1

1000
1000
100
100
10
10

1
0.1
1
0.1
1
0.1

10V
1Y
lOY
1Y
lOY
1Y

R.nge

Gain Accuracy ± 0.1% from +18°C to
+28°C; ± 0.2% from O°C to +5O°C
Maximum Input Voltage (Respect to System
Ground) - 250 V ac RMS (350 V dc + peak ac)
Input Resistance Differential - > 10 MO paralleled with 0.05 ".F capacitor.
RMS Noise (Referred to the Input) <60 nVI v'Hz A= 1 10 kHz.
Settling Time - Riter On: E;;4OQ ms. Riter Off:
E;;15O ".s.

ORDERING INFORMATION
M41A1 Low Level Amplifier

$550

Include.: Instruction manual (07D-4605-01).

ORDERING INFORMATION
50M41 Low Level Scanner Card

ORDERING INFORMATION
50M40 Relay Scanner Card

The 5OM41 provides ten pairs of guarded,
normally open relay contacts with less than
one microvolt of thermal offset in each
channel. Each differential pair of contacts is
accompanied by a third contact to switch
the shield or guard connection. The ten sets
of relay contacts can be configured as two
groups of five individual relays with two
commons, or as one group of ten individual
relays with one common . The desired relay
switch pattern is configured by internal
jumpers. A tree relay can be included in the
1 of 10 configuration to reduce capacitive
loading and potential noise problems when
using more than one 5OM41 in a system.
Two handshake lines are provided for externally controlling the 5OM41 .

$995

Include.: Interfacing cable (015-0430-00); instruction
manual (07(}4557'()() ; reference guide (07(}4556{)() .

Include.: Interfacing cable (015-0430-00); instruction
manual (07(}3723'()() ; reference guide (07(}3885{)() .

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-428-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 827-9000, Ext. 99

369

THERMOCOUPLE AMPLIFIERS
PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTION CARDS

TEK
M41 A2

M41 AS

through
Thermocouple Amplifiers for 50M41
10 Guarded Inputs
Selectable Hardware or Software
Temperature Compensation
Software Selectable Filter
External Handshake Lines

50M41 Low Level Scanner Required

TM 5000
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

50M50

50M70

Programmable Memory Card

Programmable Development Card

16 Kbyte Digital Input/Output

32 Data I/O Ports

Single 16·BIt or Dual 8·Blt Channels

Interrupt and Trigger Lines

Independent Dual Channel Operation

Vector Board Development Region

200 kHz Acquisition or Generation Rate

Mnemonic Instructions

TTL Levels

Self· Test and Error Indicator

External Handshake Lines

Signal conditioning modules M41A2
through M41 A8 are thermocouple amplifiers, each designed to operate with a specific thermocouple type (J, K, E, T, S, R,
and B, respectively). The thermocouple amplifier provides isothermal connections for
up to ten guarded or unguarded thermocouple pairs. Each amplifier provides hardware compensation for its specific thermocouple type; provision for software compensation is made where all thermocouples
are not of the same type. Thermocouples
are available from your local supplier.

CHARACTERISTICS
Maximum Thermocouple Wire Resistance -

10kO.
±0.02% or 1 Jl.V referred to
input (whichever is greater).
Common Mode Rejection Ratio - Incremental
Dc: ;;;.100 dB. 60Hz: ;;;.100 dB.
Linearity Error -

Input Dynamic Range (Common Mode) -

±10V.
Incremental Input Resistance (High to LO) > 10 MO paralleled by 0.05 Jl.F capacitor.
FILTER
Bandwidth Filter On - f( -3 dB): ,.;;6 Hz.

f( -60 dB): ,.;;60 Hz.
Setting Time - Filter On: ,.;;400 ms. Filter Off:
,.;;150Jl.s.
ISOTHERMAL BLOCK
Temperature Gradient <0.1°C between

any two terminals or any terminal and tempera·
ture sensor.
Hardware Compensation - ± 0.014 (V - Viso)
A (0C) and O.35°C (O°C to +50°C) or 0.25C
(+ 18°C to +28°C).
Software Compensation 0.35C (O°C to
+50°C) or 0.25C (+ 18°C to +28°C)

ORDERING INFORMATION
The following thermocouple amplifiers each include
instruction manual 07(}4OO5{)1 .

M41A2
M41A3
M41A4
M41A5
M41A6
M41A7
M41A8

Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type

J
K
E
T
S
R
B

$625
$625
$625
$625
$625
$625
$625

This 16 Kbyte digital input/output device
can be configured, under program control,
as a single 16-bit input/output port or as two
8-bit input/output ports. These ports can be
connected to any of 16 data buffers which
can be programmed to different lengths.
The total memory of all the buffers cannot
exceed 16 Kbytes.
The SOMSO is intended to be used as a digital word generator and/or as a fast, digital
data acquisition buffer. As a digital word
generator, it can be used with a digital-toanalog converter, such as the Tektronix
SOM20, to function as an arbitrary waveform
generator. As a high speed data acquisition
buffer, it can be used with an analog-to-digital converter, such as the Tektronix SOM10,
as an off-line, high speed analog signal
measurement system or as a waveform
digitizer.
The SOMSO can be programmed to input or
output data on two different channels simultaneously, or to input data on one channel
while outputing data on the other channel.
System commands to the SOMSO control the
selection of input/output channels, the control of the data buffers, and the arming
functions of the card.
Four handshake lines are provided at the
front panel to permit synchronization with
the user's external system (one pair for
each channel). Other external control lines
permit pacing and control of data output
and disabling of data input.

CHARACTERISTICS
8 or 16 low power Schottky
TIL lines. Logical '1": +5 V ±2% (open circuit).
Source current is 2.5 mA +2% -7% maximum.
Logical '0" : ,.;;0.7 V. Sink current is 40 mA
maximum.
Data Inputs - 8 or 16 low power Schottky TIL
lines. Logical "1" (+ V Threshold): + 1.5 V to
+2 V. Source current is -0.16 mA maximum.
Logical "0" (- V Threshold): +0.6 V to + 1.1 V.
Source current is -0.21 mA maximum.
Maximum Data Transfer Rate - 8-Bit Bytes:
200 kHz ±2%. 16-Bit Bytes: 125 kHz ±2%.
Data Outputs -

ORDERING INFORMATION
50M50 Memory Card

$995

Includes: Interfacing cable (OIS-()43(}{)()); instruction
manual (07Q-455(}{)1); reference guide (07Q-4554{X)).

370

The SOM70 provides the user with the
means of developing his own unique circuit
and interfacing it to the GPIB without the
need for designing and building the GPIB
interface itself. With the SOM70, the user
can create a specialized function card to be
used in the M15010 / MX5010 Multi function Interface System. When completed, the circuit can be programmed in high
level language over the GPIB.
The SOM70 contains two 68B21 16-bit interface logic registers (PIAs), address and
data buffers , its own firmware, and a
4x4 inch breadboard area for circuit development. The 32 data lines of the PIAs can
be individually programmed as inputs or
outputs. The PIAs also provide three sets of
programmable two-wire handshake lines to
permit triggering of the external system by
the SOM70 or of the SOM70 by the external
system.
Typical SOM70 applications are specialized
AID and D/A converter functions, counter/
timer applications, special communication
interface functions, keyboard and display
functions, digital comparators for triggering
and interrupt functions, etc.

CHARACTERISTICS
Data Input/Outputs and Handshake Lines -

Output High Level: +2.4 V minimum, +5.5 V
maximum. Maximum Load Current: -200 Jl.A.
Output Low Level: 0 V minimum, +0.4 V maximum. Maximum Sink Current: 3.2 mA. Input Load
Current: 1.3 mA nominal, 2.4 mA maximum.
Dc Voltage Sources Available on the Card -

+26 V and - 26 V ±9%, 100 mA maximum; +8 V
±5%, 600mA maximum; +5V ±5%, 1.5A maximum. Total Combined Power Limit: 7.5 W.

ORDERING INFORMATION
50M70 Development Card

$410

Includes: Interfacing cable (015-()43(}{)()); instruction
manual (07(}-3725-00); reference guide (07(}-388&OO).

TEK

TM 5000
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

PROGRAMMABLE
SCANNER

Two handshake lines are provided for externally controlling the SI5010. An Ext Trig line
is provided to allow the SI5010 switching to
be initiated by the external system under
test. and a Ready line indicates to the external system when the relays have settled .

SI5010

,"IIUll.

.....•
•

CHARACTERISTICS

IAlllll

Programmable Scanner

SI5010

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
MULTIFUNCTION INTERFACE SYSTEM
Interfacing Cable - 5O-conductor flat ribbon cable with connector to mate with front
panel connector of any Multifunction Interface
System function card. Other end of the 48-inch
cable terminates in bare tinned leads. (This cable is a standard accessory with 5OM20,
SOM30, SOM40, and 5OM70 cards.)
Order015~

The SI5010 complies with IEEE Standard 488-1978, and with Tektronix
Standard Codes and Formats.

$80

Single-Width Intarfaclng Adaptor - Mates
with any single Multifunction Interface System
function card to permit customized interface
wiring between cards or to external system under test. Will accommodate up to five screw
terminal blocks (131 -3083'()() below).
Order01~

350 MHz Bandwidth In 4-Channel
Configuration
External Handshake Lines
Built-In Tlme-ot-Day and Pacing Clock
$155

Screw Terminal Block - Mounts in 015046&00 Interfacing adaptor above to permit
wiring changes without soldering (ten terminals per block). Order 131 -3083'()()

$10,25

Triple-Width Interfacing Adaptor - Mates
with up to three Multifunction Interface System
function cards in an MI S010 or MX S010 to
permit interface wiring among cards or to external system under test. Contains two
131-3083'()() screw terminal blocks.
Order 015{)473'()()

$245

Multifunction Interface Syatem Card Extender Permits operation of a function
card while extended from the front of an
MlS010 or MX SOlO. Order 067-106&00
Function Card Acce.. Shield - Dummy
function card of insulating material to protect
against possible electrical shock or damage in
partially filled MI S010 or MX S010.
Order 020-0836-00

Software Conflgurable as:
1 Group of 16 Channels
2 Groups of 8 Channels
4 Groups of 4 Channels

$170

$ 19

Command Buffer for Controller Free
Operation

The SI5010 Programmable Scanner provides the capability of switching and routing
up to 16 high frequency input and!or output
signals. It always maintains a clean 50 n environment through the use of 50 n coaxial
reed relays. The sottware-configurable basic four-channel arrangement allows the
SI5010 to be used for pOint-to-point switching (any connector to any other connector).
or to be used in a wide variety of fan-in and!
or fan-out configurations.
The SI5010 has its own intelligence and a
built-in command buffer capable of storing
up to 300 system commands and executing
them in sequence. It is paced by the onboard time-ot-day and pacing clock or by
signals from the system under test. This requires no interference from the system controller, thus freeing the controller to direct
activity elsewhere in the system.

RF Connectors - 20 BNC connectors, 16 channels and four commons.
Control Input (Ext Trig) - Extemal Trigger:
TIl compatible
Control Output Data Accepted (Ready) TIL compatible. Output goes high when relays
have settled.
Channel Configuration (Software Selectable)
- 1, 2, 3, or 4 groups of 4 channels. 2 groups of
8 channels. 1 group of 16 channels.
Frequency Response - Any 1 Group of 4:
-3 dB at 350 MHz, decreasing to -6 dB at 500
MHz or greater. Any 1 Group of 8: -3 dB at 175
MHz or greater. Any 1 Group of 16: -3 dB at 80
MHz or greater.
Port (Channel) Isolation - 40 dB at 100 MHz.
Characteristic Impedance (Each Channel) 50 O. See VSWR specification.
Rise Time (Each Channel) - < 1 ns.
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) - Any
4 Channel Group: 1.25:1 at 100 MHz, increasing
to 1.8:1 at 350 MHz. Any Other Combination: 1.5:1
at 100 MHz. 2:1 at 225 MHz.
Insertion Loss - <1 dB at 100 MHz.
Channel Delay Matching - Any Group of 4: 50
ps. Any Group of 8: 110 ps. Any Group of 16:
310 ps.
Type of Relays - 16 Form A, EAC 05Y21A 1 40
BAB, or equivalent. 4 Form 'C', TO-5, Teledyne
712-6, or equivalent. Pull In Time: 3 ms. Release
Time: 3 ms. Breakdown Voltage: 350 V (dc +
peak ac). Series Path Resistance (End of Life):
0.50.
Peak Carry Voltage Unterminated: 40 V
maximum. 50 0 Terminated: 12.5 V maximum.
Peak Contact Current - 0.25 A maximum.
Peak Switching Voltages Unterminated:
15 V maximum . 500 Terminated : 3 .73 V
maximum.
Peak Switching Current - 0.01 A maximum.

ORDERING INFORMATION
SI 5010 Scanner

$2,275

Include.: Instruction manual (07G-3721'()(): instrument interface guide (07(}4615.QO): reference guide (07G-3881'()() .

UtIlity Softwere
For 1M 5000/4041 Order 062-6958{)1
$150
See page 359 for description and ordering information.
RECOMMENDED PROBES

P6058 - 10X Passive. See page 471 .
P8057 - 100X Passive. See page 471 .
P8202A - FET. See page 475.
P8230 - Bias/offset. See page 474.

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

$185
$190
$880

$395

371

TEK

PROGRAMMABLE
SCANNER

1360P/1 360S

- - ..... -"

Programmable Signal Multiplexer

1360P/13608
GPIB
IEEE-48

The 1360P/ 1360S comply with IEEE
Standard 488-1978, and with Tektronix
Standard Codes and Formats.

Signal Bandwidth to 300 MHz
50 0 Environment
Selected Pole Readout
Flexible Switch Configuration
Rackmount or Benchtop

The 1360P/ 1360S Programmable Signal
Multiplexer is a microprocessor-based,
GPIB-compatible system instrument which
is used to multiplex electrical signals. The
1360P/ 1360S system includes two separate
chassis: the 1360P Programmable Switch
Controller and the 1360S Switch Matrix. The
1360P/1360S is not part of the TM 5000
Family and thus does not require a TM 5000
mainframe for operation.

372

The 1360P Programmable Switch Controller
is controlled via the GPIB and provides all
the signals required for control of up to four
1360S Switch units. The 1360P is housed in
an 8.5-inch wide (half-rackwidth) rackmount
chassis, with right or left slider assemblies
for rackmounting.
The 1360S Switch Matrix contains four 9-t0-1
switches which can be cascaded to provide
two 17-to-1 switches; a 25-to-1 switch and a
9-to-1 switch; or a 33-to-1 switch. Up to four
1360S Switch units can be controlled by one
1360P Controller unit to provide up to 129to-1 multiplexing. In the 9-to-1 configuration ,
the 1360S has a signal bandwidth of
250 MHz; make/break time in all configurations is <1 ms. The switches in the 1360S
can also be ganged together to provide simultaneous and synchronized multiplexing
of several groups of signals.

CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth (3 dB, Through One Switch Only)
- Dc to 300 MHz.
Maximum Input Voltage - 250 V dc + peak
ac (not to exceed 10 VA).
Maximum Carry Current - 250 mA (not to exceed 10 VA).
VSWR (Through One Switch Only) - 5.0 at
450 MHz; 3.9 at 400 MHz; 1.9 at 250 Hz; 1.2 at
100 MHz.

Characteristic Impedance - 50 0 ± 1 O.
Scan Rate Variability - > 105 to <3 ms.
Make/Break Time - ~ 1 ms.

ORDERING INFORMATION
1360P Switch Controller

$2,695

Includes: Instruction manual (070-347&00).

1360S Switch Matrix
Includes: Same as above.

The 1360S is housed in a 5.75-inch high,
19-inch wide rackmount chassis 3 inches
deep.

To order call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

$1,695

TEK

MEASUREMENT PACKAGES
CONTENTS

Precise automatic waveform measurements for demanding applications in
research, design, manufacturing and
quality assurance

Custom Test Sytems . ...... . ..........
System Products .....................
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Measurement Packages
MP 1101 Programmable Digitizer ..... . ..
MP 1201 Programmable Digitizer ........
MP 2101 Acquisition/Processing .........
MP 2201 Acquisition/Processing .........
MP 2501 Acquisition/Processing .........
MP 2601 Portable ...... . . . . . .... . .....
MP 2901 Incoming Inspection
Test Station .........................
MP 2902 Audio Measurements Package ..

Automatically Saves Time
Tektronix measurement packages are specially designed to handle the increasingly
complex, expensive, and time consuming
task of waveform characterization.
They offer all the power and flexibility of oscilloscope acquisition, which can be coupled with programmable stimulus sources
for fully automatic analysis . The packages
feature signal processing software with extensive control over instrumentation, waveform manipulations, and graphic display.

Compatibility
Tektronix measurement packages provide
system compatibility to allow configuration
for many types of test and measurement
applications. This flexibility of specialized
instrument selection and easy integration
allows the application potential of your
automated testing unit to increase with
your requirement.

System Building Blocks
Whether your application is in scientific research, engineering design or automated
manufacturing and quality control, Tektronix
provides for each of the functions that comprise virtually every measurement system.

Increase Productivity
Tek measurement packages combine stateof-the-art waveform acquisition capabilities
with computer processing and software
control. They automatically capture signals,
make measurements, then display, store
and document the results. Projects can be
completed on time and within budget.

Systems That Put You in Charge
From today's research and development
tasks to tomorrow's production testing, Tek
packages give you all the capabilities
needed to characterize your waveforms
quickly, efficiently, and accurately.

Device Under Test (OUT)
The device that is being tested by the system. The system provides stimulus to the
OUT and acquires the results from the test.

OUT Interface
The OUT Interface provides a path from the
stimulus and acquisition equipment and the
OUT. Tektronix provides a number of GPIB
compatible products for OUT interfacing.

374
374
374
374
375
376
376
377

Input/Output Devices
Keyboards and keypads on terminals, controllers and some instruments provide convenient access to the system.

Acquisition
Tektronix provides a wide range of GPIB
compatible test equipment for measuring
an acquired signal. The growing family of
GPIB compatible waveform digitizers offers
the ability to capture signals ranging from
seconds to picoseconds, with bandwidths
up to 14 GHz. Plus , compatibility with a
broad range of plug-ins provides an added
dimension of measurement flexibility.

Graphics terminals and hard copy units provide alphanumeric and graphic presentation
of data and programs as well as permanent
documentation. Because the quality of the
solution is often dependent on the quality of
the display, you gain additional advantage
by Tek's leadership in high resolution, reliable graphic and alphanumeric displays.

Processing

Software

Tek minicomputer systems built around the
DEC Micro1PDP-11 handle larger amounts of
data and offer considerable flexibility in peripheral selection, processing power and
speed, software modularity and extended
memory. Contact your nearest Tek Sales
Representative for more information.

Tektronix minicomputer controllers can be
operated with TEK SPS BASIC, a powerful
general purpose programming language
which offers convenient control of instruments to acquire, process, store and display
waveform data with ease. TEK SPS BASIC
combines the advantages of being an interactive language with the high performance of
a computer operating system. The Tek 4041
comes with its own version of extended BASIC . . . providing both the simplicity desired
by the beginner and the flexibility and power
required by the experienced programmer.

Systems built around the Tek 4041 feature
benchtop convenience with powerful analytical and instrument control capabilities.

Mass Storage
Mass storage, in the form of disk or magnetic tape , provides permanent storage
and easy retrieval of program and raw or
processed data.

For ordering information on SPS BASIC, contact your nearest Tektronix Sales
Representative.

INDIVIDUAL PACKAGE CONFIGURATION
ApplIcation

Fastest singleshot transient
digitizer, higlest bandwidth

Stimulus
Stimulus units, including function generators, signal generators and other sources,
provide known control signals to drive the
OUT through normal operation patterns or
into boundary conditions for performance
limits testing .

193
373
373

M.iti-record.
duak:hameI

digitizer for both
sOlgIe & repelilive signals, high
bandwidth

Acquilltlon
In_

7Sl12AD

78120

V_own
controller
Compect controller

MP 1101
$38,700

MP1201
$35,970

MP2101
$49,170

MS3101
See page
193

MS 3201
See page
193

Tektronix 4041 with
enhanced instrument

ExceIent signal
acquisition for
repetitive signaIs, high band-

Extensive signal
acquisition cape.
biIities with signaJ analysis

width

Versatie, compact signal stirrWs & acquisilion for mediuT1
and tow speed
signals

Mal JJS wide ± 10%.

379

PROGRAMMABLE
SONYiTEKTRONIX@CURVE
TRACER

Steps and Offset Polarity - Same as collector
supply polarity when step generator polarity invert
is disabled. Opposite to collector supply polarity
when step generator polarity invert is selected or
configuration switch is set to base grounded. If
configuration is set to base grounded, step gen·
erator polarity invert is disabled.
Number of Steps - Selectable from 0 to 10.
Auxiliary Supply - Range: - 40 to + 40 V with
20 mV resolution . Accuracy: Less than 50 mV
+2% of total output. Output Current: At least
100 mA ± 20 V; at least 10 mA ±40 V.
Nonstore Mode - Collector Current: Range is
1 JlAJdiv to 2 AJdiv in a 1-2-5 sequence of 20
steps . Xl0 Mag extends max sensitivity to
100 nAJdiv (1 nA resolution). Both unmagnified
and magnified accuracy are within 3%. Emitter
Current: Range is 1 nAJdiv to 2 mAJdiv in 1-2-5
sequence of 20 steps. Xl0 Mag extends max
sensitivity to 100 pAJdiv. Both unmagnified and
magnified accuracy are within 3%.
Step Generator Display - Range is 1 or 10
steps/diY, or 1 step/ l0 div. Unmagnified and magnified accuracy are within 3%.
Display Offset - Vertical offset of display centerline value up to 10 div in 21 half-div steps.
Digital Storage Vertical Acquisitions - AJD
Converter: Resolution is 10 bits for 10.24 divisions,
100 counts per division. Maximum data points are
1024. Maximum sampling rate is line frequency
Xl024. Minimum sampling rate is line frequency
X2. Collector Current: Range is 1 JlAJdiv to 2 AJdiv
in a 1-2-5 sequence of 20 steps. X10 mag extends max sensitivity to 100 nAJdiv (1 nA resolution). Unmagnified accuracy is within 1.5% of
readout +0.03 div of setting with dot cursor.
Magnified accuracy is within 0.5% of readout
+ 0.03 div of setting with dot cursor. Emitter Current: Range is 1 nAJdiv to 2 mAJdiv in a 1-2-5 se·
quence of 20 steps. Xl0 mag extends max sensitivity to 100 pAJdiv (1 pA resolution). Unmagnified
accuracy is within 1.5% of readout +0.03 div of
setting + 1 nA with dot cursor. Magnified accuracy is within 0.5% of readout +0.03 div of setting
with dot cursor.
Nonstore Horizontal Deflection System Collector Volts: Range is 50 mV/div to 500 V/div in a
1-2·5 sequence of 21 steps. Xl0 mag extends max
sensitivity to 5 mV/div (50 JlV resolution). Unmagnified and magnified accuracy are within 3%. Basel
Emitter Volts: Range is 50 mV/div to 2 V/div in a
1-2-5 sequence of 6 steps. Xl0 mag extends max
sensitivity to 5 mV/div (50 JlV resolution). Unmagnified and magnified accuracy are within 3%. Step
Generator Display: Range is 1 or 10 steps/div, or 1
step/l0 div. Unmagnified and magnified accuracy
are within 3%. Display Offset: Horizontal offset of
display centerline value up to 10 div in 21 half-div
steps.
Digital Storage Horizontal Acquisition - AJD
Converter Acquisition: Resolution is 10 bits for
10.24 diy, 100 counts per div. Sampling rate is 2
to 1024X line frequency. Collector Volts: Range is
50 mV/div to 500 V/div in a 1-2-5 sequence of 21
steps . Xl0 mag exten d s max sensitivity to
5 mV/div (50 JlV resolution) . Unmagnified accuracy is within 1.5% of readout +0.03 div of setting
with dot cursor. Magnified accuracy is within
0.5% of readout +0.03 div of setting with dot
cursor. Base/Emitter Volts: Range is 50 mV/div to
2 V/div in a 1·2-5 sequence of 6 steps. Xl0 mag
extends max sensitivity to 5 mV/div (50 JlV resolution). Unmagnified accuracy is within 1.5% of
readout +0.03 div of setting with dot cursor.
Magnified accuracy is within 0.5% of readout
+0.03 div of setting with dot cursor. Acquisition

380

Modes (Normal, Envelope and Average): Envelope is vertical or horizontal. Average is moving
average with weight of V. or V32.
CRT
CRT - 7 inch diagonal (173 mm), electrostatic
deflection, GH (P31) phosphor.
Readout - Automatic on·screen display. Over
range is shown by a flashing display. 100 pA to
2 AJvertical div; 5 mV to 500 V/horizontal div; 5 nA
to 200 mA and 5 mV to 2 V per step.
BETA or gm/ Division - 500 nano to 400 mega
for Beta and 50 nanoS to 400 S for gm. Cursor is
4·digit horizontal and vertical values without XlO
mag, 5'digit with mag. Offset is 4·digit value. Aux·
iliary supply is -40 V to +40 V.
Text Display - Text characters are alphanumeric fonts 1, accessible via GPIB; SP,!, ... A,B,
... 0,1-,9.1, ... a,b, ... y,z, ... ; u is recognized
as micro. Or: Alphanumeric fonts 2, accessible via
front panel; A,B, ... , Y,Z,(space), m,u,n,p, ,,O,I ,
. . . 9,-,/,*,(.); u is recognized as micro.
Maximum Text Characters - 24 letters.
Character Size - Approximately 3 mm high,
2mm wide.
ELECTRICAL
M.xlmum
output Voltage

M.xlmum
Output Current

±40 V

±20 A

± 2UXl V
±40 V
±40 V
±20 V

± 20 A
±2 A
@ ±lO mA
@ tOOmA

± 40 V

±2 A

Base. Base Sense:
Emitte<, Emitter Sense

Connector. (Collector, Collector Sense)
Adaptor Connectors
Step Gen Out Connector
Aux Supply Connector
Ext Base
or Emitte< Connector

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Service Manual - Order 070-6065{)()
Calibration Fixture 370 Maintenance.

$45
$405

Order 067·128&00

Socket Adaptors HC100 Plotter·' -

See page 388
Four pen color plotter.

See page 445.
K217. See page 362.

Cart -

$495

-, To order, contact your IoeBI Tektronix Sales Office.

C-59A, C-SC, C-7 -

CAMERAS
See pages 454, 450, 448

2N3984 FA" rL'" OF CURV S

2flfl,aA

e6211A

,""'''Wl'''~'l''~lJ.U."UH
uu ,.
I
2 ••

".IiI
e

fJO.,A

lee

e ,ee v

Envelope Mode and Crosshair Cursor-Capture and display maximum and minimum excursions of digitized
curves. Deteet sublfe changes over time that you might
otherwise overlook, as, for example, OUT thermal drift.
The crosshair cursor in this application shows predrifl
conditions.

POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges 115 V ac, 230 V ac.
High: 107 V ac to 132 V ac, 214 V ac to 250 V ac.
Low: 90 V ac to 110 V ac, 180 V ac to 220 V ac.
Line Frequency Range - 48.0 to 66.0 Hz.
Power Consumption - Maximum: 400 W, 3.5 A
at 132 V 60 Hz . Typical : 120 W , 1.3 A at
115 V 50 Hz.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dlmenalona

Width
Height
Depth

429
332

637

16.9
13.1
25.1

We lght ~

Net. standard
Net, with Option 1R,
Rackmount

35.0

77.0

36.0

79.2

Waveform Comparisons--Simuflaneously display real
time characteristic curves of a OUT, along with a prev~
ously acquired family of curves that are digitally stored in
intemal memory. Thus, you quickly and conveniently
compare the OUT with reference data.

ORDERING INFORMATION
370 Programmable Curve Tracer

$15,750

Includes: Blank adaptor, Kelvin Sense (A 1001): In·line
transistor adaptor, Kelvin Sense (A 1002); Axial lead di·
ode, Kelvin Sense (A (005); 4 and 6 lead dual width tran·
sistorl FET (A 1007) ; bubble memory cassette
(020·1310·00); protective cover (337·3344·00) ; spare
fuses 125 V/4 amp (159{)259-00); slow blow 2f1JV/2 amp
(159·0260·00); power cord (161·0066{)()); Operator's
manual (070·6064·00) ; Instrument Interfacing Guide
(070-6067 {)()); Pocket Reference Guide (07Q-6066{)()).

OPTION
Option 1R -

Rackmount

+ $375

INTERNATIONAL POWER PLUG OPTIONS
Option A 1 - Universal Euro 220 V, 50 Hz.
Option A2 - UK 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A3 - Australian 240 V, fIJ Hz.
Option A4 - North American 240 V, 60 Hz.
Option A5 - Switzerland 220 V, 50 Hz.

Oot Cursor Mode - Position an intensified dot cursor to
any point on the waveform and read out the vertical and
horizontal coordina tes. The dot cursor is also useful
when sending data over the GPl8.
The SONyeITEKTRONIX· 370 is manufactured and marketed in Japan by SonylTektronix Corporation, Tokyo,
Japan. Outside of Japan the 370 is available from Tek·
tronix, Inc., its marketing subsidiaries and distributors.

CURVE TRACER
SYSTEM

TEK
576
Tests Two- and Three-Terminal Discrete
Semiconductors
Power Capability Up to 220 Watts
Convenient Scale Factor Readout
Other Test Fixtures for Semiautomated Testing and Testing Power Devices to 1000 Watts

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Semiconductor R&D
Production Device Testing
Incoming Inspection

The Tektronix 576 Curve Tracer System
continues to hold the title ' standard of the
industry. ' The 576 accepts three different
test fixtures: the Standard Test Fixture, 172
Programmable Test Fixture (see page 383),
and the 176 Pulsed High Current Fixture
(see page 384). The 576 is an excellent
general purpose curve tracer system that
performs well in applications where high
current testing is required.
With the Standard Test Fixture, the collector
supply of the 576 delivers up to 220 watts
peak to the device under test. The step
generator can deliver up to two amps in
both its current and voltage modes of operation. With the 176 High Current Fixture, the
576 is capable of pulsed collector operation
up to 200 amps peak.

One of the features that sets the 576 apart
from the Tektronix 577 Curve Tracer System
is the display area adjacent to the 576's CRT.
These alphanumeric indicators provide readout of vertical and horizontal deflection factors, step amplitude, and Betaldiv or 9mldiv.
The Beta or gm readout saves the operator
from the arithmetic usually necessary to arrive
at these parameters. These indicators also
provide a permanent record of major knob
settings in 576 CRT photographs.

Other features of the 576 Curve Tracer
include: adjustable current limiting in the
step generator; either 300 J.l.s or 80 J.l.S pulse
width in pulsed base operation; pushbuttons to check display zero and calibration; and an illuminated graticule.
A safety interlock protects the operator
from dangerous voltages. For collector voltages greater than 15 V, a plastic protective
safety shield must be in place over the test
terminals and its lid closed before collector
voltage can be applied.

Another unique feature of the 576 is the
Calibrated Display Offset. Combining a calibrated position control and a display magnifier, the Display Offset increases resolution / ; _
and allows the operator to make more pre,~
cise measurements.
, "",""
"

" t» ~

' ~

- , "'" 0

.
-. , ~~

Standard Test Axture.

TEK

CURVE TRACER
SYSTEM

CHARACTERISTICS
COLLECTOR SUPPLY
Modes/Polarity - Norm: Ac (at line frequency);
positive or negative full-wave rectified ac. Dc:
Positive or negative dc. Leakage: Emitter current
rather than collector current measurements.
1000X increase in vertical deflection sensitivity
(1 nA/div).

Voltages. 1

DEFLECTION CONTROLS
Display Accuracies· 1

POWER REQUIREMENTS
Voltage Ranges - 90 V ac to 136 V ac or

Off.et and Magnified
With Centertlne
Value From:

DI.play Mode.
No""al
(unmagnlfled)

100-40

35-15
dlv

10-0

dlv

Vertical Collector
Current

Normal and
Dc Modal

dlv

Range

15 V

75 V

350 V

1500 V

Horizontal
Collector Volts

Max Continuous
Peak Current

10 A

O.S A

0.1 A

Horizontal Base
Volts

>20 A

> 4A

>1 A

>0.2 A

Leakage Mod.

Peak Pulse
Current

"' Peak open circuit voltages within + 35% and - 5 % of Indi-

cated range.

Series Resistance -

From 0.3 n to 6.5 Mn in
12 steps, all within 5% or 0.1 n . Peak Power Limit
Setting: 0.1 W, 0.5W, 2.2W, 10W, 5OW, 22OW.
Safety Interlock - Protects operator from dangerous voltages.

STEP GENERATOR
Current Mode - Step/Offset Amplitude Range:
5 nA/step (with XO.1 Mult) to 200 rnA/step, 1-2-5
sequence. Maximum Current (Steps and Aiding
Offset): X20 amplitude setting, except X10 (2 A)
at 200 rnA/step and X15 (1 .5 A) at 100 rnA/step.
Maximum Voltage (Steps and Aiding Offset): At
least 10 V. Maximum Opposing Offset Current:
X10 amplitude setting or 10 rnA, whichever is
less. Maximum opposing voltage is limited at 1 V
to 3V.
Voltage Mode - Step/Offset Amplitude Range:
5 mV/step (with XO.1 Mult) to 2 V/step, 1-2-5 sequence. Maximum Voltage (Steps and Aiding Offset): X20 amplitude switch setting, 40 V maximum. Maximum Current (Steps and Aiding Offset): At least 2 A at 10 V, derating to 10 rnA at
40 V. Short Circuit Current Limiting: 20 rnA ,
100 rnA , 500 rnA + 100%, -0%; 2 A +50%,
-0%. Maximum Opposing Offset Voltage: X10
amplitude setting. Maximum Opposing Current:
Limited between 5 rnA and 20 rnA.
Accuracy - Incremental: Within 5%, between
steps, within 10% with Xl .0 Mult. Absolute: Within
2% of total output including offset, or 1% of amplitude setting, whichever is greater. Offset Multiplier: Continuously variable from 0 to X10 the amplitude setting, either aiding or opposing the step
polarity.
Step Rates - Selectable at X1 , X2 or X4 line
frequency.
Pulsed Steps - = 80 J.lS or 300 J.lS width.
Step/Offset Polarity - Same as Collector Supply polarity and positive in ac position. Polarity
can be independently inverted with Step/Offset
Polarity control or from the test fixture.
Step Family - Repetitive or single family.
Number of Steps - Selectable from 1 to 10.
Vertical Deflection Factor - Collector Current:
1 J.lA/div to 2 A/div, 20 steps in 1-2-5 sequence
(0.1 J.lA/div with X10 magnification). Emitter Current: 1 nA/div to 2 mA/div, 20 steps in 1-2-5 sequence. Step Generator: 1 step/div.
Horizontal Deflection Factor - Coliector
Volts: 50 mV/div to 200 V/div, 12 steps (5 mV/div
with X10 magnification). Base Volts: 50 mV/div to
2 V/div, 6 steps (5 mV/div with X10 magnification).
Step Generator: 1 step/div.

382

Vertical
EmiHer Current
10nAldrv to
2mA1drv

3%±lnA

1 nAldrv to
200 "AIdrv
S nAldrv,
2nA1drv,
1 nAldrv

Not Applicable
2%±
1 nA

4%±
1 nA

3%±
InA

Not Applicable

S% ± 1 nA

> 1 "AIdrv

l00nAldrv,
10 nAldrv,
1 nAldrv

Vert drv

2OOnAldrv,
20 nAldrv,
2 nAldrv

3%+
50mVl
Vert d rv

Not Applicable

SOOnAld"rv,
50 nAldrv,
S nAldrv

3% +
125 mVi
Vert d rv

Not Applicable

3% +

25mVl
Not Applicable

Vertical

Horizontal

4%
4%

Dlmenllonl

Width
Height
Depth

299

In
11 .8
lS.0
23.3

381
591

Weight""

Net
Shipping

32.0
48.S

Ib
70.S
107.0

STANDARD TEST FIXTURE (650-0459-01)
A plug-in fixture with two sets of five pin test terminals, the Emitter Grounded or Base Grounded
switch, Left-Off-Right switch, Step Gen Output,
Ext Base or Emitter input, and the Safety Shield.
The test terminals accept either the six pin universal adaptors, three pin adaptors, or the high-power transistor adaptors with Kelvin contacts.

Step Generator
Mode
S%

ORDERING INFORMATION

576 Curve Tracer With Standard

"' As 8 percentage of highest on-screen value.

Test Fixture

Displayed Nolse· 1
15 V

75 V

350 V

1500 V

Vertical Collector

Vertical EmiHer

1 nA

InA

S nA

Horizontal Base

SmV

S mV

SmV

Horizontal Collector

S mV

SmV

20mV

200 mV

"' 1% or less, or the values shown.

Position Controls -

Fixed 5 div increments
within 0.1 div. Continuous fine control over 5 div
or less.
Display Offset - 21 calibrated positioning increments, vertically or horizontally, of 0.5 div or
5 div with X10 Magnifier.

CRT
CRT -

+40°C. Nonoperating: -40°C to +65°C.
Operating: To 3000 m (10,000 ft).
Nonoperating: 15000 m (50,000 tt) .
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each
of the three major axes. 0.04 cm (0.015 in) p-p displacement 10 Hz to 50 Hz to 10 Hz in one minute
cycles. Held for three minutes at 50 Hz.
Shock - Nonoperating: 30 g 's, 'k sine, 11 ms
duration in each direction along each major axis.
Total of six shocks.
Safety - CSA Certified (CSA 556 B).

Altitude -

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Horizontal CoIIec·
tor Base Volts with
EmiHer Current of:

Range

180 V ac to 272 V ac (six positions).

Line Frequency - 48 Hz to 66 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption (Including
OUT Power) - 305 W. Standby Power: ... 60 W.
ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY
Ambient Temperature - Operating: + 10°C to

165 mm (6.5 in) rectangular with 10 cm x
10 cm division (12 cm usable horizontal) parallaxfree, illuminated graticule, GH (P31) phosphor
standard. Accelerating potential is 4.0 kV.
Readout - The readouts , adjacent to CRT, are
digital indicators of the following parameters: Per
Vert Div from 1 nA/div to 2 A/div; per Horiz Div
from 5 mV/div to 200 V/div; Per Step from 5 nA/
step to 2 A/step, 5 mV/step to 2 V/step; f3 (Beta)
or gm, per Div from 1 J.I to 500 k calculated from
CurrenUDiv, X10 Mag, Step Amplitude, and XO.1
Mult.

$13,870

Includes: Standard test fixture (65O-O459{)1): transistor
adaptor (0 13'OO9!1{)2): FET adaptor (013.()()99{)2): TOO
adaptor (013- ± 2 V x attenuator will cause input protection circuitry to switch
input to 1 MO.
Shaped Out - Shaped replica of signal being
measured, aids proper triggering on complex
waveforms (~1oo mV typically to 350 MHz into
500 load).
Arming Input - Permits measurements of complex waveforms. A TTL high allows averaging of
selected events within a measurement.
FREQUENCY A
Range - 36 J'Hz to 350 MHz.
Resolution -

± LSD ± 1.4 x A Trigger Jitter Erro~ (Frequency A)2
N
Accuracy Resolution ± (Time Base Error x Frequency A)
PERIOD A
Range - 3.125 ns to 7.6 hrs.
Resolution -

± LSD ± 1.4 x A Trigger Jitter Error
N
Accuracy Resolution ± (Time Base Error) x Period A.

392

TEK

TM 5000
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

RA'RO B/A
Range - 1()-3 to 1()9 (Frequency Range: 36!tHz
to 350 MHz).
Resolution ± LSD ± 1.4 x B Trigger Jitter Error x Frequency B

N
Accuracy -

Same as Resolution.

TIME A--B
Range - 2.0 ns to 7.6 hrs.
Minimum Dead Time - 12.5 ns (stop to start).
Resolution ± LSD + _1_ x (± A Trigger Jitter Error

.[N

± B Trigger Jitter Error)
Accuracy - Resolution ± (Time Base Error x
Time A -- B) + (B Trigger Slew Error) - (A Trigger Slew Error) ±(Channel Delay Mismatch"').
Channel Delay Mismatch - <2 ns between
front panel inputs.
Resolution - Best time A--B Avg resolution=
±1 ps.
Repetition Rate - <70 MHz.
" Csn be removed with 'NuH-.

EVENTS B DURING A
Range - lO-s to 1()9.
Maximum B Frequency - 350 MHz.
Maximum A Frequency - 80 MHz.
Minimum A Pulse Width - 4.0 ns.
Minimum Time Between A Pulses - 8.5 ns.
Minimum Dead Time Between Pulses .... a.5ns.
Resolution -

+ LSD + Frequency B

.[N

± (Trigger Jitter Error CH A start edge
± Trigger Jitter Error CH A stop edge).
Accuracy - Resolution + Frequency B (Stop
Slew Rate Error - Start Slew Rate Error) + Frequency B x (5 ± 2 ns).

WIDTH A
Range - 4 ns to 7.6 hrs.
Minimum Dead Time Between Pulses 1.6 ns.
Resolution ± LSD +

~ ± Start Trigger Jitter Error

± Stop Trigger Jitter Error)
Accuracy - Resolution ± (Time Base Error x
Width A) + (Stop Slew Rate Error - Start Slew
Rate Error) ± 2 ns.
Repetition Rate - 50 MHz.

DIGITAL
COUNTER

TIME MANUAL
Rang,e - 0 to 3.125 x 1()4 s (",,8 hrs).
Resolution - ±LSD (100ms).
Accuracy - ± Resolution ± (Time Base Error x
TIme).
TOTALIZE A
Range - 0 to 1()9 counts.
Repetition Rate - 0 to 350 MHz.
TOTALIZE A+B
Range - 0 to 1()9 counts (A+B ""1()9).
Repetition Rate - 0 to 350 MHz.
TOTALIZE A-B
Range - -1 x 1Q8 to + 1 x 1()9 (either A > 10'2
or B > 10'2 will cause overflow).
Repetition Rate - 0 to 350 MHz.
RISE/FALL A
Range - 4 ns to 1()4 s (50 11) 5 ns to 1()4 s
(1 Mil).
Repetition Rate - Minimum time between rising (falling) edges is 12.5 ns (80 MHz).
Input Amplitude - (1 .4 V to 8 V) x Attenuation
(50 11), (0.7 V to 4 V) x Attenuation (1 Mil).
Resolution ± LSD +_1_ (± Start Trigger Jitter Error

.[N

± Stop Trigger Jitter Error)

Accuracy - Resolution ± (Time Base Error x
Rise time/Fall time) ±2 ns ±4 mV x Slew Rate A
Error (near 10%) ±4 mV Slew Rate A Error (near
90%).
PROBE COMPENSATION
Display - 1 or 0 for each channel.
Accuracy - Probe Attenuation x Counter Attenuation x 0.300 (%).
RESOLUTION AND ACCURACY
DEFINITIONS
Trigger Jiner Error (Seconds RMS) (en1)2 + (en2)2 (Volts RMS)
Input Slew Rate at trigger point (V/s)
Where: en 1- 140J' V RMS typical COUlter input noise for
1 Mn filter on; 250pV RMS typical for 1Mn,

filter off and 340pV RMS typical for 500.
en2=RMS Noise Voltage of input signal8t trigger
point measured with 350 MHz bandwidth.

Slew Rate Error (Seconds)Trigger Level Error (V)*'
Input Slew Rate at Trigger Point (V/s)
", Trigger level error=
All funclions
except Width
and Events 8
During A

Positive

WidthAJL

Start Edge

Slope
Negative

Slope

Stop Edge

L..J

Start Edge
Stop Edge

Events 8
During A

Trigger accuracy limes
AnN factor

The minimum number of averages is selected by
the Averages button and the T 1 buttons in decade steps from 1 to 1()9. At Channel A repetition
rates above ",,250 Hz, the actual number of averages will be:
N=[Frequency A (Hz) x 4 msj + Averages.
N=Averages setting (below 250 Hz).
This calculation typically leads to better than expected resolution in the displayed answer for
small N with only minimal impact on measurement
time. It does mean, however, that Arming must be
used where only N= 1 is desired for signals
...250 Hz.
In the Auto mode, the counter measures with a
fixed measurement time of about 300 ms (or the
time for one event, whichever is greater).
N = Frequency A (Hz) x 0.3 s (N always ... 1).
Time Base Error - The sum of all errors specified for the time base.

TIME BASE
Crystal Frequency - 10 MHz.
Temperature Stability ± 2 x 10-1 , O°C to
+50°C.
Warm-Up Time - ±2 x 10-1 of final frequency
in <10 minutes when cold started at 25°C.
Aging Rate - ~1 x 10-s/day at time of shipment, 4 x 10-s/week after 30 days of continuous
operation, 4 x 1o-e/year after 60 days of continuous operation.
Setabllity - Adjustable to within ±2 x 10-s .

REAR INTERFACE
Inputs Arming; reset; external time base
(1 MHz, 5 MHz, or 10 MHz), prescale.
Outputs - 1 MHz clock .
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Power Consumption - 14.5 VA.
GPIB Data Output Rate "'" 10 readings/s
maximum.
TM 5000 Power Module Compatibility - The
DC 5010 is not compatible with TM 500 Series
mainframes.

ORDERING INFORMATION
DC 5010 Programmable Universal
CounterfTimer

$4,610

Include.: Shaped output cable (012.Q532-OO); instruction manual (070-3897{)2); instrument interfacing guide
(070-4611-00); reference guide (070-3553-00).

UtIlity Softwsre

For TM 5OXlI4041 . Order 062-6958{)1
$150
See page 359 for description and ordering information.
RECOMMENDED PROBE
P8125 -

5X Passive Probe.

$70

(Trigger IICClf8CY ± to my)
times AnN factor
Trigger accuracy times
AnN factor
(trigger accuracy + hyst)
limes AnN factor
(Trigger accuracy + hyst)
times AnN factor
Trigger accuracy times
AnN factor

Same as Width. except each number
is multiplied by (Frequency 8)

Notfl: Input hysttJrflSlS Is typIcBlly 50 mV p.p x IJllfJOOIItion.
N- Number of flVfJ(J/s SVfJl'IIgfJd.

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll tree: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99, In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext, 99

393

TEK

DIGITAL

DC 5009
DC 51" UNOVUUl CDUNTERITIMIR

:35/bqlb
. 11, "II "
I"YOII

•

QUI

•

IIH.

oUt

TM 5000
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

COUNTER

•

,a(e

_ Ut

l it

DP 501 Digital Prescaler. The TM 5000 rear
interfacing capability allows the operation of
the DP 501 to be controlled over the GPIB
through the DC 5009.
A field-installable modification kit is available
to upgrade a manual DC 509 Universal
CounterfTimer (page 406) to a GPIB programmable DC 5009 Universal Counter/
Timer.

CHARACTERISTICS
Display - Eight-digit LED display, automatic
decimal point positioning, LED indicators for
units, and measurement gate. Overflow is indicated by a blinking display.

Programmable Universal Counter/Timer

DC 5009
135 MHz 80th A and 8 Channels
10 ns Single-Shot Resolution
a-Digit Display
5 ps Resolution, With Averaging
Measurement Functions Include:
Reciprocal Frequency Measurement; Period;
Width; Time A ---- 8 Events 8 During A; TotalIze A ---- 8; Ratio; Time Manual; Arming
Auto or Selected Averaging to 10'ln
All Modes
Duty-Cycle Independent Autotrigger
Shaped A and 8 Channel Outputs
Probe Compensation

The DC 5009 single width Universal Counter/
Timer provides all of the measurement functions of the higher performance DC 5010 except rise time/fall time, null, and totalize

A ± B.
The powerful reciprocal frequency measurement technique allows up to eight digits of
resolution of low frequency signals in one
second or less of measurement time. The
DC 5009 has the same automatic averaging
feature as the DC 5010; selected averaging
of up to 10S events provides usable timeinterval resolution of 5 ps.
Like the DC 5010, the frequency measurement capability of the DC 5009 can be extended to 1.3 GHz with the use of the
See Digital Counter Selection Guide on page
405.

394

CHANNEL A AND 8 INPUT
Frequency Range - 0 MHz to 135 MHz dc
coupled, 10 Hz to 135 MHz ac coupled.
Sensitivity - 20 mV RMS sinewave to 100 MHz,
40 mV RMS sinewave to 135 MHz, 115 mV pop at
minimum, pulse width of 3 ns.
Attenuation - Selectable 1X, 5X.
Impedance - 1 MO paralleled by ~30 pF.
Trigger Level Range - +3.200 V to -3.175 V
with 25mV resolution (Xl). +16V to -15.875 V
with 125 mV resolution (X5).
Trigger Level Accuracy ± 45 mV
± 40 p.VI"C referenced to 25°C.
Dynamic Range - V p-p ~3 x attenuation, tr
~5 ns. V peak ~3 .2 x attenuation.
Autotrigger Frequency Range - 20 Hz to
100 MHz (Vin ... 125 mV pop).
Independent Controls - Slope + 1-, attenuation lX /5X, Couple acldc, Source Internall
Extemal.
Maximum Input Voltage
lX: 200 V peak; 400 V pop from dc to 50 kHz, derate to 15 V pop at 135 MHz. 5X : 200 V peak;
400 V pop from dc to 5 MHz, de-rate to 25 V pop at
135 MHz.
Shaped Out - Shaped replica of signal being
measured, aids proper triggering on complex
waveforms. Amplitude 0 V to ... +0.3 V from 50 0 .
Trigger Level Out - A dc level corresponding
to the actual trigger level. Accuracy within
± 30 mV of internal trigger level.
Arming Input - Permits measurements of complex waveforms. A TIL high allows averaging of
selected events within a measurement.
FREQUENCY A
Range - 100 p.Hz to 135 MHz.
Resolution ±LSD ± 1.4 x Trigger Jitter Error x (Frequency A'f
N
Accuracy - Resolution ± (Time Base Error x
Frequency A)
PERIOD A
Range - 7.40 ns to 3.05 hrs.
Resolution ± LSD ± 1.4 x A Trigger Jitter Error
N
Accuracy - Resolution ± (Time Base Error x
Period A).

RATIO 8/A
Range - 10--1 to lOS (Frequency Range: CH A
to 135 MHz; CH B to 125 MHz.)
Resolution ±LSD ± 1.4 x B Trigger Jitter Error x Frequency B

N
Accuracy -

Same as Resolution.

TIME A----8
Range - 15 ns to 3.05 hrs.
Minimum Dead Time - 15 ns (stop to start).
Resolution ±LSD +

x (±A Trigger Jitter Error

± B Trigger Jitter Error)
Accuracy - Resolution ± (Time Base Error x
Time A----B) + (B Trigger Slew Error - A Trigger
Slew Error) ± (Channel Delay Mismatch).
Channel Delay Mismatch - <2 ns between
front panel inputs and <3 ns between rear interface inputs.
Repetition Rate - <35 MHz.
EVENTS 8 DURING A
Range - 10-- 1 to lOS.
Maximum 8 Frequency - 125 MHz.
Minimum A Pulse Width - 15 ns.
Minimum Time Between A Pulses - 15 ns.
Minimum Time Between "A" Start Edge and
First "B" Event - 15 ns.
Resolution ± LSD + Frequency B

.,fN
± Trigger Jitter Error CH A start edge
± Trigger Jitter Error CH A stop edge.)
Accuracy - Resolution + Frequency B (Stop
Slew Rate Error - Start Slew Rate Error).
WIDTH A
Range - 15 ns to 3.05 hrs.
Minimum Dead Time Between Pulses Resolution ±LSD + _1_

15 ns.

.,fN
( ± Start Trigger Jitter Error
± Stop Trigger Jitter Error)
Accuracy - Resolution ± (Time Base Error x
Width A) + (Stop Slew Rate Error - Start Slew
Rate Error) ± 5 ns.
TIME MANUAL
Range - 0 to 3.05 hrs. May be extended with
GPIB.
Resolution - ±LSD (100 ms).
Accuracy - ± Resolution ± (Time Base Error x
Time).
TOTALIZE A
Range - 0 to 1.09 X 10'2 counts. May be extended with GPIB.
Repetition Rate - 0 MHz to 135 MHz.
PROBE COMPENSATION
Display - 1 or 0 for each channel.
AccuracyProbe Attenuation x 50 mV x 100 (%)
Vin at Probe
(2.5% nominal for X5 probe with 10 V pop at the
probe).

TEK

TM 5000
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

PRESCALER
DP 501

RESOLUTION AND ACCURACY
DEFINITIONS
Trigger Jitter Error (Seconds RMS) V (enl)2 + (en2)2 (Volts RMS)
Input Slew Rate at trigger point (VIs)

DP~'t DIGITAL 'IUSC"lUI

Where: en 1- 120 II V RMS typical counter input noise
en2- RMS Noise Voltage of input signal att~
ger point measured with 150 MHz
bandwidth.

Input sensitivity in the Prescale mode is

20 mV RMS to 1 GHz and 30 mV RMS to
1.3 GHz. A Low-Level indicator alerts the
user if the input signal amplitude is too low
for error-free counting,

Slew Rate Error (Seconds) Input Hysteresis/2
Input Slew Rate at trigger point (VIs)

An automatic gain control circuit provides
optimum immunity to Signal noise in the
Prescale mode.

Note: Input hystersis is typically 20 mV p-p,
N - Number of Events Averaged

The minimum number of averages is selected by
the averages control in decade steps from 1 to 1()II,
At Channel A repetition rates above ",,250 Hz, the
number of events averaged will be:
N=[Frequency A (Hz) x 4 ms] + Averages,
N=Averages setting (below 250 Hz),
In the Auto mode, the counter measures with a
fixed measurement time of about 300 ms.
N = Frequency A (Hz) x 0,3 s, (N is always ~ 1).
Time Base Error - The sum of all errors speci·
fied for the time base used.
TIME BASE
Crystal Frequency - 10 MHz,
Temperature Stability - ± 2 x 10-7 after warm·
up, O°C to +50°C.
Warm-Up Time - Within 2 x 10- 7 of final
frequency in <10 minutes when cold-started at
25°C,
Aging Rate - 1 x lO-S/day at time of shipment,
4 x la- 8/week after 30 days of continuous operation, 1 x lQ-8/year after 60 days of continuous
operation,
Setabllity - Adjustable to within 2 x 10-8 ,
REAR INTERFACE
Inputs - Channel A and Channel B input to
50 MHz (50 n impedance, maximum input 3,6 V
peak); arming; reset; external time base (1 MHz,
5 MHz, or 10 MHz), prescale,
Outputs - Channel A and Channel B shaped
outputs; Channel A and Channel B trigger level
outputs; 10 MHz clock; gate out.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Power Consumption - ",,12 VA.
GPIB Data Output Rate - "" 10 readings/s
maximum.
TM 5000 Power Module Compatibility - The
DC 5009 is not compatible with TM 500 Series
mainframes.

ORDERING INFORMATION
DC 5009 Programmable Universal
CounterfTimer

$2,775

Includea: Tip jack to BNC adaptor cable (175-3765-01);
instruction manual (070-3888-00); instrument interfacing
guide (070-4612-00); reference guide (070-3560-01),

Utility Software
For TM 5000/4041. Order 062-6958-01
$150
See page 359 for deSCription and ordering information,
RECOMMENDED PROBE

P6125 -

5X Passive Probe.

$70

The prescaling function can be activated in
either of two ways: manually, with a frontpanel pushbutton; or, by the 'Prescale On'
command to the counter when using a GPIB
programmable DC 5009 or DC 5010.

Digital Prescaler

DP 501
Extends Frequency Measurement
Capability to 1.3 GHz
Compatible With Most TM 5000
and TM 500 Counters
AGC
Low Level Indicator

The DP 501 Digital Prescaler adds 1.3 GHz
frequency counting capability to the
Tektronix DC 509/5009, DC 510/5010, and
DC 503A Universal CounterfTimers while still
allowing full use of all counter/timer functions. There is no need to change input connections as with counters which use the
conventional C-Channel input.
The DP 501 is placed in the signal line between the signal source and the counter's
input connector such that the signal to be
measured passes through the DP 501 , Two
operating modes are available, Prescale and
Direct. In the Prescale mode, the DP 501 divides the input signal frequency by 16 and
the associated counter's display to be multiplied by 16 (so that the counter will display
the correct frequency) , In the Direct mode
the signal is Simply looped through the
DP 501 and applied directly to the counter's
input; the counter's display is not affected,
This loop-through capability eliminates the
need for external switching of the input signal when changing from high frequency
measurements to low frequency or timeinterval measurements.

The DP 501 and the DC 509/DC 5009 or
DC 510/DC 5010 Universal CounterfTimers
can be used with the Tektronix 7L 14 Spectrum Analyzer (see page 176) and TR 502
Tracking Generator (see page 180) to provide counter accuracy measurements of
swept-frequency signals from 100 kHz to
1,3GHz.
The DP 501 operates in a single compartment of either a TM 500 or TM 5000
mainframe.

CHARACTERISTICS

Prescale Mode
Input - Frequency range is -S;;100 MHz to
~1.3GHz ,

Sensitivity - 100 MHz to 1 GHz is -s;;20 mV RMS
(-21 dBm), 1 GHz to 1.3 GHz is -s;;30 mV RMS
(- 17dBm),
Impedance - 50 n ac coupled; vswr -s;;2.2:1.
Output - Amplitude into 50 n is ;;..200 mV. Unterminated is 2X terminated value.
Direct Mode
Input - Connected directly to output.
Frequency Range MHz to >350 MHz,
Impedance - Loop through characteristic impedance is 50 n; nonterminated capacitance
",,20 pF (no connection to output),
Output - Connected directly to input. < 1 dB insertion loss up to 350 MHz, Powers up in direct
mode,
Overtoad Protection - Prescale: Input disconnects when input signal exceeds + 20 dBm
± 5 dBm for a period of ",,0.5 s or more,
Damage Level - PrescaJe: Input may be damaged if signal level exceeds +25 dBm.
Direct: 42 V peak maximum. Maximum current is
250mA.
Input Attenuation - Automatic: Up to 40 dB
range,
Low Level Indicator - lights when input signal
is below that required for error-free counting.
Tracking Generator Compatibility - Outputs
will drive two standard TTL loads. Inputs represent
two standard TTL loads. Requires arming input to
associated counter,

ORDERING INFORMATION
DP 501 Digital Prescaler

$575

Includes: Instruction manual (070-4332-00),

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

395

TEK

DIGITAL
MULTI METER

TM 5000
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

OM 5010

tor junctions. A Diode Test function is
provided for forward and reverse testing of diode and transistor junctions .

OM SIt' 'RDGRAMMAIlf DIGIUl MUt TIME If A

"",

I. -,

•f'"

IIt.Clt

.no

aGO'I1UII

••

1\11

The versatile TM 5000 rear interfacing
capability allows signals to be applied
to the OM 5010 via the rear interface
connector as well as via the front panel
input jacks. This front-rear selection capability allows the rapid comparison of
two signals or voltage levels, such as
the input and the output of a device,
without the need for external switching
of the signal. Selection of front or rear
signal input can be made under bus
control or by front panel pushbutton.

u.u~

o [)• iii

nlUl'

"i
I\,.

.................

""'"it

J
•
J

~[gJ

Programmable Digital Multimeter

OM 5010
4 '/2 Digit, Autoranging
Dc Volts, Ohms, True RMS (ac or ac+dc)
Diode Test
Comprehensive Math Functions:
dB Calculations; Averaging; Offset;
Scaling; Hi/lo/Pass

The OM 5010 Programmable Digital Multimeter measures dc voltage, resistance, true
RMS ac voltage, and true RMS ac+dc voltage. The internal math capability of the
OM 5010 provides most of the calculations
normally required for reducing raw measurements to decision-supporting information
without controller assistance. These calculations include averaging (up to 19,999 measurements), offset and scaling, conversion
to dBm or reference dB, and Hi/lo/Pass
comparisons . User-selectable constants
required for calculations can be supplied
either through the front panel keypad or via
the GPIB.
The internal math capability of the OM 5010
permits such specialized measurements as:
ac or dc current measurements through the
use of an external shunt resistor and a scaling factor equal to the ohmic value of the
resistor; comparison against a percent tolerance (as opposed to an absolute value tolerance) through the combined use of the
scaling and Hillo/Pass functions.
The low voltage (0.2 volt) ohms function allows in-circuit resistance measurements
without turning on parallel diode and trans is-

The OM 5010 is fully guarded, with the
Guard connector automatically connected to the low input when there is
no Guard signal lead inserted.
The Null function eliminates much of
the requirement for four-wire ohms connections by allowing the operator , or
the system , to null out lead resistance in resistance measurements. The Null function
also allows the difference between two
measurements to be displayed, either directly or as a dB difference.
A special low Frequency Response function permits stable readouts of low frequency ac voltages.
Range selection is either automatic or manually incremented. Measurements and calculations can be triggered by internal circuitry, a front panel pushbutton, a rear
interface signal , or a GPIB command.
Calibration of the OM 5010 is greatly simplified through the use of internal microprocessor-computed nonvolatile calibration
constants.

CHARACTERISTICS
DC VOLTS
Ranges - 200 mV, 2 V, 20 V, 200 V, 1000 V.
Accuracy·'
+1S·C to +2S·C
Voltage
Range.

± [0.015% of reading
+0.0'% of full scale
(2 counts)]

± [0.05% of reading
+0.05% of full scale
(1 count)]

2V through
200 V

± [0.015% of reading
+0.005% of full scale
(1 count)]

± [0.05% of reading
+ 0.05% of full scale
(1 count)]

1000 V

± [0.020% of reading
+0.010% of full scale
(2 counts)]

± [0.05% of reading
+0.1% of full scale
(2 counts)]

O·C to 18 · C + 28 ·C to +50 ·C
200mV

± [0.06% of reading
+ 0.035% of full scale
(7 counts)]

± [0.1% of reading
+0.1% of full scale
(2 counts)]

2V through
200 V

± [0.06% of reading
+ 0.03% of full scale
(6 counts)]

± (0.1% of reading
+0.1% of full scale
(2 counts)]

1000 V

± (0.065% of reading
+ 0.035% of full scale
(7 counts)]

±(0.1% of reading
+0.15% of full scale
(3 counts)]

·f

~80 dB at SO Hz to 60 Hz.
Guarded: ~l40dB at dc.
60Hz.

Valid for six months or 1000 operating hours, whichever occurs first, after calibration.

~l00dB

at SO Hz to

Normal-Mode Rejection Ratio -

~40

dB at

SO Hz or 60 Hz ± 0.2 Hz.

Maximum Resolution -

10 p.V.

Step Response Time (To Rated Accuracy)
Run Mode - Normal conversion rate is ";;0.53 s.
Fast conversion rate is ";;0.08 s.
Normal conversion rate is
";;0.33 s. Fast conversion rate is ";;0.06 s.

Triggered Mode -

Input Resistance 200 mV to 20 V Range: > 1()9 n.
200 V to 1000 V Range: 10 Mn ± 0.25%.
Maximum Input Voltage - 1000 V peak .
TRUE RMS AC VOLTS (ACV AND AC+DC)
Input Signal - Must be between 5% and 100%
of full scale.

Ranges - 200 mV, 2 V, 20 V, 200 V, 700 V.
Accuracy·'
I.e Volta and I.e Volta + De Volta
+18·C to +28·C

Normal and Fait Conver.ion

Voltage
Range.

20 Hz to
100Hz

100 Hz to
20 kHz

20 kHz to
100 kHz

200 mV
through
200 V

±(0.8% of
rdg +0.2%
of full scale)

± (0.2% of
rdg +0.2%
of full scale)

±(1.O%of
rdg +0.5%
of lui scale)

700 V
(15 kHz maxi'num)

±(0.8% of
rdg +0.6%
of full scale)

± (0.2% of
rdg +0.6%
of full scale)

O·C to +1 8 ·C. +28·C to + SO ·C
200 mV
through
200 V

±(1.25% of
rdg +0.35%
of full scale)

±(0.65% of
rdg +0.3%
of full scale)

700 V
(15 kHz maxi'num)

±(1.25% of
rdg +0.95%
of full scale)

±(0.65% of
rdg +0.95%
of full scale)

±(1.45%of
rdg +0.65%
of ful scale)

I.e Volta + De Volt. Only
+18 °C to +28 ·C
Voltage
Ranges

Normal and Fast Conversion Rates
10 Hz to 20 Hz

200 mV through
200 V

± (0.8% of rdg +0.3% of full scale)

700 V

± (0.8% of rdg +0.9% of full scale)

O·C to +1 8 ·C. +28 ·C to +SO·C
200 mV through
200 V

± (1.25% of rdg + 0.45% of full scale)

700 V

± (1.25% of rdg + 1.25% of full scale)

·f

Fa.t Converalon
Rate

200mV

See DMM Selection Guide on page 410.

396

Normal Converelon
Rate

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio (With 1 kD
Imbalance) - Unguarded: ~l30dB at dc.

Valid for six months or 1000 operating hours, whichever 0Ccurs first, after calibration.

Common-Mode Rejection Ratio -

Unguarded: Typically ~80 dB from dc to 60 Hz. Guarded:
Typically ~ 100 dB from dc to 60 Hz.
Maximum Resolution - 10 p.V.
Response Time - < 1.2 s (except for Low Frequency Response mode).
Input Impedance - 2 Mn ±0.1% paralleled by
200 Hz, ±5.0%. Resolution: Continuous mode, 4 digits, Trigger, Gate, Burst modes.
Frequency .e;;200 Hz. 4 digits . Frequency
>200 Hz, 3 digits.
Amplitude - Range: 20 mV to 20 V pop from
50 0 into open circuit.

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

397

TEK

TM 5000
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

POWER
SUPPLY

Accuracies "'
Freq...ncy

SI...

Sq.....

OJXl2 Hz to I kHz

± 3%

± 2%

I kHz to 100 kHz
I kHz to I MHz
100 kHz to I MHz

±3.5%

I MHz to 5 MHz

± 5%

I MHz to 10 MHz

5 MHz to 20 MHz
10 MHz to 20 MHz

± 5%, - 10%

± 3.5%

Tn.ngle
± 2%
± 3.5%

± 4%

+4%, - 5%

± 5%

± 10%

+ 4%, - 20%

., MtNlsured.t + 2S ' C ~ 10' C Into 50 0 /oed.t 50% symmetry. Reso/ution : 20 mV from 2.02 V to 20.00 V
p-p, 2mV from 202mV to 2.()()()V p-p, 0.2mV from
20.0mV to 2OO.0mV p-p.

Offset - Range: -7.5V to +7.5V from SOO
into an open circuit. Maximum peak signal plus
offset cannot exceed ± 15 V open circuit. Accuracy : All waveforms , exce p t square w ave
> 2 MHz, ~ ±(1% of the selected offset + 2%
of the signal p op amplitude +20 mY) ;
squarewave >2 MHz < ± (1% of the selected
value +5% of the signal pop amplitude +20 mY).
Resolution: 10 mV open circuit, 5 mV into 50 0
load. 0 V is also provided.
Output Impedance - 50 O.
Sinewave Distortion - 20 Hz to 19.99 kHz,
~ 0 . 5%; 20.0 kHz to 99.99 kHz, ';; 1.0%; 100 kHz
to 20.0 MHz, harmonics >30 dB down from
100 kHz to 20 MHz. Valid from + 15°C to + 35°C
into 50 {} load with 0 V offset, continuous mode,
50% symmetry, and AM, FM, VCF, and Complement off.
Squarewave Response - Rise time and fall
time are ~ 10 ns. Aberrations are .;;5% pop
+ 2OmV.
Typical Triangle Linearity (10% to 90%) 0.002 Hz to 200 Hz, ~1% ; 200 Hz to 100 kHz,
~ 1 %; 100 kHz to 2 MHz , ~ 2 %; 2 MHz to
20 MHz, ~ 10%.
Trigger Output - 0 V ± 100 mV to ;0. +2 V
from 50 0 source impedance into an open circuit.
TRIG, GATE, BURST, AND PH LOCK INPUT
Input Impedance - 1 MO or SO 0, internally
selectable.
Trigger Threshold - 0 V or + 0.5 V, internally
selectable.
Amplitude Sensitivity - ~250 mV pop.
Slope - Plus or minus, plus only in Ph Lock.
Minimum Pulse Width - 25 ns.
Maximum Frequency - 20 MHz.
Maximum Input Amplitude - ± 5 V peak into
50 0, ± 20 V peak into 1 MO.
Burst Range - 1 cycle to 9999 cycles.
Phase Lock Range - Automatic capture from
20 Hz to 20 MHz.
Phase Lock Time - Typically 8 ms to 88 s, depending on final frequency and start frequency.
AM INPUT
Input Impedance - 10 kO (± 5% when AM is
selected).
Sens i tivity - 5 V POp produces ;;"100%
modulation.
< 2% at 70% modulation and
Distortion ~ 2 MHz ; < 4% at 70% modulation and
> 20 MHz.
Bandwidth - Dc to ;;..100 kHz.
Maximum Input Amplitude - ± 20 V pk.

398

FMINPUT
Input Impedance - 10 kO.
Sensitivity - 0 V to ± 1 V modulates to ;;.. ± 1%
deviation from center frequency.
Distortion - ~2% .
Bandwidth - Dc to ~ 100kHz .
Maximum Input Amplitude - ± 2O V peak.

PS 5004

VCF INPUT
Input Impedance - 10kO ±5%.
Sensitivity - 0 V to 10.0 V produces a ~ 1000:1
frequency change, positive going voltage increases frequency.
Slew Rate - ;0.0.063 V/IlS .
Bandwidth - Dc to ~ 100 kHz.
Maximum Input Amplitude - ± 2O V peak.
OUTPUT HOLD MODE
Range - 0.002 Hz to 200 Hz. (Output holds at
instantaneous value.)
PHASE (TRIG, GATE, AND BURST MODES)
Range - ~90 ° to 1 MHz, decreasing to ~80 °
at 20 MHz.
Accuracy freq
±3° to 500 kHz; ± [7 ° + (2O
x 28% x 1<1>1
MHz
for freq >500 kHz. At 25 ± 10°C VCF off, output
in Normal and symmetry at 50%.
Resolution - 1° .

Programmable Precision Power Supply

PS 5004
n ffiPiiil
The PS 5004 complies with IEEE Stan-

PHASE (PH LOCK MODE)
Specifications apply for ambient temperature of
25°C ± 10°C.
Range - ~90 ° , 20 Hz to .;; 10 MHz; ~ 45 ° to
~ 10 MHz (Complementing the output extends
effective 0 range to ± 180°).
Accuracy - ± (2° + 5% of selected value).
Resolution - 1° .
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Power Consumption - 60 W.
IEEE Standard 488-1 978 Interface Function
Subsets Implemented - SH1 , AH1 , T6, L4,
SRI , RL1 , PP0, DCl , OT1 , C0.

ORDERING INFORMATION
FG 5010 20 MHz Function Generator

$3,995

Includea: Instruction manual (07D-3467{)1), instrument
interfacing guide (070-4613,00) , reference guide
(07D-356HX» .
UtIlity Software
For 1M 5OOlI4041 Order 062-6958-{)1
$ 150
See page 359 for description and ordering information.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Rear Interface Signal Cable Kit Order 02(}{)70HXl
Service Kit - Order 067-104HX>

$40
$380

dard 488-1978, and with Tektronix
Standard Codes and Formats.

o V to 20 V Roating Output
0.01 % Accuracy

500 ",V/0.1 mA Resolution
Constant Voltage or Constant Current
With AutocroslOver
Voltage and/or Current Monitoring Display
Remote Sensing
The single width PS 5004 Precision Power
Supply provides the high resolution voltages
and currents necessary in the characterization of transistor, IC, and other semiconductor and hybrid circuits and in the operation
of high performance strain gauges and other transducer systems. Its entire 0 V to 20 V
output is covered with a coarse and fine adjustment to provide rapid setability and
± 500 J.l.V resolution without the necessity of
changing ranges . Setability resolution over
the GPIB is also ± 5OO J.l.V. The supply output is available at the rear interface as well
as from the front panel terminals. Overall accuracy is ± O.01% ±2 mY.
The PS 5004 operates in either a constant
voltage or constant current mode with autocrossover between the two. Front panel annunciators indicate the mode at all times.
The operating mode is also reported over
the bus and the PS 5004 can be programmed to assert SAQ whenever operating conditions cause it to change from one
mode to the other.

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

TEK

TM 5000
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

The 41f2 digit display shows actual output
voltage, selected current limit, or actual
output current. The actual output voltage is
shown even when the PS 5004 is operating
in the current-limited or unregulated mode.
Display resolution is 1 mV or 0.1 mAo

POWER
SUPPLIES

PS 5010

The buffered high impedance sense terminals allow proper regulation of the supply
with up to 3 n of resistance in either of the
sense leads.

CHARACTERISTICS
CONSTANT VOLTAGE MODE
Range - 0 V to 20 V in 0.5 mV steps.
Overall Accuracy (Total Effect) - ±0.01%
+2 mV from + 15°C to +30°C, derating to
±0.035% +3 mV at O°C and +50°C. Source Effect: 500 p.V. Load Effect: 1 mV for a no load to
full load change in load current measured at
sense terminals.
Step Size Accuracy - 0.5 mV ±0.2 mY.
PARD*1 - .,.;2 mV Pop, 10 Hz to 5 MHz.
Load Transient Recovery*1*2 - <200p.s to
recover within 5.0 mV of final value for a 100 mA
load change.

Whenever a load change causes a
supply to change modes from constant voltage to constant current (or
vice versa), the corresponding display
also changes to show the known current or voltage value. This condition
can be reported over the GPIB via an
interrupt when the PS 5010 is in the
remote state.
".lIAn

OUTPUT

'Ii an

IrrH

o IJ

0 -..,- -

c:.... , _,.

:'il-== 0

•

''''''0

•

lH tc O

CHARACTERISTICS
•

c:aa"

U IU

00 =:J

Programmable Triple Power Supply

PS 5010

•, Characteristics measured at front panel terminals without
using remote sanse.
·z Without extemal snergy storage components.

CONSTANT CURRENT MODE
Range - 10 mA to 305 mA in 2.5 mA steps.
Overall Accuracy - ±2% +5 mA.

Dual Floating Supplies 0 V to 32
to 0.75 A (1.6 A to 15 V)

DIGITAL METER
Configuration - True 4112 digit free running voltmeter. Meter can be selected by front panel controls or via GPIB to monitor output voltage, current
or current limit setting. Measurements are displayed on the front panel and are available over
the GPIB.
Resolution - 1 mV or 0.1 mA.
Accuracy - Output Voltage: ±0.15% +6mV.
Output Current: ± 1.5% + 1 mA. Current Limit:
±1 .5% +5mA.
Reading Rate - ",,5/s.

0.5% Accuracy

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Isolation Voltage (Maximum A"owable Voltage Between Any Output or Sense Terminal
and Chassis Ground) - 42 V peak ac + dc.
TM 5000 Power Module Compatibility - The
PS 5004 is not compatible with TM 500
mainframes.
Power Consumption - 35 VA maximum.
IEEE Standard 488-1978 Interface Function
Subsets Implemented - SH1 , AH1 , T6, L4,
SR1, RU, PP0, DC1, DT1, C0.

ORDERING INFORMATION
PS 5004 Precision Power Supply
$1,850
Includes: Instruction manual (070-4442-00); instrument
interfacing guide (070-4789-00) ; reference guide
(070-4596-00).

UtIlity Software
For TM 5000/4041 Order 062-6958{)1
$150
See page 359 for description and ordering information.

Logic Supply +4.5 V to 5.5 V, to 3 A

Programmable Current Limits
Three Independent Digital Displays
Automatic Crossover

The PS 5010 Programmable Power Supply
provides a complete and rapid high performance solution for many system power supply applications. Its three supplies provide
the most commonly used voltages, and the
three digital displays automatically indicate
all six voltage and current limit parameters.
Automatic crossover from voltage to current
limit and a powerful set of GPIB status reporting messages allow the user to be constantly aware of the PS 5010's status.
The PS 5010's dual floating supply provides
+32 V and 0 V to - 32 V, both with
respect to a common front panel terminal.
Or 0 V to 64 V across the terminals of both
supplies together-with currents up to
0.75 A throughout the total voltage range
and 1.6 A below 15 V. The logic supply provides +4.5 V to +5.5 V with respect to
ground, with currents to 3 A. The user can
program the outputs on and off, and can
lock out the front panel controls with GPIB
commands.

o V to

The three supplies can be independently
programmed for separate voltage and current limits, and displayed in the LED display.

POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE
FLOATING SUPPLIES
Configuration - Dual floating with
shared common terminal.
Isolation - 150 V peak front panel, 42 V
peak from rear interface, 0.D15 p.F typical
shunt capacitance to ground.
Constant Voltage Mode
Range - Positive: 0 V to +32.0 V. Negative: 0 V to - 32.0 V.
Overall Accuracy - Total Effect:
± (0 .5% + 20 mY) . Source Effect:
±(0.01% +2 mY). Load Effect: ± 10 mV
for 1 A load current change (1 mV when using
rear interface output with remote sensing) .
PARD (Ripple and NOise) - 10 mV pop; 20 Hz
to 20 MHz.
Resolution - 10 mV ± 10 mV (typically ±2 mY)
to 10.0 V. 100 mV ±4D mV (typically ± 10 mY)
>10.0V.
Load Transient Recovery - 500 p's to recover
within 20 mV of nominal value for a 1 A change.
Change Response Time - 1 ms for up or
down change with maximum load, 20 ms for
down change with no load.
Constant Current Mode
Range - 50 mA to 0.75 A (1 .60 A at 15 V and
below) in high power compartment; 50 mA to
400 mA (0.750 A at 15 V and below) in two standard power compartments.
Overall Accuracy - ± (5% + 20 mAl Source
Effect: ± 1 mA line regulation . Load Effect :
± 10 mAo Output impedance is typically 5 kf!
shunted by 20 p.F.
PARD (Ripple and Noise) - 10 mA pop, 20 Hz
to 20 MHz.
Resolution - 50 mA ± 15 mAo
Change Response Time - 20 ms up or down.
LOGIC SUPPLY
Constant Voltage Mode
Range +4 .50 V to +5 .50 V, ground
referenced.
Overall Accuracy - ±SO mY. Source Effect:
± 1 mY. Load Effect: ± 10 mV for 1 A load current change (1 mV when using rear interface output with remote sensing).
PARD (Ripple and Noise) - 10 mV pop, 20 Hz
to 20 MHz.
Resolution - 10 mV ± 10 mV (typically
± 2mV).
Load Transient Recovery - 500 p'S to recover
within 20 mV of nominal value.

To order, ca" your local Tektronix Sales Office, or ca" Tek's National Marketing Center,
to" free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon ca" collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

399

TEK

TM 5000
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

PROGRAMMABLE
AUDIO TEST SYSTEM

Constant Current Mode
Range - 100 mA to 3.0 A (Foldback

SG 5010

AA 5001

characteristic below 4.5 V, maximum
short circuit current is < 1.5 A).
Overall Accuracy - ±(5% +20mA).
Resolution - 100 mA ± 30 mA.
Scaled Output - 10 mA - 1 mV
± (2% +2 mV) available at rear interface (not ground referenced) .
Overvoltage Protection - SeR
crowbar typically trips at 6 V to 7 V.

U " " NOCfIIlM .. Allf DISTOlt110N .IAl"U

nnnB
uu

.U
,

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
TM 5000 Power Module Compatl·
bility - The PS 5010 is not compatible with TM 500 mainframes.
Power Consumption - 250 VA maximum in high power compartment ,
200 VA in standard compartment.

IEEE Standard 488·1978 Interface
Function Subsets Implemented Same as PS 5004.

Programmable Audio Test System

ORDERING INFORMATION
PS 5010 Power Supply
$3,050
Include.: Instruction manual (07o-339HXl); instrument
inte rfac ing gu ide (070-4610-00); referen c e guide
(07o-3402{XJ).

Utility Software
For 1M 5(XXJ/4041 Order 062-695!H)1
$150
See page 359 for description and ordering infonnation.

SG 5010/AA 5001

IGPiiil

The SG 5010 and AA 5001 comply with
IEEE Standard 488-1978, and with Tektronix Standard Codes and Formats.

Fast, Accurate, Repeatable Measurements
Easy to Use, Minimizes Training Needs
Automatic Low·Cost Documentation of Test
Results

Automated Audio Test System
Advantages
Tektronix SG 5010 and AA 5001 programmable instruments in a computer-controlled test
system will make critical audio measurements consistently, accurately, and in two to
four seconds each. Even complex tests can
be made by technically unskilled operators
since the procedures are controlled by software in the controller . And , permanent
graphic or tabular records of test results can
be produced at very low cost

An SG 5010/AA 5001 based system will
automatically perform such industry-standard tests as harmon ic d istort ion to
IHF A202 , intermodulation d istortion to
SMPTE TH 22.51 , DIN 45403, IEC 268.3, and
IHF A202, frequency response to IHF A202,
and no ise or signal -to -no ise rat io to
IHF A202 (0A0 weighting filter complies with
ANSI specification S1.4 and IEC specification 179 for sound level meters). With the
Option 02 capability of the AA 5001 , noise
measurements can be made to CCIR 468-2
and DIN 45405 standards. The SG 5010 also
generates the burst signal necessary for dynamic headroom tests per IHF A202.
A basic automated system consists of the
SG 5010 Programmable Oscillator , the
AA 5001 Programmable Distortion Analyzer,
and an IEEE Standard 488 controller such as
the Tektronix 4041 System Controller. Frequency counters, signal switchers, interface
devices, disc storage, and hard copy units
or plotters can be optionally added to the
system.
The MP 2902 is a measurement package offering a total solution to your audio measurement requirements. It includes an automatic test program generator which
dramatically reduces software development
time and allows program development by
nonprogrammers. See page 377.

Other Measurement Capabilities
Features and flexibility of the SG 5010 and
AA 5001 permit a variety of other measurements to be easily automated. SMPTE-like
IMD measurements can be made at a variety of lower frequencies and any value of
upper frequency, and at 1:1 amplitude ratios in addition to the standard 4:1 ratio. A

400

CCIF test with the frequencies selected
near the upper band limit of the device under test has been shown to be a very effective and simple-to-implement test for transient or dynamic intermodulation (TIM and
DIM). Burst signals of any desired duty cycle can be generated for IHF dynamic headroom measurements and to test compressors and limiters; the between-bursts level
can be selected as Off or 20 dB below the
burst level. Power measurements are made
by a controller computation from a voltage
measurement across a known load resistance. SINAD measurements of sensitivity
of FM communications receivers are a standard capability of the AA 5001 plus an appropriate RF signal generator. The SG 5010
features an amplifier mode in which an external signal can be converted to the high
level, multiple impedance, balanced and
floating capability of the SG 5010 output circuitry. Fully program-selectable filters in the
AA 5001 allow various choices of bandwidth
for distortion measurements and weighting
for noise measurements, or rejection of interfering Signals. Phase measurements can
be added to the system by use of the
DC 5009 or DC 5010 Universal Counter
Timer.

TEK

TM 5000
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

CHARACTERISTICS (SYSTEM)
HARMONIC DISTORTION FUNCTION
Measurement Settling Time - Typically
..;;2.5 s above 100 Hz, increasing by 1 s/octave
below 100 Hz.
Residual THO
N - Yin ~250 mY, RMS response, all distortion, noise, and nulling resources
combined. 20 Hz to 20 kHz ";;0.0032% (-90 dB)
with 80 kHz filter. 10 Hz to 100 kHz ";;0.01%
(-80 dB) no filters.

TYPICAL SYSTEM RESIDUAL THO + NOISE
Yin ~250 mV with 80 kHz filter, RMS response.

PROGRAMMABLE
AUDIO TEST SYSTEM

Sine Flatness - 20 Hz to 20 kHz: ±0.05 dB.
10 Hz to 163.8 kHz: ± 0.2 dB.
Squarewave Rise Time - 1.5!J.S ± 10%.
Burst Range 1 cycle to 65535 cycles On.
1 cycle to 65535 cycles Off. Off level either
-20 dB or zero. All switching at sinewave zero
crossing. Triggered, gated, or free-running burst
modes available.
OUTPUT LEVEL RANGE AND ACCURACY
Balanced - Into Open Circuit: 200 JlV to
21 .2 V RMS . Into 600 fl : -72 .45 dBm to
+28.05 dBm.*'
Unbalanced - Into Open Circuit: 200 JlV to
21 .2 V RMS . Into 600 fl : -72 .45 dBm to
+22.05 dBm.*'
Resolution - 0.05 dB in dBm mode, 0.25% or
better in volts mode.
Level Accuracy (Sinewave) - 20 Hz to 20 kHz
±2% (0.2 dB). 10 Hz to 163.8 kHz ±3 (0.3 dB).
• , Rs - 50n. For Rs - l50 n, subtract 1.25dBm; for
Rs-6(X) n, subtract 5.35 dBm.

FREQUENCY . Hz

INTERMODULATION
DISTORTION FUNCTION
Measurement Settling Time - Typically ..;;2 s.
Residual IMD - Yin ~250 mY, RMS response .
SMPTE and DIN Tests - ";;0.0032% (-90 dB)
for 60 Hz and 7 kHz or 250 Hz and 8 kHz ,
4:1 ratio.
CCIF Difference Frequency Test ";;0.0018% (-95 dB) with 14 kHz and 15 kHz.
LEVEL FUNCTION
Measurement Settling Time - Typically ..;;2 s.
Flatness - ± 0.1 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz.

CHARACTERISTICS (SG 5010)
AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS
Sinewave, squarewave, SMPTEIDIN 4:1, SMPTE
DIN 1:1, CCIF, Sinewave Burst, IHF Burst ( - 20 dB
or Off between bursts), External Input (Amplifier
Mode).
FREQUENCY RANGE AND ACCURACY
Sinewave, Sinew ave Burst
SMPTE/DIN: 10 Hz to 163.80 kHz ±0.01%.
CCIF Center Frequency: 2.500 kHz to 163.80 kHz
±0.01%.
Squarewave: 10 Hz to 16.380 kHz ±0.01%.
Resolution in Above Functions
10.00 Hz to 163.80 Hz: 0.01 Hz. 163.9 Hz to
1.6380 kHz: 0.1 Hz. 1.639 kHz to 16.380 kHz:
1.0 Hz. 16.39 kHz to 163.80 kHz: 10.0 Hz.
SMPTE Lower Tone, CCIF Offset From Center Frequency - Selectable From: 40 Hz,
50 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, 125 Hz, 250 Hz,
500 Hz, all ± 2%.
Sine Distortion (Load ~ 600 0, THO Including
2nd Through 5th HarmoniCS) 20 Hz to
20 kHz: 0.001% (-100 dB). 20 kHz to 50 kHz:
0.0032% (-90 dB). 10 Hz to 20 Hz and 50 kHz to
100 kHz: 0.01% (-80 dB). 100 kHz to 163.8 kHz:
0.032% ( -70 dB) any individual harmonic.
SMPTE, DIN or CCIF Distortion - See System
Specifications.

OUTPUT IMPEDANCE AND CONFIGURATION
50 fl ± 3%, 150 fl ± 2%, or 600 fl ± 1%, balanced
or unbalanced, floating or grounded.
EXTERNAL INPUT
A floating single-ended input is provided for accessing the variable gain stage and high level
output amplifier, enabling the use of custom test
signals. Input impedance is 20 kfl; a 2 V RMS input (2.83 V peak maximum) provides a calibrated
output.
SYNC OUTPUT
A ground referenced TIL-compatible signal is
provided that allows stable oscilloscope display
of all functions. In sine and squarewave modes
the output is at the signal frequency. In the 1M
modes the sync output is at the lower or offset
frequency. In both burst modes the sync signal
follows the burst envelope.
SWEEP MODE
Linear or logarithmic sweep of amplitude or frequency in any function . Sweep is composed of
discrete steps. The following sweep functions are
programmable via GPIB or from the front panel:
swept parameter (frequency or amplitude), linear
or log sweep, number of steps up to 99, time per
step from 0.1 s to 25 s, start frequency or voltage,
and stop frequency or Voltage. Start and stop frequencies or voltages can be anywhere within the
range of the generator, and sweep direction can
be upward or downward. Pen lift and ramp outputs are available for interface to an analog
plotter.
STORED SETUPS
Ten different complete front panel setups can be
stored in the nonvolatile intemal memory and recalled from front panel push buttons or via the
GPIB. Additionally, the front panel settings at
power down are retained and used at power up.
PROGRAMMABILITY
All functions, parameters, and modes can be controlled over the GPIB using simple English-like
commands. All settings can be interrogated, with
the resulting response usable as a command to
return the instrument to that setting (Learn
mode). The GPIB address can be displayed and
changed from the front panel.

GPIB Interface Function Subsets Implemented - SH1 , AH1 , T6, L4, SR1, RL1, PP0, DC1,
DT1 , C0.

CHARACTERISTICS (AA 5001)
HARMONIC DISTORTION FUNCTION
Fundamental Frequency Range - 10 Hz to
100 kHz, automatically tuned to input frequency.
Distortion Ranges - Auto (100%), 20%, 2%,
0.2%, and dB (autoranging).
Accuracy - 20 Hz to 20 kHz is ± 1 dB. 10 Hz to
100 kHz is + 1, -2 dB. (Accuracy is limited by
residual THO + N and filter selection.)
Fundamental Rejection - At least 10 dB below specified residual THO + N or actual signal
THO, whichever is greater.
Minimum Input Level - 60 mV (-22 dBm).
LEVEL FUNCTION
Autoranging digital voltmeter displays input signal
level in volts, dBm, or dB ratios .
Modes - Volts, dBm (600 fl), or dB ratio with
push-to-set 0 dB reference.
Level Ranges - 200 JlV full scale to 200 V full
scale in ten steps, manual or autoranging.
Accuracy
Frequency

Volta

dBm

dB Ratio

20 Hz to 20 kHz

±2%
±1 count

±0.3 dB"
+0.5% of reading

10 Hz to 100 kHz

± 4%
±2 counts

± 0.5 dB"
+ 0.5% of reading

~ 100 I' V, IBv81 ranging Indicators extinguished. I 0.2 dB
at 1 kHz only. RatfIBss Is I O. 1 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, and
I O.3dB, 10Hz to 100kHz.

., Vin

Bandwidth - ~300 kHz.
Residual Noise ..;;3 JlV (-108 dBm) with 80 kHz and 400 Hz filters, RMS response .
";;1 .5 JlV (-114 dBm) with "A" weighting filter,
RMS response (standard instrument only).
..;;5 JlV (-104 dBm) with CCIR weighting filter,
quaSi-peak response (Option 02 instrument only).
INTERMODULATION
DISTORTION FUNCTION
Fully automatic SMPTE, DIN, and CCIF difference
tone measurements. Minimum input level 60 mV
( - 22 dBm). Accuracy ± 1 dB.
SMPTE and DIN Tests - Lower Frequency
Range: 50 Hz to 500 Hz. Upper Frequency Range:
Usable from 3 kHz to 163.8 kHz. Level Ratio
Range: 1:1 to 4:1 (Iower:upper). Residual IMD:
See System Specifications.
CCIF Difference Frequency Test - Frequency Range: Usable from 4 kHz to 163.8 kHz. Difference Frequency Range: 80 Hz to 1 kHz. Residual
IMD: See System Specifications.
ALL FUNCTIONS
Display 3 '/2 digits resolution at
",,3 readings/s o
Detection - Average or true RMS for waveforms with crest factors ..;;3. Option 02 replaces
average detector with quasi-peak detector complying with CCIR Recommendation 468-2 and
DIN 45405.

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

401

TEK

TM 5000
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

MAINFRAMES

Filters 400 Hz High Pass: - 3 dB at 400 Hz ± 5%; 18 dB
octave slope, at least 40 dB rejection at 60 Hz.
80 kHz Low Pass : - 3 dB at 80 kHz ± 5% ;
18 dB/octave slope.
Audio Bandpass: -3 dB at 22.4 Hz and 22.4 kHz,
both ± 5%. Complies with CCIR Recommendation 468-2 and DIN 45405.
'A' Weighting: Meets specifications for Type one
sound level meters (ANSI S1.4, IEC Recommendation 179). Option 02 replaces ' A' weighting filter with CCIR weighting filter complying with CCIR
Recommendation 468-2 and DIN 45405.
Ext: Allows connection of external filters.
Input Type - Balanced (full differential).
Input Impedance - 100 kf! ±2%, each side to
ground.
Maximum Input - 300 V peak, 200 V RMS either side to ground or differentially. Fully protected on all ranges.
Common-Mode Rejection - ~50 dB at 50 Hz
or 60 Hz. Typically ~ 40 dB to 300 kHz.
PROGRAMMABILITY
Function (Level or THD or IMD). Level Mode (Volts
or dBm). Input Level and Distortion Ranges (Autorange or default to range selected by front panel
switches).
Detector Type (RMS or AVG ; or RMS or Q-PK on
Option 02).
Riter Selection (400 Hz Hi Pass, 80 kHz Low Pass,
22.4 Hz to 22.4 kHz Band-Pass, ' A' Weight (or
CCIR WTG on Option 02, Ext Riter).
GPIB Interface Function Subsets Implemented - SH1 , AH1 , T6, L4, SR1 , RL1 , PP0, DC1 ,
DT0, C0.
FRONT PANEL SIGNALS
Input Monitor - Provides constant amplitude
version of signal applied to input. Output Voltage:
1 V RMS ± 10% for input signals > 50 mY .
Source Impedance: 1 kf! ± 5%.
Function Output - Provides a scaled sample of
selected function signal. Output Voltage: 1 V
RMS ± 3% for 1000 count display. Source Impedance: 1 kf! ± 5%.
Auxiliary Input - Provides input to detector circuit when Ext Riter button is depressed. Sensitivity: 1 V RMS ± 3% =1000 count display. Impedance: 100 kf! ±5%, ac coupled.
REAR INTERFACE SIGNALS
Duplicates of all front panel inputs and outputs
are provided to allow external filter connections or
oscilloscope monitoring within same mainframe
without exposed cables. Detector outputs with
specified scale factors also available to drive analog chart recorders, storage oscilloscopes, or similar devices.

ORDERING INFORMATION
SG 5010 Programmable Oscillator

$4,195

Includes: Instruction manual (07 350 MHz. Impedance: Loop through characteristic impedance
is 50 0; nonterminated capacitance ",,20 pF (no
connection to output). Output: Connected directly to input. < 1 dB insertion loss up to 350 MHz.
Powers up in direct mode.
Overload Protection - Prescale: Input disconnects when input signal exceeds +20 dBm ± 5
dBm for a period of ",,0.5 s or more.
Damage Level - Prescale: Input may be damaged if signal level exceeds +25 dBm. Direct: 42
V peak maximum. Maximum current is 250 mA.
Input Attenuation - Automatic: Up to 40 dB
range.
Low Level Indicator - Lights when input signal
is below that required for error-free counting .
Tracking Generator Compatibility - Outputs
will drive two standard TIL loads. Inputs represent two standard TIL loads. Requires arming input to associated counter.

DP 501
Extends Frequency Measurement
Capability to 1.3 GHz
Compatible With Most TM 500 and
TM 5000 Counters
AGC
Low Level Indicator

The DP 501 Digital Prescaler adds 1.3 GHz
frequency counting capability to the Tektronix
DC 503A, DC 509, DC 5009, DC 510, and
DC 5010 Universal Countermmers.
The DP 501 is placed in the signal line
between the signal source and the
counter's input connector such that the
signal to be measured passes through the
DP 501 . Two operating modes are available,
Pre scale and Direct. In the PrescaJe mode,
the DP 501 divides the input signal by 16
and causes the associated counter's display to be multiplied by 16, so that the
counter will display the correct frequency. In
the Direct mode, the signal is simply looped
through the DP 501 and applied directly to
the counter's input; the counter's display is
not affected. This loop-through capability
eliminates the need for external switching
when input signal frequencies occur in both
the Pre scale and Direct frequency ranges.

ORDERING INFORMATION
DP 501 Digital Prescaler

$575

The P6125 is a low-capacitance, 5X attenuation passive probe specially designed for
use with counter/timers. It makes possible
more accurate time interval measurements
of high speed logic signals. Five-times attenuation provides an optimum match between
the counter input characteristics and the
voltage levels of all common logic families.
The low input capacitance permits acquisition of high frequency signals with minimum
loading of the circuits under test.

CHARACTERISTICS
Attenuation - 5X.
Input Resistance - 5 MO input.
Capacitance - ",, 20 pF.
Bandwidth - Dc to 200 MHz.
Voltage Rating - 250 V (dc + peak ac) derated to 35 Vat 100 MHz.
Cable Length - 1.5 meters.

ORDERING INFORMATION
P6125 5X, 1.5 m Counter Probe

., AvailBble in packages o( 10 (015-0201 -04) or 100
(015-0201-05).
·z Available in packages o( 10 only (2()(H}1914J3).

Includes: Instruction manual. (070-4332-00).

The prescaling function can be activated in
either of two ways: manually, with a front
panel pushbutton ; or, when used with the
GPIB programmable DC 5009 or DC 5010,
by a Prescale command to the counter.
Thus, the DP 501 adds programmable frequency measurements to 1.3 GHz to the
Tektronix TM 5000 Family of GPIB programmable instruments.

408

$70

Includes: 8 cm ground lead (175-0263-01); accessory
pouch (016-0521 -00); two miniature alligator clips
(344-Q046-00); IC tip tester", two 13 cm ground lead
probe' 2 tips (175-0124-0 1); ret rac table hook tip
(013-0107-05); probe holder (352-0351 -00); insulating
sleeve (166-0404-01 ); instruction sheet (070-3617-00).

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

TM 500
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

TEK

DIGITAL
COUNTER/TIMER

DC 504A
-

CHARACTERISTICS

DC -..... CDUNfufflMEft

Display - Six-digit LED readout with automatic
decimal point positioning and leading zero suppression. LED annunciators indicate gate open,
resolution multiplier lock, and display overflow.

'i " ,-, n ,-,
/ '-, ,-' ':' 1..1 C,.
I

~.,

"'''\Hr.,

. ,nUl'. e lAU ." .....I•• I.IC.
FUN CTION

TlME/AVGI

f.(I" • • •• ~
111['

:l lfsrT

CountertTimer

DC 504A
Dc to 100 MHz
Period and Period Averaging
Width and Width Averaging
Autoranging
looX Resolution Multiplier
The easy-to-use DC 504A CounterlTimer
measures frequency from dc to 100 MHz,
with an internal prescaler being used for
frequencies above 10 MHz. Both direct and
prescaled counting are done through the
same input connector; no need to change
connectors when changing frequency
range. Autoranging permits virtual handsoff operation for most measurements. The
l00X resolution multiplier automatically provides 0.01 Hz resolution in one second-or
0.001 Hz resolution in ten seconds-on signals from 10 Hz to 25 kHz.
The DC 504A features period and width averaging of up to 1000 events. Selectable
dc coupling of the input eliminates the potential errors associated with making width
measurements on signals of varying duty
cycle with counters that are only
ac coupled . Input trigger sensitivity is
30 mV RMS across the entire 100 MHz frequency range. The triggering level range of
± 2 volts and the selectable 5X attenuator
provides a triggering range of up to
± 10 volts.
The totalize mode permits totalizing up to

999,999 events-and beyond, with overflow
-with a Display Update-Run/Hold control
to hold the display while the internal
counter continues to advance.

INPUT
Frequency Range - Front Panel: Dc Coupled
is 1 MHz to 100 MHz. Ac Coupled is 10 Hz to
100 MHz. Rear Interface: Dc Coupled is 0 MHz to
50 MHz. Ac Coupled is 10 Hz to 50 MHz.
Sensitivity - 1X Attenuation : 30 mV RMS
sinewave to 100 MHz; 85 mV PO
p (at a minimum
pulse width of 5 ns). 5X attenuation accuracy is
within 2% at dc.
Attenuation - Selectable 1X, 5X.
Impedance - Front Panel, 1X, 5X: 1 Mfl, paralleled by = 25 pF. Rear Interface, 1X, 5X: 50 fl
± 10% at dc.
Dynamic Range - 1X: ± 2.0 V peak, 4 V pop.
5X: ± 10 V peak, 20 V pop.
Trigger Level Range - ± 2.0 V x attenuation
minimum.
Maximum Input Voltage - Front Panel: 1X is
200 V peak; 400 V pop from dc to 50 kHz, derate
to 15 V pop from 1.33 MHz to 100 MHz. 5X is
200 V peak; 400 V pop from dc to 50 MHz, derate
to 20 V pop at 100 MHz. Rear Interface: ~4 V
peak.
FREQUENCY TO 10 MHz
Range - Dc Coupled: 0 Hz to 10 MHz. Ac Coupled: 10 Hz to 10 MHz.
Resolution - Multiplier Off: 100 Hz to 0.1 Hz,
selectable in decade steps or autoranging
(100 Hz to 1 Hz only). Multiplier On: 1 Hz to
0.001 Hz, selectable in decade steps or autoranging (1 Hz to 0.01 Hz only). Lock Range: 10 Hz
~ Frequency ~ 25 kHz. Multiplication: 1OOX. Lock
Time: ~ 5 s. Resolution multiplier automatically increases resolution by 100 when locked; may be
defeated by an internal jumper.
Accuracy - ± 1 count ± Time Base Error x Frequency. See page 407 for example.
Gate Time - 10 ms to 10 s, selectable in decade steps; or autoranging (10 ms to 1 s only).
FREQUENCY TO 100 MHz
Range - Dc Coupled: 0 Hz to 100 MHz. Ac Coupled: 10 Hz to 100 MHz.
Gate Time (Resolution) - 10 ms to 10 s (1 kHz
to 1 Hz), selectable in decade steps; or autoranging (10 ms to 1 s only).
Accuracy ± 1 count ± Time Base Error x
Frequency.
Prescale Factor - -;.- 10.
PERIOD AVE
Range - Dc Coupled: 0 Hz to 2.5 MHz. Ac Coupled: 10 Hz to 2.5 MHz.
Resolution - 100 ns to 100 ps, selectable in decade steps; or autoranging (100 ns to 1 ns only).
Events Averaged (N) - 100 to 1()3, selectable
in decade steps; or autoranging (100 to 1()2 only).
Accuracy ± 100 ns ± Time Base Error x Period
N
+ 1 4 X (Trigger Jitter ErrOr)
-

WIDTH AVE
Range - Dc Coupled: 0 Hz to 2.5 MHz. Ac Coupled: 10 Hz to 2.5 MHz.
Resolution _

± 100 ns

-IN
Events Averaged (N) - 100 to 1()3, selectable
in decade steps; or autoranging (100 to 1()2 only).
Accuracy ± 100 ns ± Time Base Error x Width.

-IN

± Start Trigg~itter Error

+ Stop Trigger Jitter Error

-IN

+ (Stop Slew Rate Error - Start Slew Rate Error)
±10 ns
TOTALIZE
Frequency Range Dc Coupled: 0 Hz to
10 MHz. Ac Coupled: 10 Hz to 10 MHz. Overflows
above 999,999. Display update Run/Hold will hold
display while counter continues to advance. Releasing Run/Hold will update display to new value.
TIME BASE
Frequency (at Calibration) -

10 MHz ± 1 x

10-1 .
Temperature Stability - ± 5 x 10-tl (± 5 ppm),
O°C to +50°C.
Adjustment Resolution - ± 5 x 10-8 .
Aging Rate - ~1 x 10-tl/year (~1 ppm/year).
EXTERNAL TIME BASE INPUT
10 MHz . Must drive 1 LSTTL load . VIH=
2.0 V/20,.A VIl=0.8 V/- 400,.A.
RESOLUTION AND
ACCURACY DEFINITIONS
Same as DC 503A except DC 504A has 100 MHz
bandwidth and input hysteresis = 30 mV pop
typical.

ORDERING INFORMATION
DC 504A Counter/Timer

$950

Includes: Instruction manual (07D-429HlO).

OPTIONAL COUNTER ACCESSORIES

Power Divider - GR, 50 n.
Order 017{lO82{)()

$760

Adaptors -

(GR to BNC female) Order 017- 95% Variable

Frequency R.nge

0.002 Hz to 2 MHz
200 kHz ± 10% with variable symmetry on

0.002 Hz to 2 MHz
200 kHz + 10% with variable symmetry on

DIal Accur.cy (% of Full
Scale ••cept Fa 5010)

Within 3%

Within 3%
With., 5% in sweep mode"

Cu.tom Frequency R.nge

Frequency StabiNty
(% of Full Scale)

<;0.05% for 10 min., <;0.1% for 1 hour, <;0.5% for 24 hours, constant temperature

Amplitude: Open Circuit

30 V p-p

15 V p-p

Into 50 0

o to -

A_
Off.et
PkSlg

60 dB in 20 dB steps
> 20 dB additional with AMPL control

Open Circuit

± 13 V dc, step allenuator decreases offset

Into 50 0

±6.5 V dc, step allenuator decreases offset

+ Offaat
Open CkcuIt

± 15V

Into 50 0

± 7.5 V

Output Imped.nce

SOli

SO li

Amplituda SI.......
Flaotna..
(10 kHz ref,
50 0 load)

± 0.1 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
± 0.5 dB 20 kHz to 1 MHz
± ldB1MHzt02MHz

± 0.1 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
± 0.5 dB 20 kHz to 1 MHz
± 1 dB 1 MHz to 2 MHz

± 0.5 dB 20 Hz to 200 kHz
± 2 dB 200 kHz to 2 MHz

±15V

Trtangle

Sq.........

Slne.a. . Ol.tortlon
(Mulmum Output,
50 0 Io.d)

Sq...re.av. R.epan. .
Trlangl. LInearity
(10% to 90%)
Trigger Output

± 0.5 dB 20 Hz to 2 MHz

<;0.25% 20 Hz to 20 kHz "
<;0.5% 20 kHz to 100 kHz
Harmonics:
<; -30 dB, 100 kHz to 2 MHz

<;0.25% 20 Hz to 20 kHz"
<;0.5% 20 kHz to 100 kHz
Harmonk;s:
<; -30 dB, 100 kHz to 2 MHz

<;25 ns rise/fall
< 3% p-p abemltions

<;25 ns riselfall
< 3% p-p aberrations

;;.99% 20 Hz to 200 kHz
.. 97% 200 kHz to 2 MHz

;;.99% 20 Hz to 200 kHz
;;.97% 200 kHz to 2 MHz

.. +4 V from SO II

.. + 4 V from SO 0

Impedance ",,2 kll
Trigger threshold level + 1 V + 20%

Impedance ",,2 kll
Trigger threshold level + 1 V ± 20%

± 90· variable stsri phase control

± 90· variable start phase control

Extemal Input

Trigger
Oate

± 90· variable stsri phase control

Ph... Lock

Counted Burat

With DO SOl

Logarithmic or Linear, Separate StarVStop Dials

Internal Sweep

DuratIon

1 ms to 100 s
± 1 V + 20% trigger level; ",,2 kII ilpuI impedance

Ext.m.1 Trigger
Ramp Output

<;0.3 V to 10 V from 1 kII ± 5%

O.te Output

.. +4 V from SO II

Other Mode.

Manual Sweep Trig; Manual Sweep;
Sweep and Hold

Amplituda Modulation

Voltage Controlled
Frequency (FM)

Up to 1000; 1 Frequency change with 10 V external signal
Slew rate ..0.3 VII'S, 10 kII input impedance

Nomln.1 Hz/Volt San.ltivlty 2 x Frequency Multiplier selling

2 x Frequency Multiplier

Output Hold Mode

Temperature .,

Operating: O·C +SO·C; Nonoperating: - 55· C to + 75·C

IEEE Standard 481

Mainframe Comp.tiblllty

TM 500ITM 5000

Page

416

417

Price

$925

$2,220

Additional acce ••orle. begin on page 489.

414

TEK

FUNCTION
GENERATORS

TM 500
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

SELECTION GUIDE
Application/Feature

FG 504

FG 502

Sine, Square, Triangle, Pulse and

Wevelonnl

Sine, Square, Triangle Pulse,

FG 5010

FG 503
Sine, Square, Triangle

Sine, Square, Triangle, Pulse and
Ramp with variable symmetry

Ramp WIth variable symmetry

or Ramp

Symmetry

7% to 93% Variable

5%, 50%, 95% Rxed

50% Axed

10% to 90%, 1% steps

Frequency Ringe

0.001 Hz to 40 MHz
4 MHz nominal with variable symmetry on

0.1 Hz to 11 MHz
Pulse and Ramp, 1.1 MHz

1.0 Hz to 3 MHz
Usable
Hz to 5 MHz

0.002 Hz to 20 MHz

01101 ACCUf8C)' (% 01 Full
Scale except Fa 5010)

Within 3'l(, to 4 ~.,
Withon 6% to 40 ~.,

Within 3'l(, 10 1 MHz
Within 5% to 10 ~

Wrthn5%

With user-installed capacitor

CUltom Frequency Ringe

Shipped with capacitor for 20 Hz to 20 kHz

Frequency Stebillty
(% 01 Full Scale)

..005% for 10 monutes, ..01% for 1 hour, .. 05% for 24 hours, constent temperat..e

Amplitude: Open Circuit

30 V pop

10 V pop

20 V pop

15 V pop

5V pop

10 V pop

Into 50 0

oto -SO dB on 10 dB steps

Anenu.tor
Offlet

Within 0.1% 01 selected Irequency

00gitaI LED Display
NA
..0.05% lor 1 tv, 0.05% for 24 twa ( ..0.1%
on trigger, gate, burst mode <200 Hz)"'
20 V pop
10 V pop

DigItal Control 01 foxed and variable

onI'/

10 mV p-p onto SO 0

Variable control

±l.5 V de
±3.75 V de

±5 V de

± 7.5 V de

± 7.5Vde

±2.5 V de

±3.75 V de

Open Circuli

±20V

±10V

±ISV

±15V

Into 50 0

±l125V

±SV

±6V

±7.S V

SO li

SOli

± O.S dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
±1.S dBO.l Hz to 11 ~

± O.S dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz

Into 50 0

Variable control

onI'/

< 10 mV pop with VAR control
Open Circuit

PllSIg+Offeet:

Output Impedlnce
Amplitude

±2dBO. 1Hzt03~

± 3'l(, from 0.002 Hz to 1 kHz
± 3.S% from 1 kHz to 1 ~
±S%from 1 ~toS~
+S%, -10% from S ~ to 20 ~

± 1 dB referenced to Sinewave

± 2% from 0.002 Hz to 1 kHz
±3.S% from 1 kHz to 100 kHz
±4% from 100 kHz to 1 ~
+4%, -S% from 1 ~ to 5 ~
+4%, -20% from S ~ to 20 ~

Slnewave

FI.-..
(10 kHz ref,
50 0 108d)

±OS dB 0001 Hz to 40 kHz
T. . . . .

±2 dB 40 kHz to 40 MHz

± 3 dB referenced to Sinewave

aq......eve

± 2% from 0.002 Hz to 1 kHz
± 3.S% from 1 kHz to 1 ~
±5% from 1 ~ to 10 ~
± 10% Irom 10 ~ to 20 ~

± 0.5 dB to 20 MHz
±2 dB 10 40 MHz
Slna.eve Dlltort!on
(M.xlmum output,
50 0 load)

..0.5% 20 Hz to 40 kHz"
Harmonics:
.. - 30 dB 40 kHz to 1 MHz
<- 20 dB 1 MHz to 40 MHz

..O.S% 10 Hz to SO kHz"
Harmonics:
.. -30 dB at all other frequencies

..0.5% 1 Hz to 30 kHz
.. 1.0% 30 kHz to :nl kHz
.;;2.S% :nl kHz 10 3 MHz

..0.5% 20 Hz to 19.99 kHz"
.. 1.0% 20 kHz to 99.99 kHz
Harmonics > 30 dB down, 100 kHz
to 20 MHz

.. 20 ns riselfal

..60 ns riselfal
.;;3 pop aberrations

.;;10 ns risellal
..5% p-p aberrations

Squa....v. R.epon. .

.;;6 ns nsellall fIXed 10 ns 10 100 ms variable
.;;S% pop +30 mV aberrations

. .3'l(, pop aberrations

Triangle LInearity
(10% to 90%)

> 99% 10 Hz to 400 kHz
> 95% 400 kHz to 40 MHz
type > 98% 0.001 Hz to 10 Hz

>99% 0.1 Hz to 100 kHz
>97% 100 kHz to 1 MHz
>95% 1 MHz to 11 MHz

>99% 1 Hz to 100 kHz
>95% 100 kHz to 3 MHz

> 98% to 2 MHz
>90% to 20 MHz

Trigger Output

>+2 V Irom SO II

+2.S V to SO llloed

+2.5 V 10600 0 load

+2 V from SO 0

Extem.1 Input

Impedance > 10 k!I
Sensitivity .;; 1 V pop
Trigger level - 1 V to + 10 V

Impedance .., 1 k!I
> + 2 V Gate Signal required

1 M!llSO II intemal setability
0.0 VIO.5 V intemal setability

± 90' variable start phase control

Rxed O' start phase

Trigger

20 MHz maximum
± OO' stari phase control to 10 MHz

Ph. .e Lock
Counted Burlt
1_ISweep
Duretlon
Extemal Trigger

± 90' variable start phase control

100 Hz to 40 MHz ± 00' phase range

With DO SOl

Logarithmic or l.Jnear, Separate Start/Stop Dials
0.1 ms to 100 s

No
No
No
No

100% With nominaiS V pop Input

100% with nominal 5 V pop input

Dc to 100 kHz modulation frequency
0.3 Vl ms, 10 k!I input impedance

Up to 1000: 1 Irequency"
change with 10 V external input

Nominal Hz / Volt Senlltlvlty 4 x Frequency Multiplier

1.1 x Frequency Multiplier

Output Hold Mode

0001 Hz 10400 Hz

Temperature-·

Operating: O' C to + SO' C; Nonoperating: - SS ' C to +7S' C

3 x Frequency Multiplier

10% of selected range
0.002 Hz to 200 Hz

INo

IEEE Stand.rd 418

Yes

Melnframe Competibility

TM SOOfTM 5000

TM 500ITM 5000

TM 5000 only

Page
Price.

417

416

':IJ7

$3,225

$1 ,095

$675

$3,995

Addltlonel acce. .orte. begin on pege 487,

415

TEK

TM 500
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

FUNCTION
GENERATORS

FG 501A

FG502

FG503
, ., Q.UINCY KJ

\ ' I

," "

' / 1I
IS

.............

I'OWfIl

/ /.

,./-:.,

--.
,w
,.."'.
2 MHz Function Generator

,..

11 MHz Function Generator

3 MHz Function Generator

FG 501A

FG 502

FG 503

0.002 Hz to 2 MHz

0.1 Hz to 11 MHz

1.0 Hz to 3 MHz

30 V Peak-to-Peak, ±13 V Offset

Five Waveforms

Three Waveforms

5 % to 95 % Variable Symmetry

VCF and Gated Burst

VCF

The FG 502 Function Generator provides
low-distortion sine , square , and triangle
waveforms, and positive or negative ramps
and pulses. Output frequency is continuously variable from 0.1 Hz to 11 MHz. The high
frequency range from 1 MHz to 11 MHz permits the versatility of the function generator
to be extended into the medium radio frequency range . VCF input permits the
FG 502 to be used as a sweep generator or
as an FM generator.

The FG 503 Function Generator provides
high-quality low-distortion sine, square, and
triangle waveforms. Six decade frequency
multiple steps, a custom position for userdetermined frequency multiplication, a dial
calibrated from 1.0 to 30 (uncalibrated from
0.1 to 1.0), and a frequency vernier control
work together to select frequencies in overlapping ranges from 1 Hz to 3 MHz. The output frequency can be swept over a 1000:1
ratio by an external voltage. Output amplitude and offset controls are provided . A
trigger output is available for controlling external devices or equipment. Amplitude up
to 10 V peak-to-peak can be developed
across a 50 n load (20 V peak-to-peak open
circuit). Selectable offset up to 3.75 V dc
across 50 n (7.5 V dc open circuit) is also
featured.

Trigger or Gate, ± Slope
60 dB Step Attenuator
~ 0.25%
~ 25

Sinewave Distortion

ns Rise/Fail

The FG 501A provides low-distortion outputs
from 0.002 Hz to 2 MHz. It is capable of
generating five basic waveforms-sine ,
square, triangle, ramp, and pulse-at output
levels up to 30 V peak-to-peak with up to
± 13 V of offset from a 50 n source. Waveform triggering and gating are provided with
a variable phase control to permit up to
± 90° of phase shift for generating haversines, sin2 pulses, and haver triangles. A step
attenuator provides 60 dB of output signal
attenuation in 20 dB steps with an additional
20 dB of variable attenuation. Variable symmetry from 5% to 95% provides ramps and
pulses. Pulse rise time is ~25 ns. Audio
sinewave distortion is ~0 .25% and audio
amplitude flatness is within 0.1 dB.
Because of its ability to generate low distortion sinewaves, the FG 501A is uniquely
appropriate for applications requiring audio
Signals.
Also useful in audio applications is the 0 dB
to 60 dB attenuator designed into the
FG 501 A.
The wide range variable symmetry of the
FG 501A is useful for generation of pulses
and ramps.

External gate input permits the FG 502 output in any of its modes to be controlled by
an externally supplied pulse to generate
bursts of various output waveforms. This
feature has application in wireless or radio
remote control equipment and in certain
phases of the telephone industry.

ORDERING INFORMATION
FG 502 11 MHz Function Generator
Includes: Instruction manual (070-170&01 ).

$1,095

ORDERING INFORMATION
FG 503 3 MHz Function Generator
Includes: Instruction manual (070-172HJ1 ).

ORDERING INFORMATION
FG 501A 2 MHz Function Generator

$925

Includes: Instruction manual (070-2957{lO).
~

416

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

$675

TEK

TM 500
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

FUNCTION
GENERATORS

FG 504

FG507

~i !I!IIII"II"1I14~ '\I!"I. " ''''''''

40 MHz Function Generator

FG 504
0.001 Hz to 40 MHz
Three Basic Waveforms, Plus a Wide Range
of Shaping With Variable Rise Times and
Fall Times and Symmetry Controls

f illlilliihili

iI illllll,,,,,,,,

FG 507 triggered sweep mode with output
gated on by sweep gate.

2 MHz Sweeping Function Generator

FG 507
0.002 Hz to 2 MHz
Includes All FG 501A Features
Logarithmic or Linear Sweep
Separate Start/Stop Frequency Dials

Logarithmic or Linear Sweep

Sweep Up or Down

Up to 30 V p.p Output

Sweep and Hold

Built·ln Attenuator

Manual Sweep

AM and FM
Phase Lock Mode
External and Manual Trigger or Gate
Counted Burst With DO 501

FG 507 in logarithmic sweep with sweep
ramp and gate outputs.

The output of the FG 504 can be phase
locked, gated, or triggered by a reference
signal. This lets you convert from one waveform to another, such as pulses to
sinewaves, as well as adjusting phase relationships . Post attenuator offset enables
use of the full ± 7.5 V offset range with
small signals. And the FG 504 output can be
swept, or amplitude or frequency modulated by external signals. In addition, the FG
504 can supply internally generated linear or
logarithmic swept frequencies of up to
1000:1 range with convenient control of start
and stop frequencies.

FG 504 True four quadrant multiplier permits normal am or double sideband sur>
pressed carrier modulation.

The FG 504 also provides trigger output,
external voltage control input, and sweep
output.

The accurate logllinear sweep capability of
the FG 507 plus the low distortion (0.25%
over the audio range) make it ideally suited
to audio testing.

ORDERING INFORMATION
FG 504 40 MHz Function Generator

$3,225

Include.: Instruction manual (070-2655{)()).

FG 504T 40 MHz Function Generator

$3,640

ORDERING INFORMATION

Include.: FG 504, TM 503 Mainframe, and 01&o195-200 ms (50 MHz 105Hz)

Pul. . DuF8llon Duty Fector

<10 ns 10 >100 ma
>

7()'!(,

<10 ns 10 >100 ma"

Fixed, 17 ns lrom external lrigger

<5.5 ns 10 >50 ms, Independently
variable up to 100:1

Fixed, <3.5 ns

Fixed, 5 ns)

>7.5 V pop, ± 75 V window

>10 pop, ± 10 V WIndow

>5V

5 V, ±5 V window

>15 V pop, ± 15 V window

>20 pop, ± 20 V window

Nol specified

5 V, ±5 V window

SOil

5011

Nol specilied

1 kllor5011

Fixed, <3.5 ns, <4 ns @ >5 V

v complementary

Slmultaneou. Outputa

< 1 ns al 50% amplilude

... positive and negative

v both outputs

Rear interlace inpuls

Rear interlace inputs

Always back 1"""""led

Always back terminated

I MIl 10 SO 11 inpul impedance

1 MIl or 50 11 inpul impedance

Normal/Complement

< 1 ns al 50% amplilude

Independent amplitude controls lor
+ and - outputs, no offsel

Independenl pulse
lop and pulse bottom

Independenl pulse top & pulse bottom,
oormaI or PRESET

Output Control.

Extemal Input
Trigger Level

v switcheble
50 11 inpul Z

50 11 inpul Z

+1 V required

+ 1 V required

+ only

...
...

+on/y

> +2 V !rom 50 0 , approlCimalely
8 ns prior to pulse output

> + 2 V Irom 50 11, approlCimalely
10 ns prior to pulse output

- 3 V 10 +3 V, 00 mV pop sensilivity 1010 MHz
250 mV pop 10 50 MHz TAIG'D/GATED lighl

Slope

+or -

+or-

Trigger Mode

Manu.1 Trigger

Duretlon Mode

v
v

v
v
v

v wilh DO 501"

v with 00 SOl"

Oate Mode
Counted Bur.t
Trigger Output (50% Sq......
weve or Follow. Extemel SIgnal)
Cu. tom Timing Po.ltlon.

...

Locked on Mode
Beck Termination

10 10 Hz)

Fixed, 20 ns Irom external trigger

Source Impedance

Aemote Amplitude

<2 ns 10 >SO ms

<10 ns to >100 ma"

Aberration.

Pul.e Coincidence

<4 ns 10 >100 IllS (250

>50%

Tren.1tIon Time.

Open ClrcuH

105Hz)

10 0 2 /IS period, >50% al 20 ns period

>70% to 0.2 /IS period, >50% al 20 ns period
Double Pul.e

Amplitude: Into 50 0

PO 1102
~

<10 nslo >100 ms

Squereweve Mode
Pul. . Delay Duty Fector

PO 501
<20 ns 10 >200 IllS (SO

> + 2 V Irom 50 11 approxmalely 35 ns prior 10 pulse output
(23 ns in squarewave or EXT OUR modes)
User inslalled capacilors

Control Error Light
Mainframe Compatibility
Page
Price. Begin At

v
1M 500ITM

5(XX)

User inslalled capacilors

...

1M 500ITM

5(XX)

1M 500ITM 5(XX)

v
v
v

1M 500ITM

420

0421

$2,925

$2,325

$850

$3,045

5(XX)

., Add 60 ns lor delay /rom extemsl trigger.
·z Exact count to 20 MHz, ussble to 50 MHz.

For recommended acce.aorte., . . . page 487.

419

TEK

PULSE
GENERATORS

TM 5000
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

PG507

PG508

-"'."
~

-•

fWIIU •

OU'TNT fYOlTa"

::::::.

.... ::.:.

fllA . smU II ... '

'='

.'- .
"

.. .

':'H

-•

t+I

,..

...
CJ

50 MHz Dual Output Pulse Generator

PG 507
Dual Outputs With Tracking Level Controls
Normal or Complement Pulse Output on
Both Channels
15 V Output In a ±15 V Window Into High
Impedance, 7.5 V Into 50 Q
3.5 ns Rise Time/Fail Time
The PG 507 is a high performance, 50 MHz
pulse generator designed specifically for
logic design applications.
The PG 507 features complementary dual
outputs that greatly increase its applicability
in logic design areas, especially interfacing
within systems or to peripherals. For instance , the complementary outputs allow
simulation of line drivers or opposite phase
clocks.
The PG 507 also offers versatility to the
design engineer in an analog environment.
For example, the dual outputs can be used
to test differential input amplifiers or multiplexers.
The PG 507 features four output modes:
normal complement mode (Channel A output positive going, Channel B output negative going), opposite phase complement
mode (Channel A output negative going,
Channel B output positive going), simultaneous negative mode (Channel A output
negative going, Channel B output negative
going), and simultaneous positive mode
(Channel A positive going Channel B output
positive going).
In addition, the Output High Level and Low
Level voltage controls track between channels, making amplitude settings easy.

420

~ ~':

...-. .=
'

1"I1t00

~l:.J

.. ....

"'''--

50 MHz Pulse Generator
This unique output flexibility within the normal and complement modes is particularly
useful in logic design or control applications
requiring simultaneous signals.

ORDERING INFORMATION
PG 507 50 MHz Pulse Generator

$2,925

Include.: Instruction manual (07(}2962-OO).
RECOMMENDED PROBES
P8082B - 1X110X. de to 100 MHz.
See page 470.

$175

P6108A - 10X, de to 100 MHz.
See page 468.

$75

P8122 - 10X, de to 100 MHz.
See page 469.

$58

PG 508
Independently Variable Rise Times and
Fall Times to 5 nl
20 V Output In a ± 20 V Window to HI
Impedance, 10 V Into 50 Q
Normal or Complement Output
The PG 508 is a highly versatile, general purpose 50 MHz pulse generator. The circuitry
of the PG 508 is designed so that rise and
fall waveforms closely simulate real world
waveforms. This capability is particularly
useful in research and development applications demanding versatility in rise times
and fall times, such as testing of amplifiers,
slew rate testing, comparator simulation and
logic circuitry performance tests.

The PG 508 features a vernier control on the
rise times and fall times controllable from
100 to 1. This completely overlaps the next
decade range and increases the PG 508's
versatility in applications simulating different
rise times and fall times, especially the output of nonlinear devices. This overlap feature can also be used to generate a ramp
signal or simulate unequal slew rates in an
amplifier.
Also adding to the simplicity of using the
PG 508 is the capability of changing output
amplitude while variable rise times and fall
times remain constant.

ORDERING INFORMATION
PG 508 50 MHz Pulse Generator

$2,325

Includea: Instruction manual (07(}2044-{)1).

PG 508T 50 MHz Pulse Generator

$2,740

Includea: PG 500, TM 503 Mainframe, and 01&0195-03
Blank Panel.

For counted burst order the
DO 501 Digital Delay (page 418)
Suggested 10 in BNC 50 {l cable (2 required)
for interconnecting PG 500 and DD 501
Order 012-{)2OO-OO

For example, controllable rise times and fall
times are extremely desirable when working
with CMOS where logic power consumption
increases with slower rise times. Also, variable rise times and fall times are used to
reduce ringing (tranSient distortion) problems associated with too fast a pulse.

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

$1,900
$27

TEK

PULSE
GENERATORS

TM 500
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

Manual (One-Shot) Trigger Generator

PG 501

PG 502

The Manual (one-shot) Trigger Generator is
used for manually initiating a pulse or complete train of events with instruments that
do not have a manual trigger button or
where a remote operation capability is desired, such as with some oscilloscopes and
the PG 501 .
The internal trigger generator circuitry eliminates contact bounce, but will generate
pulses as rapidly as the operator can manually cycle the pushbutton.
The output pulse is nominally 2 ms in width
and 3 V in amplitude (from 50 fl) with a rapid
rise time and fall time.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Trigger Generator Order 016-0597-00

$200

...
1".5J
r.~_l.

lliOMH,

"_111(_11". PO S Ol! I"UU.[

50 MHz Pulse Generator

Gt:N[~"TO"

250 MHz Pulse Generator

PG 501

PG 502

5 Hz to 50 MHz

10 Hz to 250 MHz

Simultaneous Plus and Minus Outputs

1 ns Rise Time

5 V and 3_5 ns Into 50 11

5 V Output ±5 V Window

Independent Period and Duration Controls

Independent Pulse Top and
Bottom Level Controls

Trigger Out

Selectable Internal Reverse Termination

The PG 501 is a 50 MHz Pulse Generator
featuring simultaneous plus and minus outputs, a wide range of pulse-period durations
and duty factors, trigger output and external
trigger/duration input. Its performance and
ease of operation make it well-suited to basic digital and analog applications.

ORDERING INFORMATION
PG 501 50 MHz Pulse Generator
Includes: Instruction manual (070-136HJ1).

$850

Manual Trigger Button
The PG 502 features fast rise times and fall
times, independent top and bottom pulse
levels, and adjustable pulse duration. The
fast rep rate makes the instrument ideal for
design and testing of fast logic and switching circuits.

ORDERING INFORMATION
PG 502 250 MHz Pulse Generator

$3,045

Includes: Instruction manual (070-1598-01).

50 {} Precision Coaxial Cable

For use with the PG 502, PG 506, and SG
503. These instruments are internally calibrated for use with this 3 ft 50 fl coaxial
cable into a 50 fl load.

ORDERING INFORMATION
50 {} Cable Order 012-0482-00

$28

421

TEK

TM 500
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

POWER
SUPPLIES

available at the rear panel allow sensing of
the applied voltage at the load, thereby
minimizing the effects of loading on the
supply. In addition, the plus and minus
floating outputs of the PS 503A can be programmed remotely, by either voltage programming or resistance programming, via
the rear interface.

PRODUCT SUMMARY
Design engineers require power supplies
that are flexible enough to meet their
needs ... and compact enough to allow a
complete, custom-designed test system to
fit neatly on a crowded workbench. To assure versatility and convenience in your
test system, the TM 500 power supplies
can be rear interfaced with other instruments to reduce front panel clutter while
nrn\lir4inn
,..- - _ . - - " " :::1

I"!lr"l!lhiliiior-

,.,,,t

"+h""u,;,,,...

The PS 50H supplies 0 to 20 volts (floating) and adiustable current limitino to
400 milliamps, with constant current operation above the limit setting. A multitum dial
with mechanical digital readout provides
accurate setting of the output voltage. The
fixed 5 volt supply provides up to 1 amp.

..... .-:1

"",,.un

- -.... - _ ..........................., '''''' •• , ... "

The PS 503A provides a floating dual
- 20 volt to 0 volt and 0 volt to + 20 volt
variable supply, plus the 5 volt 1 amp supply. The two variable supplies can be set
individually and then varied in a tracked
mode with a single control. By grounding
one of the two outside terminals of the variable supply you can have a 0 volt to 40 volt
supply with up to 1 amp of current when
the PS 503A is operated in the high-power
compartmem of a 1M bU4, 1M bUI),
RTM 506, or TM 5006. Full descriptions of
the IEEE Standard 488 compatible PS 5004
and PS 5010 appear on pages 398 and
399.

able. For example, the output level can be
monitored via the. rear interface by a companion TM 500 digital multi meter without
the need for extra cabling at the front of
the instrument. Remote sensing terminals

POWER SUPPLIES SELECTION GUIDE
Application/ Feature
Power Supplle.

PS 501-1

PS 503A

Ot02OV

PS 5004

+ and - 20 V

+S V

+ SV

Oto2OV

Floating

Voltage Range

350 V (de + peal< ac)

Ground referenced

350 V (de + peal< ac)

Ground referenced

42 V (de + peak ac)

o to 20 V

Oto ± 20V

o to 20 V

40 mA to 400 mA

100 mA to 1 A

oto 300 mA

Standard Compartment

40 mA to 400 mA

o to

SO mA to 0.760 A
(1 .6AuptoI5V)

±(0.1% +2 mY)

1 mV

0.5%
5 mV

SOmV

5mV

5V ± 0.25 V

0.005%

100 mA for 1 A
change in load

3 mV for lA
change in load

100 mV for 1 A
change in load

500 ~V for 300 mA
change in load

current

Temperature Coefficient

Typically
< O.025%1" C

Typically < O.OI%1"C
1.6mV

SOmV

0.5 mV pop
0.1 mV RMS

5 mV pop

3 mV pop

Current limit

5 mV pop
Current limit

10 mV for 1 A change in load current
1 mV using reroote sensing

.. (~ppm
+ 100 ~VI" C

Typicaly « 0.01%
+0.1 mV)I"C

5OO~V

10 mV up to 10.0 V
100 mV above 10.1 V

10mV

..3 mV pop

10 mV pop
1 mV RMS

10 mV pop
2mV RMS

Constant current
10 mA to 300 mA

Constant current
±(5% +20mA)

Cment limit with fold
bad< ±(5% +20 mAl

RellOlution (atap aln)

Source E"ect
(line reguletlon)

1 mA

Load E"ect
(load regulation)

10mA

Reaolutlon (atep alze)

2.5mA

SOmA

l00mA

10 rnA p-p 5 rnA RMS

PARD (ripple and nolae)
10 tum potentiometer
with a three digit
in-Hne dial and
range pushbutton

None

Voltage indicatory
lights. Brightness
varies with output
voltage

None

Current limit
indicator lights

None

Voltage and resistance programming

None

Ratio

None

Current
LED indicator
Progremmebility
Voltage progamrning
Tracking

Mainframe Capability

Typicaly < 500 ~VI" C

Typically « 0.1%
+1 mA)I"C

Temperature Coe"'c'ent

Output On/Off

100 mA to 3.0 A

±SOmV

1 mV for a 400 mA
change in load

Remote Senalng
(rear Interconnect)

4.5 to 5.5 V

±(0.5% +20 mAl

Load E"ect
(\oed reguletlon)

Dlaplay
Voltage

Ground referenced

±32 V

± (0.01% + 500 ~V)

Source E"ect
(line regulation)

Current Mode
Overall Accuracy
(total e"ect)

rear interface

SO mA to 400 mA
(O.7SO A up to 15 V)

Voltage Mode
Ov_" Acc:urecy
(totel e"ect)

PARD (ripple end noIH)
(periodic and random
devlatlona)

Logic

ISO V peal< front
panel, 42 V peak

Current Range
High Power Compartment

Accuracy

PS 5010
+ and - 32 V

Ave digit LED

Each supply as three digit LED
display shared between voltage
and current

IEEE Standard 48& 1978 (GPlB) full listen and talk capability
with interrupt status reporting

None

Arithmetic

v
v

TM 500fTM 5000

TM 5000

Pege

423

398

399

Price. Begin At

$710

$7SO

$1,850

$3,050

For recommended IIcce.sories see page 489.

422

TEK

TM 500
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

PS 501-1

POWER SUPPLIES
DISTORTION ANALYZER

PS 501-1

PS 503A

AA 501 Option 02

__-""'I-' ,-, "
.n · .

~ "' --J

Floating Output, 0 V to 20 V
I

o mA to 400 mA
,

Precise Regulation
Low Ripple and Noise

•

Fixed Output + 5 V at 1 A
3 1/ 2

.,_,

,_,

. -=:

,,= 0

_VN
lOOrtV

~
-..N

The PS 501-1 features precise regulation and better
than 2 mV resolution (setability) over a 0 V to 20 V range.

....

~ _,

••

ORDERING INFORMATION
PS 501-1 Power Supply

rr==:U

:::=:..r

JaO\I

....,

MOHnOfl

$710

Includes: Instruction manual (07o.l301-o2).

PS 503A
Independent + and - Controls
Dual Tracking Voltage Control

o V to ± 20 V at 1 A (In High-Power
Compartment)
Fixed Output + 5 V at 1 A
Remote Resistance Programming
Over-Voltage Protection Standard
The PS 503A features superior dual tracking
performance, over-voltage protection, and
remote resistance programming of voltage.
When operated in the high-power compartment of a TM 504 or TM 506 mainframe, the
PS 503A provides up to 1 A from both 0 V to
20 V supplies.

CHARACTERISTICS
±20 V FLOATING SUPPLIES
Outputs - 0 V to ± 20 V dc with respect to the
common terminal or 0 V to 40 V dc across the +
and - terminals. Outputs can be varied independently or at a constant ratio.
Maximum Rated Current - 400 mA (1 A in
high power compartment to +30°C derating to
300 mA (750 mAl at +50°C.

H1r~ .

-1

""Ol. "'.' "M"""

Triple Power Supply

'"
Hi'"
rUNCtlO1'II

OU,""

~~~~~:~

0
1

Distortion Analyzer

Tracking Mode Offset Error - If the two supplies are set independently to any given voltage
ratio and then varied by use of the Volts Dual Tracking control, the two supplies will maintain the same
voltage ratio as initially set within ± 50 mV.
Current Limit - Adjustable from <100 mA to
1 A (high-power compartment) or <40 mA to
400 mA (standard compartment) on each supply.
Load Regulation - Within 3 mV for 1 A change
(high-power compartment) or 1 mV for 400 mA
change (standard compartment).
Ripple and Noise - 3 mV p-p or less at 1 A
load (high-power compartment). 0.5 mV p-p or
less at 400 mA load (standard compartment).
Indicators - Individual voltage indicators and
current limiting indicators for both + and - supplies. Standard compartment (400 mAl indicator.

ORDERING INFORMATION
PS 503A Power Supply

•

AoUTO
MHOE

CHARACTERISTICS
Output - 0 V to 20 V dc.
Maximum Rated Current 400 mA to +30°C derating to
300 mA at +50°C.
Accuracy - ± (0.5% + 10 mV). Power Supply
Current Limit - <40 mA to 400 mAo
Line Regulation - Within 5 mV for a + 10% line
voltage change.
Load Regulation - Within 1 mV for a 400 mA
load change.
Ripple and Noise - 0.5 mV p-p or less; 20 Hz
to 5 MHz.
Temperature Coefficient - Typically «0.01%
+0.1 mV)'oC.
Minimum Resolution - Typically 1.6 mV.
Transient Recovery Time - ,..;20 J.l.S to recover within 20 mV of final output voltage after a
400 mA change in output current.

VOlT'

-::\./_ :

Digit Ten-Tum Dial

$750

Includes: Instruction manual (07o. 1834-01 ).

COMMON CHARACTERISTICS
(PS 501-1, PS 503A)
20 V FLOATING SUPPLIES
Primary Power Input - Determined by mainframe (TM 501 , TM 503, etc).
Output - Roating, isolated for 350 V dc + peak
ac above ground.
Stability - Typically (0.1% +5 mV) or less drift
in 8 hrs of constant line, load, and temperature.
Indicator Lights - Voltage variation and current limit.
+ 5 V GROUND-REFERENCED SUPPLY
Output - 5 V nominal, ± 0.25 V at 1 A.
Load Regulation - Within 100 mV with a 1 A
load change.
Line Regulation - Within 50 mV for a 10% line
voltage change.
Ripple and Noise (1A) - 5 mV p-p or less,
20 Hz to 5 MHz.
Stability - Typically 30 mV or less drift in 8 hrs.
Overload Protection - Automatic current limiting and over-temperature shutdown.

AA 501
Fully Automatic: No Level Setting,
Tuning or Nulling
Level, Total Harmonic Distortion, and dB
Ratio Measurements
Total System Harmonic Distortion Plus
Noise (THD+N) < 0.0025%
"':; 3.0 J.l.V Residual Noise
Digital Readout Plus Analog-Like
"Bar Graph" for Peaking and Nulling
IMD to SMPTE, DIN, and CCIF (Option 01)
The AA 501 Distortion Analyzer provides
completely automatic measurement of level ,
total harmonic distortion plus noise
(THD + N) , and (with Option 01) Intermodulation Distortion. Automatic set level,
automatic tuning , automatic nulling of the
fundamental , and autoranging of the display
all combine to permit completely hands-off
operation once the mode is selected . Just
apply the signal of interest and read the 3 1/2digit display. A novel analog-like bar graph
simulates an analog meter to assist in peaking and nulling of applied signals.
With Option 01 , intermodulation distortion
measurements can be made to any of the
three common standards: SMPTE, DIN, or
CCIF. Internal circuitry automatically identifies the signal being used and selects the
proper filtering circuits to perform the
measurement.
DB ratio measurements can be referenced
either to 774 .6 millivolts (1 milliwatt in
600 ohms) or to a selected applied signal.
The 0 dB reference memory remembers the
selected level , and all subsequent measurements are referenced to that level.

To order, call your local Tek1ronlx Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

423

TEK

DISTORTION
ANALYZER

The AA 501 allows readings to be expressed in true RMS or average response,
RMS calibrated. Although true RMS is more
accurate in most applications, the average
response permits comparisons with measurements previously taken with older
instrumentation.
The fundamental frequency range is 10Hz
to 100 kHz, with harmonics measured out
to 300 kHz.
Anyone of four built-in frequency-weighting
filters can be switched into the signal paths
for preconditioning of the signal to be measured. Provision is also made to permit the
use of a user-selected filter. A dc level,
which is a function of the display readout,
is available at the rear panel of the AA 501 .

TM 500
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

Accuracy (Readings ;>4% ot Range) 20 Hz to 20 kHz ± 1 dB, 10 Hz to 100 kHz + 1,
-3 dB. (Accuracy is limited by residual THD + N
and filter selection.)
THO - Complete Automatic Total Harmonic Distortion (THO) measurements to specified accuracy in seven seconds or less.
AA 501/SG 505 System Residual THD+NYin ;>250 mY, (all distortion, noise, and nulling
error sources combined). 20 Hz to 20 kHz :
..;;0.0025% ( - 92 dB) Average Response with
80 kHz filter (standard and Option 01 only).
";;0.0032% (-90 dB) RMS Response with 80 kHz
filter. 10 Hz to 50 kHz: ..;;0.0071% (- 83 dB) RMS
Response . 50 kHz to 100 kHz : ";;0 .010%
( - 80 dB) RMS Response.
TYPICAL THD+N
1

0010'".

An Input Monitor connector and a Function
Output connector are provided to permit
oscilloscope display of the input Signal or
the result of the filter in the THO + N
measurement.
The Option 02 version of the AA 501 is especially designed for use in accordance
with CCiR recommendation 468-2 and DIN
45405 (typically used in Europe). In the Option 02 version, the 30 kHz filter and the "A"
weighting filter of the standard unit are replaced by a 22.4-Hz-to-22.4-kHz filter and a
CCiR-weighting filter, respectively, and the
average responding detection circuit is replaced by a quasi-peak detection circuit.
The Option 02 also contains the intermod
measurement capability of the Option 01 .
The AA 501 Distortion Analyzer and the
SG 505 Oscillator were designed to be
used together as the heart of a state-of-the
art audio analysis system. Used together,
the two provide total system harmonic distortion of 0.0025% or less.
It should be noted that the automatic frequency tuning of the AA 501 does not depend upon the manual tuning of a companion oscillator. The AA 501 will automatically
tune itself to its input signal whether the
signal originates from an SG 505 alongside
it in a TM 500 mainframe, or from some other signal source miles away.

CHARACTERISTICS
The following characteristics are common to the
standard AA 501 , Option 01 and Option 02 unless
otherwise noted:
HARMONIC DISTORTION FUNCTION
Fundamental Frequency Range - 10 Hz to
100 kHz automatically tuned to input frequency.
Distortion Ranges - Auto (100%), 20%, 2%,
0.2%, and dB (autoranging).

424

.0 dB

AMS RESPONSE (0.0032'10 GUARANTEED)
_

AYG RESPONSE (0 0025 "110 GUARANTEED)

O. OO4~

.a dB

O.OOlrto
D.OO25's1t
0.0021)'11.

90 dB
92 dB
!M dB

...~~...:;iIiiiIi!ll~-97 dB

O.OOl ... . ~.~i;~;

l00dB

O.OO1D-f.

10K

Typical Fundamental Rejection - At least
10 dB below specified residual THD+N or actual
signal THO, whichever is greater.
Minimum Input Level - 60 mV (-22 dBm).
NOISE (OPTION 02)
Noise measurements to CCIR recommendation
468-2 and DIN 45405. True RMS or quasi-peak
response . Total system THO + N = 0.0032%
(90 dB) RMS response. Balanced input.
LEVEL FUNCTION
Autoranging digital voltmeter displays input signal
level in volts, dBm, or dB ratios.
Modes - Volts, dBm (600 fl), or dB ratio with
push to set 0 dB reference .
Level Ranges - 200 /JoV full scale to 200 V full
scale in ten steps, manual or autoranging.
Accuracy·'
Frequency

Volta

dBm or dB Ratio

20 Hz to 20 kHz

±2%

±0.3 dB

to Hz to 100 kHz"

±4%

±O.S dB

" V/n ;> 100 ,II V, level fsnglng Ind/cstors extinguished.
'Z On the 200 ,II V range, sccurscy sbove 50 kHz Is + 4%, - 6%

(+O.5d8, - 0.7d8).

Bandwidth - ;>300 kHz.
Residual Noise - ..;;3.0/JoV (-108 dBm) with
80 kHz and 400 Hz filters . ..;; 1.5/JoV (-114 dBm)
with ' A' weighting filter.
INTER MODULATION DISTORTION
FUNCTION (OPTION 01 /02)
Fully automatic SMPTE, DIN, and CCIF difference
frequency test measurements.
SMPTE and DIN Tests - Lower Frequency
Range: 50 Hz to 250 Hz. Upper Frequency Range:
3 kHz to 100 kHz. Level Ratio Range: 1:1 to 5:1
(Iower:upper). Residual IMD : ..;;0 .0025%
(-92 dB) for 60 Hz and 7 kHz or 250 Hz and
8 kHz, 4:1 level ratio.

CCIF Difference Frequency - Frequency
Range: 4 kHz to 100 kHz. Difference Frequency
Range: 50 Hz to 1 kHz. ResiduallMD: ";;0.0018%
(-95 dB) with 14 kHz and 15 kHz. Minimum Input
Level: 60 mV (- 22 dBm).
Accuracy - ± 1 dB.
ALL FUNCTIONS
Detection - Average or true RMS for waveforms with crest factors ..;;3.
Filters
400 Hz High Pass: -3 dB at 400 Hz ±5%; at
least - 40 dB rejection at 60 Hz.
80 kHz Low Pass: - 3 dB at 80 kHz ±5%.
30kHz Low Pass: -3dB at 30kHz ±5% (standard and Option 01 only). ' A' Weighting: Meets
specifications for Type 1 sound level meters
(ANSI S 1.4, IEC Recommendation 179) (standard
and Option 01 only). Ext: Allows connection of extemal filters. 22.4 Hz to 22.4 kHz: -3 dB ± 5%
(Option 02 only). CCIR WTG: CCIR Recommendation 468-2 and DIN 45405, functional only with QPK detector (Option 02 only).
Input Impedance - 100 kfl ± 2%, each side to
ground, fully differential.
Maximum Input - 300 V peak, 200 V RMS either side to ground or differentially. Fully protected on all ranges.
Common Mode Rejection - ;>50 dB at 50 Hz
or 60 Hz. Typically ;>40 dB to 300 kHz.
FRONT PANEL SIGNALS
Input Monitor - Provides constant amplitude
version of signal applied to input. Output Voltage:
1 V RMS ± 10% for input signals > 50 mY .
Source Impedance: 1 kG ± 5%.
Function Output - Provides a scaled sample of
selected function signal (1000 count display =
1 V RMS ±3%). Source Impedance: 1 kG ±5%.
Auxiliary Input - Provides input to detector circuit when Ext Riter button is depressed. Sensitivity: 1 V RMS ± 3% = 1000 count display. Impedance: 100 kfl ±5%, ac coupled.
REAR INTERFACE SIGNALS
Rear INTFC Input - Front panel selected.
Same as main Input except, maximum signal input is limited to 42 V peak, 30 V RMS. (Potential
crosstalk at rear interface may degrade noise and
distortion on performance).
Monitor - Same as front panel Input Monitor.
Function Output - Same as front panel Function Output.
Auxiliary Input - Same as front panel Auxiliary
Input.
Converter Output - Dc output of selected response converter. 1 V ±5% for 1000 count display. Source Z: 500 G ± 5%.
dB Output - Dc output of logarithmic dB converter. 10 mV ±5% per 1 dB of display. Source Z:
1 kfl ±5%.

ORDERING INFORMATION
AA 501 Distortion Analyzer

$2,525

Includes: Instruction manual (07G-2958{)()).
Option 01 Option 02 -

OPTIONS
Intermodulation Distortion.
+$750
CCiRIDIN (Includes Option 01). +$1,150

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll tree: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99_ In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

TM 500
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

TEK

SG 505 Option 01

OSCILLATORS

SG 505 Option 02
SG liD!; OSCILLATOR

•

FftEOUENCY";r

'ltUlll

Maximum Output Voltage - At least 6 V RMS
open circuit; 3.16 V RMS (+ 10 dBV or
+ 12.2 dBm) into 600 n .
SYNC OUTPUT
Signal - 200 mV RMS ± 20% sinewave to
20 kHz, at least 120 mV RMS at 100 kHz.
Frequency - Same as main output.
Impedance - Nominally 1 kn, ground referenced and isolated from main output.
REAR INTERFACE SIGNALS
Buffered Main Output - Buffered version of
actual output signals from front panel connector.
",,300 n Output impedance.
Sync Output - Same as front panel Sync Out·
put except output impedance is =50 n .

QfIIOI:D.--

Option 01

~"' ~

.)".....

H@
...

Selecting the 1M Test Signal causes a LF
sinewave to be mixed with the normal oscillator signal in a 4:1 amplitude ratio.

Oscillator

tion. Uncalibrated outputs can range from
+28 dBm (into 600 n from a 50 n source) to
-78dBm.

50S/Option 01/0ption 02

10 Hz to 100 kHz Sinewave Output
Ultra-Low Distortion: <0.0008 % THD
(Typically 0.0003%)
Floating or Grounded Output
600 !l Source Impedance
Vernier Frequency Control
Fully Balanced Output (Option 02)
Uncalibrated Output to +28 dBm (Option 02)
Selectable Source Impedance (Option 02)
Intermodulation Test Signal (Option 01 & 02)

Option 02 has a front panel switch that
allows the selection of three different
source resistances : 50 n for low impedance
applications (improves measurement accuracies on long cable runs and reduces
loading effects), 150 n for matching microphone circuits, and 600 n for complying with
audio/communication industry standard and
general purpose applications.
Option 02 also includes the intermodulation
test signal capability of the Option 01 .

CHARACTERISTICS
The SG 505 Oscillator generates an ultra'
low distortion sinewave over the frequency
range from 10 Hz to 100 kHz «0.0008%
THO, typically 0.0003% between 20 Hz and
20 kHz). In the standard and Option 01 units
the output can be floated or referenced to
chassis ground. In the Option 02 unit, the
output is fully balanced and floating with a
center tap which can be attached to system
ground or to either side of the output signa~ .
The oscillator also provides a fixed amplitude ground referenced sinewave at the
Sync Out connector, that is identical in
frequency to the signal from the Output
connector.
Option 01 adds an intermodulation test signal function . This signal consists of a
selectable 60 Hz or 250 Hz sinewave mixed
with the selected frequency in a 4:1 amplitude ratio.
For communications and broadcast applications, Option 02 provides a fully balanced
output of +22 dBm to -68 dBm calibrated,
into 600 n. A ten-position output level control provides 10 dB/step calibrated attenua-

1M Test Signal

MAIN OUTPUT
The following characteristics are common to the
standard SG 505 and Option 01 .
Frequency Range - 10 Hz to 100 kHz in four
overlapping bands. Accurate within 3% of dual
setting (with Vernier at center). Vemier Range is
at least ± 1% of frequency setting.
Calibrated Output Selectable from
+ 10 dBm to -60 dBm into 600 n in eight 10 dB
steps. Accurate to within 0.2 dB at + 10 dBm and
1 kHz. Step accuracy is ± 0.1 dB/10 dB step. An
uncalibrated control provides continuous variation
from at least +2.2 dB to < -10 dB from calibrat·
ed positon.
Amplitude Response - Level flatness
±0.1 dB from 10Hz to 20kHz (1 kHz ref); within
0.2 dB from 20 kHz to 100 kHz (excluding
>50 kHz on -60 dB output level range).
Harmonic Distortion - <0.0008% (-102 dB)
THO from 20 Hz to 20 kHz (typically 0.0003%);
0.0018% (-95 dB) THO from 10 Hz to 20 Hz, and
from 20 kHz to 50 kHz; 0.0032% (- 90 dB) THD
from 50 kHz to 100 kHz (RL ~600 n).
Output Impedance - 600 n ± 2%; floating or
grounded through ",,30 n. Output impedance
does not change with Output On/Off selection.
Maximum floating voltage ± 30 V peak.

LF Frequency - Internally selectable 60 Hz
(± 1 Hz) or 250 Hz (±3 Hz).
Main Output - Composite pop output within
0.2 dB of normal oscillator mode output.
Residual IMD - Typically <0.0005% from
2.5 kHz to 10 kHz.
Sync Output - LF signal component only,
200 mV RMS ±20%.

Option 02 Oscillator
MAIN OUTPUT
Calibrated Output Selectable from
+22 dBm to -68 dBm into 600 n in ten 10 dB
steps. Accurate to within 0.2 dB at +22 dBm and
1 kHz. Step accuracy is ± 0.1 dB/10 dB step or
20 dB step change. An uncalibrated control pro·
vides continuous variation from < -10 dB to
+0.3 dB from calibrated position.
Harmonic Distortion - < 0.0008% (-102 dB)
THO from 20 Hz to 20 kHz (typically 0.0003%);
0.0018% ( - 95 dB) THO from 10 Hz to 20 Hz, and
from 20 kHz to 50 kHz; 0.0056% (- 85 dB) THO
from 50 kHz to 100 kHz (RL ~600 n).
Output Impedance - Selectable 600 n ± 2%,
150 n ± 2% or 50 n ± 3% floating or grounded
through =30 n . Output impedance does not
change with Output On/Off selection. Impedance
to CT is '12 the selected impedance. Maximum
floating voltage ± 25 V peak.
Maximum Output Voltage - At least 21 V
RMS open circuit; 19.45 V RMS (+28dBm) into
600 n from 50 n.
Balance - ..;;0.5% mismatch of output open·
circuit voltages referenced to CT for f ...;;20 kHz
with output grounded.

ORDERING INFORMATION
SG 505 Oscillator

$875

Includes: Gable assembly for sync output (175-117&00);
instruction manual (07(}2B23{X)).
Option 01 -

OPTIONS
1M Test Signal.

Option 02 -

Oscillator (Includes Option 01).

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

+$220
+$715

425

TEK

TM 500
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

CURRENT PROBES
AMPLIFIER

PRODUCT SUMMARY
The TM 500 Signal Conditioners offer
unique capabilities for solving electrical
measurement and analysis problems. Compact portability and plug-in flexibility allow
complete lab instrumentation set-ups, within stringent space and budget limitations.

A6303

AM 503

Dc to 15 MHz Bandwidth
Peak Pulse Measurements to 500 A
Ac or Dc Coupling
One Inch by 0.830 Inch Jaw Opening

These versatile signal alteration devices are
applicable to a broad range of measurement
needs including: preamplification of low level
signals, addition or removal of dc offset, integration, differentiation, or summing of multiple signals; impedance transformation; or
amplification (to 80 V peak-to-peak).
The AM 503 is specifically designed to work
with the A62JJ2J A6303 Current Probes and
incorporates a feature that limits the bandwidth to 5 MHz, to eliminate transients or
noise. An illuminated knob skirt indicates
calibrated current per division.
The A62JJ2JAM 503 and A6303/AM 503 Current Probe Systems have a wide variety of
applications from SCR and power supply
measurements to medical applications .
These probes use inductive coupling to minimize interference with the circuit under test.
The versatile AM 502 Differential Amplifier
lets you control gain, dc offset and lowfrequency and high-frequency response for
maximum rejection of unwanted signals .
Adjustable dc offset allows high amplification even when low-level signals have a dc
component of up to 1 V. High performance
features of the AM 502 are a dc to 1 MHz
bandwidth and 100 dB common-mode rejection ratio.
The AM 501 Operational Amplifier's output
power (± 40 V and ± 50 mA across 800 n
loads) is more than adequate for most
electronic and electro-mechanical applications . This high-output unit has front panel
connectors that let you change configurations by selecting feedback components.
The AM 501 is easily set up for differentiation, integration, summing and impedance
transformation problems.

AM 503
Displays Current Signals on an Oscilloscope
Current Range, Maximum Current, and
Bandwidth Determined by the Probe Used

The AM 503 Current Probe Amplifier allows
display of current on any oscilloscope with
10 mV/div sensitivity, 50 n or 1 Mn input,
and (for performance to full bandwidth
specifications) at least 75 MHz when using
the A62JJ2 or 50 MHz when using the A6303.
The amplifier attenuator is calibrated

426

Current Probe

Ac and Dc Current Measurements to 100 A

One-Hand Operation

This clamp-around probe satisfies requirements for current measurements to 100 A
from dc to 15 MHz. Equipped with a convenient pistol grip, the A6303 can easily be
clamped to cables up to 0.830 inch. Other
measurement parameters of the probe include: 100 A continuous and 500 A peak.

Current Probe Amplifier

in 12 steps with a 1-2-5 sequence, and the
knob-skirt is illuminated to indicate current
per division. The current range, maximum
current rating , and bandwidth are determined by the particular probe in use. Bandwidth can be set to Full (where it is limited
by the probe in use) or to 5 MHz. Coupling
can be switch selected to ac or dc. Ac
coupling offers a convenient means of
measuring low-amplitude ac signals on a
high-level dc current. A front-panel indicator
warns of input current overload.

By combining an oscilloscope, such as the
SC 504, with the A6303/AM 503 Current
Probe Amplifier in a TM 5OO/TM 5000 mainframe you will have a convenient and compact high current amplification/measurement system.

ORDERING INFORMATION
A6303 Current Probe

$1,070

Include.: Carrying case (01&0622-00); instruction manual (07o-3906{)1).

CHARACTERISTICS
The AM 503 characteristics when used with the
A6302 or A6303 Current Probes.
Maximum Input Current - 20 A (dc + peak
ac) for A6302. 100 A (dc + peak ac) for A6303.

A6302 Current Probe

Maximum Voltage for Current Under Test
(Bare Conductor) - 500 V (dc + peak ac) for

1 mA to 20 A Current Measurement Range

A6302. 700 V (dc

SO A Peak Pulse Measurements

+ peak ac) for A6303.

Bandwidth (-3 dB) -

Dc to at least 50 MHz
with A6302. Dc to at least 15 MHz with A6303.
Rise Time (Full Bandwidth) - 7 ns or less with
A6302. 23 ns or less with A6303.
Deflection Factor - 1 mNdiv to 5 Ndiv for
A6302. 20 mNdiv to 50 Ndiv for A6303. In a 1-2-5
sequence for both probes.
Attenuator Accuracy - Within 3% of indicated
CurrenVDiv for both probes.

ORDERING INFORMATION
AM 503 Current Probe Amplifier

$1,125

Include.: 50 !l cable with BNC (012{X)57-{l1); 50 !l terminator (011{X)49{)1); instruction rnanuaI (07o-a52-o1).

Dc to SO MHz Bandwidth

When a A6302 Current Probe is used with
the AM 503 Current Probe Amplifier, the current range is from 1 mA to 20 A. Maximum
current is 20 A (dc + peak ac). Peak pulse
maximum is 50 A, not to exceed a product
of 100 A J.Ls. The probe operates through
inductive coupling with no electrical contact. A flick of your forefinger operates the
sliding jaw in the insulated probe tip. Just
put the probe tip around the conductor under test for immediate current readings .

ORDERING INFORMATION
A6302 Current Probe

$565

Include.: Ave inch ground lead (175-0124-01); three
inch ground lead (175-0263-01); two alligator clips
(344.()()46{)()); instruction manual (070-390&01).

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

TEK

TM 500
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

AM 501

OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIEF!z
DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIEH

AM 501 Accessory

AM 502

....Ie.,.,.."
..

,----.-

Operational Amplifier

Auxiliary Circuit Board Kit

AM 501

The Auxiliary Circuit Board Kit attaches to
the input and output terminal plugs on the
front of the AM 501 Operational Amplifier.
The kit is a pc board that has six terminal
studs for attachment to the amplifier's banana jacks and is approximately 2.5 inches
square. This permits the designer to build a
circuit of resistors, capacitors, and other
components for use in conjunction with the
AM 501 's input, output, or feedback circuits.
With several boards, the AM 501 Op Amp
circuit can be changed instantly in configuration from integrator to differentiator to amplifier, without interfering with the other connectors on the face of the AM 501 .

± 40 v, 50 mA Output
Open Loop Gain 10,000

50 VI jlS Slew Rate
Symmetrical Differential Design

The AM 501 Operational Amplifier features
high input impedance (FET), high slew rate, a
wide range of input and output voltage, and
high output current. Applications include:
amplification; impedance transformation; integration; differentiation and summing. It is
well-suited as a post-amplifier or offset-generator for signal sources, including the TM
500 modules. Components can be added
externally or internally making it ideal for
teaching operational amplifier theory.

Differential Amplifier

ORDERING INFORMATION
Auxiliary Circuit Board Kit
Order 013-0146-00

$27

CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLIFIER
Open Loop Gain - At least 10,000 at 60 Hz into
800 fl load.
Unity Gain Bandwidth - At least 5 MHz into
800 fl load.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - Typically
>20,000 to 1 at 60 Hz for common-mode signals
up to ±40 V.
Slew Rate - At least 50 V/jlS into an 800 fl load.

INPUT
Input Bias Current - Typically < 500 pA at
25°C, <2 nA at 50°C.
Drift - <100 jlV/oC.
Noise - <10 jlV RMS.

Maximum Differential Input Voltage -

80 V.

OUTPUT
Voltage Range - At least ± 40 V into 2 kfl.
Current Limit - At least ±50 mA.
Open Loop Output R - = 150 fl.

AM 502
1 to 100,000 Gain
100 dB CMRR
Selectable Upper and Lower - 3 dB Points
Dc to 1 MHz Maximum Bandwith
Adjustable Dc Offset

The AM 502 Differential Amplifier features
wide bandwidth , high CMRR , and selectable calibrated gain and filtering. Well-suited
for general purpose or laboratory work, it
can drive oscilloscopes, monitors, chart recorders, displays, or processing devices. In
the unity gain mode, it can be used as a
signal conditioner. Input dc offsetting to
± 1 V is provided.

CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLIFIER
Gain -

100 to 100,000; 1-2-5 sequence; accu·
rate within 2% . 1X gain obtained by 100X
attenuation.
HF -3 dB POINT - Selectable in 9 steps (1 -3
sequence) from 100 Hz to 1 MHz. Upper - 3 dB
point reduces to 500 kHz at 50 k gain; 250 kHz at
100 k gain.
LF - 3 dB POINT - Selectable in 6 steps from
0.1 Hz to 10 kHz; ac coupling limits - 3 dB point
to 2 Hz or less.
Variable Dc Offset - At least ± 1 V.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio - Normal
Mode: At least 100 dB, dc to 50 kHz. -;- 100
Mode: At least 50 dB, dc to 50 kHz.

INPUT
Input Gate Current - ± 100 pA for T ..;;30°C.
Maximum Voltage Drift - 100 jlV/oC referred
to input Normal mode.
..;;25 ,.V or less (tangentially
measured) referred to input Normal mode.
Maximum Input Voltage - Normal Mode Dc
Coupled: 15 V (dc + peak ac). -;- 100 Mode Dc
Coupled: 350 V (dc + peak ac). Ac Coupled:
350 V (dc + peak ac) with coupling capacitor
precharged.
Input Rand C - 1 Mfl paralleled by = 47 pF.
Input impedance can be increased to a FET input
via a simple internal jumper change.

Maximum Noise -

OUTPUT
Maximum Output - ± 5 V, ± 20 mA, output resistance is 5 fl or less.

Minimum Load Impedance - 250 fl
Over Range - Front-panel lamp indicates most
over-range conditions.

ORDERING INFORMATION
AM 502 Differential Amplifier

$1,400

Includes: Instruction manual (07(}1582-o1).

ORDERING INFORMATION
AM 501 Operational Amplifier
tnctudes: Instruction manual (07(}161&O1).

$830

Compatlbla acc...oll•• begin on pag. 484.

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

427

TEK

TM 500
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

OSCILLOSCOPES

PRODUCT SUMMARY
The ubiquitous cathode-ray oscilloscope is
the world's most useful and versatile electronics test and measurement instrument.
Tektronix, long identified with the oscilloscope, could hardly develop the TM 500 line
of modular instrumentation without including
CRT display capability.

the digital measurement capability of the
TM 500 digital multimeters and counters,
ranging from the high-performance, dualtrace, 80 MHz SC 504 to the single-trace,
single-width, 5 MHz SC 501 . The 15 MHz
SC 502 adds moderate dual-trace performance to the line, and the 10 MHz, dual-trace
SC 503 adds CRT storage capability.

Four choices of performance level and display
size are available to add waveform display to

All of the oscilloscopes feature automatic
triggering, and the SC 504, SC 503, and

SC 502 also provide trigger view and variable
trigger holdoff. All of the oscilloscopes have
provisions to permit instrument-ta-instrument
rear interfacing within a mainframe and to
extemal devices of a test system.
With a compact TM 500 oscilloscope and a
multicompartment TM 500 mainframe, it is
now possible to carry an oscilloscope and
companion instruments to and from a test
site in one convenient package.

OSCILLOSCOPE SELECTION GUIDE
SC504

Applic.ollon/F.ature

SC503

SC502

8C501

Number of Channels

V.rtIc.1 Deflectton:
HF Banclwldth
(upper -3dB point)

... 00 MHz. O' C 10 +35' C
... 70 MHz, + 35 ' C to +50' C

... 10 MHz, 5 mVldN 10 20 V/dN
... 7 MHz, 2 mV/dN
... 5 MHz, 1 mV/dN

... 15 MHz, 5 mVldN 10 20 V/dN
... 10 MHz, 2 mV/dN
... 5 MHz, 1 mVldN

... 5 MHz

... 4.4 ns. O'C to +35'C
... 5.0 ns. +35'C 10 +50'C

... 35 ns. 5 mV/div to 20 V/div

... 23 ns. 5 mVidiv to 20 V/div

± 4%, first ns
± 2%. > 100ns

± 2%, ... 3% P'P

±2%, ... 3% P'P

Rile Time
Typical Step R.spon. .
AberTeIIonl (lignal
limited to 5
cIIv)

me""

Ac Low Frequency Response
(lower - 3 dB point)
Deflection Flctore:
Calibrated
Variable Range

... ,0 Hz. with ac coupling; 1 Hz wilh 10 Hz probe
1 mVldN 10 20 Vldrv

5 mVidiv 10 10 V/div in It sleps
In a 1-2'5 sequence
... 2.5 to 1

10 mVldN, 100 mV/dN. 1 V/dN

4 steps in a 1·2·5 sequence

... 2.5 to 1

Accuracy
(c.olibrated, +IS'C, +3S'C)

±2%. O' C 10 + t5'C, +35'C 10 +50'C ±3%. 5 mVldN 10 20 V/dN
±3%, O'C to +50'C
±5%. 1 mV/rirv to 2 mV/rirv; Derale by 1%.
O'C to + 15'C and +35'C to +50'C

Dllplay Model

CH 1. CH 2, ALT, CHOP, CH 1 monus
CH 2, CH 1 plus CH 2, X'Y,
Tngger V",w. Chop Rate' ... 250 kHz

Input Coupling

... 2 Hz with ac coupling
... 2 Hz with ac coupling

CH 1. CH 2, AlT. CHOP, CH 1 minus
CH 2, CH 1 plus CH 2, X·Y.
Chop Rate: ... 250 kHz

Dc, gnd. ac. internal dc

... 2.5 to 1

""0 to 1

± 2%, 5 mVldN 10 20 Vlrirv
± 5%. 1 mVld'r; to 2 mV/rirv

±3%

CH 1. CH2, AlT, CHOP. CH 1 minus
CH 2, Tngger V_. Olop Rate' 250 kHz

Single Trace, X-Y (internal switch)

Dc, gnd, ac

Ac or de

Input RaC: Input Impedenc.o

1 MIl ± 1% paralleled by ... 2OpF

1 MIl ± 1% paralleled by ",, 47 pF

1 MIl ± 1% paralleled by ", 47 pF

1 MIl ± 1% paralleled by _ 47 pF

Maximum Input VoHege

250 V (de + peak ac), 500 V P'P ac
at 1 kHz Q( less

350 V (de + peak ac), 700 V P'P at
1 kHz Q( less. Above 1 kHz racornmended P'P ac imiI is 250 V to 10 kHz
derating 10 25 V above 100 kHz

350 V (de + peak ac), 700 V P'P at ac
1 kHz Q( less

350 V (de + peak ac)

CMRR (CH 1 minul CH 2)
Position Range

At least 50: 1 at 1 MHz wihen usong same attenuator setting
... ±6div

... ±6div

1 "'±6d'r;

Delay Line

Permits VNlWong leading leadong of dtsplayed wavefam

Calibrator

0.6 V ± t% . ",, 1 kHz frequency

Channel loolalion

Unc.olibrated
(Variable) Range
Sweep Rate Accuracy
(Derate accuracy by an
addltlonat I % from O'C to
+IS'C, +3S'C to +SO'C)

2% or less display relaled crosstalk
to 15 MHz

2% Q( less display related crosstalk
to 10 MHz

Displayed Noise
Horizontal Deflection
Sweep Oenerator.
Calibrated Sweep Rat.s

0.6 V ± 1% .... twice the power
line frequency

... 0.2 mV pop al 1 mVidiv

0.2 s to 50 ns/dlY, 21 steps in a
1-2-5 sequence, plus an Xl0 mag
for sweep rates of 5 nsldiv

2s to 05"s1dN, 21 slepS., a
1-2-5 sequence, plus an Xl0 mag
for sweep rales to 50 nsldN

0.5 s to 0.2 "sIdiv, 20 sleps in a
1-2-5 sequence, plus an Xl0 mag
for sweep rales to 20 nsldiv

dIecacIe sleps

Continuously vanable between the caIibrated rates . and extends the slowest
rale to al least 0.5 sldiv

Continuously variable between the calibrated rates . and exlends the slowest
rate to at least 5 sldtv

Continuously variable between the caIibrated rates, and exlends lhe slowest
rate to at least 1.25 sldiv

Continuously variable between the calibrated rates, and extends the slowest
rate to at least 1 sldiv

+IS'C to +3S'C

XIO

+IS'C to +3S'C

XIO

+IS'C to +3S'C

20 msldiv 10 0.2 " sldiv

±2%

±3%

2 sldiv to 0.5 sldiv

±4%

±5%

All sweep rates

0.2 sldiv to 50 msldiv

±3%

± 4%

0.2 sldiv to 5 "sIdiv

±3%

± 4%

0.1 " sldiv to 50 nsldiv

±3%

± 4%

2 " sldiv to 0.5 "sldiv

± 4%

±5%

I XI I XIO
I ±3% 1± 4%

1 "sIdN 10 100 ms/div in

+IS'C to + 3S'C
All sweep rates

I
I

Measured over center 8 div, excluding
lirst 50 ns and all after the first 100 div
of magnified sweep
X-Y Mode: Bandwidth

Dc to at least 2 MHz

Dc to at least 500 kHz

Dc to at least 2 MHz

Deflection Factor

Selected by CH 2 controls and
horiz mag X I , X 10 WIth 5% 8CCl.1.4 V

External: ;> 1.2 V; Internal: ;> - 6.0 div

1 MlI paralleled by ",,24 pF

250 V (de + peak ac);
250 V p-p at 1 kHz or less

Exlernal: ;> 1.2 V; Internal: ;>±8 div

22 k!I paralleled by ",, 150 pF

1 MlI paralleled by ..,47 pF

350 V (de + peak ac);
350 V pop at 1 kHz or less.

350 V (de + peak ac);
350 V pop ac at 1 kHz or less

/>JxJve 1 kHz recommended pop ac hmit
is 100 V 10 10 kHz derating to 10 V above
100kHz
AutoMocie

Sweep Iree runs Without tnggenng signal Trigger level range IS reduced to "" the pop range of the lrigger signal

Single Sweep

Tnggemg requrements are as for normal sweep. When triggered.
sweep generalor produces one sweep orYt

Trigger HokIoIf

Triggering requirements are as lor normal
sweep. When triggered. sweep generator
produces one sweep orYt. Aulo push but·
ton musl be " Out posilion lor operation
and for setting triggering controls.

At least 20:1 range. The variable control IS internally selectable between lhe Variable Sweep or Variable HoIdafl lunctions.
GH (P31)

CRT: PhD.phDr

GX (P44)

GH (P31)

Delleetlon
",, 12kV

",, 12 kV

8xl0 (0.25 InidlV) Internal graticule hnes

8x 10 (0.25 inldiv) intemal graticule lines

Reer Interfece:
CH 1 end CH 2 Vertic:el Inputa Selected by CH 1 and CH 2 couphng In
Int position Input Impedance: 50 II
Custom Modified Input Impedance
1 MlI paralleled by = 60 pF

Selected by CH 1 and CH 2 coupling in
Inl position. Input Impedance. 50 II
Custom Modified Input Impedance:
1 MlI paralleled by ",, 100 pF

Trigger Input

Selected by Trigger Source swilch in
Int poSition. Input Impedance: 50 II
when selected; 25 n when not selected.
Custom Modified Input Impedance:
1 MlI paralleled by ",, 40 pF

Z-A.la Input

Input Impedance: "" 1.5 kll ± 5 V turns beam On from Off conditIOn; - 5 V turns
beam Off from On conditIOn

CH 1 Output

At least 50 mV/d,v

At least 4 MHz

Output Impedance

< 50 11

5011

oV to + 10 V ramp. Outpul Impedance: ""sao II
429

430

P6101A. lX; P6102A. lOX; P60628. lx/lOX. See pages 468 and 470.

Recom....nded Probea
Pricea

6xl 0 div (.203 n/div) internal graticule lines

At least 50 mV/div

At least 30 MHz

Page

8xl0 (0.25 inldiv) intemal graticule lines

Selected by Trigger Source switch in
Inl position. Input Impedance: 50 II
when selecl ed; 25 II when not selec ted.
Custom Modilied Input Impedance:
1 MlI paralleled by ",,60 pF

Bandwidth
Ramp Output

GH (P3 1)

Electrostatic

Accelereting Potential
Graticule

Sweep free runs without trigger signal or
lor togger repetition rales below 10 Hz

$3.895

$4.095

$2.795

$1 .790

Compatible eccellDriea begin on page 484.

429

TEK

TM 500
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

OSCILLOSCOPES

SC 503

SC 502

SC 501
SC 501

10 MHz Dual Trace Storage Oscilloscope

15 MHz Dual Trace Oscilloscope

5 MHz Oscilloscope

SC 503

SC 502

SC 501

10 MHz Bandwidth, Dual Trace

15 MHz Bandwidth, Dual Trace

5 MHz Bandwidth

50 ns/Div Maximum Calibrated Sweep Rate

20 ns/Dlv Maximum Calibrated Sweep Rate

Single Compartment Size

1 mV IDiv Maximum Sensitivity

1 mVIDiv Maximum Sensitivity

6.4 cm (2.5 in) CRT
Versatile Operating Features

Bistable Storage Autoerase

Delay Line

Trigger View, Variable Trigger Holdo"

Switchable Front/Rear X and Y Inputs

Enhanced Automatic Triggering

Rear Z-Axis Input
True X-Y Capability

The SC 503 is a nondelayed sweep, general purpose storage oscilloscope that can
be used to store and display waveforms after the input signal is removed.
Other important storage applications of the
SC 503 include measurements of signals in
computer peripherals, communication terminals and industrial control systems.
The SC 503 also features an autoerase
mode that erases the stored signal and
automatically retriggers the oscilloscope,
and X-V capability. The X-V capability allows creation of Lissajous patterns in many
cause and effect testing relationships including : acoustic speech testing, nerve potential testing , and optical stimulus re sponse testing.
STORAGE SYSTEM
Stored Writing Speed (Center 6 x 8 Divisions) - At least 80 div/ms (50 cm/ms).
Erase Time - 400 ms to 600 ms.
Autoerase Viewing Time - Continuously variable from ...:0.5 s to ;;.05 s.
Maximum Recommended Storage Time ",,4 hrs.

The SC 502 is a compact general-purpose
15 MHz dual-trace oscilloscope with high
writing speed, a wide range of sweep rates,
a wide range of deflection factors, and versatile triggering, including trigger view and
enhanced automatic triggering. It is designed to operate in any two adjacent compartments of a TM 500 mainframe.
The SC 502 is intended to be a powerful tool
in the field servicing of digital equipment.
The CAT of the SC 502 offers a high writing
speed as an advantage in the display of
digital information, while stable, clean trigg ering is assured by incorporating
well-proven circuits. Thus, the SC 502 offers
a unique combination of performance, compactness, and systems capability.
The rear interfacing capability of the SC 502
and all TM 500 instrumentation suggests exceptional applicability to systems of built-in
test equipment or rackmounted installations. The TM 515 Traveler mainframe with
the SC 502, forms a nucleus for sophisticated, compact field service ·packages:

ORDERING INFORMATION
SC 50215 MHz Oscilloscope

$2,795

The SC 501 is a single-channel, 5 MHz plugin unit oscilloscope with a 2.5 inch CAT display that occupies a single TM 500 Series
plug-in compartment.
Since the SC 501 fits any TM 500 or
TM 5000 mainframe, it can be used on the
bench, in a rack, or on the road .
Calibrated sweep rates are selected by
push-button logic in decade steps from
1 /Ls/div to 100 ms/div. A variable control extends the slowest sweep rate to at least
1 s/div and a fixed magnifier extends the
fastest sweep rate to 200 ns/div.
A 0 V to 10 V ramp for all sweep rates (excluding the X5 magnification) is provided at
a rear interface connector.
The triggering circuits allow stable triggering
from either internal or external sources.
Autotriggering and manual Level/Slope selection are combined in a single control. It is
useful above 10 Hz and provides a bright
baseline at all sweep rates.

For X-V operation an internal switch converts the horizontal deflection system of the
SC 501 to an external horizontal amplifier
which is internally calibrated for 100 mV/div
deflection factor with a bandwidth of
100 kHz.

Includes: Instruction manual (07o.1878{)1) .

ORDERING INFORMATION
SC 501 5 MHz Oscilloscope

ORDERING INFORMATION

Includes: Instruction manual (07o.17(x}()1).

SC 50310 MHz Storage Oscilloscope $4,095
Includes: Instruction manual (070.3438-00).
Compatible acc ••

430

OSCILLOSCOPE

eon•• begin on page 464.

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
~
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

$1 ,790

TEK

TM 500
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

PRODUCT SUMMARY

The CG 5001 is the computerized solution
to large-scale scope calibration needs. The
CG 5001 can be used as part of a computer-based system to calibrate and verify all
major oscilloscope parameters, and is specifically designed for use where many oscilloscopes are maintained. Its programmability , combined with state-of -the-art
performance, helps to minimize calibration
lab labor while maximizing accuracy of verification checks .
In addition to the CG 5001, TM 500 offers a
complete set of calibration instruments that
can be configured into a portable test set
for in-field oscilloscope service and calibration . These TM 500 oscilloscope calibration
instruments offer the widest range of standard amplitude squarewaves, fastest rise
times, lowest aberrations , fastest time
marks, and widest frequency range of leveled sinewaves available today.
The TG 501 Time Mark Generator provides
crystal-controlled time marks from 5 s to
1 ns, plus a variable mode of operation that
allows you to read the oscilloscope's timing
error directly in percent from the digital
display.
The PG 506 Calibration Generator provides
clean, fast-rise squarewaves for checking
oscilloscope transient response and calibrated-amplitude squarewaves for checking and setting the vertical amplifier gain of
the oscilloscope . Like the TG 501 , the
PG 506 has a variable mode of operation
that allows you to read the oscilloscope's
calibration error directly in percent from its
digital display.
The SG 503 and SG 504 generators provide
leveled sinewaves for bandwidth checks
(-3 dB pOints) and triggering performance
checks . The SG 503 is a general-purpose
leveled sinewave oscillator providing variable output from 250 kHz to 250 MHz. The
SG 504 provides a leveled sinewave output
that is variable from 245 MHz to 1050 MHz
in two bands. The SG 502 Oscillator benefits calibration applications where verification of low frequency rolloff in ac modes
and performance measurement of low-frequency-reject triggering modes is required.

OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATION
INSTRUMENTS

CG 5001
~

CG .. Oll"ftDCR .. M...... U CALIBRATION t("(UJOR

I D )'
rm;w1
ld.J

V " ]

, ..,

D.5 ,

"""_II1II
,.

"...

::J

...................

'----,

U'Ul1I".

..J

r. 'uWUI

0
C

, .... ,i.. .

(Ml"KWIITf

I . . . . .n

...

l!J

.
0 [j

': .. ~?~

LOW

l!J l!J
l!J f t l!J

:J,
:J,
0,

"';"

l!J
"

00
...

l!J

['!;

-U ...

T
..rWIIIII_

...

.ODi

l!J

MAl !j_

l!J

~ :

... '

l!.

,;,If

fOIl

~
t!J
OAO

I",.,
~

Programmable Oscilloscope Calibration Generator
OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATION
SELECTION GUIDE
Primary
FuncUona

Product

Secondary
FuncUona

CG5001
Programmable
CalibrallOn
Generalor

Amplilude
Calibralion
4O~V 10 200 V
Time Base
Calibralion
0.4 ns lOSs

Tesling rise lime and
transient response ,
allenualor compensalion,
oscilloscope nonlinearity

PG506
Calibralion
Generator

Amplilude
Calibralion
200 ~V 10 100 V

Tesling rise lime and
Iransianl response,
attenuator compensation

TG501
Time Mark
Generalor

Time Base
Calibralion
lnsl05s

Tesling oscilloscope
nonlinearity

SG503

Bandwidlh Cali·
bralion 250 kHz
10250 MHz

General leveled RF
signal source

Bandwidlh
Calibralion
245 MHz
10 1050 MHz

General levered
RF signal source
wilh frequency modu'
!alion capability

Signal
Generalor

SG504
Signal
Generalor

CG 5001
GPIB
IEEE-4

The CG 5001 is designed to support
other products which comply with IEEE
Standard 488-1978.

The Tektronix CG 5001 Programmable Oscilloscope Calibration Generator is a microprocessor-based generator that can be
used as part of a computerized system for
the calibration and verification of major oscilloscope parameters, including:
Vertical Gain
Horizontal Timing and Gain
Vertical Bandwidth/Pulse Characteristics
Probe Accuracy and Compensation
Current Probe Accuracy
Calibrator Output Accuracy

The CG 5001 's front panel features a wide
range of functions, many of which represent
a new state-of-the-art in calibration perfor-

mance. All these functions are programmable by a controller via the GPIB (General
Purpose Interface Bus). A "Learn" mode allows any manually-set function or range to
be acquired by a controller. Subsequent
use of the resulting program requires a minimum of operator skill and makes data logging an automatic operation.
This computer-assisted test and calibration
system can provide step-by-step instructions to the operator, thus significantly reducing the skill level required.
Many of the calibration and test steps previously performed by the operator can now be
transferred to a computer which executes
them in a consistent and error-free manner.
To calibrate a particular oscilloscope, the
computer's program can send control-setting information to the CG 5001, which then
sends the appropriate calibration signals to
the oscilloscope. At the same time, a series
of operator instructions can be placed on a
terminal to automatically coordinate the operator with the calibration signals being sent
from the CG 5001 . The operator follows
these instructions to make the necessary
settings of the oscilloscope controls as the
calibration or test procedure progresses. The
CG 5001 returns error or deviation information to the controller, where it can be compared with preprogrammed reference values
for the oscilloscope. A permanent record of
the entire maintenance procedure can be
stored by the controller and can be printed
via peripherals such as a hard copy unit or
line printer. Throughout the process, all calibration settings are determined by the
computer's program. All front panel settings
on the oscilloscope are specified in detail for
the operator. Calculations of error percentages are performed automatically.

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

431

TEK

OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATION
INSTRUMENTS

The CG 5001 is designed to greatly reduce
your maintenance costs. Built-in self test
routines and hardware check the operation
of all major circuits each time the power is
turned on.
Modular construction means that all circuit
boards unplug (except the Main Interconnect) for easy exchange if service is required. A signature analysis mode is included to facilitate troubleshooting of the digital
portion of the instrument.

CHARACTERISTICS
VOLTAGE (AMPLITUDE MODE)
The standard voltage is used to calibrate vertical
display accuracy.
Range - 40 /lV to 200 V (1 -2-5 steps with multiplier).
Multipliers - 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6, 8, 10 divisions.
Polarity - Positive from ground.
Accuracy - +0.25% ± 1 /lV.
Frequency - 40 mV to 80 mY: 10 Hz to 100
kHz. 100 mV to 10 V: dc or 10 Hz to 100 kHz. 12 V
to 200 V: dc or 10 Hz to 10 kHz.
Variable Range - ± 9.9%.
CURRENT (AMPLITUDE MODE)
The standard current is used to calibrate current
probes.
Range - 1 mA to 100 rnA (1 -2-5 sequence).
Multipliers - 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10.
Accuracy - ± 0.25% ± 2 !lAo
Frequency - Dc or 10 Hz to 1 MHz (decade
steps).
Droop - .,.;1%.
Variable Range - ±9.9%.
LOW EDGE (AMPLITUDE MODE)
The Low Distortion Pulse obtained in this mode is
used to test oscilloscope input amplifier and at·
tenuator compensation.
Range - 20 mV to 1 V p-p (50 0 load only) (1 -2-5
steps with multipliers).
Multipliers - 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10.
Polarity - Positive or negative transitions to
ground.
Rise Time (Fall Time) - "';1 .3 ns.
Abberrations - ± 2%.
Long Term Flatness - ±0.5% atter first 10 ns.
Frequency - 10 Hz to 1 MHz (decade steps).
Variable Amplitude Range - > ± 9.9% from
nominal.
HIGH EDGE (AMPLITUDE MODE)
The Low Distortion Pulse obtained in this mode is
used to test oscilloscope input amplifier and attenuator compensation.
Range - 1.2 V to 100 V ;;;..1 MO load (1 -2-5
steps with multipliers).
Polarity - Positive transition only (negative voltage to ground).
Rise Time - <100 ns.
Aberrations - ± 2% of squarewave amplitude.
± 0.5% atter first
Long Term Flatness 500 ns.
Frequency - 10 Hz to 100 kHz (decade steps).
Variable Amplitude Range - > ±9.9% from
nominal.

432

MARKERS (TIMING MODE)
The markers obtained in this mode are used to
calibrate oscilloscope time bases.
Range - 10 ns to 5 s (1 -2-5 steps).
X10 Magnifier - Increase marker rate by a factor of ten (0.1 JlS to 5 s range).
Accuracy ± 0 .01 % (optional TCXO
± 0.0003%).
Amplitude - 1 V minimum into 50 O.
Variable Range - ± 9.9%.
SLEWED EDGE (TIMING MODE)
Slewed Edges are used to calibrate the very fastest ranges found on oscilloscope time bases.
Range - 0.4 ns to 100 ns (1 -2-5 steps plus
0.4 ns).
X10 Magnif ier - Increases Slewed Edge rate
by a factor of ten (5 ns to 100 ns range) .
Accuracy ± 0 .01% (Optional TCXO
± 0.0003%).
Edge Position Uncertainty - ± 40 pS.
Amplitude - > 1 V into 50 O.
Variable Ra nge - ± 9.9%.
TRIGGER OUTPUT
The oscilloscope under test is normally triggered
externally from this source.
Output Amplitude - 1 V minimum into 50 O.
Trigger Rate (Marker Mode) - Normal: Slaved
to marker rate from 100 ns to 5 s; remains at
100 ns for faster markers. Divided by 10: Reduces
normal trigger rate by a factor of ten. Divided by
100: Reduces normal trigger rate by a factor of
one hundred.
Slewed Edge Mode - One trigger per slewed
edge.
All Other Modes - Normal: Slaved to output
frequency. Divided by 10: One-tenth output frequency. Divided by 100: One-hundredth output
frequency.
TIMING REFERENCE OUTPUT
EXTERNAL TIMING REFERENCE
Input Frequency - Any integral multiple of
1 MHz up to 5 MHz.
Required Accuracy - ±0.001%.
Input Amplitude - 1 V to 10 V RMS.
Input Resistance - 10 kO (nominal).
ENVIRONMENTAL
Meets or exceeds MIL-T·28800B , Class 5
requirements.
Ambient Temperature - Operating: O°C to
+50°C. Nonoperating: -55°C to + 75°C.
Altitude - Operating: 4500 m (15,000 tt). Nonoperating: 15000 m (50,000 tt).
Vibration - Operating: Displacement (p.p),
0.D15 inch. Vibration Frequency: 10 Hz to 55 Hz.
Total time: 75 minutes.
Relative Humidity - 90% to 95% at +50°C for
5 days.
Shock - Nonoperating: 30 g's, 1/2 sine, 11 ms
duration, three shocks in each direction along
three major axes; total shocks, 18.
Bench Handling - Operating: 45° 4 inches or
point of balance, whichever occurs first.

TM 500
MODULAR INSTRUMENTS

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS·'
Dtmenelone

Width
Hetght
Depth

203
124

:Jl5
kg

Weight ...
Standard
Option 01

., MIVCImum

3.9
4.0

In
8.0
4.9
12.0

Ib
8.5
8.7

Overa. DIm8nsIons (triple compartment plug-In).

PULSE HEAD (STANDARD ACCESSORY)
FAST EDGE (AMPLITUDE MODE)
The Puise Head is used to generate fast rise, low
distortion pulses for testing higher bandwidth vertical amplifiers.
Polarity - Positive or negative transitions from
ground.
Rise Time - .,.;200 pS.
Aberrations - ± 3% of pulse amplitude; not to
exceed 4% P'P for adjacent peaks.
Frequency 100 Hz to 100 kHz (decade
steps).
Amplitude - 1.1 V peak ± 5% into 50 O.
Variable Range - ± 10%.

ORDERING INFORMATION
CG 5001 Programmable Calibration
Generator

$14,995

Includee: Output cable assembly (012.0084.00): pulse
head (015 ·0311 ·01) : instrument interface guide
(070461&00): program CAl GEN (07D-476IHXl): instruc'
tion manual (07D-476HXl).

CG 551AP Programmable Calibration
Generator
$14,995
OPTIONS
Option 01 - Adds High Accuracy Time Base
(TCXO) CG 5OO1 /CG 551AP.

+ $650

Option 02 - Deletes Pulse Head
CG 5OO1 /CG551AP.
-$1,1 00
UtIlity Softwere
For TM 500014041 . Order 062·695!l{ll
$150
See page 359 for description and ordering
information.
CONVERSION KIT
CO 551AP - Reid Modification Kit to convert
to CG 5001 . Order 040-1041-02

$175

MAINFRAMES
CG 5001 requires either a TM 5003 or TM 5006. The
CG 551AP is a TM 500 version of the CG 5001 and requires a TM 506 Mod JB, TM 515 Mod UB or RTM 506
Mod JB. The CG 5001 is not compatible with TM 500
power module mainframes.

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Comparator Head - Used to calibrate built·
in oscilloscope calibrators against the Signals
available from the CG 5001 . Both the osc~1o
scope calibrator and CG 5001 standard amplitude signals are applied to the Comparator
Head and simultaneously displayed on the oscilloscope CRT. The CG 5001 signals are then
varied to obtain congruent displays. Errors are
then displayed on the CG 5001 readout.
Order 015-00102

> 35"

" Polaroid 612 PACK film, ASA 20,000, Is now available with
faster writing rate than previous 410 ROLL film.
'2 Value depends on film, scope, CRT, camera
the
operator.

aoo

The more commonly uled Polaroid films for each type of camera back era listed below. Shaded te"t Indicates fIIml available through Tektronl., 'S

ASA
Equivalent
Speed

Development
Time
(Secondl
at 75'F)

611"

200

Positive Print

612"

20,000

PosrtlVe Pnnt

20 to 25

665"

POSitIVe Print

14 to 20

Medium Contrast. Wide Gray Scale

107

3000

Positive Print

16 to 20

Medium Contrast

084

3000

Positive Pnnt

16 to 22

Medium Contrast

•
•

687""

3000

PositIVe Print

11 to 14

Medium Contrast. ceaterless

11 to 14

Color
Positive Pnnt

Balanced 10( Color-Electronic Rash

•

Includes Mounts

•

Film
Type

Format

Relolution
(Line Palrl/mm)

Characterlltlcl

Scanning
Electron
Microscope

Repetitive

3'1. In • 4'1. In Pack Fllmo-Actual Image area 7 3 em. 9 5 em (2 7 /,ln. 3'1. in) 8 prints per pack

Negative

689"

160 to 100

ColO(
891"

4 min

Transparency

Low Contrast, Wide Gray Scale

•

High Contrast

... ...
•

•

v
v

•

...
•
•

•

v
v
v

AutoFllm (For C-7 only)-Acfuallmage araa 10 em • 75 em (4 In • 3 In) 10 printa per pack
T-331"'J-5

400
T-336""

100

Positive Pnnt

NegatIVe
Transparency

40 to 100

Medium Contrast,
Extended Gray Scale

•

640

> 60

Positive Pnnt*2

7 to 9

..,

Medium Contrast. High Speed Color

Sheet Filma-Actual Image araa 9 0 em • 11 4 em (3
55

PosItive Pnnt

'I. In "

4'1. In)

22 to 25

Negative

Medium Contrast, Wide Gray Scale

•

3000

POSItIVe Print

161020

Medium Contrast

553"
(8 Pack)

800

Positive Print

16 to 22

Medium Contrast

•

55 PIN

•

Medium Contrast, High Resolution

Color
T-339"''''

150 to 160

•

•
•
v

Polaroid Roll Film aack. are no longer available from Tektronl. on new camera •. Polaroid Itlil manufacturel some roillilma , , , Call their toll fr. . number 1-800-225-1818 for rolf film
availability.

v Preferred film lor application.
•

Acceptable performance.

" No C08ting required.
Requires electronic scsn reversal to yield a correct reeding
image.
"Similar to Type 611 .
'2

" Allow prints to be made from negative; good for documentation or publicstlons.
's Available from Tektronix . See page 444.
'. Available in 1987.

441

TEK

RECOMMENDED
CAMERAS AND ADAPTORS
CAMERA AND MOUNTING ADAPTOR SELECTION GUIDE
Where two or more cameras are recommended. compare feature. and apeclflcatlon. to optimize for your application.
Tek camer•• lit many non·Tek CRT ba.ed product. Contact your Tek S.I.s Repr.sentative lor more Inl ormatlon
Mounting Adaptor Part Numbers

Recommended Cam.ra.
OSCilloscope or Display Device

High Writing
Rate

General
Purpose

Low Co.t

C,,"*l1

C·SC.
C·7

C·S1. C·S3. C·S9A.
C·27. C·28

C·30B·".
C·31B·"

CoSl
Opt 11
CoSl
Opt 12

C·59A
Opt 11

C-5C
C·7

Not recommended

0160057{)1

01&0249-00

Not recommended

01&024900

Not rec:o ,"

11000 Serie.

113>1
113>2

C-53
Opt 11

Not

C-4
Opt 10

11401
11402

recommet ded Not recomletlded

lei K:fed

Not recornrnet ded

122-al97{)l

01&0057{)1

Ot&024~

Not recommended

Ot&0057{)l

01&024~

01&0057{)1

Ot6{)24~

Not recommended

01&0057{)1

01&024~

01&0248{)1

01&0057{)1

016{)24~

Not recommended

01&0057{)1

016{)24~

Not recommended Not recommended

SOOO Series

5100 Senes Nonstorage"" ; I.e ..
5110. 5112. 010. 01 2. 577/01 . 5116"

C·59A

5100 Series Storage' "'; i.e ..
5111 . 5111A. 5t13. 5115.
011 . 0 13. 015. 577102
5400 Series Nonstorage· l e7; I.e.,
54031040. 5440. 5444. 040

C·59A

C-59A

5400 Series Slorage"2•• ; i.e.,

C-51"

54031041. 5441 . 041

C-53"
C-59A

5223"

C'4 Opt 02
C'5C; C·7. C·7 Opt 01

122-oo95{)l

C·4 Opt 02
C·5C
C·7. C-7 Opt 01
C-4 Opt 02;
C'5C; C·7. C-7 Opt Ot
C-4 Opt 02
C-5C; C·7. C·7 Opt 01
C-4 Opt 02
C-5C; C·7. C'7 Opt 01

122-0095{)1
Not recommended
122-oo95{)l
122-0095{)1
122-0095{)1

7000 Series

a em x 10 em Olsptay; i.e _.7104. 7503.
R7103. 7504. 7514. 7613N. 7623,
7633, 7704(A), 7834, 7844. 7854. 7934.
R7903, 7904, 7904A. T922R"

C-51"

C-53"

C-31B Opt 01" · ' "

C·3OB Opt 01· ·.. "

Large Screen Disptay' '; i.e.,
7403. 7603. 7603N

C-59A

C-40pt02
C-5C
C·5C Opt 01
C-7, C-7 Opt 01
C'4 0 pt02
C'5C; C·5C Opt 01
C-7, C-7 Opt 01

122-0095{)1

C-4"
C-4;
C·5C Opt 02;
C·5C Opt 04
C-7 Opt 02; C-7 Opt 03
C-7 Opt 02
C-5C Opt 04

122{)894{)1
122{)894{)1

C'4 0 pt 03"

122{)896{)1

016-0248{)1
122-0095{)1
01 &0057{J 1
016{)24~

Not recommended

No adaptor

No adaptor"

01&ml&Ol

o16-O359{) 1

No adaptor"

01&0269-03

No adaptor"

01&0269-03

No adaptor"
No adaptor"
No adaptor"

016{)327{)1
016{)327{)1

01&0057{)1

016{)24~

01&0248{) 1

01&0057{J 1

0 1 6{)24~

Not recommended

No adaptor

016{)225{)4

016-0243{)()

Portabl.s

Older WIth 0 a em Gralleule" ; I.e ..
422, 453. 454. 485. 491

C-31B

C-3OB

C-31B Opt 01

C·3OB Opt 01

Newer with 1 em Graticule"S· ' ; i.e.,

2235, 2245, 2246 Option 01; 2400 Series.
4SS, 464. 465. 4658. 465M, 466. 468,
R468. 475. 475A. 432, 434, 442
1 em Nonffiumlnated Gralleule" ; 2213(A).
2215(A). 2220. 2225. 223>, 2235. 2236

016-O359{)1

'I. Inch Graticule"· · S- 12; Le.,
305, 314, 326, 335, 336, 1501, 1502
TM 500" ; I e .. SC 502, SC 503. SC 504"

C·3OB Opt 01" ·
C·3OB Opt 01" ·

Nonilluminated Graticule -s-e; 2335,

No adaptor
No adaptor

C-5C Opt 04"
C-7 Opt 02"

2336. 2336YA, 2337

No adaptor

016-O359{)1

Display Monitors

S em x 10 cm"J; I.e.,
601 . 602. 605. 606, 6068, 607

C-3OB Opt 01" ·
C-59A

Large Screen 10 x 12 em" ; i_e ..
603, 604, 606, 620. 624, 634

C-59A

C-4 Opt 02
C'5C; C'7, C·7 Opt 01
C-4 Opt 02
C-5C; C-7, C-7 Opt 01

C·53-Z. 'O

C-59A· ··

122-oo95{) 1
122-0095{) 1

Older S Inch Round"

502. 503, 504, 515. 516, 519,
53l/540/550ISBO Senes. 575

C-51·"'·

Older S Inch Rectangular

560 Series" ; i.e .. 561 . 564, 567, 568

C-53"l*'O

C·59A" ·

No adaptor

016-0224{)1

01&0244{)()

Television Products

380. 381
520, 520A, 521 , 521A, 522A""
l480C
528A" , 1420. 1421 , 1422. 1424" "

C·3OB Opt 01" ·
C-59A· '·

C·4 Opt 03

C·53· Z. 1O

C·59A-a- 1D

C-59A
C·53· '·

529"
17108. 17118, 1720/2 1. 173>131 ,
1740. 1741. 1742. 1750

C·3OB Opt 01

C-40pt02
C-5C; C-7, C-7 Opt 01

122{)896{) 1

No adaptor
No adaptor
No adaptor

No adaptor
016{)295{) 1
016-0342{)()"

016{)327{)1

0 1 6{)24~

016{)248{)1

No adaptor
No adaptor

122-0095{)1
016{)357{)1

016-0224{) 1
C-4; C·5C Opt 02; C-5C Opt 04
C·7 Opt 02; C·7 Opt 03

122{)894{)1
016-O359{)1

No adaptor"

01&0269-03

o16-O359{)1

No adaptor

01&0269-03

No adaptor

No adaptor"

01&ml&Ol

016{)357{)1

016{)24~

016-0248{)1

Spectrum Analyzer.

2710

C·3OB Opt 01

491 "

C·3OB

492A, 492P. 494. 494P. 495,
496, 496P·' . 2754ISSIP
., Only cameras With < 0.7 magnrficatron can record the entire
screen area 01 a lO x 12 em display.
' 2 These scopes do not have camera power. The C-5 1 and
C·53 may be used only if powered with 016-0270-02 baNery
pack.
' J These scopes require modification lor graticul8 illumination.
., Though these scopes do not have illuminated graticu/es the
graticule may be photographed using storage flood guns on
storage models.
' J Due to physical configuration the C-50 Family cannot be
mounted.

442

c:!5

C-5C Opt 04
C·7 Opt 02

122-0095{)1
C-4 Opt 02
C-59A
C'5C; C-7. C-7 Opt 01
• The C·7 can only be used lor color rl the rmage rs electronr·
cally reversed.
. , A corrector lens is required to incresse cameras field of view

so that the full 8 em x 10 em CRT display area can be recorded_ The camera should be changed from standard to
Option 01. To do this order 016-0301·01 lor the standard
,C -308 or 016-0269·04 lor the standard C-318_ These kits
include the mounting adaptor and corrector /ens.
•• These scopes have no CRT bezel; therelo re. a camera cannot be mounted_A hand held C-5C. C·7, or C-4 can obtain a
record.

, The C-59A may be used With 016-0224-01. however the
image size is reduced.
.,. Adaptor not included with c amera . Order adaptor
separately.
' 11 Use on scopes with graticu/e illumination or bistable
storage_
. " Scopes do not have graticu/e Illumination.
'IJ C-30 Series may cut off the first and last small graticu/e
·tick· marks on some scopes.
.,. Must use 1/22 or 1/32 to get enough depth 01 field lor good
locus.

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

TEK

CAMERA
COMPARISONS

CAMERA AND MOUNTING ADAPTOR SELECTION GUIDE
Where two or more Clmer.. Ire recommended, complre lelture. Ind .peclflcltlon. to optimize lor your Ippllcltlon.
Tek Clmerl' 111 mlny non-Tek CRT bl.ed product• • Contact your Tek Slle. Representltlve lor more Inlormltlon.
Recommended Clmera.
Gener.1
Purpo.e

High Writing
Rate

Oscilloscope or DI.play Device

Mounting Adaptor Part Numbers
Low Co.t

C-4- 11

C-5C,
C-7

C-51 , C-53, C-59A,
C-27,

C-30S· 1J,
C-31B'"

C'4 Opt 02
C·5C. C·7

t22-0095-o1

OHH)357-o1

ot6-024!Hl6

Not recommended

No adapto<

Ot&0288-ot
IC·59(A) only]

No adapto<

c-n

Other Product.
370

C·59A
Only C·59(A)· ,.

576. ~ . 503t

OFI50. OF151 . OFI52. 0F235 TOR

1240-' -'"

C-4 Opt 02
C·5C; C·7. C·7 Opt 01

t22-0095-ot

C'4 Opt 11

122-0096-01

C·5C Opt 03
C'7 Opt 04

T900 Series.
excluding T922R (see 7000 Series)

" Only cameras with < 0.7 magnification can recorrJ the entire
SCfBM 8/9a o( a lOx 12 em display.
' Z Th8s8 scopas do not have camera power. TIle C-51 aOO C-53
may be used only if poweted with 016-C27().()2 battery pack.
' 3 Th8s8 scopas require modification for graticule illumination.
'. Though /hess scopas do not have illuminated graticuJes the
grsticule may be photographed using storage flood guns on
storage models.
'S Due to physical configuration the C-5O Family cannot be

mounted.

Not recommended

No adapto<"

No adapto<

01&0358-01
122{)896{) 1

C-40pt03

:JJ8

016-0357-01
Not recommended

" TIle C-7 can only be used for color if the image Is eIectronicaly
reversed.
"A comJCIor Isns Is required to Incr8ase cameras fieItj o( view so
that the fu118em x 10em CRT display 8I9B can be reoorrJed.
TIle camera should be changed from standard to Option 01 . To
do this order 016-0301-01 (or the standard C-30B or
016-0269-D4 for t1le standard C-31 B. Th8s8 kits include the
mounting adaptor aOO comJCIor Isns.
" Th8s8 scopas have no CRT bezel; 1hef8fr:xe, a camera cannot
be mounted. A hancJ held C-SC, C-7, or C4 can obtain a

.. TIle C-59A may be used with 016-0224-{)1 , however the image size Is reruoed.
not Included with camera. Order adaptor separately.
, ,, Use on scopas with grsticule illumination or bistable storage.
' 12 Sccpes do not have grsticule illumination.
' 13 C-3O Series may cut off t1le first aOO /sst sms6 grsticule ' lid<'
marks on some scopas.
,,. Must use f/22 or f/32 to get enough depth o( fieItj for good
focus.
" 0 Adaptor

recorrJ.

CAMERA SELECTION GUIDE
Camera

C-51

C-53

Features

Fastest wntng speed
AdJUStable film and
shuNer speed

BurtHn VIeW poll
Remote shuNer
actuation
Interchangeable film
backs
SIngle sweep mode

General purpose fO(
II1Stn.mentS With

8 cm x 10cm CATs
Adjustable film and
shuNer speed
BuiIt'in view poll
Remote shuNer
actuation
Interchangeable film
backs

C-59A
General purpose fO(

CATs up to 6'~
Inches: low cost
Adjustable fitm and
shuNer speed
BuiIt'in view poll
Internal baneries
Interchangeable film
backs
OEM pncing available

C-3OB
Contnuously variable
magnrfrcation
Dual swing·away
hinge fO( viewing
the CAT
Easy operation
Interchangeable film
backs
Compact size
OEM pricing avaitabte

C-31B

Max writing speed fo<
portabte scopes
Dual swing-away
hnge fO( viewing
the CAT
Easy operabOn
Interchangeable fHm
backs
Compact size

C-5C
Low cost, mounts on
most scopes
Graticule inuminato(
Viewing doO<
Easy to use
Rxed focus
OEM pncing available

Lowest price Tek
camefa, hand held
Easily Iflterchangeable
hoods
Scope and video
hoods
Easy to use
Rxed focus
OEM pncng available

C-7
Motonzed

rjrn back

Auto deIIeIoping
prints: uses PolarOId
AutoFitms

Audibte indicato

$1.700

$495

$370

$595

To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's NBtional Marketing Center,
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99, In Oregon call collect (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

443

TEK

DIGITAL
CAMERA SYSTEM

ORDERING INFORMATION
CAMERA MOUNTING ADAPTOR AND HOOD
016-021HlO
01&3.5X with 20.000 ASA film. Installs in minutes. Order 01& 74 dB. SIN).
Record Length - 512 points.
Number of Channels 1 (Multiple channel
software available in 1987).
Signal Aqulsitlon Rate - 150 to 600 ms with
IBM PC AT.
Number of Displayed Waveforms - 6.
Number of Active Waveforms - 26. Number
of stored waveforms: (mass storage dependent).

$800

POLAROID PACK FILMS
AVAILABLE FROM TEKTRONIX

(3 single packs) 24 prints. Order 006-6822-00
(SO single packs) 400 prints. Order 006-6823-00
Type 889 - Color print (80 ASA).
(3 twin packs) 48 prints. Order 006-6826-{)()
(25 twin packs) 400 prints. Order 006-6827-00
Type 891 - Color transparency with mounts.
(80 ASA).
(3 Single packs) 24 trans. Order 006-6845{)1
(SO single packs) 400 trans. Order 006-6845{)2

NEW DCS01
CHARACTERISTICS

POLAROID REPLACEMENT ROLLER
ASSEMBLIES FOR PACK FILM BACKS
(Gray) Order 401-0304-00
(Red and Black) Order 401-Q303-OO

DCSOI - The Digital Camera System with CIOOI Video Camera with Option IA frame store board.

Weight - 48 oz (31 .3 g) max with mounting
adaptor.
Length - 9.5 in (24.13 cm) no adaptor and bellows collapsed.
Width - 4.75 in (12.07 cm) with no adaptor.
Frame store board - Rts a full slot in an IBM
PC """ 13.25 in (33.66 cm).
Scope Compatibility MCP: 11302, 2467,
7104/R7103. Non MCP: Scopes that have 7 x
9 cm or 8 x 10 cm displays and C-30 Series adaptor. See chart on page 442.
Computer Compatibility
Required IBM PC System Basic System IBM PC, )(T, AT or compatible 384 kbytes memory
MS-DOS version 2.1 or higher. One 300 kbyte floppy disk. Numerical co-processor chip: 8007 for
PCIXT, 80287 for AT. Color graphics adaptor card.
Recommended System - IBM PC enhanced
AT, or compatible with hard disk with 512 kbytes
memory, enhanced graphics card and high resolution color monitor. Expanded memory, RAM disk
configured, 300 kbyte floppy disk. MS-DOS version 3.1. Communications interface cards: GPIB
or RS232C. 80287 numerical co-processor chip.

11302 Thermal
HC01 HC02 ·3 Copiers

350 MHz Portable Scope. See page
1 GHz Mainframe. See page 222.
SO MHz Mainframe. See page 201

Video Coplers* )
4 x 5 inch for the OCS.
8 x 10 inch for the DeS.

$980
$1,275

include I roll of thermal paper and an instruction

manual.

Thermal Paper (For HC01) 1 box (4 rolls) ",,185 pictures per
roll. Order 016{)867{)1
(For HC02) 1 box (4 rolls) ",,90 vertical pictures
per roll. Order 016{)668{)1

$43
$77

LOW COST
CAMERA

TEK
Film

Uses Polaroid pack film; i.e., 667, 665, etc.
See page 441 for other films.
The C-5C snd C-7 sre sepsrste CSmtJr8 systems; therefore, s
C-5C csnnot be converted into s C-7 snd vice V8tS8. However,
they do use the SBme hoOds snd flBsh sssemblies.

OEM Quantities
The low-cost C-5C Oscilloscope Camera is
available in OEM quantities,
Special priCing. tenna and condition a are a ••II.ble to qualllied OEMa_ Contact your Iocel Tektronix Salea Engineer lor
complete Inlonn.tIon.

CHARACTERISTICS
Aperture - Rxed at fl16.
Lens - Three glass elements.
Magnification - 0.67 or 0.85.
Relative Light-Gathering Ability - 0.02.
Shutter - Electronic; 1/10 to 5 s; time.
Field of View - 9.8 cm x 12.2 cm (0.67 magnification) or 8.0 cm x 10.0 cm (0.85 magnification).
Power - The C-SC requires (4) AA alkaline batteries (not included) . Battery holder inside
camera.

Standard C-5C (with flash).

C-5C

lar, with a reliable electronically activated
shutter. The three-element f/16 lens offers
both 0.67 and 0.85 magnifications, either of
which you can easily change by reversing
the lens/shutter module and the spacer
module positions.

Low Cost
Easy to Use
Mounts Onto Many Scopes and CRTBased Instruments
Covers 8 cm x 10 cm or 9.8 cm x 12.2 cm
CRT Displays
Fixed Focus
Lightweight and Compact
Interchangeable Adaptor Hoods

OEM Pricing Available

Maximum Performance at Minimum Cost
If your application does not require specialized photographic techniques, such as the
capability to record single sweeps, this general purpose camera may fill your needs at a
low cost. The C-5C is lightweight and moduFeeture.

Standard

...

01&0357-01

1.4
1.9

Option 02

...

01&0357-01

o16-Q359{)1

Option 03

Option 04

...

016-Q359{)1

01&0358-01

13.0
13.7

5.13
5.38

13.0
13.7

5.13
5.38

10.5
11.2

4.13
4.40

9.5
11.2

3.74
4.41

10.5
11.2

4.13
4.40

Width
Inside
Outside

14.2
14.9

5.60
5.85

14.2
14.9

5.60
5.85

12.0
12.7

4.74
4.99

11 .8
13.1

4.65
5.14

12.0
12.7

4.74
4.99

528, 600 Series

with nonilluminated

without gratK:ule or

graticule,
1420 Series,
5100 Series

with illuminated grati·
cule, 5400 Series,
7000 Series, T922R,
370

432, 434,455,464,
4658, 465M, 466,
468, 475, 475A,
2245, 2246,
2400 Series

T900 Series
(except T922R)

6.6
5.5
10.1
Ib
3.0
4.1

ORDERING INFORMATION
C-5C Camera

$495

Includes: Adaptor hood (016-0357 -01): flash unit
(01~2-()2): instruction manual (070-2824-00).

Option 03 flash.
Option 04 flash.

Comes standard with camera (see below),
and additional hoods can be ordered separately. Easily changed by removing four
screws inside hood.

0, Stsndsrd C-5C.

Adaptor Hoods

Olmenalona' ,

5n , 600 Series

Welghta""
Nel
Shipping

Option 01 flash .
Option 02 flash.

Height
Inside
Outside

Compatibility

168
140
257

Rash models have a small built-in door.
Nonflash models replace the flash unit with
a large lift-up viewing door (016-0630-00).

Option 01

Large VieWIng
Door
Adaptor Hood

A variable-intensity xenon flash that evenly
lights CATs with non illuminated graticules
comes on the C-5C and Options 03 and 04.
It can be easily retrofitted on C-5Cs that do
not have it.

Width
Height
Depth

Viewing Door

Built-In Flash on Some Models

Rash Unit

Flash

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS· 1
Olmenalona

OPTIONS
01&0357-01 adaptor hood, no
-$30
01&0359-01 adaptor hood, no

-$30
01&0358-01 adaptor hood with
NC
01&0359-01 adaplor hood with
NC

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
For ordering fllma see page 444, left hand aide.
Large Viewing Door - Rts all three mounting adaptor hoods. (Included with C-SC
Options 01 and 02.) Order 016-{)63}OO
$8.00
Graticule Flaah Unit - Rts all three mounting adaptor hoods. (Included with C-SC and
C-SC Options 03 and 04.) Order 01~2-o2

$150

Additional Mounting Adaptor Hooda Requires flash unit or large viewing door.
(C-SC and C-SC Option 01) Order 01&0357-01
(C-5C Options 02 and 04) Order 01&0359-01
(C-SC Option 03) Order 01&0358-01

$20
$20
$20

2200 Series with
nonilluminated

graticule
2710

., All dimensions sre spproxlmste since esch hoOd hss sdditionsl pisstic notches snd grooves for roountlng.

~ To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,

E!r5

toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

445

TEK

LOW COST
CAMERA

Field of View Compatibility
Check to see that the hood selected provides a large enough field of view (hOW
large a CRT display the camera will fully
record) . Refer to Scope Hood Selection
Guide on the next page.
C-4 VIDEO PRODUCT
COMPATIBILITY GUIDE

Standard C-4 Hand-Held Camera.

C-4
Hand-Held Operation
No Focusing Required
Four Element f/4,5 Glass Lens System
Mechanical Shutter
Adapts to Most Tektronix and NonTektronix Scopes and CRT Displays
Five Easily Interchangeable Scope Hoods
Three Large Hoods for Video Screens
OEM Pricing Available

A camera can be a key part of your measurement system. It allows you to capture
events, document the results, and it helps
to communicate the results with clarity and
credibility.
The C-4 is a high quality CRT documentation camera at an affordable price . The C-4
is an easy-to-use handheld camera system
that uses Polaroid instant pack films which
develop in seconds, giving you immediate
results. The C-4 is ideal for the lab, classroom, medical facility, TV studio, or design
bench . Three video hoods allow instant
prints to be made from many common video CRTs.

A Snap to Use
Anyone can take sharp, quality instant pictures after just a few minutes of familiarization with the camera and manual. No photographic skill or training is required!
Portable
The C-4 is hand-held, thus easily moved
between test locations without having to remove mounting hardware.

446

For easy handling, the contoured pistol grip
includes a trigger button for the shutter
release.

Tektronix and Non-Tektronix Product
Compatibility
The five easily interchangeable hoods allow
the C-4 camera to fit most Tektronix and
non-Tektronix oscilloscopes and CRT
displays.
The C-4 is recommended for scopes with either illuminated graticules or bistable storage
displays. On nonilluminated graticule scopes
the C-4 will only record the waveform: '
For Tektronix products compatibility see
page 443.
For other Tektronix products not listed on
page 443, and non-Tektronix oscilloscopes
and CRT-based products, refer to mechanical and field of view compatibility below.
"The Tektronix C·5C Camera, with flash, is recommend
ed for scopes that do not have an illuminated graticule.

The following lists compatibility currently tested.
Please refer to page 447 for determining compatibility on products not listed.
C-4 Video Hood
Display

Opt 11

Tektron,x 4104(A). 4105(A).
4106(A). 4107(A)

....

Ann Arbor Ambassador • , ••

....

Apple Macintosh DIsplay

....
....

Compaq 'Plus'"

....

Apple II Momtor G0905

....

DEC VR·241"

Mechanical Compatibility
It is suggested that the hood's front lip dimensions be used as a guide when determining physical compatibility (see Adaptor
Hood Selection Guide on next page). Note:
Hoods can fit around the CRT bezel or they
can fit against the CRT's face, inside the
bezel.

....
....

DEC MATE II VR·201A""'·
Hea'hk,' H· 19"
IBM PC Jr Mon,tor 4863"

....

IBM Color PC Mondor 5153

....
....

IBM PC Portable

....

NEC JB· I201M Mon,'or
Panasonlc TR·!nJ Monotor

....

Quad Chrome Color Monotor

....

Sony KV12t7 Color Mon,tor
Tandy Color Mon,tor

1&~

Zenith ZVM· I22"

Hood Selection
The hood is a key part of the C-4 system
since it places the camera at the correct distance from the CRT screen, blocks out ambient light, and has a built-in corrector lens to
properly focus the image and sets the magnification ratio. Each hood has two snap
locks to insure quick interchangeability.

Opt 12

Opl101l 10 hood 1"5 the new 11401
and 11402 eqUivalenl lime scopes

....
....

Zeroth ZVM· 121'''·

....

Zemth ZVM· I35

....

'r Cuts off some of the CRT.

" Tends to have soft focus.
' J Possible light leaks since CRT has less CIJrIIature than the

hood.
" Optical distortion more noticeable.
Note: Will not work on:
, Tel<: 4025. 4027. or 4050 Series.
, Tandy Computers with built-in CRTs.
,Apple lie Monitor A2M20l0.

For additional hood., ... next page.

Speciel pricing term. end condition. er. e.eilable to qualified OEM • . Contect your loeel Tektronix Sale. Engln. .r for
complete Information.

LOW COST
CAMERA

TEK

C-4 Camera Body with hoods: (Left to Right) Option 12, Option 11, Option 10, Option 02, standard and Option 00.

ADAPTOR HOOD SELECTION GUIDE

CHARACTERISTICS
Aperture - 1/32 to 1/4.5 (continuously variable).
Lens - Four glass elements.
Focal Length - 105 mm nominal (without
hood).
Magnification Dependent on hood. See
Adaptor Hood Selection Guide at right.
Resolving Power - At Center : At least
6 lines/mm. At Camera: At least 3 lines/mm.
Relative light Gathering Ability - See Adaptor Hood Selection Guide at right.
Field of View - Dependent on hood. See
Adaptor Hood Selection Guide at right.
Shutter - Mechanical; ';'25 s, to 1 s, and bulb.
Synchronization - X-sync switch closure occurs when the shutter reaches its fully open
position.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions

Width
Height
With Plstot gnp
Without Plstot gnp
Depth
With standard hood
Without standard hood

tOO

236

9.3
4.7

119

14 .3
7.3

363
t85

Weight""
Net
With standard hood
Without standard hood

21
1.8

$370

Includes: Body; Pistol Grip (122 -0901 -00) ; hood
(122-0894-01); operator manual (070-5000-01).
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option
Option

01
02
03
10
11
12

OPTIONS
Delete Hood (Body only).
Substitute 122-0895-01 Hood.
Substitute 122-0896-01 Hood.
Substitute 122-0a97-o1 Hood.
Substitute 122-

Width
Height to top of flash
Height with chamber
Depth

196

264

7.1
7.7
10.4

251

Weight ..

Net

1.3

Shipping

2.6

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Polaroid AutoFllm Type 331 - B&W print, with extended gray
scale (400 ASA)
3 twin packs (60 prints). Order 00&6815-00
10 twin packs (200 prints). Order 006-681&00
Type 339 - Color print (640 ASA)
3 twin packs (60 prints). Order 006-6813-00
10 twin packs (200 prints). Order 006-6814-00

9.9

Extre Print Holding Chamber -

Order 122-1039-00

3.7
5.8

Foot Switch With 8 tt Cable -

$22_50

ExtrII Battery Peck With Lemo Connector
-

Batteries not included. Order 016-0799-01

$595

Include.: Adaptor hood (01&0057-{)1); print holding
chamber (122-1~); circurt board covers for 0.67 mag
(200-3074-00); for 0.85 mag (200-3031-00); operator manual

(07Ml27-OO).
01&0057-{)1 Hood and no Rash.

Option 02 - 016-0359-01 Hood and Rash.
Option 03 - 016-0359-01 Hood and no Rash.
Option 04 -

01&0358-{)1 Hood and Rash.

Option 05 -

01&0358-{)1 Hood and no Rash .

Option 20 - Camera Body Only, no Rash or
Hood.
Option 30*' With 016-0799-01 Battery
Pack (batteries not included).
Option 31*' With ac Power Supply
(110 V).
., One o( Bach power source can be Ofdered.

6 ft cable with Lemo
Connector, 110 V ac Version.
Order 119-1647-{)2

Service Manua' Order 070-5051-00"

• , Contact your local Sal8s 0fflc6.

For .ddltlon.1 hood., gretlcule

n••h

unit, or I.rge viewing

door, . . . C-SC Option.' Acce.aorte. SectIon on page 445_

-$30
NC

-$30
HC
-$30
-~

+ $25
+$50

~ To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,

$70

C-7 Camera.

OEM term. 8Y.,lIoble on thl. product.

OPTIONS
Option 01 -

$18_75

Ac Power Supply -

C-7 requires a power source (does not come as a standard accessory). Order Opt 30" , Opt 31" , or use your
own power via Lemo connector.

C-7 Camera with Flash

$25

Lemo Connector tor Power-In Order 13Hl776-OO

ORDERING INFORMATION

$71
$220
$22

Order 260-1189-02

Hoods - Uses C-SC adaptor hoods. Refer to
hood's dimensions on page 445.

$58
$190

toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

449

TEK

COMPACT
HIGH PERFORMANCE CAMERAS

C-31 B Option 01
The C-31B Option 01 offers an expanded
field of view. This f/1 .2, 0.43 magnification
lens system has a relative light-gathering
ability of 2.9 covering CRT screens up to
8 cm x 10 cm. It is recommended for the
2400 Series, 455, 464, 465, 465B, 466, 468,
475, and 475A oscilloscopes.

C-30 Option 01
With Corrector Lens Off

CHARACTERISTICS (C-31B)

C-30 Series
Adaptable to Many Instruments
Standard Models Cover 0,8 cm/dlv CRTs
Optimized for 8 cm x 10 cm CRTs (Option 01)
Continuously Variable Magnification (C-30B)
Writing Speed Enhancer Available
Fast Light Gathering Ability, With C-31B
(0,5 Mag)
Interchangeable Backs
Swings Away tor CRT Viewing
OEM Pricing on C-30B

The standard versions of the C-3)8 and
C-31B are primarily for use on the older 400
Series portables that have 0.8 cmldiv CATs.
(Mounting adaptor, 016{XI)6{)1 , is included.)
The Option 01 models are the same cameras
except that a slip-on corrector lens is used
for coverage of 8 cm x 10 cm displays, and a
different mounting adaptor (016-0269-03 for
2400 Series, 465, etc.) is included.
The C-3)8/C-31B cameras can be used on
some 7CXXl and 5CXXl Series lab scopes (with
8 cm x 10 cm displays); :n> Series; SonyfTek
portables; as well as some €OJ Series monitors. See Camera Selection Guide on page
442 for compatibility information.
Dual swing-away hinges allow the camera to
be swung out of the way, either to the left or
right, for direct viewing of the CRT. The
cameras are focused using a split-image
focus plate placed inside the Polaroid back.
Graflok back cameras use the back's
(Graflok) built-in viewing glass.

C-30B
The C-30B is a versatile, general purpose
camera for scopes that have 0.8 cm/div
CRTs. The C-30B offers a highly reliable
mechanical shutter and an f/1 .9 lens. It is
the only Tektronix oscilloscope camera that
features continuously variable magnification

450

(from 0.7 to 1.5) giving you greater photographing flexibility. This version is recommended for the 453, 454, 485 and 491 .

C-30B Option 01
The C-3)8 Option 01 offers an expanded field
of view. The f/1 .9, 0.8 magnification lens covers an 8 cm x 10 cm CRT screen without
vignetting. This camera is recommended for
the 2400 Series, 455, 464, 465, 4658, 466, 468,
475, and 475A oscilloscopes.
The C-30B with
only.

corrector /ens Is optimized tor use at 0.8 mag

SpeCifications are the same for the C-31B and
C-31B Option 01 unless otherwise noted.
Aperture - Variable from 111 .3 to 1116.
Lens Speed - 111.3
Magnification - Fixed at 0.5 (0 .43 on
Option 01).
Resolving Power - At Center: At least 30
lines/mm. At Corners: At least 15 lines/mm.
Relative Light-Gathering Ability - 2.7 (2.9 on
Option 01).
Shutter - Mechanical; 1/125 to 1 s; bulb and time.
Synchronization - X-sync contact closure.
Field of View - Standard: 7 cm x 9 cm. Option 01 : 8 cm x 10 cm.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dlmenalona

Width
Height
Depth

231
140

269

Weight ..

kg
3.1
5.4

Net

Shipping

In
9.2
5.5
10.6

Ib
6.8
11.0

CHARACTERISTICS (C-30B)

ORDERING INFORMATION

Specifications are the same for the C-30B and
C-3OB Option 01 unless otherwise noted.
Aperture - Variable from f/1.9 to 1116.
Lens Speed - 111 .9.
Magnification - Variable from 0.7 to 1.5
(0.8 magnification on Option 01 with C-30B set to
1.0 magnification).
Resolving Power - (at 1:1 magnification). At
Center: At least 25 lines/mm. At Comers: At least
10 lines/mm. ·
Relative Light-Gathering Ability - 1.0 (0.9 on
Option 01).
Shutter - Mechanical; 1/125 to 1 s; bulb and time.
Synchronization Output - X-sync contact
closure.
Field of View - Standard: 7.0 cm x 9.0 cm.
Option 01 : 8.0 cm x 10.0 cm.

(,P' denotes that the camera has a 3 in x 4 in pack film
back. All models include Polaroid pack film back.)

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dlmenalona

Width
Height
Depth

t91
13)

Weight ...

254
kg

Net

2.2

Shipping

4.1

In
7.5
5.1
10.4

Ib
4.8
9.0

C-31B
This camera's f/1 .3, 0.5 magnification lens
offers the fastest writing speed for 2400 and
400 Series oscilloscopes. The 0.5 magnification means that the image size on the print
will be approximately one half of the
C-30Bs. The C-31B is for 0.8 cm/div CRTs
(453, 485, 491 , 454).

C-30BP Camera

$1,480

Include.: Polaroid pack film back (122-0752-02); splitimage focus plate (387-1"'
Option 12*1 Corrector lens for 113)2*'

C-53P Camera

$1,940

Include.: Same as C-51P.
Option 11 Corrector lens for 113J2*'

C-59AG Camera

$1,335

Include.: Same as C-51G except instruction manual
(070-3632«1).

C-59AP Camera

$1,335

Include.: Same as C-59AG.
Option 11 Corrector lens for 113:>1 /2*'

C-59A Kit for 576 - Expands the field of
view to fully cover the 6'12 inch CRT and adjacent scale readout characters of the 576
Curve Tracer and 5030 Series oscilloscopes.
The slip-on corrector lens (352{)293«1) reduces the effective magnification of the C-59
from 0.67 to 0.5 so it can record the entire
display on Polaroid 3'12 in x 4 '12 in film (for the
C-59A camera only). Adapts camera to 576,
5030, and 5031 . Order 01&0288-01
"' One or bOth options csn be ordered.
•, To order, oontBCt you IocsI TBictronbr SsIBs

$180

omoe.

C-SO SERIES
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Mounting Adaptors - See page 442.
Battery Pack - Provides auxiliary + 15 V
power source for using the C-51 , C-53 Cam-

C-59A

CHARACTERISTICS

For Larger CRTs (0.67 Mag)
Mechanical Shutter
Lowest Priced C-50 Series
Photometer Exposure Aid
Range-Finder Focusing
Internal Battery or External Power
OEM Pricing Available

This camera is designed for CRTs up to
61/2 inches (10.2 cm x 12.7 cm field of view
with Polaroid pack film). With the use of an
adaptor frame/corrector lens optional ac·
cessory, the camera's field of view can be
expanded to fully cover the 61k inch CRT
and adjacent scale readout characters of
the Tektronix 576 Curve Tracer and the 5030
Series oscilloscopes. It is the only C-50
Series camera for the 7603. Many of the
features of the higher priced C-50 Series
cameras are standard on the C-59A: photometer exposure aid , range-finder focusing, bulb and time operating modes, x-sync
contacts, and film back interchangeability.

Aperture - Variable from f/2.8 fo 1/16.
Magnification - 0.67.
Resolving Power - Center: At least 10 lines/
mm. Corners: At least 4 lines/mm.
Relative Light-Gathering Ability - 0.65.
Shutter - Mechanical; 1/125 to 1 s; bulb and
time.
Power Requirement - Receives power
(+ 15 V) from a 7000 Series oscilloscope, or from
an internal battery pack, 8 AA size alkalines,
(12 V) if used on a non-7000 Series oscilloscope.
Synchronization - X-sync switch closure.
Field of View - 10.2 cm x 12.7 cm (wider with
optional 016-0288-01 adaptor frame/corrector
lens).
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dlmenalona

Width
Height
Depth

292

Welght_
Net

Shipping

193
273
kg
3.2
5.0

In
7.7
tl .5
10.8
Ib
7.0
11 .0

eras with oscilloscopes without camera power.
A three-position mode switch on the battery
pack also allows the camera to be powered
from a 7(0) Series oscilloscope or an extemal
+15V source. Includes three pin female connectors for external power in (131-0716-00).
Net weight, including batteries, is 1.2Ib. Requires 8 AA size alkaline batteries (not included). Order 016-0270-02
Writing Speed Enhancer - Provides controlled film fogging to increase writing speed
by 3X for 3,(0) ASA film and ;;'3.5X with
20,(0) ASA film. Installs in minutes. See page
441 for more information.
(C-51) Order 016-0279-02
(C-53) Order 016-03J0-Q2
(C-59A) Order 01&0290-02

X-Sync Connector Plug -

$215
$290
$300

Not shown.

Order 134«179-00
Foot Switch - For Remote Shutter Actuation
of the C-51, C-53, with 8 It cable.
Order 260-1189-02

$1.30

$22.50

Carrying Ca.e -

Holds a complete C-SO Series camera with extra film backs and accessories. Order 016-01n«l

Polaroid Pack Film Back -

$285

Included with

'P" models. Order 122{)926-02
$180
Included with "P" models.
Order 387-0893-02
$4.50
Graflok Type Film Back - Included with
"G" models (see page 454 for film holders),
accept Polaroid 4 in x 5 in film holders, standard cut-film holders, film-pack adaptors, rollfilm holders"' (except heavy motorized models). Includes integral focusing screen.
Order 122-Q931-o1
$285
., Other film holders and adaptors (4 em )( 5 em cut film, bBck

Focus Plate -

film, or roll film) are available at IoeBI csmers sfol8s.

~ To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,

C!E5

$290

toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

453

VIDEO COPIERS
COLOR PLOTTER

HCl00 Plotter

HC011HC02 Video Copiers

HCO 1/HC02 Video Copie...
Applications/Compatibility: Personal Computers; Imaging Products with Composite
Video Outputs: Digitizing Camera System
(DCS01, C1001); Logic Analyzers (except
1241); VCR's; Medical Imaging; TV Carne...;
Ultrasound Systems; Manual Production

The HC01 /HC02 offer copies in seconds
(17 and 21 seconds respectively) of the
most complex computer screen graphics or
TV/CRT display monitor images. The copiers are ideal for a wide range of applications , such as permanent records of
teleconferences, medical diagnostics, and
measurement and instrumentation data.

CHARACTERISTICS
INPUT SIGNALS
NTSC/PAL/SECAM Composite Video - 1 V
pop , 750 terminated , negative sync (video
bridged out).
RGB TTL From PC - TIL Level (bridged out), F
(H) = 15.75 kHz.
Parallel Data Interface/Teletext/Videotex TIL Level.
RESOLUTION (DOTS X LINES)
Composite Video Signal
NTSC
PAL/SECAM

Frame Mode

Field Mode

640 dots x 476 lines

640 dots x 238 lines

640 dots x 512 lines

640 dots x 289 lines

R.G.B. TTL Signal Reid Mode: 640 x 200 (Non interlace).
Frame Mode: 640 x 400 (Interlace).
Parallel Data - 640 Dot 80 Column; ASCII 96
Character Built-in; Graphic Mode Application;
Printing Speed 160 CH.lSec.
Gray Scale - 16 tones
PRINT SPECIFICATIONS
Paper- Super grade thermaItype.
HC02

"" Prints/roll
Width
Length
Print Size
Image Size
Print Speed

454

HC01

V Mode

HMode

19:>

110 mm (4.3in)

216 mm (8.Sin)

2t m (85ft)

21 m (85fl)

110xll5mm
(4.3 x 4.lin)

216 x 279 m j 216 x 220 mm
(8.5 x llin)
(8.5 x 8.Sin)

OOmm x 74mn
(3.9 x 2.9in)

200 mm x 148 mm
(7.8 x 5.Bin)

,., 17 Sec

,., 21 Sec

POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage - 120 V ac ± 10%
Line Frequency - 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power Consumption - HC01 : 60 W. HC02:
110W.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
HC01

HC02

Dlmen.lon.

Width
Height
Depth

210
112

8.3
4.4
14.1

368
119
337

14.5
4.7
13.3

358

Weight""

Net

5.5

12.1

7.7

17.0

ORDERING INFORMATION
Each copier Include. a roll of thermal paper and a
manual.

HC01 4 x 5 inch Video Copier
HC02 8 x 10 inch Video Copier

$980
$1,275

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Thermal Paper - Four rolls per box.
(Hall) Order 01EHl867{)1
(HC02) Order 01&0868-01
Da" Cable - 10 fool, male-to-male 9-P1N DB
connectors. For conneclion to RGB
output. Order 174-()537{)1

$43
$77

$20

HC 100 Color Plotter
Compatibility: 2430, 7854, 7020, 336 Option
01, 468 Option 02, 370

This low cost four color plotter directly prints
the set-up conditions and the acquired
waveforms from a number of Tek instruments. The plotter has GPIB and Centronix
interfaces.

CHARACTERISTICS
Effective Drawing Size - 267 mm (X-axis) x
192 mm (Y-axis).
Maximum Drawing Speed - 230 mm/sec
(along pen axis).
Maximum Resolution - 0.1 mm.
Pen Response Speed - 15 times/sec.
Number of Pens - 4 (changed automatically).
Pen Types - Rber pens: aqueous ink or oilbased ink. Ball-point pens: aqueous ink.
Paper Sizes - ISO A4: 2!iJ7 mm x 210 mm. 85:
257 mm x 182 mm. US letter size: 279 mm x
216mm.
Paper Types - Ordinary paper; OHP film .

Pen Movement Precision - Single Pen :
0.3 mm. Different Pens: 0.5 mm.
Pen Change Precision - Within 0.3 mm.
FUNCTIONS
Drawing Modes - Self Test, Plotter, Printer.
Character Types - ASCII (96 types); International (32 types for 11 countries).
Automatic Pen-Up - 25 during on -line
operation.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage - Standard: 117 V ac ± 10%.
Option 01 : 220/240 V ac ± 10%.
Line Frequency - 49.5 Hz to 60.5 Hz.
Power Consumption - 30 W.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature - Operating: 5°C to +35°C.
Nonoperating: +30°C to + 70°C.
Humidity - Operating and nonoperating: 85%.
REliABILITY
Pen Lifetime - Aqueous fiber pen: "'" 200 m.
Oil-based Rber Pen: "'" 400 m. Aqueous ball-point
pen: 4OOm.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dlmen.lon.

Width
Height
Depth

415
81
272

16.5
3.2
10.8

Weight",

Net

Ib
13.2

ORDERING INFORMATION
HC-100 Color Plotter·'
Option 01 -

220/240 V Operation· '

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Centronlll Cable-' GPIB Cable-

Order 012-' are also
used extensively.

Luminance - The amount of light emitted
or scattered by a surface and is usually
measured in footlamberts.

., An additional decade of sensitivity is included and Is usable if the Jt6 Is csrefully z8f08d and used at a relatively stable
temperature.

Irradiance - The amount of radiant flux
received by a unit of surface area and is
usually measured in watts/cm2*l .

Lambert's Law - Describes the spatial
characteristics of a perfectly diffusing surface which may be either emitting or reflecting light. The light emitted or accepted by
such a surface decreases with angle (from
perpendicular) according to the cosine of
the angle.

Cosine
corrected

silicon spectraf
curve (250 to
1200 nm)

100
tt- Z
Z w

~
CC ~

....I

en
Z

a: w
(/)

J6502
J6512

CC 0

C a:
w
CC
a: CI..
w >
t> :>

IJ-t r)~ -CIECUWE
p,HO ;:-OP cv--

----- .-- ~ ----------

60
40

.-,..l

1- -

'/'"

0::"'_ -

~\
\

-- I

J6504

~
I1/ I~~~; ~\
.
jr - ~Tv I I ~

-\
\

;; ~

400
350

500
450

600
550

-- - -- - -- - - -- -- -- - - --

800
750

900
850

WAVELENGTH- NANOMETERS
(All curve heights adjusted to 100% for clarity)
NOTE: C.I.E. stands for the International Commission on illumination.

!«

700
650

\
\

J65

1000
950

1100
1050

DIGITAL PHOTOMETER/
RADIOMETER

TEK

J16 PROBE SELECTION GUIDE
The following flowchart is an aid in selecting J16 probes. The applications for the probes are too numerous to list, but this should help in
your selection .

TYPICAL APPLICATIONS

EOUAl RESPONSE TO ALL
WAVElENGTHS (TOT"l RADIATION)

(RADIOM ETRIC PROBES
FL.AT 450 nm TO 950 nm)

of the J16. (An NO 1 filter has 10% transmission, an NO 2 filter has 1%, etc.). These filters
may be held with an optional filter holder.

J6511 / J650 1 Illuminance Probes
Typical Applications: Measurement of
roadway illumination, office lighting, illumination of work surfaces, studio lighting,
camera set up, and yellow and green LED
testing

Where the 1 sq cm sensor is not completely filled by the source for example with a
laser beam , the reading obtained represents ~watt instead of ~watts/cm2 or milliwatts x 10-4 instead of milliwatts/m2 (Option 02) . Small variations in sensor
uniformity may add ± 5% uncertainty to
this measurement.

See page 459 for available Application Notes.

The J6511 is an illuminance probe with
readout in footcandles (lumens/m2 (lux) for
the J6511 Option 02) . A multi-element glass
filter and silicon photo-diode ensure a close
match to the CIE photopic curve (color corrected) . The silicon-sensor recovery time is
virtually instantaneous; low light levels can
be measured immediately after exposure to
bright sunlight.
The angular response is accurately cosine
corrected, simulating an ideal 180 0 field-ofview detector. The low-profile probe has a
leveling indicator to ensure accurate measurements where a significant proportion of
the illumination comes from sources at low
angles to the horizon.
A 25-foot cable between the probe head
and J 16 allows the user to be out of the
field of view while making measurements.
Where cosine correction is not necessary, a
standard probe is available (J6501) with the
same photopic correction and units as the
J6511 . The J6501 with the LED adaptor can
be used to measure green and yellow LEOs.

JIB- TV System with J6502 being used for color monitor
set· up.

J6502/ J6512 Irradiance Probes
Typical Applications: Laser research
experiments, measurements of radiant
efficiency, color CRT set-up, and infrared
LED testing
See page 459 for available Application Notes.

The J6502 /J6512 measure irradiance in
microwatts/cm 2 (milliwatts/ m2 with Option 02). The spectral response is flat from
450 nanometers to 950 nanometers, ± 7%.
The response is typically down 50% at
400 nm and 1030 nm.
An optional filter holder is available for the
J6502 to mount standard 1 inch diameter
customer-supplied filters of up to 3/s inch
thickness. Where high intensity sources are
used (over 1990 ~watts/cm2) , neutral density
filters can be used to extend the range

The J6512 has a low-profile detector head
that is at the end of a six foot cable. Longer
cables can be ordered as a special
modification.

J6503 S" Luminance Probe
Typical Applications: Measuring brightness of video screens, street signs, light reflected from work surfaces, and movie
screens
See page 459 for available Application Notes.

The J6503 measures luminance in footlamberts (candelaslm2 (nit) with Option 02)
where light scattered or emitted by a surface
must be measured. The probe is pointed at
the emitting surface.
The probe's response is closely matched to
the CIE photopic curve, ensuring accurate results even when measuring spectrally different light sources.

457

TEK

DIGITAL PHOTOMETER/
RADIOMETER

J6504 Uncorrected Probe

The acceptance angle is approximately 8°,
which is determined by internal field stop
apertures. Providing that the 8° field is
uniformly filled , the probe can be held at
any distance from the source. At 21 inches
from the front of the probe, the field of view
is approximately three inches in diameter.
The foot lambert or candelas/m2 (nit) (Option 02) indicator automatically lights when
the J6503 is connected.

Typical Applications: Checking light
sources used in photoresist or photoprocessing applications, and comparisons
of ultraviolet light sources_
See page 459 for available Application Notes.

This probe is designed for applications
where only relative measurements need be
made. The J6504 has the widest spectral
range, and is the most sensitive probe. Use
is made of a UV-enhanced silicon sensor
and a UV-transmitting window rather than
spectral-correction filters.

J6505 Red LED Test Probe
Typical Applications: Measurement of
light-emitting diodes (LED) having spectral
outputs in the red region (600 nm to 710 nm)_
Note: For yellow or green LEOs use the J6501 probe, for
infrared LEOs use the J6502 probe.

See page 459 for available Application Notes.

The J6505 measures illuminance in footcandies (lumens/m2 (lux) with Option 02), which
can easily be converted into luminous intensity in candelas. (See Application Notes
58-A-2635 and 58-A-2704-1.)
Measuring Luminance with the Tektronix JI61J6523.

J6523

1 0 Luminance Probe

Typical Applications: Measuring highway
lighting, video displays, photographic equipment, and lighting equipment.
See page 459 for available Application Notes.

The J6523 will measure the luminance in
footlamberts (candelas/m2 with Option 02)
of a spot as small as 0.32 inch in diameter.
By using commercially available 55 mm
stackable diopters , areas as small as
0.035 inch ( + 10 diopters) can be measured. These 55 mm diopters are physically
similar to threaded 55 mm filters, and are
available from most photography stores.
(See Application Note 58-AX-3252).
The 1° angle represents 0.21 inch per foot
of distance from the probe to the source.
Thus at 10 feet, the J6523 measures a
2.1 inch diameter spot.
The probe includes an optical sighting system with a go viewing field. The focusing
range is 18 inches to infinity, closer with
55 mm close-up diopters. The spectral response is closely matched to the CIE
photopic curve (color-corrected) for accurately measuring all commonly used light
sources.
The J6523 may be attached to the J 16 or
used with an optional probe extension cable. A standard 1/4 in x 20 threaded socket
allows it to be used on a tripod or an optical
bench.

458

An adaptor supplied with the probe provides a controlled spacing between the sensor and the LED under test. The adaptor
excludes ambient light, and has internal baffles to prevent stray reflections during the
measurement. Three inserts are supplied
with the adaptor to fit common sizes of LEOs
(0.000 inch, 0.125 inch, and 0.200 inch in diameter). These inserts are made of soft plastic that can be easily modified by the user.
With the adaptor in place, a reading of 1
footcandle on the J16 represents 100
millicandelas of luminous intensity. With a
metric version of the J16/J6505 (Option 02) ,
1lumen/m2 represents 10 millicandelas. A
10X increase in sensitivity is available on
special order.
In the J6505, the silicon photodiode-filter
combination provides an excellent match to
the photopic curve in the region 600 nm to
710 nm. This close match requires compromising in the 380 nm to 600 nm region making this probe unsuitable for general illuminance measurements. For LED measurements in the yellow or green region, the LED
adaptor must be used with the J6501 and
the same conversion factor for luminous intensity applies.

No units are indicated on the three front
panel indicators when using the J6504,
since it provides relative readings only.
An optional filter holder may be used to
mount standard 1-inch diameter filters on
standard-configuration probes. Ultraviolet,
visible, or near infrared filters can be used
to select the wavelength of interest and exclude ambient light.

J16 with analog BCD
output (OptKX1 07).

Option 07

BCD/Analog Output

The J16 is equipped with a 25-pin connector
on the unit's top. This provides parallel TIL
logic anc BCD outputs, a ' hold' input line
(TIL), and an analog signal output (0 to
- 2 V or 0 to -6 V) , depending on the
range, for a full-scale readout. The analog
bandwidth is approximately 0.8 Hz.
A cable-end connector and cover have been
added to the accessories complement.

J16 probe used to measure pulsed light source.

DIGITAL PHOTOMETER!
RADIOMETER

TEK
CHARACTERISTICS
(See Probes on previous pages)
Display - 3 '/2 digit LED readout and three LEOs
automatically indicating correct units for probe in
use. Metric version readout is also available
(Option 02).
Stability - Within 2% per year.
Linearity - Within 2% over the entire range,
enabling single point calibration.
Integration Time - ",,100 ms.
Calibration - Electrical calibration of the J16
mainframe is performed by use of a calibrated
voltage source or DVM traceable to NBS. Calibrated probes can be used with any J16 without
additional calibration.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Standard and Option 01 - Has internal rechargeable NiCad batteries that require 16 hours for a
full charge. The J16 will operate nominally four
hours continuously on a charge. The J16 cannot be
operated from the battery charger for continuous
operation since the charging rate is ",,200 rnA,
while the J16 draws ",,400 mA. For continuous
operation an ac power supply is recommended.
Option 03 and Option 04 - Ac only operation,
no internal batteries.

J16 AND PROBES
ENVIRONMENTAL
Ambient Temperature Nonoperating :
-50°C to + 75°C. Operating: -15°C to +40°C.
Altitude - Nonoperating: To 15000 m (50,000
ft). Operating: To 4600 m (15,000 ft).
Humidity - Operating and Storage: Rve cycles
(120 hour) to 95% relative humidity at 40°C. Referenced to MIL-E-l6400F.
Vibration - Operating: 15 minutes along each
of the three major axes at a total displacement of
0.025 in pop (4 g's) from 10 Hz to 55 Hz to 10 Hz in
one minute cycles. Hold for three minutes at 55 Hz.
All major resonances must be above 55 Hz.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
(With Probe And Blttery Pick Inltalled)
Dlmenllonl

Width
Height
Depth

123

4.6
2.4
8.0

Wetght",

60
203
kg

Net
Domestic Shipping
Export'packed

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

ORDERING INFORMATION

J16 MAINFRAME

1.5
2.3
4.5

(PROBES NOT INCLUDED UNLESS NOTED)
J16 Photometer/Radiometer Battery
Version, With 115 V ac, 50 Hz to
400 Hz
$1,255
Include.: Battery charger (119-0375{)2): shoulder strap
(34&0104-00): battery peck (OI&0539{)I): nonmetric ver'
sion instruction manual (07() 1879-(0): or with Option 02
metric version instruction manual (07() 188(}()()).

J16-TV Photometer/Radiometer Pack$1,880
age for TV Color CRT Set-Up
Include.: Same as J16 plus J6502 irradiance probe,
light occluder (01&0005-00),42 inch probe extension ca·
ble (012-<>414-414-

:1:3%

<5% Pi>

Capaci-

tance
Bandwidth

Derated to

Rose Tme

11 pf
14 pf

50 M-tz

3.5 ns

17ns

bon Range

15 pf to 47 pf

15 pf to 24 pf

. , In t OX position the input R - 10 MO :t 0.5 % with
scope Input R - t MO :t 2%.

an oscillo-

For 1 MO Input

ORDERING INFORMATION
P6062B 100 MHz, 6 ft Switchable
Attenuation Probe

For 1 MO Input
1X to 10X Selectable Anenuatlon
Anenuatlon Switch on Probe Body
Scope Readout Changes to Selected
Anenuatlon
The P6062B and P6063B are passive dual
attenuation probes designed for oscilloscopes with bandwidths to 100 and
200 MHz. A sliding switch on the probe
body selects 1X or 10X attenuation. This
1X-10X switch allows the user to switch in
and out a decade of sensitivity without returning to the test instrument. Attenuation
may be arbitrarily switched from 1X to 10X
to evaluate the effects of loading of the oscilloscope on the circuit under test.

$175

Include.: Retractable hook tip (83. 013-010Hl5): probe
tip ground cover (BI6. 16&0404-(1): 5 in ground lead
(G7 . 175-0124-(1): 12 in ground lead (G7. 175-0125-(1):
hook tip (96. 206-0114-(0): two replaceable tips (925.
206-0191-(0): probe holder (352-8048
DIH/Amp

lX
10X

6ft

1 MIl
10 MIl

10 pF
3pF

3.5ns

±25V
±250V

±5V
± 5OV

P8201
FET

lX
lOX

6ft

100 kO
1 MIl

3pF
1.5 pF

0.4ns

± loo V
±200V

±0.6V
±6V

±5.6V
±56V

1 MIl

1.5 pF

±200V

± 60V

±200V

lOX
looX

10 MIl
10 MIl

2pF
2 pF

0.7 ns
0.7 ns

±200V
±200V

±6V
±60V

±55V
±200V

Yes

P8230
BI •• /Off••t

lOX

1.6m

4500

1.3 pF

~ps

±30V

±5V

Yes

474

$395

P8231
BI../Off ••t

lOX

1.5m

4500

1.6 pF

~ps

±30V

± 10V

±5V

Yes

473

$410

looX

P8202A
FET

voltage' . This feature reduces the dc-loading
effects of the probe when it is used to measure signals whose mid-voltage value is not at
zero volts, or in circuits where the termination
impedance is not returned to ground level.
The Input Bias/Offset Voltage may be adjusted so that the voltage at the probe input
resistor is equal to the test signal potential;
thus, no current flows through the input
resistor,
For example, if a standard 500 n, 10X probe
were used to examine an ECl output, the
probe's 500 n resistance to ground would
form a voltage divider with the gate's
output-termination resistor. This divider can
cause distortion of the output signal levels,
shift the dc operation pOint of the output
transistor, and reduce the gate's noise
margin,
The dc-load nulling capability of the P6230
helps solve this problem. By adjusting the
Input Bias/Offset Voltage to the ECl low
level or to the termination voltage, the only
effect of the probe resistance will be a small
decrease in the ECl output-termination resistance, The effect of the probe on output
voltage levels is negligible.
The probe derives its power from the probe
power jack on many Tek scopes or an
1101A Power Supply (see next page) .
The P6230 is compatible with all subminiature probe accessories listed on page 487 ,
With the subminiature-to-miniature probe tip
adaptor (013-0202-00), all miniature probe
accessories on page 486 can be used.

CHARACTERISTICS
ELECTRICAL
Attenuation - lOX ±3%.
Loading - 1.3 pF/450 n.
Bandwidth - 1.5 GHz.
Dc Offset Range - -5 V to +5 V.
Dc Maximum - 10 V.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature Range - Operating : O°C to
+50°C (+32°F to + 122°F). Nonoperating :
-55°C to + 75°C (-67°F to + 167°F).
Humidity - Five cycles (120 hrs) 95% to 97% at
3Q°C to BOoC. MIL-E-l6400F, Class 4.
Altitude - Operating: 4600 m (15,000 ttl. Nonoperating: 15000 m (50,000 tt).

ORDERING INFORMATION
P6230 lOX, 1,6 m Bias/Offset Probe

$395

Includes: Adjustment tool (F3, 003-1364{)1), retractable
hook tip (Cl , 0131)20EHXJ), circuit board connector (CS,
131 -2766-03), 8.8 in alligator ground lead (Gl0 ,
195-1870-00), 6 in microhook ground lead (G5,
195-4104-00), 2 in ground lead (G9, 195-4240-00), probe
holder (352-0687-00); 2 each of white, gray, red and
green cable marners; manual (07D-4211-OO).

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
KLIPKIT - 16 pin DIP package accepts the
P6230 and P6130 family probes directly. Other
probes must use the supplied pins and attach
via a retractable hook tip. Included are two DIP
clips, and four signal/ground pins.
Order 0131)197-00

$40

KLIPKIT Signel/Ground Pinl - Packets of
four pins for use with the KLiPKIT.
Order 131-3288-02

$29

For probe eccessorles, see pege 488.
For repleceeble moduler lube..embliel, lee pege
488.
Instrument Competlbility Chert il on pege 484.

~ To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,

E!!5

A. .dOut

toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

TEK

ACTIVE PROBES
POWER SUPPLY

P6202A

P6201

Dc to 900 MHz, 1X With Readout

110 1A Power Supply

Dc to 500 MHz, 10X With Readout

i
The 1101A Accessory Power Supply provides power for active probes such as the
Tektronix P6201, P6202A and P6230 when
they are used with oscilloscopes that do not
supply probe power.

For 50 0 or 1 MO Inputs
Unity Gain, Low Input Capacitance
Two Plug-on Attenuator Heads That
Maintain Scope Readout Factor

The 1101A will provide power for up to two
probes. Output power features short-circuit
protection.

For 50 0 or 1 MO Inputs

Dc Offset, Ac-Dc Coupling Switch

Dc Offset, Small Probe Size
The P6201 is an active (FET) probe providing unity gain and dc to 900 MHz bandwidth. The P6201 is the best general-purpose probe within its voltage range from the
standpoint of electrical performance. Very
low input capacitance permits acquisition of
high frequency signals with minimum loading of circuits under test while high input
resistance minimizes low frequency and dc
loading. Plug-on attenuator heads provide
higher input resistance and reduced input
capacitance.
The probe derives its power from the probe
power jack on many Tek scopes, or an
1101A Power Supply.

CHARACTERISTICS
Rise Time
Bandwidth (verified by
rise time)
Attenuation
Attenuation Accuracy
Input Resistance

The low input capacitance of the P6202A
permits acquisition of high frequency Signals with a minimum loading of circuits under test while the high input resistance minimizes low frequency and dc loading. The dc
offset feature offsets any dc component
within the range of the control to bring the
signal into the dynamic range of the probe.
The P6202A derives its power from the
probe power jack on many Tek scopes, or
an 1101A Power Supply.

ORDERING INFORMATION
P62011X, 6 ft FET Probe

P8201

P8202A

<0.4 ns

< 0.7 ns

> 9:Xl MHz

> 500 MHz

XtO

±3%

±4%

100 IdJ

10 MIl

Input Capacitance

3pF

2 pF

Input R with Attenuator

1 MIl

10 MIl' !

Input C with Attenuator

1.5 pF

2 pF' !

Dynamic Range

± 0.6 V

± 6.0V

± 6Vor±SOV

± SOV'!

Dynamic Range with
Attenuator

High Input Impedance Through Freq Range

Dc Offset Range

± 5.6V

± 55 V

Noise

:nJ~V

15O~V

± 100 V peal<

± 2OO V peal<

attenuator head (010-037&00); 100X attenuator head
(010-0377-00); 3 probe tips (09. 20&0200-00); probe tip
(02. 103.0164-(0); ~ cm (12 inch) ground lead (G4,
175-0048-02); ground contact (05, 13H~-OO) ; alligator
clip (A 16, 344-0046-00); electrical insulating sleeve (06,
166-0557-(0); ground contact insulator (07, 342.ol8(}{)() ;
carrying case (016-0156-02); instruction manual
(070-130&00).

P6202A 10X, 2 m FET Probe

"MaRable In pscIcage of

SO MHz

2 MHz

10X Attenuator -

5 V at
500 MHz

20 V at
:nJ MHz

Order OHHl384-OO

200 V peal<

200 V peak' !

Derated above

50 MHz

150 MHz' !

Derate to-at
Frequency

5 Vat
500 MHz

70Vat
400 MHz' !

10Hz

16 Hz

Ac Coupling - 3 dB
Low Frequency

PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
DI_nelone

Width
Height
Depth

157

6.2
3.5
6.5

89
165

Weight.,

kg
1.7

Net

Ib
3.8

ORDERING INFORMATION
1101A Accessory Power Supply

$425

Includel: Instruction sheet 070-512&00.
INTERNATIONAL POWER PLUG OPTIONS
Option A1 - Universal Euro 220 V, 50 Hz.
Option A2 - UK 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A3 - Australian 240 V, 50 Hz.
Option A4 - North American 240 V. 60 Hz.
Option AS - Switzerland 220 V, 50 Hz.

to only. Order 206-0230-03 (826).

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

Derated above
Derated to-at
Frequency
Maximum Input with
Attenuator

$680
two all-

Includel: Retractable probe tip (E2, 01~7.ol);
gator dips (A 16, 344-04&00);
accessory pouch (01EHl537-OO); data sheet (062-1003-00).

The P6420 RF probe measures high frequency ac voltage from 10 kHz to 1 GHz. It
provides a dc output voltage proportional to
the RMS value of a sinewave input compatible with any DMM with an input resistance
of 10 Mn.

CHARACTERISTICS
Voltage Range - 0.5 V to 25 V RMS (70.7 V pop).
Ac to Dc Transfer Ratio Accuracy - 0.5 V to

5 V RMS ± 10% (+ 15°C to +35°C). 5.0 V to
25V RMS ±5% (+15°C to +35°C).
Frequency Response - 100 kHz to 300 MHz
(± 0.5 dB). 50 kHz to 500 MHz (± 1.5 dB), 10 kHz
to 1 GHz (± 3.0 dB).
Input Capacitance - "",3.7 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage - 42.4 V (peak ac +
dc).
Temperature Range - Nonoperating: _55°C
to + 75°C. Operating: + 15°C to +35°C.
Length - Probe only: 96 mm. Cable Only: 2 m.

For DMM Input
UL Listed

The P6602 Temperature Probe is a temperature measuring device designed to operate
with the 2236 Digital Multimeter. The temperature sensory element consists of a thinfilm platinum resistor in the tip of the probe.
Measurements are made by touching the
probe tip to the surface under test. The resulting resistance is measured by the
multimeter through a two-conductor cable.
The tip and cable assembly are replaceable.

CHARACTERISTICS
Probe Head
and Cable : -62°C to +230°C (-80°F to
+ 446° F). Banana Jack Style Connector: -15°C
to +85°C.
Voltage - 400 V peak.

Operating Temperature Range -

ORDERING INFORMATION
P6602 1.5 m Temperature Probe

ORDERING INFORMATION
P6420 2 m RF Probe
$145

Include8: Instruction manual (070-4377-00).

Include8: Retractable probe tip (E2, 013{X)97{)1); two
alligator clips (A 16, 344-<>04&00); two replaceable"
probe tips; electrical insulating sleeve (816, 16&0404·
01); 75 mm (3 in) ground lead (G6, 175{)84!HXl); 130 mm
(6 in) ground (G8, 175-1017-(0); probe holder (352.()351 00); 8NG female to dual banana adaptor (103{X)9Q-OO);
data sheet (062-2764-00).
., A vsilsble in packages 01 1M (order 206-0230-03) or 100
(order 206-023().()4) (826).

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Probe Cable8 - For P6420 (does not change electrical
specifications):
(1 m) Order 174-0076-00
$15
(2 m) Order 174-0077-00
$17
(3 m) Order 174-0078-00
$19

~ To order, cail your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,

476

toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

$225

TEK

HIGH VOLTAGE PROBES

P6007 Dc to 25 MHz, 100X

P6009

P6015 40 kV, Peak Pulse, 1000X

Dc to 120 MHz, 100X With Readout

-"-

For 1 MU Inputs
1500 V Dc
Dc to 120 MHz
Low Capacitance-2.5 pF

For 1 MU Inputs
1500 V Dc
Low Capacitance Loading

The P6007 is a low input capacitance, highvoltage (1.5 kV) probe. It can be compensated to match all plug-ins and oscilloscopes with nominal input capacitances of
15 pF to 55 pF and input resistance of 1 MO.

ORDERING INFORMATION
P6007 100X, 6 ft High Voltage Probe

The P6009 is a low input capacitance, highvoltage (1.5 kV) probe designed for use with
dc to 150 MHz oscilloscopes. The probe
can be compensated to match plug-ins and
oscilloscopes with nominal input capacitances of 12 pF to 47 pF and input resistance of 1 MO.
The P6009 is equipped with a special BNC
connector that provides CRT Readout information when used with plug-in units and
mainframes that have these features.

nana tip (A12, 134{X)13{x)); 5 in ground lead (G?, 1750124-01); 12 in ground lead (G?, 175-0125-01); 0.055 in
diameter straight tip (206-0015-00); 0.080 in diameter
spring tip (A4, 206-0060-00); hook tip (A6, 206-0105{x));
two
miniature
alligator
clips
(A 16, 344{X)46{X)); probe holder (352-()()9()-Q()); instruction manual (070-0388-01).

9 It cable.
12 It cable.

The P0015 Provides 1CXXlX attenuation for oscilloscope measurements up to 40 kV peak
pulse. Voltage or duty cycle derating is necessary for RF voltages at frequencies over
100 kHz, or at temperatures above 25°C.

$195

ORDERING INFORMATION

sembly (A17, 013-0052{x)); 3 in ground lead (G7, 175·
0263-01); instruction manual (070-0401-01).

P6015 1000X, 10 ft High Voltage Probe
$695
Include.: Canyng case (016-0128-02); high-voItage die1ec-

OPTION

tric fluid (A21 , 252-o12XXJ); alligator clip (A14, 344{)()()5(0); probe holder (352-oli6OO); instruction manual (07D-

9 It without Readout.

0373-02).

Ne
Ne
Ne

3.5 It cable.

+ Peak Ac

75 MHz Useful Bandwidth

Include.: Same as the P6007 plus bayonet ground as-

Option 14 -

OPTIONS
Option 01 Option 03 Option 04 -

ORDERING INFORMATION
P6009 100X, 9 ft High Voltage Probe
With Readout

Measure up to 40 kV Peak Pulse
Up to 20 kV Dc

The probe can be compensated for instruments with nominal input capacitance of
12 pF to 47 pF and input resistance of 1 MO.

$120

Include.: Retractable hook tip (A1, 013{x)7HlO); ba'

For 1 MU Inputs

OPTIONS
Option 10 Option 25 -

Without freon.
25 It cable.

Ne
$100

CHARACTERISTICS
Input Capacitance

Nominal
Maximum
Cabl.
Leng1II (II) Dc Voltage

Derated
Abo••

Compen..tIon
Range (pF)

Att.nuation

Accuracy

Input
R.slstance

3".11

811

911

Probe
Rise Time

Aberrations

P6007

l00X

10 MIl

2pF

2.2 pF

2.4 pF

14.0 ns

±3

25 MHz

3'/', 6, 9, 12

1.5 kY

200 kHz

2kV@5MHz

15to 55

P6OO9

l00X

10 MIl

2.5 pF

2.9 ns

±3

120 MHz

1.5 kY

200 kHz

JOOY @ 20 MHz

15 to 47

P6015

l000X

Adjustable

tOO MIl

4.0 ns

±5

75 MHz

20.0 kY

100 kHz

2kY@2OMHz

12 to 47

3 pF (10 It only)

Bandwidth

Derated to

e Frequency

Abo •• probes competable with screw-tip ecc...orles shown on pege 488. In.trument competability chart I. on pege 484.

~ To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,

toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99

477

TEK

ISOLATOR

Floating Measurement Techniques
The industries' need for oscilloscope measurements referenced to voltage levels
above/below ground potential has long
been recognized. The need to reject signals represents another closely allied measurement requirement. These needs often
lead users to employ practices which may
distort the waveform measurement or are
unsafe. Tektronix offers three safe techniques to solve these measurement
problems.

Isolation Amplifiers
The Tektronix A6902B is a voltage isolation
amplifier used to connect the circuit under
test and the oscilloscope. Signals are coupled across an insulating barrier to the oscilloscope. The isolator provides complete
insulation from the signal, no access to
dangerous voltages, and complete usability
of all oscilloscope functions.

Differential Techniques
The most popular solution for a floating measurement is the A minus B quasi-differential
technique. Most general-purpose dual-trace
oscilloscopes have an Add Mode in which
two channels can be electrically subtracted,
giving a display of the difference signal. This
technique limits the common-mode dynamic
range and the CMRR to approximately 100:1.
Also, examination of low-level signals in the
presence of high common-mode voltages
can be difficult.
True differential amplifiers like the Tektronix
7 A 13 are designed specifically to have
good rejection of the common-mode Signal
and display only the difference signal.
Common-mode dynamic range is improved
but there are bandwidth and floating capability limitations.
Using both A6902B channels as differential
input to a 7A13, 7A22 or oscilloscope provides an extra measure of common-mode
performance. The isolator probes' common
leads are tied together and the signal leads
are then used as plus and minus differential inputs to test the circuit. This technique
provides the protection of the isolator as
well as the combined CMRR capabilities of
the isolator and amplifier.

Indirect Grounding

A6901
Permits Elevation of Test Instrument
Chassis to 40 V Peak (28 V RMS)
Aids in Circuit Analysis or Circumventing
Ground Loop Noise Problems
UL and VDE Safety Certification
The A6901 is placed between a measurement instrument and its power source and
acts as an indirect grounding device, allowing floating measurements to be made with
operator protection.
The A6901 monitors the voltage on the isolated system. When the voltage exceeds
40 V peak (28 V RMS) the power source to
the instrument is interrupted, the isolated
grounding system is connected to the power source grounding system, and an audible alarm is sounded. Before power is supplied to the measurement instrument, the
A6901 tests the power source for a functional ground·'. If a functional ground is not
established, the ground isolation monitor
will not go into isolated mode.
Applications for the A6901 include elevating a test instrument chassis to logic reference voltages for more accurate logic level
measurements, and isolating a test instrument chassis from common-mode voltages
present on ground systems to eliminate undesirable noise from signal measurements.

CHARACTERISTICS
ELECTRICAL
Trip Voltage (Dc) - 40 V peak (28 V RMS) or +
and -40 V (within 5%).
Trip Current - 0.5 mA, 3.5 mA to 5 mA
selectable.
Neutral-to-Ground Continuity - Between 3 V
and 10 V RMS (8.5 V and 28.3 V pop), SO Hz.
Dc Voltage Trip Delay - <20 ms.
Line Voltage Ranges - 90 V to 128 V RMS,
180 V to 2SO V RMS.
Line Frequency Range - 48 Hz to 66 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption (No External
Load) - 12 W at 115 V, 60 Hz.
Load Power - 500 W maximum.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature - Operating: -15°C to +55°C
(+5°F to + 131°F). Nonoperating: -62°C to
+85 °C (-80°F to + 185°F) . Meets MIL-T288OOB, Class 3.
Altitude - Operating: To 4600 m (15,000 tt).
Nonoperating: To 15000 m (SO,OOO ttl. Exceeds
MIL-T-28800B, Class 3.
Humidity - Exceeds MIL-T-28800B, Class 3.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dlmenalona

Height
Width
Depth

87
206

3.4

8.'

153

6.0

Welghta""
Net (without accessories)

Shipping

kg
1.4
2.3

Ib
3.0
5.0

ORDERING INFORMATION
The Tektronix A6901 Ground Isolation Moni$650
tor is an indirect grounding device which The A6901 also can be used to test power A6901 Ground Isolation Monitor
Includes: Operator manual (070-3618-00).
connects between the power mains and outiets for proper wiring.
INTERNATIONAL POWER PLUG OPTIONS
the test instruments, allowing monitored
., If the A6901 is used in conjunction with a GR (Ground
Option A 1 - Universal Euro 220 V, 50 Hz.
floating measurements. As specified in
Fault Indicator), consult the GR manual for compatibif
Option A2 - UK 240 V, 50 Hz.
safety standards, the grounding circuit to
ity information.
Option A3 - Australian 240 V, 50 Hz.
the test instrument need not be completed
Option AS - Switzerland 220 V, 50 Hz.
(North American 240 V not available. Neutral not grounduntil the available voltage or current exed in 240 V North American Systems.)
ceeds a prescribed amount (40 V peak or
28 V RMS). When this amount is exceeded
the power to the instrument is interrupted,
a protective ground is re-established, and
an audible alarm is sounded. The A6901
also verifies the existance of a functional
ground in the power source.
~ To order, call your local Tektronix Sales Office, or call Tek's National Marketing Center,
~
toll free: 1-800-426-2200, Ext 99. In Oregon call collect: (503) 627-9000, Ext. 99
478

TEK

VOLTAGE ISOLATION
AMPLIFIER

Transient Response - Rise time: 17.5 ns (calculated from bandwidth).
Maximum Working Voltage
Small Probe (500 V) - Probe Center Tip to
Earth Ground: 500 V (dc + peak ac). Probe Center Tip to Probe Common: 500 V (dc + peak ac)
to 3 MHz. See Rgure 2 for voltage derating above
3 MHz. Probe Common to Earth Ground: 500 V
(dc + peak ac) to 6 MHz. See Rgure 2 for voltage derating above 6 MHz.

A6902B

-110

LARGE PROBE (UL)

4000
3000
2000
1500

600 kHz
_
900 kHz

1000
700
III

soo

300

=>
Q.

200

-'
0

....

SMALL PROBE

For 50

n or 1 Mn Inputs

-100

'""-

'!:

'"«w

Channel Isolation - Maximum Voltage: Using two
3,CXXl V UL probes is EmJ V (de + peak ac) UL.
Using two 500 V probes is 1CXXl V (de + peak ac).
Delay - 51 ns ± 3 ns (large probe), 52 ns ± 3 ns
(small probe), from probe input to instrument input. CH 1, CH 2 delay difference is ...;;4 ns.
Common Lead Signal Feedthrough - 106 dB from probe input to output BNC to
500 Hz. See Rgure 3 for derating above 500 Hz.

/ ' 3 MHz

g -90

f-+-

III
Q

.""

100

:J: -80
CI
:::l

'" '"

~ -70

... -60
Q

...""-' -so
z

Two Independently Isolated Channels

:IE
:IE -40

High Voltage/High CMRR

o
U

UL Certified to 3000 V /Channel (6000 V
Maximum Channel Differential)

10
0.1

Dc to 20 MHz Bandwidth

10 1520

-30
10
Hz

100
Hz

1
kHz

FREOUENCY (IN MHZ)

A dual-channel, optical- and transformer-coupled voltage isolator, the A6002B allows safely grounded test instruments to make floating
measurements at high sensitivity levels in the
presence of large common-mode signals.
The A6902B acts as a buffer between the
test instrument and the system under test
and extends the range of the test instrument
to 3(XX) V (dc plus peak ac) with the larger
industrial probe and to 500 V (dc plus peak
ac) with the smaller signal probe. Both

Agure 1. Maximum working voltage between probe input
and probe common (aI/temperatures).

Large Probe - Probe Center Tip to Earth
Ground: UL 3000 V. Probe Center Tip to Probe
Common: UL 3000 V (dc + peak ac) to 450 kHz.
See Rgure 1 for voltage derating above 900 kHz.
Probe Common to Earth Ground: UL 3000 V (dc
+ peak ac) to 250 kHz. See Rgure 2 for voltage
derating above 250 kHz.
LARGE PROBE (UL)
4000
3000

240 kHz

~~~~:~o~~eci~i~~I~r~n~~c~~~g~u~~~t ~~b~~~ ~ ~~~~
are stored in removable side pouches for g 1~~~
availability and convenience.
Designed for use with any dual-channel oscilloscope, the A6902B permits simultaneous
observation of two signals at two different
points in the same circuit; or signals in two
different circuits without respect to common
lead voltages.
The two channels can also be combined to
function as an input to a differential amplifier.
Separate, calibrated controls for volts per
division on each channel provide for precise
floating measurements. The all-plastic case
and external controls protect the user during
control settings and other operations. Other
than probe tip connections, the user is never
in close proximity to hazardous voltages.

CHARACTERISTICS
ELECTRICAL
Deflection Factor Probe Tip Sensitivity:
20 mV/div to 500 V/div in 1-2-5 sequence with oscilloscope set to 10 mV/div. Accuracy: ...;; ± 5% of
indicated V/div switch setting.
Frequency Response - Bandwidth: Dc coupled (to - 3 dB point) is ~20 MHz. Ac coupled
(to lower -3 dB point) is ...;;5 Hz to ~20 MHz.

I
420 kHz

SMALL PROBE

500

300

200

I
440 kHz

-~
sa'c ~
. . ;;,."

620 V al
4.B MHZ
520 V .1
.". 5.B MHZ

6 MHZ

100

.4 .5 .7

3 4 5

"""

10
kHz

100
kHz

1
MHz

10
MHz

100
MHz

FREQUENCY

Agure 3. Common lead feedthrough characteristics.

POWER REQUIREMENTS
Line Voltage Ranges - Low: 90 V to 132 V.
High: 180 V to 250 V.
Line Frequency Range - 48 Hz to 440 Hz.
Maximum Power Consumption - 24 W at
115 V, 60 Hz.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature Operating: O°C to +50°C.
Nonoperating: - 55°C to + 75°C.
Altitude - Operating: To 4500 m (15,000 11).
Nonoperating: To 15000 m (50,000 11).
Humidity (Operating and Nonoperating) Rve cycles (120 hr total) with equipment tested
nonoperating to MIL-STD-81OC Method 507.1, at
90% to 95% relative humidity and 30°C to 50°C.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

1'\

7 1015 20

FREQUENCY (IN MH Z)

Agure 2. Maximum working voltage between probe common and earth ground.

Maximum Input dV/dt - 100 V/ns.
Input Impedance - Resistance: 10 M!2 ±3%.
Capacitance: "" 19 pF with either probe.
Output Impedance - 50 D ± 5%.
p into 1 MD.
Output Drive - 4 V PO
Common-Mode Capacitance - 100 pF from
probe common to earth ground.
Maximum Common to Ground Slew Rate 500 V/JJ,s.
Tangential Noise - ...;;20 mY. Dc Dril1 With
Temperature: ,...10 mV/oC (0.1 div/°C) at output.
Range of Output Dc Level: At least +5 div from
center screen.

Dlm.nalona

Height
Width
Depth

t 36

394

5.4
15.5
13.5

W.tght =

344

Net with Accessories
Shipping

6.2
8.0

Ib
13.7
17.7

ORDERING INFORMATION
A6902B Voltage Isolator

$1,795

Includes: Two 500 V isolation probes (010

One Up-Front Fee Ensures Years of
Low-Cost Performance. Warranty-Plus
offers substantial savings over RRM PRICE
repair and calibrations or comparable support agreements you may purchase later.

WARRANTY-PLUS CONDITIONS
International Warranty-Plus Options.
Warranty-Plus is available in most countries,

I-

()

a::
Cl.

but service is only provided in the country
where the product and plan are purchased .

Maintenance
Purchased In
Year of Ownership

..J
<{

Response and tumaround times may be different than those provided in the United
States. Please consult the Tektronix subsidiary or approved distributor in your country.

a::

0
0

Amortized
Warranty-Plus
Plan M3 Purchased with Product
2

YEAR OF OWN ERSHIP

M Options are only available at the time of product purchase. Specify Option Ml, M2, M3,
M4, or M5 when ordering.

For 2000 Series Portable OSCilloscopes, Specific Spectrum Analyzers, and instrumentation products

Warranty

Optional
WarrantyPlus
Service

2
Warranty
Coverage

3
Warranty
Coverage

1
Calibration

Remedial
Coverage

1
Calibration

Option
Ml

1
Calibration

Option
M2

Option
M3

1
Calibration

Remedial
Coverage
Option
M4

Option
M5

A'"

More Uptime, too. Proper care and factory approved repairs improve overall reliability and
performance. And since service is prepaid, there is no waiting to process P.O.s or obtain
approvals for unplanned expense. None are needed. Just call.

Warranty
Coverage

()

Its long-term coverage fixes your costs
now, protecting your budget from service
price increases for the duration of the plan
you choose.

Year of Ownership

~RRANTY

1
2
2
Calibration Calibrations Calibrations
with
with
with
Certification Certification Certification

Remedial
Coverage

1
2
2
2
2
Calibration Calibrations Calibrations Calibrations Calibrations
with
with
with
with
with
Certification Certification Certification Certification Certification

Remedial
Coverage

Response and Turnaround Times. In
the United States, Warranty-Plus S Option
Customer-site service is performed during
normal business hours at the customer's
site with no travel charges and within eight
work-hours of notification, if the site is within 75 miles of a Tektronix Service Center. If
not, response may be longer.
Warranty-Plus M Option Service Center
Support is priority service performed at
designated Tektronix Service Centers with
tumaround completed within five days of receipt of product.

Customer Responsibilities. With
Customer-site S Options, an end-user contact name, phone, and location must be designated at the time of purchase.
With Service Center M Options, it is the
customer's responsibility to deliver the product for servicing to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges
prepaid. Retum shipping is paid by Tektronix.

Coverage Exclusions. Warranty-Plus Service purchased in the United States is only
valid within the United States.
As you may expect, service under a Warranty-Pius Agreement does not apply if the
failure is caused by misuse or inadequate
care or maintenance, such as:
(a) Damage from repair attempts by
non-Tektronix personnel
(b) Improper use or connection to incompatible equipment
(c) Modification or integration that in creases time or difficulty in servicing
your product
Complete descriptions of coverage, terms,
conditions, and prices for all Warranty-Plus
Plans are available from your Tektronix
representative.

497

TEK

TRAINING FOR
SERVICE TECHNICIANS

A WEEK OF TRAINING AT TEK
IS WORTH YEARS OF EXPERIENCE AT THE BENCH
"Practical knowledge Is the shortest
route to higher productivity"
Tektronix Service Training brings experienced technicians up to date on new products, and new technicians up to speed on
practical maintenance. Fast.
Our product specialists and professional
instructors have carefully prepared and
tested each course of study. The very
same courses and materials are used to
train Tektronix Service Technicians and
Specialists.
Training manuals and study guides, audio
and video tapes are structured with exercises to quickly develop skills in logical diagnosis and practical repair techniques.

Formal Classroom Training Is Extensive and Intensive
It includes both lecture and daily hands-on
lab periods for one, two or three weeks.
Under the guidance of Tek Service instructors, participants sharpen their skills in troubleshooting, isolating faults, and repairing
Tek products.
Most importantly, learning the step-by-step
preventive maintenance routines, as approved by Tek Factory Service, will ensure
long product life and maximum uptime to
your users.
A poster schedule is available giving dates,
time and places for classes in the coming
months.

Self-Study Aids Let You Leam at Your
Own Pace
At home or on the job. According to your
schedule.
Our storehouse of service training aids is
full of stimulating self-study tapes and
study manuals, and because each package is interactive, it's almost like having
your own personal instructor. Most packages include evaluation modules.
You can reduce your training cost per technician by building your own library of training tapes and materials, the ones most relevant to your Tek products and technician
skills . Then reuse them to train new
technicians.
You'll find tapes that introduce basic concepts right on up to multimedia packages
for the advanced service engineer or
specialist.

498

MULTIMEDIA TRAINING PACKAGES
Title
Basic Data Communications, Parts I and II
Basic Data Communications, Parts I thru IV
Basic Digital Concepts
Digital Counter and Meter Concepts
GMA 30113021303 Display Monitors Maintenance
401X Series Graphic Terminal Maintenance
463X Series Hard Copy Unit Maintenance
Logic Analyzer Concepts
Oscilloscope Maintenance Concepts
Sampling Concepts
5n/178 Linear IC Test Rxture Operation

Part Number
062-3743-00
062-3257-00
062-3378-00
062-5432-00
062-8422-00
062-6181-00
062-8950-00
062-543(}00
062-3258-00
062-5261-00
062-362&00

Price
$450

925
575

400
350

225
100
400
325
325

275

Call for information:
(BOO) 835-6100 or (503) 642-8842. Classes
are typically full one or two months in advance. Please call us now to register for
class or to request your own copy of the
Tektronix Service Training Catalog which
has complete descriptions and course prerequisites for all classes and tapes. Or write:
Tektronix Service Training
P.O. Box 500, D.S. 54-077
Beaverton, OR 97077
In Europe, call:
Tektronix Europe BV
Site: Planetenweg 99
2130 HL Hoofddorp
Telephone 31 -(2503) 15644

TEK

PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS
GENERAL TERMS OF SALE

CUSTOMER SERVICES
AND INFORMATION

Check the Specifications. You'll Find Long Product Life Designed-In.
Reliability Standards Second to None
Tek products are engineered for high reliability from the initial stages of design.
Components and assembled products of
every prototype and preproduction model
are subjected to 'accelerated-life" reliability
tests in our Labs. If any fall short of Tek
Standards, changes are made.
Manufactured products are thoroughly tested before they're fitted in custom-designed, lab-tested shipping cartons.

Product Specifications to Meet Your
Environment
In Tek's Environmental Labs, field conditions
are taken to extremes. Shock, vibration, high
humidity, electromagnetic radiation, electro-

GENERAL TERMS OF SALE
Credit and Payment Terms
Tektronix, Inc. offers many different terms of sale
in order to meet varied purchasing objectives and
to assist in financial planning.
Credit accommodations must be arranged with
Tektronix's Credit Department. Orders and request for credit accommodations should be
placed with your local Tektronix Sales Office, listed on the inside back cover.
If, in the judgement of Tektronix , the financial condition or payment record of the Buyer at any time
does not justify shipment of order on the payment
terms requested , Tektronix may refuse to ship unless it receives payment in advance, or at its option , payment upon delivery of equipment. Businesses established for six months or less may not
meet minimum requirements for extended and/or
installment terms of sale.
The following terms may be arranged with a Tektronix Sales Office:

Net 30 Days Standard Terms
Standard terms of sale are Net 30 days following
the date of invoice. There are no discounts for
early payment.

60,90 and 120 Days Extended Terms of Sale
Extended terms of 60 to 120 days are available
on the same single payment basis as standard
terms. Since the cost of extended terms is not
included in catalog prices, a service charge is
added to the invoice. The amount of the service
charge depends upon the number of days the
terms are extended. Request for extended terms
must be made at the time of order placement.

Installment Purchases-Security and Lease
Agreements
This program provides monthly installment payment terms while Tektronix Products are in use.
Accessories and parts are not available unless
they are associated with the products being purchased. New and used products may be purchased with a deduction for applicable quantity
discounts.

Security and Lease terms are not invoiced. Reminders of each installment are sent to the customer 10 days prior to the due date. The due date
of each monthly payment on an installment term
will be approximately 30 days from the date of
shipment and every 30 days thereafter until completion of the contracted term . Failure to receive
any reminder notice from Tektronix shall not affect
customer's obligation to pay charges when due.
Except for standard warranty, maintenance is not
provided under either a Security Agreement or a
Lease Agreement. Additional maintenance is not
provided under either a Security Agreement or a
Lease Agreement. Additional maintenance coverage may be purchased where offered as an option to the instrument or may be purchased as a
separate transaction . Maintenance ordered as an
option may be financed along with the product.
The customer is required to pay applicable property taxes, licenses, etc. and furnish adequate insurance to Tektronix for loss and damages for
both Leases and Security Agreements.

Security Agreement
An advance payment equal to approximately 10%
of the purchase price of the equipment desired is
required for a Security Agreement. Installment
terms covering the balance of the contract price
are available for 6, 12, 18, 24, 30, or 36 months.
Minimum balance amounts may be financed,
ranging from $1000 for six months to $2000 for
thirty-six months. Longer terms of 48 months to
60 months are available by quotation for financed
balances of more than $25,000. There are no
maximum finance balances. Upon completion of
the term of the Security Agreement and prescribed payments , the customer owns the
equipment.

Lease Agreement (Minimum is $1,000)
A standard lease term of 6, 12, 18, 24, 30, and 36
months is offered. Longer terms are negotiable. Under a Lease Agreement the customer pays for the

static discharge, power line surge, high/low
temperature and altitude tests are conducted.
The environmental characteristics listed
among the product specifications in this
catalog may include some or all of the
above types. The specification limits for humidity, vibration, shock and transportation
are intended to be beyond what is expected in use. Operation at these extremes
may cause minor phYSical deterioration but
should not cause electrical performance to
deteriorate outside specifications. Continual
use at the specified limits of temperature
and altitude should not cause significant
short-term deterioration. Higher temperature
will reduce long-term reliability. The EMC test
is completely nondestructive.

use of the product for the term of agreement. It is
not a month-to-month rental ... it is a non-cancellable, fixed-term lease requiring no advance payment. At the expiration of the lease there is the
opportunity to update the instruments, to renew
the existing lease, or to retum the equipment at
the expense of Tektronix, Inc. The customer may
exercise an option to purchase the equipment at
any time during the term of the lease, provided he
gives thirty days written notice. A portion of the installments will be credited toward the purchase
price . Not available for Information Display
Products.

Information Display Products
Information Display Computer Graphics Products
are available under 3 expanded Leasing programs. Terms vary from 90 days to 4 years.

Comprehensive Lease - This full service lease
provides 7 features ensuring customer flexibility.
Key features include maintenance, product upgrade, and purchase credits. Basic Lease - Customers can use this program to acquire Information
Display Products at our lowest monthly rates. ~
ership Lease - This even payment plan ensures
title transfer at the lease end. No down payment or
ending balloon payment is required.
In addition to these standard programs, specialized leasing programs answer customer needs in
the areas of new product evaluation, short term
rental, supplying interim products for delayed
items, credit acceptance, and others. Custom
Leases can also be structured, providing a tailored solution for individual customer
requirements.

Minimum Order
The minimum acceptable order is $25.00.

Shipment
All prices, quotations, and shipments are FOB
Beaverton, Oregon, unless otherwise specified.
Unless otherwise specified, shipment will be
made via most economical method and air shipments will be insured at full valuation unless your
order instructs otherwise.

Copyright ® 1986, Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A. Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information
in this publication supersedes that in all previously published material. Specification and price change privileges reserved. TEKTRONIX, TEK, DESlGNLlNK, PLOT
10, TEKTEST, SCOPE-MOBILE, and 8 are registered trademarks. For further information, contact: Tektronix, Inc., Corporate Offices, P.O. Box sao, Beaverton, OR
97077. Phone: (503) 627-7111 ; TLX: 151754; TWX: (910) 467-8700; Gable: TEKWSGT. Subsidiaries and distributors wor1dwide.

499

TEK

WARRANTIES

HARDWARE WARRANTY SUMMARY
vices will be provided for different categories of products or product
Tektronix warrants to its Customers that the products that it manufactures
groups are set forth below.
and sells will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for the
periods set forth in the table below. If any such product proves defective
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by
during the applicable warranty period, Tektronix, at its option, either will
improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care. Tektronix
repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor or will
shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair
provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product.
damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix repreIn order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Teksentatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair damage
resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; or c)
tronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make
to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other prodsuitable arrangements for the performance of service. Tektronix will proucts when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time
vide such service at Customer's site for certain categories of products, as
or difficulty of servicing the product.
indicated in the table below, if Customer's site is within the normal on-site
service area. Tektronix will provide on-site service outside the normal onTHIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THE USTED
site service area only upon prior agreement and subject to payment of all
PRODUCTS IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED.
travel expenses by Customer. In all other cases, Customer shall be responTEKTRONIX DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIUTY
sible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service cenOR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX' RESPONSIBIUTY TO
ter designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges prepaid. Tektronix shall
REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE
pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a
REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY.
location within the country in which the service center is located. Customer
TEKTRONIX WIU NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL
shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties and taxes, if the
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX
product is returned to any other location. The locations at which the serHAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
PRODUCT CATEGORIES
Oscilloscopes (except 2200, 23X), 2400 Series) and Plug-Ins; 1M 500fTM 5CXXl Series;
Communications Network Analyzers (except 834 Series, 835 & 836); Logic Analyzers
(except 9200 Series); Spectrum Analyzers (except 494 and 494P); Television Products
(except 1900 and 650 and fro Series); Waveform Digitizers; Curve Tracers;
PhotometersiRadiometers; Cameras; Carts; Probes; CRTs; Isolators;
Computer Graphics Products: 41ro-t Series, ~1 ; Test System Interface Family
Oscilloscopes: 2200, 23X), 2400 Series; Spectrum Analyzers: 494 and 494P; Mon~ors:
650 and fro Series; Communications Network Analyzers: 834 Series, 835, 836
and W-098&OO

WARRANTY PERIOD
1 year from date of shipment

SERVICE LOCATION
SeMce Center designated
by Tektronix

3 years from date of shipment

SeMce Center designated
by Tektronix

SeMce Center designated

Monitors: 0068, En\, 620, 634

3 months, except 1 year from date
of shipment fOf CRT

Computer Graphics Products (except 4100-i Series, ~1 and those listed below);
Intelligent Graphics Workstations; Mon~ors: GMA 201 ; 1900; 4041 Controller;
Computer Aided Software Engineering Products (except V-Systems, MI/ Systems);
ArtifICial Intelligence Systems

3 months, except 1 year from date
of shipment fOf CRT

Computer Graphics Products: 4104A, 4105A, 4100A, 4107A, 4100A, 4205,
4207, 4al!

1 year from date of shipment

Custom Test Systems; SemiconductOf Test Systems; Computer Aided
Software Engineering Products: V-Systems, MI/ Systems; Logic Analyzers:
9200 Series; Delta Series
Parts, Assemblies, Supplies and Test Rxtures: All 9-dig~ part numbered
items except Probes, eRTs, and W-098&OO

3 months, except 1 year fOf CRT, beginning on
the date of installation by Tektronix, Of one
month from date of shipment, whichever is eartier
3 months from date of shipment

SeMce Center designated

Service

3 months from date of shipment Of date
of completion ij perfOfmed on-site

Location where original
seMce was perfOfmed

by Tektronix
Customer's site ij within
normal on-site seMce area

Customer's site ij within
normal on-site seMce area
Customer's site ij within
normal on-site seMce area

by Tektronix

SOFTWARE WARRANTY SUMMARY
such notice, to provide the remedial services specified in the applicable SoftTektronix warrants that any software product for which Tektronix publishes a
ware Product Description, when such services are indicated, or provide a
corresponding ' Software Product Description' will conform to the specificareplacement that is free from defects in materials and worlkmanship, Customtions set forth in the Software Product Description, when used property in the
er may terminate the license for the software product and retum the software
specified operating environment, for a period of three (3) months. The warranproduct and any associated materials to Tektronix for credit or refund.
ty period begins on the date of shipment, except that if the program is installed by Tektronix, the warranty period begins on the date of installation or
This warranty shall not apply to any software product that has been modified
one month after the date of shipment, whichever is earlier. If any such softor altered by Customer. Tektronix shall not be obligated to fumish service
ware product does not conform as warranted, Tektronix will provide the remeunder this warranty with respect to any software product a) that is used in an
dial services specified in the applicable Software Product Descriptions. Tekoperating environment other than that specified or in a manner inconsistent
tronix does not warrant that the functions contained in the software product
with the User's Manual and documentation or b) when the software product
will meet Customer's requirements or that operation of the programs will be
has been integrated with other software if the result of such integration inuninterrupted or error-free or that all errors will be corrected. Software prodcreases the time or difficulty of analyzing or servicing the software product or
ucts for which Tektronix does not publish a Software Product Description, or
the problems ascribed to the software product.
for which Tektronix does not set forth specifications in the Software Product
THIS
WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THE USTED
Description, are provided 'as is' without warranty of any kind, either express
PRODUCTS IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPUED.
or implied; except that, Tektronix warrants that the media on which such
TEKTRONIX DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
software products are provided will be free from defects in materials and
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX' RESPONSIBIUTY TO
workmanship for a period of three (3) months from the date of shipment. If
PROVIDE REMEDIAL SERVICE WHEN SPECIFIED, REPLACE DEFECTIVE MEany such medium proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix will
DIA, OR REFUND CUSTOMER'S PAYMENT IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMprovide a replacement in exchange for the defective medium.
EDY PROVIDED TO CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKIn order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix
TRONIX WIU NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX HAS
arrangements for such service in accordance with the instructions received
ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBIUTY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
from Tektronix. If Tektronix is unable, within a reasonable time after receipt of
For further details regarding OEM or specific hardware or software warranties, pleasa consult your local Sales OIIlce_

500

TEK

OEM COMPONENTS
POWER SOURCES

OEM COMPONENTS
Special Information for OEM
At Tektronix we offer many products with
terms, conditions, and pricing for OEMs.
Computer graphics components , small
screen displays, certain cameras, tv signal
test and measurement instrumentation-we
offer these and other products on a special
basis to the original equipment manufacturer.

But terms and conditions tell only part of
the Tektronix OEM story. Our products
have the quality, reliability, and top performance per dollar that the OEM needs to
stay competitive .
Choose the Performance Level
to Match Your System
In many product areas our wide range of
OEM components allows you to select just
the optimal performance you need for the

POWER SOURCE CONSIDERATIONS

Most Tektronix instruments provide widerange regulated supplies, or quick change
line-voltage selectors for convenient selection of line-voltage operating ranges. Transformer taps in other instruments can be
changed to accommodate specific line-voltage operating ranges or can be factory
wired for a specific range if specified on
the purchase order.
Many Tektronix instruments are designed
to operate from a power source that will
not apply more than 250 Volts RMS between the supply conductors or between
either supply conductor and ground.

Stenderd
North Americen
120 V Plug

Option A1
Unlv....1Euro
220 V Plug

system you are building. When your systems demand highest performance ,
Tektronix will provide the quality products
to meet your standards.

If you need applications assistance, we're
ready to help. Our OEM specialists are
trained to help solve interface problems.
That's solid support when you need it.

In price-sensitive situations , the wide
Tektronix selection usually lets you select
exactly the performance level you
need-no more, no less.

You and Tektronix:
A Quality Partnership
Explore the advantages of working with
Tektronix: excellence in products, support,
and service.

Special OEM Terms and Pricing
Help Keep You Competitive
Ask your local Tektronix representative
about the special OEM terms and pricing
available to you.

Your local Tektronix representative can
help you obtain full details on how you can
profit from a quality partnership with
Tektronix.

Service and SupportWhen and Where You Need It
Tektronix has service centers throughout
the U.S. and in many countries around the
world. We offer long term parts support to
protect your investment.

See how our OEM expertise can add value
to your system.

Many Tektronix instruments can be fitted
with one of the power cord/plug options
listed below and wired for the voltage as
indicated , if specified on the purchase
order.
North American
120 V
Standard
Universal Euro
220 V
Option A1
United Kingdom
240 V
Option A2
Australian
240 V
Option A3
North American
240 V
Option A4
Switzerland
220 V
Option A5
The power cord/plug options may become
available on instruments not specified in
this catalog. Refer to the individual product
ordering information for those products offering these options as of publication date.

Except for some double-insulated instruments , most Tektronix instruments are
equipped with either a three-conductor attached power cord or a three-terminal power-cord receptacle. The third wire or terminal is connected directly to the instrument
chassis to protect operating personnel.

Option A2

UK
240 V Plug

Option A3
Au .... n.n
240 V Plug

Power-cord coding follows
following schemes:
Scheme 1
Line
Black
Neutral
White
Ground
Green-yellow
(safety earth)

Option A4
North Americ.n
240 V Plug

one of the two
Scheme 2
Brown
Light blue
Green-yellow

Option AS
Swltz.rI.nd
220 V Plug

501

TEK

WORLDWIDE SALES AND
SERVICE OFFICES

Acfelelcle OffIce

For customers outside listed
countries, contact your nearest
area office:

128 Gilles Street
Adelaide, South Australia 5IXXl
Phone: 61 (8) 223-2811

ASia, Pacific Rim, Central &
South America

Canbe... OffIce
CNR, Cohen & Jolly Sts.
Belconnen

Tektronix, Inc., Americas
Pacific U.S. Export Sales

Canberra 2617
Austr. Capital Terr. 2006
Phone: 61 (62) 51-6111

p.o . Bo. 500, MS 73-323
Beeverton, 0Ng0n 97077
U.S.A.
Phone: (503) 627-191516332 ()(
(!nI) 547-1165
Tele.: 4742110 TEKEXP

Africa, Middle East and
Western Europe
Tektronix Limited
p.o . Box 36
Ouem. .y, Channel Islands
Phone: 44 (481) 711211
Telex: (851) 4191193 TEKGNY G

Melbourne OffIce

CNR, Russell and Council Sts.,
Hawthorn East,
MeIbourne,VlCtoria 3123
Phone: 61 (3) 836-3355
Tele.: (790) 35!8) TEKMEL AA

PerIh OffIce
66 Walington Street
East Perth, West Australia &XX!
Perth
Phone: 61 (9) 325-8433
Brtabene OffIce
737 Logan Road
GreensJopes Brisbane 4120
Queensland

Eastern Europe
Tektronix Ges.m.b.H
Doerenkampgasse 7
A-ll00 Viema
Austria
Phone: 43 (222) 6!Hi6-{)2
Tele.: (847) 111481 TEK A

ALGERIA
Product Infonnetlon

Tektronix, Bureau de LlalsonAlgerie
Bureau NS, Niveau C
Hotel EI·Aurassi
BD Frantz·Fanon
Alger
Phone: 213 () 648252, Ext-665
Telex: 67043 TEK OZ
Service

Entreprlse Natlonale Des
Industries Electronlques
Unite de Maintenance et Calibration
des Equipements Electroniques
MCE 1, BP121
Route de Mascara - Zone Industrielle
Sidi BeI·Abbes
Phone: 213 () 242269
Tele.: 10021 MCEI OZ
MCE2
Lotissement EHdrissi
Alger
Phone: 213 782074(782076
Tele.: 661re DELNA 02
Sele. Offlc.

Tektronix Limited
p.o . Bo. 36
Guemsey, Channel Islands
Phone: 44 (481), 711211
Telex: (851) 4191193 TEKGNYG

ARGENTINA
Coasln S.A.
Bueno. AI.... OffIce
Virrey del Pino 4071
1430 Buenos Aires
Phone: 54 (1) 551 - 31851524813485;
551-9361
Tele.: (390) 0122284 COASN AR
Cordoba Office
25 de Mayo No. 19:1)
CO
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.3
Linearized : No
XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37
Create Date : 2013:09:21 08:39:44-08:00
Modify Date : 2013:09:21 21:12:38-07:00
Metadata Date : 2013:09:21 21:12:38-07:00
Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.55 Paper Capture Plug-in
Format : application/pdf
Document ID : uuid:34d6bf03-0b19-5243-ab8a-195c4a54a246
Instance ID : uuid:0a26506f-8d55-1941-926d-7f685dfc2e08
Page Layout : SinglePage
Page Mode : UseNone
Page Count : 508

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Tektronix_Catalog_1987 Tektronix Catalog 1987

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation